project manual - himmelman construction

___________________________________________________________________________________

PROJECT MANUAL • • • • • • • • • •

VOLUME 2 OF 2

SCHOOL DISTRICT NO. 1 IN THE CITY AND COUNTY OF DENVER AND STATE OF COLORADO

PROJECT: Florence Crittenton H.S. Renovations Parcels A, B, & C LOCATIONS: Project #

Florence Crittenton Renovation Parcel A PP2187 Florence Crittenton Renovation Parcel B PP2187 Florence Crittenton Renovation Parcel C PP2187 BID #: 14-MC-2187 DATE: July 8, 2014

Architect

OZ Architecture 3003 Larimer St.

Denver, CO 80205

Denver Public Schools Construction Services / Strategic Sourcing

1617 S. Acoma St. Denver, Colorado 80223

14-MC-2187

SEALS PAGES FLORENCE CRITTENTON DENVER, COLORADO 80223 ARCHITECT-OF-RECORD'S SEAL I hereby certify that these project specifications were prepared by me or

under my direct supervision and responsible charge: Printed Name Signature STRUCTURAL ENGINEER-OF-RECORD'S SEAL I hereby certify that the following portions of these project specifications

were prepared by me or under my direct supervision and responsible charge:

Divisions and individual sections covered by this seal: Division 03 – Concrete Division 04 – Masonry Section 05 05 19 – Post-Installed Concrete Anchors Section 05 05 23 – Metal Fastenings Section 05 12 13 – Structural Steel Framing Section 05 21 00 – Steel Joist Framing Section 05 31 00 – Steel Decking Section 05 40 00 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing Section 31 66 15 – Helical Foundation Piles Printed Name Signature

DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS Florence Crittenton SEALS PAGES OZ Architecture Project No. 113266.00 00 01 07 - 1

MECHANICAL ENGINEER-OF-RECORD'S SEAL I hereby certify that the following portions of these project specifications


Divisions and individual sections covered by this seal: Division 21 – Fire Suppression Division 22 – Plumbing Division 23 – Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Printed Name Signature ELECTRICAL ENGINEER-OF-RECORD'S SEAL I hereby certify that the following portions of these project specifications


Divisions and individual sections covered by this seal: Division 26 – Electrical Division 27 – Communications Division 28 – Electronic Safety and Security Printed Name Signature


CIVIL ENGINEER-OF-RECORD'S SEAL I hereby certify that the following portions of these project specifications


Divisions and individual sections covered by this seal: Section 31 00 00 – Earthwork Section 32 12 00 – Flexible Paving Section 32 13 00 – Rigid Paving Section 33 11 00 – Water Utilities Section 33 30 00 – Sanitary Sewerage Utilities Section 33 40 00 – Storm Drainage Utilities Printed Name Signature LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT-OF-RECORD’S SEAL I hereby certify that the following portions of these project specifications


Divisions and individual sections covered by this seal: Section 10 75 00 – Flagpole Section 11 68 13 – Play Equipment Section 12 93 00 – Site Furnishings Section 32 01 90.33 – Protection/Repair of Existing Trees Section 32 15 40 – Crusher Fines Section 32 31 13 – Chain Link Fences Section 32 32 19 – Unit Masonry Retaining Walls Section 32 84 00 – Underground Sprinkler System Section 32 91 00 – Landscape Maintenance Section 32 91 13 – Fine Grading and Soil Preparation Section 32 92 23 – Sodding Section 32 93 00 – Trees, Shrubs, and Ground Covers Printed Name Signature

END OF SEALS PAGES


PROJECT DIRECTORY FLORENCE CRITTENTON 55 SOUTH ZUNI STREET DENVER, COLORADO 80223

Denver Public Schools Owner Department of Facilities Management 1617 South Acoma Street Denver, Colorado 80223 Tel: 720.423.1928 Contact: Tonia Toca – [email protected]

Florence Crittenton Services Owner 96 South Zuni Street Denver, Colorado 80223 Tel: 303.321.6363 Contact: Suzanne Banning, CEO

OZ Architecture Architect 3003 Larimer Street Denver, Colorado 80205 Tel: 303.861.5704 Fax: 303.861.9230 Contacts: Kelly Yamasaki – [email protected]

JVA, Incorporated Structural Engineer 1319 Spruce Street Boulder, Colorado 80302 Tel: 303.444.1951 Fax: 303.444.1957 Contact: Mark Cormier – [email protected]

The Ballard Group, Inc. Plumbing Engineer 2525 South Wadsworth Boulevard, Suite 200 Lakewood, Colorado 80227 Tel: 303.988.4514 Contact: Frank Gonzalez - [email protected]

The Ballard Group, Inc. Mechanical Engineer 2525 South Wadsworth Boulevard, Suite 200 Lakewood, Colorado 80227 Tel: 303.988.4514 Contact: Tim Babb - [email protected]

DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS Florence Crittenton PROJECT DIRECTORY OZ Architecture Project No. 113266.00 00 01 08 - 1

mailto:[email protected]

mailto:kyamasaki@ozarch



MEP Engineering, Inc. Electrical Engineer 6402 South Troy Circle, Suite 100 Centennial, Colorado 80111 Tel: 303.936.1633 Fax: 303.934.3299 Contact: Ken Griepentrog - [email protected]

JVA, Incorporated Civil Engineer 1319 Spruce Street Boulder, Colorado 80302 Tel: 303.444.1951 Fax: 303.444.1957 Contact: Darren Stewart - [email protected]

Design Concepts Landscape Architect 211 North Public Road, Suite 200 Lafayette, Colorado 80026 Tel: 303.664.5301 Contact: Bill Gotthelf – [email protected]

3PM Design Food Service Designer 11801 East 33rd Street, Unit C Aurora, Colorado 80010 Tel: 303.840.0883 Contact: David George – [email protected]

Specifications Consultants, Inc. Specifications Consultant PO Box 3010 Colorado Springs, Colorado 80934 Tel: 719.577.9414 Fax: 719.623.0172 Contact: Paul DeArment - [email protected]

END OF PROJECT DIRECTORY

DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS Florence Crittenton PROJECT DIRECTORY OZ Architecture Project No. 113266.00 00 01 08 - 2





100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS July 8, 2014

DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS FLORENCE CRITTENTON 55 SOUTH ZUNI STREET

DENVER, COLORADO 80211

PROJECT MANUAL JULY 8, 2014

TABLE OF CONTENTS

VOLUME 2 OF 2

SPECIFICATIONS GROUP

FACILITY SERVICES SUBGROUP:

DIVISION 20 - Not Used

DIVISION 21 FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 00 00 Fire Protection 1-9

DIVISION 22 PLUMBING 22 00 00 General Plumbing Requirements 1-10 22 00 10 Plumbing Related Work 1-6 22 05 00 Pipe, Valves and Pipe Specialties 1-16 22 05 53 Plumbing Identification 1-5 22 07 00 Plumbing Insulation 1-3 22 20 00 Plumbing Systems 1-14

DIVISION 23 HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) 23 00 00 General Mechanical Requirements 1-11 23 00 10 Mechanical Related Work 1-8 23 05 00 HVAC Pipe, Valves and Pipe Specialties 1-21 23 05 48 HVAC Vibration Control 1-3 23 05 53 Mechanical Identification 1-5 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting, And Balancing 1-7 23 07 00 Mechanical Insulation 1-7 23 09 23 Temperature Control Systems – DDC 1-34 23 09 30 Integrated Building Automation System (IBAS) 1-6 23 21 00 HVAC Hydronic Systems 1-11 23 23 00 Refrigerant Piping Systems 1-4 23 30 00 Air Distribution 1-17 23 52 00 Heat Generation 1-5 23 73 00 Mechanical Rooftop Units 1-7


DIVISION 25 INTEGRATED AUTOMATION - Not Used See Section 23 09 30

DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL 26 01 00 Basic Electrical Requirements 1-15 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical 1-13

DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS Florence Crittenton VOLUME 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS OZ Architecture Project No. 113266.00 00 01 12 - 1

100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS July 8, 2014 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 1-4 26 09 23 Occupancy Sensor Lighting Controls 1-8 26 09 23.2 Lighting Control System – Digital Relay Panels 1-10 26 24 13 Switchboards 1-2 26 24 16 Panelboards 1-3 26 24 19.40 Motor Starters and Controls 1-5 26 27 13 Electricity Metering 1-4 26 27 26 Wiring Devices 1-4 26 28 00 Low Voltage Circuit Protective Devices 1-3 26 43 13 Surge Protection Devices (SPD’s) 1-4 26 51 00 Lighting 1-7

DIVISION 27 COMMUNICATIONS 27 05 28 Pathways for Communications Systems 1-2 27 51 13 Paging Systems 1-5 27 53 13 Clock System (Wireless) 1-4

DIVISION 28 ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 28 31 00 Fire Detection and Alarm (Addressable) 1-18


SITE AND INFRASTRUCTURE SUBGROUP:

DIVISIONS 30 TO 39 - Not Used


DIVISION 31 EARTHWORK 31 00 00 Earthwork 1-15 31 66 15 Helical Foundation Piles 1-5

DIVISION 32 EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 01 90.33 Protection/Repair of Existing Trees 1-2 32 12 00 Flexible Paving 1-11 32 13 00 Rigid Paving 1-10 32 15 40 Crusher Fines 1-3 32 31 13 Chain Link Fences 1-5 32 32 19 Unit Masonry Retaining Walls 1-2 32 84 00 Underground Sprinkler System 1-13 32 91 00 Landscape Maintenance 1-4 32 91 13 Fine Grading and Soil Preparation 1-5 32 92 23 Sodding 1-3 32 93 00 Trees, Shrubs, and Ground Covers 1-6

DIVISION 33 UTILITIES 33 11 00 Water Distribution System 1-8 33 30 00 Sanitary Sewerage Utilities 1-9 33 40 00 Storm Drainage Utilities 1-10 33 46 00 Subdrainage 1-4

DIVISION 34 TRANSPORTATION - Not Used

DIVISION 35 WATERWAY AND MARINE CONSTRUCTION - Not Used


100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS July 8, 2014 DIVISIONS 36 TO 39 - Not Used

PROCESS EQUIPMENT SUBGROUP:

DIVISIONS 40 TO 49 - Not Used

APPENDICES

Geotechnical Engineering Study

END OF VOLUME 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS


June 25, 2014 FOR CONSTRUCTION

DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS Florence Crittenton FIRE PROTECTION OZ Architecture Project No. 113266.00 Section 21 00 00 - 1

SECTION 21 00 00

FIRE PROTECTION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Refer to Division 22, Section 22 05 00: Pipes, Valves and Piping Specialties.

C. This is a general requirement specification. Refer to DPS Standards Section 15300 for additional requirements.

1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Furnish and install a complete automatic fire sprinkler system for the entire building. The work shall include but not be limited to the following items: 1. System Design Requirements. 2. Sprinkler System. 3. Fire Department Connections. 4. Cabinets. 5. Inspectors Test And Drain Assembly.

B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Finish painting, including pipe stenciling. 2. Electrical wiring, except as noted. 3. Excavation and backfilling. 4. Concrete and reinforcing for foundations. 5. Fire extinguishers. 6. Freezing protection heating cable. 7. Access ladders to control valves. 8. Access doors. 9. Bonding Requirements. Refer to Division 01.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Contractor's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in the design and installation of fire protection systems, of types, materials, and sizes required, which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. 1. The design of the fire protection systems including hydraulic calculations shall be stamped

and signed by a registered P.E. or a NICET level IV or higher. Said professionals shall be experienced in fire protection, thoroughly familiar with and experienced in this type of installation.

2. The owner’s representative, Engineer, and AHJ reserve the right to request proof of qualifications.

3. No design related work shall be subcontracted or performed by persons other than bona fide employees working solely for the contractor. Any exception shall be pre-approved by the owner, in writing.

4. The entire fire protection system project including design, calculation, installation and testing, excluding prefabrication, shall be bid by a single firm which has the capabilities to perform all of the work required under this standard. No installation work shall be subcontracted without prior permission in writing from the Owner/Architect/Engineer.

5. Shall have an emergency service capability for response to emergency conditions.



6. Shall have an established office within one hundred (100) miles of the project which maintains a full complement of spare parts, tools and equipment for the specific project and type of system.

7. Welders shall comply with the requirements of AWS D10.9, “Specifications of Qualifications of Welding Procedures and Welders for Piping and Tubing, Level AR-3.”

8. Job foremen shall be trained for the installation and operation of each type of system and possess documentation of qualifications and training. Foremen shall have a minimum of three (3) years of successful installation experience on projects with fire protection systems similar in scope and nature to that required for the project.

B. Codes and Standards: 1. NFPA Compliance: Install fire protection systems in accordance with NFPA as applicable. 2. UL Compliance: Provide fire protection products in accordance with UL standards; provide

UL label on each product. 3. Fire Department/Marshal Compliance: Install fire protection systems in accordance with local

regulations of fire department or fire marshal. 4. Screw Thread Connections: Comply with local Fire Department/Marshal regulations for

sizes, threading and arrangement of connections for fire department equipment to standpipe system.

1.04 SYSTEM DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Verify requirements with Jurisdictional authorities, i.e.: Insurance Co. or Underwriter, Fire Department or Marshal, or Building Departments. Provide system complete, functional and acceptable to Jurisdictions without penalty of any type to the insurance premium rate.

B. System shall be installed hydraulically calculated per NFPA #13.

C. System shall be designed to provide sprinkler heads at ¼ points in 2'x4' lay-in ceiling tiles in a uniform pattern, centered in 2' direction, ¼ points in 4' direction. All heads shall be centered in 2'x2' lay in ceiling tiles.

D. All calculations shall include flow test results. Flow tests shall be performed by this Contractor and verified by the Fire Department, Architect, and Engineer. Prior flow tests on file with jurisdictional agencies may be used in lieu of new flow tests only when previous test has been made within 3 months of project start date.

E. Contractor shall use 85% of flow test pressure data as the base in performance of the Project Calculations.

F. Six Copies of Hydraulic Calculations and Drawings shall be submitted for review. Drawings shall show hydraulic reference points, hydraulically most remote areas clearly shown, and proof by example that area shown is in fact the hydraulically most remote.

G. Area and densities shall conform to NFPA #13 or jurisdictional authorities requirements.

H. Include all lines as center to center of fittings, not cut lengths, include all fittings.

I. Sprinkler system shall be calculated from the flow test elevation to the highest sprinkler head.

J. Provide all trim and accessories, inlets, alarms, switches, and valves required.

K. Provide bracing, restraining, thrust blocks, rods, anchors, cathodic protection, and plastic pipe wrap as required.

L. Water supply flow test(s) shall be conducted in strict accordance with NFPA #13 and NFPA #291.



M. Hydraulic calculation submittals shall clearly define and annotate all devices which will cause friction loss with equivalent lengths of pipe. This includes vane type electric water flow switches (assume 10 feet of equivalent length of pipe).

N. The Fire Contractor shall coordinate that all piping and fire sprinkler heads are located within a heated space with the HVAC Contractor and HVAC Drawings. Provide necessary dry type systems and heads or glycol in all non-heated spaces.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit product data for the following items: 1. Pipe, fittings, hangers, attachments devices, and valves. 2. Sprinkler heads and escutcheons. 3. Specialty valves and devices. 4. Alarms and connecting devices. 5. Flow switches. 6. Siamese fire department connections. 7. Inspections Test And Drain Assembly. 8. Fire Flow Test Results.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for the following items: 1. Engineered fabrication drawings showing main and line elevations, sizes, and routing. 2. Drawings showing lights, registers, grilles, diffusers, heat detection devices, ceiling grids,

beams, joists, trusses and other items of possible interference with proper function or routing of the system and component devices such as access panels, clerestories, display structures, skylights, atriums, etc.

3. Hydronic calculations prepared in a form with appropriate information as required and acceptable to all reviewing and jurisdictional agencies. Include certified flow test data with calculations.

4. All drawings and calculations shall be reviewed and accepted by the jurisdictional fire department, building department, fire marshal, and the insurance carrier or insurance reviewing authority prior to submitting to the Architect. Indication of review and acceptance by all agencies, as appropriate, shall be certified by name of reviewer, agency, and date affixed to the plans or reproducibles submitted to the Architect.

5. Alarms, devices, monitors and all electrical wiring diagrams 6. Partial submittals shall not be acceptable. 7. Equipment submittals shall contain annotated descriptive data to show the specific model,

type and size of each item the Contractor proposes to furnish. Catalog cut sheets shall be submitted in a suitable folder or binder and indexed referencing the applicable specification sections. Unclear or partial reproductions of manufacturer’s original catalog cuts or descriptive data shall not be accepted. Each item supplied shall be clearly identified on each sheet. Where the submittal material describes items, in addition to the items being submitted, the additional items shall be crossed out and the submittal item shall be identified. Submit proof of compatibility for equipment components required to be approved as a system.

8. Review by the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor from full compliance with requirements of the contract documents, codes, and standards.

9. Submit detailed shop drawings including a riser diagram, stamped and signed hydraulic calculations, equipment data sheet submittals and employee certification in accordance with NFPA #13.

10. Submit anchoring details and calculations.

C. Certificate of Installation: Submit certificate upon completion of fire protection piping work which indicates that work has been tested in accordance with NFPA 13 and that system is operational, complete, and has no defects.



D. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed fire protection piping and products in accordance with requirements of Division 01.

E. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for fire protection materials and products. Include this data, product data, shop drawings, approval drawings, approval calculations, certificate of installation, and record drawings in maintenance manual in accordance with requirements of Division 01.

1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Contractor shall not fabricate or install any piping until they have assured themselves that the piping can be run as contemplated in cooperation with Contractors of other Divisions of the Work and the physical constraints of the Structural and Architectural Work.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Provide original copies of all warranties and extended warranties for specific equipment where specified and in accordance with Section 23 00 00.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS

A. General: Provide piping materials and factory-fabricated piping products of sizes, types, pressure ratings, temperature ratings, and capacities as indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide sizes and types matching piping and equipment connections; provide fittings of materials which match pipe materials used in fire protection systems. Where more than one type of materials or products are indicated, selection is Installer's option.

2.02 BASIC IDENTIFICATION

A. General: Provide identification complying with Division-22, Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods section "Mechanical Identification" in accordance with the following listing: 1. Fire Protection Piping: Pipe markers. 2. Fire Protection Valves: Valve tags. 3. Fire Protection Signs: Provide the following signs:

a. At each sprinkler valve, sign indicating what portion of system valve controls. b. At each outside alarm device, sign indicating what authority to call if device is activated.

2.03 BASIC PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS

A. General: Provide pipes and pipe fittings in accordance with the following:

B. Underground Piping: 1. General:

a. Pipe: Cast iron, 250 psi or ductile iron Class II, 250 psi, AWWA C151. b. Fittings: Cast iron and ductile iron pipe fittings shall correspond to pipe in material,

Class and ASTM designation. c. Joints: Mechanical joint type, complete with set screw retaining glands.

2. Schedule:

PIPE SIZE (INCHES)

TYPE CAST IRON

MAXIMUM BURY (FEET)

WALL THICKNESS (INCHES)

4 thru 8 18/40 16 0.32 thru 0.44



a. Where services are buried more than 16 feet, consult pipe manufacturer for type of cast iron and wall thickness.

3. Rotatable Fittings: a. Provide for all service risers and valves, MJ x PE or rotatable MJ gland tees and

connecting pieces to provide plumb and true valve and service riser settings. 4. Thrust Blocks - Tie Rods:

a. Provide 3000 lb. type II concrete thrust blocks with soil contact area based on not more than 2000 psf horizontal soil bearing quality, and enveloping 1/2 of pipe, fitting, or valve. Provide saddle reinforcing as required.

b. Provide 1/2" minimum machine thread rods and clamps on all service entries from last joint underground to riser elbow or wall entry and to first joint in the building. All rods, clamps, and bolts double coated with "ZRC" brand cold galvanizing coating after installation and draw up. Provide 1 coat of coal tar coating over galvanizing. NOTE: Clamps and rods do not preclude the requirements for thrust blocks.

c. Provide 8 mil thick minimum polyethylene pipe encasement sleeve, overlap at joints and seal joint with 2" wide minimum polyethylene tape triple wrapped and extending at least 6" both ways beyond joint seam or provide machine wrapped Scotchwrap #51 PVC tape with 50% overlap wrap on pipe primed with Scotchwrap primer. Double wrap all fittings to 6" beyond fitting onto pipe. Provide primer on fittings, bolts, and nuts prior to wrapping.

C. Interior Piping: 1. Interior and Exterior Above-ground Piping:

a. Pipe and Joints: 1) Black steel threaded, welded or roll grooved schedule 40 conforming to ASTM A-

53. Provide galvanized steel piping and fittings on all dry pipe sytems. Light wall conforming to ASTM A-795 equal to Dyna Thread, or replacement Schedule 10 equal to American Tube Dyna-Flow ASTM-795. All threaded piping shall meet a threaded CRR equal to 1.00 or better, 300 psi max. system pressures. All pipe shall conform to NFPA #13, Chapter 3 and shall be UL/FM approved.

b. Fittings: 1) Threaded cast iron 175 psi minimum and in accordance with developed system

pressures, conforming to ANSI B16.4. Threaded malleable iron 175 psi minimum and in accordance with developed system pressures, conforming to ANSI B16.3.

2) Weld type fittings (schedule 40 pipe only): Buttweld conforming to ANSI B16.9. Flanges conforming to ANSI B16.25. Socket weld conforming to ANSI B16.11. All welds by certified welder in accordance with Section 22 05 00.

3) Grooved fittings shall conform to ASTM-A47 (malleable), ASTM 536 (ductile), or ASTM-106 GRB (forged steel), ASTM A-53 type E, F, or S GRB (nipples), ANSI B-16.5 or B16.1 cast iron and carbon steel flanges.

D. Valves: 1. All valves are to be indicating type. 2. All valves U.L. listed, F.M. approved. 3. Refer to Section 22 05 00 for valve specifications.

E. Hangers: 1. All hangers, attachments and components U.L. listed, F.M. approved. 2. Refer to Section 22 05 00 for specifications and restrictions for hanger systems. Where

specification is more stringent, these requirements will apply. 3. Permission to use anchoring system utilizing powder driven studs must be obtained from the

Structural Engineer prior to submitting pricing or bids.

F. Backflow Preventers: 1. Provide backflow preventer assemblies in fire service as required by local water department. 2. Backflow preventers shall be as required and shall be U.L. and F.M. listed for fire protection

service. O.S.& Y. gate valves shall be furnished as part of each assembly.



3. Provide drain funnels at discharge port of reduced pressure backflow preventers with full size drain piped to floor drain or other approved location if required.

2.04 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES

A. General: Provide fire protection specialties, UL-listed, in accordance with the following listing. Provide sizes and types which mate and match piping and equipment connections.

B. Water Flow and Pressure Switches: 1. Paddle Type Flow Switch, for pipe sizes 2" thru 8", retard adjustment from 0 to 70 seconds

instantly recycling. a. Manufacturer: Notifier b. Model: WFDT with dual contacts

2. Paddle Type Flow Switch for pipe sizes 1", 1-1/4" and 1-1/2", 10 second delay. a. Manufacturer: McDonnell b. Model: FS4-3F with dual contacts

3. Coordinate voltage with Fire Alarm Contractor.

C. Supervisory Switches: 1. Post indicator valve, and gear operator type:

a. Manufacturer: Notifier b. Model: NIP

2. Gate, OS&Y, and other exposed rising stem type valves: a. Manufacturer: Notifier b. Model: NGV or SGV

3. Coordinate voltage with Fire Alarm Contractor.

D. Alarms: 1. Exterior Audible and Visual Alarm:

a. Manufacturer: Notifier Wheelock b. Model: Surface c. Unit: 7004T d. Box: WBB

2. Provide with flasher, surface mounting in weather proof enclosure. 3. Coordinate voltage with Fire Alarm Contractor.

E. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Guardian Inc. 2. Notifier Co. 3. Potter Signal, Inc. 4. Simplex Co. 5. System Sensor.

2.05 AUTOMATIC SPRINKLERS

A. General: Provide automatic sprinklers in accordance with the following listing. 1. Provide off-white finished plate for concealed heads in all finished ceilings as indicated per

plans. 2. Provide brass or white upright/pendant and sidewall heads in all exposed ceiling areas and

unfinished areas as indicated on plans. 3. Provide fire sprinkler protection cages in all gymnasium areas.

B. Sprinkler Heads: Provide quick response type throughout project. A contractor option will be to provide either standard or extended coverage heads.

C. Sprinkler Head Cabinets: 1. Provide cabinet complete with appropriate heads, wrench and mounting per NFPA.



2. Acceptable Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide automatic sprinklers of one of the following: a. Globe Inc. b. Grinnell Fire Protection Systems Co. Inc. c. Grunau Corp. d. Reliable Corp. e. Star Corp. f. Viking Inc.

2.06 FIRE DEPARTMENT INLET (SUPPLY) CONNECTION

A. Provide siamese connections of sizes, styles and patterns required, individual clappers for each inlet, caps and chains, and finish specified.

B. Schedule:

Style Wall Flush

Manufacturer: Potter Roemer

Model: 2-way No. 5721

Finish: Polished Chrome

1. Provide index plates. Index plates shall read "Auto Spkr".

C. Acceptable Manufacturer: 1. Croker-Standard Div. 2. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Co. 3. Guardian Inc. 4. Potter-Roemer, Inc.

2.07 INSPECTOR’S TEST AND DRAIN ASSEMBLY

A. Provide AGF #1000, test and drain assembly, U.L. and F.M. approved, 300 PSI rated, lockable.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION AND INSPECTION

A. Field Measurements: Verify all dimensions before proceeding with the work. Obtain field measurements for work required to be accurately fitted to other construction. Be responsible for the accuracy of such measurements and precise fitting and assembly of finished work. Prefabrication of systems is done at this Contractor's own risk.

B. Coordination: Coordinate all work and placement of components with other trades, be responsible for complete coordination of design and field installation, (remedial field work will be required to eliminate conflicts) and provide an acceptable finished product. Removal of piping and heads will be required at contractor’s expense if field coordination does not take place.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. General: Provide a complete operable system designed and installed in accordance with applicable local, state, federal and jurisdictional codes, enforcement agencies and insurance rating or underwriting agencies.

B. All systems shall be drainable with proper drainage devices, and drain terminations either to exterior of building or to properly sized receptacles within building. The fire protection contractor shall route drainage per NFPA.



C. All systems shall be supported and braced for conformance to proper and applicable standards.

D. Care shall be taken with chrome plated or other polished finish components so that marring does not occur to the finish, and installation provides for a uniform pattern and true installation.

E. Install Sprinkler heads on a true axis line in both directions a maximum deviation of 1/2 inch plus or minus. Any heads exceeding the maximum tolerance are to be removed and re-installed by the contractor at no additional cost.

F. Where piping passes thru masonry units or concrete walls or floors or other building construction, sleeves must be used. Where exposed piping passes thru finished work, chrome, plated or other finish acceptable to architect, split wall plates or escutcheons shall be installed to fit snugly around piping. Where rated walls are penetrated, approved safing shall be provided at each hole to assure effectiveness of construction as a fire stop.

G. All openings for piping should be anticipated and coordinated with General Contractor. Indicate such openings on the shop drawings. Any additional cutting of openings must have the written approval of the Architect.

H. Contractor shall complete the automatic fire sprinkler ready for operation, in all respects, as soon as possible. When system is complete and ready for continuous operation, activate the system for its intended use. After system has been activated for continuous use, water charges, if any will be paid for by the Owner.

I. Provide identification sign of the standard design adopted by the Automatic Sprinkler Industry, attaching same to all valves, drains, test connections, etc., with chain around body of valve in such a way that the sign cannot be removed without opening link.

J. Provide hydraulic placard indicating the location of calculated system, the discharge density over designed area of discharge, including gallons per minute and residual pressure demand at the base of riser. Place this sign at the system control valve.

K. Use no face bushings.

L. Furnish wiring requirements to Division 26 Contractor for interior alarm items furnished in this Section.

M. Contractor shall coordinate piping elevation with other trades prior to installation. All other trades shall have right-of-way over fire protection piping if not coordinated.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Sprinkler Piping Flushing: Prior to connecting sprinkler risers , flush water feed mains, lead-in connections and control portions of sprinkler piping. After fire sprinkler piping installation has been completed and before piping is placed in service, flush entire sprinkler system, as required to remove foreign substances, under pressure as specified in NFPA 13. Continue flushing until water is clear.

B. Hydrostatic Testing: After flushing system, test fire sprinkler piping hydrostatically, for period of 2 hours, at not less than 200 psi or at 50 psi in excess of maximum static pressure when maximum static pressure is in excess of 150 psi. check system for leakage of joints. Measure hydrostatic pressure at low point of each system or zone being tested.

C. Repair or replace piping system as required to eliminate leakage in accordance with NFPA standards for "little or no leakage" and retest as specified to demonstrate compliance.



3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Cleaning and Inspecting: Clean and inspect fire protection systems in accordance with requirements of Division 22, Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods, Section 22 05 00 "Pipes and Pipe Fittings".

3.05 EXTRA STOCK

A. Heads: For each style and temperature range required, furnish additional sprinkler heads, amounting to one unit for every 100 installed units, but not less than 5 units of each.

B. Wrenches: Furnish 2 spanner wrenches for each type and size of valve connection and fire hose coupling. 1. Obtain receipt from Owner that extra stock has been received.

3.06 CERTIFICATE OF COMPLETION

A. Obtain certificate of compliance and completion for jurisdictional agencies, as applicable and present to Owner.

END OF SECTION


DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS Florence Crittenton GENERAL PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS OZ Architecture Project No. 113266.00 Section 22 00 00 , 1

SECTION 22 00 00

GENERAL PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 , General Requirements, and applicable provisions elsewhere in the Contract Documents apply to work of Division 22.

B. In case of disagreement between Drawings and Specifications, or within either document itself, obtain written clarification from the Mechanical Engineer through the Architect. Failure to obtain clarification prior to bid will result in the better quality and greater quantity being required during the construction phase without additional reimbursement.

1.02 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEMS

A. The related work of Division 22 includes but is not limited to: 1. Section 22 00 00 – General Plumbing Requirements. 2. Section 22 00 10 – Plumbing Related Work. 3. Section 22 05 00 – Pipe, Valves and Pipe Specialties. 4. Section 22 05 53 – Plumbing Identification. 5. Section 22 07 00 – Plumbing Insulation. 6. Section 22 20 00 – Plumbing Systems.


A. Work Included: Unless specified otherwise, provide all supervision, labor, materials, transportation, equipment, hauling, and services necessary for a complete and operational mechanical system. Provide all incidental items such as offsets, fittings, etc. required as part of the work even though not specifically shown on Contract Drawings or Specifications.

B. Inspection: Inspect work proceeding or interfacing with work of Division 22 sections prior to submitting bid and report any known or observed defects that affect the Mechanical Design to the General Contractor. Do not proceed with the construction work until defects are corrected.

1.04 UTILITIES, EXTENSIONS, CONNECTIONS AND FEES FOR WATER AND SEWER

A. Provide all building services and connections to site utilities, as indicated on Drawings.

B. Connection charges, membership fees, system development charges and the like, that in principle allow the right to obtain the services from the utility, will be arranged and paid for by the property owner.

C. Tap fees are the charges for actual materials and labor for tapping, inspection and recording of the tap shall be arranged and paid for by the Division 22 Contractor.

D. In the event that the serving utility company installs their own taps, service, meters, etc., all costs imposed by this action shall be paid for by the Owner. Extensions from termination points to connection with building services and systems will be the responsibility of the Division 22 Contractor.



E. Contractor shall be responsible for all pads, vaults, manholes, manhole covers, meter enclosures, valves, service boxes, and appurtenances, all in conformance with requirements of the serving utility company.

1.05 REFERENCES

A. General: 1. For products or workmanship specified by Association, Trade or Federal Standards, comply

with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes.

2. The date of the standard is that which is in effect as of the date of the Contract Documents, except when a specific date is specified.

1.06 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Materials and apparatus required for the work shall be new and of first,class quality; to be furnished, delivered, erected, connected and finished in every detail; and to be so selected and arranged so as to fit properly into the building spaces.

B. Unless otherwise specifically indicated, equipment and materials shall be installed in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer. This includes the performance of tests as recommended by the manufacturer.

C. Ratio of at least (1) licensed (journeyman) to 2 unlicensed (apprentice) at all times.

1.07 EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS

A. The Mechanical Drawings show the general arrangement of piping, ductwork, mechanical equipment, and appurtenances, and shall be followed as closely as actual building construction and the work of other trades will permit.

B. The Architectural and Structural Drawings shall be considered part of the mechanical work insofar as these Drawings furnish this Division with information relating to design and construction of the building.

C. Field verify building dimensions governing mechanical work. Do not scale the Mechanical Drawings for dimensions. If field dimensions are not available take dimensions, measurements, locations, levels, etc. from the Architectural Drawings and the approved Shop Drawings submitted on the actual equipment to be furnished.

D. The Mechanical Contractor shall request of the Test and Balance (TAB) Contractor an early review of the Contract Documents for the purpose of identifying where proper balancing cannot be achieved. The report requirements are referred to in Division 23, Temperature Controls section, “Submittals.” Forward a copy of the report to the mechanical engineer for review. The Mechanical Contractor shall modify the system as recommended by the TAB Contractor or refer unresolved issues to the Mechanical Engineer for resolution prior to ordering of ductwork and equipment. Unresolved balancing issues from untimely or incomplete application of these requirements will be the responsibility of the Mechanical Contractor to correct.

E. No extra compensation shall be claimed or allowed due to differences between the actual dimensions and those indicated on the Drawings.

F. Discrepancies: Examine Drawings and Specifications for other parts of the work, and if any discrepancies occur between the plans for the work of this Division and the plans for the work of others, report such discrepancies to the General Contractor and obtain written instructions for any changes necessary. Report any inconsistencies between the drawings and specifications and the installation requirements of equipment manufacturers.



G. Order of Precedence: The precedence of Mechanical Construction Documents is as follows: 1. Addenda and modifications to the Drawings and Specifications take precedence over the

original Drawings and Specifications. 2. Should there be a conflict within the Specifications or within Drawings of the same scale, the

more stringent or higher quality requirements shall apply. 3. In the Drawings, the precedence shall be figured dimensions over scaled dimensions and

noted materials over graphic indications. 4. Should a conflict arise between the Drawings and the Specifications the most stringent shall

have precedence. 5. Should there be a conflict in dimensions or locations between Mechanical Drawings and/or

Architectural/Structural Drawings, the Architectural/Structural Drawings shall have precedence.

1.08 EXAMINATION OF PROJECT SITE

A. Examine site carefully to determine conditions to be encountered, work to be performed, equipment, materials to be transported, stored, furnished, and other features applicable to completion of the work.

B. Study Drawings and Specifications, report inconsistencies, errors, omissions or conflicts with codes and ordinances.

C. Submittal of bid will indicate satisfactory examination of the Documents have been made, and applicable allowances included in the bid.

1.09 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Refer to Architectural Drawings and Division 01 specifications for a list of applicable codes.

B. Execute work per Underwriters, Public Utility, Local and State Codes, Ordinances and applicable regulations. Obtain and pay for required permits, inspections, and certificates. Notify Architect of items not meeting said requirements.

C. Comply with latest editions of all applicable codes, standards, ordinances and regulations in effect as of the date of the Contract Documents.

D. If discrepancies occur between the Contract Documents and any applicable codes, ordinances, acts, or standards, the most stringent requirements shall apply.

E. Where hourly fire and smoke ratings are indicated or required, whether or not shown, provide components and assemblies meeting requirements of the American Insurance Association, Factory Mutual Insurance Association and listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

1.10 COORDINATION

A. The Contractor shall plan all of his work in advance, and shall inform the General Contractor of the proposed construction schedule and anticipated completion date upon request. Contractor shall complete the entire installation as soon as the condition of the remaining building construction will permit.

B. Before purchase, fabrication, or installation of items, determine if the installation will properly fit and can be installed as contemplated without interference with structural elements or the work of other trades.



C. Locations of pipes, ducts, switches, panels, equipment, and fixtures, shall be adjusted to accommodate the work or interferences anticipated and encountered. Determine the exact route and location of each pipe and duct prior to fabrication.

D. Right of Way: Lines which pitch shall have the right,of,way over those which do not pitch. Lines whose elevations cannot be changed shall have right,of,way over lines whose elevations can be changed.

E. Offsets, transitions and changes in direction of pipes and ducts shall be made as required to maintain proper head room and pitch of sloping lines whether or not indicated on the Drawings.

F. Where major conflicts occur, contractor shall rely upon the Architect/Engineer to make final decision regarding priority of right,of,way. Contractor shall request written clarification from the Architect/Engineer prior to conflict reaching critical stage requiring removal of previously installed equipment or system components either by himself or by other trades involved.

G. When directed by the Architect/Engineer, submit Shop Drawings showing interrelationship of various portions of work and work of other trades. Failure to properly coordinate may result in removal and relocation at expense to the Contractor.

H. Coordination Drawings for Acoustical and Drywall Ceilings, Plumbing, Fire Protection, HVAC and Electrical: 1. Coordination Drawings are required for the trades noted above. The HVAC contractor shall

prepare reproducible Coordination Layout and Installation Drawings (at least ¼” scale or as approved by the Architect) for resolution of interferences and conflicts with other trades.

2. The Plumbing, Fire Protection and Electrical Contractors, as well as acoustical and drywall ceiling contractors, are required to superimpose their Shop Drawings on the HVAC Drawings and verify layout and elevations to eliminate conflicts. Any conflicts shall be highlighted and these Drawings shall be forwarded to the Architect for resolution. Priority shall be given to “gravity” systems above the ceiling. Each trade shall initial acknowledgement that the proceeding has been completed. No fabrication of ductwork, fire protection, or other prefabricated systems shall begin until these Coordination Drawings have been completed and reviewed by the General Contractor and Architect/Engineers. Any Subcontractor that fabricates and installs items above the ceiling before the Coordinated Drawings are reviewed and conflicts resolved shall do so at their own risk, and be responsible to relocate said equipment in the event conflicts arise, at no cost to the Owner.

3. Additionally, all trades shall show the proposed location of access panels (for maintenance) in “hard” ceilings for access to HVAC boxes, control valves, fire damper motors, plumbing valves, fire protection drains, valves, light fixture remote ballasts, ceiling hung equipment, etc., for coordination with the reflected ceiling plans. Indicate on same Drawings the location of access panels in walls as well as location of plumbing cleanouts.

4. Upon Architect/Engineer completion of the review of the Coordination Drawings, the Design Team, General Contractor and Subcontractors shall conduct a pre,installation coordination meeting for all “fit,up” above ceilings. No ceiling shall be lowered without the expressed approval of the Owner and the Architect.

I. Coordinate all electrical work with Electrical Contractor. Read the Electrical Specification and report any inconsistencies. See “Electrical Wiring and Safety Device Work and Material Responsibilities” in this section.

J. Coordinate all cutting & patching with General Contractor.


A. Accessibility: 1. Contractor shall be responsible for the sufficiency of the size of shafts and chases and the

adequate clearance in double partitions and hung ceilings for proper installation of work.



Coordinate these requirements with the General Contractor. Such spaces and clearances shall be kept to the minimum size required.

2. Locate all equipment which must be serviced, operated, or maintained in fully accessible positions. Furnish access doors for this purpose. Minor deviations from Drawings may be allowed to provide for better accessibility. Any changes shall be approved by the Architect prior to making the change.

3. Provide the General Contractor with the exact locations of access doors. Locations of these doors shall be submitted in sufficient time to be installed in the normal course of work.

4. Demonstration of access will be required prior to project completion. The contractor is responsible for providing reasonable and safe access for all system components. Contractor to arrange with an Owner’s Representative a time for the demonstration prior to the final punchlist.

B. Fabrication: Before installing and/or fabricating any lines of piping or ductwork the Contractor shall assure himself that they can be run as contemplated in cooperation with Contractors of other Divisions of the Work and the physical constraints of the Structural and Architectural Work.

C. Freeze Protection: Do not run pipes in outside walls, or locations where freezing may occur. Piping next to outside walls shall be in furred spaces with insulation between the piping and the outside wall. Insulation of piping shall not be considered freeze protection.

D. Scaffolding, Rigging and Hoisting: Provide scaffolding, rigging, hoisting and services necessary for erection and delivery into the premises of any equipment and apparatus furnished. Remove same from premises when no longer required.

1.12 SUBMITTALS:

A. Within thirty days after award of the Contract, submit to Architect complete catalog data and/or Shop Drawings for each item of material and for every manufactured item of equipment to be used in the work. Such data shall include specific performance data, material description, rating, capacity, dimensions, and type for each item of material, each manufactured item, and all component parts utilized in final operating mechanical system. Applicable data shall be underlined and each applicable item identified in each catalog by the same identification acronyms used on the Drawings.

B. This Contractor shall submit to the Architect the number of copies required by the General and Special Conditions of Division 01, but in no case less than four (4) copies.

C. Each item submitted shall bear the Contractor's stamp, be dated and signed certifying that he has reviewed and approved the Submittal.

D. For each item scheduled on the Drawings, submit a replication of that schedule indicating actual data of the submitted equipment in the schedule.

E. The review comments of the Architect and/or Engineer do not in any case supersede the Drawings and Specifications, and shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for deviations from the Drawings or Specifications unless the Contractor has called to the attention of the Architect and/or Engineer, in writing, such deviations at the time of submission, nor shall it relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors of any sort in the items submitted.

F. Test Reports: Submit certified test reports as required by various Sections of Division 22 showing compliance in accordance with the General Conditions of the Contract.

G. Deviations: It is the contractors responsibility to indicate deviations from the Plans And Specifications. Approval shall not be considered acceptance of the deviation unless it has been explicitly indicated.



1.13 SITE OBSERVATION REPORTS

A. During the construction period the Engineer may issue periodic site observation reports. The contractor shall immediately address the issues and provide a written response identifying the “Responsible Contractor,” “Date,” “Corrective Action Taken,” and “Recommendations.”

B. The written response must be returned to the Architect no later than (5) working days after receipt of the site observation report.

1.14 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Substitutions: Comply with Division 01 & Instructions to Bidders.

B. Contractors desiring to use alternate equipment or materials and manufacturers or suppliers desiring to furnish alternate materials or equipment in lieu of those specified, shall submit requests for approval to the Engineer not less than seven (7) calendar days prior to scheduled closing date for receipt of proposals.

C. Materials and equipment are specified by manufacturer and catalog numbers. The manufacturers and catalog numbers are used to establish a degree of quality and style for such equipment and material.

D. When alternate or substitute materials and equipment are used, Contractor will be responsible for space requirement, configurations, performance, changes in bases, supports, structural members and openings in structure, electrical changes and other apparatus and trades that may be affected by their use. Contractor shall provide drawings for alternate/substitute equipment in detail equal to the construction documents.

1.15 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. General: Comply with Division 01.

B. Job Site Documents: Maintain at the job site, one record copy of the following: 1. Drawings 2. Specifications 3. Addenda 4. Reviewed Shop Drawings 5. Field Test Records

C. Do not use record documents for construction purposes. Maintain documents in clean, dry legible condition, apart from documents used for construction.

D. Record Information: Label each document "Record Document." Mark information with contrasting color using ink. Keep each record current. Do not permanently conceal any work until required information is recorded. Record the following information on drawings: 1. Horizontal and vertical location of underground utilities. 2. Location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction. 3. Field changes of dimension and detail. 4. Changes by change order or field order. 5. Details not on original Contract Drawings.

E. Contractor shall transfer all as,built information on to CAD files. Electronic copy will be provided upon request.

F. Record the following information on Specifications:



1. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number and supplier of each product and item of equipment actually installed.

2. Changes by change order or field order. 3. Other matters not originally specified.

G. Shop Drawings: Maintain Shop Drawings as record documents recording changes made after review as specified for drawings above.

1.16 ELECTRIC WIRING AND SAFETY DEVICE WORK AND MATERIAL RESPONIBILITIES

A. Unless otherwise indicated, all mechanical equipment motors and controls shall be furnished, set in place, and wired in accordance with the following schedule: MD = Mechanical Division, ED = Electrical Division, TD = Temperature Control Division, I = Installer of equipment requiring electrical service.

B. Note: If Temperature Control Division is a subcontract to the Mechanical Contractor, both MD and TD shall fall under the responsibility of MD. If no Temperature Control Contractor is under contract, Mechanical Division shall assume all Temperature Control responsibilities.

Furnished Under

Set In Place or Mounted Under

Power Wired & Connected Under

Control Wired & Connected Under

1. Control Valves, Solenoid Valves, Plumbing Fixtures

TD MD ,, TD

2. Thermowells in Piping TD MD ,, ,,

3. Fire Protection (Exterior horn & light) MD ED ED ED

4. Fire Protection (Tamper & flow switch)

MD MD ED ED See footnote 2

5. Water Heater Controls MD MD TD See footnote 1

TD

6. Remote Disconnect Switches for Boiler (Heating, Domestic HW) Controls per ASME,CSD,1.

TD TD See footnote 4

ED See footnote 5

TD

1. Footnote 1: It is the intention of this specification for all conduit and wiring which connects to

control equipment or provides controls to mechanical equipment to be provided by the Temperature Control Contractor. Other portions of the specification which may be in conflict with this concept shall be brought to the attention of the engineer for clarification prior to bidding the project. The ED shall provide line voltage wiring conduit and junction boxes for the express purpose of temperature controls. It shall be the responsibility of the Temperature Control Contractor to coordinate the location of the junction boxes (if not otherwise shown on the Electrical Drawings) and to utilize these junction boxes for temperature control wiring. The Temperature Control Contractor shall extend line and/or low voltage wiring from junction boxes to all mechanical and control components which require control wiring.

2. Footnote 2: Wiring from the fire alarm electrical contacts to fire alarm system control panel by ED; all mechanical equipment control function wiring by TD. ED to coordinate locations of electrical contact with MD. MD to coordinate locations of duct smoke detectors with ED.

3. Footnote 4: A manually operated remote shutdown switch(es) shall be located just outside the water heater room door and marked for easy identification. Consideration should be given to the type and location of the switch to safeguard against tampering. If the water heater room door is on the building exterior, the switch should be located just inside the door. If there is more than one door to the water heater room, there should be a switch located at each door. The emergency shutdown switch shall be wired to the water heater safety circuit relay and shall disconnect all power to the water heater safety circuit. Use explosion proof switches at indoor switch locations.



4. Footnote 5: ED shall provide a separate 120 volt branch circuit and a junction box at each water heater room door. Junction box location shall be as indicated on Mechanical Drawings and shall be coordinated with TD prior to installation.

C. All temperature control conduit and wiring will be furnished and installed under temperature control subcontract. In the event that temperature control is not under separate contract, Mechanical Contractor shall assume all temperature control subcontract responsibilities.

D. Division 26 shall furnish and install all conduit and wiring required for power wiring carrying equipment full load amperage to all mechanical equipment unless shown otherwise.

E. Provide Division 26 with a complete summary list of all mechanical equipment and line voltage control requiring electric power within 30 days after award of contract. This list shall summarize equipment power loads, line voltage control requirements, quantities, and locations of equipment and connection points. If any mechanical equipment is required to run on emergency power, the list shall note that requirement along with the requirement for the building temperature controls systems to also be under emergency power.

F. All starters shall be furnished under Division 22.

1.17 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver and store materials and equipment in manufacturer's unopened containers fully identified with manufacturer's name, trade name, type, class, grade, size and color.

B. Protection: Make provisions for coordination with Owner and other Contractors for safe storage of materials and equipment. Store materials and equipment off the ground and under cover, protected from damage.

C. All items subject to moisture damage, such as controls, shall be stored in a dry, heated space.

D. Large Items: Make arrangements with other Contractors on the job for introduction into the building of equipment too large to pass through finished openings. Schedule delivery of large equipment requiring special openings as required for installation without delaying the work of other project trades.

E. Acceptance: Check and sign for materials to be furnished by Division 22 and other trades for installation under Division 22 upon delivery. Assume responsibility for the storage and safekeeping of such materials from time of delivery until final acceptance.

F. Inspection: Stored material shall be readily accessible for inspection by the Architect until installed.

1.18 WARRANTIES

A. Warranty: In accordance with Division 01, provide a written warranty to the Owner covering the entire mechanical work to be free from defective materials, equipment and workmanship. If the warranty period is not defined in Division 01, the minimum warranty period will be for a period of two years after Date of Acceptance. Purchase of manufacturer’s extended warranty may be required to comply with the warranty period requirement. During this period provide labor and materials as required to repair or replace defects at no additional cost to the Owner. Provide certificates for such items of equipment which have warranties in excess of two years. Submit to the General Contractor.

B. This warranty will be in addition to the terms of any specific equipment warranties or warranty modifications resulting from use of equipment for temporary heat or ventilation.



1.19 SCHEDULE OF TESTING

A. Provide testing in accordance with the General Conditions of the Contract. Make all specified tests on piping, ductwork and related systems as necessary. Demonstrate the proper operation of equipment installed under this project.

B. Equipment shall not be tested, or operated for any purpose until fully lubricated in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and until connections to fully operative systems have been accomplished.

C. A schedule of testing shall be drawn up by the Division 22 Contractor in such a manner that it will show areas tested, test pressure, length of test, date, time and signature of testing personnel. All testing must be performed in the presence of the General Contractor's representative; his signature for verification of the test must appear on the schedule. At completion of testing, the schedule shall then be submitted in triplicate to the Architect.

D. Make sure operational and performance tests are made on seasonal equipment.

E. Complete all tests required by Code Authorities, such as smoke detection, life safety, fire protection and health codes.

1.20 DEMONSTRATION OF ACCESS

A. The Contractor shall demonstrate to the Owner’s designated representative the access to all switches, valves, actuators, dampers, motors, lubrication lines, sensors and panels. Contractor shall correct deficiencies noted by the Owner. Refer outstanding issues to the Architect/Engineer for resolution. Contractor to be responsible for arranging the demonstration prior to final inspection.

1.21 CERTIFICATES AND KEYS

A. Certificates: Upon completion of the work, deliver to the General Contractor one copy of Certificate of Final Inspection.

B. Keys: Upon completion of work, submit keys for mechanical equipment, panels, etc. to the General Contractor.

1.22 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Submit three (3) typed and bound copies of the maintenance manual, 8,1/2" x 11" in size, to the Architect, for review and approval. These approved copies shall then be transmitted to the Owner.

B. The manual shall be enclosed in a stiff,back, three,ring binder and shall have: 1. Table of Contents, Equipment List with identification used in contract documents. 2. Alphabetical list of all system components including the name, address, and 24,hour phone

number of the company responsible for servicing each item during the first year of operation. 3. Operating instructions for complete system, including procedures for fire or failure of major

equipment and procedures for normal starting/operating/shutdown and long,term shutdown. 4. Maintenance instructions, including valves, valve tag and other identified equipment lists,

proper lubricants and lubricating instructions for each piece of equipment and necessary cleaning/replacing/adjusting schedules.

5. Manufacturer's data on each piece of equipment, including: a. Installation instructions. b. Drawings and Specifications (approved Shop Drawings). c. Parts lists. d. Complete wiring and temperature control diagrams. (Approved Shop Drawings).



e. Completed and approved TAB report.

1.23 INSTRUCTIONAL SESSIONS

A. Be responsible for scheduling instructional meetings for maintenance personnel on the proper operation and maintenance of all mechanical systems, using the maintenance manual as a guide. These meetings must be scheduled through the Architect or General Contractor and with enough advanced notice that all personnel can be notified. Provide instructional sessions as required.

B. Video tape instructional sessions for Owner’s future use.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Applicable)

END OF SECTION


DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS Florence Crittenton PLUMBING RELATED WORK OZ Architecture Project No. 113266.00 Section 22 00 10 - 1

SECTION 22 00 10

PLUMBING RELATED WORK

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section.


A. Types of mechanical related work specified in this section include the following: 1. Motors. 2. Starters. 3. Access Doors. 4. Temporary Heat. 5. Excavation. 6. Cutting and Patching.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MOTORS

A. Motor Characteristics: Except where more stringent requirements are indicated, comply with the following requirements for motors of mechanical work:

1. Temperature Rating: Rated for 104F (40°C) environment with maximum 122F (50°C) temperature rise for continuous duty at full load (Class A Insulation).

2. Altitude Deration: Motors to be furnished to maintain specified rated service factor at altitude of project.

3. Starting Capability: Provide each motor capable of making starts as frequently as indicated by automatic control system, and not less than 5 starts per hour for manually controlled motors.

4. Phases and Current Characteristics: Provide squirrel-cage induction polyphase motors for 3/4 hp and larger. Provide capacitor-start single-phase motors for 1/2 hp and smaller; except 1/6 hp and smaller may, at equipment manufacturer's option, be split-phase type. Coordinate current characteristics with power specified in Division 26 sections and with individual equipment requirements specified in other Division 22 requirements. For 2-speed motors provide 2 separate windings on polyphase motors. Do not purchase motors until power characteristics available at locations of motors have been confirmed, and until rotation directions have been confirmed.

5. Power Factor: All motors rated greater than 1000 watts shall have a Power Factor of not less than 85% under rated load conditions. The 85% PF may be obtained by design of the motor or by providing a capacitor. Capacitors, if provided to obtain the 85% PF, must be switched with the motor. If the motor draws less than 1000 watts at full load, it is excluded from the 85% power factor requirement.

6. Efficiency: Motor efficiency ratings shall conform to NEMA Standard MG-1-1987. 7. Service Factor: 1.15 for three-phase motors and 1.35 for single-phase motors.

B. Motor Construction: Provide general purpose, continuous duty motors, Design "B" or "C" where required for high starting torque. Provide inverter duty motors, for all variable speed motor applications: 1. Frames: NEMA No. 56.



2. Bearings: Ball or roller bearings with inner and outer shaft seals, regreasable except permanently sealed where motor is normally inaccessible for regular maintenance. Provide double shielded ball bearings in accordance with ANSI-B 3.16-1972.

3. Where belt drives and other drives produce lateral or axial thrust in motor, provide bearings designed to resist thrust loading. Refer to individual sections of Division 22 for fractional-hp light-duty motors where sleeve-type bearings are permitted.

4. Enclosure Type: Except as otherwise indicated, provide open drip-proof motors for indoor use where satisfactorily housed or remotely located during operation, and provide guarded drip-proof motors where exposed to contact by employees or building occupants. Provide weather-protected Type I for outdoor use, Type II where not housed. Refer to individual sections of Division 22 for other enclosure requirements.

5. Overload Protection: Provide built-in thermal overload protection and, where indicated, provide internal sensing device suitable for signaling and stopping motor at starter.

6. Noise Rating: Provide "Quiet" rating on motors. Motors shall not exceed 80 DB at full speed and power.

C. Name Plate: Provide metal nameplate on each motor, indicating full identification of manufacturer, ratings, characteristics, construction, special features and similar information.

D. Manufacturer: Except where item of mechanical equipment (which otherwise complies with requirements) must be integrally equipped with motor produced by another manufacturer, provide motors for mechanical equipment manufactured by one of the following: 1. Allis-Chalmers Corp. 2. Baldor Electric Co. 3. Century Electric Div., Inc. 4. General Electric Co. 5. Louis Allis Div.; Litton Industrial Products, Inc. 6. Marathon Electric Mfg. Corp. 7. Reliance Electric Co. 8. Westinghouse Electric Corp.

2.02 STARTERS

A. Motor Starter Characteristics: Comply with NEMA standards and NEC. Provide enclosures NEMA Type as required with padlock ears, and with frames and supports for mounting on wall, floor or panel as indicated. Where starter location is not within sight of motor, provide fused disconnect switch within sight of motor. Provide type and size of starter recommended by motor manufacturer and equipment manufacturer for applicable protection and start-up condition; refer to individual equipment sections for basic load requirements. 1. Manual Switches: Provide manual switch and pilot light for motors 1/2 hp and smaller,

except where interlock or automatic operation is indicated. Provide extra switch positions and pilot lights for multi-speed motors. a. Overload Protection: Provide melting alloy type thermal overload relays.

2. Magnetic Starters: Provide magnetic starters for motors 3/4 hp and larger, and for smaller motors where interlock or automatic operation is indicated. Include the following: a. Heavyduty oiltight type hand-off-auto switch and pilot lights, properly arranged for

single-speed operation as indicated. b. Trip-free thermal overload relays, each phase. c. Built-in 120-volt control circuit transformer, fused from line side and on secondary side. d. Control circuit conductors to be protected in accordance with Article 250-5, Exception 5,

of the National Electric Code. e. Externally operated manual reset. f. Undervoltage release or protection. g. Hand-off-auto switch. h. Single Phasing Protection: All starters shall include a phase protection relay mounted

and wired in the starter enclosure, equal to time-mark 257 series or motor saver model 201. Starters for motors 5 hp and less may meet this requirement either by supplying



the phase protection relay as above, or by providing a current differential trip mechanism in the overload relay which advances the trip setting 25% or more under single phase conditions. Submittals must include documentation of the type of single phasing protection is used.

i. Provide spare normally open and normally closed contacts. j. With two speed starters, include an adjustable time delay device within starter

enclosure to allow the motor to come to a complete stop when switching from high to low speed. Two speed starters shall have heavyduty 4 position rotary switch, "auto-off-low-high".

B. Weather Protection: Provide weather-proof mounting of magnetic starters for equipment outside of the building.

C. Unless furnished otherwise, provide over current protection for each motor. Coordinate with Division 26.

D. Motor Starter Manufacturer: Provide motor starters for mechanical equipment manufactured by one of the following: 1. ABB. 2. Allen-Bradley Co. 3. Cutler-Hammer, Inc. 4. General Electric Co. 5. Sprecher & Schuh. 6. Square D Co. 7. Westinghouse Electric Co.

2.03 ACCESS DOORS

A. Furnish access doors where shown on Drawings and at all locations where required for access to concealed valves, shock absorbers, dampers, cleanouts, control devices, coils, and equipment servicing. Access doors shall be 24” x 24”.

B. Standard Doors: 1. Frames: 16 ga. steel. 2. Panels: 14 ga. steel. 3. Finish: Chemically bonded prime coat of baked enamel.

4. Hinge: Concealed spring hinges openable to 175; removable pins. Provide number of hinges as recommended by manufacturer for size of door.

5. Locking Devices: Flush steel, screw driver operated, cam type locks. All access doors below 8'-0" in public areas shall be key-operated cylinder lock with two keys.

6. Style of doors shall be appropriate for architectural finish at door location. Furnish masonry anchors where required.

C. Fire Rated Doors: 1. Frames: 16 gauge steel. 2. Panels: Sandwich type, 20 gauge steel sheets, manufacturer's standard insulated core. 3. Finish: Chemically bonded prime coat of baked enamel. 4. Hinge: Continuous type, steel with stainless steel pin. 5. Closer: Automatic closing mechanism. 6. Locking Devices: Self latching, key-operated cylinder lock with two keys; interior, latch

release mechanism. 7. Style of doors shall be appropriate for architectural finish at door location. 8. Fire rated doors shall have components and assemblies meeting requirements of the

American Insurance Association, Factory Mutual Insurance Association and listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

D. Acceptable Manufacturers:



1. Cesco. 2. Karp Associates, Inc. 3. Meadowcraft, Inc. 4. Milcor Div; Inryco Inc. 5. Nystrom, Inc.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION OF MOTORS AND STARTERS

A. Install motors on motor mounting systems in accordance with motor manufacturer's instructions, securely anchored to resist torque, drive thrusts, and other external forces inherent in mechanical work. Secure sheaves and other drive units to motor shafts with keys and Allen set screws, except motors of 1/3 hp and less may be secured with Allen set screws on flat surface of shaft. Unless otherwise indicated, set motor shafts parallel with machine shafts.

B. Install starters and wiring devices securely supported and anchored, and in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Locate for proper operational access, including visibility, and for safety.

C. Install control connections for motors to comply with NEC and applicable provisions of Division 26 sections.

3.02 ACCESS TO MECHANICAL WORK

A. Installation: 1. Deliver access doors to General Contractor for installation and provide instructions for their

location. Exact location of access doors to be as directed by Mechanical Contractor and Architect/Engineer.

2. Furnish all access doors whether shown or not. 3. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation of access doors. 4. Coordinate installation with work of other trades. 5. Set frames accurately in position and securely attach to supports with face panels plumb or

level in relation to adjacent finish surfaces. 6. Access door location shall be coordinated with Architect/Engineer prior to installation. All

access panels not coordinated will run the risk of removal and relocation at the expense of the contractor.

7. Install access doors for the following concealed equipment: a. Shock absorbers. b. Valves. c. Control devices. d. Trap primers. e. Other plumbing equipment requiring service.

B. Adjust and Clean: 1. Adjust hardware and panels after installation for proper operation. 2. Remove and replace panels or frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged.

3.03 EXCAVATING FOR MECHANICAL WORK

A. General: Do not excavate for mechanical work until work is ready to proceed without delay, so that total time lapse from excavation to completion of backfilling will be minimum.

B. Existing Utilities: Locate and protect existing utilities and other underground work in manner which will ensure that no damage or service interruption will result from excavating and backfilling.



C. All trenches deeper than the footing of any building or structure and paralleling the same shall be at least forty-five (45) degrees therefrom, unless permission is otherwise granted by the Administrative Authority and Structural Engineer.

D. Excavation for Trenches: Dig trenches to uniform width required for particular item to be installed, sufficiently wide to provide ample working room. Provide 6" to 9" clearance on both sides of piping: 1. Excavate trenches to depth indicated or required. Carry depth of trenches for piping to

establish indicated flow lines and invert elevations. Beyond building perimeter, keep bottoms of trenches sufficiently below finish grade to avoid freeze-ups.

2. Where rock is encountered, carry excavation 6" below required elevation and backfill with 6" layer of 3/4" gravel prior to installation of pipe.

3. Where bedding is required, backfill with sand 6" below and 6" above pipe. 4. For piping 5" or less in nominal size, do not excavate beyond indicated depths. Hand

excavate bottom cut to accurate elevations and support piping on undisturbed soil. 5. For piping 6" and larger in nominal size, tanks, and other mechanical work indicated to

receive sub-base, excavate to sub-base depth indicated, or if not otherwise indicated, to 6" below bottom of work to be supported.

6. Grade bottoms of trenches as indicated, notching under piping couplings to provide solid bearing for entire body of piping.

E. Shape sub-bases and bottoms of excavations with recesses to receive pipe bells, flanged connections, valves and similar enlargements in piping systems.

3.04 BACKFILLING

A. Do not backfill until installed mechanical work has been tested and accepted, wherever testing is indicated.

B. All excavations shall be completely backfilled as soon after inspection as practical. Adequate precaution shall be taken to insure proper compactness (95% density) of backfill around piping without damage to such piping. Trenches shall be backfilled in thin layers to twelve (12) inches (0.3m) above the top of the piping with clean earth which shall not contain stones, boulders, cinderfill, or other materials which would damage or break the piping or cause corrosive action. Mechanical devices such as bulldozers, graders, etc., may then be used to complete backfill to grade. Fill shall be properly compacted (95% density). Suitable precautions shall be taken to insure permanent stability for pipe laid in filled or made ground. For testing and backfill material see Division 02 - Site Work.

C. Underground plumbing shall be surrounded by a minimum of 6” of squeegee.

3.05 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Openings in New Construction – Provisions for New Openings: Verify all openings required in the new construction in connection with the work under Division 22 with the Architectural and Structural Drawings. Meet with and verify same with the General Contractor who will assign the work to the appropriate contractor to provide all openings in the new construction of the correct size and location in walls, floors or through roofs required for the installation of the mechanical work.

B. Cutting in New Construction: Failure on the part of the Division 22 Contractor to make the above arrangements for required openings shall cause the cost of cutting and patching for the necessary openings or the installation of his work to be borne by him, either by having the cutting done by the appropriate contractor as assigned by the General Contractor or in the form of performing the required cutting himself. In either case, all patching shall be done by the appropriate finishing contractor as determined by the General Contractor. No cutting or drilling of holes shall be done without approval of the Architect/Engineer.



C. Patching in New Construction: 1. The appropriate finishing contractor as determined by the General Contractor shall patch all

openings in the new structure. All openings made in fire-rated walls, floors, or ceilings, shall be patched and made tight to conform to the fire rating for the enclosure. All materials used in patching shall match the materials specified in the Architectural Specifications and all patched areas shall be restored to the specified finish surface to the satisfaction of the Architect.

2. The Division 22 Contractor shall pay the appropriate Finishing Contractor as determined by the General Contractor for all patching resulting from cutting to accommodate mechanical work.

END OF SECTION


DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS Florence Crittenton PIPE, VALVES & PIPE SPECIALTIES OZ Architecture Project No. 113266.00 Section 22 05 00 * 1

SECTION 22 05 00

PIPE, VALVES & PIPE SPECIALTIES

PART 1 GENERAL




A. Types of equipment specified in this section include the following: 1. Pipes and Pipe Fittings. 2. Valves. 3. Pipes Specialties. 4. Expansion Devices. 5. Supports and Anchors. 6. Gages.


A. Codes and Standards: 1. Welding: Qualify welding procedures, welders and operators in accordance with ASME

B31.1, or ASME B31.9, as applicable, for shop and project site welding of piping work. 2. Brazing: Certify brazing procedures, brazers, and operators in accordance with ASME

Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, for shop and job*site brazing of piping work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Shall be of material, weight, ASTM and ANSI Designation, and pressure ratings as follows unless specifically excepted otherwise.

B. Above Ground Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping: 1. Pipe Size 10" and Smaller: Hubless cast*iron soil pipe; Service weight; Hubless cast*iron

soil pipe fittings conforming to ASTME A888 or ASTM A*74. Acceptable manufacturers: AB&I, Charlotte Pipe, Tyler Pipe. a. Hubless Joints:

1) Heavy duty couplings with 304 stainless steel band, bolts, etc. equal to Husky HD2000 on the following piping: a) Roof drain, overflow drain and storm drain piping.

2. Pipe size 1 1/2" and Smaller: Type “L” copper with DWV pattern solder joints.

C. Underground Storm Drain and Building Drain Piping to 5 Feet Beyond Building Line: 1. Pipe size 8" and smaller: Schedule 40 PVC solid core (only), PVC*DWV pipe with DWV

drainage fitting and solvent welded joints. ASTM D*2665.

D. Domestic Water Service Outside of Building: 1. 3” and Smaller: Type "K" hard drawn copper, all joints to be silver soldered.

E. Domestic Cold Water, Hot Water, Hot Water Recirculation, and Condensate Piping Above Ground Inside Building:



1. 4” and Under: a. Pipe: Type L, hard drawn, seamless copper tubing ASTM B 88*70. b. Fittings: Wrought copper or bronze solder joint pressure type fittings per ANSI B16.22. c. Joints: All*State “Aquasafe” solder. Antimony is not allowed in solder. Shear strength

greater than 10,000 psi.

F. Natural Gas and Natural Gas Relief Vent Piping, Above Ground Inside Building and Above Ground Exterior: 1. Pipe: Schedule 80 for pipe sizes 1/2" and under; Schedule 40 for pipe sizes over 1/2", black

steel (ERW) pipe per ASTM A53. 2. Fittings:

a. ½” and Under: 300 pound malleable iron flat banded pattern screwed fittings per ANSI B16.3.

b. Over ½” thru 2": Same as above except 150 pound class, screwed or welding fittings per joints below. Welded and/or sleeved only in return air plenum.

c. Over 2": Schedule 40, seamless carbon steel welding fittings, long radius, 150 pound class, dimensions per ANSI B16.9*1971; ASTM A 234*73, Grade WPB.

3. Joints: a. 1*1/2” and Under: Threaded using joint compound resistant to gas*air mixture. b. 2" and Above: Butt*welded.

2.02 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING MATERIALS/PRODUCTS

A. Welding Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide welding materials as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. 1. Comply with Section II, Part C, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for welding

materials.

B. Soldering Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide soldering materials as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. 1. All*State “Aquasafe”. "No Antimony." 2. Shear strength greater than 10,000 psi.

C. Brazing Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide brazing materials as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. 1. Comply with SFA*5.8, Section II, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for brazing filler

metal materials.

D. Gaskets for Flanged Joints: ANSI B16.21; full*faced for cast* iron flanges; raised*face for steel flanges, unless otherwise indicated. Provide flange connection to valve and equipment for PRV stations at each end of the legs, to allow for component replacement.

E. Piping Connectors for Dissimilar Non*Pressure Pipe: Elastomeric annular ring insert, or elastomeric flexible coupling secured at each end with stainless steel clamps, sized for exact fit to pipe ends and subject to approval by plumbing code. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Fernco, Inc. b. Indiana Seal

2.03 VALVES

A. General: Provide valves of types and pressure ratings indicated; provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide end connections which properly mate with pipe, tube, and equipment connections. Where more than one type is indicated, selection is Installer's option. Valves shall be manufactured in accordance with all applicable M.S.S. Standards. All ball and globe valves intended to supply drinking water shall meet NFS*61 (180° F C. Hot).



B. Sizes: Unless otherwise indicated, provide valves of same size as upstream pipe size.

C. Operators: Provide handwheels, fastened to valve stem, for valves other than quarter*turn. Provide lever handle for quarter*turn valves, 6" and smaller, other than plug valves. Provide one wrench for every 10 plug valves. Provide gear operators for quarter*turn valves 8" and larger.

D. Acceptable Manufacturer’s 1. Gate Valves (fire protection entry only), and Swing Check Valves:

a. Crane/Stockham. b. Hammond/Milwaukee Valve Corp. c. Nibco, Inc. d. Watts. e. Victaulic (Fire Protection Only). f. Kennedy (Fire Protection Only).

2. Drain Valves: a. Hammond/Milwaukee Valve Corp. b. Nibco, Inc.

3. Gas Plug Valves: a. Walworth Co.

4. Gas Cocks: a. Hammond. b. Crane.

5. Ball Valves: a. Apollo. b. Hammond/Milwaukee Valve Corp. c. Nibco, Inc. d. Watts Co.

6. Wafer Check Valves: a. Nibco.

7. Lift Check Valves: a. Hammond/Milwaukee Co. b. Nibco. c. Stockham/Crane.

8. Balance Valve (2" and smaller variable CV orifice type): a. Armstrong. b. Bell & Gossett. c. Tour – Anderson.

9. Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventer : a. Febco Sales, Inc. (825Y) b. Watts. (009QY) c. Zurn/Wilkins. (975XL)

10. Double Check Backflow Preventer: a. Febco Sales, Inc. b. Watts. c. Wilkins.

E. Valve Features: 1. General: Provide valves with features indicated and, where not otherwise indicated, provide

proper valve features as determined by Installer for installation requirements. Comply with ASME B31.9 for building services piping, and ASME B31.1 for power piping.

2. Flanged: Valve flanges complying with ANSI B16.1 (cast iron), ANSI B16.5, (steel), or ANSI B16.24 (bronze).

3. Threaded: Valve ends complying with ANSI B2.1. 4. Butt*Welding: Valve ends complying with ANSI B16.25.

F. Valve Schedule:



1. General: Provide the following valves for various valve types referenced in Division 22 sections.

2. Gate Valves (Fire Protection Only): a. Hose End; 2*1/2": FM, 175 psi, bronze body, solid wedge, inside screw, non*rising

stem. Threads shall match fire district requirements. Provide with cap and chain. b. Threaded End; 2" and Smaller: FM, UL*listed, 175 psi, bronze body solid wedge,

outside screw and yoke, rising stem. 1) Nibco: T*104*0.

3. Drain Valves: a. 125 lb. SWP: Bronze body, screw*in bonnet, rising stem, composition disc, 3/4" hose

outlet, provide cap and chain. Conform to ASSE 1005. 1) Nibco – Threaded End: 73.

4. Ball Valves: a. 2” and Smaller: 600 WOG/150 SWP, bronze body, full port, bronze trim, 1*piece

construction, TFE seats and seals (NSF 61 * 180° F C. Hot), 400 PSIG CWP rating. 1) Apollo – Threaded Ends.

b. 2*1/2” thru 4": 400 WOG/150 SWP, bronze body, full port, 2* or 3*piece body, PTFE seats with bronze trim (NSF 61 * 180° F C. Hot). 1) Apollo – Threaded Ends.

5. Swing Check Valves: a. 3” and Smaller: 125 lb. SWP, bronze body, horizontal swing, straight pattern flow

renewable disc. Conform to MSS SP*80. Type 4. 1) Nibco – Threaded Ends: T*433.

6. Lift Check Valves: a. 2” and Smaller: 125 psi, bronze body, lift type, spring loaded, renewable disc, threaded

ends. Conform to FCI74*1 for design, rating and testing. Type 2. 1) Crane/Jenkins/Stockham – Horizontal: 655*A. 2) Crane/Jenkins/Stockham – Angle: 118*A.

7. Gas Plug Valve: a. 2*1/2”and Larger: 175 psi, lubricated or permanently lubricated plug type, semi*steel

body, single gland, wrench operated, flanged ends. 1) DeZurik: 118.

8. Gas Cocks: a. Gas Cocks 3" and Smaller: 250 psi non*shock WOG, bronze ball valve with chrome

plated ball, threaded ends, UL listed. 1) Nibco: T*580*70*UL*842. 2) Apollo: 80*100

b. Gas Cocks 4" and Larger: 175 psi non*shock WOG, iron body nickel plated, corrosion resistant plug, flanged ends, lever handle. 1) Dezurik: 425

9. Balance Valves: a. 2” Size and Smaller: Provide balance valves equipped with readout valves to facilitate

connecting of differential pressure meter to balance valves. Equip each readout valve with integral EPT check valve designed to minimize system fluid loss during monitoring process. Provide calibrated nameplate to indicated degree of closure of precision machined orifice. Construct balancing valve with internal EPT o*ring seals to prevent leakage around rotating element. Provide balance valves with preformed polyurethane insulation suitable for use on heating and cooling systems, and to protect balance valves during shipment. 1) Acceptable Manufacturers:

a) Armstrong. b) Bell & Gossett, ITT; Fluid Handling Div. c) Tour*Anderson.

10. Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventer: a. Provide reduced pressure principle backflow preventers consisting of assembly

including shutoff valves on inlet and outlet, and strainer on inlet. Backflow preventers shall include test cocks, and pressure*differential relief valve located between 2 positive



seating check valves. Provide funnel drain assembly and airgap drain to floor drain. Construct in accordance with ASSE Standard 1013, and is USC approved.

11. Double Check Backflow Preventer: a. Provide double check assembly consisting of a "Y" pattern design incorporating two

spring loaded check valve assemblies, inlet and outlet shutoff valves. Construct in accordance with USC, ASSE 1015, AWWA C*510, and CSA B645. Shall be U.L. and FM approved.

2.04 PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. General: Provide factory*fabricated piping specialties recommended by manufacturer for use in service indicated. Provide piping specialties of types and pressure ratings indicated for each service, or if not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide sizes as indicated, and connections, which properly mate with pipe, tube, and equipment connections. Where more than one type is indicated, selection is Installer's option.

B. Pipe Escutcheons: 1. General: Provide pipe escutcheons as specified herein with inside diameter closely fitting

pipe outside diameter, or outside of pipe insulation where pipe is insulated. Select outside diameter of escutcheon to completely cover pipe penetration hole in floors, walls, or ceilings; and pipe sleeve extension, if any. Furnish pipe escutcheons with chrome finish for occupied areas.

2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Chicago Specialty Mfg. Co. b. Producers Specialty & Mfg. Corp. c. Sanitary*Dash Mfg. Co.

C. Strainers: 1. General: Provide strainers full line size of connecting piping, with ends matching piping

system materials. Select strainers for 125 psi working pressure, with Type 304 stainless steel screens, with 3/64" perforations @ 233 per sq. in. as a minimum. a. Threaded, 4" and Smaller in Copper Piping Systems: Cast bronze body, screwed

screen retainer with centered blowdown fitted and blowdown piped to nearest drain with valve.

b. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Apollo. 2) Mueller Co. 3) Watts Regulator Co.

D. Dielectric Fittings: 1. General: Provide standard products recommended by manufacturer for use in service

indicated, which effectively isolate ferrous from non*ferrous piping (electrical conductance), prevent galvanic action, and stop corrosion. a. Clearflow dielectric waterway nipple, steel nipple with inert thermoplastic liner. Shall

meet ASTM F*492*77. 1) Acceptable Manufacturers:

a) Perfection Corporation – Victaulic.

E. Fire Barrier Penetration Seals: 1. Provide seals for any opening through fire*rated walls, floors, or ceilings used as passage for

mechanical components such as piping or ductwork. a. Cracks, Voids, or Holes Up to 4" Diameter: Use putty or caulking, one*piece

intumescent elastomer, non*corrosive to metal, compatible with synthetic cable jackets, and capable of expanding 10 times when exposed to flame or heat, UL*listed.

b. Openings 4" or Greater: Use sealing system capable of passing 3*hour fire test in accordance with ASTM E*814, consisting of wall wrap or liner, partitions, and end caps



capable of expanding when exposed to temperatures of 250 to 350°F (121 to 177°C), UL*listed.

c. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Electro Products Div./3M. (Fire Barrier Systems) 2) Manville Products Corp. 3) Nelson; Unit of General Signal. (Flameseal) 4) Pipe Shield Incorporated. 5) STI. 6) Hilti – FS/One.

F. Water Hammer Arresters: 1. General: Provide bellows or piston type water hammer arresters, pressure rated for 250 psi,

tested and certified in accordance with ASSE #1010. Provide access panel for servicing. Provide full size ball valve and union from pipe to shock arrester.

2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. PPP, Inc.

2.05 FABRICATED PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Pipe Sleeves: Provide pipe sleeves of one of the following: 1. Sheet*Metal: Fabricate from galvanized sheet metal; round tube closed with snaplock joint,

welded spiral seams, or welded longitudinal joint. Fabricate from the following gages: 3" and smaller, 20 gage; 4" to 6" 16 gage; over 6", 14 gage.

2. Steel*Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe; remove burrs. 3. Iron*Pipe: Fabricate from cast*iron or ductile*iron pipe; remove burrs. 4. Plastic*Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 80 PVC plastic pipe; remove burrs.

B. Sleeve Seals: Provide sleeve seals in sleeve as follows: 1. Below grade in foundation wall or exterior walls above grade.

a. Link seal. b. Innerlynx

2. Penetration below grade thru floor. a. Provide elastomeric joint sealant to maintain watertight and airtight continuous seal.

3. Penetrations thru walls, floors, or ceilings above grade. a. Intumescent fire stop.

2.06 PIPE ALIGNMENT GUIDES

A. General: Provide pipe alignment guides on both sides of expansion joints, and elsewhere as indicated. Construct with 4* finger spider traveling inside guiding sleeve, with provision for anchoring to building substrate.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Anvil. 2. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc. 3. Metraflex Co.

2.07 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. References: 1. ASTM B633 – Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel. 2. ASTM A123 – Specification for Zinc (Hot Galvanized) Coatings on Products Fabricated from

Rolled, Pressed, and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars, and Strip. 3. ASTM A653 G90 – Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated by the Hot*Dip Process. 4. MSS SP58 – Manufacturers Standardization Society: Pipe Hangers and Supports –

Materials, Design and Manufacture.



5. MSS SP69 – Manufacturers Standardization Society: Pipe Hangers and Supports – Selection and Application.

6. NFPA 13 – Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems.

B. Quality Assurance: 1. Hangers and supports used in fire protection piping systems shall be listed and labeled by

Underwriters Laboratories. 2. Steel pipe hangers and supports shall have the manufacturer’s name, part number, and

applicable size stamped in the part itself for identification. 3. Hangers and supports shall be designed and manufactured in conformance with MSS SP58. 4. Supports for sprinkler piping shall be in conformance with NFPA 13.

C. Horizontal*Piping Hangers and Supports: 1. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory* fabricated horizontal*piping

hangers and supports selected by Installer to suit horizontal*piping systems. Use only one type by one manufacturer for each piping service. Select size of hangers and supports to exactly fit pipe size for bare piping, and to exactly fit around piping insulation with saddle or shield for insulated piping. Provide baked on epoxy paint hangers and supports for copper piping systems.

D. Vertical*Piping Clamps: 1. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory* fabricated vertical*piping clamps

complying with MSS SP*58 selected by Installer to suit vertical piping systems, in accordance with MSS SP*69 and manufacturer's published product information. Select size of vertical piping clamps to exactly fit pipe size of bare pipe. Provide baked on epoxy paint clamps for copper*piping systems.

E. Hanger*Rod Attachments: 1. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory* fabricated hanger*rod attachments

complying with MSS SP*58 selected by Installer to suit horizontal*piping hangers and building attachments, in accordance with MSS SP*69 and manufacturer's published product information. Use only one type by one manufacturer for each piping service. Select size of hanger*rod attachments to suit hanger rods. Provide copper*plated hanger*rod attachments for copper*piping systems.

F. Building Attachments: 1. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory* fabricated building attachments

complying with MSS SP*58 selected by Installer to suit building substrate conditions, in accordance with MSS SP*69 and manufacturer's published product information. Select size of building attachments to suit hanger rods.

G. Finishes: 1. Indoor Finishes:

a. Hangers and clamps for support of bare copper piping shall be coated with copper colored epoxy paint. Additional PVC coating of the epoxy painted hanger shall be used where necessary.

b. Hangers for other than bare copper pipe shall be zinc plated in accordance with ASTM B633 or shall have an electrodeposited epoxy finish.

c. Strut channels shall be pre*galvanized in accordance with ASTM A653 G90 or have an electrodeposited epoxy finish.

2. Outdoor Finishes: a. Hangers and strut located outdoors shall be hot dip galvanized after fabrication in

accordance with ASTM A123. All hanger hardware shall be stainless steel. Zinc plated hardware is not acceptable for outdoor use.

H. Manufacturers of Hangers and Supports (Acceptable Manufacturers): 1. B*Line Systems Inc.



2. Grinnel Corp.

I. Pipe Positioning Systems: 1. Description: IAPMO PS42, system of metal brackets, clips and straps for positioning piping

in pipe spaces for plumbing fixtures. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Holdrite Corp.; Hubbard Enterprises.

J. Saddles and Shields: 1. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide saddles or shields under piping hangers

and supports, factory*fabricated, for all insulated piping. Size saddles and shields for exact fit to mate with pipe insulation.

2. Protection Shields: MSS Type 40; of length per schedule below to prevent crushing of insulation. Provide coated projection shields on cold/ chilled water piping. a. Schedule:

Nominal Pipe or Tubing Size Shield Length

Shield Gauge Thickness Material

½” thru 3” 12” 18 Galvanized

4” 12” 16 Galvanized

3. Thermal Hanger Shields: MSS Type 40 Constructed of an insert of high density, 100 psi, water*proofed calcium silicate, encased in a sheet metal shield. Provide assembly of same thickness as adjoining insulation. The style of thermal hanger shield assembly shall be determined by shield manufacturer based on hanger type.

4. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Pipe Shields, Inc. b. Value Engineering Products, Inc.

2.08 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Metal Framing: 1. Supplementary Structural Supports: Design and fabricate supports using structural quality

steel bolted framing materials as manufactured by B*Line Systems. Channels shall be roll formed, 12 gauge ASTM A570 Grade 33 steel, 1 5/8” x 1 5/8” or greater as required by loading conditions. Submit designs for pipe tunnels, pipe galleries, etc., to Engineer for approval. Use clamps and fittings designed for use with the strut system.

B. Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: Provide products complying with ASTM A 36.

C. Cement Grout: Portland cement (ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III) and clean uniformly graded, natural sand (ASTM C 404, Size No. 2). Mix at a ratio of 1.0 part cement to 3.0 parts sand, by volume, with minimum amount of water required for placement and hydration.

D. Trapeze Hangers: 1. Trapeze hangers shall be constructed from 12 gauge roll formed ASTM A570 Gr. 33

structural steel channel, 1 5/8” x 1 5/8” minimum. B*Line B22 strut or stronger as required. 2. Mount pipes to trapeze with 2 piece pipe straps sized for outside diameter of pipe, B*Line

B2000 Series. 3. For pipes subjected to axial movement:

a. Strut mounted roller support, B*Line B3126. Use pipe protection shield or saddles on insulated lines.

b. Strut mounted pipe guide, B*Line B2417.

E. Heavy*Duty Steel Trapezes: Fabricate from steel shapes selected for loads required; weld steel in accordance with AWS standards.



F. Pipe Guides: Provide factory*fabricated guides, of cast semi* steel or heavy fabricated steel, consisting of bolted two* section outer cylinder and base with two*section guiding spider bolted tight to pipe. Size guide and spiders to clear pipe and insulation (if any), and cylinder. Provide guides of length recommended by manufacturer to allow indicated travel.

2.09 GLASS THERMOMETERS

A. General: Provide glass thermometers of materials, capacities, and ranges indicated, designed and constructed for use in service indicated. Gauges with dual units (U.S. English and S.I.) are required.

B. Case: Die cast aluminum finished in baked epoxy enamel, glass front, spring secured, 9" long.

C. Adjustable Joint: Die cast aluminum, finished to match case, 180°F adjustment in vertical plane, 360 degrees adjustment in horizontal plane, with locking device.

D. Tube and Capillary: Organic filled "red" color, magnifying lens, 1% scale range accuracy, shock mounted.

E. Scale: Satin faced, non*reflective aluminum, permanently etched markings.

F. Stem: Copper*plated steel, or brass, for separable socket, length to suit installation.

G. Range: Conform to the following: 1. Hot Water: 30° * 240°F with 2°F scale divisions.

H. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Trerice (H.O.) Co. 2. Weiss Instruments, Inc.

2.10 THERMOMETER WELLS

A. General: Provide thermometer wells constructed of brass or stainless steel, pressure rated to match piping system design pressure. Provide 2" extension for insulated piping. Provide cap nut with chain fastened permanently to thermometer well.

B. Manufacturer: Same as thermometers.

2.11 PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE GAGE CONNECTOR PLUGS

A. General: Provide temperature and pressure gage connector plugs pressure rated for 600 psi and 275°F. Construct of brass and finish in nickel*plate, equip with 1/2" NPT fitting, with self*sealing valve core type neoprene gasketed orifice suitable for inserting 1/8" O.D. probe assembly from dial type insertion thermometer or pressure gauge. Equip orifice with gasketed screw cap and retaining strap. Provide extension, length equal to insulation thickness, for insulated piping.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Peterson Equipment Co.

2.12 PRESSURE GAGES

A. General: Provide pressure gages of materials, capacities, and ranges indicated, designed and constructed for use in service indicated. Gauges with dual units (U.S. English and S.I.) are required.



B. Type: General use, 1% accuracy, ANSI B40.1 grade A, phosphor bronze bourdon type, bottom connection, with stainless steel seat ring and individual shock*proof cases.

C. Case: Bonze body with cast aluminum case, glass lens, 4 1/2" diameter.

D. Connector: Brass with 1/4" male NPT with ball valve.

E. Scale: White coated aluminum, with black permanently etched markings.

F. Range: Conform to the following: 1. Water: 0 – 200 psi.

G. Accuracy: 1% full scale, ASME B40.100 Grade 1A.

H. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Ametek/U.S. Gauge. 2. Trerice (H.O.) Co.

2.13 PRESSURE GAGE COCKS

A. General: Provide pressure gage cocks between pressure gages and gage tees on piping systems. Construct gage cock of brass with 1/4" female NPT on each end, and "T" handle brass plug.

B. Snubber: 1/4" brass bushing with corrosion resistant porous metal disc, through which pressure fluid is filtered. Select disc material for fluid served and pressure rating.

C. Manufacturer: Same as for pressure gages.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PIPE AND PIPE FITTING INSTALLATION

A. General: Install pipes and pipe fittings in accordance with recognized industry practices which will achieve permanently leakproof piping systems, capable of performing each indicated service without piping failure. Install each run with minimum joints and couplings, but with adequate and accessible unions for disassembly and maintenance/replacement of valves and equipment. Reduce sizes (where indicated) by use of reducing fittings. Align piping accurately at connections, within 1/16" misalignment tolerance.

B. Locate piping runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally (pitched to drain) and avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. Orient horizontal runs parallel with walls and column lines. Locate runs as shown or described by diagrams, details and notations or, if not otherwise indicated, run piping in shortest route which does not obstruct usable space or block access for servicing building and its equipment. Hold piping close to walls, overhead construction, columns and other structural and permanent*enclosure elements of building; limit clearance to 1/2" where furring is shown for enclosure or concealment of piping, but allow for insulation thickness, if any. Where possible, locate insulated piping for 1" clearance outside insulation. Wherever possible in finished and occupied spaces, conceal piping from view, by locating in column enclosures, in hollow wall construction or above suspended ceilings; do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, except as indicated.

C. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Do not run piping through transformer vaults and other electrical or electronic equipment spaces and enclosures unless unavoidable. Install drip pan under piping that must be run through electrical spaces.



D. Painting of Pipe: Paint all exterior steel piping (gas, etc.) with a rust inhibitor paint. Coordinate color with architect prior to painting.

3.02 PIPING SYSTEM JOINTS

A. General: Provide joints of type indicated in each piping system.

B. Thread pipe in accordance with ANSI B2.1; cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter. Apply pipe joint compound, or pipe joint tape (Teflon) where recommended by pipe/fitting manufacturer, on male threads at each joint and tighten joint to leave not more than 3 threads exposed.

C. Braze copper tube*and*fitting joints where indicated, in accordance with ASME B31.

D. Solder copper tube*and*fitting joints where indicated, in accordance with recognized industry practice. Cut tube ends squarely, ream to full inside diameter, and clean outside of tube ends and inside of fittings. Apply solder flux to joint areas of both tubes and fittings. Use only flux with no lead content. Insert tube full depth into fitting, and solder in manner which will draw solder full depth and circumference of joint. Wipe excess solder from joint before it hardens.

E. Weld pipe joints in accordance with recognized industry practice and as follows: 1. Weld pipe joints only when ambient temperature is above 0°F (*18°C) where possible. 2. Bevel pipe ends at a 37.5 degree angle where possible, smooth rough cuts, and clean to

remove slag, metal particles and dirt. 3. Use pipe clamps or tack*weld joints with 1" long welds; 4 welds for pipe sizes to 10", 8 welds

for pipe sizes 12" to 20". 4. Build up welds with stringer*bead pass, followed by hot pass, followed by cover or filler pass.

Eliminate valleys at center and edges of each weld. Weld by procedures which will ensure elimination of unsound or unfused metal, cracks, oxidation, blow*holes and non*metallic inclusions.

5. Do not weld*out piping system imperfections by tack*welding procedures; re*fabricate to comply with requirements.

6. At Installer's option, install forged branch*connection fittings wherever branch pipe is indicated; or install regular "T" fitting.

7. Clean all welded joints and apply prime coat rust inhibitor.

F. Weld pipe joints of steel water pipe in accordance with AWWA C206.

G. Hubless Hub & Spigot, Cast*Iron Joints: Comply with coupling manufacturer's installation instructions.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF VALVES

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with the following requirements: 1. Install valves where required for proper operation of piping and equipment, including valves

in all branch lines to isolate sections of piping whether shown or not. Branch lines will be considered any line connecting to the main piping. Locate valves so as to be accessible and so that separate support can be provided when necessary.

2. Install valves with stems pointed up, in vertical position where possible, but in no case with stems pointed downward from horizontal plane unless unavoidable. Install valve drains with hose*end adapter for each valve that must be installed with stem below horizontal plane.

B. Shutoff Valves: Install on inlet and outlet of each mechanical equipment item, and elsewhere as indicated.



C. Drain Valves: Install on each mechanical equipment item located to completely drain equipment for service or repair. Install at base of each riser, at base of each rise or drop in piping system, and elsewhere where indicated or required to completely drain hydronic piping system.

D. Insulation: Where insulation is indicated, install extended*stem valves, arranged in proper manner to receive insulation.

E. Valve System: Select and install valves with outside screw and yoke stems, except provide inside screw non*rising stem valves where headroom prevents full opening of OS&Y valves.

F. Non*Metallic Disc: Limit selection and installation of valves with non*metallic discs to locations indicated and where foreign material in piping system can be expected to prevent tight shutoff of metal seated valves.

G. Renewable Seats: Select and install valves with renewable seats, except where otherwise indicated.

H. Fluid Control: Except as otherwise indicated, install ball valves to comply with ANSI B31.9.

I. Installation of Check Valves: 1. Swing Check Valves: Install in horizontal position with hinge pin horizontally perpendicular to

center line of pipe. Install for proper direction of flow. 2. Lift Check Valve: Install in piping line with stem vertically upward, position for proper

direction of flow.

3.04 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Pipe Escutcheons: Install pipe escutcheons on each pipe penetration thru floors, walls, partitions, and ceilings where penetration is exposed to view; and on exterior of building. Secure escutcheon to pipe or insulation so escutcheon covers penetration hole, and is flush with adjoining surface.

B. Y*Type Strainers: Install Y*type strainers full size of pipeline, in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Install pipe nipple and shutoff valve in strainer blow down connection, full size of connection, except for strainers 2" and smaller installed ahead of control valves feeding individual terminals. Where indicated, provide drain line from shutoff valve to plumbing drain, full size of blow down connection. 1. Locate Y*type strainers in supply line ahead of the following equipment, and elsewhere as

indicated, if integral strainer is not included in equipment: a. Pumps. b. Temperature control valves larger than 2". c. Pressure reducing valves. d. Temperature or pressure regulating valves. e. Prior to backflow preventers.

C. Dielectric Fittings: 1. Provide dielectric pipe fittings and isolators at all connections between dissimilar metals in

the domestic water and fire protection systems to control corrosion potential caused by galvanic or electrolytic action.

2. Typical locations for dielectric isolation are: water heaters, storage and pressure tanks, pumps, changes in service piping materials, make*up connections to boilers and chilled water systems, valves, deaerators, flexible connectors and the like where materials of different electrode potential are joined.

3. Storage tanks shall be isolated from piping and tank stands by use of anti*electrolytic and galvanic isolators.



D. Fire Barrier Penetration Seals: Fill entire opening with sealing compound. Adhere to manufacturer's installation instructions.

E. Water Hammer Arresters: Install in upright position, in locations and of sizes in accordance with ASSE #1010, and elsewhere as indicated.

3.05 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Pipe Sleeves: Install pipe sleeves of types indicated where piping passes through walls, floors, ceilings, and roofs. Do not install sleeves through structural members of work, except as detailed on drawings, or as reviewed by Architect/Engineer. Install sleeves accurately centered on pipe runs. Size sleeves so that piping and insulation (if any) will have free movement in sleeve, including allowance for thermal expansion; but not less than 2 pipe sizes larger than piping run. Where insulation includes vapor*barrier jacket, provide sleeve with sufficient clearance for installation. Install length of sleeve equal to thickness of construction penetrated, and finish flush to surface; except floor sleeves. Extend floor sleeves 1/4" above level floor finish, and 3/4" above floor finish sloped to drain. Provide temporary support of sleeves during placement of concrete and other work around sleeves, and provide temporary closure to prevent concrete and other materials from entering sleeves. 1. Install sheet*metal sleeves at interior partitions and ceilings other than suspended ceilings. 2. Install iron*pipe sleeves at exterior penetrations; both above and below grade. 3. Install steel*pipe sleeves except as otherwise indicated.

B. Sleeve Seals: Install in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements.

3.06 EXPANSION LOOP INSTALLATION

A. General: Fabricate expansion loops as required based on installation as determined by Installer for adequate expansion of installed piping system. Subject loop to cold spring which will absorb 50% of total expansion between hot and cold conditions. Provide pipe anchors and pipe alignment guides as determined by Installer to properly anchor piping in relationship to expansion loops.

3.07 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properly from building structure; comply with MSS SP*69. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping to be supported together on trapeze type hangers where possible. Install supports with maximum spacings per local code. Where piping of various sizes is to be supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipe. Do not use wire or perforated metal to support piping, and do not support piping from other piping.

B. Installation of Building Attachments: 1. Install building attachments at required locations within concrete or on structural steel for

proper piping support. Space attachments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP*69 Table 3 or local code, whichever is more stringent. Install additional hangers at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten insert securely to forms. Where concrete with compressive strength less than 2500 psi is indicated, install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

C. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers and other accessories. Except as otherwise indicated for exposed continuous pipe runs, install hangers and supports of same type and style as installed for adjacent similar piping.



D. Prevent electrolysis in support of copper tubing by use of hangers and supports which are copper plated, or by other recognized industry methods, or by plastic coated hangers.

E. Provisions for Movement: 1. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems and to permit

freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends and similar units.

2. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loading and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

3. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes, and so that maximum pipe deflections allowed by ANSI B31 Pressure Piping Codes are not exceeded.

F. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following installation requirements. 1. Clamps: Attach clamps, including spacers (if any), to piping with clamps projecting through

insulation; do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ANSI B31. 2. Saddles and Shield Installation:

a. 3” and smaller piping: Contractor option; protection shields or thermal hanger shields. Provide on cold/chilled water a vapor barrier.

b. 4” and Larger: Contractors option; thermal hanger shields. Provide on cold/chilled water piping a vapor barrier.

G. Support of pipe and equipment shall be accomplished by means of engineered products, specific to each application. Makeshift, field devised methods shall not be allowed.

3.08 INSTALLATION OF ANCHORS

A. Install anchors at proper locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by ANSI B31, and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment.

B. Fabricate and install anchor by welding steel shapes, plates and bars to piping and to structure. Comply with ANSI B31 and with AWS standards.

C. Where expansion compensators are indicated, install anchors in accordance with expansion unit manufacturer's written instructions, to limit movement of piping and forces to maximums recommended by manufacturer for each unit.

D. Anchor Spacings: Where not otherwise indicated, install anchors at ends of principal pipe*runs, at intermediate points in pipe* runs between expansion loops and bends. Make provisions for preset of anchors as required to accommodate both expansion and contraction of piping.

3.09 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Provide structural steel stands to support equipment not floor mounted or hung from structure. Construct of structural steel members or steel pipe and fittings. Provide factory*fabricated tank saddles for tanks mounted on steel stands.

3.10 INSTALLATION OF TEMPERATURE GAGES

A. General: Install temperature gages in vertical upright position, and tilted so as to be easily read by observer standing on floor.

B. Locations: Install in the following locations, and elsewhere as indicated: 1. At outlet of each domestic hot water storage tank and temperature mixing valve. 2. Downstream of hot water recirculation pump.



C. Thermometer Wells: Install in piping tee where indicated, in vertical upright position. Fill well with oil or graphite, secure cap.

D. Temperature Gage Connector Plugs: Install in piping tee where indicated, located on pipe at most readable position. Secure cap.

3.11 INSTALLATION OF PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE TEST PLUGS

A. General: Install in piping where indicated, located on pipe at the most readable position. Secure cap.

B. For horizontal pipe, install in top half of pipe line.

3.12 INSTALLATION OF PRESSURE GAGES

A. General: Install pressure gages in piping tee with pressure gage cock, located on pipe at most readable position.

B. Locations: Install in the following locations, and elsewhere as indicated: 1. At suction and discharge of each pump. 2. At discharge of each pressure reducing valve. 3. At water service and fire service entry. Prior to backflow preventer.

C. Pressure Gage Cocks: Install in piping tee with snubber. Install syphon for steam pressure gages.

D. Pressure Gage Connector Plugs: Install in piping tee where indicated, located on pipe at most readable position. Secure cap.

3.13 CLEANING, FLUSHING, INSPECTING

A. General: Clean exterior surfaces of superfluous materials, and prepare for application of specified coatings (if any). Flush out systems with clean water before proceeding with required tests. Inspect each run of each system for completion of joints, supports and accessory items. 1. Inspect pressure piping in accordance with procedures of ASME B31.

B. Disinfection of Domestic Water Piping System 1. Disinfect water mains and water service including all new and existing inside building

domestic HW, CW and HWC piping. 2. Disinfection of piping and testing shall be completed a minimum of one week prior to

occupancy. 3. Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed and clean. 4. Ensure Ph of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (caustic soda or

soda ash) or acid (hydrochloric). 5. Inject disinfectant free chloride in liquid, powder, tablet or gas form, throughout system to

obtain 50 to 80 mg/K residual. 6. Bleed water from outlets to ensure distribution and test for disinfectant residual at a minimum

15 percent of outlets. 7. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours. 8. If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment. 9. Flush disinfectant from system until residual equal to that of incoming water or 1.0 mg/L. 10. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 5 percent of outlets and from

water entry, and analyze in accordance with AWWA C651.

C. Disinfect water mains and water service including all new and existing inside building domestic HW, CW and HWC piping in accordance with the authority having jurisdiction or, if methods are



not prescribed, in accordance with AWWA C651. Disinfection of piping and testing shall be completed a minimum of one week prior to occupancy.

3.14 PIPING TESTS

A. Test pressure piping in accordance with ASME B31.

B. General: Provide temporary equipment for testing, including pump and gages. Test piping system before insulation is installed wherever feasible, and remove control devices before testing. Test each natural section of each piping system independently but do not use piping system valves to isolate sections where test pressure exceeds valve pressure rating. Fill each section with water and pressurize for indicated pressure and time. 1. Required test period is 2 hours. 2. Test long runs of Schedule 40 pipe at 150 psi, except where fittings are lower Class or

pressure rating. 3. Test each piping system at 150% of operating pressure indicated, but not less than 25 psi

test pressure. 4. Test drainage piping systems at a nominal pressure of 10 ft. hydrostatic head. 5. Test force drainage (pumped) piping at 50 psi. 6. Observe each test section for leakage at end of test period. Test fails if leakage is observed

or if pressure drop exceeds 5% of test pressure.

C. Repair piping systems sections which fail required piping test, by disassembly and re*installation, using new materials to extent required to overcome leakage. Do not use chemicals, stop*leak compounds, mastics, or other temporary repair methods.

D. Drain test water from piping systems after testing and repair work has been completed.

END OF SECTION


DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS Florence Crittenton PLUMBING IDENTIFICATION OZ Architecture Project No. 113266.00 Section 22 05 53 - 1

SECTION 22 05 53

PLUMBING IDENTIFICATION

PART 1 GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. Types of identification devices specified in this section include the following: 1. Plastic Pipe Markers. 2. Plastic Tape. 3. Valve Tags. 4. Valve Schedule Frames. 5. Engraved Plastic-Laminate Signs. 6. Plastic Tags.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 1. ANSI A13.1 “Scheme for Identification of Piping Systems”. 2. ANSI Z53.1 “Safety Color Code for Marking Physical Hazards”.

B. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE).

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. General: Where more than single type is specified for application, selection is Installer’s option, but provide single selection for each product category.

2.02 PLASTIC PIPE MARKERS

A. Pressure-Sensitive Type: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, permanent adhesive, color-coded, pressure-sensitive vinyl pipe markers, complying with ANSI A13.1.

B. Insulation: Furnish 1" thick molded fiberglass insulation with jacket for each plastic pipe marker to be installed on uninsulated pipes subjected to fluid temperatures of 125°F (52°C) or greater. Cut length to extend 2" beyond each end of plastic pipe marker.

C. Small Pipes: For external diameters less than 6" (including insulation if any), provide full-band pipe markers, extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location, fastened by one of the following methods: 1. Adhesive lap joint in pipe marker overlap. 2. Laminated or bonded application of pipe marker to pipe (or insulation). 3. Taped to pipe (or insulation) with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 3/4" wide;

full circle at both ends of pipe marker, tape lapped 1-1/2".



D. Large Pipes: For external diameters of 6" and larger (including insulation if any), provide either full-band or strip-type pipe markers, but not narrower than 3 times letter height (and of required length), fastened by one of the following methods: 1. Laminated or bonded application of pipe marker to pipe (or insulation). 2. Taped to pipe (or insulation) with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 1-1/2"

wide, full circle at both ends of pipe marker, tape lapped 3". 3. Strapped-to-pipe (or insulation) application of semi-rigid type, with manufacturer's standard

stainless steel bands.

E. Lettering: Comply with piping system nomenclature as specified, scheduled or shown, and abbreviate only as necessary for each application length. 1. Arrows: Print each pipe marker with arrows indicating direction of flow, either integrally with

piping system service lettering (to accommodate both directions), or as separate unit of plastic.

2.03 PLASTIC TAPE

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard color-coded pressure- sensitive (self-adhesive) vinyl tape, not less than 3 mils thick.

B. Width: Provide 1-1/2" wide tape markers on pipes with outside diameters (including insulation, if any) of less than 6". Provide 2 1/2" wide tape for larger pipes.

C. Color:

Classification Color of Field

District Letters

Legend

Flammable or Explosive:

Natural Gas Yellow Black NG

Acid Waste Yellow Black AW

Extreme Temperatures or Pressures:

Domestic Hot Water Yellow Black HW

Domestic Hot Water Circulating Yellow Black HWC

180°F Domestic Hot Water Yellow Black 180°F HW

180°F Domestic Hot Water Circulating Yellow Black 180°F HWC

Boiler Feed Water Yellow Black BFW

High-Pressure Compressed Air (over 90 psig)

Yellow Black CA

Liquid or Liquid Admixture:

Domestic Cold Water Green White W

Sanitary Sewer Green White SAN

Waste Vent Green White V

Storm Sewer Green White SS

Gas or Gaseous Admixture:

Medium-Pressure Compressed Air (30 to 90 psig)

Blue White CA XXPSI

Low-Pressure Compressed Air (less than 30 psig)

Blue White CA XXPSI

Fire-Quenching Materials:

Water, Foam, CO2, Clean Agent Red White FL

Fire Lines Red White FL



2.04 VALVE TAGS

A. Brass Valve Tags: Provide 19-gage polished brass valve tags with stamp-engraved piping system abbreviation in 1/4" high letters and sequenced valve number 1/2" high, and with 5/32" hole for fastener. 1. Provide 1-1/2" diameter tags.

B. Valve Tag Fasteners: Provide manufacturer’s standard solid brass chain beaded type.

2.05 VALVE SCHEDULE FRAMES

A. General: For each page of valve schedule, provide glazed display frame, with screws for removable mounting on masonry walls. Provide frames of finished hardwood or extruded aluminum, with SSB-grade sheet glass.

2.06 ENGRAVED PLASTIC-LAMINATE SIGNS

A. General: Provide engraving stock melamine plastic laminate, complying with FS L-P-387, in the sizes and thicknesses indicated, engraved with engraver's standard letter style of the sizes and wording indicated, black with white core (letter color) except as otherwise indicated, punched for mechanical fastening except where adhesive mounting is necessary because of substrate.

B. Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless steel screws, except contact- type permanent adhesive where screws cannot or should not penetrate the substrate.

2.07 PLASTIC TAGS

A. General: Manufacturer's standard pre-printed or partially pre-printed accident-prevention tags, of plasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for writing, approximately 3-1/4" x 5-5/8", with brass grommets and wire fasteners, and with appropriate pre-printed wording including large-size primary wording (as examples; DANGER, CAUTION, DO NOT OPERATE).

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require insulation, painting or other covering or finish, including valve tags in finished mechanical spaces, install identification after completion of covering and painting. Install identification prior to installation of acoustical ceilings and similar removable concealment.

3.02 PIPING SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION

A. General: Install pipe markers of one of the following types on each system indicated to receive identification, and include arrows to show normal direction of flow. 1. Plastic pipe markers, with application system as indicated under "Materials" in this section.

Install on pipe insulation segment where required for hot non-insulated pipes.

B. Locate pipe markers and color bands as follows wherever piping is exposed to view in occupied spaces, machine rooms, accessible maintenance spaces (shafts, tunnels, plenums) and exterior non-concealed locations. 1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch, excluding short take-offs for fixtures and terminal units; mark each pipe at

branch, where there could be question of flow pattern. 3. Near locations where pipes pass through walls or floors/ceilings, or enter non-accessible

enclosures.



4. At access doors, manholes and similar access points which permit view of concealed piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced intermediately at maximum spacing of 50' along each piping run, except reduce

spacing to 25' in congested areas of piping and equipment. 7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings, except omit intermediately spaced markers.

3.03 VALVE IDENTIFICATION

A. General: Provide valve tag on every valve, cock and control device in each piping system; exclude check valves, valves within factory-fabricated equipment units, plumbing fixture faucets, convenience and lawn-watering hose bibs, and shut-off valves at plumbing fixtures and similar rough-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List each tagged valve in valve schedule for each piping system.

B. Mount valve schedule frames and schedules in boiler rooms where indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, where directed by Architect/Engineer.

3.04 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

A. General: Install engraved plastic laminate sign on or near each major item of mechanical equipment and each operational device, as specified herein if not otherwise specified for each item or device. Provide signs for the following general categories of equipment and operational devices: 1. Main control and operating valves, including safety devices and hazardous units such as gas

outlets. 2. Gages, thermometers and similar units. 3. Fuel-burning units including water heater. 4. Pumps and similar motor-driven units. 5. Tanks and pressure vessels. 6. Strainers, filters, and similar equipment.

B. Optional Sign Types: Where lettering larger than 1" height is needed for proper identification, because of distance from normal location of required identification, stenciled signs may be provided in lieu of engraved plastic, at Installer's option.

C. Lettering Size: Minimum 1" high lettering for name of unit.

D. Text of Signs: In addition to name of identified unit, provide lettering to distinguish between multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions and warn of hazards and improper operations.

E. Access doors: 1. Provide engraved nameplates to identify concealed valves, controls, dampers or other

similar concealed mechanical equipment. Use the following colors for specified nameplates or labels. a. Red for fire-protection devices, including dampers. b. Blue for air-handling devices. c. Green for plumbing devices and piping.

F. Lift-out Ceilings: 1. Provide adhesive labels on ceiling grid to identify concealed valves, filters, fire/smoke

dampers or similar concealed mechanical equipment that is directly above nameplate in the ceiling space. Use the following colors for specified labels. a. Red for fire-protection devices, including dampers. b. Blue for air-handling devices.



c. Green for plumbing devices and piping.

END OF SECTION


DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS Florence Crittenton PLUMBING INSULATION OZ Architecture Project No. 113266.00 Section 22 07 00 - 1

SECTION 22 07 00

PLUMBING INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL




A. Types of mechanical insulation specified in this section include the following: 1. Piping System Insulation:

a. Fiberglass.


A. Flame/Smoke Ratings: Provide composite mechanical insulation (insulation, jackets, coverings, sealers, mastics and adhesives) with flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less, as tested by ASTM E 84 (NFPA 255) method.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PIPING INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Fiberglass Piping Insulation: ASTM C 547, Type I unless otherwise indicated.

B. Jackets for Piping Insulation: 1. Factory applied jackets shall comply with the requirements of ASTM C 1136. 2. Field applied jackets shall comply with the requirements of ASTM C 921, Type 1 unless

otherwise specified.

C. Encase pipe fittings insulation with flame and smoke rated one-piece premolded PVC fitting covers, fastened as per manufacturer's recommendations.

D. Adhesives, Sealers, and Protective Finishes: As recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated.

E. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Knauf Fiber Glass. 2. Johns Manville Corporation. 3. Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corp.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Examine areas and conditions under which mechanical insulation is to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.



3.02 PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEM INSULATION

A. Cold Piping systems: 1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following plumbing piping systems:

a. Cold water piping. b. Interior horizontal above-ground storm and overflow storm water piping including roof

drain bodies. Insulate piping through elbow to the vertical piping. c. Air conditioner condensate drain piping.

2. Insulate each piping system specified above with one of the following types and thicknesses of insulation: a. Fiberglass: 1" thick for all pipe sizes. 2” for roof drains.

3. Insulation Omitted: Omit insulation on chrome-plated exposed piping (except for ADA fixtures), air chambers, unions, strainers, check valves, balance cocks, flow regulators, drain lines from water coolers, drainage piping located in crawl spaces or tunnels, buried piping, fire protection piping, and pre-insulated equipment.

B. Hot Piping Systems (up to 140°F): 1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following plumbing piping systems:

a. Hot water piping. b. Hot water recirculation piping.

2. Insulate each piping system specified above with one of the following types and thicknesses of insulation: a. Fiberglass: 1" thick for pipe sizes through and including 2", 1-1/2" thick for pipe sizes

over 2". 3. Insulation Omitted: Omit insulation on chrome-plated exposed piping (except for ADA

fixtures), air chambers, unions, strainers, check valves, balance cocks, flow regulators, drain lines from water coolers, drainage piping located in crawl spaces or tunnels, buried piping, fire protection piping, and pre-insulated equipment.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF PIPING INSULATION

A. General: Install insulation products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that insulation serves its intended purpose.

B. Install insulation on pipe systems subsequent to installation of heat tracing, painting, testing, and acceptance of tests.

C. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. Insulate each continuous run of piping with full-length units of insulation, with single cut piece to complete run. Do not use cut pieces or scraps abutting each other.

D. Clean and dry surfaces prior to insulating. Butt insulation joints firmly together to ensure complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered.

E. Maintain integrity of vapor-barrier jackets on insulation, and protect to prevent puncture or other damage.

F. Cover valves, fittings and similar items in each piping system with equivalent thickness and composition of insulation as applied to adjoining pipe run. Install factory molded, precut or job fabricated units (at Installer's option) except where specific form or type is indicated.

G. Extend insulation without interruption through walls, floors and similar piping penetrations, except where otherwise indicated.



H. Butt pipe insulation against pipe hanger insulation inserts. For hot pipes, apply 3" wide vapor barrier tape or band over the butt joints. For cold piping apply wet coat of vapor barrier lap cement on butt joints and seal joints with 3" wide vapor barrier tape or band.

I. Install insulation and vapor barrier jackets continuous over piping at trapeze hangers.

J. Piping Exposed to Outdoor/Ambient Conditions: Increase specified insulation thickness by 1” minimum. Protect outdoor insulation from weather by installing outdoor protective jacketing as recommended by manufacturer.

3.04 PROTECTION AND REPLACEMENT

A. Replace damaged insulation which cannot be repaired satisfactorily, including units with vapor barrier damage and moisture saturated units.

B. Replace and repair insulation disturbed by testing and balancing procedures required under Section 23 21 00.

C. Protection: Insulation Installer shall advise Contractor of required protection for insulation work during remainder of construction period, to avoid damage and deterioration.

END OF SECTION


DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS Florence Crittenton PLUMBING SYSTEMS OZ Architecture Project No. 113266.00 Section 22 20 00 , 1

SECTION 22 20 00

PLUMBING SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL



B. Refer to Section 22 05 00: Pipes, Valves and Piping Specialties.


A. Systems and equipment specified in this section include the following: 1. Potable Water System. 2. Storm Water, Waste and Vent System. 3. Natural Gas System. 4. Plumbing Fixtures. 5. Plumbing Pumps. 6. Water Heaters.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. General: Provide piping materials and factory,fabricated piping products, and specified equipment of sizes, types, pressure ratings, temperature ratings, and capacities as indicated. Provide sizes and types matching piping and equipment connections and provide fittings of materials which match pipe materials. Where more than one type of materials or products are indicated, selection is Installer's option.

2.02 PIPES, PIPE FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide pipes and pipe fittings complying with Division 22, Section 22 05 00. 1. Basic Valves: Refer to Section 22 05 00 for valve and manufacturer specification.

a. Sectional and Shutoff Valves: 1) All Sizes: Ball valves.

b. Drain Valves: 1) All Sizes: Ball valves.

c. Check Valves: 1) All Sizes: Swing check valves.

d. Balancing Valves: 1) All sizes: Calibrated type only; positive shut,off.

2. Potable Water Specialties: a. Hose Bibbs:

1) HB,1: Chicago Faucet Co. No. 952; Threaded end, chrome plated, bronze body, renewable composition disc, tee handle, 3/4" NPT inlet, 3/4" hose outlet, integral vacuum breaker.

2) Acceptable Manufacturers: a) Chicago Faucet Co.: finished rooms b) Woodford: unfinished and equipment rooms

b. Wall Hydrants:



1) WH,1: Woodford Model B67; non,freeze cast,bronze box hydrant, chrome plated face, tee handle key, bronze casing, length to suit wall thickness, integral vacuum breaker, self,draining, hinged locking cover, 3/4" inlet, hose outlet.

2) Acceptable Manufacturers: a) Woodford Mfg. Co.

c. Connection Outlet: 1) Ice Maker Box (IMB,1): Sioux Chief #696,101, white ABS, Type L copper, “AA”

water hammer arrestor (Refer to Section 22 05 00 for specification), face plate. 2) Washer Box (WB,1): Sioux Chief #696,2313, white ABS, Type L copper, “AA”

water hammer arrestor (Refer to Section 22 05 00 for Specification), face plate. 3) Acceptable Manufacturers:

a) Sioux Chief. b) IPS Corporation. c) Oatey. d) Proset Systems.

d. Backflow Preventers: Per Section 22 05 00. e. Relief Valves: Provide relief valves as indicated, of size and capacity as selected by

Installer for proper relieving capacity, in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. 1) Acceptable Manufacturers:

a) Cash (A. W.) Valve Mfg. Corp. b) Conbraco Industries, Inc. c) Proset Systems. d) Watts Regulator Co. e) Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins,Regulator Div.

f. Water Hammer Arresters: 1) Refer to Section 22 05 00 for specification.

g. Trap Primers: Provide bronze trap primer valve with automatic vacuum breaker, complying with ASSE 1018, with ½" connections matching mating piping system. 1) Acceptable Manufacturers:

a) Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. h. Trap Guard:

1) Provide trap guard to floor drain with specified trap guard combination that meets specified floor drain. See drawings for locations.

2) Acceptable Manufacturers: a) Proset. b) Sure Seal.

i. Pressure Regulating Valves: Provide pressure regulating valves, single seated, direct operated type, bronze body, integral strainer, complying with requirements of ASSE Standard 1003. Size for maximum flow rate and inlet and outlet pressures indicated on drawings. 1) Acceptable Manufacturers:

a) Mueller Mfg. Co. b) Watts Regulator Co.

j. Water Meter: Provide meter of size and capacity indicated. Provide roughing,in and bypass for meter in accordance with Utility Company Requirements. Coordinate with utility company for approved meter manufacturers. Provide manufacturers listed below only if utility company does not have recommended manufacturers. 1) Acceptable Manufacturers:

a) Badger Meter, Inc. b) Hersey Products Inc. c) Neptune Water Meter Co.; Subs. Neptune Intl. d) Rockwell Intl.; Municipal & Utility Div.

k. Water Heater Mixing Valve: 1) Master Mixing Valve:

a) Provide lead free thermostatic mixing valve or assembly ASSE 1017 listed, to include thermostatic three way mixing valve(s), if required, pressure reducing



valve, pressure gauges, union inlet strainer checkstops, dial thermometer, shut,off ball valves and all interconnecting piping. Valve(s) shall provide protection against hot or cold supply line failure and thermostatic failure. Valve(s) shall meet drawing scheduled requirements.

2) Point of Use Mixing Valve a) Provide lead free thermostatic mixing valve, checkstops, ASSE 1070 listed,

and located in an serviceable location. 3) Emergency Fixture Mixing Valve:

a) Thermostatic mixing valve system for supplying tempered water to emergency fixtures shall have a tamper,resistant factor set point of 85°F (29°C), union strainer checkstops and an outlet thermometer. It shall include dual internal cold water bypass and pressure based external bypass to ensure flow in the event of valve failure or loss of hot water supply. The valve shall provide precise temperature control, capable of compliance to the control accuracy requirements of ASSE 1017. It shall effectively shut down in the event of cold water failure.

4) Acceptable Manufacturers: a) Bradley. b) MCC Powers Process Controls. c) Symmons.

l. Diaphragm,Type Expansion Tanks: 1) General: Provide diaphragm expansion tanks of size and number as indicated.

Construct tank of welded steel, constructed, tested, and stamped in accordance with Section VIII of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for working pressure of 125 psi. Furnish National Board Form U,1 denoting compliance. Provide specially compounded heavyduty butyl flexible diaphragm securely sealed into tank to permanently separate air charge from system water, and to maintain design expansion capacity. Provide pressure gauge and air,charging fitting, and drain fitting.

2) Acceptable Manufacturers: a) Amtrol, Inc. b) Armstrong Pumps, Inc. c) Bell & Gossett ITT.

m. Gas Pressure Regulators: 1) Line Pressure Regulators (Equipment): “Natural Gas” Comply with ANSI Z21.80.

Subject to compliance with requirements, provide as indicated on the Drawings. a) End connections: Threaded for regulators 2” and smaller; flanged for

regulators 2,1/2” and larger. b) Body and Diaphragm Case: Cast iron or die,cast aluminum. c) Springs: Zinc,plated steel; interchangeable. d) Diaphragm Plate: Zinc,plated steel. e) Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber resistant to gas impurities, abrasion, and

deformation at the valve port. f) Orifice: Aluminum; interchangeable. g) Seal Plug: Ultraviolet,stabilized, mineral,filled nylon. h) Single,port, self,contained regulator with orifice no larger than required at

maximum pressure inlet, and no pressure sensing piping external to the regulator.

i) Pressure regulator shall maintain discharge pressure setting downstream, and not exceed 150 percent of design discharge pressure at shutoff.

j) Overpressure Protection Device: Factory mounted on pressure regulator. k) Atmospheric Vent: Factory, or field,installed, stainless steel screen in

opening if not connected to vent piping. Regulator may include vent limiting device instead of vent connection if approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

l) Maximum Inlet Pressure: See Drawings. m) Outlet Pressure: See Drawings and Equipment Schedules.



2) Approved Manufacturers: a) American Meter Company. b) Fisher Control Valves and Regulators; Division of Emerson Process

Management. c) Maxitrol Company. d) Schlumberger.

3) Pressure Regulators (Appliance): “Natural Gas” Comply with ANSI Z21.18. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide as indicated on the Drawings.

a) End connections: Threaded for regulators 2” and smaller; flanged for regulators 2,1/2” and larger.

b) Body and Diaphragm Case: Die,cast aluminum. c) Springs: Zinc,plated steel. d) Diaphragm Plate: Zinc,plated steel. e) Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber resistant to gas impurities, abrasion, and

deformation at the valve port. f) Seal Plug: Ultraviolet,stabilized, mineral,filled nylon. g) Atmospheric Vent: Regulator may include vent limiting device instead of

vent connection if approved by authorities having jurisdiction. h) Maximum Inlet Pressure: See Drawings. i) Outlet Pressure: See Drawings and Equipment Schedules. j) Approved Manufacturers:

• American Meter Company.

• Fisher Control Valves and Regulators; Division of Emerson Process Management.

• Maxitrol.

• Schlumberger/Actaris.

B. Storm Drain, Waste and Vent System: 1. General: Provide pipes and pipe fittings complying with Division 22, Section 22 05 00. 2. Floor Drain, Floor Sinks, Roof Drain and Vent Flashing: Flashing (safe pan) shall consist of

one of the following: a. 4 lb./ft

2 sheet lead with appropriate under support.

b. No. 24 B & S gauge (.02) sheet copper with 15 lb. asphalt felt sub pans (silver soldered seams only).

c. .04 thickness non plasticized chlorinated polyethylene and asphalted saturated felt flashing as approved and acceptable with jurisdictional code.

3. Vandal,Proof Vent Caps: Provide vandal,proof vent caps, coated cast iron, counterflashing collar, recessed securing screws with frost proof opening. a. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1) Josam Mfg. Co. 2) Smith, (Jay R.) Mfg. Co. 3) Tyler,Wade. 4) Zurn Industries Inc., Hydromechanics Div.

4. Drainage Piping Products: Provide factory,fabricated drainage piping products of size and type indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements and governing regulations. a. Cleanout Plugs: Cast,bronze or brass, threads complying with ANSI B2.1, countersunk

head. b. Floor Cleanouts: Cast,iron body and frame; cleanout plug; adjustable round top as

follows: 1) Nickel,Bronze Top: Manufacturers standard cast unit of the pattern indicated:

a) Pattern: Exposed rim type, with recess to receive 1/8" thick resilient floor finish.

b) Pattern: Exposed rim type, with recess to receive 1" thick terrazzo floor finish. c) Pattern: Exposed finish type, standard mill finish.



d) Pattern: Exposed flush type, standard non,slip scored or abrasive finish. c. Grade Cleanouts: Cast,iron body and frame; cleanout plug; adjustable round top as

follows: 1) Cast,iron Top: Manufacturers standard cast unit of the pattern indicated:

a) Pattern: Exposed flush type, standard mill finish. b) Pattern: Exposed flush type, standard non,slip scored or abrasive finish.

d. Wall cleanouts: Cast,iron body adaptable to pipe with cast,bronze or brass cleanout plug; stainless steel cover including screws.

e. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Josam Mfg. Co. 2) Smith (Jay R.) Co. 3) Tyler,Wade. 4) Zurn Industries Inc.

5. Drains: a. General: Provide factory,fabricated drains of size and type indicated. Where not

indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Architect/Engineer to comply with installation requirements and governing regulations.

b. Floor Drains and Floor Sinks: 1) Floor Drain (FD,1): Josam No. 30000,A, cast,iron body, flashing collar, weepholes,

satin Nikaloy strainer. 2) Floor Drain (FD,2): Josam No. 32100,TG, cast,iron body, flashing collar,

weepholes, 9" diameter ductile iron tractor grate (grate to bear directly on body of drain).

3) Floor Sink (FS,1): Josam No. 49320A,NB,AS, cast iron body, flashing flange acid resisting interior, weepholes, aluminum dome strainer, 12,1/2" square top, 6" deep, 1/2 grate.

c. Roof Drains and Downspout Nozzles: 1) Roof Drain (RD,1) Josam No. 21500,AE,3,22,VP, cast iron body, Leveleze type

roof drain, clamp ring w/gravel stop, bottom outlet, deck clamp, sump receiver, cast iron locking dome.

2) Overflow Roof Drain (OD,1): Josam No. 21500,AE,3,16,22,VP, cast iron drain body, Leveleze type overflow roof drain, clamp ring w/gravel stop, bottom outlet, deck clamp, sump receiver, cast iron locking dome, 2" water collar.

3) Area Drain (AD,1): Josam No. 37820,VP, cast iron body, square top, heavy,duty, flashing collar, weepholes, sediment bucket, vanda,proof.

4) Downspout Nozzle (DSN,1): Josam No. 25010 Series, cast bronze downspout nozzle, loose wall flange and inlet threaded connection.

5) Acceptable Manufacturers: a) Josam Mfg. Co. b) Smith (Jay R.) Mfg. Co. c) Tyler Pipe; Subs. of Tyler Corp. d) Zurn Industries, Inc.; Hydromechanics Div.

C. Natural Gas System: 1. General: Provide pipes and pipe fittings complying with Division 22, Section 22 05 00.

2.03 PLUMBING FIXTURES

A. General: Provide factory,fabricated fixtures of type, style and material indicated. Where more than one type is indicated, selection is Installer's option; but, all fixtures of same type must be furnished by single manufacturer.

B. Materials: 1. General: Unless otherwise specified, comply with applicable Federal Specification WW,P,

541/,Series sections pertaining to plumbing fixtures, fittings, trim, metals and finishes. Comply with requirements of WW,P,541/,specification relative to quality of ware, glazing,



enamel, composition and finish of metals, air gaps, and vacuum breakers, even though some plumbing fixtures specified in this section are not described in WW,P,541.

2. Provide materials which have been selected for their surface flatness and smoothness. Exposed surfaces which exhibit pitting seam marks, roller marks, foundry sand holes, stains, discoloration, or other surface imperfections on finished units are not acceptable.

3. Where fittings, trim and accessories are exposed or semi,exposed provide bright chrome,plated or polished stainless steel units. Provide copper or brass where not exposed.

4. Stainless Steel Sheets: ASTM A 167, Type 302/304, hardest workable temper. a. Finish: No. 4, bright, directional polish on exposed surfaces.

5. Vitreous China: High quality, free from fire cracks, spots, blisters, pinholes and specks; glaze exposed surfaces, and test for crazing resistance in accordance with ASTM C 554.

6. Fiberglass: ANSI Z124, smooth surfaced, with color selected by Architect/Engineer.

2.04 PLUMBING FITTINGS, TRIM AND ACCESSORIES

A. Water Outlets: At locations where water is supplied by manual, automatic or remote control, provide commercial quality faucets, valves, or dispensing devices, of type and size indicated, and as required to operate as indicated. Include manual shutoff valves and connecting stem pipes to permit outlet servicing without shut,down of water supply piping systems. 1. Vacuum Breakers: Provide with flush valves where required by governing regulations,

including locations where water outlets are equipped for hose attachment.

B. P,Traps: Include removable, 17 gauge cast brass with chrome plated P,traps with brass nuts and cleanout, where drains are indicated for direct connection to drainage system.

C. Carriers: Provide cast,iron supports for fixtures of either graphitic gray iron, ductile iron, or malleable iron.

D. Fixture Bolt Caps: Provide manufacturer's standard exposed fixture bolt caps finished to match fixture finish.

E. Escutcheons: Where fixture supplies and drains penetrate walls in exposed locations, provide chrome,plated cast,brass escutcheons with set screw.

F. Aerators: Provide aerators of types approved by Health Departments having jurisdiction.

G. Comply with additional fixture requirements contained in fixture schedule.

H. Faucet/trim shall meet ANSI 117.1 Section 4.20.4.

I. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Plumbing Fixtures (Vitreous China):

a. American Standard; U.S. Plumbing Products. b. Toto c. Kohler Co.

2. Lavatory Trim: a. Symmons.

3. Sink Trim: a. Chicago. b. Kohler.

4. Flush Valves: a. Sloan Valve Co. (Royal)

5. Fixture Seats: a. Bemis Mfg. Co. b. Beneke Corp. c. Church Products. d. Olsonite Corp.; Olsonite Seats.



6. Electric Water Coolers: a. Halsey Taylor Div. b. Haws Drinking Faucet Co.

7. Mop Basin/Shower Base (Molded Stone): a. Fiat Co. b. Florestone.

8. Stainless Steel Sinks: a. Elkay Mfg. Co. b. Just Mfg. Co.

9. Trough Sink: a. EKO.

10. Fixture Carriers: a. Josam Mfg. Co. b. Smith Co. c. Tyler,Wade. d. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Hydromechanics Div.

11. Emergency Eyewashes: a. Bradley Co. b. Haws Co.

2.05 PUMPS

A. General: Provide factory,tested pumps, thoroughly cleaned, and painted with one coat of machinery enamel prior to shipment. Type, size, and capacity of each pump is listed in pump schedule. Provide pumps of same type by same manufacturer.

B. In,line Recirculation Pumps: 1. General: Provide in,line recirculation pumps where indicated, and of capacities as

scheduled. 2. Type: Horizontal, oil,lubricated, designed for 125 psi working pressure, 225°F (107°C)

continuous water temperature, and specifically designed for quiet operation. 3. Body: Bronze construction. 4. Shaft: Steel, ground and polished, integral thrust collar. 5. Bearings: Two horizontal sleeve bearings designed to circulate oil. 6. Seal: Mechanical, with carbon seal face rotating against ceramic seat. 7. Motor: Non,overloading at any point on pump curve, open, drip, proof, sleeve bearings,

quiet operating, rubber mounted construction, built,in thermal overload protection. 8. Coupling: Self,aligning, flexible coupling. 9. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. b. Bell & Gossett ITT; Fluid Handling Div. c. Grundfos.

2.06

A. Commercial Gas,Fired Water Heaters:

1. General: Provide commercial fully condensing design (94% to 99%) gas,fired water heaters of sizes and capacities as indicated on schedule. Provide U.L Listed and meet efficiency requirements of ASHRAE/IES 90.1b,1992. This heater shall be listed by SCAQMD Rule 1146.2 Low NOx.

2. Heater: Construct for working pressure of 160 PSI; boiler type hand hole cleanout; magnesium anode rod; 3/4” tapping for relief valve; glass lining on internal surfaces exposed to water.

3. Controls: the control shall be an integrated solid state temperature and ignition control device with integral diagnostics, LED fault display capability and a digital display of temperature settings.



4. Direct Venting: The heater(s) shall be suitable for venting PVC, ABS and/or CPVC for sealed combustion direct venting. The heater shall be factory assembled and tested. The power burner shall be of a design that requires no special calibrations on start up. The heater(s) shall be approved for 0” clearances to combustibles.

a. Freeze protection system having spring loaded damper power to open and spring to close.

5. Jacket: Insulate tank with vermin,proof glass fiber or foam insulation. Provide outer steel jacket with baked enamel finish over bonderized undercoating.

6. Accessories: Provide brass drain valve; 3/4” ASME pressure and temperature relief valve, ASME rated construction and cold water dip tube or vacuum relief valve (Watts #N36,M1) piped above tank.

7. Provide Condensate Neutralizing Tube for condensing flues and combustion chambers per manufacturer recommendations. Pipe to nearest floor drain.

8. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. PVI Industries, Inc.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which piping systems are to be installed. Verify actual locations of equipment, fixtures and/or piping connections prior to installation. Also examine floors and substrates, and conditions under which work is to be accomplished. Correct any incorrect locations of piping, and other unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF INTERIOR WATER PIPING

A. Install piping level with no pitch.

B. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying full insulation and servicing of valves.

C. Refer to Section 22 05 00 for hanger and support requirements.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF CONDENSATE PIPING

A. Route piping to closest open waste receptacle (i.e. floor drain, floor sink, mop service basin) or to roof drain or on to roof or grade per Local Code. If on to grade, do not discharge over walkway.

3.04 INSTALLATION OF BACKFLOW PREVENTERS

A. Install backflow preventers where indicated, and where required by governing authority having jurisdiction. Locate in same room as equipment being protected. Pipe relief outlet to nearest floor drain.

3.05 INSTALLATION OF PRESSURE REGULATING VALVES

A. Install pressure regulating valves where indicated. Provide inlet and outlet shutoff valves, and throttling valve bypass. Provide pressure gauge on valve outlet. Refer to details on drawings.



3.06 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND STORM AND SANITARY SEWER PIPING EXTERIOR TO BUILDING

A. General: Install piping in accordance with governing authorities having jurisdiction, except where more stringent requirements are indicated.

B. Utility Connections: Provide new tap connection to existing Sanitary Sewer Utility main as indicated. Coordinate tap requirements with governing sanitary district, provide all materials and labor necessary to comply with such requirements.

C. On,Site Storm Sewer Utility Connections: Make connections to existing piping so that finished work will conform as nearly as practicable to requirements specified for new work.

D. Inspect piping before installation to detect apparent defects. Mark defective materials with white paint and promptly remove from site.

E. Lay piping beginning at low point of system, true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert.

F. Install gaskets in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for use of lubricants, cements, and other special installation requirements.

G. Cleaning Piping: Clear interior of piping of dirt and other superfluous material as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in line and pull past each joint as it is completed. 1. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted conduit at end of day or whenever work stops.

3.07 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND STORM AND SANITARY DRAIN PIPING WITHIN BUILDING

A. General: Install underground building drains as indicated and in accordance with Local and International Plumbing Code. Lay underground building drains beginning at low point of systems, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install required gaskets in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for use of lubricants, cements, and other special installation requirements. Clean interior of piping of dirt and other superfluous material as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in line and pull past each joint as it is completed. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day or whenever work stops.

B. All soil and waste piping: Shall be run at a slope of not less 1/4" per foot (2.08%) for piping up to 4" in size. All piping 4" and over shall be run at a slope of not less than 1/8" (1.04%) per foot unless noted otherwise on Drawings. All storm drain piping shall be run at slopes indicated on the drawings.

C. Cast,iron Pipe: Install in accordance with applicable provisions of CISPI "Cast Iron Soil Pipe & Fittings Handbook".

3.08 INSTALLATION OF ABOVE GROUND STORM AND SANITARY DRAIN, WASTE AND VENT PIPING WITHIN BUILDING

A. General: Install all piping, as indicated and in accordance with the Local and International Plumbing Code.

B. Provide restraints and hangers as appropriate and in accordance with manufacturers recommendations based upon type of pipe, fittings, joints. Refer to Section 22 05 00.

C. Piping shall be run true, plumb, and straight, with all restraints and hangers adjusted to carry their proportional load and locked to prevent pipe "wag", misalignment, movement or shear.



D. Provide anchors for piping risers on every floor using riser clamps, wall brackets, knee brackets, and foot blocks for all vertical piping over 20 feet straight height.

E. All soil and waste piping shall be run at a slope of not less than 1/4" per foot (2.08%) for piping up to 4" in size unless noted otherwise. All piping 4" and over shall be run at a slope of not less than 1/8" (1.04%) per foot unless noted otherwise on the Drawings. All storm drain piping shall be run at slopes indicated on the drawings.

F. Bushings in soil waste or vent piping shall be prohibited. Tapped spigots or tees shall be used when changing from cast iron pipe to steel waste or vent piping, and for appropriate cleanout plugs.

G. All horizontal storm soil, waste and vent piping shall be supported from the building structure at not more than five (5) foot intervals. Cast iron no,hub pipe and fittings shall be supported within one foot of each side of couplings. All vertical storm soil and vent stacks shall be supported with riser clamps at each floor slab.

H. The waste connections between fixtures and their respective collection and venting systems shall consist of DWV nipples and drainage fittings.

I. All interior waste and vent piping up to 1 1/2" shall consist of Type “L” copper with drainage fittings. All piping 2" and over shall consist of service weight cast iron soil pipe and fittings.

J. All cast iron pipe and fittings shall have affixed thereon the CISPI grade mark of identification.

K. All vents protruding through the roof shall be not less than 3" size and extended to not less than 12" above the finished roof, and flashed with 24" x 24" x 4 lb. sheet lead. The flashing shall extend not less that 6" above the roof and the edges turned down into a hub type cast iron vent pipe, caulked in place and finished with hot poured lead, or per roofing manufacturer’s requirement.

L. All vents shall be located in accordance with jurisdictional code and in no case less than three (3) feet from roof edge or parapet, or wall line of an "on the roof structure". Locate on “inside” of roof pitch peak!

3.09 INSTALLATION OF DRAINAGE PIPING PRODUCTS

A. Cleanouts: Install in above ground piping and building drain piping as indicated, as required by Local and International Plumbing Code; and at each change in direction of piping greater that 45 degrees; at minimum intervals of 50'; and at base of each vertical soil or waste stack. Install floor and wall cleanout covers for concealed piping. Wall cleanouts shall be installed at a maximum height of 1',6" above finished floor unless otherwise indicated or directed on the plans. Do not locate at edges of tile fields.

3.10 INSTALLATION OF FLOOR DRAINS AND FLOOR SINKS

A. General: Install floor drains and floor sinks in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and in locations indicated.

B. Coordinate flashing work with work of waterproofing and adjoining substrate work.

C. Cover all drain strainers during building construction with heavyduty tape similar to duct tape.

D. Install drains at low points of surface areas to be drained, or as indicated. Set tops of drains flush with finished floor.



E. Install drain flashing collar or flange so that no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes, where penetrated.

F. Provide flashing (safepan) for each floor drain above grade, 24"x24" in size.

3.11 INSTALLATION OF TRAP PRIMERS

A. General: Install trap primers in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Pitch piping towards drain trap, minimum of 1/8" per floor (1%), adjust trap primer for proper flow. Provide trap primers as required by local code authorities and at all floor drains where loss of trap seal due to evaporation exists.

3.12 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

A. Piping Runouts to Fixtures: Provide soil and waste piping runouts to plumbing fixtures and drains, with approved trap, of sizes indicated; but in no case smaller than required by Local and International Plumbing Code.

B. Locate piping runouts as close as possible to bottom of floor slab supporting fixtures or drains.

C. Upon completion of installations, flush all traps and fill with water.

3.13 INSTALLATION OF ROOF DRAINS

A. General: Install roof drains in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and in locations indicated.

B. Coordinate flashing work with work of roofing, water,proofing and adjoining substrate work.

C. Provide flashing (safe pan) for each roof drain, 36" x 36" in size.

D. Coordinate with roofing as necessary to interface roof drains with roofing work.

E. Install roof drains at low points of surface areas to be drained, or as indicated.

F. Install drain flashing collar or flange so that no leakage occurs between roof drain and adjoining roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes, where penetrated.

G. Position roof drains so that they are accessible and easy to maintain.

H. During application of roofing, plug all roof drains with test plugs, remove plugs after roofing has cured.

I. Securely lock roof drain domes in place upon completion of construction.

3.14 INSTALLATION OF PLUMBING FIXTURES

A. General: Install plumbing fixtures of types indicated where shown and at indicated heights; in accordance with fixture manufacturer's written instructions, roughing,in drawings, and with recognized industry practices. Ensure that plumbing fixtures comply with requirements and serve intended purposes. Comply with applicable requirements of governing authority having jurisdiction pertaining to installation of plumbing fixtures.

B. Fasten plumbing fixtures securely to indicated supports or building structure; and ensure that fixtures are level and plumb. Secure plumbing supplies behind or within wall construction so as to be rigid, and not subject to pull or push movement.



C. Protect installed fixtures from damage during remainder of construction period.

3.15 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL FOR FIXTURES

A. Upon completion of installation of plumbing fixtures and after units are water pressurized, test fixtures to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. When possible, correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units and proceed with retesting.

B. Inspect each installed unit for damage to finish. If feasible, restore and match finish to original at site; otherwise, remove fixture and replace with new unit. Feasibility and match to be judged by Architect/Engineer. Remove cracked or dented units and replace with new units.

3.16 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING OF FIXTURES

A. Clean plumbing fixtures, trim, and strainers of dirt and debris upon completion of installation.

B. Adjust water pressure at drinking fountains, faucets, shower valves, and flush valves to provide proper flow stream and specified gpm.

C. Adjust or replace washers to prevent leaks at faucets and stops.

D. Transport, coordinate, and obtain as required per notes on Drawings.

3.17 INSTALLATION OF NATURAL GAS PIPING

A. Use sealants on metal gas piping threads which are chemically resistant to natural gas. Use sealants sparingly, and apply to only male threads of metal joints.

B. Remove cutting and threading burrs before assembling piping.

C. Do not install defective piping or fittings. Do not use pipe with threads which are chipped, stripped or damaged.

D. Plug each gas outlet, including valves, with threaded plug or cap immediately after installation and retain until continuing piping, or equipment connections are completed.

E. Ground gas piping electrically and continuously within project, and bond tightly to grounding connection.

F. Install drip,legs in gas piping where indicated, and where required by code or regulation.

G. Install "Tee" fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped, at bottom of pipe risers.

H. Use dielectric unions where dissimilar metals are joined together.

I. Install piping with 1/64" per foot (1/8%) downward slope in direction of flow.

J. Install piping parallel to other piping, but maintain minimum of 12" clearance between gas piping and steam or hydronic piping above 200°F (93°C).

K. Refer to Section 22 05 00 for hanger and support requirements.



3.18 GAS SERVICE

A. General: Arrange with Utility Company to provide gas service to building including gas meter, regulator, service shut,off valve, and gas load within 30 days after award of contract. Consult with Utility as to extent of its work, costs, fees and permits involved. Pay such costs and fees; obtain permits. Costs for actual installation of service and setting of meter by the utility company shall be paid by the owner. Coordinate size of concrete pad or wall brackets for utility company to set meter.

B. Extend building service line from gas meter into building. Provide full size plug valve on downstream side of meter. Enter building at a minimum of 12" above grade.


A. Gas Cocks: Provide at connection to gas train for each gas,fired equipment item; and on risers and branches where indicated.

B. Locate gas cocks where easily accessible, and where they will be protected from possible injury.

C. Pressure Regulating Valves: Install as indicated; comply with Utility requirements. Pipe atmospheric vent to outdoors, full size of outlet. Install gas shutoff valve upstream of each pressure regulating valve.

D. Verify venting requirements for pressure regulating valves in factory installed or factory supplied valve trains. Extend atmospheric vent to outdoors, full size of vent outlet when equipment is controlled by spark ignition. When equipment has standing pilot, pipe regulator vent(s) to combustion chamber. Verify regulator venting requirements with local authority prior to installation.

3.20 INSTALLATION OF PUMPS

A. General: Install plumbing pumps where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's published installation instructions, complying with recognized industry practices to ensure that plumbing pumps comply with requirements and serve intended purposes.

B. Access: Provide access space around plumbing pumps for service as indicated, but in no case less than that recommended by manufacturer.

C. Install in,line pumps, supported from piping system.

3.21 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING OF PUMPS

A. Alignment: Check alignment, and where necessary, realign shafts of motors and pumps within recommended tolerances by manufacturer.

B. Start,Up: Lubricate pumps before start,up. Start,up in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.22 INSTALLATION OF WATER HEATERS

A. General: Install water heaters in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations indicated, and maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances.

B. Support: Place units on concrete pads, orient so controls and devices needing service and maintenance have adequate access.



1. Flue: Connect flue to draft hood with gas,tight connection. Provide flue of minimum size as flue outlet on heater. Comply with gas utility requirements.

C. Allow for tube pull through top of unit. Keep area over top of unit free of obstructions. Provide unions and valves at all unit connections for removal of entire unit without dismantling connecting piping.

D. Provide dielectric fittings at unit connections.

E. Provide inlet and outlet pressure gauges on water, thermometers on hot water outlet and hot water recirculating inlet, and inlet, outlet and by,pass parts of boiler water diverting valve.

3.23 EXPANSION TANK

A. Install expansion tank in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. Provide unions and ball valves for complete isolation of the tank from the system.

C. Charge tank with proper air charge as recommended by manufacturer.

D. Tank tappings shall be provided as detailed or appropriate, ASME welded tank flanges or nipples.

E. Suspend tank from building structure.

END OF SECTION


DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS Florence Crittenton GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS OZ Architecture Project No. 113266.00 Section 23 00 00 - 1

SECTION 23 00 00

GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 - General Requirements, and applicable provisions elsewhere in the Contract Documents apply to work of Division 23.

B. In case of disagreement between Drawings and Specifications, or within either document itself, obtain written clarification from the Mechanical Engineer through the Architect. Failure to obtain clarification prior to bid will result in the better quality and greater quantity being required during the construction phase without additional reimbursement.

1.02 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEMS

A. The related work of Division 23 includes but is not limited to: 1. Section 23 00 00 – General Mechanical Requirements. 2. Section 23 00 10 – Mechanical Related Work. 3. Section 23 05 00 – HVAC Pipe, Valves and Pipe Specialties. 4. Section 23 05 48 – HVAC Vibration Control. 5. Section 23 05 53 – Mechanical Identification. 6. Section 23 05 93 – Testing, Adjusting and Balancing. 7. Section 23 07 00 – Mechanical Insulation. 8. Section 23 09 23 – Temperature Control Systems – DDC. 9. Section 23 09 30 – IBAS 10. Section 23 21 00 – HVAC Hydronic Systems. 11. Section 23 23 00 – Refrigerant Piping Systems. 12. Section 23 30 00 – Air Distribution. 13. Section 23 52 00 – Heat Generation. 14. Section 23 73 00 – Packaged Rooftop Units.


A. Work Included: Unless specified otherwise, provide all supervision, labor, materials, transportation, equipment, hauling, and services necessary for a complete and operational mechanical system. Provide all incidental items such as offsets, fittings, etc. required as part of the work even though not specifically shown on Contract Drawings or Specifications.

B. Inspection: Inspect work proceeding or interfacing with work of Division 23 sections prior to submitting bid and report any known or observed defects that affect the Mechanical Design to the General Contractor. Do not proceed with the construction work until defects are corrected.

1.04 REFERENCES

A. General: 1. For products or workmanship specified by Association, Trade or Federal Standards, comply

with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes.

2. The date of the standard is that which is in effect as of the date of the Contract Documents, except when a specific date is specified.




A. Materials and apparatus required for the work shall be new and of first-class quality; to be furnished, delivered, erected, connected and finished in every detail; and to be so selected and arranged so as to fit properly into the building spaces.

B. Unless otherwise specifically indicated, equipment and materials shall be installed in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer. This includes the performance of tests as recommended by the manufacturer.

1.06 EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS

A. The Mechanical Drawings show the general arrangement of piping, ductwork, mechanical equipment, and appurtenances, and shall be followed as closely as actual building construction and the work of other trades will permit.

B. The Architectural and Structural Drawings shall be considered part of the mechanical work insofar as these Drawings furnish this Division with information relating to design and construction of the building.

C. Field verify building dimensions governing mechanical work. Do not scale the Mechanical Drawings for dimensions. If field dimensions are not available take dimensions, measurements, locations, levels, etc. from the Architectural Drawings and the approved Shop Drawings submitted on the actual equipment to be furnished.

D. The Mechanical Contractor shall request of the Test and Balance (TAB) Contractor an early review of the Contract Documents for the purpose of identifying where proper balancing cannot be achieved. The report requirements are referred to in Division 23, 23 05 93, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing, “Submittals.” Forward a copy of the report to the mechanical engineer for review. The Mechanical Contractor shall modify the system as recommended by the TAB Contractor or refer unresolved issues to the Mechanical Engineer for resolution prior to ordering of ductwork and equipment. Unresolved balancing issues from untimely or incomplete application of these requirements will be the responsibility of the Mechanical Contractor to correct.

E. No extra compensation shall be claimed or allowed due to differences between the actual dimensions and those indicated on the Drawings.

F. Discrepancies: Examine Drawings and Specifications for other parts of the work, and if any discrepancies occur between the plans for the work of this Division and the plans for the work of others, report such discrepancies to the General Contractor and obtain written instructions for any changes necessary. Report any inconsistencies between the drawings and specifications and the installation requirements of equipment manufacturers.

G. Order of Precedence: The precedence of Mechanical Construction Documents is as follows: 1. Addenda and modifications to the Drawings and Specifications take precedence over the

original Drawings and Specifications. 2. Should there be a conflict within the Specifications or within Drawings of the same scale, the

more stringent or higher quality requirements shall apply. 3. In the Drawings, the precedence shall be figured dimensions over scaled dimensions and

noted materials over graphic indications. 4. Should a conflict arise between the Drawings and the Specifications the most stringent shall

have precedence. 5. Should there be a conflict in dimensions or locations between Mechanical Drawings and/or

Architectural/Structural Drawings, the Architectural/Structural Drawings shall have precedence.



1.07 EXAMINATION OF PROJECT SITE

A. Examine site carefully to determine conditions to be encountered, work to be performed, equipment, materials to be transported, stored, furnished, and other features applicable to completion of the work.

B. Study Drawings and Specifications, report inconsistencies, errors, omissions or conflicts with codes and ordinances.

C. Submittal of bid will indicate satisfactory examination of the Documents have been made, and applicable allowances included in the bid.


A. Refer to Architectural Drawings and Division 01 specifications for a list of applicable codes.

B. Execute work per Underwriters, Public Utility, Local and State Codes, Ordinances and applicable regulations. Obtain and pay for required permits, inspections, and certificates. Notify Architect of items not meeting said requirements.

C. Comply with latest editions of all applicable codes, standards, ordinances and regulations in effect as of the date of the Contract Documents.

D. If discrepancies occur between the Contract Documents and any applicable codes, ordinances, acts, or standards, the most stringent requirements shall apply.

E. Where hourly fire and smoke ratings are indicated or required, whether or not shown, provide components and assemblies meeting requirements of the American Insurance Association, Factory Mutual Insurance Association and listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

1.09 COORDINATION

A. The Contractor shall plan all of his work in advance, and shall inform the General Contractor of the proposed construction schedule and anticipated completion date upon request. Contractor shall complete the entire installation as soon as the condition of the remaining building construction will permit.

B. Before purchase, fabrication, or installation of items, determine if the installation will properly fit and can be installed as contemplated without interference with structural elements or the work of other trades.

C. Locations of pipes, ducts, switches, panels, equipment, and fixtures, shall be adjusted to accommodate the work or interferences anticipated and encountered. Determine the exact route and location of each pipe and duct prior to fabrication.

D. Right of Way: Lines which pitch shall have the right-of-way over those which do not pitch. Lines whose elevations cannot be changed shall have right-of-way over lines whose elevations can be changed.

E. Offsets, transitions and changes in direction of pipes and ducts shall be made as required to maintain proper head room and pitch of sloping lines whether or not indicated on the Drawings.

F. Where major conflicts occur, contractor shall rely upon the Architect/Engineer to make final decision regarding priority of right-of-way. Contractor shall request written clarification from the Architect/Engineer prior to conflict reaching critical stage requiring removal of previously installed equipment or system components either by himself or by other trades involved.



G. When directed by the Architect/Engineer, submit Shop Drawings showing interrelationship of various portions of work and work of other trades. Failure to properly coordinate may result in removal and relocation at expense to the Contractor.

H. Coordination Drawings for Acoustical and Drywall Ceilings, Plumbing, Fire Protection, HVAC and Electrical: 1. Coordination Drawings are required for the trades noted above. The HVAC contractor shall

prepare reproducible Coordination Layout and Installation Drawings (at least ¼” scale or as approved by the Architect) for resolution of interferences and conflicts with other trades.

2. The Plumbing, Fire Protection and Electrical Contractors, as well as acoustical and drywall ceiling contractors, are required to superimpose their Shop Drawings on the HVAC Drawings and verify layout and elevations to eliminate conflicts. Any conflicts shall be highlighted and these Drawings shall be forwarded to the Architect for resolution. Priority shall be given to “gravity” systems above the ceiling. Each trade shall initial acknowledgement that the proceeding has been completed. No fabrication of ductwork, fire protection, or other prefabricated systems shall begin until these Coordination Drawings have been completed and reviewed by the General Contractor and Architect/Engineers. Any Subcontractor that fabricates and installs items above the ceiling before the Coordinated Drawings are reviewed and conflicts resolved shall do so at their own risk, and be responsible to relocate said equipment in the event conflicts arise, at no cost to the Owner.

3. Duct layout on coordination drawings shall include duct size, length, fittings, and pressure class for each duct.

4. Additionally, all trades shall show the proposed location of access panels (for maintenance) in “hard” ceilings for access to HVAC boxes, control valves, fire damper motors, plumbing valves, fire protection drains, valves, light fixture remote ballasts, ceiling hung equipment, etc., for coordination with the reflected ceiling plans. Indicate on same Drawings the location of access panels in walls as well as location of plumbing cleanouts.

5. Upon Architect/Engineer completion of the review of the Coordination Drawings, the Design Team, General Contractor and Subcontractors shall conduct a pre-installation coordination meeting for all “fit-up” above ceilings. No ceiling shall be lowered without the expressed approval of the Owner and the Architect.

I. Coordinate all electrical work with Electrical Contractor. Read the Electrical Specification and report any inconsistencies. See “Electrical Wiring and Safety Device Work and Material Responsibilities” in this section.

J. Coordinate all cutting & patching with General Contractor.

K. Utility Interruptions: Coordinate mechanical utility interruptions with the Owner and the Utility Company. Plan work so that duration of the interruption is kept to a minimum.


A. Accessibility: 1. Contractor shall be responsible for the sufficiency of the size of shafts and chases and the

adequate clearance in double partitions and hung ceilings for proper installation of work. Coordinate these requirements with the General Contractor. Such spaces and clearances shall be kept to the minimum size required.

2. Locate all equipment which must be serviced, operated, or maintained in fully accessible positions. Furnish access doors for this purpose. Minor deviations from Drawings may be allowed to provide for better accessibility. Any changes shall be approved by the Architect prior to making the change.

3. Provide the General Contractor with the exact locations of access doors. Locations of these doors shall be submitted in sufficient time to be installed in the normal course of work.

4. Demonstration of access will be required prior to project completion. The contractor is responsible for providing reasonable and safe access for all system components. Contractor



to arrange with an Owner’s Representative a time for the demonstration prior to final punchlist.

B. Fabrication: Before any ductwork is fabricated and before installing and/or fabricating any lines of piping or ductwork the Contractor shall assure himself that they can be run as contemplated in cooperation with Contractors of other Divisions of the Work and the physical constraints of the Structural and Architectural Work.

C. Freeze Protection: Do not run pipes in outside walls, or locations where freezing may occur. Piping next to outside walls shall be in furred spaces with insulation between the piping and the outside wall. Insulation of piping shall not be considered freeze protection.

D. Scaffolding, Rigging and Hoisting: Provide scaffolding, rigging, hoisting and services necessary for erection and delivery into the premises of any equipment and apparatus furnished. Remove same from premises when no longer required.

1.11 SUBMITTALS:

A. Within thirty days after award of the Contract, submit to Architect complete catalog data and/or Shop Drawings for each item of material and for every manufactured item of equipment to be used in the work. Such data shall include specific performance data, material description, rating, capacity, dimensions, and type for each item of material, each manufactured item, and all component parts utilized in final operating mechanical system. Applicable data shall be underlined and each applicable item identified in each catalog by the same identification acronyms used on the Drawings.

B. Seismic Restraint Plan 1. The contractor shall provide a vibration and seismic restraint plan for projects designated a

Seismic Design Category C (with a seismic importance factor greater than 1.0), D, E, or F as found on the structural drawings. The plan shall include stamped and signed drawings for the state in which the project is located, details, equipment cutsheets, and analysis from one of the acceptable equipment manufacturers listed below for the entire project scope. The contractor will provide the selected equipment manufacturer with a copy of the drawings, specifications, soils reports and any other pertinent information necessary to perform the vibration and seismic restraint analysis per pertinent codes.

2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Mason Industries, Inc. b. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. c. M. W. Sausse & Co., Inc. d. Amber/ Booth, a VMC Company

C. This Contractor shall submit to the Architect the number of copies required by the General and Special Conditions of Division 01, but in no case less than four (4) copies. Electronic submittals shall be acceptable if approved by the architect.

D. Each item submitted shall bear the Contractor's stamp, be dated and signed certifying that he has reviewed and approved the Submittal.

E. For each item scheduled on the Drawings, submit a replication of that schedule indicating actual data of the submitted equipment in the schedule.

F. The review comments of the Architect and/or Engineer do not in any case supersede the Drawings and Specifications, and shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for deviations from the Drawings or Specifications unless the Contractor has called to the attention of the Architect and/or Engineer, in writing, such deviations at the time of submission, nor shall it relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors of any sort in the items submitted.



G. Test Reports: Submit certified test reports as required by various Sections of Division 23 showing compliance in accordance with the General Conditions of the Contract.

H. Deviations: It is the contractor’s responsibility to indicate deviations from the Plans and Specifications. Approval shall not be considered acceptance of the deviation unless it has been explicitly indicated.

1.12 SITE OBSERVATION REPORTS

A. During the construction period the Engineer may issue periodic site observation reports. The contractor shall immediately address the issues and provide a written response identifying the “Responsible Contractor,” “Date,” “Corrective Action Taken,” and “Recommendations.”

B. The written response must be returned to the Architect no later than (5) working days after receipt of the site observation report.


A. Substitutions: Comply with Division 01 & Instructions to Bidders.

B. Contractors desiring to use alternate equipment or materials and manufacturers or suppliers desiring to furnish alternate materials or equipment in lieu of those specified, shall submit requests for approval to the Engineer not less than seven (7) calendar days prior to scheduled closing date for receipt of proposals.

C. Materials and equipment are specified by manufacturer and catalog numbers. The manufacturers and catalog numbers are used to establish a degree of quality and style for such equipment and material.

D. When alternate or substitute materials and equipment are used, Contractor will be responsible for space requirement, configurations, performance, changes in bases, supports, structural members and openings in structure, electrical changes and other apparatus and trades that may be affected by their use. Contractor shall provide drawings for alternate/substitute equipment in detail equal to the construction documents.


A. General: Comply with Division 01.

B. Job Site Documents: Maintain at the job site, one record copy of the following: 1. Drawings 2. Specifications 3. Addenda 4. Reviewed Shop Drawings 5. Field Test Records

C. Do not use record documents for construction purposes. Maintain documents in clean, dry legible condition, apart from documents used for construction.

D. Record Information: Label each document "Record Document." Mark information with contrasting color using ink. Keep each record current. Do not permanently conceal any work until required information is recorded. Record the following information on drawings: 1. Horizontal and vertical location of underground utilities. 2. Location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction. 3. Field changes of dimension and detail. 4. Changes by change order or field order.



5. Details not on original Contract Drawings.

E. Contractor shall transfer all information on to CAD files. Provide electronic copy upon request.

F. Record the following information on Specifications: 1. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number and supplier of each product and item of

equipment actually installed. 2. Changes by change order or field order. 3. Other matters not originally specified.

G. Shop Drawings: Maintain Shop Drawings as record documents recording changes made after review as specified for drawings above.

1.15 ELECTRIC WIRING AND SAFETY DEVICE WORK AND MATERIAL RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Unless otherwise indicated, all mechanical equipment motors and controls shall be furnished, set in place, and wired in accordance with the following schedule: MD = Mechanical Division, ED = Electrical Division, TD = Temperature Control Division, I = Installer of equipment requiring electrical service.

B. Note: If Temperature Control Division is a subcontract to the Mechanical Contractor, both MD and TD shall fall under the responsibility of MD. If no Temperature Control Contractor is under contract, Mechanical Division shall assume all Temperature Control responsibilities.

Furnished Under




1. Other Equipment Motors/Starters I I ED I

2. Mechanical Equipment Motors MD MD ED TD

3. Mechanical Magnetic Motor Starters, VFD’s

MD MD ED TD

4. Control Wiring Regardless of Voltage

TD TD TD See footnote 1

TD

5. Control Components: Control Relays, Thermostats, Control Transformers, EP, PE Switches


TD

6. Temperature Control Panels, Time Clocks, Controllers


TD

7. Valve and Damper Motors and Actuators


TD

8. Control Valves, Solenoid Valves TD MD -- TD

9. Control Dampers Integral with a Fan Unit

MD MD -- --

10. Control Dampers (duct mounted) TD MD -- TD 11. Thermowells in Piping TD MD -- --

12. Smoke Duct Detectors (including relays)

ED See footnote 3

MD See footnote 3

ED See footnote 4

ED See footnote 3

13. Fire and Smoke Dampers MD MD ED ED See footnote 2

14. Pushbutton Stations and Pilot Lights MD MD ED TD See footnote 4

15. Manual Operating Switches MD MD ED -- See footnote 5

16. Multi-speed Switches (not integral with Equipment served)

MD MD ED -- See footnote 5

17. Fused and Unfused Disconnect Switches & Thermal Overload Switches

ED See footnote 6

ED See footnote 6

ED --

18. Contactors ED ED ED ED

19. Temporary Heating Connection MD MD ED TD



Furnished Under




20. Boiler Controls, Boiler Burner Control Panels Internally Wired

MD MD TD See footnote 1

TD

21. Remote Disconnect Switches for Boiler (Heating & Domestic HW) Controls per ASME-CSD-1.

TD TD See footnote 7

ED See footnote 8

TD

1. Footnote 1: It is the intention of this specification for all conduit and wiring which connects to

control equipment or provides controls to mechanical equipment to be provided by the Temperature Control Contractor. Other portions of the specification which may be in conflict with this concept shall be brought to the attention of the engineer for clarification prior to bidding the project. The ED shall provide line voltage wiring conduit and junction boxes for the express purpose of temperature controls. It shall be the responsibility of the Temperature Control Contractor to coordinate the location of the junction boxes (if not otherwise shown on the Electrical Drawings) and to utilize these junction boxes for temperature control wiring. The Temperature Control Contractor shall extend line and/or low voltage wiring from junction boxes to all mechanical and control components which require control wiring.

2. Footnote 2: Wiring from the fire alarm electrical contacts to fire alarm system control panel by ED; all mechanical equipment control function wiring by TD. ED to coordinate locations of electrical contact with MD. MD to coordinate locations of duct smoke detectors with ED.

3. Footnote 3: MD shall assist in locating the detectors, but ED shall verify that the installation meets the manufacturer’s installation guidelines, and is responsible for correctly ordering the smoke detectors. MD shall mount the detectors in a manner directed by ED according to manufacturer’s recommendation. If the detector is used for operation of a smoke/fire damper, the control wiring will be by ED. If the unit is used for fan shutdown, the fire alarm functions will be by ED and the wiring to the starter for a direct shutdown will be by MD, typically by the TD. Any signal required for the sequence of operation shall be coordinated between MD and ED, with ED providing a point of connection and MD responsible for the rest of the installation.

4. Footnote 4: For connection to auxiliary contacts if required. 5. Footnote 5: Device is used in the power wiring circuit to the equipment. Control functions do

not exist. 6. Footnote 6: Unless furnished with equipment. 7. Footnote 7: A manually operated remote shutdown switch(es) shall be located just outside

the boiler room door(s) and marked for easy identification. Consideration should be given to the type and location of the switch to safeguard against tampering. If the boiler room door is on the building exterior, the switch should be located just inside the door. If there is more than one door to the boiler room, there should be a switch located at each door. The emergency shutdown switch shall be wired to the boiler safety circuit relay and shall disconnect all power to the boiler safety circuit. Use explosion proof switches at indoor switch locations.

8. Footnote 8: ED shall provide a separate 120 volt branch circuit and a junction box at each boiler room door. Junction box location shall be as indicated on Mechanical Drawings and shall be coordinated with TD prior to installation.

C. All temperature control conduit and wiring will be furnished and installed under temperature control subcontract. In the event that temperature control is not under separate contract, Mechanical Contractor shall assume all temperature control subcontract responsibilities.

D. Division 26 shall furnish and install all conduit and wiring required for power wiring carrying equipment full load amperage to all mechanical equipment unless shown otherwise.

E. Provide Division 26 with a complete summary list of all mechanical equipment and line voltage control requiring electric power within 30 days after award of contract. This list shall summarize



equipment power loads, line voltage control requirements, quantities, and locations of equipment and connection points. If any HVAC equipment is required to run on emergency power, the list shall note that requirement along with the requirement for the building temperature controls systems to also be under emergency power.

F. All starters and VFD’s shall be furnished under Division 23.


A. Deliver and store materials and equipment in manufacturer's unopened containers fully identified with manufacturer's name, trade name, type, class, grade, size and color.

B. Protection: Make provisions for coordination with Owner and other Contractors for safe storage of materials and equipment. Store materials and equipment off the ground and under cover, protected from damage.

C. All items subject to moisture damage, such as controls, shall be stored in a dry, heated space.

D. Large Items: Make arrangements with other Contractors on the job for introduction into the building of equipment too large to pass through finished openings. Schedule delivery of large equipment requiring special openings as required for installation without delaying the work of other project trades.

E. Acceptance: Check and sign for materials to be furnished by Division 23 and other trades for installation under Division 23 upon delivery. Assume responsibility for the storage and safekeeping of such materials from time of delivery until final acceptance.

F. Inspection: Stored material shall be readily accessible for inspection by the Architect until installed.

1.17 WARRANTIES

A. Warranty: In accordance with Division 01, provide a written warranty to the Owner covering the entire mechanical work to be free from defective materials, equipment and workmanship. If the warranty period is not defined in Division 01, the minimum warranty period will be for a period of two years after Date of Acceptance. Purchase of manufacturer’s extended warranty may be required to comply with the warranty period requirement. During this period provide labor and materials as required to repair or replace defects at no additional cost to the Owner. Provide certificates for such items of equipment which have warranties in excess of two years. Submit to the General Contractor.

B. This warranty will be in addition to the terms of any specific equipment warranties or warranty modifications resulting from use of equipment for temporary heat or ventilation.

1.18 SCHEDULE OF TESTING

A. Provide testing in accordance with the General Conditions of the Contract. Make all specified tests on piping, ductwork and related systems as necessary. Demonstrate the proper operation of equipment installed under this project.

B. Equipment shall not be tested, or operated for any purpose until fully lubricated in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and until connections to fully operative systems have been accomplished.

C. A schedule of testing shall be drawn up by the Division 23 Contractor in such a manner that it will show areas tested, test pressure, length of test, date, time and signature of testing personnel. All



testing must be performed in the presence of the General Contractor's representative; his signature for verification of the test must appear on the schedule. At completion of testing, the schedule shall then be submitted in triplicate to the Architect.

D. Make sure operational and performance tests are made on seasonal equipment.

E. Complete all tests required by Code Authorities, such as smoke detection, life safety, fire protection and health codes.

1.19 DEMONSTRATION OF ACCESS

A. The Contractor shall demonstrate to the Owner’s designated representative the access to all switches, valves, actuators, dampers, motors, lubrication lines, sensors and panels. Contractor shall correct deficiencies noted by the Owner. Refer outstanding issues to the Architect/Engineer for resolution. Contractor to be responsible for arranging the demonstration prior to final inspection.

1.20 CERTIFICATES AND KEYS

A. Certificates: Upon completion of the work, deliver to the General Contractor one copy of Certificate of Final Inspection.

B. Keys: Upon completion of work, submit keys for mechanical equipment, panels, etc. to the General Contractor.

1.21 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Include the following information in addition to operation and maintenance information required by Division 1 standards and other Division 23 standards.

B. Submit three (3) typed and bound copies of the maintenance manual, 8-1/2" x 11" in size, to the Architect, for review and approval. These approved copies shall then be transmitted to the Owner. Verify quantity requirement with Div. 1 standards.

C. The manual shall be enclosed in a stiff-back, three-ring binder and shall have: 1. Table of Contents, Equipment List with identification used in contract documents. 2. Alphabetical list of all system components including the name, address, and 24-hour phone

number of the company responsible for servicing each item during the first year of operation. 3. Operating instructions for complete system, including procedures for fire or failure of major

equipment and procedures for normal starting/operating/shutdown and long-term shutdown. 4. Maintenance instructions, including valves, valve tag and other identified equipment lists,

proper lubricants and lubricating instructions for each piece of equipment and necessary cleaning/replacing/adjusting schedules.

5. Manufacturer's data on each piece of equipment, including: a. Installation instructions. b. Drawings and Specifications (approved Shop Drawings). c. Parts lists. d. Complete wiring and temperature control diagrams. (Approved Shop Drawings). e. Completed and approved TAB report.

6. In addition to the "Operation and Maintenance Manual", and keyed to it, equipment shall be identified and tagged as specified in Section 23 05 53 - Mechanical Identification including the following: a. Identify starters, disconnect switches, and manually operated controls, except integral

equipment switches with permanently applied, legible markers corresponding to operating instructions in the "Operation and Maintenance Manual".

b. Tag manual operating valves with 1-1/2" diameter brass tags attached with chains. Tags shall be sequence numbered with legible metal stamps.



c. Provide a typed tag list or schedule mounted under glass in the Equipment Room stating number, location, and function of each tagged item. Insert a copy of tag list in each "Operation and Maintenance Manual."

1.22 INSTRUCTIONAL SESSIONS

A. Be responsible for scheduling instructional meetings for maintenance personnel on the proper operation and maintenance of all mechanical systems, using the maintenance manual as a guide. These meetings must be scheduled through the Architect or General Contractor and with enough advanced notice that all personnel can be notified. Provide (2) 8 hour sessions.

B. Video tape instructional sessions for the Owner’s future use.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Applicable)

END OF SECTION


DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS Florence Crittenton MECHANICAL RELATED WORK OZ Architecture Project No. 113266.00 Section 23 00 10 - 1

SECTION 23 00 10

MECHANICAL RELATED WORK

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section.


A. Types of mechanical related work specified in this section include the following: 1. Motors. 2. Starters. 3. Access Doors. 4. Variable Frequency Drives. 5. Temporary Heat. 6. Cutting and Patching.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MOTORS

A. Motor Characteristics: Except where more stringent requirements are indicated, comply with the following requirements for motors of mechanical work:

1. Temperature Rating: Rated for 104F (40°C) environment with maximum 122F (50°C) temperature rise for continuous duty at full load (Class A Insulation).

2. Altitude Deration: Motors to be furnished to maintain specified rated service factor at altitude of project.

3. Starting Capability: Provide each motor capable of making starts as frequently as indicated by automatic control system, and not less than 5 starts per hour for manually controlled motors.

4. Phases and Current Characteristics: Provide squirrel-cage induction polyphase motors for 3/4 hp and larger. Provide capacitor-start single-phase motors for 1/2 hp and smaller; except 1/6 hp and smaller may, at equipment manufacturer's option, be split-phase type. Coordinate current characteristics with power specified in Division 26 sections and with individual equipment requirements specified in other Division 23 requirements. For 2-speed motors provide 2 separate windings on polyphase motors. Do not purchase motors until power characteristics available at locations of motors have been confirmed, and until rotation directions have been confirmed.

5. Power Factor: All motors rated greater than 5 hp shall have a Power Factor of not less than 95% under rated load conditions. The 95% PF may be obtained by design of the motor or by providing a capacitor. Capacitors, if provided to obtain the 95% PF, must be switched with the motor.

6. Efficiency: 1-1/2 HP and larger: shall meet the efficiency ratings of the latest NEMA Premium efficiency rating per IEEE Test Procedure 112A, Method B.

7. Service Factor: 1.15 for three-phase motors and 1.35 for single-phase motors. 8. RPM: Motors shall be a maximum of 1750 RPM unless special application as indicated on

drawings.

B. Motor Construction: Provide general purpose, continuous duty motors, NEMA Design "B" or "C" where required for high starting torque. Provide inverter duty motors, for all variable speed motor applications and on all motors 7.5 hp and larger: 1. Frames: NEMA No. 56.



2. Bearings: Ball or roller bearings with inner and outer shaft seals, re-greasable except permanently sealed where motor is normally inaccessible for regular maintenance. Provide double shielded ball bearings in accordance with ANSI-B 3.16-1972. Bearings shall be rated for an L-10 life of 20,000 hours.

3. Where belt drives and other drives produce lateral or axial thrust in motor, provide bearings designed to resist thrust loading. Refer to individual sections of Division 23 for fractional-hp light-duty motors where sleeve-type bearings are permitted.

4. Enclosure Type: Except as otherwise indicated, provide open drip-proof motors for indoor use where satisfactorily housed or remotely located during operation, and provide guarded drip-proof motors where exposed to contact by employees or building occupants. Provide weather-protected Type I for outdoor use, Type II where not housed. Refer to individual sections of Division 23 for other enclosure requirements.

5. Overload Protection: Provide built-in thermal overload protection and, where indicated, provide internal sensing device suitable for signaling and stopping motor at starter.

6. Noise Rating: Provide "Quiet" rating on motors. Motors shall not exceed 80 DB at full speed and power.

7. Insulation: NEMA Class F. 8. Altitude: Derate motors for an elevation of 5,400 feet not utilizing service factor. 9. Belt Drive Motors: 5 hp and larger provide dual push-pull adjustments screws for motor

mounts.

C. Name Plate: Provide metal nameplate on each motor, indicating full identification of manufacturer, ratings, characteristics, construction, special features and similar information.

D. Manufacturer: Except where item of mechanical equipment (which otherwise complies with requirements) must be integrally equipped with motor produced by another manufacturer, provide motors for mechanical equipment manufactured by one of the following: 1. ABB 2. Baldor Electric Co. 3. General Electric Co. 4. Louis Allis Div.; Litton Industrial Products, Inc. 5. Reliance Electric Co. 6. Gould 7. Lincoln 8. Toshiba 9. TECO-Westinghouse

2.02 STARTERS

A. Motor Starter Characteristics: Comply with NEMA standards and NEC. Provide enclosures NEMA Type as required with padlock ears, and with frames and supports for mounting on wall, floor or panel as indicated. Where starter location is not within sight of motor, provide fused disconnect switch within sight of motor. Provide type and size of starter recommended by motor manufacturer and equipment manufacturer for applicable protection and start-up condition; refer to individual equipment sections for basic load requirements. 1. Manual Switches: Provide manual switch and pilot light for motors 1/2 hp and smaller,

except where interlock or automatic operation is indicated. Provide extra switch positions and pilot lights for multi-speed motors. a. Overload Protection: Provide melting alloy type thermal overload relays.

2. Magnetic Starters: Provide magnetic starters for motors 3/4 hp and larger, and for smaller motors where interlock or automatic operation is indicated. Include the following: a. Heavyduty oiltight type hand-off-auto switch and pilot lights, properly arranged for

single-speed operation as indicated. b. Trip-free thermal overload relays, each phase. c. Built-in 120-volt control circuit transformer, fused from line side and on secondary side. d. Control circuit conductors to be protected in accordance with Article 250-5, Exception 5,

of the National Electric Code.



e. Externally operated manual reset. f. Undervoltage release or protection. g. Hand-off-auto switch. h. Single Phasing Protection: All starters shall include a phase protection relay mounted

and wired in the starter enclosure, equal to time-mark 257 series or motor saver model 201. Starters for motors 5 hp and less may meet this requirement either by supplying the phase protection relay as above, or by providing a current differential trip mechanism in the overload relay which advances the trip setting 25% or more under single phase conditions. Submittals must include documentation of the type of single phasing protection is used.

i. Provide spare normally open and normally closed contacts. j. With two speed starters, include an adjustable time delay device within starter

enclosure to allow the motor to come to a complete stop when switching from high to low speed. Two speed starters shall have heavyduty 4 position rotary switch, "auto-off-low-high".

B. Weather Protection: Provide weather-proof mounting of magnetic starters for equipment outside of the building.

C. Unless furnished otherwise, provide over current protection for each motor. Coordinate with Division 26.

D. Motor Starter Manufacturer: Provide motor starters for mechanical equipment manufactured by one of the following: 1. ABB. 2. Allen-Bradley Co. 3. General Electric Co. 4. Square D Co. 5. Siemens 6. Baldor

2.03 ACCESS DOORS

A. Furnish access doors where shown on Drawings and at all locations where required for access to concealed valves, shock absorbers, dampers, cleanouts, control devices, coils, and equipment servicing. Access doors shall be a minimum of 20” x 20” for hand access and 24” x 24” for head and shoulder access, or as indicated.

B. Standard Doors: 1. Frames: 16 ga. steel. 2. Panels: 14 ga. steel. 3. Finish: Chemically bonded prime coat of baked enamel.

4. Hinge: Concealed spring hinges openable to 175; removable pins. Provide number of hinges as recommended by manufacturer for size of door.

5. Locking Devices: Flush steel, screw driver operated, cam type locks. All access doors below 8'-0" in public areas shall be key-operated cylinder lock with two keys.

6. Style of doors shall be appropriate for architectural finish at door location. Furnish masonry anchors where required.

C. Fire Rated Doors: 1. Frames: 16 gauge steel. 2. Panels: Sandwich type, 20 gauge steel sheets, manufacturer's standard insulated core. 3. Finish: Chemically bonded prime coat of baked enamel. 4. Hinge: Continuous type, steel with stainless steel pin. 5. Closer: Automatic closing mechanism. 6. Locking Devices: Self latching, key-operated cylinder lock with two keys; interior, latch

release mechanism.



7. Style of doors shall be appropriate for architectural finish at door location. 8. Fire rated doors shall have components and assemblies meeting requirements of the

American Insurance Association, Factory Mutual Insurance Association and listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

D. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Cesco. 2. Karp Associates, Inc. 3. Meadowcraft, Inc. 4. Milcor Div; Inryco Inc. 5. Nystrom, Inc.

2.04 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES

A. Provide a variable-speed adjustable-frequency drive system, fully tested by the manufacturer before shipment. Start-up services shall be provided by the manufacturer at the installation site for inspection and adjustment. Submit a complete wiring diagram for approval by the Engineer.

B. Warranty: The drive system shall be warranted by the manufacturer for a period of 36 months from date of shipment.

C. Provide a NEMA 1, Adjustable Frequency Controller (AFC) as noted on the plans: 1. The adjustable frequency controller shall be solid state type and performance matched to the

energy efficient motor. 2. The adjustable frequency controller shall convert 480 or 208 volt, +10 to -5%, three phase,

A-C power for stepless motor control from 10% to 110% of base speed. All components shall mount within the adjustable frequency controller enclosure unless otherwise specified.

3. The AFC and components shall be UL listed. The AFC shall comply with the applicable requirements of the latest standards of ANSI, IEEE and the National Electric Code.

4. The AFC shall be designed and constructed to operate within the following service conditions: a. Elevation: to 5,300 Ft. without derating.

b. Ambient Temperature Range: 32F - 104F (0° - 40° C). c. Atmosphere: non-condensing relative humidity to 95%. d. A-C Line Voltage Variation: 5% to 10%. e. A-C Line Frequency Variation: +2 Hz. f. Minimum efficiency of 97% at 100% speed and 100% torque. g. Displacement power factor: Minimum 98% over entire speed range. h. Power unit rating basis: 100% current continuous. i. Capacity overload 110% for one minute at 40 degrees C.

5. The AFC individual enclosures shall be NEMA 1 – Indoor Non-Hazardous or NEMA 3R – Outdoor Non-Hazardous, with hinged front door and line circuit breaker with double lugs and side openings for Cross Bus Cables. Cabinets shall be factory prewired and assembled.

6. Each AFC shall have the following basic features: a. On/Off switch. b. Auto/Manual switch. c. Speed selection. d. Hz controlled speed range. e. Auxiliary contacts for remote indication of AFC fault condition and on-off status. f. Start-stop and speed selection with coast-to-rest standard or ramp-to-rest by jumper

selection on "stop". g. Input fuses or breakers. h. Insensitive to incoming power phase sequence. i. Acceleration/Deceleration control adjustable over range of 2 to 180 seconds by

separate ramps. j. Adjustable volts/hertz and adjustable voltage boost.



k. Output frequency stabilized to +0.25% of set speed for +10% to -5% change in line

voltage or 59F (15°C) change in ambient temperature. l. Three-phase output voltage regulated at +1% of rated voltage with +10% to -5%

variations in plant power. m. Automatic shutoff under output short circuit conditions or when load current can

damage the drive. n. Line transient protection prevents power line transients from harming the controller. o. Provisions for remote start-stop, and speed control. p. Monitor lamps for each power stage provide immediate indication of drive functioning. q. A circuit breaker providing a positive disconnect on all 3 phases of the incoming A-C

line. The circuit breaker shall be mounted inside the controller enclosure and include a mounting bracket and through-the-door interlocking handle with provisions for padlocking: 1) Circuit breakers shall be thermal magnetic molded case current limiting type.

r. Thermal overload relay designed to protect one A-C motor, operated on AFC output from extended overload operation.

s. Shall enable the AFC to follow a 0-5, 1-5, 4-20, 10-50, ma; 0-4, 0-8, 0-10, VC-C grounded or ungrounded signal from a process controller and shall permit operation of the controller over and 11:1 speed range.

t. Shall provide a positive disconnect or contactor between the output terminals of the AFC controller and the motor being controlled. When an AFC stop command is initiated, the contactor shall immediately open if coast-to-rest operation is selected. If ramp-to-rest operation is selected, the AFC, upon stop command, shall first bring the motor to a controlled stop after which the contactor drops out. In either mode of operation, when start command is initiated, the contactor shall first close before the AFC converter or invertor sections begin operation.

D. Arrange VFD to provide automatic restart after trip condition from over current, overvoltage, under voltage, over temperature, Drive shall shut down and require manual reset and restart if automatic reset/restart function is not successful after five attempts.

E. VFD shall incorporate energy saver circuit which shall improve motor efficiency at reduced speeds.

F. Mount input line reactor within VFD enclosure to limit total harmonic distortion (THD) on input lines to 3% per IEEE-519.

G. Include critical speed avoidance circuit for selection of critical speed with rejection band centered on that speed. Drive shall ignore any speed signals requiring driver operation within rejection band.

H. Manual Bypass: 1. Manual bypass shall provide all the circuitry necessary to transfer the motor from the AFC to

the power line, or from the line to the controller while the motor is at zero speed. 2. Two motor contactors, electrically interlocked, shall be utilized. One contactor is to be

between the controller and the motor. The other contactor is to be between the bypass power line and the motor providing across-the-line starting. Motor overload protection is to be provided in both the controller mode and the bypass mode.

3. The bypass section door shall include a switch to transfer motor operation from drive to line or line to drive, and a pilot light to indicate whether motor is operating in drive or line mode.

4. The bypass circuitry shall include a fused disconnect switch or circuit breaker to provide a means of disconnecting all power to both the bypass circuitry and the controller. The disconnected switch or circuit breaker shall be door interlocked and padlockable. The fuses or circuit breaker shall be sized to provide short circuit protection for the motor when in the bypass mode per the NEC.



I. Accessories: Where the building walls are not suitable for mounting the AFC, a floor stand kit shall be provided.

J. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. ABB. 2. Reliance Electric. 3. Robicon. 4. Siemens 5. Mitsubishi

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION OF MOTORS AND STARTERS

A. Install motors on motor mounting systems in accordance with motor manufacturer's instructions, securely anchored to resist torque, drive thrusts, and other external forces inherent in mechanical work. Secure sheaves and other drive units to motor shafts with keys and Allen set screws, except motors of 1/3 hp and less may be secured with Allen set screws on flat surface of shaft. Unless otherwise indicated, set motor shafts parallel with machine shafts.

B. Install starters and wiring devices securely supported and anchored, and in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Locate for proper operational access, including visibility, and for safety.

C. Install control connections for motors to comply with NEC and applicable provisions of Division 26 sections.

3.02 ACCESS TO MECHANICAL WORK

A. Installation: 1. Deliver access doors to General Contractor for installation and provide instructions for their

location. Exact location of access doors to be as directed by Mechanical Contractor and Architect/Engineer.

2. Furnish all access doors whether shown or not. 3. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation of access doors. 4. Coordinate installation with work of other trades. 5. Set frames accurately in position and securely attach to supports with face panels plumb or

level in relation to adjacent finish surfaces. 6. Access door location shall be coordinated with Architect/Engineer prior to installation. All

access panels not coordinate will run the risk of removal and relocation at the epense of the contractor.

7. Install access doors for the following concealed equipment: a. Manual volume dampers. b. Valves. c. Control devices. d. Fire dampers and fire/smoke dampers. e. Coils. f. Other mechanical equipment requiring service.

B. Adjust and Clean: 1. Adjust hardware and panels after installation for proper operation. 2. Remove and replace panels or frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES

A. General: Install variable frequency drive systems in accordance with the manufacturer’s instruction.



B. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer’s wiring diagram submittal to Electrical installer. 1. Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer’s submittal and

installation requirements of Division-26 sections. Do not proceed with equipment start-up until wiring installation is acceptable to equipment installer.

2. Examination: a. Contractor to verify that job site conditions for installation meet factory recommended

and code-required conditions for VFD installation prior to start-up, including clearance spacing, installation of the motor wiring, and installation per the manufacturer’s recommendations shall be verified.

b. The VFD is to be covered and protected from installation dust and contamination until the environment is cleaned and ready for operation. The VFD shall not be operated while the unit is covered.

3. Start-up Service: a. The manufacturer shall provide start-up commissioning of the VFD and its optional

circuits by a factory certified service technician who is experienced in start-up and repair services. Sales personnel and other agents who are not factory certified shall not be acceptable as commissioning agents. Start-up services shall include checking for verification of proper operation and installation for the VFD, its options and its interface wiring to the building automation system.

3.04 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Openings in New Construction – Provisions for New Openings: Verify all openings required in the new construction in connection with the work under Division 23 with the Architectural and Structural Drawings. Meet with and verify same with the General Contractor who will assign the work to the appropriate contractor to provide all openings in the new construction of the correct size and location in walls, floors or through roofs required for the installation of the mechanical work.

B. Cutting in New Construction: Failure on the part of the Division 23 Contractor to make the above arrangements for required openings shall cause the cost of cutting and patching for the necessary openings or the installation of his work to be borne by him, either by having the cutting done by the appropriate contractor as assigned by the General Contractor or in the form of performing the required cutting himself. In either case, all patching shall be done by the appropriate finishing contractor as determined by the General Contractor. No cutting or drilling of holes shall be done without approval of the Architect/Engineer.

C. Patching in New Construction: 1. The appropriate finishing contractor as determined by the General Contractor shall patch all

openings in the new structure. All openings made in fire-rated walls, floors, or ceilings, shall be patched and made tight to conform to the fire rating for the enclosure. All materials used in patching shall match the materials specified in the Architectural Specifications and all patched areas shall be restored to the specified finish surface to the satisfaction of the Architect.

2. The Division 23 Contractor shall pay the appropriate Finishing Contractor as determined by the General Contractor for all patching resulting from cutting to accommodate mechanical work.

3.05 HEATING SYSTEM USED FOR TEMPORARY HEAT DURING CONSTRUCTION

A. Permanent heating system shall not be used unless approved in writing.

B. If for any reason the heating system has been placed into operation, it shall not be shut down except for moderate weather, and all heated areas shall be maintained at a minimum temperature of 50°F, 24 hours a day. Building must be totally enclosed; no temporary barriers.



C. When any air-handling equipment is used for temporary heat, the filters shall be installed and maintained. Before building acceptance by Owner, these units shall be thoroughly cleaned and new filters shall be installed. This is over and above the set of filters to be provided the Owner as called for in the specifications. Coils shall be cleaned if necessary, as determined by the Architect or Engineer: 1. Any and all systems being used for temporary heat shall become the contractor's

responsibility to maintain, and be put into first class working order before acceptance by the Owner.

2. Any warranties that start with the use of equipment for temporary heat shall be personally extended by the contracting firm holding the prime contract for construction, so that the Owner will have his two-year warranty from date of acceptance.

END OF SECTION


DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS Florence Crittenton HVAC PIPE, VALVES & PIPE SPECIALTIES OZ Architecture Project No. 113266.00 Section 23 05 00 - 1

SECTION 23 05 00

HVAC PIPE, VALVES & PIPE SPECIALTIES

PART 1 GENERAL




A. Types of equipment specified in this section include the following: 1. Pipes and Pipe Fittings. 2. Valves. 3. Pipes Specialties. 4. Expansion Devices. 5. Supports and Anchors. 6. Meters and Gages.


A. Codes and Standards: 1. Welding: Qualify welding procedures, welders and operators in accordance with ASME

B31.1, or ASME B31.9, as applicable, for shop and project site welding of piping work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Shall be of material, weight, ASTM and ANSI Designation, and pressure ratings as follows unless specifically excepted otherwise.

B. Hydronic Piping (Heating Water): 1. Pipe Size 2" and Smaller: Black steel pipe; ASTM A-53, Type S (seamless) or Type F

(furnace-butt welded); Schedule 40; Class 125 cast-iron fittings with threaded joints. 2. Pipe Size 2" and Smaller: Copper pipe; Type L ASTM B88, hard-drawn temper; wrought-

copper fittings with soldered joints (95-5 tin antimony solder). 3. Pipe Size 2 1/2" through 12": Black steel pipe; ASTM A-53, Type E (electric resistance

welded)or Type S (seamless); Schedule 40; 150 wrought-steel with welded and flanged joints.

C. Refrigeration Piping: 1. Pipe Size 3" and Smaller: Copper pipe; Type L, hard-drawn temper; wrought-copper,

solder-joint fittings; soldered joints. 2. Tube Size 4-1/8" and Smaller: Copper tube; Type ACR, hard-drawn temper; wrought-

copper, solder-joint fittings; soldered joints. 3. Soldered Joints: Solder joints using silver-copper zinc solder, ASTM B 260-62T, BAG-2.

2.02 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING MATERIALS/PRODUCTS

A. Welding Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide welding materials as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements.



1. Comply with Section II, Part C, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for welding materials.

B. Soldering Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide soldering materials as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. 1. Tin-Antimony Solder: ASTM B 32, Grade 95TA. 2. Silver-Copper-Zinc Solder: ASTM B260-62T, Bag-2. (refrigeration piping only)

C. Gaskets for Flanged Joints: ANSI B16.21; full-faced for cast- iron flanges; raised-face for steel flanges, unless otherwise indicated.

2.03 VALVES

A. General: Provide valves of types and pressure ratings indicated; provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide end connections which properly mate with pipe, tube, and equipment connections. Where more than one type is indicated, selection is Installer's option. Valves shall be manufactured in accordance with all applicable M.S.S. Standards.

B. Sizes: Unless otherwise indicated, provide valves of same size as upstream pipe size.

C. Operators: Provide handwheels, fastened to valve stem, for valves other than quarter-turn. Provide lever handle for quarter-turn valves, 6" and smaller, other than plug valves. Provide one wrench for every 10 plug valves. Provide gear operators for quarter-turn valves 8" and larger. Provide chain-operated sheaves and chains for overhead valves as indicated.

D. Acceptable Manufacturer’s 1. Swing Check Valves:

a. Hammond/Milwaukee Valve Corp. b. Nibco, Inc. c. Watts.

2. Drain Valves: a. Hammond/Milwaukee Valve Corp. b. Nibco, Inc. c. Prier d. United Bras

3. Ball Valves: a. Apollo. b. Hammond/Milwaukee Valve Corp. c. Nibco, Inc. d. Watts Co.

4. Butterfly Valves: a. Grinnel b. Hammond/Milwaukee Valve Corp. c. Keystone. d. Nibco, Inc.

5. Wafer Check Valves: a. Stockham/Crane. b. Hammond/Milwaukee Co.

6. Lift Check Valves: a. Hammond/Milwaukee Co. b. Nibco. c. Stockham/Crane.

7. Balance Valve (2" and smaller Venturi Type): a. Flowset-Flow Design Inc. b. Gerand.

8. Balance Valve (2" and smaller variable CV orifice type):



a. Armstrong. b. Bell & Gossett.

9. Balance Valve (2 1/2" and larger eccentric ball design): a. Armstrong b. Barco c. B&G d. Flow Design e. Gerand f. Keystone

10. Balance Valve (2 1/2" and larger plug valve type): a. Armstrong b. Barco c. B&G d. Flow Design e. Gerand f. Keystone

11. Balance Valve (2 1/2" and larger butterfly valve type): a. Armstrong b. Barco c. B&G d. Flow Design e. Gerand f. Keystone

E. Valve Features: 1. General: Provide valves with features indicated and, where not otherwise indicated, provide

proper valve features as determined by Installer for installation requirements. Comply with ASME B31.9 for building services piping, and ASME B31.1 for power piping.

2. Flanged: Valve flanges complying with ANSI B16.1 (cast iron), ANSI B16.5, (steel), or ANSI B16.24 (bronze).

3. Threaded: Valve ends complying with ANSI B2.1.

F. Valve Schedule: 1. General: Provide the following valves for various valve types referenced in Division 23

sections. 2. Drain Valves:

a. 125 lb. SWP: Bronze body, screw-in bonnet, rising stem, composition disc, 3/4" hose outlet, provide cap and chain. Conform to ASSE 1005. 1) Nibco – Threaded End.

3. Ball Valves: a. 2” and Smaller: 600 WOG/250 SWP, bronze body, full port, stainless trim, 2-piece

construction, TFE seat and seals. 1) Apollo – Threaded Ends.

4. Butterfly Valves: a. 6” and Smaller: 200 psi, cast iron or ductile iron body, lug type, extended neck,

aluminum bronze disc, bearings, reinforced resilient EDPM seat, manual lever and lock. Conform to MSS SP-67. Butterfly valves shall be capable of bubbletight shut-off at full rated pressure in either direction without the need for full blind flanges. 1) Nibco

b. 8” and Larger: 200 psi, cast iron or ductile iron body, extended neck, aluminum bronze disc, bearings, reinforced resilient EDPM seat, gear operator. Conform to MSS SP-67. Butterfly valves shall be capable of bubbletight shut-off at full rated pressure in either direction without the need for full blind flanges. 1) Nibco

5. Swing Check Valves: a. 2” and Smaller: Type 4, 125 lb. SWP, bronze body, horizontal swing, straight pattern

flow renewable disc. Conform to MSS SP-80.



1) Hammond/Milwaukee – Threaded Ends. b. 2-1/2” and Larger: Type II, 125 lb. SWP, gray iron body, bolted bonnet, horizontal

swing, renewable seat and disc, flanged ends. Conform to MSS SP-71. 1) Hammond/Milwaukee.

6. Wafer Check Valves: a. All Sizes: 125 psi, cast-iron body, aluminum bronze or plated iron plates, stainless steel

stem, Buna-N seat, stainless steel springs. 2" and smaller must be type IV. 2-1/2" and larger must be type I or II. 1) Stockham/Crane.

7. Lift Check Valves: a. 2” and Smaller: Type 2, 125 psi, bronze body, lift type, spring loaded, renewable disc,

threaded ends. Conform to FCI74-1 for design, rating and testing. 1) Stockham/Crane – Horizontal. 2) Stockham/Crane – Angle.

8. Balance Valves: a. 2” Size and Smaller: Provide balance valves equipped with readout valves to facilitate

connecting of differential pressure meter to balance valves. Equip each readout valve with integral EPT check valve designed to minimize system fluid loss during monitoring process. Provide calibrated nameplate to indicated degree of closure of precision machined orifice. Construct balancing valve with internal EPT o-ring seals to prevent leakage around rotating element. Provide balance valves with preformed polyurethane insulation suitable for use on heating and cooling systems, and to protect balance valves during shipment. 1) Acceptable Manufacturers:

a) Armstrong. b) Bell & Gossett, ITT; Fluid Handling Div.

b. 2” and Smaller: One piece, non-ferrous, bronze/brass flow measuring and balancing/shut-off valve combination. The flow element shall be a low loss/high signal Venturi type (± 2% accuracy) of one to ten rangeability, equipped with dual Schrader Type pressure test posts and caps. Balancing/shutoff valves shall be Ball type with large diameter plated ball, teflon seats, blow out proof stem with teflon packing and packing nut. Full size handle, grip and memory stop. Entire assembly rated to 400 WOG and tested to 100% after assembly. 1) Provide one gauge kit consisting of Bellows Type meter capable of reading flow

directly in GPM using magnetically attached transparent faces. Meter equipped with 6 ft. hoses, Schrader Type end connectors, bleed and equalizing manifold and rugged plastic case with instructions.

2) Acceptable Manufacturers: a) Gerand Co. b) Flow Design-Flowset.

c. 2 1/2" and Larger: Provide cast-iron body with ball centric, plug, or butterfly valve design. Locate downstream of all flow measuring stations or as recommended by manufacturer. 1) Acceptable Manufacturers:

a) Armstrong b) Barco c) B&G d) Flow Design e) Gerand f) Keystone

2.04 PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. General: Provide factory-fabricated piping specialties recommended by manufacturer for use in service indicated. Provide piping specialties of types and pressure ratings indicated for each service, or if not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide sizes as indicated, and connections, which properly mate with



pipe, tube, and equipment connections. Where more than one type is indicated, selection is Installer's option.

B. Pipe Escutcheons: 1. General: Provide pipe escutcheons as specified herein with inside diameter closely fitting

pipe outside diameter, or outside of pipe insulation where pipe is insulated. Select outside diameter of escutcheon to completely cover pipe penetration hole in floors, walls, or ceilings; and pipe sleeve extension, if any. Furnish pipe escutcheons with nickel or chrome finish for occupied areas, prime paint finish for unoccupied areas.

2. Pipe Escutcheons for Moist Areas: For waterproof floors, and areas where water and condensation can be expected to accumulate, provide cast brass or sheet brass escutcheons, solid or split hinged.

3. Pipe Escutcheons for Dry Areas: Provide sheet steel escutcheons, solid or split hinged. 4. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Chicago Specialty Mfg. Co. b. Producers Specialty & Mfg. Corp. c. Sanitary-Dash Mfg. Co.

C. Strainers: 1. General: Provide strainers full line size of connecting piping, with ends matching piping

system materials. Select strainers for 125 psi working pressure, with Type 304 stainless steel screens, with 3/64" perforations @ 233 per sq. in. as a minimum.

2. Basket Strainers: duplex, quick-opening covers, stainless steel baskets, single-handle or hand-wheel operation of valve. 125-psig working pressure; high-tensile cast-iron body (ASTM A 126, Class B), flanged-end connections, bolted cover, perforated stainless-steel basket, and bottom drain connection with blowdown piped to nearest drain with valve

3. Y-Pattern Strainers: 125-psig working pressure; cast-iron body (ASTM A 126, Class B), flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 and larger, threaded connections for NPS 2 and smaller, bolted cover, perforated stainless-steel basket, and bottom drain connection with blowdown piped to nearest drain with valve a. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1) Armstrong. 2) Hoffman Specialty ITT; Fluid Handling Div. 3) Mueller Co. 4) ITT

D. Dielectric Fittings: 1. Clearflow dielectric waterway nipple, steel nipple with inert thermoplastic liner. Shall meet

ASTM F-492-77. a. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1) Perfection Corporation: Dielectric Waterway. 2) Victaulic. 3) Precision Plumbing Products: Clear flow dielectric waterway.

E. Fire Barrier Penetration Seals: 1. Provide seals for any opening through fire-rated walls, floors, or ceilings used as passage for

mechanical components such as piping or ductwork. a. Cracks, Voids, or Holes Up to 4" Diameter: Use putty or caulking, one-piece

intumescent elastomer, non-corrosive to metal, compatible with synthetic cable jackets, and capable of expanding 10 times when exposed to flame or heat, UL-listed.

b. Openings 4" or Greater: Use sealing system capable of passing 3-hour fire test in accordance with ASTM E-814, consisting of wall wrap or liner, partitions, and end caps capable of expanding when exposed to temperatures of 250 to 350°F (121 to 177°C), UL-listed.

c. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Electro Products Div./3M. (Fire Barrier Systems) 2) Manville Products Corp.



3) Nelson; Unit of General Signal. (Flameseal) 4) Pipe Shield Incorporated. 5) STI. 6) Hilti – FS/One.

2. Fire Penetration Sleeves: a. Provide ProSet Systems fire rated sleeve/coupling Penetrator for each pipe penetration

or plumbing fixture opening passing through floors, walls, partitions or floor ceiling assemblies. All penetrators passing through fire rated construction must comply with ASTM E-814, U.L. 1479 or CSA/ULC CAN S-115 fire test standards, and in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.

b. Sleeve penetrators shall have built-in anchor ring for waterproofing and anchoring into concrete pours. For cored holes use the special tight fitted ProSet Cored Hole Penetrator for cored holes.

c. Chilled water piping shall have ProSeal Plugs on both sides and Firefill insulation material packed into the void between the pipe and sleeve to prevent condensation problems.

d. All other piping shall have one ProSeal Plug or a Riser Clamp on the top side of the Penetrator or alternate types of ProSet Penetrators for various piping materials that comply with ASTM E-814 fire testing as shown below: 1) Insulated or uninsulated pipe – Use System “A” 2) Cast Iron Pipe – Use System “B” 3) ABS or PVC waste & vent piping – Use System “C” 4) Polypropylene acid waste piping – Use System “C” 5) Glass acid waste piping – Use System “A” 6) EMT or Electrical Conduit – Use System “A”

e. All above systems are to be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

f. Alternate firestopping systems are acceptable if approved with Engineer and local code official.

g. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) ProSet Systems.

2.05 FABRICATED PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Drip Pans: Provide drip pans fabricated from corrosion-resistant sheet metal with watertight joints, and with edges turned up 2-1/2". Reinforce top, either by structural angles or by rolling top over 1/4" steel rod. Provide hole, gasket, and flange at low point for watertight joint and 1" drain line connection.

B. Pipe Sleeves: Provide pipe sleeves of one of the following: 1. Sheet-Metal: Fabricate from galvanized sheet metal; round tube closed with snaplock joint,

welded spiral seams, or welded longitudinal joint. Fabricate from the following gages: 3" and smaller, 20 gage; 4" to 6" 16 gage; over 6", 14 gage.

2. Steel-Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe; remove burrs. 3. Iron-Pipe: Fabricate from cast-iron or ductile-iron pipe; remove burrs. 4. Plastic-Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 80 PVC plastic pipe; remove burrs.

C. Sleeve Seals: Provide sleeve seals in sleeve as follows: 1. Below grade in foundation wall or exterior walls above grade.

a. Link seal. b. Innerlynx

2. Penetration below grade thru floor. a. Provide elastomeric joint sealant to maintain watertight and airtight continuous seal.

3. Penetrations thru walls, floors, or ceilings above grade. a. Intumescent fire stop.



2.06 PACKLESS EXPANSION JOINTS

A. General: Provide packless expansion joints where indicated for piping systems, with materials and pressure/temperature ratings selected by Installer to suit intended service. Select packless expansion joints to provide 200% absorption capacity of piping expansion between anchors.

B. Expansion Compensators: Pressure rated for 60 psi for low pressure systems, 175 psi for high pressure systems; 2-ply phosphor bronze bellows, brass shrouds and end fittings for copper piping systems, or 2-ply stainless steel bellows, carbon steel shrouds and end fittings for steel piping systems. Provide internal guides and anti-torque device, and removable end clip for proper positioning.

C. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Flexonics Div.; UOP, Inc. 2. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc. 3. Keflex, Inc. 4. Metraflex Co.

2.07 RUBBER EXPANSION JOINTS

A. Construct of duct and butyl rubber with full-faced integral flanges, internally reinforced with steel retaining rings. Provide steel retaining rings over entire surface of flanges, drilled to match flange bolt holes, and provide external control rods.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Keflex, Inc. 2. Metraflex Co.

2.08 SLIP JOINTS

A. General: Provide slip joints where indicated for piping systems, with materials and pressure/temperature ratings selected by Installer to suit intended service. Select slip joints to provide 200% absorption capacity of piping expansion between anchors.

B. Slip Joints: Slip type designed for repacking under pressure, with ends to mate with piping system.

C. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Adsco Manufacturing Corp. 2. Flexonics Div; UOP, Inc.

2.09 PIPE ALIGNMENT GUIDES

A. General: Provide pipe alignment guides on both sides of expansion joints, and elsewhere as indicated. Construct with 4- finger spider traveling inside guiding sleeve, with provision for anchoring to building substrate.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Anvil. 2. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc. 3. Metraflex Co.

2.10 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. References: 1. ASTM B633 – Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel.



2. ASTM A123 – Specification for Zinc (Hot Galvanized) Coatings on Products Fabricated from Rolled, Pressed, and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars, and Strip.

3. ASTM A653 G90 – Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated by the Hot-Dip Process. 4. MSS SP58 – Manufacturers Standardization Society: Pipe Hangers and Supports –

Materials, Design and Manufacture. 5. MSS SP69 – Manufacturers Standardization Society: Pipe Hangers and Supports –

Selection and Application.

B. Quality Assurance: 1. Steel pipe hangers and supports shall have the manufacturer’s name, part number, and

applicable size stamped in the part itself for identification. 2. Hangers and supports shall be designed and manufactured in conformance with MSS SP58.

C. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: 1. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory- fabricated horizontal-piping

hangers and supports selected by Installer to suit horizontal-piping systems. Use only one type by one manufacturer for each piping service. Select size of hangers and supports to exactly fit pipe size for bare piping, and to exactly fit around piping insulation with saddle or shield for insulated piping. Provide baked on epoxy paint hangers and supports for copper piping systems.

D. Vertical-Piping Clamps: 1. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory- fabricated vertical-piping clamps

complying with MSS SP-58 selected by Installer to suit vertical piping systems, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Select size of vertical piping clamps to exactly fit pipe size of bare pipe. Provide baked on epoxy paint clamps for copper-piping systems.

E. Hanger-Rod Attachments: 1. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory- fabricated hanger-rod attachments

complying with MSS SP-58 selected by Installer to suit horizontal-piping hangers and building attachments, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Use only one type by one manufacturer for each piping service. Select size of hanger-rod attachments to suit hanger rods. Provide copper-plated hanger-rod attachments for copper-piping systems.

F. Building Attachments: 1. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory- fabricated building attachments

complying with MSS SP-58 selected by Installer to suit building substrate conditions, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Select size of building attachments to suit hanger rods.

G. Finishes: 1. Indoor Finishes:

a. Hangers and clamps for support of bare copper piping shall be coated with copper colored epoxy paint. Additional PVC coating of the epoxy painted hanger shall be used where necessary.

b. Hangers for other than bare copper pipe shall be zinc plated in accordance with ASTM B633 or shall have an electrodeposited epoxy finish.

c. Strut channels shall be pre-galvanized in accordance with ASTM A653 G90 or have an electrodeposited epoxy finish.

2. Outdoor Finishes: a. Hangers and strut located outdoors shall be hot dip galvanized after fabrication in

accordance with ASTM A123. All hanger hardware shall be stainless steel. Zinc plated hardware is not acceptable for outdoor or corrosive use.

b. Hangers and strut located in corrosive areas shall be electrodeposit epoxy finish with stainless steel hardware.



H. Manufacturers of Hangers and Supports (Acceptable Manufacturers): 1. B-Line Systems Inc. 2. Grinnel Corp. 3. Michigan 4. P.H.D. 5. Tolco

I. Saddles and Shields: 1. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide saddles or shields under piping hangers

and supports, factory-fabricated, for all insulated piping. Size saddles and shields for exact fit to mate with pipe insulation. Provide high density insert under saddles and shields with size equal to adjacent insulation.

2. Protection Saddles: MSS Type 39; fill interior voids with segments of insulation matching adjoining insulation or manufacturer’s pre-insulated type.

3. Protection Shields: MSS Type 40; of length per schedule below to prevent crushing of insulation. Provide coated projection shields on cold/ chilled water piping. a. Schedule:

Nominal Pipe or Tubing Size Shield Length

Shield Gauge Thickness Material

½” thru 3” 12” 18 Galvanized

4” 12” 16 Galvanized

4. Thermal Hanger Shields (Required for Chilled Water Piping): MSS Type 40 Constructed of an insert of high density, 100 psi, water-proofed calcium silicate, encased in a sheet metal shield. Provide assembly of same thickness as adjoining insulation. The style of thermal hanger shield assembly shall be determined by shield manufacturer based on hanger type.

5. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Pipe Shields, Inc. b. Value Engineering Products, Inc.

2.11 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Metal Framing: 1. Supplementary Structural Supports: Design and fabricate supports using structural quality

steel bolted framing materials as manufactured by B-Line Systems. Channels shall be roll formed, 12 gauge ASTM A570 Grade 33 steel, 1 5/8” x 1 5/8” or greater as required by loading conditions. Submit designs for pipe tunnels, pipe galleries, etc., to Engineer for approval. Use clamps and fittings designed for use with the strut system.

B. Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: Provide products complying with ASTM A 36.

C. Cement Grout: Portland cement (ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III) and clean uniformly graded, natural sand (ASTM C 404, Size No. 2). Mix at a ratio of 1.0 part cement to 3.0 parts sand, by volume, with minimum amount of water required for placement and hydration.

D. Trapeze Hangers: 1. Trapeze hangers shall be constructed from 12 gauge roll formed ASTM A570 Gr. 33

structural steel channel, 1 5/8” x 1 5/8” minimum. B-Line B22 strut or stronger as required. 2. Mount pipes to trapeze with 2 piece pipe straps sized for outside diameter of pipe, B-Line

B2000 Series. 3. For pipes subjected to axial movement:

a. Strut mounted roller support, B-Line B3126. Use pipe protection shield or saddles on insulated lines.

b. Strut mounted pipe guide, B-Line B2417.



E. Heavy-Duty Steel Trapezes: Fabricate from steel shapes selected for loads required; weld steel in accordance with AWS standards.

F. Pipe Guides: Provide factory-fabricated guides, of cast semi- steel or heavy fabricated steel, consisting of bolted two- section outer cylinder and base with two-section guiding spider bolted tight to pipe. Size guide and spiders to clear pipe and insulation (if any), and cylinder. Provide guides of length recommended by manufacturer to allow indicated travel.

2.12 GLASS THERMOMETERS

A. General: Provide glass thermometers of materials, capacities, and ranges indicated, designed and constructed for use in service indicated.

B. Case: Die cast aluminum finished in baked epoxy enamel, glass front, spring secured, 9" long, individual shock proof.

C. Adjustable Joint: Die cast aluminum, finished to match case, 180°F adjustment in vertical plane, 360 degrees adjustment in horizontal plane, with locking device.

D. Tube and Capillary: Organic filled "red" color, magnifying lens, 1% scale range accuracy, shock mounted.

E. Scale: Satin faced, non-reflective aluminum, permanently etched markings.

F. Stem: Copper-plated steel, or brass, for separable socket, length to suit installation, insertable stem with adjustable hinge and bulb well.

G. Units: Provide dual units, U.S. English and S.I.

H. Range: Conform to the following: 1. Hot Water: 30° - 240°F with 2°F scale divisions.

I. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Trerice (H.O.) Co. 2. U.S. Gauge 3. Weksler 4. Weiss Instruments, Inc.

2.13 DIRECT MOUNT DIAL THERMOMETERS

A. General: Provide direct mount dial thermometers of materials, capacities, and range indicated, designed and constructed for use in service indicated. Provide thermometer that may be calibrated.

B. Type: Vapor tension, universal angle.

C. Case: Drawn steel or brass, glass lens, 4-1/2" diameter.

D. Adjustable Joint: Die cast aluminum, 180 degrees adjustment in vertical plane, 360 degrees adjustment in horizontal plane, with locking device.

E. Thermal Bulb: Copper with phosphor bronze bourdon pressure tube, one scale division accuracy.

F. Movement: Brass precision geared.

G. Scale: Progressive, satin faced, non-reflective aluminum, permanently etched markings.



H. Stem: Copper plated steel, or brass, for separable socket, length to suit installation.

I. Units: Provide dual units, U.S. English and S.I.

J. Range: Conform to the following:

1. Hot Water: 40 - 240°F (10 - 115°C).

K. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Trerice (H.O.) Co. 2. U.S. Gauge 3. Weksler 4. Weiss Instruments, Inc.

2.14 THERMOMETER WELLS

A. General: Provide thermometer wells constructed of brass or stainless steel, pressure rated to match piping system design pressure. Provide 2" extension for insulated piping. Provide cap nut with chain fastened permanently to thermometer well.

B. Manufacturer: Same as thermometers.

2.15 PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE GAGE CONNECTOR PLUGS

A. General: Provide temperature and pressure gage connector plugs pressure rated for 600 psi and 275°F. Construct of brass and finish in nickel-plate, equip with 1/2" NPT fitting, with self-sealing valve core type neoprene gasketed orifice suitable for inserting 1/8" O.D. probe assembly from dial type insertion thermometer or pressure gauge. Equip orifice with gasketed screw cap and retaining strap. Provide extension, length equal to insulation thickness, for insulated piping.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Peterson Equipment Co. 2. Trerice

2.16 PRESSURE GAGES

A. General: Provide pressure gages of materials, capacities, and ranges indicated, designed and constructed for use in service indicated.

B. Type: General use, 1% accuracy, ANSI B40.1 grade A, phosphor bronze bourdon type, bottom connection.

C. Case: Cast aluminum, individual shock proof case with glass lens, 4 1/2" diameter.

D. Dial Face: Aluminum with white background with black graduations and markings.

E. Connector: Brass with 1/4" male NPT.

F. Scale: White coated aluminum, with permanently etched markings.

G. Units: Provide dual units, U.S. English and S.I.

H. Range: Conform to the following: 1. Vacuum: 30" Hg - 15 psi. 2. Water: 0 - 100 psi.

I. Acceptable Manufacturers:



1. Trerice (H.O.) Co. (600CB basis of design) 2. Crosby 3. Dwyer 4. U.S. Gauge 5. Weksler

2.17 PRESSURE GAGE COCKS

A. General: Provide pressure gage cocks between pressure gages and gage tees on piping systems. Construct gage cock of brass with 1/4" female NPT on each end, and "T" handle brass plug.

B. Syphon: 1/4" straight coil constructed of brass tubing with 1/4" male NPT on each end.

C. Snubber: 1/4" brass bushing with corrosion resistant porous metal disc, through which pressure fluid is filtered. Select disc material for fluid served and pressure rating.

D. Manufacturer: Same as for pressure gages.

2.18 FLOW MEASURING STATIONS (VENTURI)

A. Furnish and install where shown on drawings or indicated elsewhere, complete Venturi Flow Measuring System. This shall be a coordinated system, including individual Venturi Flow Stations and Portable Master Meter, supplied by one manufacturer.

B. Each primary flow element shall be a Venturi selected from a manufacturer's engineering data to permit prescribed flow at a minimum of head loss. For maximum accuracy and minimal turbulence in recovery area and thus, low pressure loss, Venturis shall have minimum length of 1.6 x pipe diameter. The beta ratio shall be selected to allow for a differential pressure compatible with the meter as specified herein and insure a properly calibrated system accuracy within 1% throughout the entire range. This accuracy must be obtained with as little as five (5) pipe diameters of straight pipe upstream and two (2) diameters downstream from the Venturi. Each Venturi shall be furnished with two (2) accurately located built-in sensing taps, nipples, shut-off valves, and quick connect couplings. Venturis shall be complete with identification tag on chain, giving pipe size, Venturi series, station identification and meter reading at specified flow rate, flow vs. differential curves and installation instructions.

C. Sizes 2-1/2" through 8" shall consist of one-piece cadmium-plated cast steel Venturi with weld neck or flanged ends with balance valve downstream per this specification.

D. Venturi sizes and beta ratios shall be selected so that design flow rates shall read between 20% and 80% of the full scale range on a linear meter with permanent pressure loss of not more than 25% of indicated flow rate differential pressure.

E. The indicating meter shall be portable type with 6" round dial, 270 indication. It shall be the dual rupture-proof liquid-filled bellows type with integral temperature compensation. The meter shall have over-range protection in either direction equal to the working pressure equivalent of the

instrument housing (250 psig at 250F). The accuracy of the meter shall be no less than 0.5% full scale. The meters case shall be waterproof and coated with appropriate paint. It shall have external zero and range-adjusting screws and life-long lubrication. Scale shall be calibrated uniformly either in differential pressure, percent of flow, or directly in gpm. 1. Portable Master Meters shall be mounted in a durable metal reinforced plastic carrying case

with the following accessories: a. Two 10" lengths of connecting hose, each with color coded quick connect couplings

compatible with the Venturi couplings. b. Two brass blow-down valves with Buna-N seals.



c. Blow-down hoses. d. Instruction book with flow vs. differential curves.

F. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Barco. 2. Flow Design 3. Gerand. 4. Bell and Gossett 5. Armstrong

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PIPE AND PIPE FITTING INSTALLATION

A. General: Install pipes and pipe fittings in accordance with recognized industry practices which will achieve permanently leak proof piping systems, capable of performing each indicated service without piping failure. Install each run with minimum joints and couplings, but with adequate and accessible unions for disassembly and maintenance/replacement of valves and equipment. Reduce sizes (where indicated) by use of eccentric reducing fittings with level side up. Align piping accurately at connections, within 1/16" misalignment tolerance.

B. Locate piping runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally (pitched to drain) and avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. Orient horizontal runs parallel with walls and column lines. Locate runs as shown or described by diagrams, details and notations or, if not otherwise indicated, run piping in shortest route which does not obstruct usable space, limit expansion, or block access for servicing building and its equipment. Hold piping close to walls, overhead construction, columns and other structural and permanent-enclosure elements of building; limit clearance to 1/2" where furring is shown for enclosure or concealment of piping, but allow for insulation thickness, if any. Where possible, locate insulated piping for 1" clearance outside insulation. Wherever possible in finished and occupied spaces, conceal piping from view, by locating in column enclosures, in hollow wall construction or above suspended ceilings; do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, except as indicated.

C. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Do not run piping through transformer vaults and other electrical or electronic equipment spaces and enclosures unless unavoidable. Install drip pan under piping that must be run through electrical spaces.

D. Painting of Pipe: Paint all exterior steel piping (condenser, chilled water, etc.) with a rust inhibitor paint. Coordinate color with architect prior to painting.

3.02 PIPING SYSTEM JOINTS

A. General: Provide joints of type indicated in each piping system.

B. Thread pipe in accordance with ANSI B2.1; cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter. Apply pipe joint compound, or pipe joint tape (Teflon) where recommended by pipe/fitting manufacturer, on male threads at each joint and tighten joint to leave not more than 3 threads exposed.

C. Solder copper tube-and-fitting joints where indicated, in accordance with recognized industry practice. Cut tube ends squarely, ream to full inside diameter, and clean outside of tube ends and inside of fittings. Apply solder flux to joint areas of both tubes and fittings. Use only flux with no lead content. Insert tube full depth into fitting, and solder in manner which will draw solder full depth and circumference of joint. Wipe excess solder from joint before it hardens.

D. Weld pipe joints in accordance with recognized industry practice and as follows: 1. Weld pipe joints only when ambient temperature is above 0°F (-18°C) where possible.



2. Bevel pipe ends at a 37.5 degree angle where possible, smooth rough cuts, and clean to remove slag, metal particles and dirt.

3. Use pipe clamps or tack-weld joints with 1" long welds; 4 welds for pipe sizes to 10", 8 welds for pipe sizes 12" to 20".

4. Build up welds with stringer-bead pass, followed by hot pass, followed by cover or filler pass. Eliminate valleys at center and edges of each weld. Weld by procedures which will ensure elimination of unsound or unfused metal, cracks, oxidation, blow-holes and non-metallic inclusions.

5. Do not weld-out piping system imperfections by tack-welding procedures; re-fabricate to comply with requirements.

6. At Installer's option, install forged branch-connection fittings wherever branch pipe is indicated; or install regular "T" fitting.

7. Clean all welded joints and apply prime coat rust inhibitor.

E. Flanged Joints: Match flanges within piping system, and at connections with valves and equipment. Clean flange faces and install gaskets. Tighten bolts to provide uniform compression of gaskets.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF FLOW MEASURING STATIONS

A. Install at the following locations: 1. Upstream of all balancing valves 2½" and larger (except in balancing valve(s) located in the

bypass line of a 3-way control valve). 2. Discharge of each pump prior to discharge balancing valve. 3. Discharge of each chiller (one on evaporator side and one on condenser side.)

B. Provide at least 5 pipe diameters upstream of flow measuring station and at least 3 pipe diameter downstream of flow measuring station.


A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with the following requirements: 1. Install valves where required for proper operation of piping and equipment, including valves

in all branch lines to isolate sections of piping whether shown or not. Branch lines will be considered any line connecting to the main piping. Locate valves so as to be accessible and so that separate support can be provided when necessary.

2. Install valves with stems pointed up, in vertical position where possible, but in no case with stems pointed downward from horizontal plane unless unavoidable. Install valve drains with hose-end adapter for each valve that must be installed with stem below horizontal plane.

B. Shutoff Valves: Install on inlet and outlet of each mechanical equipment item, and elsewhere as indicated.

C. Drain Valves: Install on each mechanical equipment item located to completely drain equipment for service or repair. Install at base of each riser, at base of each rise or drop in piping system, and elsewhere where indicated or required to completely drain hydronic piping system.

D. Insulation: Where insulation is indicated, install extended-stem valves, arranged in proper manner to receive insulation.

E. Mechanical Actuators: Install mechanical actuators with chain operators where indicated. Extend chains to about 5' above floor and hook to clips to clear aisle passage.

F. Valve System: Select and install valves with outside screw and yoke stems, except provide inside screw non-rising stem valves where headroom prevents full opening of OS&Y valves.



G. Non-Metallic Disc: Limit selection and installation of valves with non-metallic discs to locations indicated and where foreign material in piping system can be expected to prevent tight shutoff of metal seated valves.

H. Renewable Seats: Select and install valves with renewable seats, except where otherwise indicated.

I. Fluid Control: Except as otherwise indicated, install gate, ball, globe, and butterfly valves to comply with ANSI B31.9. Where throttling is indicated or recognized as principal reason for valve, install globe or butterfly valves.

J. Installation of Check Valves: 1. Swing Check Valves: Install in horizontal position with hinge pin horizontally perpendicular to

center line of pipe. Install for proper direction of flow. 2. Wafer Check Valves: Install between 2 flanges in horizontal or vertical position, position for

proper direction of flow. 3. Lift Check Valve: Install in piping line with stem vertically upward, position for proper

direction of flow.

3.05 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Pipe Escutcheons: Install pipe escutcheons on each pipe penetration thru floors, walls, partitions, and ceilings where penetration is exposed to view; and on exterior of building. Secure escutcheon to pipe or insulation so escutcheon covers penetration hole, and is flush with adjoining surface.

B. Y-Type Strainers: Install Y-type strainers full size of pipeline, in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Install pipe nipple and shutoff valve in strainer blow down connection, full size of connection, except for strainers 2" and smaller installed ahead of control valves feeding individual terminals. Where indicated, provide drain line from shutoff valve to plumbing drain, full size of blow down connection. 1. Locate Y-type strainers in supply line ahead of the following equipment, and elsewhere as

indicated, if integral strainer is not included in equipment: a. Pumps. b. Temperature control valves larger than 2". c. Temperature or pressure regulating valves.

C. Dielectric Fittings: 1. Provide dielectric pipe fittings and isolators at all connections between dissimilar metals in

the heating water and chilled water systems to control corrosion potential caused by galvanic or electrolytic action.

2. Typical locations for dielectric isolation are: storage and pressure tanks, water conditioning equipment, pumps, changes in service piping materials, make-up connections to boilers and chilled water systems, valves, deaerators, flexible connectors and the like where materials of different electrode potential are joined.

D. Fire Barrier Penetration Seals: Fill entire opening with sealing compound. Adhere to manufacturer's installation instructions.

3.06 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Drip Pans: Locate drip pans under piping passing over or within 3' horizontally of electrical equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. Hang from structure with rods and building attachments, weld rods to sides of drip pan. Brace to prevent sagging or swaying. Connect 1" drain line to drain connection, and run to nearest plumbing drain or elsewhere as indicated.



B. Pipe Sleeves: Install pipe sleeves of types indicated where piping passes through walls, floors, ceilings, and roofs. Do not install sleeves through structural members of work, except as detailed on drawings, or as reviewed by Architect/Engineer. Install sleeves accurately centered on pipe runs. Size sleeves so that piping and insulation (if any) will have free movement in sleeve, including allowance for thermal expansion; but not less than 2 pipe sizes larger than piping run. Where insulation includes vapor-barrier jacket, provide sleeve with sufficient clearance for installation. Install length of sleeve equal to thickness of construction penetrated, and finish flush to surface; except floor sleeves. Extend floor sleeves 2" above floor for most areas increase to 4" above floor in mechanical rooms or kitchens and extend 1/4" above the finished floor in other exposed areas. Provide temporary support of sleeves during placement of concrete and other work around sleeves, and provide temporary closure to prevent concrete and other materials from entering sleeves. 1. Install sheet-metal sleeves at interior partitions and ceilings other than suspended ceilings. 2. Install iron-pipe sleeves at exterior penetrations; both above and below grade. 3. Install steel-pipe sleeves except as otherwise indicated.

C. Sleeve Seals: Install in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements or as required to meet fire ratings. Where fire rated separations are penetrated by pipes the annular space around the pipe shall be caulked with appropriate fire rated material.

D. Space between the pipe sleeve and the sheet metal shall be insulated.

3.07 EXPANSION JOINT INSTALLATION

A. General: Install expansion joints where indicated, and elsewhere as determined by Installer for adequate expansion of installed piping system. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide pipe anchors and pipe alignment guides as indicated, and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations Align units properly to avoid end loading and torsional stress.

3.08 EXPANSION LOOP INSTALLATION

A. General: Fabricate expansion loops as indicated, in locations indicated, and elsewhere as determined by Installer for adequate expansion of installed piping system. Subject loop to cold spring which will absorb 50% of total expansion between hot and cold conditions. Provide pipe anchors and pipe alignment guides as indicated, and elsewhere as determined by Installer to properly anchor piping in relationship to expansion loops.

3.09 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properly from building structure; comply with MSS SP-69. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping to be supported together on trapeze type hangers where possible. Install supports with maximum spacings per local code. Where piping of various sizes is to be supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipe.

B. Do not use wire or perforated metal to support piping, and do not support piping from other piping. Use of powder actuated fastener and toggle bolts is prohibited. Steel roof and floor decking, suspended ceilings, and hollow assemblies shall not be used for attachment of anchorages or supports for suspended piping or any other mechanical components.

C. Install the following pipe attachments: 1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 20 feet long. 2. NPS 3 and larger: Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal

piping 20 feet or longer. 3. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.



4. Verify actual supported loads for hanger sizes and spacing. Consult structural engineer if required to support piping. Spacing and sizes below are from the 2012 ASHRAE HANDBOOK--"HVAC Systems and Equipment."

D. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 2. NPS 1 : Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 3. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4. NPS 2: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 5. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 11 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 6. NPS 3: Maximum span, 12 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 7. NPS 4: Maximum span, 14 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. 8. NPS 6: Maximum span, 17 feet minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. 9. NPS 8: Maximum span, 19 feet; minimum rod size, 5/8 inch. 10. NPS 10: Maximum span, 20 feet; minimum rod size, 3/4 inch. 11. NPS 12: Maximum span, 23 feet; minimum rod size, 7/8 inch.

E. Install hangers for drawn-temper copper piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 6 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 3. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4. NPS 2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 5. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 6. NPS 3: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.

F. Support vertical runs at roof, at each floor, and at 10-foot intervals between floors.

G. Installation of Building Attachments: 1. Install building attachments at required locations within concrete or on structural steel for

proper piping support. Space attachments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69 Table 3 or local code, whichever is more stringent. Install additional hangers at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten insert securely to forms. Where concrete with compressive strength less than 2500 psi is indicated, install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

H. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers and other accessories. Except as otherwise indicated for exposed continuous pipe runs, install hangers and supports of same type and style as installed for adjacent similar piping.

I. Prevent electrolysis in support of copper tubing by use of hangers and supports which are copper plated, or by other recognized industry methods, or by plastic coated hangers.

J. Hangers in contact with steel, iron or cast or ductile iron shall be plated.

K. Provisions for Movement: 1. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems and to permit

freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends and similar units.

2. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loading and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

3. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes, and so that maximum pipe deflections allowed by ANSI B31 Pressure Piping Codes are not exceeded.

L. Insulated Hot/Heating Water: Comply with the following installation requirements.



1. Clamps: Attach clamps, including spacers (if any), to piping with clamps projecting through insulation; do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ANSI B31.

2. Saddles and Shield Installation: a. 3” and smaller piping: Contractor option; protection shields or thermal hanger shields.

Provide on cold/chilled water a vapor barrier. b. 4” and Larger: Contractors option; thermal hanger shields or protection saddles.

Provide on cold/chilled water piping a vapor barrier.

M. Support of pipe tubing and equipment shall be accomplished by means of engineered products. Makeshift, field devised methods shall not be allowed.

N. Insulated Cold/Chilled Water Piping: Provide the following installation requirements. 1. Saddles and Shield Installation: Provide thermal hanger shields with a vapor barrier.

O. Support of pipe tubing and equipment shall be accomplished by means of engineered products. Makeshift, field devised methods shall not be allowed.

P. If any hangers are found to be out of plumb or not adjusted properly, the contractor shall be responsible for the cost of removal and reinstallation of the ceiling in order to inspect and correct the hanger installation.

3.10 INSTALLATION OF ANCHORS

A. Install anchors at proper locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by ANSI B31, and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment.

B. Fabricate and install anchor by welding steel shapes, plates and bars to piping and to structure. Comply with ANSI B31 and with AWS standards.

C. Where expansion compensators are indicated, install anchors in accordance with expansion unit manufacturer's written instructions, to limit movement of piping and forces to maximums recommended by manufacturer for each unit.

D. Anchor Spacing: Where not otherwise indicated, install anchors at ends of principal pipe-runs, at intermediate points in pipe- runs between expansion loops and bends. Make provisions for preset of anchors as required to accommodate both expansion and contraction of piping.

3.11 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Provide structural steel stands to support equipment not floor mounted or hung from structure. Construct of structural steel members or steel pipe and fittings. Provide factory-fabricated tank saddles for tanks mounted on steel stands.

3.12 INSTALLATION OF TEMPERATURE GAGES

A. General: Install temperature gages in vertical upright position, and tilted so as to be easily read by observer standing on floor.

B. Locations: Install in the following locations, and elsewhere as indicated: 1. At inlet and outlet of each hydronic zone. 2. At inlet and outlet of each hydronic boiler and chiller. 3. At inlet and outlet of each hydronic coil in air handling units, and make up air units. 4. At inlet and outlet of each hydronic heat exchanger.

C. Thermometer Wells: Install in piping tee where indicated, in vertical upright position. Fill well with oil or graphite, secure cap.



D. Temperature Gage Connector Plugs: Install in piping tee where indicated, located on pipe at most readable position. Secure cap.

3.13 INSTALLATION OF PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE TEST PLUGS

A. General: Install in piping where indicated, located on pipe at the most readable position. Secure cap.

B. At a minimum include the following; water coils, zone loops and booster pumps.

C. For horizontal pipe, install in top half of pipe line.

D. Determine and provide the minimum number of portable thermometers and gauges that will be required for text plugs to monitor any one set of conditions.

3.14 INSTALLATION OF PRESSURE GAGES

A. General: Install pressure gages in piping tee with pressure gage cock, located on pipe at most readable position.

B. Locations: Install in the following locations, and elsewhere as indicated: 1. At suction and discharge of each pump. 2. At inlet and outlet of water cooled condensers and refrigerant cooled chillers.

C. Pressure Gage Cocks: Install in piping tee with snubber.

D. Pressure Gage Connector Plugs: Install in piping tee where indicated, located on pipe at most readable position. Secure cap.

3.15 CLEANING, FLUSHING, INSPECTING

A. General: Clean exterior surfaces of superfluous materials, and prepare for application of specified coatings (if any). Flush out systems with clean water before proceeding with required tests. Inspect each run of each system for completion of joints, supports and accessory items. Contractor shall install a temporary bypass pipe to achieve full circulation through the newly installed piping without disturbing the existing system(s). If all piping will be drained and the entire system cleaned, the bypass will not be required. 1. Inspect pressure piping in accordance with procedures of ASME B31.

B. Notify the DPS HVAC Shop in writing at least 72 hours in advance of start of work so they may be prepared to observe the cleaning procedure. “Certification of Work Certificate” shall be signed by the observer.

C. Alkaline Solution: May be supplied from a water treatment firm that has been submitted for approval or the following solution can be provided by the Contractor.

D. Chemical of system volume Ounces per 100 gallons 1. Trisodium Phosphate – 16 2. Sodium Hydroxide – 1 3. Dawn dishwashing soap, liquid surfactant – 1 4. Sodium Sulfite, oxygen scavenger – 1

E. DPS requires a pH of 10.5 minimum solution.

F. Procedure: 1. Open isolation valves. Open control valves to flow through coils and circulation pumps.



2. Clean treated water shall be installed immediately after the system has been cleaned and rinsed.

3. Coordinate with the installed pump manufacturer precautions to be taken with their pumps and seals. Coordinated with boiler manufacturer precautions to be taken.

4. Flush system to remove large particulate matter before cleaning. Fill, circulate and flush the system with clean water. Drain the system; especially at boiler drains, air purger and pump strainers.

5. Isolate expansion tank at the connection to the main. 6. Fill the system with clean water and circulate. Following the boiler manufacturer’s

recommended procedure, heat the boilers to temperature. Monitor pressure since the expansion tanks are isolated.

7. Circulate the system for a minimum of 48 hours. Before beginning timing, again vent the system. Capture vented solution. Do not bleed on to surfaces that may be damaged.

8. Drain and properly dispose of the flushing solution. Add water if necessary to aid in draining. Drain low points of boilers, pumps, filter feeder, air purger, etc.

9. Fill system with fresh water and circulate through system. Vent air from the system and establish full flow through the system.

10. Drain low points of the system to remove solids. Remove and clean strainers. 11. Drain and refill the system as indicated above at 24 hour intervals as necessary to reach a

pH no higher than 1.0 point higher than the local water pH. Final rinse fluid should be clear in color with no visible particles. Test pH with litmus paper in presence of DPS Shops.

12. Immediately install clean treated water for the heating water system. Drain and partially fill the chilled water system with clean domestic cold water. Install the uninhibited propylene glycol in the chiller water system to a concentration of 30%. The owner will sample the systems and instruct the contractor to install the water treatment chemicals into the system – pH buffer, oxygen scavenger, and corrosion inhibiting surfactant. Contractor shall verify the concentration percentages with the District Project Manager.

13. Vent the system. 14. Before using the chilled water system glycol feeder, thoroughly clean the tank of oil, grease

and solids. Fill the tank completely with domestic cold water and one gallon of chlorine bleach. Allow to stand overnight. Rinse tank free of chorine. Fill the chilled water system glycol feeder tank with the specified propylene glycol mixture.

15. At any time Contractor is called back to the Project to fix piping leaks while under warranty, the pH of the system will be documented prior to work and the Contractor shall return the system back to proper levels (chemicals and glycol) above after warranty work is complete.

3.16 PIPING TESTS

A. Test pressure piping in accordance with ASME B31.

B. General: Provide temporary equipment for testing, including pump and gages. Test piping system before insulation is installed wherever feasible, and remove control devices before testing. Test each natural section of each piping system independently but do not use piping system valves to isolate sections where test pressure exceeds valve pressure rating. Fill each section with water and pressurize for indicated pressure and time. 1. Required test period is 2 hours. 2. Test long runs of Schedule 40 pipe at 150 psi, except where fittings are lower Class or

pressure rating. 3. Test each piping system at 150% of operating pressure indicated, but not less than 100 psi

test pressure. 4. Observe each test section for leakage at end of test period. Test fails if leakage is observed

or if pressure drop exceeds 5% of test pressure.

C. Repair piping systems sections which fail required piping test, by disassembly and re-installation, using new materials to extent required to overcome leakage. Do not use chemicals, stop-leak compounds, mastics, or other temporary repair methods.



D. Drain test water from piping systems after testing and repair work has been completed.

END OF SECTION


DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS Florence Crittenton HVAC VIBRATION CONTROL OZ Architecture Project No. 113266.00 Section 23 05 48 - 1

SECTION 23 05 48

HVAC VIBRATION CONTROL

PART 1 GENERAL



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 VIBRATION CONTROL MATERIALS AND SUPPORT UNITS

A. Neoprene Pads: Oil-resistant standard neoprene material, of manufacturer's standard hardness and waffle pattern.

B. Vibration Isolation Springs: Wound-steel compression springs, of high-strength spring alloy steel; with spring diameter not less than 0.8 of compressed height of spring at rated loads. Provide minimum additional travel to solid, equal to 50% of rated deflection. Provide spring wire with elastic limit stress exceeding stress at solid deflection.

C. Equipment Rails: Where rails or beams are indicated for use with isolator units to support equipment, provide steel beams complying with ASTM A36, with minimum depth of 6" or 0.10 x span of beam between isolators (whichever is greater). Provide welded bracket at each end of beams, and anchor each end to spring isolator unit. Provide bolt holes in beams matching anchor bolt holes in equipment. Provide beams of section modules indicated or, if not indicated, selected for normal-weight equipment loading to limit static load stress to 16,000 psi.

D. Fabricated Equipment Bases: Where supplementary bases are indicated for use with isolator units to support equipment (base not integral with equipment), provide welded rectangular unit, fabricated of structural steel shapes, plates and bars complying with ASTM A36, as shown. Provide welded support brackets at points indicated, and anchor base to spring isolator units. Except as otherwise indicated arrange brackets to result in lowest possible mounting height for equipment, but provide minimum of 1". Provide bolt holes in base matching anchor bolt holes in equipment. 1. Where indicated, provide for auxiliary motor slide base under motor or motor slide rails for

adjusting belt tension. Design primary base for bolting of rails or slide base in position. 2. Where sizes of base framing members are not indicated, fabricate base with depth of

structure not less than 0.10 x longest span of base, rigidly braced to support equipment without deflections or distortions which would be detrimental to equipment or equipment performance.

E. Isolation Hangers: Hanger units formed with brackets and including manufacturer's standard compression isolators of type indicated. Design brackets for 3 times the rated loading of units. Fabricate units to accept misalignment of 15 degrees off center in any direction before contacting hanger box, and for use with either rod or strap type members, and including acoustical washers to prevent metal-to-metal contacts. 1. Provide vibration isolation spring with cap in lower part of hanger and rubber hanger element

in top, securely retained in unit.

F. Riser Isolators: Suspend risers from, or support risers by, spring hangers or spring isolators. Wherever possible, anchor risers at central point with resilient anchors. Provide hanger or mounting deflection of 0.75" except in those expansion locations where additional deflection is required to limit deflection or load changes to +25% of initial deflection. Provide sliding guides



held in position by resilient anchors, located between anchor points and end of piping, spaced as indicated.

G. Flexible Pipe Connectors: 1. For non-ferrous piping, provide bronze hose covered with bronze wire braid with copper tube

ends or bronze flanged ends, braze- welded to hose. 2. For ferrous piping, provide stainless steel hose covered with stainless steel wire braid with

NPT steel nipples or 150 psi ANSI flanges, welded to hose.

H. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Metraflex 2. Mason Industries, Inc. 3. Vibration Mountings and Controls, Inc.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Examine areas and conditions under which vibration control units are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.

B. Manufacturer's Recommendations: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's recommendations for selection and application of vibration isolation materials and units.

3.02 APPLICATIONS

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated select vibration control products in accordance with the latest edition of the ASHRAE Handbook, "Sound and Vibration Control". Where more than one type of product is offered, selection is Installer's option.

B. Piping: For piping connected to equipment mounted on vibration control products, install isolation hangers for first 3 points of support for pipe sizes 4" and less, for first 4 points of support for pipe sizes 5" through 8", and for first 6 points of support for pipe sizes 10" and over.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation and load application to vibration control materials and units. Adjust to ensure that units have equal deflection, do not bottom out under loading, and are not short-circuited by other contacts or bearing points. Remove space blocks and similar devices intended for temporary support during installation.

B. Install units between substrate and equipment as required for secure operation and to prevent displacement by normal forces, and as indicated.

C. Adjust leveling devices as required to distribute loading uniformly onto isolators. Shim units as required where substrate is not level.

D. For air handling equipment, install thrust restraints as indicated, and also wherever thrust exceeds 10% of equipment weight.

E. Locate isolation hangers as near overhead support structure as possible.

F. Weld riser isolator units in place as required to prevent displacement from loading and operations.



G. Flexible Pipe Connectors: Install on equipment side of shutoff valves, horizontally and parallel to equipment shafts and as indicated on the drawings.

END OF SECTION


DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS Florence Crittenton MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION OZ Architecture Project No. 113266.00 Section 23 05 53 - 1

SECTION 23 05 53

MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION

PART 1 GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. Types of identification devices specified in this section include the following: 1. Plastic Pipe Markers. 2. Plastic Tape. 3. Valve Tags. 4. Valve Schedule Frames. 5. Engraved Plastic-Laminate Signs. 6. Plastic Tags.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 1. ANSI A13.1 “Scheme for Identification of Piping Systems”. 2. ANSI Z53.1 “Safety Color Code for Marking Physical Hazards”.

B. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE).

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. General: Where more than single type is specified for application, selections is Installer’s option, but provide single selection for each product category.

2.02 PLASTIC PIPE MARKERS

A. Pressure-Sensitive Type: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, permanent adhesive, color-coded, pressure-sensitive vinyl pipe markers, complying with ANSI A13.1.

B. Insulation: Furnish 1" thick molded fiberglass insulation with jacket for each plastic pipe marker to be installed on un-insulated pipes subjected to fluid temperatures of 125°F (52°C) or greater. Cut length to extend 2" beyond each end of plastic pipe marker.

C. Small Pipes: For external diameters less than 6" (including insulation if any), provide full-band pipe markers, extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location, fastened by one of the following methods: 1. Snap-on application of pre-tensioned semi-rigid plastic pipe marker. 2. Adhesive lap joint in pipe marker overlap. 3. Laminated or bonded application of pipe marker to pipe (or insulation). 4. Taped to pipe (or insulation) with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 3/4" wide;

full circle at both ends of pipe marker, tape lapped 1-1/2".



D. Large Pipes: For external diameters of 6" and larger (including insulation if any), provide either full-band or strip-type pipe markers, but not narrower than 3 times letter height (and of required length), fastened by one of the following methods: 1. Laminated or bonded application of pipe marker to pipe (or insulation). 2. Taped to pipe (or insulation) with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 1-1/2"

wide, full circle at both ends of pipe marker, tape lapped 3". 3. Strapped-to-pipe (or insulation) application of semi-rigid type, with manufacturer's standard

stainless steel bands.

E. Lettering: Manufacturer's standard pre-printed nomenclature which best describes piping system in each instance, as selected by Architect/Engineer in cases of variance with name as shown or specified.

F. Lettering: Comply with piping system nomenclature as specified, scheduled or shown, and abbreviate only as necessary for each application length. 1. Arrows: Print each pipe marker with arrows indicating direction of flow, either integrally with

piping system service lettering (to accommodate both directions), or as separate unit of plastic.

2.03 PLASTIC TAPE

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard color-coded pressure- sensitive (self-adhesive) vinyl tape, not less than 3 mils thick.

B. Width: Provide 1-1/2" wide tape markers on pipes with outside diameters (including insulation, if any) of less than 6". Provide 2 1/2" wide tape for larger pipes.

C. Color:

Classification Color of Field

District Letters

Legend

Extreme Temperatures or Pressures:

Heating Water Supply Yellow Black HWS

Heating Water Return Yellow Black HWR

Refrigerant Yellow Black REF

2.04 VALVE TAGS

A. Brass Valve Tags: Provide 19-gage polished brass valve tags with stamp-engraved piping system abbreviation in 1/4" high letters and sequenced valve number 1/2" high, and with 5/32" hole for fastener. 1. Provide 1-1/2" diameter tags.

B. Valve Tag Fasteners: Provide manufacturer’s standard solid brass chain, beaded type.

2.05 VALVE SCHEDULE FRAMES

A. General: For each page of valve schedule, provide glazed display frame, with screws for removable mounting on masonry walls. Provide frames of finished hardwood or extruded aluminum, with SSB-grade sheet glass.

2.06 ENGRAVED PLASTIC-LAMINATE SIGNS

A. General: Provide engraving stock melamine plastic laminate, complying with FS L-P-387, in the sizes and thicknesses indicated, engraved with engraver's standard letter style of the sizes and



wording indicated, black with white core (letter color) except as otherwise indicated, punched for mechanical fastening except where adhesive mounting is necessary because of substrate.

B. Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless steel screws, except contact- type permanent adhesive where screws cannot or should not penetrate the substrate.

2.07 PLASTIC TAGS

A. General: Manufacturer's standard pre-printed or partially pre-printed accident-prevention tags, of plasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for writing, approximately 3-1/4" x 5-5/8", with brass grommets and wire fasteners, and with appropriate pre-printed wording including large-size primary wording (as examples; DANGER, CAUTION, DO NOT OPERATE).

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require insulation, painting or other covering or finish, including valve tags in finished mechanical spaces, install identification after completion of covering and painting. Install identification prior to installation of acoustical ceilings and similar removable concealment.

3.02 PIPING SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION

A. General: Install pipe markers of one of the following types on each system indicated to receive identification, and include arrows to show normal direction of flow. 1. Plastic pipe markers, with application system as indicated under "Materials" in this section.

Install on pipe insulation segment where required for hot non-insulated pipes.

B. Locate pipe markers and color bands as follows wherever piping is exposed to view in occupied spaces, machine rooms, accessible maintenance spaces (shafts, tunnels, plenums) and exterior non-concealed locations. 1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch, excluding short take-offs for terminal units; mark each pipe at branch,

where there could be question of flow pattern. 3. Near locations where pipes pass through walls or floors/ceilings, or enter non-accessible

enclosures. 4. At access doors and similar access points which permit view of concealed piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced intermediately at maximum spacing of 50' along each piping run, except reduce

spacing to 25' in congested areas of piping and equipment. 7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings, except omit intermediately spaced markers.

3.03 VALVE IDENTIFICATION

A. General: Provide valve tag on every valve, cock and control device in each piping system; exclude check valves, valves within factory-fabricated equipment units, HVAC terminal devices and similar rough-in connections of end-use units. List each tagged valve in valve schedule for each piping system.

B. Mount valve schedule frames and schedules in boiler rooms where indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, where directed by Architect/Engineer. 1. Where more than one major machine room is shown for project, install mounted valved

schedule in each major machine room, and repeat only main valves which are to be operated in conjunction with operations of more than single machine room.



3.04 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

A. General: Install engraved plastic laminate sign on or near each major item of mechanical equipment and each operational device, as specified herein if not otherwise specified for each item or device. When more than one HVAC unit is present, it shall be permanently identified as to the area or space served by the equipment. Provide signs for the following general categories of equipment and operational devices: 1. Main control and operating valves, including safety devices and hazardous units such as gas

outlets. 2. Meters, gages, thermometers and similar units. 3. Fuel-burning units including boilers, heaters and absorption units. 4. Pumps, compressors, chillers, condensers and similar motor-driven units. 5. Heat exchangers, coils, evaporators, cooling towers, heat recovery units and similar

equipment. 6. Fans, blowers, primary balancing dampers and mixing boxes. 7. Packaged HVAC central-station air handling units. 8. Tanks and pressure vessels. 9. Strainers, filters, humidifiers, water treatment systems and similar equipment.

B. Optional Sign Types: Where lettering larger than 1" height is needed for proper identification, because of distance from normal location of required identification, stenciled signs may be provided in lieu of engraved plastic, at Installer's option.

C. Lettering Size: Minimum 1" high lettering for name of unit.

D. Text of Signs: In addition to name of identified unit, provide lettering to distinguish between multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions and warn of hazards and improper operations.

E. Fire and Smoke Damper Identification: Access points, i.e. access doors, access panels, lay-in ceiling tile, etc., shall be permanently identified on the exterior of the access point by a label having letters not less than 0.5” in height reading: “SMOKE DAMPER” or “FIRE DAMPER” or “FIRE/SMOKE DAMPER”.

F. The location of fire dampers above accessible ceilings shall be identified by a red circular dot at least ¾” in diameter or embossed tape adhered to the nearest ceiling grid member.

G. Locations of the air handling devices which have filters and are accessible ceilings shall be identified by a blue circular dot at least ¾” in diameter or embossed tape adhered to the nearest ceiling grid member.

H. Access doors: 1. Provide engraved nameplates to identify concealed valves, controls, dampers or other

similar concealed mechanical equipment. Use the following colors for specified nameplates or labels. a. Red for fire-protection devices, including dampers. b. Blue for air-handling devices. c. Green for plumbing devices and piping.

I. Lift-out Ceilings: 1. Provide adhesive labels on ceiling grid to identify concealed valves, filters, fire/smoke

dampers or similar concealed mechanical equipment that is directly above nameplate in the ceiling space. Use the following colors for specified labels. a. Red for fire-protection devices, including dampers. b. Blue for air-handling devices. c. Green for plumbing devices and piping.



END OF SECTION


DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS Florence Crittenton TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING OZ Architecture Project No. 113266.00 Section 23 05 93 - 1

SECTION 23 05 93

TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING

PART 1 GENERAL



1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Extent of testing, adjusting, and balancing work required by this section is indicated by requirements of this section; and is defined to include, but is not necessarily limited to, air distribution systems, hydronic distribution systems and associated equipment, and apparatus of mechanical work. The work consists of setting speed and volume (flow) adjusting facilities provided for systems, recording data, conducting tests, preparing and submitting reports, and recommending modifications to the work as required by the contract documents.

B. Testing, adjusting, and balancing specified in this section include, but are not limited to, the following mechanical equipment: 1. Fans. 2. Air-handling units. 3. Ductwork systems, including terminal units. 4. Pumps. 5. Condensers. 6. Coils. 7. Boilers. 8. Piping systems. 9. Cabinet heaters. 10. Unit heaters. 11. Domestic hot water recirculating pumps & system balancing valves shown on plumbing

plans.


A. Contractor's Qualifications: Firm with at least 5-years of successful testing, adjusting, and balancing experience on projects with testing and balancing requirements similar to those required for this project.

1.04 QUALIFICATIONS OF CONTRACTOR

A. The Mechanical Contractor shall procure the services of an independent testing and balancing agency specializing in the testing, adjusting and balancing of environmental systems to perform the above mentioned work. Testing and balancing report shall be certified by a Registered Professional Engineer, or a NEBB or TABB Certified Balancing Supervisor who is registered and/or certified in the jurisdiction where the testing is being conducted. The Engineer, NEBB, or TABB Supervisor shall represent the balancing firm in progress meetings as required, and shall be available for interpreting all material found in the balance report. Any individual involved in actual testing and balancing shall be under the direct supervision of the Registered Professional Engineer or the NEBB or TABB certified supervisor.

B. Codes and Standards:



1. NEBB Compliance: Comply with NEBB's latest edition of "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems" as applicable to mechanical air and hydronic distribution systems, and associated equipment and apparatus.

2. TABB Compliance: Comply with TABB’s “Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Bureau Standards, Procedure and Specifications” as applicable to mechanical air and hydronic distribution systems, and associated equipment and apparatus.

3. AABC Compliance: Comply with the latest edition of AABC's Manual MN-1 "AABC National Standards", as applicable to mechanical air and hydronic distribution systems, and associated equipment and apparatus.

1.05 APPROVAL OF CONTRACTOR

A. Testing, Adjusting and Balancing (TAB) firms acceptable to do the work are: 1. Air-Right, Inc. 2. Double T Balancing Company. 3. Griffith Engineering Service Co. 4. Jedi Balancing, Inc. 5. JPG Engineering. 6. TAB Services.

B. Any Testing, Adjusting and Balancing (TAB) firm other than those listed above desiring to offer their services for this work shall submit their qualifications to the Engineer, not less than seven (7) calendar days before the bid date. Their submittals shall include the name and Professional Engineer stamp of the engineer who will be supervising the testing and balancing. Copies of each Supervisor’s certificate shall be included in the submittals. This submittal of qualifications will be reviewed by the Engineer. The Engineer will then approve or disapprove this TAB firm based on these qualifications.

1.06 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit certified test reports, signed by Test and Balance Supervisor who performed TAB work. In addition, have the report certified by the Professional Engineer who is familiar with the TAB work on this project.

B. Submit biographical data on Engineer who is to directly supervise testing, adjusting, and balancing work.

1.07 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Do not proceed with testing, adjusting, and balancing work until work has been completed and is operable. Ensure that there is no latent residual work still to be completed.

B. Do not proceed until work scheduled for testing, adjusting, and balancing is clean and free from debris, dirt, and discarded building materials.

C. Put all heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems and equipment into full operation and continue operation of same during each working day of testing and balancing. Preliminary TAB requirements shall be ascertained prior to the commencement of work through a review of available plans and specifications for the project. In addition, visual observations at the site during construction shall be made to determine the location of required balancing devices and that they are being installed properly for the need.

D. Before any air balance work is done, the following will be completed on each system: 1. Check for duct leakage. 2. Assure filters are installed. 3. See that filters are changed if they are dirty. 4. Check for correct fan rotation.



5. Check equipment vibration. 6. Check automatic dampers for proper operation. 7. Place all volume control dampers and outlets wide open at this time.

E. Before any hydronic balancing work is done, the system shall be checked for plugged strainers, correct pump rotation, correct control valve installation and operation, air locks, check system static pressure to assure system operation is below the limits of the system relief valves, proper flow meter and check valve installation. All throttling devices and control valves shall be open at this time.

1.08 INSPECTION OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. The Test and Balance contractor shall request from the Division 23 contractor a set of documents so that he can review his ability to balance the mechanical system. If any portion of the system cannot be balanced due to its configuration, a report shall be issued to the Division 23 contractor pointing out those areas where proper balancing will be impossible to achieve. This report shall be issued in time to make corrective actions prior to the purchase of materials.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PATCHING MATERIALS

A. Except as otherwise indicated, use the same products as used by the original Installer for patching holes in insulation, ductwork and housings, which have been cut or drilled for test purposes, including access for test instruments, attaching jigs, and similar purposes. 1. At Tester's option, plastic plugs with retainers may be used to patch drilled holes in ductwork

and housings.

2.02 TEST INSTRUMENTS

A. Utilize test instruments and equipment for TAB work required, of type, precision, calibration and capacity as recommended in the following TAB standards: 1. NEBB's Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental

Systems. 2. TABB’s Standards, Procedures and Specifications. 3. AABC's Manual MN-1 "AABC National Standards".

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Examine installed work and conditions under which testing is to be done to ensure that work has been completed, cleaned, and is operable. Do not proceed with TAB work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Tester.

B. Test, adjust and balance environmental systems and components, as indicated, in accordance with procedures outlined in applicable standards.

C. Test, adjust and balance system during summer season for air conditioning systems and during winter season for heating systems, including at least period of operation at outside conditions

within 5F wet bulb temperature of maximum summer design condition, and within 10F dry bulb temperature of minimum winter design condition. When seasonal operation does not permit measuring final temperatures, then take final temperature readings when seasonal operation does permit.



D. Balance all flows to terminals within +10% to -5% of design flow quantities. Measure and record the following data.

E. Systems may be tested in increments when approved by the Engineer.

F. When testing and balancing involve the building temperature control systems, coordinate with the temperature control subcontractor to achieve the desired results. All setpoints shall be documented and included with test report.

G. When deemed necessary by the mechanical consulting Engineer, the Test & Balance firm shall run temperature and/or humidity recordings and shall read any of the air or water report quantities in the presence of the engineer for verification purposes.

H. Permanently mark the settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices so that adjustment can be restored if disturbed at any time.

I. The contractor shall report observations made on the job such as noisy systems and unusual equipment vibration.

3.02 AIR BALANCE

A. Air supply, return and exhaust systems with air quantities for each air device; air handling units including supply, return, mixed, and outside temperatures and fan data including CFM, static pressure, fan RPM, motor running and full load amperage before and after final balance. Air diffusion patterns shall be set to minimize objectional drafts and noise.

B. The supply, return and exhaust fan static pressure shall be set by the balancing firm and the control contractor if the systems have fan volume control dampers. The duct static shall be confirmed both through the instrumentation installed on the job and by the balancing contractor. Fan air flows shall be confirmed by duct pitot traverse. The system shall be tested in all operation modes (full return air, full outside air, modulated damper position, full cooling). Amperages shall be checked in all modes. The fan speed resulting in satisfactory system performance shall be determined at full design delivery. Inlet or outlet fan volume control dampers shall be in the wide open position and one path presenting the greatest resistance to flow shall be fully open and unobstructed.

C. Verify operation of each room thermostat/sensor serving VAV terminal units over full range of heating and cooling to ensure proper sequence of control of the VAV operator and reheat coil valve. Field verify minimum and maximum air quantities of all variable volume terminal units and record final settings.

D. Final adjustments shall include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. All Fans: Belt Drive

a. RPM. Include sheave and belt exchange to deliver air flow within limits of installed motor horsepower and mechanical stress limits of the fan. Determine the limiting fan tip speed before increasing RPM. Final fan speed setting shall allow for predicted filter loading and shall establish proper duct pressures for operation of zone CFM regulators.

2. All Fans: Direct Drive a. RPM with speed taps. Set fan speed on tap which most closely approaches design

CFM. Report tap setting on equipment data sheet as high, medium or low. b. RPM with speed control rheostat. Set output of fan at design CFM by adjusting the

SCR or potentiometer. After adjustment, check fans ability to restart after powering down. Increase setting if required for proper starting. Mark setting on the adjustment device.

3. Motor Starter a. Mechanical Contractor Furnished

4. Thermal Heaters



a. Magnetic and Manual Starters. Furnish and exchange thermals as required for proper motor protection.

E. All major equipment performance tests shall be verified after system has been balanced and proper airflow rates established.

F. Patch holes in insulation, ductwork, and housings, which have been cut or drilled for test purposes, in manner recommended by original Installer. Report all damage requiring repair to the Division 23 contractor.

3.03 HYDRONIC BALANCE

A. Start hydronic balance after piping system has been cleaned, including strainers, and controls are functioning as required under other sections of Division 23.

B. Where liquid flow balancing cannot be accomplished due to system deficiencies such as excessive or lack of pumping head, inadequately sized motors, pressure drops not determinable or similar problems, prepare a list of such deficiencies and the suggested system modifications and furnish to the Engineer in writing and prior to submission of test report for necessary action.

C. Hydronic Balance shall include, but not be limited to the following: 1. Inlet and outlet water temperatures of all air handling unit coils, unit heaters, fan coil units,

cabinet unit heaters, and other heat release equipment, as well as the corresponding media flows.

2. Boiler inlet and leaving water temperatures, reset supply temperature (if applicable), gas flow rate and flue gas analysis.

3. Balancing valves on the inlet side of the boilers shall be adjusted for equal flow across all boilers.

4. All circulating pump flow rates, pressures, running amperage, and full load amperage at design flow and shut-off conditions.

5. The hydronic system shall be proportionally balanced being certain that the path to one terminal is fully open. Total system flow shall be adjusted at the pump by restricting the discharge balancing valve. If the pump must be severely restricted the impeller may have to be trimmed. This decision will be the responsibility of the contractor, supplier, and the mechanical engineer.

6. Check expansion tanks for water level and tank pressure. Record pressure. 7. Check all air vents for operation. Completely eliminate air from water systems. 8. Set and adjust water flow in all piping branches and risers, and record flow.

D. All water flow rates shall be balanced according to the actual flow rates indicated on the submittals. Do not balance directly off the HVAC schedules. Refer to the submittals for flow rates.

3.04 MINIMUM OSA QUANTITY OF VAV AIR HANDLING UNITS

A. The Test And Balance Contractor shall be required to assist the Temperature Controls Contractor in establishing a minimum outdoor air quantity under all supply flow conditions.

B. Test And Balance Procedure: 1. The Temperature Controls Contractor shall drive the VAV boxes to the minimum position.

After the fan operation has stabilized the supply fan flow shall be provided by the Temperature Controls Contractor and noted for the test and balance report. The outdoor damper shall be set to provide the proper airflow and that setting shall be noted in the test and balance report. The Temperature Controls Contractor shall drive the VAV boxes to the maximum position. After the fan operation has stabilized the supply fan flow shall be provided by the Temperature Controls Contractor and noted for the test and balance report. The outdoor damper shall be set to provide the proper airflow and that setting shall be noted



in the test and balance report. All four of these readings shall be provided to the Temperature Controls Contractor.

Description Type Device Comments

Maximum Airflow Setpoint Measurement From Test and Balance

Minimum Airflow Setpoint Measurement From Test and Balance

Damper Position at Maximum Setpoint Measurement From Test and Balance

Damper Position at Minimum Setpoint Measurement From Test and Balance

Economizer Minimum Setpoint Calculation

3.05 DOMESTIC HOT WATER RECIRCULATION

A. Balance hot water recirculation pumps and all system balancing valves shown on plumbing drawings.

3.06 REPORT OF WORK

A. Submit six (6) bound copies (or as required in Division 01) of the final testing and balancing report at least 15 days prior to the Mechanical Contractor's request for final inspection. All data shall be recorded on applicable reporting forms. The report shall include all operating data as listed in sections above, a list of all equipment used in the testing and balancing work, and shall be signed by the supervising engineer and affixed with his certification seal. Final acceptance of this project will not take place until a satisfactory report is received.

B. The pitot tube traverse method for determining CFM shall be used and recorded wherever possible.

C. Hydronic systems with meters: The system shall be balanced proportionally using the flow meters. On completion of the balance, the following information shall be recorded in the report: flow meter size and brand, required flow rate and pressure drop, valve settings on meters with a readable scale, flow rate in both full coil flow and full bypass modes.

D. Hydronic systems without meters (thermal or terminal rated pressure drop balance): the system shall be balanced proportionally to the terminal ratings. On completion of the balance the following information shall be recorded in the report: design entering and leaving water temperature/pressure drop, final balance entering and leaving water temperature/pressure drop.

E. When all hydronic balancing is done, all valves shall be marked or the locking rings set. Control valve bypass loops shall be set with the balancing valve to provide equal flow in either mode. Confirm in writing.

F. After all balancing is complete and all coordination with the contractor and the engineer is complete, furnish a bound report which shall contain the following information: 1. RPM, drive sheave information (as installed and as changed), fan nameplate information,

motor nameplate information, and amperage and voltage to all motors (in all operating modes).

2. Static pressure across all components of the system. 3. Original design and final balanced CFM at each system terminal. Include the terminal size,

reading orifice size, and velocities read to attain the CFM. 4. Pump and motor nameplate information, amperage and voltage to all motors, pressure drop

across all system terminals, pressure rise across the pump in PSI and feet of head. 5. Thermal protection for all motors shall be recorded. Starter brand, model, enclosure type,

installed thermal heaters and the rating of the heaters, required thermal heaters and the rating of the heaters if different than installed shall be recorded. If the starters were furnished by the mechanical contractor, the heaters shall be changed to the correct size and



so noted in the report. If the starters were furnished by the electrical contractor, the correct heater sizes shall be noted in the report and the electrical contractor shall be advised.

6. The report shall include a sheet which shall report the method of balance, project altitude, and any correction factors used in the calculations.

7. A reduced set of contract drawings shall be included in the report with all terminals (VAV boxes, outlets, inlets, coils, unit heaters, fintube loops, radiant panel loops, etc.) clearly marked and all equipment designated. Indicate all duct pitot traverse locations by a number which shall match identification numbers utilized in balance report.

3.07 GUARANTEE OF WORK

A. Guarantee the tests and balance for a period of 90 days from date of final acceptance of the test and balance report. During this period, the TAB Contractor shall make personnel available at no cost to the Owner to correct deficiencies in the balance or to help troubleshoot problem areas.

3.08 ADDITIONAL INSTRUCTIONS

A. Mark equipment settings, including damper control positions, valve indicators, fan speed control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings at completion of TAB work. Provide markings with paint or other suitable permanent identification materials.

B. Prepare report of recommendations for correcting unsatisfactory mechanical performances when system cannot be successfully balanced; including, where necessary, modifications which exceed requirements of contract documents for mechanical work.

C. Retest, adjust, and balance systems subsequent to significant system modifications, and resubmit test results.

3.09 RETAINAGE

A. Contract payment retainage will be withheld against the Mechanical Contractor until the final completion of this section of work has been demonstrated by the submission of the TAB report and an evaluation of its contents has been made by the Engineer.

END OF SECTION


DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS Florence Crittenton MECHANICAL INSULATION OZ Architecture Project No. 113266.00 Section 23 07 00 - 1

SECTION 23 07 00

MECHANICAL INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL



B. Refer to Section 23 30 00: Air Distribution for lined ductwork requirements.


A. Types of mechanical insulation specified in this section include the following: 1. Piping System Insulation:

a. Fiberglass. b. Calcium Silicate. c. Flexible Elastomeric.

2. Ductwork System Insulation: a. Fiberglass.

3. Equipment Insulation: a. Fiberglass. b. Flexible Elastomeric.


A. Flame/Smoke Ratings: Provide composite mechanical insulation (insulation, jackets, coverings, sealers, mastics and adhesives) with flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less, as tested by ASTM E 84 (NFPA 255) method.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PIPING INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Fiberglass Piping Insulation: ASTM C 547, Type I unless otherwise indicated. 1. Density: 3 lb/cu ft 2. Conductivity: not more than 0.24 Btu-in/hr-sq-°F at 75 °F. 3. Temperature Rating: -20 to 850 °F

B. Elastomeric thermal insulation 1. ASTM C534, Type 1 for piping materials; Type II for sheet materials 2. Temperature rating: -40 to 220º. 3. Density: 5.5 lb/cu ft 4. Conductivity: Not more than 0.27 Btu-in/hr-sq ft-ºF at 75°F 5. Permeance: 0.19 perms per inch

C. Jackets for Piping Insulation: 1. Refer to jacket schedule below.

D. Encase pipe fittings insulation with flame and smoke rated one-piece premolded PVC fitting covers, fastened as per manufacturer's recommendations.



E. Encase exterior piping and pipe insulation in tunnels with aluminum jacket with weather-proof construction.

F. Adhesives, Sealers, and Protective Finishes: 1. Insulating Cement: Dry density 34 lb/cu ft, thermal conductivity 0.91 Btu-in/hr-sq-°F at 400

°F. a. Approved manufacturers

1) PK "Super Stick" 2) Ryder "GP"

2. Filling and Finishing Cement: Dry density 40 lb/cu ft, thermal conductivity 0.89 Btu-in/hr-sq-°F at 400 °F. a. Approved manufacturers

1) PK "Quick Cote" 2) Ryder "MW"

G. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corp. (Basis of design fiberglass = Fiberglas 25) (Basis of

design calcium silicate = Kaylo 10) 2. Armstrong (Basis of design elastomeric = Armaflex II) 3. Knauf Fiber Glass. 4. Johns Manville Corporation. 5. Certain-Teed

2.02 DUCTWORK INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Flexible Fiberglass Ductwork Insulation: ASTM C 553, Type I. 1. Density: 3/4 lb/cu ft 2. Conductivity: not more than 0.31 Btu-in/hr-sq-°F at 75 °F. 3. Vapor transmission rating shall not exceed 0.02 perms.

B. Jackets for Ductwork Insulation: Refer to jacket schedule below.

C. Ductwork Insulation Accessories: Provide staples, bands, wires, tape, anchors, corner angles and similar accessories as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated.

D. Ductwork Insulation Compounds: Provide cements, adhesives, coatings, sealers, protective finishes and similar compounds as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated.

E. Encase exterior ductwork and ductwork insulation with aluminum jacket with weather proof construction

F. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corp. (Basis of design = Type 75P "Ductwrap") 2. Knauf Fiber Glass. 3. Johns Manville Corporation.

2.03 EQUIPMENT INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Fiberglass Equipment Insulation: ASTM C 553, Type I 1. Density: 3/4 lb/cu ft 2. Conductivity: not more than 0.45 Btu-in/hr-sq-°F at 75 °F. 3. Vapor transmission rating shall not exceed 0.02 perms.

B. Elastomeric thermal insulation 1. ASTM C534, Type 1 for piping materials; Type II for sheet materials 2. Temperature rating: -40 to 220º.



3. Density: 5.5 lb/cu ft 4. Conductivity: Not more than 0.27 Btu-in/hr-sq ft-ºF at 75°F 5. Permeance: 0.19 perms per inch

C. Equipment Insulation Compounds: Provide adhesives, cements, sealers, mastics and protective finishes as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated.

D. Equipment Insulation Accessories: Provide staples, bands, wire, wire netting, tape, corner angles, anchors and stud pins as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated.

E. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corp (Basis of design fiberglass = High Temperature Flexible

Batt Insulation) 2. Armstrong (Basis of design elastomeric = Armaflex II) 3. Knauf Fiber Glass. 4. Johns Manville Corporation.

2.04 JACKETS

A. Puncture resistance rating based on ASTM D781 test method

B. Permeance ratings based on ASTM E96, Procedure A

C. Type AA-1 jacket 1. Material: T3003, H14 to H19 aluminum alloy 2. Thickness: 0.016” (0.4mm), minimum 3. Factory applied to insulation with 1 mil thick polyethylene moisture barrier continuously

laminated across full width of jacketing 4. Seal: Integral longitudinal Pittsburgh seam with butt joint strips and weatherproof mastic 5. Approved manufacturer: Insul-Coustic “Alcorjac” or equivalent

D. Type GFR-1 jacket 1. Material: Heavy-duty, fire-retardant, glass fiber reinforced material with self-sealing lap 2. Factory applied to insulation 3. Finish: White vinyl or white kraft suitable for painting 4. Bench puncture resistance: 50 units minimum 5. Permeance: 0.02 perms, maximum 6. Vapor barrier: 0.001" aluminum foil adhered to inner surface of jacket 7. Approved manufacturer: Owens Corning Type ASJ or equivalent

E. Type GFR-2 jacket 1. Material: Heavy-duty, fire-retardant, glass fiber reinforced material 2. Factory applied to insulation 3. Finish: White vinyl or white kraft suitable for painting 4. Bench puncture resistance: 25 units minimum 5. Permeance: 0.02 perms, maximum 6. Vapor barrier: 0.001" aluminum foil adhered to inner surface of jacket 7. Approved manufacturer: Owens Corning type ASJ or equivalent

F. Type GFR-3 jacket 1. Material: Glass fiber reinforced 2. Factory applied to insulation 3. Finish: White kraft 4. Bench puncture resistance: 15 units, minimum 5. Permeance: 0.01 perms, maximum 6. Vapor barrier: Aluminum laminated to inner surface of jacket 7. Approved manufacturer: Owens Corning type FRK or equivalent



G. Type GF-1 jacket 1. Material: 20 x 20 mesh glass fabric 2. Embed in coat of lagging adhesive; finish with second coat of lagging adhesive. 3. Approved manufacturers: Manville “Duramesh” Type 205 or equivalent

H. Banding 1. Over aluminum jacketing with insulation less than 13" diameter: Stainless steel, 1/2" x 0.020,

Approved manufacturer: AJ Gerrard & Co., No. 305-SS with No. 202-SS seals 2. Maximum spacing 12" on center

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Inspection: Examine areas and conditions under which mechanical insulation is to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.

B. Insulation Thickness: Pipe insulation thickness shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the International Energy Conservation Codes.

C. R Values: Insulation R values shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the International Energy Conservation Codes.

3.02 HVAC PIPING SYSTEM INSULATION

A. Cold Piping (35°F to ambient): 1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following cold HVAC piping systems:

a. HVAC make-up water piping. b. Air conditioner condensate drain piping (first 10'). c. Refrigerant suction lines between evaporators and compressors.

2. Insulate each piping system specified above with the following type and thicknesses of insulation: a. Fiberglass: 1-1/2" thick. GFR-1 Jacket b. Elastomeric: 1" thick (for refrigerant piping only)

3. Insulation Omitted: Omit insulation on cold piping within unit cabinets provided piping is located over drain pan.

B. Hot Low Pressure Piping (to 200°F): 1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following hot low pressure HVAC piping systems

(water piping up to 250F): a. HVAC hot water supply and return piping. b. Hot gas refrigerant piping.

2. Insulate each piping system specified above with the following type and thicknesses of insulation: a. Fiberglass: 1-1/2" thick for pipe sizes up to and including 1-1/2", 2" thick for pipe over

1-1/2". GFR-1 Jacket except for condenser water which should have a AA-1 Jacket. 3. Insulation Omitted: Omit insulation on hot piping within unit cabinets; on cold piping within

unit cabinets provided piping is located over drain pan; on heating piping between control valve and heating coil where length is less than 4’ up to and including 1” size.

C. Refer to INSTALLATION OF PIPING AND DUCTWORK INSULATION for additional requirements.



3.03 DUCTWORK SYSTEM INSULATION

A. Insulation Omitted: Do not insulate fibrous glass ductwork, or lined ductwork. Refer to Section 23 30 00 for Lined Ductwork requirements (applies ONLY to transfer air duct as lined supply and return air ductwork is not allowed).

B. Cold Ductwork (Below Ambient Temperature): 1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following cold ductwork:

a. Outdoor air intake ductwork between air entrance and termination of outdoor air ductwork.

2. Insulate each ductwork system specified above with one of the following types and thickness of insulation: a. Rigid Fiberglass: 1-1/2" thick. GFR-2

C. Dual Temperature Ductwork: 1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following dual temperature ductwork:

a. Hot/cold supply and return ductwork between fan discharge or HVAC unit discharge and room terminal outlets.

2. Insulate each ductwork system specified above with one of the following types and thicknesses of insulation: a. Flexible Fiberglass: 2" thick, application limited to unconditioned locations.

1) Exposed ducts/plenums in equipment rooms (GFR-2) 2) Concealed ducts (GFR-3)

b. Flexible Fiberglass: 1-1/2” thick, application limited to conditioned, concealed locations. 1) Concealed ductwork in ceiling space or return air plenums. 2) Insulation may be omitted on return ductwork in return air plenums.

D. Refer to INSTALLATION OF PIPING AND DUCTWORK INSULATION for additional requirements.

3.04 EQUIPMENT / PIPING SPECIALTIES INSULATION

A. Hot Equipment / Piping Specialties (Above Ambient Temperature): 1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following hot equipment:

a. Boilers (not pre-insulated at factory). b. Water heaters (not pre-insulated at factory). c. Hot water expansion tanks. d. Air/Hydraulic Separators. e. Fittings. f. Valves

2. Insulate each item of equipment specified above with one of the following types and thicknesses of insulation: a. Fiberglass: 2" thick. GF-1 Jacket, unless indicated otherwise below.

1) Air Separators: Fiberglass 2-1/2" thick minimum GF-1 Jacket. 3. Insulation on valves, unions and other devices requiring service shall be removable.

B. Refer to INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT INSULATION for additional requirements.

3.05 INSTALLATION OF PIPING AND DUCTWORK INSULATION

A. General: Install insulation products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that insulation serves its intended purpose.

B. Install insulation on pipe systems subsequent to installation of heat tracing, painting, testing, and acceptance of tests.



C. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. Insulate each continuous run of piping with full-length units of insulation, with single cut piece to complete run. Do not use cut pieces or scraps abutting each other.

D. Clean and dry surfaces prior to insulating. Butt insulation joints firmly together to ensure complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered.

E. Maintain integrity of vapor-barrier jackets on insulation, and protect to prevent puncture or other damage.

F. Cover valves, fittings and similar items in each piping system with equivalent thickness and composition of insulation as applied to adjoining pipe run. Install factory molded, or job fabricated units that are removable except where specific form or type is indicated.

G. Extend insulation without interruption through walls, floors and similar piping penetrations, except where otherwise indicated.

H. Butt pipe insulation against pipe hanger insulation inserts. For hot pipes, apply 3" wide vapor barrier tape or band over the butt joints. For cold piping apply wet coat of vapor barrier lap cement on butt joints and seal joints with 3" wide vapor barrier tape or band.

I. Install insulation and vapor barrier jackets continuous over piping at trapeze hangers.

J. Piping Exposed to Outdoor/Ambient Conditions: Increase specified insulation thickness by 1” minimum. Protect outdoor insulation from weather by installing outdoor protective jacketing as recommended by manufacturer.

K. Do not insulate cleanouts, access openings or identification plates.

L. Flexible Elastomeric insulation shall be used on refrigerant piping only. All seams, fittings and joints shall be sealed with an approved flexible elastomeric adhesive. Piping system shall be insulated with absolutely no holes, gaps, tears or exposed joints.

3.06 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT INSULATION

A. General: Install equipment thermal insulation products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that insulation serves intended purpose.

B. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces and on clean and dry surfaces. Redo poorly fitted joints. Do not use mastic or joint sealer as filler for gaping joints and excessive voids resulting from poor workmanship.

C. Maintain integrity of vapor-barrier on equipment insulation and protect it to prevent puncture and other damage.

D. Do not apply insulation to equipment, breechings, or stacks while hot.

E. Apply insulation using staggered joint method for both single and double layer construction, where feasible. Apply each layer of insulation separately.

F. Coat insulated surfaces with layer of insulating cement, troweled in workmanlike manner, leaving smooth continuous surface. Fill in scored block, seams, chipped edges and depressions, and cover over wire netting and joints with cement of sufficient thickness to remove surface irregularities.



G. Cover insulated surfaces with all-service jacketing neatly fitted and firmly secured. Lap seams at least 2". Apply over vapor barrier where applicable.

H. Do not insulate boiler manholes, handholes, cleanouts, ASME stamp, and manufacturer's nameplate. Provide neatly beveled edge at interruptions of insulation.

I. Provide removable insulation sections to cover parts of equipment which must be opened periodically for maintenance; include metal vessel covers, fasteners, flanges, frames and accessories.

J. Equipment Exposed to Weather: Protect outdoor insulation from weather by installation of weather-barrier mastic protective jacketing, as recommended by manufacturer.

3.07 INSULATION REPAIR

A. Repair damaged sections of existing mechanical insulation damaged during this construction period. Use insulation of same thickness as damaged insulation, install new jacket lapping and sealed over existing.

3.08 PROTECTION AND REPLACEMENT

A. Replace damaged insulation which cannot be repaired satisfactorily, including units with vapor barrier damage and moisture saturated units.

B. Replace and repair insulation disturbed by testing and balancing procedures required under Section 23 05 93.

C. Protection: Insulation Installer shall advise Contractor of required protection for insulation work during remainder of construction period, to avoid damage and deterioration.

END OF SECTION


DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS Florence Crittenton TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEMS % DDC OZ Architecture Project No. 113266.00 Section 23 09 23 % 1

SECTION 23 09 23

TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEMS � DDC

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 WORK DESCRIPTION

A. Scope: This section contains general requirements for all work to be provided by the Temperature Controls Contractor. All requirements of Division 01 apply to all work of this section.

B. Refer to Section 23 00 00, Electric Wiring And Safety Device Work And Material Responsibilities for electrical, mechanical and temperature control contractor coordination of responsibilities.

C. The temperature controls contractor shall be responsible for providing and verifying all control sequences described in this section or in the Sequence of Operations regardless of whether the sequence uses the building automation system, unitary controls or third party control systems, or any combination of systems. Any deviation from the sequence of operations, including limitations caused by the lack of ability of the building automation system to interact with unitary or third party controls shall be clearly and prominently described as a deviation in the temperature controls submittal. The temperature controls contractor shall be responsible for coordinating and assuring the sequence of operations will be compatible with all equipment, including equipment purchased by other contractors. The temperature controls contractor will be responsible for correcting any interface problems that prevent the system from operating according to the sequence of operations.

D. Work Included: It is the intent of this specification for the building automation system to be fully networked and installed as a complete package by the Temperature Controls Contractor. The system shall include all computer software and hardware, controllers, sensors, transmission equipment, system workstations, local panels, installation, engineering, supervision, acceptance test, training, warranty service and, at the owner's option, extended warranty service.

E. All controller hardware and software provided under this section shall be BACnet or LONMARK compliant to provide the owner with an open, interoperable direct digital control system that will allow microprocessor control hardware and software from different control, fire alarm or card access system manufacturers to be integrated to this control system.

F. The system shall be capable of supporting an unlimited number of clients using a standard Web Browser such as Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator.

1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and supplementary conditions and Division 01 specifications sections, apply to work of this section. 1. Products furnished but not installed under this section:

a. Valves, flow switches, flow sensors, thermowells and pressure taps to be installed under Sections 23 05 00 and 23 21 00.

b. Automatic dampers to be installed under Section 23 30 00. 2. Products connected but not furnished or installed under this section:

a. Duct smoke detectors provided under Division 26 (fire alarm system) and installed under Section 23 30 00.

3. Coordination with electrical: a. Installation of all line voltage power wiring by Division 26. b. Each motor starter provided under Division 23, shall be furnished with individual control

power transformer to supply 120 volt control power and auxiliary contacts (one N.O. and one N.C.) for use by this section.



c. Controls contractor to coordinate the control panel locations requiring 120V power with the electrical contractor.

4. DPS Department of Technology Services will make any and all connections to the DPS intranet. DPS Department of Technology Services will assign an IP address to each IP%communicating controls device.

1.03 QUALIFICATIONS

A. The control system shall be furnished, engineered, and installed by a manufacturer's local authorized office. The control contractor shall have factory trained technicians to provide instruction, routine maintenance, and emergency service within 48 hours upon receipt of request.

B. Control system components shall be new and in conformance with the following applicable standards for products specified: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials, ASTM. 2. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers, IEEE. 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association, NEMA. 4. Underwriters Laboratory, UL (UL 916). 5. FCC Regulation, Part 15, Section 156. 6. National Fire Protection Association, NFPA. 7. Local Building Codes.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. General: All submittal requirements specified shall be provided as a single complete package, bound in a 3 ring binder. Provide six (6) submittal copies or the amount specified in Division 01, whichever is greater. Incomplete submittal packages will be returned un%reviewed. A partial submittal consisting of a damper and valve schedule will be accepted for projects with short construction schedules, provided a written request is submitted to the engineer. Submittal requirements are intended to eliminate or minimize engineering of either control hardware or software in the field, and shall be adhered to.

B. Sequences of Operation Submittals: The Controls Contractor’s submittals of control drawings shall include complete detailed sequences of operation for each piece of equipment, regardless of the completeness and clarity of the sequences in the specifications. They shall include: 1. An overview narrative of the system generally describing its purpose, components and

function. 2. All interactions and interlocks with other systems. 3. Detailed delineation of control between any packaged controls and the building automation

system, listing what points the BAS monitors only and what BAS points are control points and are adjustable.

4. Written sequences of control for packaged controlled equipment. 5. Sequences of control for the following modes of operation: Start%up, Warm%up, Cool%down,

Normal Occupied, Unoccupied, and Shutdown. 6. Capacity control sequences and equipment staging. 7. Temperature and pressure control: setbacks, setups, resets, etc. 8. Detailed sequences for all control strategies, e.g., economizer control, optimum start/stop,

staging, optimization, demand limiting, etc. 9. Effects of power or equipment failure with all standby component functions. 10. Sequences for all alarms and emergency shut downs. 11. Seasonal operational differences and recommendations.

C. Drawings: The controls contractor shall submit AutoCAD (Compliant with Version 2009) generated schematic drawings in hard copy and electronic media for the entire control system, for review and approval before work shall begin. Visio drawings are not acceptable. The hard copy drawings shall be submitted on 11" x 17" sheets with drawing information sized such that all drawing information is legible. The valve schedule, damper schedule and equipment



specification data sheets for all controls equipment shall be issued within 30 days for the notice to proceed. Provide software programs and sequences written in the programming language and in English (algorithm form), 14 days prior to system demonstration and acceptance testing. All other submittals required by this specification shall be issued within 60 days of the notice to proceed. The submittal drawings shall include the following: 1. A title sheet indicating the project title, index of all control drawings, and a one page network

diagram. The diagram shall depict the system architecture complete with a communications riser and all peripheral devices (DDC control panels). The diagram shall depict the actual connection arrangement including, distance between devices, type of wire used and serial number of controller. Items shall be arranged in the order they will be installed in the field. The following items shall also be listed for each DDC control panel on the diagram. a. Location (room number) b. Power source (breaker panel I.D. and breaker number). c. Panel software name and serial number. d. Type of controller.

2. Typical installation details, valve schedule, and damper schedule shall immediately follow the title sheet.

3. Floor plan layouts including locations with room numbers of controlled equipment, communication bus and network wiring layout, controller power source, temperature sensors, duct and space static pressure sensors, piping differential pressure sensors and terminal unit controllers with communication address identifiers.

4. Mechanical room layouts including locations of controlled equipment, communication and network wiring layout, and panel locations with unit communication address identifiers.

5. Point%to%point wiring diagrams for each HVAC system accurately depicting: a. All temperature controls located on a schematic diagram of the controlled HVAC

system. b. Start%stop arrangement for each piece of equipment. c. Equipment interlocks. d. Wiring terminal numbers. e. Special connection information required for properly controlling the mechanical

equipment. f. Control enclosure interior and exterior (face) layouts. g. Electrical power source for each DDC panel by room number. Include electrical panel

designation and breaker number on control drawing and at the DDC panel itself. 6. A bill of material reference list with drawing tag identifiers, application description,

manufacturer, model number, and quantity. 7. Sequences of operation which shall identify each major component (hardware and software)

involved in the control scheme by its tag identifier. Sequence shall be on the same drawing as the as the corresponding system schematic.

8. Software flow diagrams for each sequence of operation. Provide detail of all parameters; of inputs, outputs, PID loops, and auxiliary control functions. This requirement applies to both text editing and function block programming types. DDC systems that utilize block programming shall submit the flow diagrams utilizing the actual object oriented blocks, with a key of block types and block descriptions.

9. Detailed title block on each sheet indicating project title, date and contractor contact information.

10. Provide software programs and sequences written in the programming language and in English (algorithm form)

D. Technical Data: The submittal shall also include manufacturers catalog data describing each item of control equipment or component provided and installed for the project. Include and identify all data needed to show adherence to the corresponding specification section. Provide compressor sizing calculations if pneumatic devices are utilized.

E. Damper Schedule: Provide a damper schedule with tag identifiers, application descriptions, damper sizes, damper arrangements, damper type / name / model number, actuator type / name / model number, actuator quantity for each damper, spring range, actual pressure drop (in H20) ,



and air flow rate (CFM). Include damper/actuator product cut sheets and identify all technical data needed to show adherence to the corresponding specification section.

F. Valve Schedule: Provide a valve schedule which describes valve tag identifiers, application descriptions, specified GPM's, close%off rating, valve Cv ratings, pressure drop at rated Cv, port arrangement, spring range, valve size, part number, manufacturer and actuator type for each valve. Include valve/actuator product cut sheets and identify all technical data needed to show adherence to the corresponding specification section.

G. Test and Balance Plan: Provide test plan coordinated with the Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Contractor per 23 05 93. The test plan shall delineate the methods of testing and recording the results of the point%by%point verification and calibration of the hardware and the testing and tuning of the software. The test plan shall include a listing of all hardware points with columns for calibration, test and certification. There shall be a similar record for software.

H. Specification Compliance: Irrespective of any prior approval to bid, the submittals shall include a specification compliance analysis for review and approval before work shall begin. The compliance document shall address each paragraph of Part 1, Part 2, Part 3, and Part 4 of the specification by indicating COMPLY, or EXCEPTION. Do not indicate COMPLY unless the proposed system exactly meets the paragraph requirement. If EXCEPTION is indicated, then provide a clear and concise explanation of the variance from the specifications and the effect this has on the specified system performance. A schematic diagram showing the proposed system architecture and describing the expendability and capacity of the proposed system shall be included. The schematic shall have all non%applicable items clearly deleted and shall indicate the quantity of each component to be utilized to meet the requirements of this specification. The Engineer shall retain the right to accept or reject any listed exceptions to the specification.

1.05 RECORD DRAWINGS:

A. An updated as%built version of the control drawings and sequences of operation shall be included in the final controls O&M manual submittal. As%built drawings shall comply with all of the submittal requirements listed above. In addition to the control drawings the record drawings shall include the following instructions where applicable. 1. Emergency procedures for fire or failure of major equipment. 2. Normal starting, operating and shutdown procedures. 3. Summer or winter shutdown procedures.

B. Temperature control drawings shall be wall%mounted in an aluminum frame with plastic laminate glass in a location approved by the DPS Controls Application Engineer. Preferably in the main mechanical room.

C. A reduced copy of the controller drawing, listing all input and output points with functional descriptions, shall be placed inside the door to each controller enclosure in a plastic pocket attached to the door. The sheet shall be laminated. One sheet is required for each controller housed in the enclosure. Control System Programmer’s Manual with complete description of the custom control language and associated editor, including sample%written programs. Provide complete sets of all Programmer’s Manuals. All software and firmware algorithms shall be completely described and documented.

D. Provide maintenance, installation, and engineering manual(s) that clearly explain how to debug hardware problems; how to repair or replace hardware; preventive maintenance guidelines and schedules; calibration procedures; and how to engineer and install new points, panels, and operator interfaces.

E. All CAD drawings and controller dumps, generated for operation of the system, shall be included as part of the system documentation. This information shall be submitted in a machine%readable format (i.e., compact disk).



F. Input/output schedules, data sheets, and all other items required. Describe all regular maintenance that will need to be performed on the DDC hardware. Provide list of recommended spare parts. List all replacement parts with part numbers.

G. Complete original%issue documentation, installation, operation manuals, and supporting software for all third%party hardware and software furnished and installed as part of the system or required for the operation of the system, including remote terminals, user's computer work station, monitors, graphics and memory boards, network servers, printers, and modems.

H. A diagram of the wiring layout for the communication network showing the room number of the location of all junction boxes shall be shown on the diagram. Distances between termination points shall be indicated with a description of routing.

1.06 ACCEPTANCE PLAN: 1. Submit a detailed description of acceptance testing procedures that will be utilized to confirm

proper operation of all sequences of operation and points, along with acceptance testing checkoff sheets.

1.07 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING:

A. Submit a detailed description of the training to be provided to Owner's personnel for the Engineer's approval. Plan shall include comprehensive details on: course outline, schedule, synopsis, training materials required/supplied and shall include the identity and credentials of the course instructor(s). Plan shall include the following. 1. The Contractor shall provide a minimum of 16 hours of training in 4%hour blocks one day per

week on system operations and provide control demonstration time at the job site for the Owner's personnel.

2. This Contractor shall provide at least 4 hours in one session of classroom training at times and location as directed by the Owner. The training shall focus on design, operation, and maintenance procedures of the products installed and shall cover: a. Hardware configuration, including PC boards, switches, communication and point

wiring, and location of all sensors and control devices. b. Hardware maintenance, calibration, troubleshooting, diagnostics, and repair

instructions. c. Operation of central work station, including logging on and off, interrogating the system,

producing reports, acknowledging alarms, overriding computer control, changing firmware and software parameters, and generating and linking graphic screens.

d. The operational sequence of each system, including normal and abnormal operating modes, operating control strategies, and operator actions required to reset or monitor the system.

e. Programming using the editor, program design, syntax, and loading of custom control software.

f. Recovery procedures from power failures. g. Alarm formats. h. Maintaining software and programming backups.

3. The instructor(s) for the above sessions shall be employee(s) of the Control Contractor whose primary function is customer training and applications support.

4. A minimum of two copies of the most current control drawings shall be provided to the DPS HVAC Shop before the training begins. These shall be in addition to the drawings to be pro%vided under Part 1 Shop Drawing requirements, if the O&M Manuals have not been turned in to the Architect before the time of the training.

5. The training may be phased. The Owner may elect to conduct training and demonstration in two% to four%hour sessions over the life of the warranty period. All instructional material shall be available to each employee at each training session up to a maximum of ten (10) individuals.

6. All demonstration and training sessions shall be coordinated with the DPS Controls Application Engineer.



1.08 TWO%YEAR WARRANTY SUPPORT PLAN:

A. Submit a detailed description of the plan to support the owner during the two%year warranty period. Provide comprehensive details for: standard workday emergency problem response methods, planned preventative maintenance schedules, training and other plan information for the Engineer's approval. Plan shall include the following. 1. The warranty period shall begin as authorized by the DPS Controls Application Engineer in

writing. Authorization will not be given before the following conditions are met. Under no conditions will the Controls Warranty begin before the starting date of the General Warranty for the overall project. a. Completion of the tests and demonstration required in Part 3 and correction of all

problems discovered during the testing process. b. Completion of all punch list items that are the direct responsibility of the Controls

Contractor. c. Conduction of a preliminary training session for personnel of the HVAC Shop of the

District. The training shall consist of an orientation session at the job site to familiarize personnel with the location and type of controlled equipment and controls on the project, a discussion of the control sequences, and a review of the control drawings. A copy of the most current control drawings shall be provided to the DPS HVAC Shop at this time as well. Other, more detailed, training sessions (such as for review of the control programs) may be held at a later date during the warranty period

d. Completion and distribution of the as%built control drawings, including correction of all items noted by the Owner and Engineer after review of the documents.

2. The control system shall be guaranteed to be free from original defects in material and workmanship and in software design and operation for a period of 24 months after com%pletion of the contract. The Contractor shall provide the necessary skills, labor, and parts to assure that all system and component failures are promptly repaired.

3. The Contractor shall receive calls during the warranty period for all problems or questions experienced in the operation of the installed equipment and shall take steps to correct any deficiencies that may exist. The response time to critical problems (critical problems are those that may shut down or disrupt the operation of the school or create potential damage to the building or equipment) shall be four (4) hours maximum.

4. During the warranty period, the Contractor shall maintain a backup of all software installed in the system. The backup shall be updated monthly or whenever the Contractor makes a change to the software. A reload of backup software into the system shall be performed by the Contractor immediately upon notification by the Owner. The reload shall be free of charge unless it is due to a power failure of a duration longer than the battery backup.

5. The Contractor shall optimize all control software to assure acceptable operating and space conditions and peak energy efficiency. This shall include changes needed to optimize operation of the systems even if not explicitly described in Control Strategies.

6. The Contractor shall include the extended warranty for upgrades of controllers installed in the building for the warranty period.

7. At the end of the warranty period, the Contractor shall supply updated copies of the latest versions of all project record documentation as described in the Part 1 Project Record Documents requirements. This includes final updated drawings, software documentation, and magnetic media backups that include all changes that have been made to the system during the warranty period.

8. Coordinate with DPS Controls Application Engineer in advance before connecting new DDC system to District network.

9. Once the building DDC system is connected to the network, the Contractor shall notify the DPS Controls Application Engineer before and after performing any work on the DDC components, and report any changes made.

10. During the warranty period, District personnel shall make a reasonable effort to determine if a problem is due to the control system or some other source not the responsibility of the Controls Contractor, before requesting warranty service. However, if the Controls Contractor is called out and determines that the problem is not due to the controls system or other



building components, the Contractor shall not charge the District for a service call if it is determined that the source of the problem is not his responsibility.

B. OWNERSHIP OF PROPRIETARY MATERIAL: All project developed hardware and software shall become the property of the Owner. These include but are not limited to: 1. Project graphic images. 2. Record drawings. 3. Project database. 4. Job%specific application programming code. 5. All other documentation.

1.09 PROTECTION OF SOFTWARE RIGHTS

A. Prior to delivery of software the Owner and the party providing the software will enter into a software license agreement with provisions for the following: 1. Limiting use of software to equipment provided under these specifications. 2. Limiting copying. 3. Preserving confidentiality. 4. Prohibiting transfer to a third party.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable manufacturers shall be as follows: 1. Johnson Controls as installed by the Denver (JCI) branch. 2. Schneider Electric controls installed by Long and Associates.

2.02 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE

A. The complete electronic DDC temperature control system shall be comprised of five levels of control. Provisions for expansion of all levels of the DDC system shall be provided with this project such that a need for future "gateway" or "repeater" expansion hardware and software is not required: 1. The First Level is comprised of electronic sensors, valves, dampers, actuators, switches,

relays, and transducers, etc. 2. The Second Level includes dedicated zone controllers for VAV box, and FTU units. 3. The Third Level is comprised of local controllers for control of large primary mechanical

systems such as air handling systems or heating/chilled water systems. 4. The Fourth Level consists of the system controller(s) which are used for high level global

programming functions and system networking. 5. The Fifth Level is the System Workstation which includes the hardware and software

necessary for an operator/engineer to interface with the control system.

2.03 SENSOR/TRANSMITTERS

A. Transmitters shall have direct%acting, linear 0%10vdc or 4%20madc output signal compatible with

controller, with full%scale accuracy of ±1 percent or better. Zero and span shall be field%adjustable.

B. Temperature Sensors: Temperature sensors shall be linear precision, thermistor or platinum RTD type elements with ranges appropriate for applications, accurate within 1°F over the entire span: 1. DPS buildings (North and South Wings:

a. Space (room) sensors shall sensors only with a stainless steel wall%plate enclosure. 2. Florence Crittenton Buildings (Middle and East Wings):

a. Space (room) sensors shall be available with setpoint adjustment, space temperature indication, and override switch. Space sensors used for terminal unit applications shall



have a communications jack for connection to a laptop computer. The user shall be able to read actual cfm and set minimum maximum cfm setpoints plus other air balance criteria such as cfm calibration, fan start point, open%close damper, open%close valve and reheat flow setpoint through the space temperature sensor communication jack:

b. Provide occupant temperature setpoint adjustment and room temperature indication for all administrative office applications.

c. Provide blank covers with override switches for all public areas. 3. Duct mounted averaging sensors shall utilize a sensing element incorporated in a copper

capillary with a minimum length of 20 feet. The sensor shall be installed according to manufacturer’s recommendation and looped and fastened at a minimum of every 36 inches.

4. Sunshields shall be provided for outside air sensors. 5. Thermowells for all immersion sensors shall be stainless steel or brass as required for

application. 6. The following are typical sensor application ranges:

a. Space: 20°F % 100°F b. Chilled Water: 20°F % 100°F c. Condenser Water: 30°F % 130°F d. Heating Water: 50°F % 250°F e. Outside Air: %40°F % 140°F f. Mixed Air: 20°F % 100°F

C. Pressure Sensors: 1. Air Differential Pressure Sensor: Differential pressure sensor shall be temperature

compensated and shall vary the output voltage with a change in differential pressure. Sensing range shall be suitable for the application with accuracy of +/% 2% of range and repeatability of +/% 0.5% of range. Sensor shall be capable of withstanding up to 10" W.C. or eight times the rated pressure without damage, whichever is greater. Provide each sensors with a panel%mounted differential pressure gauge. Provide tees with removable lines on the high and low pressure lines.

2. Water Differential Pressure Sensor: Differential pressure sensor shall be temperature compensated and shall vary the output voltage with a change in differential pressure. The sensor accuracy shall be +%0.25 percent of calibrated span. Sensor shall be capable of withstanding up to three times the rated pressure for water applications without damage. Provide each sensor with differential pressure gauges mounted at the point of application. Provide tees with 1/2" size, quick%connect fittings on the high and low pressure lines. Provide McDonnell and Miller, Mueller or Barksdale DP switches.

3. Critical Differential Air Pressure Sensor: Provide Air%Monitor, Veltron II Model or Ashcroft differential air pressure sensors on critical applications where the pressure can drop below 0.2" W.C. such as outside air flow rate monitoring.

4. Provide wind dampening, weatherhead for each atmospheric pressure sensing point (DWYER A%306)

5. Transmitter span selection shall be by the contractor. a. The selection of the appropriate transmitter span is a crucial step in the design of a

functional control system. In general, the span of the transmitter should match the normal ranges of the variable to be controlled. For example, the measurement of system pressure where the normal operating pressure is 20 psi and the peak system pressure is 35 psi, the correct span selection would be 0 to 50 psi. A 0 to 100 psi span, while workable, would be operating in the lower third of the span under normal conditions. This decreases the controller’s ability to detect small changes in pressure. Ideally, the control setpoint should be at approximately 75 percent of the transmitter’s span. However, expected maximum and minimum values encountered during normal operation of the system must be accounted for.

b. Transmitter span selection must be very precise with airflow monitoring stations. The recommendations of the airflow%monitoring station supplier must be followed and shall include an altitude correction factor.



c. Transmitters found operating in the lower 33 percent or upper 20 percent of their span, during normal conditions of system operation, shall be replaced at the Contractor’s expense with units having an acceptable span.

D. Water Flow Rate Sensors: Provide in%line, insertion turbines, vortex or magmeter type water flow rate sensors.

E. Air Velocity Sensors: Sensor shall use thermal anemometry to determine air flow rate. Repeatability shall be ± 25 FPM; accuracy ± 5% of range. The anemometer shall use constant temperature differential technology and operate from 30°F to 120°F.

F. Carbon Dioxide Sensor: Duct Mounted type; provide Viasala GDM20) or approved equal. Wall mounted type; provide Viasala GMW20, or approved equal. Sensor shall be designed to monitor CO2 levels, in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 62%2001, have a 4%20 mA output, have an

accuracy at 20°C <(20ppm +1.5% of reading), and a range of 0%2000 PPM, adjustable to 20,000 PPM.

G. Status: Fan and pump status shall utilize a current switch.

2.04 AUXILIARY ELECTRIC CONTROL DEVICES

A. Control Relays: Shall be UL listed plug%in type with dust cover, LED "energized" indicator and integral H%O%A switch. Contract rating, configuration and coil voltage shall be suitable for the application.

B. Manual Control Switches: Shall be UL listed for use in NEMA 1 enclosures with contact arrangement and rating suitable for the application. Bat handle or knob actuator with nameplate clearly identifying function of each switch position.

C. Line Voltage Thermostats: Line Voltage Thermostats shall be U.L. listed with, digital or analog display and temperature adjustment and switching at an adjustable setpoint with a range of 55° to 85°F. Provide lockable metal guards for all thermostats located in areas where mechanical damage or tampering may occur. (Honeywell LineVoltPRO or equal)

D. Low Voltage Thermostats: Low voltage thermostats shall be single stage with digital or analog display, and temperature adjustment and switching at an adjustable setpoint with a range of 55° to 85°F. Provide lockable metal guards for all thermostats located in areas where mechanical damage or tampering may occur. (Honeywell FocusPro 5000 or equal)

E. Differential Pressure Switches: Pressure differential switches (air or water service) shall be UL listed, DPDT snap%acting, pilot duty rated (125 VA minimum), NEMA 1 enclosure, with scale range and differential suitable for intended application or as specified. Switches shall be capable of withstanding up to 150% of rated pressure for air applications and up to 300% of rated pressure for water applications. Duct high pressure switches shall be provided with contacts that require manual resetting.

F. Current Sensing Relays: Current Sensing Relays shall be U.L. listed and of the proper range. The switch output contact shall be rated for 30VDC, Threshold setting shall be fully adjustable within the selected range. Response time shall be 0.25 seconds or less. Provide current sensing relays on all fans and pumps for status sensing unless otherwise noted.

G. Low Temperature Thermostats: Low Temperature Thermostats shall be U.L. listed, DPDT snap%acting, pilot duty rated (125 VA, minimum), NEMA 1 enclosure with manually adjustable set point and differential suitable for the application or as specified. Switches shall be actuated by the coldest 1' of a 20' capillary and shall be provided with contacts that require manual resetting. The element shall be properly supported to cover the entire downstream side of the heating coil with a



minimum of three loops. Separate thermostats shall be provided for each coil section. The setpoint shall be 25°F unless otherwise specified on the plans or sequence of operation. Wire to protect unit in both hand and automatic operation. Wire one set of contacts directly to the fan starter circuit and the other to an alarm input. The device shall be manually reset unless indicated otherwise.

H. Flow Switches: Flow Switches shall be U.L. listed and shall be of the paddle type equipped with DPDT contacts to establish proof of flow. Flow switches shall be of the vapor%proof type.

I. Control Transformers: Shall be UL listed Class 2 current%limiting type, or shall be furnished with over%current protection in both primary and secondary circuits for Class 2 service.

J. Damper End Switches: Shall be UL listed line voltage SPDT snap%acting pilot duty rated (125 VA minimum) NEMA 1 enclosure, with roller type actuating arm suitable for damper position application and shall be integral to the actuator.

K. Breakglass Chiller Room Emergency Stop Switch: Shall be UL listed for line voltage with SPDT snap%acting pilot duty rated (125 VA minimum). Provide weather tight enclosure for exterior mounted applications.

L. Smoke Detectors: Shall be as specified in the schedule of responsibilities: 1. Smoke detectors located in air handling units or ducts shall be complete with duct%mounting

accessories as recommended by manufacturer. Provide multiple units for larger duct areas consistent with manufacturer's recommendations.

2. Provide all control interlock wiring from fire/smoke alarm system relay contacts to HVAC controls unless this wiring is noted in the Division 26 plans or specifications

3. Wire smoke detectors to shut down in both hand and automatic mode.

M. Time%delay relays shall be adjustable plus or minus 200 percent (minimum) from the required set point.

N. Multi%Level Control Panel for Liquids: the controls shall be conductance%actuated, utilizing electrodes and the conductivity of the liquid itself to sense level. The sensor shall have four (4) level%sensing electrodes and one (1) ground electrode, in lengths suitable for the application. Unit must function on a fiberglass tank.

2.05 CONTROL VALVES

A. General: 1. All valves to heating coils which are part of an air handling system which takes in outside air

shall open for full supply water flow whenever a loss of power or air supply to the valves occurs. Chilled water valves shall fail closed.

2. Valve actuator and trim shall be furnished to provide the following minimum close%off pressure ratings: a. Water Valves:

1) Two%way % 150% of total system (pump) head. 2) Three%way % 300% of pressure differential between ports A and B at design flow or

100% of total system (pump) head. 3. The temperature control contractor shall size control valves for proper control characteristics

for each application. 4. All modulating valves shall have equal flow characteristics, i.e., for equal increments of valve

stem stroke the change if flow rate with respect to valve stroke will be expressed as a constant percent of the flow rate at the time of the change. a. Two%way modulating valves shall be sized at wide open position, with full flow across

the valve. The pressure drop at these conditions shall be equal to 50 percent of the available pressure differential between the mains with a minimum of 4 psi.



b. Three%way modulating valves shall be sized at wide open position, with full flow across the valve. The pressure drop at these conditions shall be equal to twice the pressure drop through the device serviced with a minimum of 3 psi.

5. All control valves over 3/4 inch shall have a minimum rangeability (the ratio of the maximum controllable flow to the minimum controllable flow) of 50 to 1.

6. All two position isolation valves shall be line size. Butterfly valves may be used for any isolation valve application.

B. Water Valve Characteristics: 1. Valves % 1/2" to 2": Valves shall be bronze body or cast brass ANSI Class 250, spring

loaded, Teflon or ring packing and stainless steel stems. Two%way valves to have replaceable composition disc. Johnson VG%700, Siemens 599 or Belimo globe valves. The body rating shall be a minimum of 250 psig.

2. Valves % 2½" and above: Valves shall be constructed with a cast iron body ANSI Class 125 with guided plug, stainless steel stems, Teflon ring packing and flanged connections. The body rating shall be a minimum of 125 psig.

3. Water Valves with caged trim are not allowed. 4. Butterfly valves: modulating, three%way valves or two%position valves 4" and larger may be

tight%closing butterfly valves. Full%lug type, 250 psi WOG, extended neck, cast iron body, alu%minum/bronze disk, stainless steel shaft, field replaceable cartridge design, EPDM seat and seal with integral actuator. The modulating, three%way valve substitute shall consist of linked butterfly valves with a factory%installed linkage. Modulating valves shall be sized for three (3) psi pressure drop. Johnson Controls VF, Siemens or Belimo

5. Air handling unit coils, Variable air volume terminal coils, heat exchangers and Baseboard heating: modulating (not two%position) valves

6. For systems with glycol solutions, provide documentation that the valve components in contact with the fluid are compatible with glycol.

C. Valve Actuators: 1. Valve actuators shall have a cast aluminum or cast iron housing. 2. Actuators shall have sufficient power to operate the valve and provide for tight shut%off at the

differential pressures encountered. 3. Provide spring return actuators for all applications unless noted otherwise. 4. Where required by the sequence of operation, valves shall be capable of being sequenced

with other valves or other actuated devices. Where such sequencing is required, the actual spring range, when adjusted for spring shift, shall be such that no overlapping occurs. In the event that spring shift causes an overlap, a pilot positioner shall be furnished.

5. Electric actuators shall be oil%immersed gear train, rotary, hydraulic or magnetic type except as noted otherwise.

6. Electric actuators for VAV and reheat terminal unit applications may be three point floating type for valves that are 3/4 inch or less. These actuators are not required to be spring%return.

7. Actuators providing control by temperature change media within the actuator are not acceptable.

8. All actuators shall provide a means of manually positioning the output coupling in the absence of power.

9. Dual independently adjustable auxiliary switches must be integral to the actuator. The addition of this feature as an accessory kit is not acceptable.

10. All actuators shall provide an easily readable high contrast yellow on black position indicator.

2.06 CONTROL DAMPERS

A. Motorized dampers, unless otherwise specified elsewhere, shall meet the following and shall be provided by the temperature controls contractor: 1. Frame of 13 gauge galvanized steel roll formed into channels and welded for maximum

strength and shall have flanges for duct mounting where applicable.



2. Blades of 16 gauge galvanized steel, roll%formed airfoil%type design with extruded vinyl blade edge seals mechanically locked into the blade edge.

3. Stainless steel (28 gauge minimum) jamb seals of flexible, compression type. 4. Control shaft shall be 1/2" dia. removable shaft. Linkage shall be located outside of

airstream. 5. Leakage shall be a maximum of 4.5 cfm/ft based on a pressure differential of 1.0" w.g. 6. Airfoil type dampers shall be used for any applications where the air velocities are greater

than 1500 FPM. 7. Provide a minimum of one damper actuator per damper section. 8. Bearings shall be oil impregnated to provide constant lubrication. 9. Blade edge seals shall be easily replaceable if they are damaged. 10. An internal stop shall be provided on all dampers to prevent over%rotation in the closed

position. 11. Provide Ruskin CD%50 or approved equal.

B. Unless otherwise scheduled, the control dampers for outdoor/return air mixing box dampers shall be parallel blade, arranged to direct airstreams towards each other. Dampers used for air volume or pressure control modulating applications shall be opposed blade type. All other dampers may be parallel or opposed blade type.

C. Damper Actuators: 1. Electric actuators shall be direct coupled typed. 2. Unless otherwise noted, all actuators must be spring return type. Under no circumstances

shall capacitors or batteries be used in lieu of spring return. 3. Actuators for VAV terminal control may be non%spring return. 4. All actuators shall provide a means of manually positioning the output coupling in the

absence of power. 5. Dual independently adjustable auxiliary switches must be integral to the actuator. The

addition of this feature as an accessory kit is not acceptable. 6. All actuators shall provide an easily readable high contrast yellow on black position indicator.

2.07 LOCAL CONTROL PANELS

A. All DDC control panels, relays, switches, transducers, transformers, power supplies, communications interfaces and other field interface devices, shall be panel mounted. Each local controls panel shall have door mounted devices as shown on the drawings. Provide a convenience 120 VAC receptacle in each panel. All electrical devices, within the panels shall be wired to a numbered terminal strip. All wiring within the panel shall be run in wiring tray in accordance with NEMA and UL standards, and shall meet all local codes. Panels shall be NEMS%1 locking type suitable for applications as required. Provide a final as%built control drawing, reduced, laminated, and mounted inside of the panel door. Provide panel with 20% spare mounting capacity.

B. Devices shall be flush%mounted on panel face.

C. Manual timer overrides are not permitted. Manual overrides will be handled through a software function. If any manual override exist, they shall be removed as part of this project.

D. Internal components shall be securely mounted on removable sub%panels. Each component shall be individually labeled with function and device identification, as shown on control/interlock shop drawings. Label all components in accordance with Electrical Identification Specification Section.

E. Interconnections between internal and face%mounted devices pre%wired with color%coded stranded conductors neatly installed in plastic troughs and/or tie%wrapped. Terminals for field connections shall be UL%listed for 600%volt service, individually identified per control/interlock drawings, with adequate clearance for field wiring. Control terminations for field connection shall be individually identified per control drawings.



F. Provide on/off power switch with over%current protection to each local panel. Provide a 120%volt duplex outlet inside each control panel that houses a DDC controller (except VAV controllers) if there is not an outlet within 5’ of the enclosure.

G. All control panel locks shall be the same. Contractor shall give the keys to the DPS Controls Application Engineer at completion of training.

H. All field devices shall be mounted in panels. Exceptions include devices with enclosed electrical terminations, and designed to be installed on the controlled/monitored equipment and (e.g., pipe/duct temperature/pressure sensors) or those for space mounting (e.g., space temperature sensors).

2.08 MISCELLANEOUS

A. The Controls Contractor shall furnish all electric relays and coordinate with the supplier of magnetic starters for the auxiliary contact requirements. All electric control devices shall be of a type to meet current, voltage, and switching equipment of their particular application. Relays shall be provided with 24 VAC coils and contacts shall be rated at 10 amps minimum.

2.09 ZONE CONTROLLER HARDWARE

A. General: Each HVAC Zone Controller shall be a stand%alone DDC controller. The controller shall include all hardware and software required for communications with the system controller. An individual zone controller shall be dedicated for each zone terminal device. Individual zone controllers are not required for constant volume duct reheat coil applications, but may be provided at Temperature Control Contractor's option.

B. Programs: The control program shall reside in the zone controller. The application program shall be maintained in ROM. The default database, ie. setpoints and configuration information, shall be stored in EEPROM. Controllers requiring local setting of potentiometer or dip switches for control strategies are not acceptable. No batteries can be used for memory protection.

C. Stand%Alone: Controllers requiring the application or database to be downloaded from a host or share processing with a "master controller" shall not be acceptable. After a power failure the zone controller must run the control application using the current setpoints and configuration.

D. Communications: Communication to the system controller shall be 9600%baud asynchronous.

E. Input%/Output: Each zone controller shall have the necessary quantities of inputs and outputs for the selected duty. Inputs shall be individually electrically isolated from other inputs, outputs, communications, and power. All inputs shall feature an auto%calibrate function to eliminate sensing errors.

F. Connections: All electrical connections shall be made to the combination terminal strip and base assembly. To insure long term reliability, all electrical terminations shall be screw type.

G. The logic card, containing all active electrical components, shall be easily installable and removable from the wiring base, without the use of tools or the removal of any electrical wiring. Products that require disconnection of wiring from logic card before removal will be required to supply and install a quick disconnect type inter%connection.

H. All controllers shall be interoperable controllers bearing the applicable BACnet or LONMARK logo on each controller that is provided.



2.10 ZONE CONTROLLER SOFTWARE

A. The zone controller software shall be provided with the capabilities required by the specific application.

B. Each input, output or calculation result shall be capable of being assigned to the network controller for system networking.

2.11 LOCAL CONTROLLER HARDWARE

A. General: The Local Controllers shall be a local control loop microprocessor%based controller installed at each mechanical system; i.e., air handling unit, heating boiler, chiller. Provide only one controller for each system indicated above. The controller shall execute local control sequences, independent of a workstation. All control loops and setpoints shall be stored in EEPROM or other non%volatile field reprogrammable memory. Each controller shall be addressable by a workstation or a portable laptop computer. Where local controllers are used for constant volume duct reheat coil applications, group reheat zones to a local controller by floor, air handling unit, service, etc.

B. Scan: Controller shall continuously scan and maintain the most recent data in EEPROM for retrieval by a remote workstation and by the local controller software programs.

C. Isolation: Control, communication, and power circuits for each controller shall be individually electrically isolated to protect against transients, spikes, and power surges. All inputs and outputs shall be individually optically isolated from other inputs and outputs, power, communication, and field wiring. Optical isolation shall be provided either as an integral component of the controller or provided as a separate interface device between the controller and field wiring.

D. Servicing: For ease of servicing, each Controller shall consist of a removable plug%in circuit board. Products which require disconnection of wiring from the local controller logic card before removal shall supply and install a quick disconnect type interconnection.

E. All controllers shall be interoperable controllers bearing the applicable BACnet or LONMARK logo on each controller that is provided.

F. Provide interfaces to subsystems that do not communicate via BACnet/IP

G. Database: All field control database shall be entered, changed or downloaded to the local controllers via a portable service tool or system workstation.

H. Auto%Calibration: All inputs shall feature an auto%calibrate function to eliminate sensing errors.

I. Input/Output Modules: Provide the following input/output capabilities:

J. Universal inputs which can accept industry standard analog signals (4%20 mA, 0%5 VDC, etc.) and binary contact closures: 1. Digital outputs may be latched or momentary contact type. 2. Analog outputs shall have a 1% resolution over total output span of 100%.

2.12 LOCAL CONTROL SOFTWARE

A. General: Provide complete controller software to execute all mechanical system local loop controls functions.



B. Control Parameters: The software blocks in the local controller shall produce all of the necessary reverse acting and/or direct acting PI

2 signals as required by the control sequence. The

proportional and integral values which make up the PI2 output value shall be readable and

modifiable, at the system workstation or the portable service tool to facilitate tuning of control loops.

C. Networking: Each input, output, or calculation result shall be capable of being assigned to the system controller for system networking.

D. Programming Functions: Provide the following standard temperature control loop programming functions: 1. Control Block Programming. 2. PI

2 or PID Control.

3. Serial Load Staging. 4. Binary Load Staging. 5. Analog Load Staging. 6. Master%Submaster Routines. 7. Anti%Windup for Integrated Loops. 8. Weekly/Daily/Holiday Scheduling. 9. Optimum Start/Stop Programming. 10. Automatic Trending with Adjustable Sample Rates.

2.13 CUSTOM APPLICATION CONTROLLERS

A. Summary 1. The following sections outline the requirements for custom application controllers. The

controllers referred to herein shall be fully programmable and capable of operating in a standalone mode.

B. Scope Of Work 1. The controllers described herein shall be provided in their entirety by the BAS/ATC

contractor. High voltage power shall be provided by the Division 16 Electrical Contractor. The BAS/ATC contractor shall provide all low voltage (24 volts or less) wiring, terminations, and system programming.

C. System Description 1. Custom application controllers shall be microprocessor based, consisting of analog and

binary input and output points, and programmable logic, designed for monitoring and control applications. The controllers shall be capable of operating as completely independent units and/or as part of a facility%wide building control system.

D. Quality Assurance 1. Controllers shall be certified by a nationally recognized testing laboratory to company with

the requirements of the UL%916 Energy Management Equipment standard. Controllers shall meet all requirements of FCC regulations, Part 15, Class A, for radio frequency emissions. Controller shall be in compliance with European Directive CE for electrical immunity (directive 89/336/EEC EN) and CE for electrical emissions, and include the CE Mark.

E. Custom Application Controllers 1. Custom application controllers shall be mounted in enclosures appropriate to the project

environmental conditions. a. Controllers used in conditioned ambient shall be mounted in NEMA type%1 enclosures,

and shall be rated for operation at 0 C to 50 C (32 F to 120 F). b. Controllers used outdoors and/or in wet ambient shall be mounted within NEMA type%4

waterproof enclosures, and shall be rated for operation at %40 C to 70 C (% 40 F to 158 F).



2. Enclosures shall include a line voltage to 24 VAC transformer. Transformer shall be fused or circuit%breaker protected within the enclosure.

3. Enclosures shall have multiple access locations for wire and conduit to enter the cabinet, and an isolated high voltage section. All control wiring shall be electrically terminated inside the cabinet. The controller in enclosure shall be UL%listed.

4. The controllers shall be software configurable for the types of input/output points required per the points list, and for future expansion.

5. The controllers shall receive signals from industry standard sensors and input devices and directly control analog and binary control devices. The controllers shall have the capability to monitor and control the following types of inputs and outputs: a. Analog Inputs

1) Current: 0 to 20 mA 2) Voltage: 0 to 10 Vdc 3) Thermistor 4) Linear resistance 5) Resistance temperature detectors (RTD)

b. Binary Inputs 1) Isolated dry contact closure 2) Pulse inputs for metering

c. Analog Outputs 1) Current: 0 to 20 mA 2) Voltage: 0 to 10 Vdc

d. Binary Outputs 1) 24 VAC, relay controlled. Each output shall include an indicator light providing

on/off status of the associated binary output. 6. Each controller enclosure shall include a 18%24 Vdc power supply capable of supplying

sufficient dc power for all transmitting (e.g. 4%20 mA) sensors connected as specified, and for all unused analog inputs.

7. All binary and analog output points shall be provided with a manual override, with local feedback indication that an output is presently overridden.

8. Each controller shall have a real%time clock which shall remain active during power failure for up to seven (7) days under normal operating conditions. When the controller is used with a higher level system, the time clock shall be automatically synchronized with the system controller.

9. Custom application controllers shall communicate using BACnet. Controllers shall use FTT%10 transceivers. All communications shall be with the use of LonMark%approved standard network variable types (SNVT).

10. The custom application controller shall include an operator display allowing the user to perform basic daily operations tasks. At a minimum this operator display shall: a. Be installed on the custom application controller and require no additional power

source. b. Consist of a one%quarter VGA touch screen with 320 x 240%pixel resolution. The touch

screen shall be backlit. The brightness and contrast shall be adjustable to allow for easy reading of information on the screen.

c. Provide on%screen graphical icons to identify common user functions including viewing point data, alarms, scheduling, output overrides, and controller setup.

d. Be capable of having unique user identification and passwords that can be programmed to limit access to the system and operator functions.

e. Display the current state of all input/output points connected to the controller. f. Allow for up to 24 individual custom display screens that allow 24%character English

descriptions of controller data. g. Give the operator the ability to override the current state of all binary and analog output

points connected to the controller. The controller shall have this capability prior to any on%site programming.

h. Include a time clock which shall maintain correct time for at least 7 days during a power loss to the controller.



i. Allow the operator to modify the start and stop times of the time%of%day schedule within the controller. Scheduling function shall provide for 7%day control, with 2 start and stop events per day.

j. Provide a unique visual alarm indicator such as a flashing LED, separate from the display screen.

k. Automatically update displayed system information every 10 seconds. 11. The controller operating system and programming shall be stored in non%volatile memory. 12. Each controller shall monitor all analog inputs and control analog outputs, utilizing 12%bit

analog%to%digital and digital%to%analog conversion. 13. Each controller shall be capable of executing proportional, integral, and derivative (PID)

control loops and custom logic control routines. 14. PID loops shall be programmable to operate at user%defined intervals, as frequently as one

second. 15. The custom application controllers shall include a communications data port for connection

to a personal computer for upload, download, and editing of data and programs. 16. The controller shall provide the following diagnostic information via light or LED:

a. Status (power) indication b. BACnet communications status c. Indication of the loss of controller function, or network problems

17. The service tool using the edit software, and connected to one local controller shall have full access to all local controllers on the same communications link.

2.14 SYSTEM CONTROLLER HARDWARE

A. General: The system controller shall be a microprocessor based, multi%tasking real time system controller that provides advanced system programming, uplink and downlink communication, polling and other supervisory functions for zone and local controllers. Provide the system controller with an Ethernet connection for remote network access and remote alarm reporting.

B. Operating Environment: The control shall be capable of operating in an environment of 32° to 122°F and 10 to 90% relative humidity non%condensing.

C. Power Loss/Restart: The controller shall be tolerant of power failures. Memory shall be non%volatile or unit shall hold memory of to 30 days minimum on back%up batteries. When a power failure has occurred and power (normal or emergency) is restored, automatically and without operator intervention, the controller shall execute the following restart procedures: 1. Come on line. 2. Update all monitored functions. 3. Implement special building start%up strategies as required. 4. Resume operation based on current time and status.

D. Stand%Alone: The controller shall be a true no%host system that does not require a PC or "Host" computer to perform any control functions or communications.

E. Isolation: Field communication ports shall be individually electrically isolated to protect against transients, spikes, and power surges. The ports shall be optically isolated from each other, the controller circuit board and from power wiring. Optical isolation shall be provided either as an integral component to the controller or provide as a separate interface device between the controller and field wiring.

F. Self Diagnostics: The controller shall contain in this program, a self%test procedure for checking communications and verify the functionality of the CPU memory and database.

G. The system controller shall be the integration point for ASHRAE Standard 135%1995 BACnet or LONMARK technology communication protocols. The system controller shall also provide all tools for Java enabled Web browser access via the local area networks (Intranet) and wide area networks (Internet).



H. Graphical User Interface (GUI): 1. The GUI shall be completely icon driven, multi%tasking and employing a graphical operating

environment. The GUI shall not only be for real%time access to any system(s) on the LAN but shall also allow the operator an easy method of information management. Information management shall mean the massaging and manipulation of any system real time or historical data into integrated applications such as report generators, spreadsheets, X/Y charts, database managers, etc. Complete file management and data transfer, such as copying, moving files, automatic and manual means of "cutting and pasting" of data items from one application to another shall be provided as an integral part of this GUI. This GUI shall be completely Windows "compliant": a. Menu and System Access:

1) This GUI shall provide an easy and absolute method of menu and system access. The menu system shall provide the entry point into the entire GUI array of applications and programs. All the GUI programs and Windows programs shall be accessible through this menu system.

2) This menu system shall be able to call any operator specific menu or menus allowing complete versatility in how the menu structure is designed and used.

3) System Database Save and Restore: Automatic (when changes occur) or manual backup of the system databases (e.g., a DDC Panel point database and/or control program). The operator shall also be able to manually initiate a download of a specified database to any DDC Device in the BAS.

4) System Configuration: Provide an application for DDC System configuration (DDC Device communications addressing, point definition, etc.).

5) Help: Provide a context sensitive, help system to assist the operator in operation of the DDC System.

b. System Security: 1) System security shall be on an application by application basis. During the setup

or editing of a particular user the owner shall be able to enable or disable the use of any application or function within an application for each user of the system. Each user security access record shall list each of the applications to which the user has access and the functions that are permitted from within each of these applications. The users shall be assigned discrete passwords in order to have access to any particular application or function within the system.

2) As well as application protection each user shall be assigned to a personalized menu (see Menu and System Access). This shall allow for each user to have their own discrete menu system for access into the various applications and dynamic graphic screens.

c. Dynamic Graphics: 1) The dynamic graphic portion of this GUI shall allow the operator to access any

system information via a system penetration method. System penetration shall allow the operator to begin at an entire site plan and then zoom in to a particular area for closer inspection and then further zoom in on this area and so on until the detailed color graphic display of a desired portion of the facility is represented.

2) As a minimum a graphic screen shall be designed showing the building, each floor, each major piece of mechanical equipment within each building that is being monitored/controlled, all of which will display the data for each area dynamically.

3) Dynamic point display shall be user selectable from at least the following options: standard text readout, font, style, size, foreground and background colors, border style, plus discrete movement animation allowing animation displays for items such as dampers, gauges, fans, switches, lights, alarm activity, etc.

4) Each mechanical and electrical system that is monitored/controlled by the system shall have a unique dynamic color graphic. The display will be provided by the control contractor and approved by the engineer.

5) The graphical user interface shall allow the user to easily create new displays. A library of standard HVAC equipment, control devices, mechanical systems, tables, lines, circles, rectangles, squares, arrows, etc. shall be provided to allow easy implementation of the changes/additions to the system.



6) The program shall allow JPG, GIF or AutoCad file to be displayed with dynamic data overlaid on to the display.

d. Centralized Scheduling and Modification: 1) Calendars shall be provided for displaying and modification of any of the

controller’s time clock functions. Holidays and special functions shall be clearly marked on the calendar. Changes shall be permanent or, for one time or multiple occurrences. Global changes shall be allowed for similar schedules.

e. Alarm Annunciation: 1) Upon the incidence of an alarm an alarm window shall be displayed showing the

point in alarm, the time and date of the alarm and a user %selected predefined alarm message (and optionally printed to a user defined printer, printers and/or dumb terminal devices). Alarms shall be displayed regardless of the application in use including any Windows applications. The program shall display the unacknowledged alarms. The user shall be able to selectively enable or disable the alarm reminder in the event there are unacknowledged alarms.

2) Acknowledgment of alarms shall be from an alarm "pop%up" display and/or from a separate alarm summary. Acknowledgment shall be by a specific event, date range, class, or specific alarm definition and condition. Upon acknowledging the alarm, the name of the operator acknowledging the alarm and the time and date will be associated with the acknowledgment. This data will be stored to the alarm history file and printed to the chosen printers or terminal devices.

3) Automatic or manual display of associated dynamic graphic screens shall be provided for each alarm upon the alarm occurrence.

4) The user shall be automatically placed back to the application or graphic in use at the time of alarm occurrence upon exiting the alarm handling mode.

5) A current alarm summary shall be provided which will dynamically display only alarms that are currently in alarm. As alarms are returned from their respective alarm states the current alarm summary shall be dynamically updated to reflect the change.

f. Trend Management: 1) The GUI shall automatically perform time based periodic collection of real time

point data and subsequently store it to the systems hard disk. 2) Storage and manipulation of sampled points shall only be limited by disk space.

Sampling rates shall be user selectable from instantaneous (once a second) to longer periods of time such as one week. Collection of data shall be user selectable to start and stop on specific times and dates.

3) Charting of the trend data shall be an integral part of the trend management program. Third party graphing packages such as Excel or Lotus 123 shall not be required to implement this program. Multiple points shall be capable of displaying on the same chart. Multiple X/Y charts may be run simultaneously displaying either real time data (instantaneous) or historical. X/Y scaling shall be either automatic or user selectable for any chart displayed, each chart may have different scaling. X scales shall be user selectable allowing for display of data over a wide range of times and dates. Display of multiple years of data shall be allowed. The chart display shall be capable of displaying a window of time for multiple years.

g. Multi%tasking: 1) The GUI shall be capable of true multi%tasking capabilities. The user shall be able

to use other non%related programs while still running all GUI applications with no interruptions. This shall include the use of real time data in other applications.

h. The user interface shall employ Web browser%like functionality for ease of navigation. This interface shall include, but not be limited to, forward/backwards buttons, home button and a context sensitive locator line (similar to a URL line).

i. Graphic screens on the Web Browser client shall support hypertext links to other Web pages on other Internet or Intranet sites.

j. User log%on identification and passwords shall use Java authentication techniques to prevent unauthorized access.



2.15 SYSTEM CONTROLLER SOFTWARE

A. General: The network controller software shall be multi%tasking, menu%driven, in English language. The software shall operate on a database comprised of control blocks which resemble control hardware devices (receiver controllers, gradual relays, higher or lower of two pressure relays, time delay relays, etc.). The Controls Contractor shall configure these control blocks to attain the proper sequence of control. The user shall be able to add, delete, or modify all control blocks on%line as required.

B. Passwords: Provide a minimum of multiple levels of user definable passwords.

C. Help Menu: On%line location sensitive help shall be provided for each menu item, describing the consequences of making the highlighted menu selection.

D. Login: A login message shall be displayed every time the workstation is connected to a network controller.

E. Backup and Restore: The database in each network controller shall be uploaded to the System Workstation, for archival purposes, and shall be re%downloaded to each network controller at any time. Operating system changes, parameter changes, upgrades and enhancement for network controllers shall be downline loadable from the System Workstation, or via dial%in from a remote location.

F. Programming Functions: The software blocks shall provide all the necessary mathematics, logic, utility, and control functions necessary for proper sequence of control. These functions shall be contained in the network controller operating system to be available in any combination for field programming the unit through RAM memory. As a minimum, these routines shall include, but not be limited to, energy management strategies such as: 1. Time or Event Based Scheduling. 2. Adaptive Optimum Start/Stop. 3. Demand Limiting/Load Shedding. 4. Enthalpy Control. 5. Hot Water/Outdoor Air Reset. 6. Run Time Totalization. 7. Alarm Detection and Dial Out. 8. Night Setback. 9. Historical Trending.

G. Alarms: The network controller shall be capable of comparing analog and digital readings to predetermined high and low limits and annunciate each time a value enters or returns from an alarm condition. Unique high and low limits shall be supplied for each analog point in the system. The system shall be capable of suppressing selected alarm reporting when the primary equipment from which the alarm point is based is in the inactive state. The alarm features of the network controller software shall, as a minimum, provide the following: 1. Digital, Analog, and Hi/Lo settings and deadband. 2. Sliding Alarm Limits. 3. Conditional Alarming. 4. Alarm inhibiting through feedback loop. 5. Fluttering Alarm Suppression. 6. Separate Tailored Alarm Messages for each alarm. 7. Auto dial of any alarm condition to a minimum of 10 phone numbers.

H. Communication Diagnostics: The network controller software shall be programmed for self%diagnosing of failure, automatically without query by the operator. In the event of communications failure or limited power failure, the system shall be capable of both notifying a local operator of the specific occurrence, as well as auto dialing the condition to a remote site. Auto%dial out shall be configurable to repeat the alarm while the situation remains unattended and



unacknowledged. In addition to automatic self%diagnostics, communications statistics on zone and general application controller communications shall be maintained. These statistics shall tabulate total communications attempted versus successful and unsuccessful communications by unit number. The option to reset communications statistics to zero (0) at any time shall be provided.

I. Interfaces to Other Manufacturer's Equipment: Where specified, each Network Controller shall be equipped with standard software blocks with which to interface to other manufacturer's equipment. The software blocks shall be defined by the Controls Contractor to read/write analog values and digital status to/from other manufacturer's equipment for alarm, trend, operator advisory, graphic display and other system uses. Communications between the Network Controller and other manufacturer's equipment shall occur in the same manner and with the same software as that used for communications with Dedicated and General Application Controllers.

J. The software shall employ object%oriented technology for representation of all data and control devices within the system. In addition, adherence to industry standards for ASHRAE BACnet and LONMARK is required to assure interoperability between control system manufacturers. The control contractor must provide a PICS document showing the installed system’s BACnet compliance level of 3.

K. The software must incorporate the ability to access all data using Java enabled browsers without requiring proprietary operator interface and configuration programs.

L. The software shall allow alarms to be routed to E%mail messages and paging services.

M. Access to the system controller shall be via the Internet from a remote location and from a local computer operator’s station (when specified) by direct connection to an Ethernet LAN. The control contractor shall provide a connection to the Internet to enable this access via high%speed modem or via the Intranet to a corporate server providing access to an Internet Service Provider. The owner shall pay monthly access charges for the connection and service provider.

2.16 OPERATOR INTERFACE STATION

A. Provide an operator workstation and locate as directed by the owner. The workstation shall include the following: 1. Dedicated IBM PC or 100% compatible computer. 2. Intel Core 2 Duo @ 2.5 GHZ or faster 512 KB cache. 3. Intel 440 BX chipset or later, 160 GB Ultra ATA Hard Drive. 4. 48X or faster Read/Write CD%Rom, 4 GB RAM. 5. Standard Video Graphics, 512 MB on board RAM memory. 6. One printer port and page printer (Ink Jet or Laser) for report printing. 7. Serial/Parallel communication ports, Ethernet Controller, (4) minimum USB 2.0 ports. 8. Microsoft Compatible Mouse. 9. CD%RW with DVD for backup. 10. Surge Protector. 11. 19” LCD Flat Screen display monitor. 12. PS/2 standard keyboard, and a two button optical mouse. 13. Windows XP Professional with SP2 and MS Internet Explorer 7.

2.17 WIRING AND CONDUIT

A. All wire will be copper and meet the minimum wire size and insulation class listed below:

Wire Class Wire Size Isolation Class

Power 12 Gauge 600 Volt



Wire Class Wire Size Isolation Class

Class One 14 Gauge Std. 600 Volt

Class Two 18 Gauge Std. 300 Volt

Class Three 18 Gauge Std. 300 Volt

Communications Per Mfr. Per Mfr.

B. Power and Class One wiring may be run in the same conduit. Class Two and Three wiring and communications wiring may be run in the same conduit.

C. Where different wiring classes terminate within the same enclosure, maintain clearances and install barriers per the National Electric Code.

D. Where wiring is required to be installed in conduit, EMT shall be used. Conduit shall be minimum 1/2 inch galvanized EMT. Compression fittings shall be used for interior locations and watertight compression fittings for exterior locations. Provide conduit seal off fitting where exterior conduits enter the building or between areas of high temperature/moisture differential.

E. Flexible metallic conduit (max. 3 feet) shall be used for connections to motors, actuators, controllers, and sensors mounted on vibration producing equipment. Liquid%tight flexible conduit shall be use in exterior locations and interior locations subject to moisture.

F. Junction boxes shall be provided at all cable splices, equipment terminations, and transitions from EMT to flexible conduit. Interior dry location J%boxes shall be galvanized pressed steel, nominal four%inch square with blank cover. Exterior and damp location J%boxes shall be cast alloy FS boxes with threaded hubs and gasketed covers.

G. Where the space above the ceiling is a supply or return air plenum, the wiring shall be plenum rated. Teflon wiring can be run without conduit above suspended ceilings. EXCEPTION: Any wire run in suspended ceilings that is used to control outside air dampers or to connect the system to the fire management system shall be in conduit.

2.18 COAXIAL CABLE

A. Coaxial cable shall conform to RG62 or RG59 rating.

B. Provide plenum rated coaxial cable when running in return air plenums.

2.19 FIBER OPTIC CABLE

A. Acceptable fiber optic cable shall include the following sizes; 50/125, 62.5/125 or 100/140. Only glass fiber is acceptable, no plastic.

B. Fiber optic cable shall only be installed and terminated by an experienced contractor. The BAS contractor shall submit to the Engineer the name of the intended contractor of the fiber optic cable with his submittal documents.

2.20 ENCLOSURES

A. All controllers and field interface panels shall be mounted in new enclosures unless otherwise stated in this specification.

B. All outside mounted enclosures shall meet the NEMA%4 rating.

2.21 ANTI%FLOOD ALARM SYSTEM

A. General:



1. Provide a controller to monitor the status of the water level in the domestic backflow preventer sump basin with an alarm to the DDC and a relay to close an external valve.

2. Components and control sequence to emulate the obsolete GEO2001 Anti%Flood Controller.

B. Provide the following components: 1. Manual adjustable delay timer (0%60 sec), to eliminate nuisance alarms. 2. Two (2) dry contacts, to indicate an alarm to the DDC and to close the domestic cold water

line to the building. 3. UPS back%up power. In the event of AC power outage or damage to the incoming power

conductors, the unit shall run off of the internal battery. 4. Two (2) LED indicator lights. A red LED shall indicate an alarm, with a keyed test switch to

test the LED function. A green LED shall indicate system power. A flashing green LED shall indicated controller is running off of battery back%up power.

C. Refer to Part 4 for sequence of operation. Refer to the plumbing drawings and control drawings for controller details, panel details, and plumbing requirements.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

A. Provide a project manager who shall, as a part of his duties, be responsible for the following activities: 1. Coordination between the Contractor and all other trades, Owner, local authorities, and the

design team. 2. Scheduling of manpower, material delivery, equipment installation and checkout. 3. Maintenance of construction records such as project scheduling and manpower planning

and AutoCad for project co%ordination and project record drawings.

3.02 SYSTEM SETUP AND INSTALLATION

A. System setup and installation shall include but is not limited to the following: 1. Database entry and database setup of all input and output points, including alarm printouts

with individual alarm messages, as described on the input/output point list. 2. Programming and full setup of all sequences described in the sequence of operation section

of the specification as shown in Part 4 % Sequence of Operation & Points List. 3. Complete checkout and testing of all functions, operations and features of the building

automation system as described in this specification including, but not limited to, all features and functions utilized in the system setup as well as features and capabilities of the software and hardware described as provided and installed but not implemented or used at this time.

3.03 WIRING INSTALLATION METHODS

A. Install systems and materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, rough%in drawings and equipment details. Install electrical components and use electrical products complying with requirements of applicable Division 26 sections of these specifications.

B. The term "control wiring" is defined to include the providing of wire, conduit, and miscellaneous materials as required for mounting and connecting electric or electronic control devices as follows: 1. Consist of wiring in pilot circuits of contractors, starters, relays, etc., and wiring for valve and

damper operators. 2. For single phase devices where power current passes through controller, wiring between

controller and device shall be considered control wiring; wiring to device from electric panel shall be considered power wiring.



C. Install control wiring system in conduit for electric/electronic control systems. Conceal wiring/conduit, except in mechanical rooms and areas where other conduit and piping are exposed. UL plenum rated cable shall be allowable in air plenums as approved by local codes. All control wiring shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner parallel to building lines with adequate support. Provide shielded cabling where required to prevent noise from being superimposed on control system wiring. Both conduit and plenum wiring shall be supported from or anchored to structural members. Conduit or plenum wiring supported from or anchored to piping, duct supports, the ceiling suspension system, or the electrical conduits is not acceptable. Wiring buried in slab on grade concrete or explosion proof areas shall be in rigid metal conduit. Provide adequate strain relief for all field terminations.

D. Number%code or color%code conductors, excluding those used for individual zone controls, appropriately for future identification and servicing of control system.

E. All line voltage power wiring required because of substitution of equipment specified in this section, shall be provided by this section.

3.04 CONTROL DEVICE LOCATIONS

A. Adjustable sensors and thermostats shall be mounted according to the construction drawings. The contractor shall submit coordination documents to the architect indicating intended sensor/thermostat locations including intended mounting heights for architect review and approval. Upon completion of the architect’s comments, the documents shall be submitted to the mechanical engineer for final review.

B. Remote control devices not in local panels shall be accessible for adjustment and service – below 7' above finished floor whenever possible.

C. Locate all temperature control devices wired under Division 26.

D. Local control enclosures shall be mounted at eye level for accessibility and service, and located within 50 feet of the system served, unless otherwise shown on the plans.

3.05 IDENTIFICATION

A. All control equipment shall be clearly identified by control shop drawing designation as follows: 1. Control valves and damper actuators % brass tags or engraved bakelite tags 2. Other remote control devices % metal tags or laser printed, adhesive backed, metalized

polyester film labels. 3. Control Enclosures % engraved nameplate with panel number and system served. 4. Control Conduit Junction Boxes % Painted medium blue.

3.06 MOUNTING AND INSTALLATION PRACTICES FOR DEVICES

A. Well%mounted sensors will include thermal conducting compound within the well to insure good heat transfer to the sensor.

B. Actuators will be firmly mounted to give positive movement and linkage will be adjusted to give smooth continuous movement throughout 100 percent of the stroke.

C. Relay outputs will include transient suppression across all coils. Suppression devices shall limit transients to 150% of the rated coil voltage.

D. Water line mounted sensors shall be removable without shutting down the system in which they are installed.



E. Outdoor air sensor shall be placed in a location approved by the engineer.

F. All control valves, wells for immersion sensors and taps for flow and pressure instruments shall be provided by the controls contractor and installed by the mechanical contractor under the controls contractor supervision.

G. All control dampers, and air flow stations shall be provided by the controls contractor and installed by the mechanical contractor under the controls contractor supervision, unless they are components of packaged equipment.

H. The controls contractor shall provide assistance to the balancing contractor with control adjustments. as required to obtain design flows.

3.07 LOCAL CONTROL PANELS

A. All relays, switches, transducers and other field interface devices, for equipment located within the mechanical equipment rooms, shall be panel mounted. Panels shall be NEMA type suitable for applications as required with hinged door and key%lock latch. Size for 20% spare mounting capacity.

B. Manual switches and indicating devices shall be flush%mounted on the panel face. Provide engraved bakelite or lithographed metal nameplates for all items on the panel face with white 1/2 inch high letters on a black background. Paper or embossed labels are not acceptable.

C. Mount internal components securely on steel removable sub%panels. Each component shall be individually labeled with function and device identification, as shown on the control shop drawings. Label information shall be printed with a laser printer on adhesive backed metalized polyester film. Paper or embossed labels are not acceptable.

D. Interconnections between internal and face%mounted devices pre%piped and wired with color%coded tubing/conductors shall be neatly installed in plastic tray and/or tie%wrapped. All wiring within the panel shall be run in wiring tray in accordance with NEMA and UL standards, and shall meet all local codes. Terminals for field connections shall be UL listed for 600V service, individually identified per control shop drawings, with adequate clearance for field wiring. Control air terminations for field connection shall be individually identified control shop drawings.

E. Provide a convenience 120 VAC receptacle in each panel and a fused on/off power switch for control power sources to each local panel. Provide a final as%built control drawing, reduced, laminated, and mounted inside of the panel door.

3.08 MOUNTING AND INSTALLATION PRACTICES FOR ZONE AND LOCAL CONTROLLERS

A. Controllers are to be mounted vertically.

B. The 120 VAC power wiring to the network of Controllers shall be a dedicated run, with a separate breaker. Each run will include a separate hot, neutral, and ground wire. The ground wire will terminate at the breaker panel ground. This circuit will not feed any other circuit or device.

C. Utilize a true earth ground. Do not use a corroded or galvanized pipe, or structural steel.

D. Controllers will be clearly labeled with the model number of the controller. In addition, all status lights will be identified with labels to indicate their function.



3.09 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION

A. The Contractor shall provide all labor necessary to install, initialize, start%up, and debug all system software as described in this section. This includes any operating system software or other third party software necessary for successful operation of the system.

3.10 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE

A. General: The system installation shall be complete and tested for proper operation prior to acceptance testing for the Owner's authorized representative. A letter shall be submitted to the Engineer requesting system acceptance. This letter shall certify all controls are installed and the software programs have been completely exercised for proper equipment operation. Acceptance testing shall commence at a mutually agreeable time within ten (10) calendar days of request. When the test procedures have been demonstrated to the Owner's representative and pass, the system will be accepted. The One%Year Warranty Support Plan shall begin at this time.

B. Acceptance Test Procedures: DDC control panels shall be demonstrated via a functional end%to%end test. Prior to an acceptance test review by the Engineer, the contractor shall submit a point by point checklist to the Engineer with descriptions of how the following tests were performed. Such that: 1. All output channels shall be commanded (on/off, stop/start, adjust, etc.) and their portion

verified. 2. All analog input channels shall be verified for proper operation. 3. All digital input channels shall be verified by changing the state of the filed device and

observing the appropriate change of displayed value. 4. Automatic control operation of PID control loops shall be verified by introducing an error or

change into the system and observing the proper corrective system response. 5. Automatic control operation of sequences of operation shall be verified by introducing an

error or change into the system and observing the proper corrective system response. 6. Selected time and setpoint schedules shall be verified by changing the schedule and

observing the correct response on the controlled outputs. 7. Communication with each DDC control panel shall be demonstrated. 8. All available and specified system reports and logs shall be demonstrated at the system

workstation. 9. Correct system start%up and shutdown procedures shall be demonstrated. 10. All controllers shall be demonstrated to operate in a standalone mode. 11. Workstation Operator commands will be explained and demonstrated. 12. If any point or sequence should fail testing, perform necessary repair action and retest failed

point and all interlocked points.

C. Project Record Documentation: After a successful acceptance demonstration, submit project record drawings of the completed project for final approval. After receiving final approval, supply three (or as specified in Division 01) complete project record drawing sets (maximum ANSI "D" size), together with AutoCad diskettes to the owner. The original master site software license and disposition of any required software keys shall be included.

D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Submit six (6) copies (or as specified in Division 01) of operation and maintenance manuals. Include the following: 1. Update all drawings and data required in the control submittal to a finalized form and add the

following information: a. An operator's manual which will include detailed instructions for all operations of the

system. b. A programmer's manual which will include all information necessary to perform

programming functions. c. A language manual which will include a detailed description of the language used and

all routines used by the system.



d. An operator's reference table listing the addresses of all connected input points and output points. Settings shall be shown where applicable.

e. Complete program listing file and parameter listing file for all programs. f. A copy of the warranty. g. Operating and maintenance cautions and instructions. h. Recommended spare parts list.

3.11 TRAINING

A. Contractor shall provide to the engineer a training class outline prior to any scheduled training.

B. Training sessions shall be provided for the Owner's personnel by factory trained control engineers and technicians.

C. The control contractor shall conduct four % four (4) hour on%site training sessions as a course for designated owner's personnel in the maintenance and operation of the control system. One course shall be given prior to system acceptance and one additional course shall be provided during the Warranty Support Plan period.

D. The course shall include instruction on specific systems and instructions for operating the installed system on include as a minimum: 1. HVAC system overview 2. Operation of Control System 3. Function of each Component 4. System Operating Procedures 5. Programming Procedures 6. Maintenance Procedures

3.12 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: The control system shall be warranted to be free from defects in both material and workmanship for a period of two (2) years of normal use and service. This warranty shall become effective the date the owner accepts the system. The warranty shall include standard workday emergency problem response and all Warranty Support Plan preventative maintenance items (i.e. sensor calibration, linkage adjustment, etc.). An emergency service number shall be provided to the owner. Response shall be within four (4) hours to the phone call. Provide information and costs to the owner for an Extended Support Agreement prior to Warranty Support Plan period expiration.

B. Upgrades: Include all controller firmware and software updates for the installed system version at no additional cost to the system owner during the warranty period.

3.13 SPARES

A. Provide one each of the following spare parts: 1. Room Sensor 2. Zone Controller Board (one of each type) 3. Local Controller Board (one of each type)

3.14 EXPANSION

A. System Controller Hardware and Software must be provided with expansion capabilities for the addition of control, points, etc. for future remodel of remainder of building.



PART 4 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS AND POINTS LISTS

4.01 HEATING WATER SYSTEM CONTROL

A. Design Intent: 1. The heating water system is designed to provide heating water to the various HVAC

hydronic systems and devices including VAV terminals, cabinet unit heaters, and unit heaters.

2. Boiler staging, firing rate and rotations shall be controlled by the factory boiler staging controls, Cascade system or equal. The Cascade system controller shall have an interface to the building automation system.

3. The system is comprised of three (3) natural gas fired wall hung condensing hot water boilers and associated boiler circulation pumps (CP%1, CP%2, and CP%3). Pumping for the boiler plant will consist of (2) secondary variable flow heating water pumps (P%1, P%2). The secondary pumps shall be provided with an associated variable frequency drive. All pumps are piped to a single manifold and will stage/modulate as necessary to maintain the hot water system pressure.

B. Boiler System Control: 1. The BAS shall enable heating hot water system through a central heating call dry contact

when the outside air temperature drops below 60°F. The heating water system shall be

disabled whenever the outside air temperature rises above 65° F. 2. Boiler Staging and Modulation. Once the factory boiler controller receives a central heating

call initiated by the DDC system the factory controls shall automatically stage boiler circulation pumps, stage boilers and modulate boiler firing rates to maintain the hot water supply temperature setpoint.

3. The HVAC heating water system temperature shall be reset to produce the lowest possible loop temperature to achieve building comfort. The factory controller shall reset the factory controller HWS setpoint according to the below schedule. All HWS reset temperatures shall be adjustable at the factory controller or through the BMS interface.

Outside Air Temperature HWS Temperature

0°F or less 140°F

60°F or greater 100°F

4. The lead secondary heating water pump shall run continuously when the heating water system is enabled.

5. All boiler staging shall be through the boiler manufacturer's supplied boiler staging control panel.

6. The boiler operating controls shall be provided by the boiler manufacturer. The following boiler information shall be passed back to the DDC system and displayed on the DDC front end through the BMS interface at a minimum. a. Hot Water System Supply Setpoint. b. System Supply Temperature. c. Boiler Status. d. Boiler Supply Temperature. e. Boiler Return Temperature. f. Boiler Firing Rate. g. Boiler Setpoint. h. Lockout Status. i. Outdoor Air Temperature.

C. Initial starting positions & sequence: 1. All boilers and pumps shall be off. The lead pump will be enabled and energized. After

proving flow via its associated DP or current switch, the BMS shall enable the lead boiler and associated boiler circulation pump. The lead secondary heating water pump VFD shall be modulated to maintain a system differential pressure at DPT%1.

2. Start after power loss:



a. All devices that were energized prior to power loss shall be restarted in order of original lead to lag. Provide an orderly startup such that the “initial starting positions and sequences” is initiated, followed by a start of each lag device upon confirmation of positive run operation or failure to start. The startup of the lag devices shall follow the “boiler staging control” sequence.

D. Equipment rotations and relations: 1. Rotations:

a. Rotate the lead/lag operation of the boilers based on runtime (168 hours adj.). b. Rotate the lead/standby operation of the secondary pumps based on runtime (168

hours adj.).

E. Auto/manual control: 1. Provide an “auto%manual” software selector for equipment rotation. In auto mode, the

rotation shall be as described above. In manual mode, the operator shall define the equipment stages and shall have an option to select a round robin or timed event rotation.

F. Secondary pump staging and Pressure control: 1. Secondary Pump (P%1, P%2) Lead/Standby Control: Provide automatic lead/standby pump

control to alternate the lead pump after the lead pump has operated for 168 run hours (adj.). Automatically energize the standby secondary pump upon sensing a lead secondary pump failure and generate an alarm. Generate a critical alarm if a pump fails.

2. Secondary Pump pressure control: The lead secondary pump shall energize and the pump speed shall modulate via the associated VFD’s to maintain a differential pressure set point of 15 PSIG (supply vs. return) as measured by remote differential pressure transmitter HWS%DPT%1. The differential pressure transmitter shall be mounted at a remote location and wired directly back to the boiler room control panel. Refer to the HVAC piping drawings for location. Energize the lead pump to operate continuously when the hot water heating system is enabled.

3. Between the outdoor temperatures of 40° F to 65° F, if there is no call for heat from any devices, the lead secondary heating pump shall operate at its minimum VFD speed.

G. Boiler Room Temperature Control: 1. Boiler Room intake damper shall open and the space ventilation exhaust fan EF%7 shall

modulate speed to maintain space temperature (85° F, adjustable).

H. Failure modes: 1. Boiler or boiler circulation pump failure:

a. Upon sensing a failure of an on%line boiler through summary alarm input or boiler circulation pump through the current sensor, the DDC shall immediately disable the failed boiler and boiler circulation pump and alarm at the District BAS workstation. The remaining enabled boilers firing rate shall be increased to achieve the HWS temperature setpoint.

2. Pump failure: a. Upon sensing the failure of an on line secondary pump through a miss match of the

pump commanded output “on” and DP or current switch status “off” for 5 continuous seconds, the failed pump shall be disabled and alarmed at the District BAS workstation. The next in line primary pump shall energize.

3. Failure of HWS temperature transmitter: a. Upon sensing a failure (end of scale reading) which is required for boiler staging

control, the failed transmitter shall be alarmed at the District BAS workstation. 4. Failure of the remote hot water differential pressure transmitter:

a. Upon sensing a failure (end of scale reading) of the DPT control transmitter, the failed transmitter shall be alarmed at the District BAS workstation.

5. Boiler Room EPO Switch(s): a. Upon activation of an EPO switch, all boilers shall be de%energized via a hardwire

interface with the boiler safety circuit. An alarm shall be generated through the DDC.



6. Generate an alarm to the DDC system upon detection of flow from the heating water make%up system flow meter.

I. Points List: 1. Refer to Drawings for points list and control diagram.

4.02 ROOFTOP UNIT CONTROL – VARIABLE AIR VOLUME (RTU%1,2,3)

A. Design Intent: 1. These are variable air volume units that have factory wired and tested control sequences.

The following sequences represent the design intent. Any deviation from these sequences shall be brought to the attention of the engineer. The units have a supply fan, exhaust fan, outside air economizer cycle, gas heat section, DX cooling, and variable frequency drives.

B. Safety Control: 1. Smoke detector located on the return duct shall de%energize the fans and alarm the building

automation system upon detection of smoke. 2. The outside air and exhaust air dampers shall close and return air damper shall open when

the fans stop.

C. Occupied/Unoccupied Mode: 1. The occupancy mode (occupied/unoccupied) shall be determined through the building

automation system. 2. Occupied Mode:

a. Supply fan: 1) The variable frequency drive shall control the supply fan speed to maintain a 1.5”

w.c. duct static pressure as sensed by a static pressure sensor, located 2/3rds down the duct system. Setpoint to be adjustable through the BAS.

2) The supply fan shall run continuously. b. Supply static pressure setpoint reset control:

1) The Duct static pressure setpoint shall be reset using trim & respond logic within the range 0.25 inches to 1.0 inches. When fan is initially started, setpoint shall be 0.5 inches. Operate the fan at this setpoint for 20 minutes (Adj.). Thereafter the following reset shall be activated. Every 2 minutes (Adj.), trim (reduce) the setpoint by 0.05 inches (Adj.) if there are 0, 1 or 2 (Adj.) pressure requests. If there are more than 2 pressure requests, increase the setpoint by 0.05 inches (Adj.) times the number of pressure requests minus 2 but no more than 0.15 inches every 2 minutes.

2) One pressure request is generated for each zone with a VAV damper >80% open, two requests shall be generated for each zone with a damper >90% open.

3) Each zone shall have a “Zone Importance Multiplier” that allows rogue zones to be ignored from the sequence (multiplier of zero), and critical zones to exceed the ignore value (multiplier of 2 or greater).

4) Each zone shall have a request%hours clock that tracks the number of hours each zone has posted a pressure request. This allows quick diagnosis of “rogue” zones.

c. Discharge air temperature control: 1) The gas heating valve and DX compressors and economizer shall be modulated

and staged in sequence to maintain discharge air temperature setpoint. 2) During occupied mode, the setpoint is reset from 55°F (Adj.) when the outdoor air

temperature is 75°F (Adj.) and above, proportionally up to T%Max when the outdoor air temperature is 60°F (Adj.) and below. T%Max shall be reset using trim & respond logic within the range 55°F to 65°F. When fan is initially started, setpoint shall be 60°F. Operate the fan at this setpoint for 20 minutes (Adj.). Thereafter the following reset shall be activated. Every 2 minutes (Adj.), increase the setpoint by 0.25°F (Adj.) if there are 0, 1 or 2 reset requests. If there are more than 2 reset requests, trim (reduce) the setpoint by 0.5°F times the number of reset requests minus 2 but no more than 1.0°F every 2 minutes.



3) A reset request is generated for each VAV zone where the cooling loop output is 90% until it falls below 80%.

4) The discharge air temperature reset shall be overridden to, 55°F (Adj.), any time an associated humidity sensor senses a zone relative humidity 50% and above. Setpoint shall remain overridden until all zone relative humilities drop below 45%.

d. Exhaust fan control: 1) The variable frequency drive shall control the exhaust fan to maintain a building

pressure of 0.05” w.c. (adj.) positive pressure. Setpoint to be adjustable through the BAS.

e. Outside air damper control: 1) The outside air dampers shall operate in response to the economizer controls. 2) Control the outside air damper minimum position to maintain differential CO2

setpoints as described below. f. Air quality control:

1) Provide a single OSA CO2 sensor in the outside air stream of a representative air handling unit.

2) Locate a CO2 sensor in the return air duct(s). The minimum OSA damper position will be reset in order to maintain a differential of 400 ppm between the OSA CO2 sensor and the worst case space/return air duct CO2 sensor.

3) Because the unit is not capable of 100% OSA at extreme conditions, the mixed air temperature set point shall take precedence over the air quality control whenever the CO2 sensor set point is not satisfied. The BAS shall override the outside air damper position to maintain a discharge air temperature of 55°F (adj).

4) In order to maintain a positive building pressure, the minimum outside air quantity shall not be less than 20%.

g. Mixed air control: 1) The mixed air controller shall modulate the outside and return air dampers to

maintain the mixed air temperature at 3°F below the minimum discharge air temperature.

2) Modulate the gas heating and DX cooling to maintain the leaving air temperature

setpoint of 55°F. Setpoint to be adjustable through the BAS. h. All setpoints and scheduling shall be independently adjustable by the BAS.

3. Unoccupied/Morning Warm%Up Mode: a. The outside air damper shall close and the return air damper shall open. b. The rooftop unit shall cycle on in order to maintain the setpoint of the room thermostat

that has the greatest call for heating. Once that room is satisfied, the unit shall shut off. c. Refer to the sequence of operation of the VAV terminals in the unoccupied mode. d. If the factory rooftop unit controller cannot modulate the fan speed during unoccupied

mode, all VAV terminals to open to 100%. 4. Morning warm up:

a. The space temperature shall be used to determine the amount of time to preheat the space to the occupied setpoint by the normal occupied time. It will vary from 0 minutes

when the space temperature is equal or greater than 71° F to 120 minutes when the

temperature is equal or less than 58° F. The supply fan shall run with the outside air damper closed and the return air damper open. The unit is indexed to occupied control at the scheduled start time.

b. If the factory rooftop unit controller cannot modulate the fan speed during unoccupied mode, all VAV terminals to open to 100%.

D. Points List: 1. Refer to drawings for points list and schematic.

4.03 KITCHEN MAKE%UP AIR UNIT AND EXHAUST FAN CONTROL (MAU%1 & KEF%1)

A. Design intent:



1. This is a packaged rooftop unit serving the kitchen. This unit is utilized for both kitchen space temperature control and exhaust hood makeup. Exhaust fan KEF%1 provides exhaust for the kitchen hood.

2. Temperature control is provided by a DX cooling coil, a gas fired heat exchanger, and return air mixing section.

3. The make%up air unit shall utilize factory controls, with several components controlled by the BAS. The BAS shall control the following: a. Unit enable. b. Supply fan speed. c. Mixed air damper control.

B. General: 1. Rooftop unit MAU%1 shall operate continuously during occupied hours. The kitchen exhaust

fan KEF%1 shall be energized through the pilot switch on the associated kitchen hood. Whenever exhaust fan KEF%1 is energized, MAU%1 shall be energized to operate at 100% outside air. Whenever the exhaust fan KEF%1 is not energized, MAU%1 shall be energized to operate at 10% outside air, and the power exhaust shall modulate to maintain building pressure.

2. When the supply fan is off, the outside air damper is closed; the return air damper is open. 3. When a start is commanded the outside air damper shall open and the supply fan shall

energize.

C. Emergency Control: 1. In the event of a fire as sensed by the kitchen hood’s integral Ansul System fire suppression

system, exhaust fan KEF%1 shall continue to operate or, if not currently operating, shall be energized and air handling unit MAU%1 shall be de%energized. Exhaust fan KEF%1 shall continue to operate until manually de%energized.

2. All interlock wiring to the Ansul System shall be performed by the temperature controls contractor.

D. Space Temperature Control: 1. The gas fired heat exchanger control valve and DX cooling coil shall operate in sequence to

maintain a heating space temperature set point temperature of 70°F (adjustable), and a

cooling space temperature set point temperature of 75°F (adjustable). a. Whenever the unit is in makeup air mode, the supply fan shall modulate to 100% and

modulate discharge air temperature based on the space thermostat. b. Whenever the unit is in return air mode the supply fan shall initially operate at 50%

airflow: a. Cooling Mode:

1) The DX compressors shall modulate to maintain a maximum 55°F discharge air temperature.

2) If the space temperature rises above the setpoint, the DDC shall modulate the supply fan speed to maintain the setpoint.

b. Heating Mode: 1) The gas fired heat exchanger control valve shall modulate to maintain the setpoint with

a maximum 90°F discharge air temperature. 2) If the space temperature drops below the setpoint, the DDC shall modulate the supply

fan speed to maintain the setpoint.

E. Morning warm up: 1. The space temperature shall be used to determine the amount of time to preheat the space

to the occupied setpoint by the normal occupied time. It will vary from 0 minutes when the

space temperature is equal or greater than 71°F to 120 minutes when the temperature is

equal or less than 58°F. The supply fan shall run with the outside air damper closed and the return air damper open. The unit is indexed to occupied control at the scheduled start time.



F. Unoccupied/Night Setback Mode: 1. The outside air damper shall close, and the return air damper shall open. The supply fan

shall cycle at 50% speed via its variable frequency drive, and the heating control valve and DX cooling shall modulate to maintain the unoccupied temperature setpoint. All parameters shall be independently adjustable.

G. Space Pressure Control: 1. The variable frequency drive shall control the exhaust fan to maintain a building pressure of

0.05” w.c. (adj.) positive pressure. Setpoint to be adjustable through the BAS.

H. Safeties: 1. Smoke detector located on the return duct shall de%energize the fan and alarm the building

automation system upon detection of smoke. 2. The exhaust fan KEF%1 shall in addition to start/stop, have status through the DDC and shall

generate an alarm at the BAS in the event of a failure.

I. Points List: 1. Refer to Drawings for points list and control diagram.

4.04 VAV TERMINAL UNIT (HOT WATER) AND MISCELLANEOUS EXHAUST FAN CONTROL

A. System Control: 1. The VAV controller modulates the primary air damper between its minimum & maximum

settings to control the space temperature. When heat is required, the VAV controller modulates the primary air damper between its minimum and maximum heating settings and opens the reheat valve open as necessary to control the space temperature. When the space temperature is between the heating and cooling temperature set points, the VAV controller shall modulate the primary air damper to its minimum position.

2. The heating mode sequence shall be disabled if the heating water system is disabled. 3. In the unoccupied mode, the minimum air valve position shall be 0%. 4. Science Room and Science Prep Room:

a. VAV%2%3 and VAV%2%4, and associated Exhaust Fans EF%2 & EF%3: A manual wall push button type timer (by temperature controls contractor with adjustable run time through the DDC) shall energize the exhaust fan, close the associated Science Room return air motorized dampers, and open the VAV terminal to the 100% cooling airflow position. The heating valve shall modulate to maintain space temperature. The exhaust fans shall have status through the DDC.

5. Occupied/Un%occupied Exhaust Fans (EF%1, EF%5, EF%6): a. The DDC controller shall start/stop miscellaneous exhaust fans and monitor their status.

6. Temperature Controlled Exhaust Fans (EF%4) a. The DDC controller shall start/stop miscellaneous exhaust fans and monitor their status. b. The fan shall stage in response to the associated DDC space temperature sensor.

Upon a rise in space temperature above the space set point the fan shall energize.

B. Points List: 1. Refer to Drawings for points list & control diagram.

4.05 MISCELLANEOUS DDC CONTROL

A. Domestic Hot Water Circulation Pump PP%1 and PP%2: Pumps PP%1 and PP%2 shall be controlled by the occupied/unoccupied schedule through the building automation system and have status through the DDC. Refer to Plumbing Plans for locations.

B. Split System Fan Coil Unit: Microprocessor control system provided by the unit manufacturer. Provide an alarm point to the DDC system if the temperature, as sensed by the space temperature sensor, rises above 80°F (adj.).



C. Anti%Flood Controller: 1. Upon activation of (1) or (2) float switches, the controller shall generate an alarm to the DDC,

close the domestic cold water line solenoid valve, and indicate an alarm on the control panel.

D. Points List: 1. Refer to Drawing for control diagrams and sequence of operations.

4.06 MISCELLANEOUS NON%DDC CONTROL

A. VAV TERMINAL UNIT (ELECTRIC HEAT) CONTROL 1. System Control:

a. The VAV controller modulates the primary air damper between its minimum & maximum settings to control the space temperature. When heat is required, the VAV controller modulates the primary air damper between its minimum and maximum heating settings and modulates the SCR heating coil as necessary to control the space temperature. When the space temperature is between the heating and cooling temperature set points, the VAV controller shall modulate the primary air damper to its minimum position.

b. In the unoccupied mode, the minimum air valve position shall be 0%. c. VAV Terminal unit shall be provided with a factory DDC controller, and shall operate in

a stand%alone configuration.

B. Hydronic Unit Heater Control: 1. Provide single room temperature thermostat to cycle fan motor and open control valve to

maintain constant space temperature. A strap%on aquastat shall prevent fan operation if the supply temperature is less than the space temperature.

C. Hydronic Cabinet Unit Heater Control: 1. Provide single room temperature thermostat to cycle fan motor and open control valve to

maintain constant space temperature. A strap%on aquastat shall prevent fan operation if the supply temperature is less than the space temperature.

D. Exhaust Fans: 1. Kitchen Hood Control (KEF%2):

a. Exhaust fan shall be interlocked with the kitchen hood control panel. 2. Wall switch control (EF%8):

a. Exhaust fan shall be energized by a wall switch. 3. Time clock control (EF%9, EF%10):

a. Exhaust fans shall energize during the occupied time as dictated by a timeclock.

END OF SECTION


DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS Florence Crittenton INTEGRATED BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (IBAS) OZ Architecture Project No. 113266.00 Section 23 09 30 - 1

SECTION 23 09 30

INTEGRATED BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (IBAS)

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 23 09 23 – Temperature Control Systems – DDC

B. Other Division 23 and/or 26 sections that specify the Subsystems to be integrated to the IBAS.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. This section along with those for the integrated Subsystems are responsible for joint efforts in integrating the Subsystems to the IBAS.

B. The Controls Contractor and Contractor for other integration division 15/16/17 Subsystems shall set up the Subsystems to communicate the specified data with the IBAS. Subsystems that are BTL-listed shall be set up to use BACnet Alarm and Event services for alarm reporting and BACnet Schedule/Calendar objects for scheduling.

C. Communications address and device/object instance numbering are the responsibility of each Subsystem’s Contractor.

D. All modifications to the IBAS for representing/controlling data from the Subsystems (e.g., graphics, alarm reporting, trend data presentation, schedule viewing/changes, etc.) are the responsibility of this section’s Contractor.

E. This sections’ Contractor shall revew the sections for all integrated Subsystems to determine the scope of the communicated data and operator interface functions for the IBAS.

F. See Part 3 of this section for more information.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Prior to commencement of the work submit:

1.04 GRAPHIC SCREENS AND REPORTS

A. Meet with the DPS Controls Application Engineer and the Subsystem contractors prior to developing the following submittals to determine the graphic screen design, any communicated point/data list additions/choices, the point/data naming convention, the alarming/trending requirements (including alarm priority levels), the schedules required, and/or any other items listed below regardless of their level of definition in the design.

B. Submit for approval a list of the graphic/report screens to be provided; and, for each screen, provide a conceptual layout of the screen and data, including those linkages to other pages/screens. Details on the required graphics/reports are in Part 3 of the specification. 1. All Subsystem data shall be represented or listed. 2. The point/data naming convention to be used. 3. All operator interface functions required by the specification shall be represented. 4. For Subsystems that are not BTL-listed (and/or do not support BACnet Alarm & Event

services, Schedule/Calendar objects, and/or Trend Log objects):



a. Include an alarm list that defines the messages to be used for each class of alarms, and the routing (i.e., to what printers/terminal) of each class of alarms.

b. If applicable, include a start/stop schedule list that defines each unique schedule to be provided, the details of the schedule, and the equipment affected by the schedule.

c. Include a list of all points/data to be trended. 5. For each screen proposed include a list of all setpoints and other operating parameters to be

available via the IBAS. 6. The data to be trended. 7. Coordinate the above effort with the Subsystems’ contractors to ensure that it properly

represents the designs. 8. System Test Plan – Submit the plan and forms to be used in the System Test procedures

described in Part 3. 9. Commissioning: Provide for approval all materials as required by the Commissioning

Specification. 10. Any product data sheets, if applicable.

C. Upon acceptance of the system installation submit the following as-built documentation: 1. Completed test forms.

1.05 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer shall guarantee the work to be free from defects in workmanship under normal use for a period of 24 months from date of acceptance of system by Owner.

B. Modify any defective workmanship within guarantee period, immediately, without cost to Owner.

1.06 COMMISSIONING

A. Commissioning shall comply with Sections 01915 – Commissioning, and 15995 – Mechanical Commissioning.

B. The Commissioning specifications shall include requirements to test all communications functions between the IBAS and the Subsystems.

C. The IBAS Contractor shall participate in the Commissioing tasks as specified. These tasks shall not be a substiture for proper start-up and testing of the IBAS functions for this project.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Communications wiring, routers, gateways, switches, etc. specified/installed under other section. Unless otherwise determined no hardware or software products/installation, (e.g., routers, gateways, communications wiring/devices) are required in this section for IBAS operation.

B. The IBAS is not capable of executing any control sequences. All building Subsystem sequences shall be executed by the Subsystems’ controls.

C. Failure of the IBAS shall not interrupt normal operation of any of the building Subsystems.

2.02 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE

A. System Level: 1. Each of the following Subsystems, when IBAS integration is included in the project , shall be

specified with a separate point of interface to the IBAS. a. HVAC System



1) Note – All HVAC equipment controls (including that provided with the equipment) shall be integrated to the DDC System. The DDC System in turn communicates all required IBAS points/data to the IBAS.

b. Plumbing System c. Fire Alarm and Notification d. Energy and Utility Management e. Lighting f. Electrical System

B. Building Level: 1. All Subsystems shall communicate to the IBAS via BACnet/IP or JCI N1 (the latter is only

acceptable if explicitly specified).. 2. Exceptions/Clarifications:

a. Any Subsystem not available with BACnet/IP (or N1) communications shall be integrated to the DDC System using BACnet MS/TP, Modbus, etc. The Subsystem’s points/data shall in turn be routed to the IBAS via the DDC System.

b. HVAC equipment controls provided with the equipment (i.e., chiller controls) shall communicate directly with the IBAS if the equipment is provided with a BACnet/IP interface. However, the DDC System shall still be responsible for simultaneous communications with this equipment for use in meeting the 15985 Sequence of Operation.

c. Plumbing system integration functions (typically alarm contact closures) are best accomplished via connection to the DDC System. This includes chilled/hot/steam flow/BTU metering which shall be specified under 15950.

d. Certain energy metering functions are best accomplished via connection to the DDC System. This includes chilled/hot/steam flow/BTU metering which shall be specified under 15950.

C. IBAS Enterprise Level: 1. The Subsystems in each DPS building shall communicate with the IBAS via the DPS

intranet.

2.03 NETWORK ROUTERS & GATEWAYS

A. All communications hardware/software needed for communicating BACnet/IP data to the IBAS is provided under other sections.

B. All communications hardware/software needed for other interfaces (e.g., BACnet MS/TP, Modbus, etc.) is provided under other sections.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. No work shall disturb the operation of the IBAS for use in operating other DPS school’s.

B. Work on the IBAS shall be scheduled in advance with the DPS Controls Application Engineer.

C. Time Synchronization – All 15950 controllers with real-time clocks shall be synchronized from the real-time clock in the IBAS at least once every 24 hours.

D. Develop IBAS graphic screens and other functions in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

3.02 POINT/DATA INTEGRATION

A. General



1. Points/data to be mapped are listed in 15985, on the drawings and/or in the Subsystem specifications. a. The final list of points/data to be integrated shall be defined by the submittal process as

defined in Part 1. 2. All DDC System input and output points shall be mapped into the IBAS. . 3. Physical points shall be mapped intothe appropriate BACnet I/O point objects. If possible. 4. Equipment modes (e.g., economizer, warm-up, etc.) and setpoints shall be mapped into

BACnet MD, BD or AD objects. 5. Map any other data required for operation of the IBAS functions (i.e., start/stop schedule

data). 6. BACnet objects shall use the BACnet standard’s object instance numbering scheme. 7. Point/Data Operator Override - Any manual operator actions described by the DDC System

or other Subsystem sequences shall be available from the IBAS.

B. Alarms 1. The following applies to Subsystems that are BTL-listed as B-BC or AAC devices and/or

support BACnet Alarm & Event services. a. Subsystems that are not BTL-listed or support the above services shall be polled by the

IBAS for any alarms. b. Alarms algorithms shall be set up in the IBAS for any Subsystems that do not perform

alarm monitoring of its system points (i.e., the target object shall be polled by the IBAS and compared to high/low limits or normal/off-normal states by the IBAS).

2. Alarms (i.e. limits, messages, priorities) shall be set up in each Subsystem by the Subsystem contractor.

3. Alarms shall be automatically communicated from the Subsystem to the IBAS in real-time. 4. When requested by the IBAS, the Subsystem shall provide an alarm summary. 5. Alarm priority – Coordinate with the Subsystem contractor concerning the specific alarm

priority values to be used.

C. Historical Data Trending 1. The following applies to Subsystems that are BTL-listed as a B-BC and/or supports the

BACnet Trend Log object. a. Subsystems that are not BTL-listed or support the Trend object shall be polled by the

IBAS for trending requirements. 2. Trends shall be set up in the Subsystem by the Subsystem contractor. 3. The IBAS shall read trend data (i.e., via the BACnet Trend Log object) everry 48 hours (or

sooner if the trend log has reached capacity), or whenever needed to fulfill an operator display request (i.e., to display a trend report on the IBAS).

3.03 ALARM REPORTING AND MANAGEMENT

A. Set up the IBAS so that the alarms for this project are properly received, processed and routed.

B. Receipt of an alarm shall be indicated on any graphic that includes associated point data. This indication shall be both textual and graphical (i.e., the point name and/or associated device shall change color, flash, and/or etc.).

C. The alarm shall be identified by the IBAS as being received from this building and routed to the alarm summary for this building.

3.04 GRAPHIC SCREENS

A. The system shall be provided with color graphic screens that show all of the controlled systems with all associated points, setpoints and modes of operation. including: 1. Opening screen graphic showing the building, campus, facility, etc. 2. Each HVAC air and water system monitored or controlled.



3. Each floor and zone controlled (floor plan) - both HVAC and smoke detectors where appli-cable.

4. Each VAV box with DDC controls. 5. Each electrical subsystem monitored or controlled. 6. Each prime mover equipment (boilers, chillers, heat exchangers, pumps, towers, and

distribution system). 7. Utility consumption and outdoor condition logs. 8. Fuel oil and generator systems. 9. Each miscellaneous monitored or controlled point. 10. Screens for any Subsystems not listed above with all points/data represented. 11. Menu penetrations: “buttons” shall be provided to allow the user to easily move among the

various graphics and menus. At any time, the operator shall be able to return to the main menu with one mouse click and shall switch from graphic to other modes within two mouse clicks.

B. The final selection and design of graphic screens shall be determined as part of the submittal process as defined in Part 1.

3.05 TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE

A. The tests described herein are to be performed after Contractor has performed their own system start-up testing performed as a necessary part of the installation, startup, and debugging process.

B. The testing required below shall be observed by the Owner, and coordinated with the Owner and Subsystem contractors. The Subsystem contractors shall participate in the tests associated with their system.

C. Testing: 1. The IBAS work shall be tested for proper operation. 2. The Contractor shall use a protocol packet analyzer (i.e., Wireshark or any other “sniffer”

with a BACnet message decoding capabilities) to: a. Verify that the IBAS communications is not generating excessive network traffic (i.e.,

high packet reject rates), excessive polling by the IBAS, excessive alarm/event messages sent by the Subsystems.

b. Verify that all messages between the IBAS and the Subsystems are properly formed. 3. Testing shall demonstrate the end-to-end integrity of all data communications and user

commands between the Subsystem(s) and the IBAS. 4. Selected time schedules, set point and control mode modifications, and output overrides

shall be verified by changing the schedule and observing the correct response of the controlled outputs.

5. Communication with each Subsystem controller with a testing of the operation of sample of messages/services expectedI.

6. Specified IBAS reports and trend logs shall be demonstrated. 7. Alarms shall be demonstrated, along with the output to the alarm GUI. 8. Workstation commands and operating screens shall be explained and demonstrated.

D. Owner and Engineer shall review installation and operation of IBAS, and prepare a list describing any deficiencies (punch list).

E. Upon receipt of list of deficiencies from Owner, Contractor shall prepare written report indicating by Subsystem each outstanding item on list. Contractor shall correct items appearing on installation-inspection report and present written request for re-inspection and approval to Owner.

F. Upon satisfactory completion of punch list and successful demonstration of operation for all components, Owner shall provide acceptance of IBAS. The date of Owner acceptance shall constitute the start of the warranty period.



G. On the date of acceptance, Contractor shall provide the project record documentation.

3.06 INSTRUCTION AND TRAINING

A. Upon completion of work and acceptance by Owner, IBAS representatives shall provide 16 hours of instruction/training to 4 of Owner’s operating personnel. This instruction/training shall, at a minimum, consist of a review of the GUI screens created for the project, operator capabilities, as-built documentation, the specific IBAS Interface technology utilized plus a walk through of the Project to identify equipment locations and to answer site questions.

END OF SECTION


DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS Florence Crittenton HVAC HYDRONIC SYSTEMS OZ Architecture Project No. 113266.00 Section 23 21 00 - 1

SECTION 23 21 00

HVAC HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL





A. Types of equipment specified in this section include the following: 1. Hydronic Piping and Specialties. 2. HVAC Pumps. 3. Unit Heaters. 4. Cabinet Unit Heaters. 5. Pre-Startup Cleaning of HVAC Piping Systems. 6. Chemical System Water Treatment. 7. Closed System Water Treatment.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. General: Provide piping materials and factory-fabricated piping specialties of sizes, types, pressure ratings, temperature ratings, and capacities as indicated. Provide materials and products complying with ASME B31.9 Code for Building Services Piping where applicable, base pressure rating on hydronic piping systems maximum design pressures. Provide sizes and types matching piping and equipment connections; provide fittings of materials which match pipe materials used in hydronic piping systems. Provide pipes and pipe fittings complying with Division 23, Section 23 05 00.

2.02 BASIC VALVES

A. General: Provide valves complying with Section 23 05 00 and in accordance with the following listing:

B. Shutoff Valves: 1. 3" and smaller: Ball valves. 2. 4" and larger: Butterfly valves only.

C. Drain Valves: 1. 3" and smaller: Ball valves. 2. 4" and larger: Butterfly valves only.

D. Check Valves: 1. Refer to “Part 3 – Execution” section of this Specification section for check valve

requirements.

E. Balance Valves: 1. 2" and smaller: Venturi type.



2. 2" and smaller: Variable CV/Orifice type. 3. 2-1/2" and larger: Plug or ball eccentric type valve upstream of flow measuring station or as

indicated on drawings. See Section 23 05 00 for flow measuring station.

F. Acceptable Manufacturers: Refer to Division 23, Section 23 05 00.

2.03 AIR VENT VALVES

A. Manual Air Vent Valves: Provide manual vent valves designed to be operated manually with screwdriver or thumbscrew, 1/8" NPS connection.

B. Automatic Air Vent Valves: Provide automatic vent valves designed to vent automatically with float principle, stainless steel float and mechanisms, cast-iron body, pressure rated for 125 psi, ½" NPS inlet and outlet connections.

C. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Bell & Grossett ITT. 2. Hoffman Specialty ITT. 3. John Wood Company. 4. Spirax Sarco. 5. Thrush.

2.04 MICRO-BUBBLE AIR ELIMINATOR, DIRT SEPARATOR, AND HYDRAULIC SEPARATOR

A. General: Provide air elimination, dirt separation, and hydraulic separation fittings as indicated. 1. All fittings shall be fabricated steel, rated for 150 psig design pressure and be selected for

less than 1 foot of water pressure drop and velocity not to exceed 4 feet per section through the unit at specified GPM.

2. Units to include internal copper coalescing medium to facilitate maximum air and dirt separation and suppress turbulence.

3. Provide integral high capacity float actuated air vent at top fitting of tank. 4. Units shall have bottom blowdown connection. 5. Air Eliminators shall be capable of removing 100% of the free air, 100% of the entrained air,

and up to 99.6% of the dissolved air in the system fluid. 6. Units shall have the bottom of the vessel extended for dirt separation with the system

connection nozzles equidistant from the top and bottom of the vessel and include a blowdown tank connection and valve.

7. Dirt separation shall be at least 80% of all particles 30 micron and larger within 100 passes. 8. Units to include (2) supply and (2) return connections with a low loss header to facilitate

hydraulic separation.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Spirotherm. 2. Caleffi. 3. Prior Approved Equal.

2.05 EXPANSION TANKS

A. General: Provide diaphragm expansion tanks of size and number as indicated. Construct tank of welded steel, constructed, tested, and stamped in accordance with Section VIII of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for working pressure of 125 psi and 375 F maximum temperature. Furnish National Board Form U-1 denoting compliance. Provide specially compounded heavy duty butyl flexible diaphragm securely sealed into tank to permanently separate air charge from system water, and to maintain design expansion capacity. Provide pressure gage, air-charging fitting, and drain fitting.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers:



1. Amtrol, Inc. 2. Bell & Gossett ITT. 3. Wessels. 4. Armstrong.

2.06 PUMP SUCTION DIFFUSERS

A. General: Provide pump suction diffusers as indicated. Construct unit with angle pattern cast-iron body, threaded for 2" and smaller, flanged for 2-1/2" and larger, pressure rated for 175 psi. Provide inlet vanes with length 2-1/2 times pump suction diameter or greater. Provide cylinder strainer with 3/16" diameter openings with total free area equal to or greater than 5 times cross-sectional area of pump suction, designed to withstand pressure differential equal to pump shutoff head. Provide disposable fine mesh start-up strainer to fit over cylinder strainer. Provide permanent magnet located in flow stream, removable for cleaning. Provide adjustable foot support designed to carry weight of suction piping. Provide blowdown tapping in bottom, gage tapping in side.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. 2. Bell & Gossett ITT.

2.07 PUMP DISCHARGE VALVES (TRIPLE DUTY VALVES)

A. General: Provide pump discharge valves as indicated. Provide non-slam check valve with spring-loaded disc and calibrated adjustment feature permitting regulation of pump discharge flow and shutoff. Design valves to permit repacking under full line pressure, and with bolt-on bonnet. Each valve shall be equipped with brass readout valves for taking differential pressure readings across the orifice for balancing. Provide flanged cast-iron valve body, pressure rated for 175 psi,

maximum operating temperature of 250F. Provide straight or angle pattern as indicated.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. 2. Bell & Gossett ITT. 3. Flow Design.

2.08 PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES

A. General: Provide pressure relief valves as indicated, of size and capacity as selected by Installer for proper relieving capacity, in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

B. Combined Pressure-Temperature Relief Valves: Bronze body, Teflon seat, stainless steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated, capacities ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code IV certified and labeled.

C. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Kunkle 2. Lonegren 3. Lunkenheimer 4. McDonnel and Miller 5. Watts Regulator Co.

2.09 PUMPS

A. General: Provide factory-tested pumps, thoroughly cleaned, and painted with one coat of machinery enamel prior to shipment. Type, size, and capacity of each pump is listed in pump schedule. Provide pumps of same type by same manufacturer.



B. In-line Wet Rotor Circulator Pumps: 1. General: Provide in-line circulator pumps where indicated, and of capacities as scheduled. 2. Type: Horizontal mount, radially split case, oil-lubricated, designed for 125 psi working

pressure, and 225F continuous water temperature. 3. Body: Cast iron, with suction and discharge gage tappings. 4. Shaft: Hardened alloy steel. 5. Bearings: Oil-lubricated bronze journal bearings. 6. Seal: Mechanical, with carbon seal ring and ceramic seat. 7. Motor: Non-overloading at any point on pump curve, open, drip- proof, oil-lubricated journal

bearings, resilient mounted construction, built-in thermal overload protection on single phase motors. Refer to motor specification 230010 for additional requirements.

8. Coupling: Self-aligning, flexible coupling. 9. Impeller: Enclosed type, hydraulically and dynamically balanced, and keyed to shaft. 10. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Grundfos b. Prior Approved Wet Rotor

C. Split Coupled Vertical In-Line Pumps: 1. Single stage, single or double suction type, with pump characteristics which provide rising

heads to shut off. Refer to pump schedule for pump flows and heads and motor speed, enclosure, efficiency and power requirements and other system conditions.

2. Pump Construction: Pump Casing - Cast Iron with 125 psig ANSI/PN16 flanges for working pressure below 175 psig at 150°F and Ductile Iron with 250 psig ANSI/PN25 flanges for working pressures to 375 psig at 150°F. Suction and discharge connections shall be flanged and the same size and shall be drilled and tapped for seal flush and gauge connections.

3. Impeller - Bronze, fully enclosed type. Dynamically balanced. Two-plane balancing is required where installed impeller diameter is less than 6 times the impeller width.

4. Shaft - Provide Stainless Steel pump shaft. 5. Coupling - Rigid spacer type of high tensile aluminum alloy. Coupling to be designed to be

easily removed on site to reveal a space between the pump and motor shafts sufficient to remove all mechanical seal components for servicing and to be replaced without disturbing the pump or motor.

6. Mechanical Seals - Shall be Stainless Steel multi-spring outside balanced type with secondary seal, carbon rotating face and silicon carbide stationary seat. Provide 316 stainless steel gland plate. Provide factory installed flush line with manual vent.

7. All split coupled pumps shall be provided with a lower seal chamber throttle bushing to ensure seals maintain positively cooling and lubrication.

8. Seal flush line accessories, if required to improve seal chamber cleanliness: Supply in the flush line to the mechanical seal a 50 micron cartridge filter and sight flow indicator, to suit the working pressure encountered.

9. Filters shall be changed, by the installing contractor, after system is flushed and on a regular basis until turned over to the owner.

10. Alternately, a maintenance-free accessory needing pump differential pressures exceeding 70 ft./30 psig/200 kPa for effective operation: Supply in the flush line to the mechanical seal a maintenance-free sediment separator, with sight flow indicator.

11. Motor: Non-overloading at any point on pump curve, open, drip-proof, with regreasable ball bearings, secured to mounting frame with adjustable alignment. Refer to motor specification 230010 for additional requirements.

12. Vibration shall be such that the value of self-excited vibration velocity is less than 0.10 inch/second when measured with a vibration meter on the frame or bearings of the pump assembly in any of the three axes. The pump and motor assemblies shall be both statically and dynamically balanced so as not to exceed the vibration limits specified.

13. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. b. Bell and Gossett c. Grundfos



2.10 UNIT HEATERS

A. General: Provide unit heaters in locations as indicated, and of capacities, style, and having accessories as scheduled.

B. Horizontal Unit Heaters: 1. Casings: Construct of steel, phosphatized inside and out, and finished with baked enamel.

Provide motor-mounted panel, minimum of 14-gauge steel. Fabricate casing to enclose coil, louvers, and fan blades. Provide louvers for 4-way air diffusion.

2. Fans: Construct of aluminum, and factory-balance. Provide fan inlet orifice, smooth, and drawn into casing back panel.

C. Vertical Unit Heaters: 1. Casings: Construct of steel, phosphatized inside and out, and finished with baked enamel.

Design casing to enclose fan, motor, and coil, design fan orifice formed into discharge panel. Provide air diffusers as scheduled.

2. Fans: Construct of aluminum and factory-balance. Design so motor and fan assembly is removable through fan outlet panel.

D. Coils: Construct of plate-type aluminum fins, mechanically bonded to copper tubes. Design coil for use in hot water applications.

E. Motors: Provide totally enclosed motors, with built-in overload protection, having electrical characteristics as scheduled.

F. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Vulcan Radiator Co. 2. McQuay Inc. 3. Sterling Radiator. 4. Trane (The) Co.

2.11 CABINET UNIT HEATERS

A. General: Provide cabinet heaters having cabinet sizes and in locations as indicated, and of capacities, style, and having accessories as scheduled. Include in basic unit chassis, coil, fanboard, fan wheels, housings, motor, and insulation.

B. Chassis: Galvanized steel wrap-around structural frame with edges flanged.

C. Insulation: Faced, heavy density glass fiber.

D. Cabinet: 14-gauge removable front panel, 14-gauge top and side panels. Insulate front panel over entire coil section. Provide locking access door on coil connection side. Clean cabinet parts, bonderize, phosphatize, and flow-coat with baked-on primer. White finish on white ceilings. Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard color chart.

E. Water Coils: Construct of 5/8" seamless copper tubes mechanically bonded to configurated aluminum fins. Design for 300 psi and leak test at 300 psi under water. Provide same end connections for supply and return.

F. Fans: Provide centrifugal, forward curved double width fan wheels constructed of non-corrosive, molded, fiberglass- reinforced thermo-plastic material. Construct fan scrolls of galvanized steel.

G. Motors: Provide shaded pole motors with integral thermal overload protection, and motor cords for plug-in to junction box in unit. Provide 3-speed switch.



H. Filters: Provide 1" thick throwaway type filters in fiberboard frames.

I. Accessories: Provide the following accessories as indicated and/ or scheduled: 1. Wall Boxes: Provide aluminum wall boxes with integral eliminators and insect screen. 2. Recessing Flanges: Provide 18-gauge steel flanges for recessing cabinet heaters into wall or

ceiling. 3. Duct Collars: Provide duct collars where specified. 4. Sub-bases: Provide 18-gauge steel sub-base for vertical units, height as indicated. 5. Extended Oilers: Provide plastic motor oiler tubes extending to beneath top discharge grille. 6. Provide unit mounted disconnect switch.

J. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. McQuay Inc. 2. Sterling Radiator. 3. Trane (The) Co. 4. Vulcan Radiator Co.

2.12 PRE-STARTUP CLEANER

A. Provide a pre-startup liquid alkaline dispersant cleaner for the flushing and cleaning of all HVAC water systems to remove oil and foreign matter from the piping and equipment prior to the final filling of the systems. This chemical shall not be injurious to persons, piping, pipe joint compounds, packings, coils, valves, pumps, and their mechanical seals, tubes or other parts of the system.

B. Furnish complete instruction dictating the quantities of the cleaner to use, methods, and durations of the operation.

2.13 BYPASS CHEMICAL POT FEEDERS

A. General: Provide where indicated or otherwise necessary, bypass feeders of size and capacity noted on the drawings.

B. Provide a bypass feeder for adding chemical to the closed water system. The feed shall have (2) 3/4" NPT, female pipe connections, a 3/4" NPT female drain pipe connection, and a 3 1/2" top opening cap, with an "O" ring seat. The feeder shall have a continuous threaded closure requiring 2 1/2 turns to close and seal. Capacity of the feeder shall be 5 gallons, capable of

operating at 200 psig and at a temperature up to 200F. Provide feeder with a built in support and mounting for cartridge filter.

C. The by-pass feeder shall be provided with mounting legs to elevate the feeder off the floor. The legs shall have holes to allow mounting by anchor bolts.

D. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. A&F Machine. 2. Neptune. 3. Vector. 4. Wingert.

2.14 CLOSED SYSTEM WATER TREATMENT CHEMICALS

A. Provide liquid nitrite corrosion inhibitor treatment for the prevention of corrosion in closed systems at 700 PPM total nitrite level.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which hydronic systems materials and products are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to the installer.

3.02 ELECTRICAL WIRING

A. General: Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory-mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to Electrical Installer. 1. Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's submittal and

installation requirements of Division 26 sections. Do not proceed with equipment start-up until wiring installation is acceptable to equipment installer.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF HYDRONIC PIPING

A. Install eccentric reducers where pipe is reduced in size in direction of flow, with tops of both pipes and reducer flush.

B. Install piping level with no pitch.

C. Connect branch-feed piping to mains at top of mains, connect run-out piping to branches at horizontal center line of branches.

D. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying full insulation and servicing of valves.

E. Copper piping joints shall have pipe cut square, and reamed with burrs removed. Clean with medium grit emory cloth, flux pipe and fitting with nokorode paste. Use only 95-5 solder.

F. Refer to Section 23 05 00 for hanger and support requirements.


A. Shutoff Valves: Install on inlet and outlet of each mechanical equipment item, and elsewhere as indicated.

B. Drain Valves: Install on each mechanical equipment item located to completely drain equipment for service or repair. Install at base of each riser, at base of each rise or drop in piping system, and elsewhere where indicated or required to completely drain hydronic piping system.

C. Install wafer checks on all pump applications (inline pumps, base mounted pumps, pumped coils). Install swing check valves for all other applications. All swing check valves shall be installed in the horizontal position. Vertical installation is not acceptable.

D. Balance Valves: Install balance valve on outlet of each hydronic terminal, on end of each hydronic zone circuit, on discharge of each hydronic pump, and elsewhere as indicated. After hydronic system balancing has been completed, permanently mark final balanced position with memory stop or yellow lacquer across body.

3.05 INSTALLATION OF HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES

A. Vent Valves:



1. Manual Vent Valves: Install manual vent valves on each hydronic terminal at highest point, and on each hydronic piping drop in direction of flow for mains, branches, and runouts, and elsewhere as indicated.

2. Install a full size air chamber and pipe down with 1/4" copper tubing to a petcock or key vent. If the vent is above ceiling, install the petcock 6" above the ceiling. Provide manual air vent fittings on all hydronic coils. Extend air vents to workable levels in gymnasium.

3. Automatic Vent Valves: (mechanical rooms only) Install automatic vent valves at top of each hydronic riser and elsewhere as indicated. Install shutoff valve between riser and vent valve, pipe outlet to suitable plumbing drain, or as indicated.

B. Flow Control Valves: Install flow control valves on discharge of each pump serving hydronic heating system or zone, and elsewhere as indicated. Install with check mechanism in upright position, with adequate clearance for service and replacement. Screw check down for automatic operation.

C. Diverting Fittings: Install diverting fittings as indicated and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Position fittings on supply and return mains with proper orientation for flow.

D. Air Separators: 1. Dip Tube Fittings: Install dip tube fittings in boiler outlet in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions. Run piping to compression tank with 1/4" per foot (2%) upward slope towards tank. Connect boiler outlet piping.

2. In-line Air Separators: Install in-line air separators in pump suction lines. Connect inlet and outlet piping. Run piping to compression tank with 1/4" per foot (2%) upward slope towards tank. Install drain valve on units 2" and over and extend drain piping to floor drain.

3. Combination Separator/Strainer: Install external combination air separators/strainers in pump suction lines. Connect inlet and outlet piping. Run piping to compression tank with 1/4" per foot (2%) upward slope towards tank. Install shut-off valve on drain connection and extend drain piping to floor drain. Remove and clean strainer after 24 hours and again after 30 days of system operation.

E. Diaphragm-Type Expansion Tanks: Install diaphragm-type expansion tanks on floor as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Suspend horizontal tanks from building structure with all threaded rods and trapeze support channels. Vent and purge air from hydronic system, charge tank with proper air charge as recommended by manufacturer.

F. Pump Suction Diffusers: At Installer's option, install pump suction diffusers on each pump suction line in lieu of reducing elbow, entrance pipe, and pressure gage outlet. Install on pump suction inlet, adjust foot support to carry weight of suction piping. Install nipple and shutoff valve in blowdown connection. After cleaning and flushing hydronic piping system, but before balancing of hydronic piping system, remove disposable fine mesh strainer.

G. Pump Discharge Valves (Triple-Duty Valves): Install pump discharge valves on each pump discharge line in lieu of check valve and balance cock. Install in horizontal or vertical position with stem in upward position; allow clearance above stem for check mechanism removal. After hydronic system has been completed, mark calibrated name plate with stripe of yellow lacquer to permanently mark final balanced position. Use of triple-duty valve does not eliminate requirement of separate shut-off valve on discharge of pump.

H. Bypass Pot Feeders: Install bypass pot feeders on each hydronic system at pump discharge or elsewhere, as indicated. Install in upright position with top of pot not more than 48" above floor. Connect pot feeder to pump discharge with unions and ball valves. Provide sight glass on inlet of pot feeder. Install shut-off valve in pump discharge line between connections to the pot feeder. Provide drain with ball shut-off valve and a hose end connection.

I. Pressure Relief Valves: Install for each hot water boiler or heat exchanger as indicated, and in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Pipe discharge to floor drain.



J. Control Components: Install control valves, flow switches, flow sensors, thermowells and pressure/temperature taps furnished by the temperature control contractor in accordance with the manufactures recommendations.

3.06 INSTALLATION OF PUMPS

A. General: Install HVAC pumps where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's published installation instructions, complying with recognized industry practices to ensure that HVAC pumps comply with requirements and serve intended purposes.

B. Access: Provide access space around HVAC pumps for service as indicated, but in no case less than that recommended by manufacturer.

C. Install vertical inline pumps supported from floor mounted stands with a mason industries waffle pad (or approved equal) under the stands and a 4" concrete housekeeping pad under the pump.

D. Install in-line circulator pumps, supported separately from the piping system so piping is not supported from the pumps.

E. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory-mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to Electrical Installer. 1. Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's submittal and

installation requirements of Division 26 sections. Do not proceed with equipment start-up until wiring installation is acceptable to equipment installer.

F. Alignment: Check alignment, and where necessary, realign shafts of motors and pumps within recommended tolerances by manufacturer, and in presence of manufacturer's service representative.

G. Flexible Connectors: Install flexible connectors as indicated on the drawigns. Flexible connectors shall not be used to correct for mis-alignment of piping. Provide documentation that the pump is installed in accordance with the manufacturers recommended tolerances. The flexible connector braiding shall not be used to compensate for offsets and alignment of the piping. The flexible connector shall not be compressed.

H. Start-Up: Lubricate pumps before start-up. Start-up in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Remove start-up strainer and install permanent strainer. Verify that the pumps controls are correct for the required application.

3.07 INSTALLATION OF UNIT HEATERS

A. General: Install unit heaters as indicated, and in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.

B. Uncrate units and inspect for damage. Verify that nameplate data corresponds with unit designation.

C. Hang units from building substrate, not from piping. Mount as high as possible to maintain greatest headroom possible unless otherwise indicated.

D. Support units with rod-type hangers anchored to building substrate.

E. Install piping as indicated.

F. Protect units with protective covers during balance of construction.



3.08 INSTALLATION OF CABINET HEATERS

A. General: Install cabinet heaters as indicated, and in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.

B. Locate cabinet heaters as indicated, coordinate with other trades to assure correct recess size for recessed units.

C. Install piping as indicated.

D. Protect units with protective covers during balance of construction.

E. Install ceiling mounted units with rubber-in-shear vibration isolation.


A. Mechanical contractor shall obtain approval in writing from Balancing Contractor for all balancing devices.

B. Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows: 1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test. 2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test

pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing. 3. Flush system with clean water. Clean strainers. 4. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be

capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment.

5. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure, to protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test.

C. Perform the following tests on hydronic piping: 1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage due to

freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may be used. 2. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release trapped air. Use

drains installed at low points for complete draining of liquid. 3. Check expansion tanks to determine that they are not air bound and that system is full of

water. 4. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the design

pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed either 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength or 1.7 times "SE" value in Appendix A of ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping."

5. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.

6. Prepare written report of testing. Testing report shall be submitted to the DPS Project Manager for approval.

7. Water Analysis: submit a copy of the water analysis to illustrate water quality available at Project site. Refer to Specification Section 15548 Water Treatment for additional requirements.

D. Adjusting 1. Mark calibrated nameplates of pump discharge valves after hydronic system balancing has

been completed, to permanently indicate final balanced position. 2. Perform these adjustments before operating the system:

a. Open valves to fully open position. Close coil bypass valves. b. Check pump for proper direction of rotation.



c. Set automatic fill valves for required system pressure. d. Check air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and operating

freely (automatic type), or bleed air completely (manual type). e. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow. f. Check operation of automatic bypass valves. g. Check and set operating temperatures of boilers, chillers, and cooling towers to design

requirements. h. Lubricate motors and bearings.

3. Submit written documentation to the DPS Project Manager that the pump adjustments have been made prior to balancing of the system by the Test and Balance Contractor.

E. Cleaning 1. General: After construction is completed, including painting, clean unit exposed surfaces,

vacuum clean terminal coils and inside of cabinets. 2. Retouch any marred or scratched surfaces of factory-finished cabinets, using finish materials

furnished by manufacturer. 3. Install new filter units for terminals requiring same.

F. System Start-Up 1. The Water Treatment Supplier shall put the treatment equipment into operation, and make

adjustments necessary for proper operation. 2. The Water Treatment Supplier shall provide a written report to the Division 23 Contractor

indicating that the start-up has been completed and that all equipment is operating properly.

G. Cleaning Notification. 1. Notify the DPS project manager five working days in advance of the start of cleaning of any

system. Cleaning and flushing of all systems shall take place in the presence of the DPS project manager and or a representative from Maintenance. The Certification of work Certificate documents the cleaning procedure and personnel involved. The designated Maintenance Personal observing the cleaning process shall sign the certification. School personnel or custodial staff is not authorized to certify the procedure.

3.10 PRE-START CLEANING OF CLOSED LOOP PIPING SYSTEMS.

A. Refer to specification section 23 05 00.3.15 for closed loop systems cleaning, flushing and inspecting requirements.

3.11 BOILER CLEANING.

A. Clean boilers in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

3.12 SYSTEM VOLUME:

A. The mechanical contractor shall determine each systems volume by the use of a flow meter or volume metric dye testing. The volume of each system shall be recorded in the O&M Manual. System volume will be used to determine the amount of chemical quantities for the systems.

3.13 OPERATOR TRAINING AND SERVICE

A. The Water Treatment Supplier shall instruct the Owner's operating personnel so as to familiarize them with all treatment equipment and procedures per Maintenance Service specified in Part 1 of this Section.

END OF SECTION


DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS Florence Crittenton REFRIGERANT SYSTEMS OZ Architecture Project No. 113266.00 Section 23 23 00 - 1

SECTION 23 23 00

REFRIGERANT PIPING SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL





A. Types of equipment specified within this section include the following: 1. Refrigerant Piping & Specialties. 2. Air Cooled Condensing Units.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer approved and signed drawings of refrigerant pipe and fittings including, but not necessarily limited to, pipe and tube sizes, locations, elevations, and slopes of horizontal runs, wall and floor penetrations, and connections. Show interface and spatial relationship between piping and proximate equipment.

1.04 REGULATIONS

A. Refrigeration systems or appliances shall: 1. Be equipped with a fully protected and isolatable receiver or condenser of sufficient capacity

to hold the complete refrigerant charge during servicing or repairs. This requirement shall apply only to systems and appliances with 50 pounds or greater of the manufacturer's recommended/estimated charge. However, refrigeration systems with less than 50 pounds capacity shall be equipped with suitable access valve(s) in order to provide for recovery of refrigerant charge if necessary.

2. Be equipped with a system of relief valves, including reseatable relief valve and non-fragmenting disk, designed to automatically reseat after activation, to minimize refrigerant losses in the case of equipment breakdown or failure.

3. Be installed meeting, at a minimum, the applicable requirements set forth in the ASHRAE Guideline 15-2007.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. General: Provide piping materials and factory-fabricated piping products of sizes, types, pressure ratings, temperature ratings, and capacities as indicated. Provide materials and products complying with ANSI B31.5 Code for Refrigeration Piping where applicable, base pressure rating on refrigerant piping system maximum design pressures. Provide sizes and types matching piping and equipment connections; provide fittings of materials which match pipe materials used in refrigerant piping systems.


A. General: Provide pipes and pipe fittings complying with Division 23, Section 23 05 00.



2.03 REFRIGERANT SPECIALTIES

A. Refrigerant Filter-Driers: Corrosion-resistant steel shell, steel flange ring and spring, wrought copper fittings, ductile iron cover plate with steel cap screws, replaceable filter-drier core, 500 psi working pressure.

2.04 AIR-COOLED CONDENSING UNITS

A. General: Provide factory-assembled and tested air-cooled condensing units as indicated, consisting of compressor, condenser coil, fan, motor, refrigerant reservoir, and operating controls. Provide capacity and electrical characteristics as scheduled.

B. Casing: Provide 18 gauge galvanized steel casing finished with baked enamel. Provide removable panel for access to controls, and weep holes for water drainage. Provide base with mounting holes. Provide brass service valves, fittings, and gage ports on exterior of casing.

C. Compressor: Provide welded hermetic with built-in overloads and vibration isolation. Provide for compressor motor, thermal and current-sensitive overload device, internal high-pressure protection, high and low pressure cutout switches, start capacitor and relay, 2-pole contactor, crankcase heater, and temperature actuated switch and timer to prevent compressor rapid cycle.

D. Condenser: Construct coil of copper tubes and aluminum fins, provided with liquid accumulator and liquid subcooler. Provide aluminum propeller fan, direct driven, with permanently lubricated fan motor with thermal overload protection.

E. Accessories: Provide the following accessories: 1. Low-voltage thermostat and subbase to control condensing unit and evaporator fan. 2. Precharged and insulated suction and liquid tubing of length indicated. 3. Head pressure control to modulate condenser fan motor speed for low ambient conditions. 4. Crank case heater for low ambient control down to -20°F. 5. Low voltage control transformer. 6. Hail Guards: Provide manufacturer’s steel coil guards for condenser coil protection. Plastic

hail guards are not acceptable.

F. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Carrier A/C Group, Carrier Corp.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which refrigerant systems and products are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF REFRIGERANT PIPING

A. Install refrigerant piping with 1/4" per foot (1%) downward slope in direction of oil return to compressor. Provide oil traps and double risers where indicated, and where required to provide oil return.

B. Clean refrigerant piping by swabbing with dry lintless (linen) cloth, followed by refrigerant oil soaked swab. Remove excess oil by swabbing with cloth soaked in high flash point petroleum solvent, squeezed dry.

C. Bleed dry nitrogen through refrigerant piping during brazing operations.



D. Refer to Section 23 05 00 for Hanger and Support requirements.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF REFRIGERANT ACCESSORIES

A. Refrigerant Filter-Dryers: Install in refrigerant lines as indicated, and in accessible location for service.

3.04 EQUIPMENT CONNECTION

A. General: Connect refrigerant piping to mechanical equipment as indicated, and comply with equipment manufacturer's instructions where not otherwise indicated.


A. Refrigerant Piping Leak Test: Prior to initial operation, clean and test refrigerant piping in accordance with ANSI B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping". Perform first test with dry nitrogen, using soap solution to test all joints. Perform second test as follows: fill system with 20 psi refrigerant and then charge to 480 psi (R-410A) with nitrogen. Let stand 24 hours and check to see that the charge has held. Check all joints with a halide leak detector. Perform final test by pulling a 2 mm Hg vacuum. The system must hold this vacuum for a period of 24 hours. System must be entirely leak-free.

B. Repair or replace refrigerant piping as required to eliminate leaks, and retest as specified to demonstrate compliance.

3.06 INSTALLATION OF CONDENSING UNITS

A. General: Install condensing units in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations indicated, and maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances.

B. Support: Install ground-mounted units on 4" thick reinforced concrete pad, 4" larger on each side than condensing unit. Anchor unit to pad using inserts or anchor bolts. Install roof- mounted units on mechanical equipment stand, constructed in accordance with NRCA Handbook. Anchor unit to structural frame with removable fasteners.

C. Electrical: Furnish electrical field-wiring diagrams to Electrical Installer for power wiring to condensing units, and control wiring for field-mounted controls. Wiring; not work of this section.

D. Connect pre-charged refrigerant tubing to unit's quick-connect fittings. Run tubing so as not to interfere with access to unit.

E. Connect refrigerant piping to unit; run piping so as not to interfere with access to unit. Install additional refrigerant circuits for dual or multiple compressor units whether or not shown on the documents. Refrigerant piping shall be installed according to industry accepted refrigerant piping practices.

F. Start-up condensing units, in accordance with manufacturer's start-up instructions, and in presence of manufacturer's representative. Test controls and demonstrate compliance with requirements. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment.

G. Distance between indoor & outdoor unit(s) shall not exceed manufacturer’s specifications.

H. Refrigerant tubing size shall not vary from manufacturer’s specifications, and shall be properly secured & insulated.



I. Installer shall insulate both liquid & suction lines individually.

J. Outdoor condenser shall be mounted & secured to accommodate for extreme weather conditions.

K. System shall be mounted & placed as shown on plans within all minimum clearances as specified by manufacturer’s instructions, & secured to provide for safe operation.


A. Testing: Upon completion of installation of split system air conditioning units, start-up and operate equipment to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Field correct malfunctioning units, then retest to demonstrate compliance.

3.08 EXTRA STOCK

A. Provide one complete extra set of filters for each split system air conditioning units. Install new filters at completion of split system air conditioning unit work, and prior to testing, adjusting, and balancing work. Obtain receipt from Owner that new filters have been installed.

END OF SECTION


DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS Florence Crittenton AIR DISTRIBUTION OZ Architecture Project No. 113266.00 Section 23 30 00 ) 1

SECTION 23 30 00

AIR DISTRIBUTION

PART 1 GENERAL




A. Types of equipment specified in this section include the following: 1. Metal Ductwork. 2. Ductwork Accessories. 3. Grilles, Registers & Diffusers. 4. Louvers and Dampers. 5. Fans. 6. Blower coil air handling units. 7. Ventilators. 8. Variable Air Volume Terminals. 9. Flues. 10. Sound attenuators.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Within 30 days after award of contract, submit a shop drawing for approval to the structural engineer showing size and location of all openings through roof and structural members. Do not proceed until the shop drawing has been reviewed, approved and returned.

1.04 TEST AND BALANCE COORDINATION

A. Prior to starting work, the contract documents shall be given to the Test and Balance contractor for his review. If there are any areas of the air distribution system that cannot be balanced, due to the configuration of the system, a Request for Clarification shall be made in a timely manner to allow revisions to the documents before the systems are installed.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 METAL DUCTWORK

A. Galvanized Sheet Metal: Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate ductwork from galvanized sheet steel, lockforming quality; with G 90 zinc coating in accordance with ASTM A 653; and mill phosphatized for exposed locations.

2.02 MISCELLANEOUS DUCTWORK MATERIALS

A. General: Provide miscellaneous materials and products of types and sizes indicated and, where not otherwise indicated, provide type and size required to comply with ductwork system requirements including proper connection of ductwork and equipment.

B. Exposed Ductwork Materials: Where ductwork is indicated to be exposed to view in occupied spaces, provide materials which are free from visual imperfections including pitting, seam marks,



roller marks, stains and discolorations, and other imperfections, including those which would impair painting.

C. Fittings: Provide radius type fittings fabricated of multiple sections with maximum 15 degree change of direction per section. Unless specifically detailed otherwise, use 45 degree laterals and 45 degree elbows for branch takeoff connections. Where 90 degree branches are indicated, provide conical type tees.

D. Duct Liner: 1. Duct Liner: Fibrous glass, complying with Thermal Insulation Manufacturers Association

(TIMA) AHC)101; of 1" thick. The liner shall meet the Life Safety Standards as established by NFPA 90A and 90B. The 1” duct liner shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C

1071, with a NRC not less than .70 and a thermal conductivity no higher than .25 at 75°F mean temperature. The surface coating shall contain an immobilized EPA registered anti)microbial agent as tested in accordance with ASTM)G)21 and 423 “Type A Mountain.” The liner shall meet erosion test method described in UL)181. Shop or field cut of insulation shall be coated with a sealant approved for use in duct systems.

2. Round Duct Liner: Fibrous glass, complying with Thermal Insulation Manufacturers Association (TIMA) AHC)101; of 1" thick. The liner shall meet the Life Safety Standards as established by NFPA 90A and 90B. The 1” duct liner shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 1071, with a NRC not less than .70 and a thermal conductivity no higher than .25 at

75°F mean temperature. The surface coating shall contain an immobilized EPA registered anti)microbial agent as tested in accordance with ASTM)G)21 and 423 “Type A Mountain.” The liner shall meet erosion test method described in UL)181. Shop or field cut of insulation shall be coated with a sealant approved for use in duct systems. The liner shall be provided with factory)made, evenly spaced kerfs to allow the material to conform to the inside diameter of round air ducts.

3. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Certain)teed b. Johns Manville c. Owens Corning

E. Duct Sealant: Non)hardening, non)migrating mastic or liquid elastic sealant, type applicable for fabrication/installation detail, as compounded and recommended by manufacturer specifically for sealing joints and seams in ductwork.

F. Duct Cement: Non)hardening migrating mastic or liquid neoprene based cement, type applicable for fabrication/installation detail, as compounded and recommended by manufacturer specifically for cementing fitting components, or longitudinal seams in ductwork.

G. Ductwork Support Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide trapeze duct supports constructed with hot)dipped galvanized steel fasteners, anchors, rods, straps, trim, unistrut and angles.

H. Flexible Ductwork: 1. Low Pressure Flexible Ducts: Duct shall be factory pre)insulated with a solid inner liner

formed by a reinforced aluminum laminate material mechanically locked or bonded together by a corrosive resistant galvanized steel helix, covered with a minimum 1)1/2" thick fiberglass blanket and sheathed in a polyethylene vapor barrier. The insulation shall have a maximum 0.23 "C" factor, to meet FHA/HUD requirements and a vapor barrier permeability of 0.10 perms (ASTM E96)Procedure A). The duct shall have a positive working pressure rating of 6" w.g. (all diameters), negative working pressure rating of 1" w.g. (all diameters)

and at a maximum operating temperature of 180°F (all diameters). Pressure rating based on test with temperature and velocity applied. the duct shall comply with the latest NFPA 90A Bulletin and be UL)181 listed as a Class I Air Duct.

2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Flexmaster.



b. Glenflex. c. Hercules Industries.

I. Spin)in Fittings: Conical, bellmouth spin)in fittings shall be used for duct taps and shall include quadrant dampers on all lines to air devices (diffusers and grilles) even though a volume damper may be specified for the air device. (This does not apply for high pressure duct). The spin collar fitting shall be made from G)90 galvanized sheet metal. The construction shall have a fabricated minimum overall length of 7". The location of spin)in fittings in the ducts shall be determined after terminals are hung or the location of the light fixtures is known so as to minimize flexible duct lengths and sharp bends.

2.03 DUCTWORK FABRICATION

A. Shop fabricate ductwork of gages and reinforcement complying with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards".

B. Fabricate duct fittings to match adjoining ducts, and to comply with duct requirements as applicable to fittings. Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate elbows with centerline radius equal to associated duct width; and fabricate to include turning vanes in elbows where shorter radius is necessary. Limit angular tapers to 30 degrees for contracting tapers and 20 degrees for expanding tapers.

C. Fabricate ductwork with duct liner in each section of duct where indicated. Laminate liner to internal surfaces of duct in accordance with instructions by manufacturers of lining and adhesive, and fasten with mechanical fasteners.

2.04 Miscellaneous Materials: Provide miscellaneous materials and products as required to comply with ductwork system requirements including proper connection of ductwork and equipment.

A. Heat Sensitive Tape: Must comply with UL 181 A H.

B. Pressure Sensitive Tape: Pressure sensitive aluminum tape, 2)1/2" wide, complying with SMACNA Performance Standard AFDS)100)73, and with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B or UL 181, Class 1 requirements. Tape must read UL181 A P.

C. Ductwork Support Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hot)dipped galvanized steel fasteners, anchors, rods, straps, trim and angles for support of ductwork.

2.05 KITCHEN EXHAUST DUCTS

A. General: Fabricate kitchen exhaust ducts and supports, used for smoke and vapor removal from cooking equipment, of 16)ga. minimum carbon steel where concealed, and of 18)ga. minimum stainless steel where exposed. For duct construction, comply with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards", and NFPA 96 "Removal of Smoke and Grease)Laden Vapors from Commercial Cooking Equipment".

2.06 DAMPERS

A. Low Pressure Balancing Dampers: Provide dampers of single blade type or multiblade type, constructed in accordance with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards".

B. Counterbalanced Relief Dampers: Provide dampers with parallel blades, counterbalanced and factory)set to relieve at indicated static pressure. Construct blades of 16)gauge aluminum, provide 1/2" diameter ball bearings, 1/2" diameter steel axles spaced on 9" centers. Construct frame of 2" x 1/2" x 1/8" steel channel for face areas 25 sq. ft. and under; 4" x 1)1/4" x 16)gauge



channel for face areas over 25 sq. ft. Provide galvanized steel finish on frame with aluminum touch)up.

C. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Air Balance, Inc. 2. American Warming & Ventilating, Inc. 3. Arrow Louver and Damper; Div. of Arrow United Industries, Inc. 4. Greenheck 5. Ruskin Mfg. Co.

2.07 FIRE DAMPERS

A. Fire Dampers: Provide fire dynamic type dampers, of sizes indicated. Dampers shall be constructed and tested in accordance with the current edition of UL)555 Standard For Fire

Dampers. Provide fusible link rated at 165°F unless otherwise indicated. Blades to be mounted outside of the air stream. Each dynamic fire damper shall be marked with a UL classified 1)1/2 hour fire protection rating, the maximum velocity/pressure rating for each horizontal and vertical installation and “for use in dynamic systems.” Dampers marked “for use in static systems only” are not permitted. Each dynamic fire damper shall include a steel sleeve and retaining angles furnished by the damper manufacturer to ensure appropriate installation. Submittal information shall include the fire protection rating, maximum velocity/pressure ratings and the manufacturer’s UL installation instructions. The dampers shall be installed in accordance with these instructions.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Greenheck. 2. Ruskin Mfg. Co.

2.08 FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS

A. Motor Driven Electric Combination Fire/Smoke Dampers: 1. Provide combination fire smoke dampers meeting or exceeding the following specifications

as indicated on the locations as shown on the plans. Dampers shall meet the requirements of NFPA 90A, 92A, and 92 B. Dampers shall have a fire rating of 1 ½ hours in accordance with the latest edition of UL555 and shall be classified as Leakage Class I Smoke Dampers in accordance with the latest version of UL555S. Dampers shall be warranted to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of 5 years after date of shipment. Each fire smoke damper shall be AMCA licensed and shall bear the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal for Air Performance. AMCA certified testing shall verify pressure drop does not exceed 0.03” W.G. at a face velocity of 1,000 fpm on a 24” x 24” damper. In addition the dampers and their actuators shall have a UL555S elevated temperature rating of 250°F. Appropriate electric actuators shall be installed by the damper manufacturer at time of damper fabrication. Electric actuators shall have been energized hold open tested for a period of at least 1 year with no spring return failures. Fire smoke damper shall be equipped with an electrical fusible link “controlled closure” quick detect heat actuated release device to prevent duct and HVAC component damage, and shall be automatically remote resettable after test, smoke detection, or power failure conditions. Instantaneous damper closure through the use of fusible links is unacceptable. Damper frame shall be a roll)formed structural hat channel, reinforced at the corners, formed from a single piece of minimum 16 gage galvanized steel. Damper blades shall be airfoil shaped with 13 gage equivalent thickness formed from a single piece of galvanized steel. Bearings shall be stainless steel turning in an extruded hole in the frame. Blade edge seals shall be silicone rubber and galvanized steel mechanically locked in to the blade edge (adhesive type seals are not acceptable). Each damper shall be supplied with a factory mounted sleeve of 17” minimum length.

2. Damper manufacturer shall provide installation details that comply with the latest versions of UL555 and UL555S. Installation details shall be job specific and shall be issued with product submittal.



3. Dampers with electric actuators shall be 120V.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Greenheck. 2. Louvers and Dampers. 3. Nailor Industries, Inc. 4. Pottorff. 5. Prefco. 6. Ruskin Manufacturing Co.

2.09 TURNING VANES

A. Manufactured Turning Vanes: Provide turning vanes constructed of 1)1/2" wide single wall curved blades set at 3/4" o.c., supported with bars perpendicular to blades set at 2" o.c., and set into side strips suitable for mounting in ductwork.

B. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Provide acoustic turning vanes constructed of airfoil shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated faces and fiberglass fill.

C. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Aero Dyne Co. 2. Airsan Corp. 3. Anemostat Products Div.; Dynamics Corp. of America. 4. Barber)Colman Co. 5. Duro Dyne Corp.

2.10 QUADRANT LOCKS

A. Provide for each damper, quadrant lock device on one end of shaft; and end bearing plate on other end for damper lengths over 12". Provide extended quadrant locks and end extended bearing plates for externally insulated ductwork.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Ventfabrics, Inc. 2. Young Regulator Co.

2.11 DUCT ACCESS DOORS

A. General: Provide duct access doors of size required.

B. Construction: Construct of same or greater gage as ductwork served, provide insulated doors for insulated ductwork. Provide flush frames for uninsulated ductwork, extended frames for externally insulated duct. Provide one side hinged, other side with one handle)type latch for doors 12" high and smaller, 2 handle)type latches for larger doors. Provide 12 x 12 for hand access and 24 x 24 for head and shoulder access.

C. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Air Balance Inc. 2. Ruskin Mfg. Co. 3. Ventfabrics, Inc.

2.12 PRESSURE RELIEF DOOR

A. Provide pressure relief door in the ductwork where indicated on the plans or where the ductwork could be subject to excessive pressure build)up due to quick closure of fire dampers. The door shall be constructed of 12 gauge galvanized steel with a 12 gage galvanized steel frame. The



door shall be sealed with a ¼” thick gasket. The door shall be insulated with 1” fiberglass 1 ½ lb. insulation or as consistent with the duct insulation. The door shall have a spring)loaded mechanism to automatically close the door after pressure has been relieved. Door shall be adjustable for pressures of 3” w.c. to 8” w.c. The door pressure setting shall be adjustable in the field. The door shall be welded to the ductwork or installed with high pressure sealing cement and screws.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Kees. 2. Ruskin.

2.13 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS

A. General: Provide flexible duct connections wherever ductwork connects to vibration isolated equipment. Construct flexible connections of neoprene)coated flameproof fabric crimped into duct flanges for attachment to duct and equipment. Make airtight joint. Provide adequate joint flexibility to allow for thermal, axial, transverse, and torsional movement, and also capable of absorbing vibrations of connected equipment.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. American/Elgen Co.; Energy Div. 2. Duro Dyne Corp. 3. Flexaust (The) Co. 4. Ventfabrics, Inc.

2.14 GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard air device where shown; of size, shape, capacity and type indicated; constructed of materials and components as indicated, and as required for complete installation.

B. Performance: Provide air devices that have, as minimum, temperature and velocity traverses, throw and drop, and noise criteria ratings for each size device as listed in manufacturer's current data.

C. Ceiling/Wall Compatibility: Provide air devices with border styles that are compatible with adjacent ceiling/wall systems, and that are specifically manufactured to fit into ceiling/wall construction with accurate fit and adequate support. Refer to general construction drawings and specifications for types of ceiling/wall construction which will contain each type of air device.

D. Types: Provide air device of type, capacity, and with accessories and finishes as listed on grilles, register and diffuser schedule.

E. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Krueger Mfg. Co. 2. Price. 3. Titus Products Div.; Philips Industries, Inc. 4. Air Concepts.

2.15 LOUVERS

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard louvers where shown; of size, shape, capacity and type indicated; constructed of materials and components as indicated, and as required for complete installation.

B. Performance: Provide louvers that have minimum free area as scheduled, and minimum pressure drop for each type as listed in manufacturer's current data, complying with louver



schedule. Performance data must bear AMCA Certified Ratings Seal for Air Performance and Water Penetration.

C. Substrate Compatibility: Provide louvers with frame and sill styles that are compatible with adjacent substrate, and that are specifically manufactured to fit into construction openings with accurate fit and adequate support, for weatherproof installation. Refer to general construction drawings and specifications for types of substrate which will contain each type of louver.

D. Materials: 1. Aluminum: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063)T52. Weld units or use stainless steel fasteners.

E. Louver Screens: On inside face of exterior louvers, provide 1/2" square mesh for outside air louvers and exhaust air louvers and 1/4" square mesh for combustion air louvers. Mesh shall be anodized aluminum wire bird screens mounted in removable extruded aluminum frames. Delete square mesh when louver is used in a return air application.

F. Finishes: Louver finishes and custom color shall be by architect.

G. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Greenheck 2. Ruskin Mfg. Co.

2.16 IN)LINE CABINET FAN

A. Provide centrifugal in)line cabinet fan of type, size and capacity as scheduled.

B. Provide AMCA certified ratings seal.

C. Type: Provide galvanized steel housing lined with acoustical insulation, adaptable for suspended installation. Provide centrifugal fan wheels mounted on motor shaft with fan shrouds, all removable for service. Provide integral backdraft damper fan discharge.

D. Motor: Provide permanent split)capacitor motor, permanently lubricated, with grounded cord and plug. Motor speed shall not exceed 1150 RPM.

E. Electrical: Provide junction box for electrical connection on housing, and receptacle for motor plug)in. 1. Furnish remote fan speed control, solid state, capable of controlling fan speed from full

speed to approximately half speed.

F. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Greenheck. 2. Loren Cook Co.

2.17 CENTRIFUGAL ROOF VENTILATORS

A. General: Provide AMCA certified centrifugal roof type, curb mounted, power ventilators of type, size, and capacity as scheduled, and as specified herein.

B. Type: Centrifugal fan, direct or belt driven as scheduled. Provide aluminum, galvanized steel, or fiberglass weatherproof housings as scheduled. Provide square base to suit roof curb. Provide permanent split)capacitor type motor for direct driven fans; capacitor)start, induction)run type motor for belt driven fans. Provide backward inclined wheels, adjustable pitch cast)iron pulleys, and fan motor isolated from the exhaust stream. 1. Housing Design: Hooded dome type. 2. Housing Design: Upblast type.



C. Range Hood Exhaust Fans: Fans shown on drawings to serve range hoods shall be U.L. listed for grease removal and shall have been tested under high temperature exhaust (300°F) and abnormal flare)up (600°F) conditions. The fans shall be constructed and installed in accordance with NFPA 96.Provide upblast type fans with rain and snow drains.

D. Bearings: Provide permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self aligning bearings.

E. Electrical: Provide factory)wired non)fusible type disconnect switch at motor in fan housing. Provide thermal overload protection in fan motor. Provide conduit chase within unit for electrical connection.

F. Bird Screens: Provide removable bird screens, 1/2" mesh, 16) gauge aluminum or brass wire.

G. Provide stainless steel quick release fasteners for removable top cap.

H. Dampers: Provide gravity)actuated dampers in curb bases as scheduled on drawings.

I. Dampers: Provide motorized dampers with linkage in curb base as scheduled on drawings.

J. Roof Curb: Provide galvanized steel factory roof curb with 1)1/2" rigid fiberglass insulation adhered to the inside of the walls.

K. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Greenheck. 2. Loren Cook Co.

2.18 VARIABLE AIR VOLUME TERMINALS

A. General: Provide factory)fabricated and tested air terminals as indicated, selected with performance characteristics which match or exceed those indicated on schedule. 1. Terminal unit performance and sound rating shall be tested and rated in accordance with

ARI 880: Industry Standard for air terminals" and shall bear the ARI certification seal. 2. Terminals shall be in compliance with UL)181 and NFPA 90A and shall meet bacteriological

standards of ASTM C665.

B. Casings: 1. Construct of die)cast aluminum (.034”) or sheet metal (22 gauge) 2. Provide hanger brackets for attachment of supports. 3. Linings: Line inside surfaces of casings with lining material to provide acoustic performance,

thermal insulation, and to prevent condensation on outside surfaces of casing. Provide minimum thickness of 1/2". Secure lining to prevent delamination, sagging, or settling. (ASTM C 1071)

4. Access: Provide removable panels in casings to permit access to air dampers and other parts requiring service, adjustment, or maintenance.

5. Leakage: Construct casings such that when subjected to 0.5)in w.g. pressure for low pressure units, and 3.0)in w.g. pressure for high pressure units, total leakage does not exceed 4% of specified air flow capacity with outlets sealed and inlets wide open. Construct air dampers such that when subjected to 6.0)in w.g. inlet pressure with damper closed, total leakage does not exceed 10% of specified air flow capacity.

6. Controls enclosure: Provide a NEMA 1 controls enclosure with a removable cover for protection of electronic controls. Enclosure shall have double backplane construction and shall have no exposed screw tips.

C. Air Dampers: Construct of materials that cannot corrode, do not require lubrication, nor require periodic servicing. Provide maximum volume dampers, both pressure dependent and pressure compensated, that are calibrated in cfm, set to specified air capacities. Provide mechanism to



vary air volume through damper from minimum setpoint to maximum setpoint, in response to signal from thermostat.

D. “Pinch Down” Air Terminals: Provide the following features and accessories indicated on Drawings and schedule: 1. Hot Water Heating Coils: Provide heating coils constructed of copper tubes and aluminum

fins with galvanized steel casing. 2. Construct coils with copper tubing primary surface and aluminum secondary surface bonded

to tubes in accordance with ASTM B 75. Provide coils with threaded connections. Fin spacing shall be 12 fins per inch or less, unless otherwise indicated. a. All coils shall be designed and tested per ASHRAE 33 and ARI 410. b. Coils shall have a working pressure of 200 psi at 325 degrees F. c. Coils shall have a minimum tube diameter of 0.625" and a minimum tube wall thickness

of 0.02" d. Coil frame shall be galvanized)steel channel frame 0.052" minimum.

3. Electric Heating Coils: Provide heating coils constructed of electric resistance elements in galvanized steel casing with control box and factory)wiring. Provide over)temperature protection and UL)listing as duct heater.

E. Controls: 1. Provide electronic controls, compatible with direct digital control system.

F. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Environmental Technologies. 2. Krueger. 3. Price Industries. 4. Trane (The) Co.

2.19 DIRECT VENT

A. General: Provide two)pipe vent system, consisting of pipe sections, fittings and accessories required by manufacturer for complete installation.

B. Material: Construct pipe of stainless steel AL)29)4C or a material determined by manufacturer’s recommendations.

C. Accessories: Provide manufacturer’s standard accessory items or as indicated for complete installation.

2.20 SOUND ATTENUATORS

A. General: Provide factory)fabricated and tested sound attenuators, selected with performance characteristics which match or exceed those indicated on the schedule.

B. Casing: Outer casings of silencers shall be made of galvanized steel in accordance with ASHRAE Guide recommended construction for high pressure rectangular duct work. Seams shall be lock formed and mastic filled.

C. Interior partitions for rectangular silencers shall be made of not less than 26 gauge galvanized perforated steel.

D. Interior construction of tubular silencers shall be compatible with the outside casings.

E. Airtight construction shall be provided by use of a duct sealing compound on the job site. Material and labor furnished by contractor. Silencers shall not fail structurally when subjected to a differential air pressure of 8" w.g. inside to outside of casing.



F. Filler Material: Filler material shall be of inorganic mineral of glass fiber of a density sufficient to obtain the specific acoustic performance and be packed under not less than 5% compression to eliminate voids due to vibration and settling. Material shall be inert, vermin and moisture proof.

G. Combustion rating for the silencer acoustic fill shall not be greater than the following when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84, NFPA Standard 255 or U.L. No. 723: 1. Flamespread Classification 25 2. Smoke Development Rating 20 3. Fuel Contribution 20

H. Ratings: Silencer ratings shall be determined in a duct)to)reverberant room test facility which provides for airflow in both directions through the test silencer during rating. The test set)up and procedure shall be such that all effects due to end reflection, directivity, flanking transmission, standing waves and test chamber sound absorption are eliminated. Acoustic ratings shall include Dynamic Insertion Loss (DIL) and Self)Noise (SN) Power levels both for FORWARD FLOW (air and noise in same direction) and REVERSE FLOW (air and noise in opposite directions) with an airflow of at least 2000 fpm entering face velocity.

I. Static pressure loss of silencers shall not exceed those listed in the silencer schedule as the airflow indicates. Airflow measurements shall be made in accordance with applicable portions of ASME, AMCA and ADC airflow test codes. Test shall be reported on the identical units for which acoustic data is presented.

J. Certification: The manufacturer shall supply with submittals certified test data on Dynamic Insertion Loss, Self)Noise Power Levels and Aerodynamic Performance for Reverse and Forward Flow test conditions. Test data shall be for a standard product. All rating tests shall be conducted in the same facility and shall utilize the same silencer and shall be open to inspection upon request from the Architect/Engineer.

K. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. VibroAcoustics. 2. Price. 3. Prior approved equal.

2.21 BLOWER COIL AIR HANDLING UNIT

A. General: Provide factory fabricated, factory tested air handlers as indicated herein.

B. Casing: 1. Casings shall be constructed of 18)gauge galvanized steel, insulated with one)inch, 1)1/2 lb.

density fiberglass fire resistant and odorless glass fiber material to provide thermal and acoustical insulation.

2. Fan housing sides shall be directly attached to the air handler top and bottom panels. Coil access panels shall be located on both sides of the air handler to allow easy removal of the internal coils and drain pan. Main access panels provide access to the fan, motor and drive from both sides of the air handler.

C. Direct Expansion Coils: 1. DX coils shall use R410A refrigerant and have ½” OD x 0.016” W round seamless copper

tubes expanded into full fin collars for permanent fin)tube bond. DX coils shall use aluminum fins, mechanically bonded to seamless copper tubes. The coil casing shall be 16)gauge galvanized steel.

2. Suction headers shall have bottom connections to aid drainage of any oil that may collect in the coil. Liquid line and suction connections to be outside the unit casing (on the same side of the unit) to facilitate field piping.

3. Coils shall have a single venturi type distributor assembly designed with a vertical downflow feed for low pressure drops.



4. Coils shall be proof tested at 450 psig and leak tested at 300 psig air)under)water. Coils shall be dehydrated and sealed with a dry nitrogen charge. Coils shall be designed and tested per ARI 410.

D. Fans: 1. Fans shall be forward curved, centrifugal blower type equipped with heavy)duty adjustable

speed V)belt drive. The fan shaft shall be supported by heavy duty, permanently sealed ball bearings. All fans to be dynamically balanced.

E. Drain Pan: 1. The drain pans shall be noncorrosive and double)sloped to allow condensate drainage. The

drainpan construction shall be polymer or optional stainless steel. 2. Coils to mount above the drain pan, not in the drain pan to allow the drain pan to be fully

inspected and cleaned. The drain pan shall also be removable for cleaning. 3. The polymer drain pan connections shall be unthreaded ¾” schedule 40 PVC for solvent

bonding. The stainless steel drain pan connection shall be ¾” NPT schedule 40 stainless steel pipe. An auxiliary drain connection shall be provided on the same side as the main connection.

F. Filters: 1. One)inch standard efficiency throwaway filters. 2. Units shall have a standard filter rack that is sized for less than 500 feet per minute at

nominal airflow. 3. All units and filter racks shall use standard filter sizes.

G. Motors: 1. Multi)tap ECM motors:

a. Voltage and phase as scheduled. b. Motors shall be factory installed and wired to the air handler junction box.

H. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Carrier A/C Group; Carrier Corp.

2.22 ELECTRIC CABINET HEATERS

A. Materials and Equipment: Except as otherwise indicated, provide electric cabinet heater manufacturer's standard materials and components as indicated by published product information, designed and constructed as recommended by manufacturer, and as required for complete installation.

B. Heating Elements:

1. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard elements of indicated duty and rated for indicated capacity, consisting of resistance elements in steel sheath with extended fins, or in spirally finned sheath.

2. Cabinets: Provide cabinets braced and reinforced to provide required stiffness, and containing adjustable heating element supports. Provide 1/2" thick, 2)lb density, glass fiber insulation on interior of front panel. Phosphatize and paint cabinets inside and out with single coat of baked)on primer. Include discharge air grilles in cabinet, die formed with fixed directional louvers. Provide cabinets with removable front panels secured by slide bolt, camlock or Phillips head screws. Fabricate from 16)gage galvanized steel.

C. Motors:



1. General: Provide shaded)pole or permanent)split capacitor motors, resiliently mounted, tap wound with built)in thermal overload protection, and of permanently lubricated type. Electrical characteristics: 120)volt, 60 Hz, single phase.

2. Motor Controls: Provide multi)speed motor control switch with OFF position, mounted behind access door.

3. Internal Wiring: Provide high temperature, heat)resistant wiring in flexible metal conduit from terminal junction box to electrical devices. Provide fuses[ and disconnect] in motor and control circuit wiring.

4. Provide an integral disconnect switch.

D. Fans:

1. General: Provide double width, double inlet centrifugal fans, balanced statically and dynamically, of indicated capacity. Connect fan to a single or double extended motor shaft, with fan, housing and motor mounted as an integral assembly on motorboard.

2. Construction:

a. Wheels: Talc)filled polypropylene or aluminum. b. Housing: Galvanized steel. c. Motorboard: Galvanized steel.

3. Vibration Isolation: Provide devices of types and sizes recommended by manufacturer, except as otherwise indicated.

E. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Vulcan Radiator Co. 2. Berko Electric. 3. Erincraft Mfg. Co. 4. Markel Electric Heating. 5. Q’Mark. 6. Trane Co.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which ductwork accessories and equipment are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF METAL DUCTWORK

A. General: Assemble and install ductwork in accordance with SMACNA Seal Class “A” and noiseless (no objectionable noise) systems, capable of performing each indicated service. Install each run with minimum number of joints. Align ductwork accurately at connections, within 1/8" misalignment tolerance and with internal surfaces smooth. Support ducts rigidly with suitable ties, braces, hangers and anchors of type which will hold ducts true)to)shape and to prevent buckling. Support vertical ducts at every floor.

B. Inserts: Install concrete inserts for support of ductwork in coordination with framework, as required to avoid delays in work.

C. Field Fabrication: Complete fabrication of work at project as necessary to match shop)fabricated work and accommodate installation requirements.



D. Field Modifications: Ductwork modified in the field shall maintain the same free area as shown on the Drawings. In no case shall the aspect ratio of modified ductwork exceed 4 to 1 without permission of the Engineer.

E. Routing: Locate ductwork runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally and avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. Locate runs as indicated by diagrams, details and notations or, if not otherwise indicated, run ductwork in shortest route which does not obstruct useable space or block access for servicing building and its equipment. Hold ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building. Limit clearance to ½" where furring is shown for enclosure or concealment of ducts, but allow for insulation thickness, if any. Where possible, locate insulated ductwork for 1" clearance outside of insulation. Wherever possible in finished and occupied spaces, conceal ductwork from view, by locating in mechanical shafts, hollow wall construction or above suspended ceilings. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, except as specifically shown. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling and lighting layouts and similar finished work.

F. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Do not route ductwork through transformer vaults and their electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.

G. Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls, and are exposed to view, conceal space between construction opening and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same gage as duct. Overlap opening on 4 sides by at least 1)1/2". Fasten to duct and substrate. 1. Where ducts pass through fire)rated floors, walls, or partitions, provide firestopping between

duct and substrate, in accordance with requirements of Division 07 Section "Firestopping".

H. Installation: Install metal ductwork in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards as follows: 1. All supply, return and exhaust: Galvanized sheet metal.

I. Sealant: Seal all supply, return and exhaust ductwork with duct sealant or duct cement in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards.

J. All ductwork with wrapped insulation shall be supported using hangers in contact with the insulation. The insulation shall separate the ductwork and the hanger when wrapped ductwork is used.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF DUCT LINER

A. General: Install duct liner in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards. Duct sizes shown on plans are clear inside dimensions. Increase duct sizes accordingly.

B. Extent of Duct Liner: 1. All transfer air ductwork. 2. All transfer air boots. 3. Where shown otherwise.

3.04 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE DUCTS

A. Maximum Length: For any duct run using flexible ductwork, do not exceed 6' ) 0" extended length or as required by local authorities.

B. Installation: Install in accordance with Section III of SMACNA's, "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible".



3.05 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES

A. Install ductwork accessories in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, with applicable portions of details of construction as shown in SMACNA standards, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve intended function.

B. Install turning vanes in square or rectangular 90 degree elbows in supply, return and exhaust air systems, and elsewhere as indicated.

C. Install access doors to open against system air pressure, with latches operable from either side, except outside only where duct is too small for person to enter.

D. Install access doors for the following: 1. Access to dampers. 2. Access to fire dampers and smoke)fire dampers (one on each side of damper) in duct. 3. Access to heating coils (one on each side of coil) in duct. 4. Access to control devices.

3.06 INSTALLATION OF FIRE DAMPERS

A. Install fire dampers per the manufacturer’s installation instructions and in accordance with the current edition of UL)555 Standard for Fire Dampers.

B. Fire Damper Identification: Access points, i.e. access doors, access panels, lay)in ceiling tile, etc., shall be permanently identified on the exterior of the access point by a label having letters not less than 0.5” in height reading “FIRE DAMPER”.

3.07 INSTALLATION OF FIRE/SMOKE DAMPERS

A. Install fire/smoke dampers per the manufacturer’s installation instructions and in accordance with the current edition of UL)555 Standard for Fire Dampers and UL)555S Standard for Leakage Rated Dampers for Use in Smoke Control Systems.

B. Fire/Smoke Damper Identification: Access points, i.e. access doors, access panels, lay)in ceiling tile, etc., shall be permanently identified on the exterior of the access point by a label having letters not less than 0.5” in height reading “FIRE/SMOKE DAMPER”.

3.08 INSTALLATION OF GRILLES, REGISTERS, AND DIFFUSERS

A. General: Install grilles, registers and diffusers in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve intended functions.

B. Locate ceiling grilles, registers and diffusers, as indicated on general construction "Reflected Ceiling Plans".

C. Provide code approved support for grilles, registers and diffusers in lay)in ceilings.

3.09 INSTALLATION OF FANS

A. General: Install fans where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, and with recognized industry practices, to ensure that fans comply with requirements and serve intended purposes.

B. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory)mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to Electrical Installer.



1. Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's submittal and installation requirements of Division 26 sections. Ensure that rotation is in direction indicated and intended for proper performance. Do not proceed with fan start)up until wiring installation is acceptable to fan Installer.

3.10 INSTALLATION OF POWER AND GRAVITY VENTILATORS

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated or specified, install ventilators in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions and recognized industry practices to ensure that ventilators serve their intended function. 1. Solder bottom joints and up 2" of side joints of duct under roof ventilator to retain any

moisture entering ventilator.

B. Roof Curbs: Furnish roof curbs to roofing Installer for installation.

C. Remove shipping bolts and temporary supports within ventilators. Adjust dampers for free operation.

3.11 INSTALLATION OF AIR TERMINALS

A. General: Install air terminals as indicated, and in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.

B. Location: Install each unit level and accurately in position indicated in relation to other work; and maintain sufficient clearance for normal service and maintenance, but in no case less than that recommended by manufacturer.

C. Test terminal unit coils for leakage. Fill coil with water and inspect for leaks. Repair or replace any leaking components.

D. Start units to confirm proper operation. Remove and replace any malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

3.12 INSTALLATION OF AIR HANDLING UNITS

A. General: Install air handling units where indicated, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's published installation instructions, and with recognized industry practices, to ensure that units comply with requirements and serve intended purposes.

B. Support: Install indoor air handling unit as indicated on drawings. Coordinate type of support with General Contractor prior to installation.

C. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory)mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to Electrical Installer. 1. Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's submittal and

installation requirements of Division)26 sections. Do not proceed with equipment start)up until wiring installation is acceptable to equipment installer.

3.13 EXTRA STOCK

A. Provide one complete extra set of filters for each air handling system. If system is designed to include pre)filters and after) filters, provide only pre)filters. Install new filters at completion of air handling system work, and prior to testing, adjusting, and balancing work. Obtain receipt from Owner that new filters have been installed.



3.14 INSTALLATION OF VENTS

A. General: Provide two)pipe vent system, consisting of pipe sections, fittings and accessories required by manufacturer for complete installation.

B. Accessories: Provide manufacturer’s standard accessory items for complete installation.


A. Leakage Tests: After each duct system which is constructed for duct classes over 3" is completed, test for duct leakage in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual. Repair leaks and repeat tests until total leakage is less than 1% of system design air flow.

B. Operate installed ductwork accessories to demonstrate compliance with requirements. Test for air leakage while system is operating. Repair or replace faulty accessories, as required to obtain proper operation and leakproof performance.

C. Upon completion of installation of equipment and after motor has been energized with normal power source, test equipment to demonstrate compliance with requirements. Where possible, field correct malfunctioning equipment, then retest to demonstrate compliance. Replace equipment which cannot be satisfactorily corrected.

D. Upon completion of installation and prior to initial operation, test and demonstrate that air terminals, and duct connections to air terminals, are leak)tight.

E. Repair or replace air terminals and duct connections as required to eliminate leaks, and retest to demonstrate compliance.

3.16 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

A. General: Connect metal ductwork to equipment as indicated, provide flexible connection for each ductwork connection to equipment mounted on vibration isolators, and/or equipment containing rotating machinery. Provide access doors as indicated.

3.17 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Clean ductwork internally, unit by unit as it is installed, of dust and debris. Clean external surfaces of foreign substances which might cause corrosive deterioration of metal or, where ductwork is to be painted, might interfere with painting or cause paint deterioration.

B. Temporary Closure: At ends of ducts which are not connected to equipment or air distribution devices at time of ductwork installation, provide temporary closure of polyethylene film or other covering which will prevent entrance of dust and debris until time connections are to be completed.

C. Adjusting: Adjust ductwork accessories for proper settings, install fusible links in fire dampers and adjust for proper action.

D. Clean breechings internally during installation, removing dust and debris. Clean external surfaces of foreign substances which might cause corrosive deterioration of metal.

E. Temporary Closure: At ends of breeching which are not connected to equipment or stacks at time of installation, provide temporary closure of polyethylene film or other covering which will prevent entrance of dust and debris until time connections are to be completed.



3.18 SPARE PARTS

A. Furnish to Owner, with receipt, 3 operating keys for each type of air outlet and inlet that require them.

B. Furnish to Owner, with receipt, one spare set of belts for each belt driven centrifugal fan.

C. Furnish to Owner, with receipt, one set of filters for each unit requiring filters.

3.19 TRAINING OF OWNER’S PERSONNEL

A. Provide services of manufacturer's technical representative for 1/2 day to instruct Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of heating and cooling units. 1. Schedule training with Owner, provide at least 7)day notice to Contractor and Engineer of

training date.

END OF SECTION


DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS Florence Crittenton HEAT GENERATION OZ Architecture Project No. 113266.00 Section 23 52 00 - 1

SECTION 23 52 00

HEAT GENERATION

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.


A. Types of boilers and accessories specified in this section include the following: 1. High Efficiency Wall Hung Boilers

B. Electrical Work: Provide the following wiring as work of this section, in accordance with requirements of Division 26: 1. Mechanical contractor to verify Division 26 contractor is aware of ASME-CSD requirement

for remote disconnect switches for boiler burner power. Refer to Electrical Wiring and Safety Device Work and Materials Responsibilities in Specification Section 23 00 00.

2. Provide control wiring between boiler control panel and thermostats, aquastats, pressurestats, or any other control device.

3. Provide factory-mounted and wired controls and electrical devices as specified in this section.

C. CSD-1 Compliance: 1. As a minimum, all automatically fired boilers shall be provided with controls and safety

devices in accordance with ANSI/ASME CSD-1. Other more stringent condition may be required by the individual boiler specifications and information provided on the Drawings. Contractor shall meet all requirements.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 HIGH EFFICIENCY WALL HUNG BOILER

A. General Requirements: 1. Furnish and install completely assembled, modulating, sealed combustion, high efficiency,

gas-fired boiler(s) with a stainless steel, fire tube heat exchanger. 2. Installation of the boiler(s) shall be according to manufacturer’s installation instructions and

all work shall be completed in a neat and workmanship like manner. 3. Fuel source shall be natural gas. 4. The boiler(s) shall be rated for an Annual Fuel Utilization Efficiency of 95% and shall comply

with the energy efficiency requirements of ASHRAE 90.1, latest edition and the minimum efficiency requirements of ASHRAE 103, latest edition.

5. Efficiency at peak operating condition 135 EWT shall be 88% or greater. Efficiency at setback condition of 100 EWT shall be 95%.

6. The boiler(s) AFUE efficiency shall be verified through a third party testing agency under the guidance of the Hydronics Institute Division of AHRI and listed in the AHRI Certification Directory.

7. The boiler(s) shall be capable of full modulation, with a turn down of 4 to 1 8. The boiler(s) shall be manufactured by an ISO 9001 registered company and shall bear the

ASME “H” stamp according to Section IV of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. a. The stainless steel heat exchanger of the boiler(s) is to be hydrostatically pressure

tested at the factory in accordance with ASME requirements. b. The maximum allowable working pressure is 30 psig water as listed on the rating plate.



c. The heat exchanger shall be registered with the National Board and contain a registry number on the rating plate.

9. The boiler(s) shall meet the following regulatory requirements: a. The boiler(s) shall be ITS / ETL certified and listed to ANSI Z21.13/CSA 4.9 test

standards for US and Canada. b. Boiler(s) shall meet or exceed the SCAQMD (South Coast Air Quality Management

District of California) Low NOx emission requirement of 14 NG/J. c. The boiler(s) shall meet Department of Energy guidelines for Energy Star energy

efficiency.

B. Product Specifications: 1. Boiler Construction

a. Stainless steel, fire tube heat exchanger b. The grade of stainless must be of 439 providing resistance to corrosion at elevated

temperatures. c. The heat exchanger shall be of welded construction and shall not contain any banding

materials, bolts, gaskets or O-rings in the construction. d. The boiler combustion chamber shall be sealed and located at the top of the heat

exchanger which should be of a counterflow design and vertical to assure that sediment and any potential lime that may form will fall to the bottom away from the tube sheet.

e. The boiler(s) flue ways shall be of a vertical design that allows condensate to “wash down” the flue surface preventing potential combustion residue from adhering to the flue ways.

f. The boiler(s) shall be supplied with a gas valve designed with negative pressure regulation.

g. The gas valve on the boiler(s) shall operate with an inlet gas pressure of a minimum 4” w.c to a maximum of 14” w.c and shall be independent of the type of gas (natural or liquefied propane).

h. The burner shall be a premix combustion type system, made with a burner head constructed of stainless material and able to provide a wide range of modulating firing rates.

i. The boiler(s) shall be equipped with a variable speed blower system to precisely control the fuel/air mixture to provide modulating boiler firing rates for maximum efficiency.

j. The boiler(s) shall be constructed with a heavy gauge steel jacket assembly, primed and prepainted

k. The individual boiler control shall have an electronic display for boiler set-up, boiler status and boiler diagnostics.

2. Boiler Controls and Trim a. All electrical components shall be of the highest quality manufacture and bear a UL or

UL recognized label. b. Controller shall have an electronic display for boiler set-up, boiler status, and boiler

diagnostic. All components shall be easily accessed and serviceable from the front and top of the unit.

c. Supply voltage shall be 120 volt / 60 hertz / single phase on both sides. d. The boiler(s) shall be furnished with controls and boiler trim that provides:

1) High limit temperature control of 200°F 2) Operating temperature limit of 60°F to 194°F 3) Temperature/pressure gauge dial that is clearly marked and easy to read. 4) ASME certified pressure relief valve, set to relieve at 30 psig. 5) Flue gas, outlet water temperature and return water temperature sensors 6) Low water protection 7) Built-in freeze protection 8) Outdoor sensor to provide Outdoor Reset Control

e. Provide boiler control system that allows the factory boiler controls to stage and modulate up to 4 boilers. Provide the factory controller with a BMS interface and gateway to a BACnet MS/TP control system.

f. Boiler submittal to include factory boiler controller sequence of operations.



3. Venting and Combustion Air a. The boiler shall be installed and vented with manufacturer’s venting system as indicated

on the drawings.

C. Warranty 1. The boiler heat exchanger shall carry a ten (10) year limited warranty. 2. The parts used in the assembly of the boiler shall carry a one (1) year warranty.

D. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Aerco “Esteem”.

2.02 BOILER VALVES

A. General: Provide factory-fabricated boiler valves recommended by manufacturer for use in service indicated. Provide boiler valves of types and pressure ratings indicated for each service, or if not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide sizes as indicated, with connections which properly mate with pipe, tube, and equipment connections.

B. Stop and Check Valves: Construct body of bronze, ASTM A 126, Grade B, pressure rated for 250

PSI at 450F (232C) steam. Provide OS&Y construction, straight or angle pattern with flanged ends, and renewable bronze disc and seat ring.

C. Y-Type Blowdown Valves: Construct body of bronze, ASTM B 62, pressure rated for 150 PSI steam. Provide Y-type globe construction, bronze seat ring, renewable composition disc, screw-in bonnet, and threaded ends.

D. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Crane Co.; Valves and Fittings Div. 2. Fairbanks (The) Co. 3. Jenkins Bros. 4. Lunkenheimer (The) Co.; Div. of Conval Corp. 5. Powell (The Wm.) Co. 6. Walworth Co.

2.03 SAFETY AND RELIEF VALVES

A. Water Relief Valves: Provide water relief valves as indicated, of size and capacity as selected by Installer for proper relieving capacity, constructed in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: 1. Pressure Relief Valves: Construct of bronze body, metallic disc, metal seat, with

nonmechanically guided stem. Set valve to relieve at 10 PSI above operating pressure. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Amtrol, Inc. b. Bell & Gossett ITT. c. Spirax Sarco Co. d. Watts Regulator Co.

2.04 CONDENSING BOILER ACCESSORIES

A. Provide either JJM Boiler Works #JM Series or Axiom #NC-1 Condenser Neutralization Tube and Piping for condensing flues and combustion chambers. Pipe to nearest drain.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Examine areas and conditions under which boilers are to be installed, and substrate which will support boilers. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF BOILERS

A. General: Install boilers in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, in accordance with State and local code requirements, and in accordance with requirements of local Utility Company. Install units plumb and level, to tolerance of 1/8" in 10' - 0" in both directions. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances around and over boilers.

B. Support: Install boilers mounted on wall in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions and supplied wall mount kit.

C. Erection: Assemble boiler sections in proper sequence and with sealing between each section. Assemble boiler trim shipped loose, or unassembled for shipment purposes. Follow manufacturer's installation instructions.

D. Electrical Work: Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory-mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to Electrical Installer. 1. Verify that electrical work installation is in accordance with manufacturer's submittal and

installation requirements of Division 26 sections. Do not proceed with equipment start-up until electrical work is acceptable to equipment Installer.

E. Venting: Verify venting requirements for pressure regulating valves in factory installed or factory supplied valve trains. Extend atmospheric vent to outdoors, full size of vent outlet when equipment is controlled by spark ignition. When equipment has standing pilot, pipe regulator vent(s) to combustion chamber. Verify regulator venting requirements with local authority prior to installation.

3.03 BOILER START-UP AND TEST REQUIREMENTS

A. At a time requested by the Installing Contractor, the factory authorized boiler representative shall adjust and start boiler. Copies of the starting report shall be sent to the Architect/Engineer prior to final inspection and shall include the following information for each boiler: 1. Temperature and pressure settings of the boiler. 2. Heating system water pressures, cold and hot. 3. Gas pressure setting. 4. Gas volume being burned. 5. Percent CO(2) and CO.

B. A component and integrated check shall be made of all controls. Factory tests do not substitute for this test. A foreman or superintendent of the Installing Division 23 Contractor familiar with the system shall also be present and witness this test.

C. Thermal efficiency shall be 80% minimum with CO(2) at a 9% minimum. Presence of CO in flue gas or high stack temperature will require corrective action by the Contractor.

D. Contractor shall request and obtain inspection and written approval of the installation by the State Division of Labor prior to building occupancy.



3.04 CLOSE OUT PROCEDURES

A. Provide services of manufacturer’s technical representative for one 8-hour day to instruct owner’s personnel in operations and maintenance of the heat generation equipment.

END OF SECTION


DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS Florence Crittenton ROOFTOP UNITS OZ Architecture Project No. 113266.00 Section 23 73 00 - 1

SECTION 23 73 00

MECHANICAL ROOFTOP UNITS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following rooftop air conditioners: 1. Packaged rooftop units with gas fired furnace heating, DX cooling, and modulating power

exhaust.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical data for each model indicated, including rated capacities, dimensions, required clearances, characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For rooftop air conditioners to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1.04 WARRANTY

A. Warranty on Compressor and Heat Exchanger: Provide written warranty, signed by manufacturer, agreeing to replace/repair, within warranty period, compressors and/or heat exchangers with inadequate and defective materials and workmanship, including leakage, breakage, improper assembly, or failure to perform as required; provided manufacturer's instructions for handling, installing, protecting, and maintaining units have been adhered to during warranty period. Replacement shall be component replacement and labor for removal and reinstallation. 1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of substantial completion.

1.05 DATE OF SHIPMENT

A. Mechanical Contractor shall notify General Contractor and Owner of shipping date within two weeks of being awarded a contract. Rooftop Unit ship date shall not delay the final completion date.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PACKAGED ROOFTOP UNITS

A. Description: Factory assembled and tested; designed for exterior installation; consisting of compressor, indoor and outside refrigerant coils, indoor fan and outside coil fan, gas fired furnace heating, refrigeration and temperature controls, filters, and dampers.



B. Casing: Manufacturer's standard galvanized sheet metal construction with exterior enamel paint finish, hinged access doors with neoprene gaskets for inspection and access to internal parts, minimum 1-inch thick, 1-1/2 lb. thermal insulation, knockouts for electrical and piping connections, exterior condensate drain connection, and lifting lugs.

C. Indoor Fan: DWDI, forward curve, centrifugal, belt driven with adjustable motor sheaves, grease-lubricated ball bearings, and motor. Mount fan and motor assembly on base with spring isolators.

D. Exhaust Fan: Provide external power exhaust fan system as indicated on the drawings. Where an integral power exhaust/100% economizer option is not available, provide the rooftop unit with factory economizer and third-party power exhaust (basis of design). 1. System Description: The Power Exhaust/Modulating Power Exhaust Economizer is a self-

contained outdoor rooftop system which mounts directly to the return air compartment of the HVAC packaged equipment. This system shall be ETL Approved as per UL 1995 and include an economizer control system with options such as a factory programmed, fully programmable variable frequency drive package controlled by a differential pressure transmitter. This system shall be designed to be either constant volume or with the variable frequency drive package continuously maintain space pressure. Both systems shall be capable of introducing and exhausting up to 100% of the system requirements.

2. General: Factory assembled, single piece construction and installation. Contained within the power exhaust enclosure shall be an economizer control system, optional variable frequency drive and pressure transmitter, fans, motors, contactors, transformers, complete factory wiring and any other special features required prior to start-up. a. Unit Cabinet:

1) The power exhaust cabinet shall be constructed of heavy gauge galvanized steel and include a color coordinated paint finish by architect to match rooftop unit color.

2) A mechanical fastener(s) shall be provided on the power exhaust cabinet door(s) to meet ETL safety requirements.

3) Control access panel shall be mechanically fastened to meet ETL safety requirements.

4) Cabinet insulation shall be 1" 1 ½# density. b. Dampers:

1) Damper frames shall be constructed of 18 gauge galvanized steel. 2) Damper blades shall be parallel type and constructed of 18 gauge galvanized

steel. 3) Outdoor air intake dampers shall be low leak not to exceed 3% at 1-in. wg

pressure differential and include stainless steel side seal and neoprene edge seal. c. Fans:

1) Exhaust blowers shall be of the direct or belt driven, double inlet, forward-curved centrifugal type and be dynamically balanced. Belt drive systems shall include an adjustable pitch motor pulley.

2) Bearings shall be of the sealed, permanently lubricated, ball bearing type for longer life and lower maintenance.

3) Fan outlets shall include a gravity type backdraft damper. d. Motors and VFD’s:

1) Exhaust blower motor shall have permanently lubricated ball bearings and inherent automatic-reset thermal overload protection.

2) Each fan motor shall be equipped with a fully programmable factory programmed variable frequency drive (VFD) package.

e. Controls: 1) A Belimo damper actuator shall be factory provided. The damper shall be spring

return with an operating range of 0 to 10 VDC or 4 to 20 mA. 2) All other controls and interface shall be provided and installed by the controls

contractor. f. Electrical Requirements:

1) The Power Exhaust/Modulating Power Exhaust Economizer shall be complete with a single point electrical connection independent of the HVAC equipment.



E. Condenser Coil Fan: Propeller type, directly driven by permanently lubricated motor.

F. Refrigerant Coils: Aluminum-plate fin and seamless copper tube in galvanized-steel casing with equalizing-type vertical distributor and thermal expansion valve; tested to 450 psig and leak tested to 300 psig with air under water. Insulate coil section. Provide stainless-steel drain pan under indoor coil.

G. Heat Exchangers: Provide manufacturer's standard construction for gas-fired heat exchangers and burners. 1. Controls: Provide the following controls:

a. Redundant gas valve. b. Intermittent pilot ignition. c. Electronic spark ignition system. d. High limit cutout. e. Forced draft proving switch.

H. Compressor(s): Semi-hermetic compressors with integral vibration isolators, internal overcurrent and overtemperature protection, internal pressure relief.

I. Refrigeration System: 1. Compressor(s). 2. Outside coil and fan. 3. Indoor coil and fan. 4. Suction line accumulator. 5. Check valves. 6. Expansion valves with replaceable thermostatic elements. 7. Refrigerant dryers. 8. High-pressure switches. 9. Low-pressure switches. 10. Thermostats for coil freeze-up protection during low-ambient temperature operation or loss

of air. 11. Independent refrigerant circuits. (If applicable.) 12. Brass service valves installed in discharge and liquid lines. 13. Charge of refrigerant. 14. Timed Off Control: Automatic-reset control shuts compressor off after five minutes. 15. Refrigerant Circuits: Interlaced refrigerant-coil circuiting with circuit for each compressor. 16. Capacity Control: Cylinder unloaders with steps as scheduled. 17. Capacity Control: Hot-gas bypass valve and piping on lead refrigerant circuit. 18. Compressor Motor Overload Protection: Manual reset. 19. Antirecycling Timing Device: Prevents compressor restart for five minutes after shutdown. 20. Oil pressure switch: Designed to shut down compressors on low oil pressure.

J. Filters: 2-inch thick, throwaway filters in filter rack; 30 percent average arrestance.

K. Power Connection: Provide for single connection of power to unit with unit-mounted disconnect switch accessible from outside unit and control-circuit transformer with built-in circuit breaker. 1. Provide with integral fused disconnect or circuit breaker.

L. Unit Controls: Solid-state control board and components contain at least the following features: 1. Indoor fan on/off delay. 2. Default control to ensure proper operation after power interruption. 3. Service relay output. 4. Unit diagnostics and diagnostic code storage. 5. Minimum run time. 6. Low-refrigerant pressure control. 7. Refer to Section 23 09 23 and control drawing for the minimum points required by the DDC

control.



M. All facility provided controls shall be approved by the temperature controls contractor prior to release of equipment.

N. Optional Accessories: 1. Service Outlets: Two, 115-V, ground-fault, circuit-interrupter type. 2. Dirty-filter switch. 3. Steel hail guards, on condenser coils.

O. Roof Curb: Steel with corrosion-protection coating, gasketing, and factory-installed wood nailer; complying with NRCA standards; minimum height of 14 inches. Provide curb with minimum of 2” of rigid internal insulation with a minimum rating of R-8.7.

P. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Daikin McQuay. 2. Aaon. 3. Engineered Aire. 4. Trane.

2.02 PACKAGED MAKE-UP AIR UNITS

A. Manufactured Units: 1. Unit shall be fully assembled at the factory and consist of an insulated metal cabinet,

downturn outdoor air intake with metal mesh filter assembly, evaporator coil, condensate drain pan, P trap, indirect gas furnace, packaged DX system, motorized dampers, filter assembly for intake air, supply air blower assembly and an electrical control center. All specified components and internal accessories factory installed are tested and prepared for single-point high voltage connection except with electric post heat which has dual point power.

B. Cabinet: 1. Materials: Formed, double wall insulated metal cabinet, fabricated to permit access to

internal components for maintenance. a. Outside casing: 18 gauge, galvanized (G90) steel meeting ASTM A653 for components

that do not receive a painted finish. Components that receive a painted finish per A/E specification shall be of 18 gauge type A60 galvaneal steel and shall be painted with a baked industrial enamel finish. Components that receive a painted finish per A/E specification shall be painted with a polyester urethane powder coat.

b. Internal assemblies: 24 gauge, galvanized (G90) steel] except for motor supports which shall be minimum14 gauge galvanized (G90) steel.

2. Cabinet Insulation: Comply with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B and erosion requirements of UL 181. a. Materials: Fiberglass insulation. If insulation other than fiberglass is used, it must

also meet the Fire Hazard Classification shown below. 1) Thickness: 2 inch (50 mm) 2) Fire Hazard Classification: Maximum flame spread of 25 and smoke developed of

50, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 411. 3. Access panels / doors: Unit shall be equipped with insulated, hinged doors or removable

access panels to provide easy access to all major components. Doors and access panels shall be fabricated of 18 gauge galvanized G90 steel or painted galvannealed steel.

4. Supply Air blower assemblies: Blower assembly shall consist of an electric motor and a direct-drive or belt drive fan. Assembly shall be mounted on heavy gauge galvanized steel rails and further mounted on 1.125 inch thick neoprene vibration isolators.

5. Evaporator Coil: Evaporator coil shall be AHRI Certified and shall be (silver) soldered or brazed into the compressed refrigerant system. Coil shall be constructed of copper tubing, permanently bonded to aluminum fins and enclosed in a galvanized steel frame. If two compressors are used as components of the unit, then the evaporator coil shall be of



“interlaced” configuration, permitting independent operation of either compressor without conflict with the other compressor.

6. Control panel / connections: Unit shall have an electrical control center where all high and low voltage connections are made. Control center shall be constructed to permit single-point high voltage power supply connections.

7. Condensate drain pan: Drain Pan shall be formed of welded austenitic stainless steel sheet material and provided with a welded stainless steel drain connection at the front for connection to a P trap. Drain pan shall be sloped in two directions to provide positive draining and drain connector shall be sealed at penetration through cabinet wall.

8. P trap: If the unit is equipped with a condensate drain pan, contractor shall provide, or fabricate, and install an appropriate P trap, in accordance with all local and area codes and Best Practices.

9. Indirect gas furnace: a. Shall be ETL Certified as a component of the unit. b. Shall have an integral combustion gas blower. c. Shall be ETL Certified for installation downstream of a cooling coil. d. Shall have fault sensors to provide fault conditions to optional digital controller or

building controls. e. Shall have heat exchangers, constructed of stainless steel. f. Heat exchanger shall have a 5 year extended warranty. g. Furnace control shall be 4:1 Modulating. h. Shall be encased in a weather-tight metal housing with intake air vents. Large, metal

lift-off door shall provide easy access to the enclosed vest plate, control circuitry, gas train, burner assembly and exhaust blower.

i. Shall have solid state controls permitting stand-alone operation or control by building controllers.

10. Packaged DX System: unit shall have an integral compressor(s) and evaporator coil located within the weather-tight unit housing. Condenser coils and appurtenant condenser fan assemblies shall be factory installed as integral subassemblies of the unit and mounted on the exterior of the unit. Condenser fan motors shall be three phase, type 56 frame, Open Air Over and Shaft Up. Each condenser fan motor shall have a vented frame, rated for continuous duty and be equipped with an automatic reset thermal protector. Motors shall be UL Recognized and CSA Certified. The refrigerant compressor(s) shall be hermetic scroll-type and shall be equipped with liquid line filter drier, thermostatic expansion valves (TXV)(s), manual reset high pressure and low pressure cutouts and all appurtenant sensors, service ports and safety devices. Compressed refrigerant system shall be fully charged with R-410A refrigerant. Each compressor shall be factory-equipped with an electric crankcase heater to boil off liquid refrigerant from the oil. Hot gas bypass shall be provided on the lead circuit to prevent icing of the evaporator coil under low load conditions, unless provided with digital scroll compressors.

11. Motorized dampers / Intake Air: Motorized damper of low leakage type shall be factory installed.

12. Curb Assembly: A curb assembly made of 14 gauge galvanized steel shall be provided by the factory for assembly and installation as part of this division. The curb assembly shall provide perimeter support of the entire unit and shall have duct adapter(s) for supply air [and return air]. Curb assembly shall enclose the underside of the unit and shall be sized to fit into a recess in the bottom of the unit. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating with roofing contractor to ensure curb unit is properly flashed to provide protection against weather/moisture penetration. Contractor shall provide and install appropriate insulation for the curb assembly. The curb shall be the height of (X)].

13. Service receptacle: 120 VAC GFCI service outlet shall be factory-provided and installed by this contractor in a location designated by the A/E.

14. Hail guards: Protects the condensing unit from damage due to extreme weather conditions such as hail and flying debris.

15. Lights: Provide service lights mounted in the unit to be used during times of routine maintenance. The lights must be wired by others on the jobsite, as they will not be wired through the unit control center.



C. Blower: 1. Blower section construction: Motor and blower shall be assembled on a 14 gauge galvanized

steel platform and shall be equipped with 1.125 inch thick neoprene vibration isolation devices.

2. Blower assemblies: Shall be statically and dynamically balanced and designed for continuous operation at maximum rated fan speed and horsepower.

3. Fan: statically and dynamically balanced, AMCA certified for air and sound performance, mounted on ground and polished steel fan shafts with ball bearing pillow blocks. Bearings shall be selected for a minimum L10 life in excess of 50,000 hours at maximum catalogued speeds.

4. Blower section motor source quality control: Blower performance shall be factory tested for flow rate, pressure, power, air density, rotation speed and efficiency.

5. Provide supply fan with variable frequency drive for VAV operation.

D. Motors: 1. General: Motors shall be heavy-duty, permanently lubricated type to match the fan load and

furnished at the specified voltage, phase and enclosure. Drives shall be sized for a minimum of 150% of driven horsepower and pulleys shall be fully machined cast-type, keyed and fully secured to the fan wheel and motor shafts. Electric motors of ten horsepower or less shall be supplied with an adjustable drive pulley.

2. Motors shall be of voltage as specified on the mechanical schedules. 3. Provide with integral fused disconnect or circuit breaker.

E. Unit Controls: 1. The unit shall be constructed so that it can function as a stand-alone heating and cooling

system controlled by factory-supplied controllers, thermostats and sensors or it can be operated as a heating and cooling system controlled by a Building Management System (BMS). This unit shall be controlled by a factory-installed microprocessor programmable controller (DDC) that is connected to various optional sensors.

2. Unit shall incorporate a DDC controller with integral LCD screen that provides text readouts of status. DDC controller shall have a built-in keypad to permit operator to access read-out screens without the use of ancillary equipment, devices or software. DDC controllers that require the use of equipment or software that is not factory-installed in the unit are not acceptable. Alarm readouts consisting of flashing light codes are not acceptable.

3. Outside Air damper control shall be field adjustable two-position. 4. Dirty filter sensor shall be factory-installed. 5. Operating protocol: The DDC shall be factory-programmed for BACnet. Coordinate with the

Temperature Controls contractor.

F. Filters: 1. MERV 8 disposable pleated filters shall be provided in the supply air stream.

G. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Daikin/McQuay Rebel. 2. Aaon. 3. Greenheck RV.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION OF ROOFTOP AND MAKE UP AIR UNITS

A. General: Install rooftop units in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations indicated, and maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances.



B. Support: Install units on roof curb, in accordance with National Roofing Contractor's Association (NRCA) installation recommendations.

C. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory-mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to Electrical Installer. 1. Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's submittal and

installation requirements of Division-26 sections. Do not proceed with equipment start-up until wiring installation is acceptable to equipment Installer.

D. Start-up rooftop units, in accordance with manufacturer's start-up instructions. Test controls and demonstrate compliance with requirements. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment.

E. Grounding: 1. Provide positive equipment ground for rooftop unit components.

3.02 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Duct installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts. The following are specific connection requirements: 1. Install ducts to termination in a rooftop unit. 2. Install heating water piping to preheat coil in unit. 3. Remove roof decking only as required for passage of ducts. Do not cut out decking under

entire roof curb. Duct penetration through opening in existing roof decking shall be resiliently sealed to mitigate transfer of noise.

4. Connect supply ducts to rooftop unit with flexible duct connectors as specified in Division 23 Section "Duct Accessories."

5. Terminate return-air duct through roof structure and insulate space between roof and bottom of unit with 2-inch thick, acoustic duct liner.

C. Electrical System Connections: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 16 Sections for power wiring, switches, and motor controls.

D. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding."

E. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

END OF SECTION

100% Construction Documents

June 25, 2014

DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS

Florence Crittenton COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

MEP Engineering Project No. 13464 26 05 00 - 1

SECTION 26 01 00

BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. The General Conditions of the Contract, Supplementary Conditions of the General Contract,

and requirements of other Divisions apply to work under this Division.

B. Provide labor, materials, temporary facilities, equipment and services to install electrical

systems as indicated or required, which includes but is not limited to, masonry, excavation and

backfill, concrete, carpentry, painting, conduit sleeves and supports, anchors, vibration and

sound isolation, access doors, cutting and patching, and similar work.

C. Provide temporary electricity for electrical work and the work of other trades.

D. Limit pricing of labor to NECA 1 unless otherwise noted.


A. The manufacturer's material or equipment listed first in the Specifications or on the Drawings

are types to be provided for establishment of size, capacity, grade and quality.

B. Additional manufacturer’s materials or equipment listed are considered to be "other acceptable"

manufacturers and the cost of changes in construction required by their use shall be borne by

this Contractor.

C. Review of Submittals for equipment supplied is mandatory as a condition of acceptance of

work. Installation of equipment prior to review shall be at Contractor's risk.

1.03 INTENT AND INTERPRETATIONS

A. It is the intent of these Drawings and Specifications to result in a complete electrical installation

in complete accordance with applicable codes and ordinances.

B. Neither the professional activities of the Engineer nor the presence of the Engineer or its

employees and subconsultants at a construction/project site shall relieve the Contractor of its

obligations, duties, and responsibilities including, but not limited to, construction means,

methods, sequence, techniques, or procedures necessary for performing, superintending, and

coordinating the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

C. Drawings are diagrammatic in character and do not necessarily indicate every required junction

box, pull box, ell, etc. Items not specifically mentioned in the specification or noted on the

Drawings, but which are obviously necessary to make a complete working installation, shall be

included.

D. Drawings and Specifications are complementary. Whatever is called for in either is binding as

though called for in both. The more stringent requirements shall govern.

E. Drawings shall not be scaled for rough-in measurements or used as submittals. Where

drawings are required for these purposes or have to be made from field measurements, take


June 25, 2014




the necessary measurements and prepare the drawings.

F. Symbols used on the Drawings are defined in the Electrical Legend on the Drawings. Symbols

indicated on the Legend may not necessarily be required for the Project.

G. Prior to ordering equipment, determine that equipment shall adequately pass through building

openings and passage ways providing unobstructed access to final equipment location.

Equipment shall be manufactured and shipped in sections for assembly in final equipment

location when inadequate building openings and passage ways limit access. Submittals shall

indicate sectionalized manufacture of equipment.

H. Before ordering equipment and before work is installed, determine that equipment shall properly

fit the space; that required clearances can be maintained and that electrical equipment can be

located without interferences between systems, with structural elements or with the work of

other trades.

I. If conflicts are discovered in Contract Documents as work progresses, a set of prints marked

with red pencil showing recommended modifications shall be submitted to the Architect for

approval prior to installation.

J. The Drawings indicate the general arrangement of circuits and outlets, locations of switches,

panelboards and other work. However, rearrangement and re-circuiting shall not be permitted

without specific acceptance.

K. Incidental equipment such as tools, scaffolding, consumable items, testing equipment,

appliances and the like shall be provided whether listed or not. Labor, fees, licenses, start-up

and checkout services shall also be provided.

L. The terms "the Contractor" or "this Contractor" when used in this Division of specifications, shall

be construed to mean Contractor for electrical work.

M. Instructions such as "provide the outlets..." shall mean the same as though the words "This

Contractor shall" preceded each instruction. "Provide" shall mean "furnish and install." Where

the words "accepted" or "acceptable" are used, such "accepted" or "acceptable" action by the

Architect denotes that the work or equipment item is in conformance with the design concept of

the Project and, in general, complies with the pertinent information given in the Contract

Documents.

N. In the event that discrepancies exist or required items or details have been omitted, notify the

Architect in writing of such discrepancy or omission at least five days prior to bid date. Failure

to do so shall be construed as willingness to supply necessary materials and labor required for

the proper completion of this work. For discrepancies which are not reported by Contractor the

most stringent requirement shall apply.

O. In the event that additional information is required during construction, request such information

from the Architect in writing prior to performing related work. The request for information shall

include an explanation of the information required including references to related portions of the

Documents and Contractor’s recommendations.

1.04 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Examine the premises and become familiar with existing conditions prior to bidding. No

allowance shall subsequently be made for not following this procedure.


June 25, 2014




B. Protect work, materials, and equipment against theft, injury, or damage until it has been

installed, tested, and accepted.

C. Be responsible for damage to the property of the Owner or to the work of other trades due to

the electrical work during the construction and warranty period.

D. Ascertain the scope of other trades' responsibilities and determine if the installation of proposed

equipment shall affect the operation or code compliance of existing equipment. Relocate,

modify or otherwise revise existing equipment as required to maintain operational integrity and

code compliance.

E. Be responsible for the safety of the workers and others on the construction site.


A. Errors and omissions in the Contract Documents do not relieve the Contractor from providing

the work in accordance with regulatory requirements.

B. Execute and inspect work in accordance with Underwriters, local and state codes, rules and

regulations applicable to the trade affected as a minimum, but if the plans or specifications call

for requirements that exceed these rules and regulations, the greater requirement shall be

followed. Follow requirements of NFPA, NEC, OSHA, NEMA, ANSI, UL, EIA/TIA, and

applicable state, local or federal specifications.

C. Comply with standards in effect at the date of these Contract Documents, except where a

standard or specific date or edition is indicated.

D. Conform to guidelines and requirements of local utility companies.

E. The Owner’s Technical Guides shall be considered part of these Construction Documents.

Contact owner for details regarding the acquisition of these Owner Technical Guides.

1.06 PERMITS AND FEES

A. Obtain permits required for the electrical work on this Project.

B. Pay fees, including service installation and connection charges, and permit fees.

C. No work shall be started prior to obtaining necessary permits and payment of required fees.

Work installed prior to obtaining proper permits shall, if required by permitting authority, be

redone in compliance with requirements.

D. Notations made on permit or review documents shall be observed. Additional requirements

noted by jurisdictional authority shall be made part of the requirements for construction of the

Project. Additional costs for implementing jurisdictional authority's requirements, if any, shall be

submitted to the Architect prior to construction for review.

1.07 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Material and equipment used in bids shall be as specified. Proposed substitutions shall be

reviewed after award of contract during submittal review. Proposed substitutes shall be clearly

labeled as a substitute. Submittals shall include data necessary for complete evaluation of the

proposed substitution. Substitution materials and equipment used in bids shall be at

Contractor's risk, and as such are subject to rejection during submittal review. The Contractor

shall be responsible for fees for re-design incurred by the Engineer resulting from the use of


June 25, 2014




substitution materials. Such extra fees shall be deducted from payment to the Contractor.

B. Where "other acceptable" manufacturers are named, their products may be used provided they

totally meet the Specifications and are dimensionally suitable and operationally identical to the

specified item. The decision as to whether or not such items are equal to the specified items

shall be made by the Architect during submittal review.

1.08 SUBMITTALS

A. The purpose of Submittals is to ensure that Contractor understands design requirements and

demonstrates understanding by indicating and detailing intended materials, methods, and

proper installation practices. If discrepancies between Submittals and Contract Documents are

discovered either prior to or after Submittals are reviewed, requirements of Contract Documents

shall take precedence. Submittals which are submitted, but which are not required by Contract

Documents, shall be returned Not Reviewed.

B. Review of Submittals and action recommended as result of review is a courtesy extended to

Contractor by Engineer. This review is intended to minimize delivery to job site and installation

of materials and equipment that do not meet intent of Construction Documents. Submission of

material for review does not alter Contractor's obligation to follow intent of Construction

Documents, nor Contractor's responsibility to comply therewith regardless of action noted in

Engineers review.

C. Submit a schedule indicating items to be submitted with respective dates prior to submittals.

Submittals shall be submitted to allow the Engineer's possession of such for a minimum of two

week(s).

D. Product data submittals shall include catalog cut-sheets, manufacturer's data sheets, written

descriptions, specification sheets detailing the associated product, item, assembly and

installation. Highlight characteristics and features within product data submittals with a yellow

highlighting marker to identify compliance with the Drawings and Specifications. Indicate

characteristics and features which are missing or vary from the Drawings and Specifications.

E. Submittals include details, installation drawings, assembly drawings, fabrication drawings,

diagrams, etc., which show adaptation or installation of Contractor-furnished products or

materials for overall Project. Electronic files, if required for preparation of Submittals, shall be

compatible with software and software version as decided by Architect at time of Submittal

production. Electronic files if required for preparation of Submittal may be obtained from

Architect, at which time an indemnification form releasing the Architect and Engineer from

liability for the Contractor’s record drawing changes on such files shall be executed. Include the

following:

1. Legend: Match Contract Documents.

2. Format: Sheet size to match Contract Documents with title block indicating Project

name, manufacturer's name and logo, date of submittal, content of sheet, and sheet

number.

3. Wiring and Control Diagrams: System and equipment wiring diagrams and control

diagrams include multiple floor and building separation lines, sizes of conduits, size and

number of conductors in each conduit, wiring color code, and identification of terminals

and interconnections. Differentiate clearly between factory and field installed wiring.

Make diagrams specific to this Project.

4. Floor Plans: Plan titles, scales, north arrows, column lines, and room names and

numbers shall match Contract Documents.


June 25, 2014




F. Submit samples of equipment as indicated or requested.

G. Prior to ordering equipment or beginning installation work, assemble, prepare, and submit shop

drawings required for Project. Submit Submittals as required by individual Sections of

Specifications. As a minimum, provide product data submittals for equipment indicated on the

Drawings whether mentioned in these Specifications or not.

H. Contractor shall thoroughly check Subcontractors' or vendors' Submittals and, after approving

Submittals, provide Submittals for review. Partial or incomplete submittals will not be reviewed

by the Architect and will be returned Not Reviewed. Submittals that do not bear Contractor's

review stamp shall be returned Not Reviewed.

I. Each set of Submittals submitted or re-submitted shall bear a unique Contractor's submittal

number. Submit a minimum of seven copies, two of which will be retained by the Engineer.

After review, Submittals shall be returned together with Submittal Review Sheet which indicates

comments on Submittals with specific actions such as: No Exception Taken; Make Corrections

Noted, Re-submittal Not Required; Make Corrections Noted, Re-submittal Required; Rejected;

Not Reviewed. Continue to re-submit Submittals until No Exception Taken or Make Corrections

Noted, Re-submittal Not Required action is indicated. Provide a copy of the original submittal

review comments for re-submitted items.

J. The Contractor shall be responsible for extra fees incurred by the Engineer resulting from

subsequent review(s) of submittals which fail to meet the requirements herein. Such extra fees

shall be deducted from payment to the Contractor.

1.09 RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Keep in custody during entire period of construction, a current set of documents indicating

changes that have been made to the Contract Documents. Changes to be noted on the

documents shall include but shall not be limited to, panelboard, luminaire, equipment, and other

schedules; circuiting; equipment, luminaires, or conduit located more that 2 feet (0.61 meters)

from where shown on Drawings; electrical equipment ratings; modifications to Specifications.

Incorporate Addenda, accepted Alternates, Change Orders, and other Document revisions

which occurred after the award of the General Contract or the start of construction activities into

the Record Documents. Notations and changes shall be done in a neat and legible manner in

accordance with Architect's instructions. Changes shall be noted in red, deletions in green, and

notes in blue.

B. At the completion of the Project, mark equipment designations on the documents.

Designations shall match the engraving on the tags installed as called for elsewhere in these

specifications.

C. Upon completion of work, submit the complete set of Record Documents to the Architect. The

Contract Documents set the standard for content and methods of presentation for the changes

shown.

D. The Contract shall not be considered completed until these Record Documents have been

reviewed and accepted by the Architect.

1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING OF MATERIALS

A. Make provisions for receiving and storing materials, including Owner furnished materials to be

installed under this Division. Carefully mark and store materials. Carefully check and inspect

materials furnished for installation, and furnish a receipt acknowledging acceptance of delivery


June 25, 2014




and condition of the materials received. Do not use received materials which contain cracks,

dents, abrasions, or other defects. Mark such materials rejected and remove from site or return

to supplier for replacement.

B. Protect materials and equipment from physical damage, construction dirt, and the elements

from the time they are delivered until final acceptance. The Contractor installing the equipment

or materials shall be responsible for their protection.

1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials, packaged with protective covering for storage, and identified with labels

describing contents. Deliver extra materials to the Owner.

1.12 COORDINATION

A. Schedule work to coordinate with that of other trades to minimize delays.

B. Coordinate service installations requirements with the local serving utility companies.

C. Coordinate with Owner and utility companies outages due to interfacing electrical equipment.

Outages must be scheduled at least five days in advance and shall be at a time and duration

acceptable to the Owner. Outages at a time other than normal working hours, shall not entitle

the Contractor to additional overtime or compensation beyond that in the bid.

D. Locations of devices, outlets, etc., as shown on the Drawings are approximate unless

dimensioned or otherwise noted. Where locations of devices, outlets, etc., are dimensioned or

noted on the Drawings, verify location with Architect's representative or with equipment to be

supplied. Exact locations of devices, outlets, etc., shall be coordinated with field conditions.

Ensure that switches or other electrical devices are mounted such that they are not "trapped"

behind opened doors or otherwise rendered inaccessible, regardless of locations indicated on

Drawings.

E. Where locations of devices and equipment are not specifically mentioned in the specifications

or indicated on the Drawings, verify locations with Architect or Owner prior to rough-in.

F. Prior to rough-in for service to equipment furnished or provided by others, coordinate with other

trades and Owner to verify rough-in locations, connection requirements, electrical service to

equipment size and characteristics, and obtain a schedule of equipment electrical loads.

Schedules shall be for verifying electrical services, controls, disconnects, fuses, and overload

protection. Coordinate with Architect, authority having jurisdiction, and other appropriate

Divisions as needed.

G. Verify the physical dimensions of each item of electrical equipment to fit the available space and

promptly notify the Architect prior to roughing-in if conflicts appear. Be responsible for

coordination of equipment to the available space and to the access routes through the

construction. Confer and cooperate with other trades and coordinate the work in proper relation

with theirs. Coordinate ceiling cavity space carefully with other trades.

H. Refer to Section 15010 and the Mechanical and Electrical Coordination Schedule for

coordination of electrical and mechanical work.

1.13 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Make up the operating and maintenance manuals as specified and submit no later than 2


June 25, 2014




weeks prior to the completion of the Project.

B. Information contained in the operating and maintenance manuals consist of submittal materials

reflecting equipment as supplied and installed, test reports, warranties, description of required

testing and testing methods, description of routine maintenance, cleaning, adjustments, and

service required, suggested frequency of testing and maintenance, and recommended

replacement parts with a list of names, addresses, and telephone numbers of service

organizations that carry stock of such replacement parts. Manuals shall be 8-1/2 inch x 11 inch

(21.59 cm x 27.94 cm) in size. Catalog pages and data in manuals shall be neat, clean copies.

Larger drawings shall be accordion folded to above size. An index shall be provided which

shall list contents in an orderly manner. Each copy of the operating and maintenance manual

shall be bound in hard back or loose-leaf binder with hard cover, shall be adequately labeled for

identification, and shall include plastic tabs coordinated with Index. Provide a separate tabbed

section, with a list of testing required to maintain warranty for products and systems provided as

part of this project.

C. Submit one copy of the manual to the Architect for review prior to preparation of final copies.

After review, make changes as noted and prepare 3 final copies of manual to be turned over to

the Owner.

D. This contract shall not be considered completed nor shall final payment be made until specified

material, including test reports and warranties are received in this operating and maintenance

manual and the manual is approved by the Architect.

1.14 ABBREVIATIONS

A. These specifications include conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of

certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are

as follows:

1. Abbreviated Language: Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate.

Words implied, but not stated, shall be interpreted as the sense requires. Singular

words shall be interpreted as plural and plural words interpreted as singular where

applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates.

2. Abbreviations and Names: Trade association names and titles of general standards are

frequently abbreviated. Where abbreviations and acronyms are used, they mean the

recognized name of the trade association, standards-generating organization,

authorities having jurisdiction, or other entity applicable to the context of the text

provision.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 STANDARDS

A. Unless otherwise specified, materials and equipment shall be of domestic (USA) manufacture.

B. Unless otherwise specified, materials and equipment shall be the manufacturer's current model

and bear manufacturer's name and model number.

C. All electrical equipment shall be listed and labeled with the Underwriters Laboratory tag or other

listing as approved by the local jurisdictional authority. Custom designed items shall be

fabricated of UL approved materials and UL listed as a complete assembly as required.


June 25, 2014




D. Throughout Specifications, various materials, equipment, apparatus, etc., are specified by

manufacturer, brand name, type or catalog number. Such designations are to establish

standards of desired quality and construction and shall be the basis of the bid. Substitutions

shall be allowed only as specified herein.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Workmanship shall be first quality throughout and shall be in complete accordance with the

applicable codes. The appearance of the work shall be of equal importance to its operation.

Lack of quality workmanship shall be considered sufficient reason for rejection of a system in

part or in whole.

B. All ground- or floor-mounted electrical distribution equipment, including switchboards,

distribution panels, motor control centers, transfer switches, generators, and transformers, shall

be installed and firmly anchored to a 4 inch high (10.16 cm) concrete housekeeping pad. Pad

shall extend no more than 2 inches beyond the equipment footprint.

3.02 SUPERVISION

A. Supervise work so it shall proceed in proper sequence without delay to other trades. The

superintendent shall be on the Project site for the duration of the Project to ensure that Contract

Documents are being followed. A ratio of not less than 1:1 shall be maintained between

journeymen and apprentices.

B. Submit resume of qualifications and experience of the superintendent for review by the

Architect. Superintendent shall have as a minimum five years of continuous experience on

projects of similar size. Resume shall include a listing of experience, projects, and references.

Superintendent for this Project may not be changed without approval.

C. The Architect may have an observer on the site whose interpretations of the Contract

Documents shall be followed.

3.03 HOUSEKEEPING

A. At the conclusion of each day's work, remove empty boxes, crates and rubbish and leave the

area where the work has been done broom clean.

3.04 DEMOLITION

A. Provide labor, materials, equipment, and services for existing electrical equipment which is to

be removed, abandoned, or relocated.

B. Comply with State and Federal regulations for the removal, hauling and disposal of materials.

C. Verify that feeders and branch circuits have been disconnected and safely capped from

equipment to be relocated, demolished or removed.

D. Remove existing electrical equipment as noted on the drawings or as otherwise required.

E. Remove electrical equipment to be relocated and ensure that such equipment is in acceptable

condition for reuse. These items shall be tagged, protected from damage, and stored as


June 25, 2014




directed by the Architect. A list of items stored shall be turned over to the Architect.

F. At the completion of remodel work or when directed by the Architect, stored items not reused or

retained by the Owner shall be removed from the premises. Disposition of items not reused

shall be by the direction of the Architect.

G. Lamps, ballasts, and other electrical equipment which contain hazardous materials shall be

properly removed and disposed. Pay fees for disposal.

H. Report the existence of hazardous materials unrelated to electrical equipment to the Architect

immediately.

I. The locations of existing equipment, circuiting, etc. shown on the drawings have been taken

from existing drawings and obtained from field surveys and are, therefore, only as accurate as

that information. Existing conditions shall be field verified with necessary adjustment being

made to the drawing information.

J. Where core drilling or concrete demolition is required as work of this trade or other trades,

determine the location of existing encased or buried conduits and circuits in the area of the

work using metal detectors, circuit tracers and judgment prior to commencement of drilling or

demolition. Turn off all circuits which might feed through conduits and wiring in the area of the

work.

K. Where items are indicated on the drawings to be removed, removal of the item shall include

removal of power circuits, control circuits, overcurrent devices, grounding, accessory devices,

raceway and hardware unless noted otherwise.

L. Ensure that the continuity of feed through circuits is maintained.

M. Ensure that no electrical boxes or equipment other than conduit and connectors are rendered

inaccessible by proposed construction. Relocate such equipment as required.

N. Tag circuits remaining in junction boxes with Brady wire markers as to circuit number, panel, or

device feeder.

O. Leave sufficient slack wire in junction boxes for future reconnection where required.

P. Where circuits to be removed are exposed during construction, completely remove wire,

conduit, and supports as required. Where circuits to be removed are concealed or embedded

in concrete, remove wiring back to junction point.

Q. Abandoned conduit, left in place, shall have pull tape installed and shall be labeled at each end

identifying origin, destination and abandonment. Labels shall be semi-permanent.

R. Where circuits which are not in conduit or raceway exist in future air plenum areas, verify that

insulation is properly rated for plenum application. Where such non-rated circuits exist, notify

the Architect immediately for instructions.

S. Remove abandoned conduit, wire and electrical equipment from crawl spaces and attics as

shown on drawings.

T. Removal and relocation of electrical equipment shall include patching and painting as required

to refinish building surfaces. Coordinate patching and repainting with Architect.


June 25, 2014




U. The record drawings shall reflect any existing electrical locations different from what is shown

on the drawings.

3.05 EQUIPMENT MODIFICATION

A. Where existing equipment is to be modified, furnish materials and labor necessary to modify or

add to the equipment. Modifications shall be done neatly with factory parts and assemblies

approved for the application. Provide equipment supplier with information of existing

equipment, including serial number, date of manufacture, and special requirements.

Modification shall in no way jeopardize the compliance of existing equipment with governing

codes, underwriters listings or other regulations.

B. Field verify existing equipment with submittals to ensure modifications are workable. Report to

the Architect discrepancies between designed requirements and existing conditions.

C. Modifications that are not factory approved shall be submitted to the Architect for review prior to

modification.

D. All new and modified electrical equipment, such as switchboards, panelboards, industrial

control panels, meter socket enclosures, and motor control centers, that are in other than

dwelling occupancies, and are likely to require examination, adjustment, servicing, or

maintenance while energized shall be field marked to warn qualified persons of potential

electric arc flash hazards. The marking shall be located so as to be clearly visible to qualified

persons before examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance of the equipment per

NEC 2008, article 110.16.

3.06 EXISTING EQUIPMENT

A. Existing equipment that is removed and is to be reused shall be cleaned and serviced before

being reinstalled.

B. Existing luminaires that are to be removed and are to be reused shall be cleaned and relamped

prior to reinstallation.

C. Revised distribution equipment shall have new identification plates indicating new conditions.

D. Panelboards which have circuits affected by work shall be completely circuit traced and the

panelboard directories updated with the room and load served (i.e., RCPT-B250 through B260,

LTG-A65-A75, COFFEE-C180, RCPT-ROOF, etc.).

E. Revised panelboard schedules shall be neatly typed on new cards and installed in each revised

panelboard.

F. Where remodeling interferes with existing circuits and equipment which is not to be removed,

such circuits and equipment shall be reworked and relocated as required to complete the

Project. Circuit integrity of equipment in adjacent areas shall be left intact.

3.07 CUTTING, PATCHING, OPENINGS, SLEEVES, INSERTS AND HANGERS

A. Furnish and install sleeves and boxes required for openings in the structure for installation of

electrical work. Be responsible for proper placement of sleeves and boxes.

B. Provide inserts and hangers required to support conduit, cables, boxes, fixtures, etc. Provide

independent support for all electrical equipment.


June 25, 2014




C. Properly size and locate holes and chases required for work under this Division as construction

progresses. Before beginning sleeving or installation work, carefully study Contract Drawings

and check conduit, boxes and equipment locations for interference with other trades. If conflicts

are discovered in Drawings or as work progresses, a set of prints marked with red pencil

showing recommended installation methods shall be submitted to the Architect for review prior

to installation. Cutting, repairing and required structural reinforcing for installation of this work

shall be done in conformance with the Architect's directions. Cutting shall not be done without

the Architect's approval.

D. Cutting of concrete or other building materials shall be avoided where possible. Have a

workman qualified in the electrical trade present at the pouring of concrete or the building of

masonry containing electrical work to avoid cutting of concrete or other building material.

E. Sleeves and chases are prohibited in structural members except where approved by the

Architect in writing. If openings necessary for this work are not installed at the time of

construction, or if an opening is required in existing construction, provide the opening.

F. Patching in every instance consists of completing the work to match and blend in with the

adjoining existing work insofar as methods, materials and colors, and workmanship are

concerned. Patches which are not properly blended shall be rejected and ordered redone.

Execute patching in full compliance with the provision of the Specifications relating to the type of

work involved by craftsmen qualified and skilled in the particular type of work involved.

G. Openings for electrical work shall be carefully caulked or grouted as required. Spare conduits

shall be tightly capped.

H. Holes and voids created to extend electrical systems through fire rated floors, walls, and

ceilings shall be sealed with an intumescent material.

I. Costs of cutting and patching caused by improper coordination shall be paid for by the

Contractor regardless of the responsibilities set forth in these Contract Documents for new

work.

3.08 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

A. Labels shall be etched lamacoid tags, white with black core. Lettering shall be 1/4 inch (0.64

cm) upper-case, unless otherwise noted. Attach label tags to equipment with sheet metal

screws. Emergency equipment labels shall be the same as above except tags shall be red with

white core.

B. Power distribution equipment furnished under Division 16 including, but not limited to, engine

generator systems, transfer switches, transformers, switchgear, switchboards, panelboards,

motor control centers, and disconnects are labeled to include the following:

1. Key name as indicated on Drawings with 1/2 inch (1.27 cm) lettering.

2. Ampere, voltage, phase, conductor color coding and AIC ratings.

3. Other labeling as indicated or required.

C. Main and Branch disconnects for switchboards, distribution panelboards, and motor control

centers shall be clearly identified as to service frame size, circuit breaker trip setting or fuse size

and type.

D. Label junction, splice and terminal box interiors and covers. Labeling shall be by way of

permanent marking pen and include panel name and circuit number. Labels shall be located


June 25, 2014




on the back interior surface of boxes. In finished areas locate labels on the interior surface of

covers. On junction boxes above ceilings or in unfinished areas, locate labels on the exterior

surface of covers.

E. Label outlet box interiors. Labeling shall be by way of permanent marking pen and include

panel name and circuit number. Locate labels on the back interior surface of outlet boxes.

F. The exterior surface of fire alarm system junction, splice and terminal box covers shall be

painted red.

G. Unless otherwise indicated, wires and cables of each communication system shall have unique

colors which follow a color coding documented within the head-end equipment of each system.

H. Wire and cable identification shall be installed at points of termination in distribution equipment,

junction boxes, splice boxes, terminal boxes, outlets boxes, and load connections. Such

identification shall be by means of cloth, split sleeve or tubing type labels. Feeder labels shall

include name of equipment from which feeder originates, name of equipment which feeder

serves, and gauge of conductor. Wire and cables for branch circuit identification shall include

circuit number, panelboard name, and gauge of conductor.

I. For exterior underground power, signal, and communication lines, install continuous

underground plastic line marker tape located directly above such lines. Marker shall be

permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed, vinyl tape not less than 4 mils thick by 6 inches

wide (0.102 mm thick by 152 mm wide) with an embedded continuous metallic strip or core.

Marker printing indicates type of underground line. Locate 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200 mm) below

finished grade, unless otherwise indicated. Where multiple lines installed in a common trench

or concrete encased do not exceed an overall width of 16 inches (400 mm), use a single line

marker with printing indicating the multiple lines.

3.09 SPECIAL PROJECT PROVISIONS

A. Overhead or Underground Power Service: The power utility company shall provide the primary

conductors, service transformer, current transformers, meter and meter wiring. Contractor shall

provide transformer pad, meter base, current transformer enclosure, and other secondary work.

Install secondary service conductors only after conduit has been thoroughly cleaned. Final

service terminations to transformer shall be by power utility company.

B. Overhead or Underground Communication Services: Contractor shall provide service entrance

raceways for service cable supplied and installed by the communication utility company.

Service entrance conduit shall be rigid metallic or rigid non-metallic type as directed by

communication utility company and of the size indicated. Service entrance conduit shall be

spaced a minimum of 1 foot (0.305 m) from the electrical service. Conduit shall have pull cord

installed. Contractor shall also provide backboards for the utility company's use as indicated or

required. Backboards shall be 4'-0" x 8'-0" x 3/4" (1.22 m x 2.44 m x 1.9 cm) plywood. Mount

backboards with 8’-0” (2.44m) dimension oriented vertically on wall and top 8’-0” (2.44m) above

floor. Paint backboards with three coats of gray enamel.

C. Other Communications Systems Raceways and Cable Supports: Provide a complete system of

raceways, cable supports, and outlets for the future installation of a communications system.

Wall outlets shall be standard double gang boxes with single gang trim rings and cover plate of

same design and finish as specified herein. Cable supports in quantity and routing indicated

shall be 2 inch (5.08 cm) diameter galvanized wide base CableCat J-hooks as manufactured by

Caddy. Provide cable support mounting accessories as required. Communication system

raceway and cable support routing shall maintain 18 inches (45.72 cm) of clearance from


June 25, 2014




luminaires while crossing perpendicular to lighting circuitry, maintain 12 inches (30.48 cm)

clearance from power feeders and branch circuits, and maintain 4 feet (1.22 m) clearance from

motors and transformers. Conduits shall be sized as indicated or required with 3/4 inch (DN21)

as a minimum and include a #200 nylon pull cord. Conduit runs shall not have more than the

equivalent of three 90 degree bends between outlets or pull boxes. Conduits shall be bushed.

D. Wiring for Equipment Furnished by Others: Provide electrical services to equipment furnished

by others. Provide final connections unless otherwise noted. Where final connections are to be

made by others, install outlet box and pull in conductors leaving 8 inch (20.32 cm) pigtails for

each conductor. Conductors shall be taped and appropriate cover plate installed over box.

Control and alarm wiring for such equipment shall be provided by the equipment supplier or

trade providing equipment unless otherwise noted.

E. Unless otherwise noted, provide 120 volt wiring to nearest panelboard, including circuit breaker,

conduit, wire and connections for new mechanical equipment control panels, and accessory

equipment. Coordinate quantity and location with Division 23.

F. Unless otherwise noted, provide 120 volt wiring to nearest panelboard, including circuit breaker,

conduit, wire, and connections for magnetic door holders, fire smoke dampers, and fire alarm

system remote power supplies. Provide control circuitry from the fire alarm control panel.

Coordinate quantity and location of fire smoke dampers with Division 23.

G. Provide three phase digital recording circuit analyzer on indicated panelboard and switchboard

feeder(s) for a period of thirty days prior to the start of construction to verify existing load.

Circuit analyzer shall record voltage, amperage, kVA, and power factor for each phase and

average of all phases. Analyzer shall also record a per day maximum demand (measure of

average power demand over a 15 minute period). The contractor shall compile a summary

report listing maximum readings and submit the report and tape to the Engineer. Analyzer shall

have been calibrated in previous 60 days. Submit documentation of calibration along with load

tapes to Engineer.

3.10 PAINTING

A. Scratched, chipped, or otherwise marred electrical equipment shall be repainted to match

original finish at no additional cost to the Owner.

B. Equipment received from manufacturer with a prime coat of paint shall be cleaned, sanded and

furnished with a final coat of paint.

C. Panelboards, disconnects, and boxes for life safety systems including emergency power and

fire alarm equipment shall be painted red.

3.11 INSTALLATION

A. Install equipment and materials in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations unless

local codes or regulations take precedence.

B. Install so that equipment can be easily serviced. Maintain, as a minimum, code required

clearances.

C. Place or replace equipment identification in locations where they can be seen and read without

difficulty.

D. Perform work in accordance with good commercial practice. The appearance of the finished


June 25, 2014




work shall be of equal importance to its operation.


A. Arrange and oversee inspections by governing authorities. Upon completion of the work,

deliver certificates of inspection and final approval to the Architect.

B. Testing of electrical systems shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations

and in accordance with applicable codes and standards for that system as required and as

referenced in this Specification.

C. Testing of electrical systems involving compliance to specific standards, including but not

limited to UBC, UFC, ANSI, NFPA, ICEA, NEC, IEEE, LPI, NETA, and OSHA shall require the

submittal of a completed test report, certified by the installer, testing agency or manufacturer.

Test reports shall be complete and in accordance with the appropriate standard.

D. Project site testing of equipment prior to installation, where called for in the specifications, shall

include performance testing to establish the applicability of equipment for its intended purpose.

Where required, Installer shall:

1. Establish required test procedures from required standard or manufacturer's

recommendation.

2. Provide necessary test equipment, power, consumables to perform test.

3. Notify Architect of test schedules at least one week in advance of testing.

4. Perform tests.

5. Provide necessary documentation to Architect.

E. Installation of work shall be observed by the Architect. Work found to be in non-compliance with

the specifications shall be redone. The Architect shall be consulted for direction for questions

regarding suitability of the installed work. The Architect shall be notified at least one week prior

to the covering up of work so that observation of work may be scheduled. Work shall not be

covered up or enclosed until work has been tested by Contractor and has been observed by

proper authorities including State/local inspectors and Architect. Should work be covered up or

enclosed before such observation or test, it shall be uncovered, tested and reviewed and shall

be restored by Contractor to finished condition at Contractor's own expense.

F. Final testing and start-up of electrical systems shall include the testing and checkout of

equipment and systems to establish their proper capacity, operation, maintenance and code

compliance. Where required, Installer shall:

1. Provide the services of manufacturer's representative for systems to be tested and

started up.

2. Establish required test procedures from required standard or manufacturer's

recommendation.

3. Provide necessary test equipment, power, consumables to perform test.

4. Notify Architect of test schedules at least one week in advance of testing.

5. Perform tests and start-up functions.

6. Provide necessary documentation of completed tests and fully functional systems to

Architect.

3.13 COMPLETION

A. Test systems and place in proper working order prior to demonstrating systems to Owner.


June 25, 2014




B. Instruct Owner's representative(s) once, in the presence of the Architect, on the proper

operation, testing, and maintenance of the electrical systems. As a minimum, participants shall

include contractor and major equipment manufacturers' representatives. Not less than a total

of four hours shall be allowed for an instruction period. Use final version of operating and

maintenance manual as a training aid. Instruction dates and times shall be coordinated with the

Owner. Instruction shall as a minimum include items contained in the operating and

maintenance manual.

C. After tests and adjustments have been made and systems pronounced satisfactory for

permanent operation, refinish damaged finish and leave everything in proper working order and

of the intended appearance at the final completion of the Contract.

D. On completion of work, remove tools, scaffolding, debris, etc., from the grounds and leave the

premises perfectly clean. Equipment and facilities shall be thoroughly cleaned inside and out

and residue removed. Equipment shall be turned over to the Owner in perfect, unblemished

condition. Remove temporary labels and stickers.

E. Reestablish original grades, landscaping, and other grade finishes.

F. Load balance test the distribution system. Unbalance between phases shall not exceed 10%

with full lighting and mechanical loads. Correct unbalanced load conditions exceeding this limit.

Corrections shall be indicated on Record Drawings.

3.14 PROJECT CLOSE-OUT

A. Upon written request from the Contractor certifying that the work is complete and ready for

inspection, the Engineer shall prepare punchlist of items determined to be incomplete or

otherwise not in compliance with intent of Contract Documents.

B. When required, subsequent visit to review completion of punchlist work shall be made after

receipt of written statement from Contractor indicating punchlist work is complete. Include

copies of intermediate observation reports and final punchlists with individual items initialed by

Contractor to attest that individual work items are completed.

C. Contractor shall pay Engineer's costs at the billing rates in effect at the time the services are

performed for subsequent punchlist visits required due to lack of completion of prior punchlist.

3.15 WARRANTY

A. Warranty materials, workmanship and the successful operation of equipment installed for a

period of 2 years from the date of acceptance of the entire work. Guarantee to repair or replace

at Contractor's expense, work which may show defect during that time, provided such defect is,

in the opinion of the Architect, due to imperfect material or workmanship and not due to the

Owner's carelessness or improper use.

B. Provide testing and maintenance of equipment and systems per manufacturer’s requirements

during warranty period to adhere to warranty requirements.

C. Exceptions - Incandescent and Fluorescent lamps shall be warranted for a period of one month

from date of acceptance.

END OF SECTION


June 25, 2014




SECTION 26 05 00

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Provide complete raceway systems for conductors unless otherwise specified.

B. Provide complete system of conductors as required for raceway systems. Where quantities of

conductors are not specifically indicated, provide necessary number to maintain circuits and

function.

C. Provide metal boxes for use as outlet boxes, pull boxes, or junction boxes. Boxes to include

pressed steel boxes, masonry boxes, and weatherproof cast steel or aluminum boxes.

D. Provide support for conduit, wireway, junction boxes, pull boxes, and related equipment.

E. Provide fire sealing of holes and voids through fire rated barriers.


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.03 DESIGN RESPONSIBILITY

A. Wire and cable sizes indicated are copper. Aluminum may be used for service and feeder

conductor sizes #2 AWG and larger, unless otherwise indicated. Should aluminum be used,

the Contractor is responsible for determining revised:

1. Conductor sizes to achieve the same ampacity and voltage drop as copper sizes

indicated.

2. Raceway, boxes and equipment sizes and locations.

3. Short circuit current values and AIC ratings of equipment.

B. Resolve, to the satisfaction of the Engineer, problems that are a direct result of the use of

aluminum conductors in lieu of copper.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Conduit, fittings, and supports.

2. Wires, cables, connectors and splices.

3. Boxes

4. Fire seals

B. Design Data: Should aluminum wire and cables be used, provide a revised one-line and partial

plans indicating revised:


June 25, 2014




1. Conductor, raceway, box and equipment sizes and locations.

2. Fault calculations.

3. AIC ratings of equipment.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA

70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked

for intended use.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

C. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of NEMA standards pertaining to metallic

and nonmetallic electrical raceway.

D. UL labels: Provide electrical raceways, boxes, conductors, and connectors which have been

approved, listed and labeled by UL.

E. ANSI/ASTM Compliance: Provide electrical raceways and conductors which comply with

applicable portions of ANSI/ASTM standards for construction of raceways and conductors.

F. NEMA/ICEA Compliance: Provide conductors which comply with applicable portions of

NEMA/ICEA standards pertaining to material, construction, and testing of conductors.

G. Federal Specification: Provide electrical raceways and conductors which meet applicable

portions of Federal Specification.

1.06 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate chases, slots, inserts, sleeves, and openings with general construction work and

arrange in building structure during progress of construction to facilitate the electrical

installations that follow.

1. Set inserts and sleeves in poured-in-place concrete, masonry work, and other

structural components as they are constructed.

B. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and equipment for efficient

flow of the Work. Coordinate installing large equipment requiring positioning before closing

in the building.

C. Coordinate electrical service connections to components furnished by utility companies.

1. Coordinate installation and connection of exterior underground and overhead utilities

and services, including provision for electricity-metering components.

2. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and of utility company

providing electrical power and other services.

D. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are concealed by

finished surfaces. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 8 Section "Access

Doors."


June 25, 2014




E. Where electrical identification devices are applied to field-finished surfaces, coordinate

installation of identification devices with completion of finished surface.

F. Where electrical identification markings and devices will be concealed by acoustical ceilings

and similar finishes, coordinate installation of these items before ceiling installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER

A. Manufacturer with at least five (5) years experience in manufacturing product.

2.02 CONDUIT

A. Rigid metal conduit (RMC) shall be steel, galvanized inside and outside. Factory made threads

shall be full cut and galvanized after threading. The conduit shall be UL listed and shall meet

the requirements of UL 6 and ANSI C80.1.

B. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT) shall be hot-dipped galvanized or electro-galvanized steel with

an inner coating to protect cables and to aid pulling. The conduit shall be UL listed and shall

meet the requirements of UL 797 and ANSI C80.3.

C. Flexible metal conduit (FMC) shall be composed of one spirally wound continuous strip of

interlocked galvanized steel. The conduit shall conform to Federal Specification WW-C-566C

and shall meet the requirements of UL 1.

D. Liquid tight flexible metal conduit (LFMC) shall be galvanized steel with an oil and sunlight

resistant polyvinyl chloride jacket bonded or extruded onto the exterior. Liquid tight flexible

metal conduit shall be approved for grounding. Liquid tight flexible metal conduit shall meet UL

Standard For Safety, UL 360.

E. Rigid polyvinyl chloride conduit (PVC), unless otherwise noted, shall be Schedule 40 rigid

plastic, rated for use with 90 degree C wire and shall be UL listed and conform to UL 651 and

NEMA TC-2.

F. Rigid nonmetallic type EB-20 conduit shall be ETL listed, tested to UL-651-A, and meet the

requirements of NEMA TC-6 and ASTM F-512.

2.03 CONDUIT FITTINGS

A. Fittings for rigid metal conduit shall be galvanized or cadmium plated. Fittings shall be

threaded. Couplings shall be of galvanized steel. Locknuts and bushings shall be steel or

malleable iron. Bushings shall have nylon insulated throat.

B. Connectors, couplings and combination couplings for EMT shall be steel set screw or steel

compression type. Insulated throat connectors shall be used for sizes 1 inch (DN27) and

smaller. Un-insulated connectors with insulated bushing shall be used for sizes larger than 1

inch (DN27).

C. Fittings for flexible metal conduit and liquid tight flexible metal conduit shall be of a type

specifically designed for the purpose.


June 25, 2014




D. Fittings for rigid nonmetallic conduits shall be of same material and manufacturer as conduit.

Non-metallic fittings shall be UL listed and conform to UL 514.

E. Expansion fittings across structural joints shall be of a design to compensate for expansion and

contraction and shall be sealed to prevent entrance of water or moisture. Expansion fittings

shall be approved for grounding duty.

F. Adapters for joints between PVC and steel conduits shall be UL listed Carlon E942 and E943

series.

2.04 WIRE AND CABLE

A. Conductors shall be new and unused. Wire and cable shall be copper single conductor type

with 600V insulation, unless otherwise noted. Conductor shall be soft annealed Class B, per

ASTM B-3 for solid wire and ASTM B-8 for stranded wire. Conductors shall be minimum 98%

conductive.

B. Aluminum conductors shall be an aluminum alloy that is listed or labeled by UL as "component

aluminum-wire stock (conductor material)." Type EC/1350 aluminum is not acceptable.

Conductors shall be "Stabiloy" as manufactured by Alcan.

C. Number 10 AWG and smaller wire except for motor circuits shall be solid with Type THHN, or

THWN insulation. Larger wire and motor circuit feeders shall be stranded with Type THHN, or

THWN insulation. Conductors for service entrance use or where used underground shall be

type XHHW only. Grounding conductors shall be copper.

D. Insulation shall be flame retardant, heat resistant polyvinyl chloride (PVC), ethylene propylene

(EP) or polyethylene (PE) with minimum insulation thicknesses per table 310-13 of the NEC.

The insulation shall conform to the requirements of UL 83 ICEA S-68-516 for EP, ICEA S-61-

402 for PVC and PE.

E. Type THWN or THHN wire and cable shall have a outer nylon jacket conforming to UL-83.

Cables shall be manufactured to meet the standards of Insulated Cable Engineer's Association

(ICEA).

F. MC Cable shall be UL listed, and consist of color-coded insulated conductors wrapped

surrounded with a moisture resistant tape and enclosed in a galvanized steel interlocked

cladding. Each cable shall contain a full sized ground wire.

G. NM cable shall be UL listed, and consist of color-coded thermoplastic insulated conductors

enclosed in a polyvinylchloride plastic overall jacket. Each cable shall contain a full sized

ground wire.

H. All homeruns shall be in EMT. Electrical contractor shall obtain written approval from design

engineer for the use of type MC and AC cabling. Type MC and AC cable shall be permitted

for branch circuit wiring in approved locations only and installed per the latest adopted edition

of the National Electrical Code, NFPA 70.

I. Wire-pulling lubricant shall be equal to Ideal "Aqua Gel CW" or Dow Corning compound #7.

2.05 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES


June 25, 2014




A. For solid wire size #10 and smaller, "Scotchlok" insulated twist-on connectors or compression

type, 600 V insulated or acceptable substitution.

B. For stranded wire, "Burndy Hydent" hydraulic compression type, taped to 600 V insulation level.

2.06 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES

A. Provide code gauge sheet metal boxes with suitable covers, trims, etc. Boxes to be sized, per

the NEC, by number and size of conduits and conductors, unless otherwise noted.

2.07 OUTLET BOXES

A. Boxes shall be zinc or cadmium-plated code gauge pressed steel and of the knock-out type.

Depth may vary to suit requirements of location.

B. Boxes shall accommodate devices to be installed and shall be sized as required by the NEC for

number and size of conduits and conductors entering and leaving. Round boxes shall not be

permitted, except where specifically called for.

C. Special oversized outlet boxes shall be code gauge steel and of the knock-out type. Boxes

shall have screw mounted covers for surface or flush mounting. Boxes shall be sized as

indicated or as required by the National Electrical Code. Special outlet boxes shall

accommodate the equipment served.

D. Weatherproof boxes shall be cast aluminum with threaded hubs. Boxes shall have screw

mounted, gasketed covers.

2.08 SUPPORTS

A. Hangers, straps and supports shall be of corrosion resistant or galvanized steel.

B. Support channels shall be as manufactured by:

1. B-Line

2. Kindorf

3. Unistrut

4. Acceptable Equivalent

2.09 CONDUIT SUPPORTS

A. Single Runs: Galvanized malleable-iron conduit straps for surface mounting or 3/8 inch (0.95

cm) threaded rod with steel one bolt conduit clamps for all suspended runs.

B. Multiple Runs: Channel support for surface mounting or trapeze style hangers of 1-5/8 inches

by 1-5/8 inches (4.13 cm by 4.13 cm) galvanized steel channels, supported by 3/8 inch (0.95

cm) threaded rod for all suspended runs. Size hangers to allow for 25 percent additional

conduits.

C. Supports and hardware shall be galvanized steel, except that high carbon spring steel supports

may be used in steel stud walls to support horizontal and vertical conduit up to 3/4 inch (DN21).


June 25, 2014




D. Perforated plumbing tape is not permitted in any support application.

2.10 ANCHOR METHODS

A. Hollow Masonry: Toggle bolts or spider type expansion anchors.

B. Solid Masonry (excluding concrete): Steel expansion bolts.

C. New Concrete: Preset inserts with machine screws and bolts.

D. Existing Concrete: Steel expansion bolts or explosive powder driven inserts.

E. Wood Surfaces: Wood screws.

F. Steel: Welded threaded studs or galvanized steel clamps.

G. Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.

2.11 FIRE SEALS

A. Fire seals for walls and floors shall be an intumescent material capable of expanding to fill voids

when exposed to temperatures beginning at 250 degree F (121 degree C). The seal system

shall be U.L. classified and have ICBO, BOCA, and SBCC ratings to 3 hours. The seal system

fire rating shall equal or exceed the fire rating of the penetrated surface to comply with NEC

Section 300-21.

B. In cable tray applications the fire seal shall be either a pillow or putty type allowing easy reentry.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 TYPES OF CONDUIT INSTALLATION

A. Buried raceways, except where concrete encased, shall be rigid metal conduit or rigid

nonmetallic conduit.

B. Raceways embedded in concrete slabs at or below grade level shall be rigid nonmetallic

conduit, except in classified hazardous areas.

C. Raceways in concrete encased duct banks shall be type EB-20 rigid nonmetallic conduit.

D. Where rigid nonmetallic conduit is used for buried or encased and buried conduit runs, use a

minimum of 5 feet (1.52 m) of rigid metallic conduit at foundation and manhole penetrations.

E. Raceways embedded in concrete slabs above grade level shall be rigid metal conduit, electrical

metallic tubing, or rigid nonmetallic conduit.

F. Hazardous areas raceways shall be rigid metal conduit only.

G. Raceways outdoors, in crawl spaces, and in locations subject to mechanical injury shall be rigid

metal conduit.

H. Motor, vibrating equipment, and rooftop mounted heating, ventilating, and air conditioning


June 25, 2014




equipment connections shall be made with PVC jacketed liquid tight flexible metallic conduit for

the last 2 feet (0.61 m) with liquid tight connectors. Similar equipment connections in

environmental air plenums shall be made with flexible metal conduit.

I. Raceways in other areas shall be electrical metallic tubing unless otherwise noted.

3.02 CONDUIT SIZES

A. Minimum size allowable for galvanized rigid metal conduit or EMT shall be 1/2 inch (DN16).

B. Minimum size allowable for liquid tight flexible metal conduit shall be 1/2 inch (DN16).

C. Minimum size allowable for flexible metal conduit shall be 1/2 inch (DN16) except for luminaire

and control wiring for which 3/8 inch shall be allowed.

3.03 CONDUIT INSTALLATION

A. Unless noted as aluminum, conductor and conduit sizes shown on Drawings are based on the

use of copper conductors.

B. Wire and cable shall be run in metal raceways, except where nonmetallic raceways have been

specifically approved.

C. Conduit shall be run parallel to walls, ceilings, and building lines wherever possible.

D. Conduit shall be installed in finished walls and above suspended ceilings. Conduit routed

above suspended ceilings shall be surface mounted to the structural ceiling. When above

suspended ceilings, route conduits above suspended lay-in ceiling instead of suspended hard

ceilings wherever possible. Coordinate the routing of all other conduit with the Architect prior to

rough-in.

E. Where flexible metal conduit is used for equipment connections or other special (approved)

situations, ground continuity shall be provided in accordance with the NEC. Liquid tight flexible

metal conduit shall be used for flexible equipment connections in damp and wet areas except

where installed in environmental air plenums where flexible metal conduit shall be used.

F. Do not cut, notch or drill structural framing members for the installation of conduit without the

Architect's approval in each case.

G. Where rigid metal conduit enters a box, fitting or device through a knockout, double locknuts

and an insulated metallic bushing shall be used. EMT shall terminate at knockouts with an

insulated throat fitting and one locknut. Connectors shall be made up tight to ensure electrical

continuity of the raceway system. Provide grounding bushings at each junction box, pull box, or

enclosure as required by the NEC.

H. Rigid metal conduit shall be reamed after threads are cut. Joints shall be cut square and shall

butt solidly into couplings. Running threads shall not be permitted. Cut ends of EMT shall also

be reamed.

I. Bends in rigid metal conduit and EMT runs larger than 1-1/4 inches (DN35) shall be

factory-made elbows unless otherwise specifically approved. Bends in 1-1/4 inch (DN35) and 1

inch (DN27) runs shall be made in an approved bending machine or factory made. Hickey


June 25, 2014




bends shall not be permitted in conduits larger than 3/4 inch (DN21). Field bends shall be in

accordance with the requirements of the NEC.

J. Conduits run in masonry shall be placed at least 1 inch (DN27) from the surface.

K. Install expansion fittings where conduit crosses an expansion joint in structure or is in an

environment where temperature changes combined with conduit run length produce expansion

or contraction stress on the installation. Ends of conduit shall be provided with insulated

grounding bushings. Copper ground rings or a flexible bonding jumper, equal to at least three

times the nominal width of the joint, shall be provided to insure a continuous ground between

conduit and fitting.

L. Provide separate code-sized ground conductor for each run of conduit. Conduit shall be sized

to accommodate ground conductor.

M. Install under floor conduit below floor slab or in crawl space where provided. Conduit shall not

be imbedded in floor slab.

N. Install buried or encased and buried conduits in accordance with Sections 300-5 of the NEC.

Where possible, exterior conduits shall be buried at minimum of 30 inches (76.2 cm) below

grade or as indicated on the Drawings. Contractor shall verify with Architect, prior to installation,

exterior buried conduits not buried a minimum of 30 inches (76.2 cm) below grade. Slope

conduit to drainage point at least 4 inches (10.16 cm) per 100 feet (30.48 m).

O. Adjustments in line and grade for direct buried or encased and buried conduits shall be via long

sweeps with minimum of 48 inch (121.92 cm) radius. Route such conduits below existing or

new gas lines.

P. Multiple runs of conduit below grade under slab shall be installed in trenches backfilled with

sand. Each layer of conduit shall be installed separately, backfilled with sand, and compacted to

the depth needed to provide continuous support for the next layer of conduit. Sand shall be

spread evenly and compacted to grade level for coverage of the final layer of conduit. Offset

joints to maintain uniform spacing between conduits.

Q. Direct buried or encased and buried conduits shall first be swabbed out and then shall be

capable of passing a rigid ball 1/4 inch (0.64 cm) smaller than the inside diameter of conduit.

Such conduits for future use shall be capped to prevent entry of dirt and debris.

R. Provide roof jacks for waterproofing conduit penetrations of roof. Conduit routing and mounting

on roofs shall be coordinated with the Architect. Unless otherwise indicated or required, conduit

shall be mounted 12 inches (30.48 cm) above the finished surface of flat roofs on redwood or

treated wood standoffs. Conduits shall be permanently attached to standoffs. Standoffs shall

rest freely on roof without being anchored to roof surface.

S. Joints for rigid nonmetallic conduit shall be solvent cemented in strict accordance with

manufacturer's recommendations.

T. Elbows from below grade conduit to above grade shall be PVC jacketed rigid metal conduit and

shall extend 6 inches (15.24 cm) above grade or finished floor. PVC corrosion resistant tape

shall not be permitted.

U. Conduit extending from below grade to above grade, or conduit stubbing out of floors, shall be


June 25, 2014




rigid metal conduit for a minimum of 12 inches (30.48 cm) above grade or finished floor.

V. Wherever conduits enter structure through foundation below ground level, grout around conduit

with waterproof grout or install wall and floor entrance seals. Seals shall be OZ/Gedney WS

series for new construction and OZ/Gedney CSM series for existing structures.

W. Conduits which pierce air tight spaces or plenums shall be sealed to prevent leakage.

X. Care shall be taken to avoid placing conduits where they shall be subjected to excessive heat.

Locate conduits a minimum of 12 inches (30.48 cm) from flues, steam lines, hot water lines,

etc.

Y. Conduit ends shall be capped using standard capped bushings to prevent entrance of foreign

materials during and after construction. When conduit installation is not in progress close open

ends of conduit with temporary plugs or caps.

Z. Clean conduits prior to installation of wires. Install a nylon pulling line in each conduit run

assembly or after completion of each conduit run assembly for installation of wires or for future

use.

AA. Wire shall not be installed until work which might cause damage to conduit or wire has been

completed.

BB. PVC-coated rigid metal conduit shall be installed by a manufacturer-certified installer.

3.04 WIRE AND CABLE INSTALLATION

A. Minimum wire size for lighting and power circuits shall be #12. Signal and control circuits may

use #14 except as noted. Wiring shall be installed in conduit, unless otherwise noted.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, the maximum number of branch circuits allowed in each conduit

shall be three. In such cases, the branch circuits shall also be of different phases.

C. Unless otherwise indicated or required, the following schedule shall be adhered to for conductor

sizes:

CIRCUIT OVERCURRENT

DEVICE RATING

COPPER

CONDUCTOR SIZES

20 A or Less #12 AWG

30 A #10 AWG

40 A # 8 AWG

50 A # 6 AWG

60 A # 4 AWG

70 A # 4 AWG

80 A # 3 AWG

90 A # 2 AWG

100 A # 1 AWG

D. To limit voltage drop, 120 V branch circuits with length from panel to first outlet exceeding 75

feet (22.86 m) shall be #10 or larger. For 277 V branch circuits with length from panel to first


June 25, 2014




outlet exceeding 175 feet (53.34 m) shall be #10 or larger. Wire sizes for other branch circuits

shall be sized to limit voltage drop to 3%.

E. Conductors from outlet to incandescent luminaire sockets and where run in fluorescent

luminaire channels shall be type THHN or as approved by the NEC.

F. Solid wire #10 and smaller shall be connected as specified herein and shall be made tight in

conformance with manufacturers recommendations.

G. Stranded wire shall be connected as specified herein and thoroughly taped with "Scotch" #33 or

acceptable substitution approved equal electrical tape.

H. Provide equipment lugs compatible with wire sizes indicated. Lugs shall not be rated less than

equipment rating. Provide box sizes to accommodate wire bending radius requirements.

Revise feeders as needed, maintaining the ampere rating and fault current values indicated, for

compatibility with equipment lugs, UL listings, or manufacturer's recommendations.

I. Install wiring after concrete, plastering, etc., work is complete. Carefully pull wire unspliced

between outlets. Use approved pulling lubricant as necessary to prevent insulation cutting or

nicking. Branch circuit and feeder wiring shall be color coded in accordance with NEC and in

accordance with the following schedule:

Conductor Color Coding

Conductor Insulation Color

Conductor

240/120V,

1 Phase

208Y/120V,

3 Phase

480Y/277V,

3 Phase

Phase A Black Black Brown

Phase B Red Red Orange

Phase C --- Blue Yellow

Neutral White White White

Ground Green Green Green

J. Motor circuits and feeders shall utilize stranded conductors.

3.05 PULL AND JUNCTION BOX INSTALLATION

A. Locate pull boxes and junction boxes above removable ceilings or in electrical room, utility

rooms, or storage areas.

B. Pull and junction boxes shall be supported independently of the conduit system and shall be

plumb. Supports shall be noncombustible and corrosion resistant. Suspended pull and junction

boxes shall be supported with threaded rod hangers and galvanized steel clamps, or trapeze

hangers of Unistrut or Kindorf channel.


June 25, 2014




C. Pull and junction boxes shall be accessible.

3.06 OUTLET BOX INSTALLATION

A. Each lighting outlet, switch, convenience outlet, communication outlet, or other miscellaneous

device shall be provided with a suitable box.

B. Convenience outlets and telephone and data outlets shall be provided with single gang boxes

and single device trim plates where single devices are indicated.

C. Where two or more similar type devices occur adjacent to each other, they shall be in a gang

type box with a gang type cover. Where different type devices occur adjacent to each other,

space outlet boxes so that finish plates shall be spaced 1 inch (2.54 cm) apart.

D. Install outlet boxes securely in place, plumb with building lines in accordance with NEC.

Recess outside edge and associated trim plates from finished surface in accordance with NEC.

Provide blank covers, which match device plates in area, for outlets not specified with covers.

Outlets in plastered, paneled, and furred finishes shall be equipped with trim plates and

extensions of such depths as to bring outlets flush with final surface finish.

E. Wall outlets in exposed block or masonry construction shall have extension and device

mounting straps as required to provide only such wall openings as may be covered by device

plates without the use of mortar or other filler material.

F. Sectional boxes shall not be used where outlet boxes occur in concrete.

G. Boxes shall be supported independently of the conduit system and shall be plumb. Supports

shall be noncombustible and corrosion resistant. Suspended boxes shall be supported with

threaded rod hangers and galvanized steel clamps, or trapeze hangers of Unistrut or Kindorf

channel. Where the suspended ceiling system is approved for the application, outlet boxes

may be supported with bar hangers attached to the ceiling channels.

H. Install additional straps or cross-bracing to ensure complete rigid installation in steel stud

system, bracing prior to installation of wall finish material.

I. "Back-to-Back" outlets in the same wall, or "thru-wall" type boxes shall not be permitted.

Provide 12 inch (30.48 cm) (minimum) long nipple to offset outlets shown on opposite sides of a

common wall to minimize sound transmission.

J. Outlet boxes on opposite sides of fire rated walls and partitions shall be separated by a

horizontal distance of at least 24 inches (60.96 cm).

K. Unused knockouts in boxes shall be left sealed.

L. Provide luminaire outlets with 3/8 inch (0.95 cm) no bolt fixture stud where required.

M. Telephone outlets shall be mounted at the same height as adjacent receptacle outlets unless

noted otherwise.

N. Refer to architectural plans for heights of outlets.

O. Mount outlets horizontally or vertically as directed by the Architect. Above counter outlets shall


June 25, 2014




be mounted horizontally, unless otherwise noted or directed.

3.07 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Install individual and multiple raceway hangers and riser clamps to support raceways. Provide

all hardware as required for hanger assemblies and for securing hanger rods to conduits.

B. Multiple runs of conduits on ceilings and walls shall be mounted on Unistrut or Kindorf channels.

Perforated plumbers tape shall not be used.

C. Caddy clips with support wires using not less than No. 14 wire may be used only for single

suspended runs of EMT or rigid conduit up to 3/4 inches (DN21).

D. Conduit and box support installation shall prevent displacement of conduit in any direction.

E. In steel stud walls, high carbon steel spring clips may be used to support conduits up to 3/4 inch

(DN21), and boxes to metal studs.

F. Supports, whether for single or multiple runs, regardless of type shall have strength adequate to

support at least four times the present load, a minimum of 200-lb (90 kg) design load.

3.08 FIRE SEAL INSTALLATION

A. Fire seal installations shall be performed per manufacturer's recommendations and shall

conform to standard UL fire stop system details.

B. All cables or conduits shall be firmly secured and cleaned where penetrating the fire rated

surface. Fire seals shall not act as supports.

C. Where cables in cable trays are required to maintain specific distances between each other

they shall be firmly secured to maintain this distance at penetrations.

3.09 TESTING

A. Service entrance conductors and other feeder conductors #2 AWG and larger shall be tested

by an independent test agency. Testing shall occur after installation and prior to termination.

B. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:

1. Compare cable data with Drawings and Specifications.

2. Inspect exposed sections of cables for physical damage and correct connection in

accordance with one-line diagram.

3. Inspect all bolted electrical connections for high resistance using the following methods.

a. Use of low-resistance ohmmeter.

b. Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated

torque-wrench method in accordance with manufacturer's published data.

c. Perform thermographic survey.

4. Inspect compression-applied connectors for correct cable match and indentation.

5. Verify cable color coding with applicable specifications and the NEC.


June 25, 2014




C. Electrical Tests

1. Perform insulation resistance test on each conductor with respect to ground and

adjacent conductors. Applied potential shall be 500 volts dc for 300 volt rated cable and

1,000 volts dc for 600 volt rated cable. Test duration shall be one minute.

2. Perform resistance measurements through all bolted connections with low-resistance

ohmmeter.

3. Perform continuity test to ensure correct cable connection.

D. Test Values

1. Compare bolted connection resistance to values of similar connections.

2. Bolt-torque levels should be as specified by the manufacturer.

3. Microhm or millivolt drop values shall not exceed the high levels of the normal range as

indicated in the manufacturer's published data. If manufacturer's data is not available,

investigate any values that deviate from similar connections by more the 50 percent of

the lowest value.

4. Minimum insulation-resistance values should not be less than 50 megohms.

5. Investigate deviations between adjacent phases.

E. Provide written test report for review. As a minimum, test report shall include insulation

resistance test and bolted connection torque test results.

END OF SECTION


June 25, 2014


Florence Crittenton GROUNDING


SECTION 26 05 26

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Provide a complete grounding system in accordance with the Specifications, and Drawings.

Drawings do not necessarily indicate every requirement. Items not specifically mentioned in

the Specifications or Drawings, but which are necessary to make a complete installation

shall be included.

B. Where types, sizes, ratings, and quantities indicated are in excess of NEC requirements, the

more stringent requirements govern.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Documentation from field tests before system is energized.

B. Documentation supporting independent testing agency qualifications.


A. Independent Testing Agency Qualifications:

1. A full member company of NETA, or a NRTL. Agency shall have a minimum of five

years commercial or industrial grounding testing experience.

2. Use persons regularly employed by testing agency and currently certified by NETA

or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise

on-site testing.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 WIRE AND CABLE GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

A. Equipment and Bonding Jumper Conductors: Copper and insulated with green insulation or

marking unless otherwise noted.

B. Isolated Equipment Grounding Conductors: Copper and insulated with green insulation or

marking and yellow tracer or marking.

C. Grounding-Electrode Conductors: Copper stranded cable, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Underground Grounding Conductors: Copper, bare, tinned, and stranded, unless otherwise

indicated.

E. Main Bonding Jumper: Factory installed with service entrance equipment when possible,

otherwise field installed conductor.

2.02 CONNECTOR PRODUCTS


June 25, 2014




A. Pressure Connectors: High-conductivity-plated units.

B. Bolted Clamps: Heavy-duty type.

C. Exothermic Weld Connections: Provided in kit form and selected per manufacturer's

recommendations for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and connected

items.

2.03 MADE ELECTRODES

A. Grounding Rods: Copper-clad steel, 3/4 inch by 120 inches (19 mm by 3000 mm).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Grounding Conductors: Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be

subjected to strain, impact, or damage. Conductors shall be formed to the contour of

equipment and firmly supported.

B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Bury at least 24 inches (600 mm) below grade. If

installed near the base of a structure, it shall be in earth and as far from the structure as the

excavation permits but not closer than 6 inches (150 mm).

C. Metal Water Service Pipe: Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect

grounding conductor to street side of fitting. Do not install a grounding jumper across

dielectric fittings.

D. Water Meter Piping: Use bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to

pipe with grounding-clamp connectors.

E. Ufer Ground (Concrete-Encased Grounding Electrode): Fabricate according to NEC. Bond

grounding conductor to reinforcing steel in at least 4 locations, and to anchor bolts.

F. Grounding Rods: Drive until tops are 2 inches (50 mm) below finished floor or final grade.

Connections to rods shall be by exothermic weld, unless as otherwise indicated. Make

these connections without damaging copper coating or exposing steel.

G. Equipment Grounding Conductors: Provide a separate equipment grounding conductor with

all feeder and branch circuit conductors, unless otherwise indicated. A properly sized

common equipment grounding conductor may be used for multiple feeders or branch

circuits routed within a single conduit.

H. Isolated Equipment Grounding Conductor: Terminate at the isolated equipment grounding-

conductor terminal of the panelboard, applicable derived system or service, except as

otherwise indicated.

I. Metallic Building Components: Bond all metal piping, metal air ducts, and exposed interior

structural steel to grounding electrode system.

J. Signal and Communication Systems: For telephone system, fire alarm and detection

system, data system, card access system, public address system, security system, clock


June 25, 2014




and program system, and other communication systems, provide a No. 4 AWG minimum

insulated grounding conductor in raceway from grounding-electrode system to each

communication system service terminal cabinet, wiring closet, or central equipment location.

1. Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate

grounding conductor on a ground bus.

2. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal.

3. Provide grounding in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

K. Metal Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Ground pole to metal reinforcing within

concrete pole base using No. 6 AWG conductor. Thermoweld connection between ground

conductor and metal reinforcing. For precast concrete pole bases, ground pole to a local

ground rod with No. 6 AWG conductor. Provide made electrode within 6 feet of pole base.

Thermoweld connection between ground conductor and ground rod.

3.02 CONNECTIONS

A. General: Make connections so the possibility of galvanic action or electrolysis is minimized.

Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in

direct contact with earth will be galvanically compatible.

1. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to assure high conductivity and to

make contact points closer in order of galvanic series.

2. Make connections at points of clean, bare metal.

B. Exothermic Weld Connections: Use for connections to structural steel and for underground

connections. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Welds that are puffed up or

that show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable. Installer shall

be certified.

C. Compression-Type Connections: Use hydraulic compression tools to provide correct

circumferential pressure for compression connectors. Use tools and dies recommended by

manufacturer of connectors. Provide embossing die code or other standard method to

make a visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on grounding

conductor.

D. Equipment Grounding-Wire Terminations: For No. 8 AWG and larger, use pressure-type

grounding lugs. No. 10 AWG and smaller grounding conductors may be terminated with

pressure-type connectors.

E. Install grounding bushings, grounding studs, and grounding jumpers at switchboards,

panelboards, pull boxes, and other electrical enclosures.

F. Tighten screws and bolts for grounding and bonding connectors and terminals according to

manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. Where these requirements are not

available, use those specified by UL.

G. Connect the ground terminal on each non-isolated ground type outlet receptacle to the

branch circuit grounding conductor and to the metallic raceway system with bonding

jumpers.


June 25, 2014




H. Connect the grounding stud on each luminaire to the branch circuit grounding conductor and

to the metallic raceway system with bonding jumpers.

I. Ground connections to equipment and ground buses shall be by ground lugs or clamps.

Connections to enclosures not provided with ground buses or ground terminals shall be by

clamp type lugs added under permanent assembly bolts or under new bolts drilled and

added through enclosures or by grounding locknuts or bushings. Ground cable connections

against gaskets, paint, or varnish; or on bolts holding removable access covers shall not be

permitted.

J. Moisture Protection: Where insulated grounding conductors are connected to grounding

rods or grounding buses, insulate entire area of connection and seal against moisture

penetration of insulation and cable.


A. Independent Testing Agency: Engaged to perform tests.

B. Continuity Test: On all circuits before energizing.

C. Megger Tests: Subject the completed grounding system to test. Measure ground

resistance not less than 2 full days after the last trace of precipitation, and without the soil

being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without

chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance. Perform

tests by the 3-point method according to IEEE Standards. The system, when tested, shall

yield a maximum 5 ohms ground. If this value is not obtained for the systems when tested,

modifications shall be made to obtain this value without additional cost to the project. Make

additional tests as required after modifications to verify value is achieved.

D. Report: Results of all tests shall be recorded before the system is energized. Prepare test

reports, certified by the testing organization, of ground resistance at each test location.

Include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results.

Describe measures taken to improve test results.

END OF SECTION


June 25, 2014


Florence Crittenton OCCUPANCY SENSOR LIGHTING CONTROL


SECTION 260923

OCCUPANCY SENSOR LIGHTING CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes all sensors including multi-technology, ultrasonic, and passive infrared (PIR)

technologies. This includes self-contained PIR sensors that are switch-mounted and ceiling-

mounted, as well as low voltage line units.

1. Self-contained wall switch with infrared

2. Self-contained wall switch with infrared and LED night light

3. Self-contained wall switch with multi-technology

4. Self-contained infrared ceiling-mount

5. Self-contained infrared luminaire mount

6. Low-voltage multi-technology ceiling-mount

7. Low-voltage ultrasonic ceiling-mount

8. Low-voltage infrared ceiling-mount

9. Low-voltage multi-technology wall/corner wide view

10. Low-voltage infrared wall/corner wide view

11. Low-voltage infrared wall/corner high bay

12. Low-voltage wall/corner long range

13. Power pack for low voltage sensors

B. Related Sections: Section(s) related to this section include:

1. Division 26, Lighting Accessories, Lighting Restoration and Repair Sections.

2. Division 26, Wiring Methods, Wiring Devices Section.

3. Division 26, Wiring Methods, Special Purpose Lighting.

4. Division 23, Special Lighting Control.

1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Performance Requirements: Provide occupancy sensor lighting controls and power packs

that have been manufactured, assembled, and installed to maintain performance criteria

stated by manufacturer without defects, damage, or failure.

B. Performance Testing Requirements

1. Manufacturer shall 100% test all equipment prior to shipment. Sample testing is not

acceptable.

C. Code Requirements

1. All occupancy sensor lighting controls and power packs shall be UL listed and either


June 25, 2014




CSA or CUL/US listed.

2. All sensors shall be FCC compliant where applicable.

3. All sensors shall be California Title 24 compliant and listed.

4. Building Codes: All units shall comply with applicable, local building codes.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit listed submittals in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division

1 Submittal Procedures Section.

B. Bill of Materials: Complete list of all parts needed to fully install selected occupancy sensors.

C. Product Data: Submit product data, including catalog cut sheets for specified products.

D. Shop and Wiring Drawings: Submit shop drawings detailing all mechanical and electrical

equipment including one-line diagrams, wire counts, coverage patterns, and physical

dimensions of each item.

E. Fixture Compatibility: List of ballasts and lamp combinations compatible with occupancy

sensors, by manufacturer and catalog number.

F. Samples: Submit samples for finish, color, and texture as requested.

G. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer’s installation instructions.

H. Maintenance Instructions: To remove dust and grime, wipe down units with damp cloth and

mild detergent solution. Do not touch surface of lenses.

I. Closeout Submittals: Warranty documents specified herein.


A. Installer Qualifications: Installer shall be experienced in performing the work of this section,

and specialized in installation of work similar to that required for this project.

B. Source Limitations: To assure compatibility, obtain occupancy sensors from a single source

with complete responsibility over all lighting controls, including accessory products. The use

of subcontracted component assemblers is not acceptable.

C. Manufacturer Requirements: The manufacturer will be one who has been continuously

engaged in the manufacture of commercial lighting controls and occupancy sensors for no

less than 10 years.

D. ISO Certification: Manufacturer shall be ISO-9001 certified.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING

A. General: Comply with Division 1 Product Requirements Sections.

B. Ordering: Comply with manufacturer’s ordering instructions and lead-time requirements to

avoid construction delays.


June 25, 2014




C. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged packages with

intact identification labels.

D. Storage and Protection: Store materials away from exposure to harmful weather conditions

and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by manufacturer.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer’s Warranty: All equipment shall be warranted free of defects in materials and

workmanship.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of purchase.

2. Owner Rights: Manufacturer’s warranty is in addition to, not a limitation of, other

rights the Owner may have under contract documents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Leviton

B. Legrand - Watt Stopper

C. Cooper – Novitas

D. Approved equivalent

2.02 SELF-CONTAINED UNITS

A. General to Wall Switches with Infrared

1. Shall use passive infrared motion detection.

2. Shall be compatible with incandescent, magnetic or electronic low voltage, and

magnetic or electronic fluorescent, as well as motor loads.

3. Switch shall be microprocessor controlled.

4. Shall be capable of detecting occupancy with true, 180º field of view.

5. Shall utilize zero crossing circuitry, which increases relay life, protects from the

effects of inrush current, and increases sensor longevity.

6. Wall switch shall have integral shutters that narrow the field of view from 180º.

7. Shall feature pushbutton for manual on and off, which times out based upon

occupancy detection.

8. An LED shall indicate occupancy status.

9. Manual range, photocell, and time settings shall be user-configurable.

10. Switch shall be rated at 120/277V in one unit.

11. Unit shall fit in a standard box and use a standard wallplate, which is gangable.

12. Wall switch shall not protrude more than .4 inches from box.

13. Shall be a Decora style unit with a matching wallplate available.

14. Wall switch must be available in white, ivory, almond, and gray (or equivalent colors).

B. General to wall switches with multi-technology

1. Shall incorporate Doppler shift ultrasonic and passive infrared motion detection

technologies.

2. Shall use passive infrared to turn on and either technology to keep on.


June 25, 2014






4. Switch shall be microprocessor controlled.

5. Shall be capable of detecting occupancy with true, 180º field of view.

6. Shall utilize zero crossing circuitry, which increases relay life, protects from the

effects of inrush current, and increases sensor longevity.

7. Wall switch shall have integral shutters that narrow the field of view from 180º.

8. Shall feature pushbutton for manual on and off, which times out based upon

occupancy detection.

9. An LED shall indicate occupancy status.

10. Manual range, ultrasonic sensitivity, photocell, and time settings shall be user-

configurable.

11. Switch shall be rated at 120/277V in one unit.

12. Unit shall fit in a standard box and use a standard wallplate, which is gangable.

13. Wall switch shall not protrude more than .4 inches from box.

14. Shall be a Decora style unit with a matching wallplate available.

15. Wall switch must be available in white, ivory, almond, and gray (or equivalent colors).

16. Shall be available in 40kHz ultrasonic frequencies.

17. Shall have “vacancy confirmation” where if a false off occurs, the sensor shall wait

for 45 seconds to determine if space is vacant or not. If occupancy is detected within

the 45 second period, either ultrasonic or passive infrared technology can

immediately turn the lights back on. If no occupancy is detected within the 45 second

period, the sensor will turn off and reset to normal operation of passive infrared on

only.

C. Self-Contained Infrared Ceiling-Mount

1. Shall mount on the ceiling.

2. Shall incorporate a real-time motion indicator LED, which is visible from the front of

unit.

3. Shall feature manual timer settings between 20 seconds and 15 minutes.

4. Infrared lenses shall have 360º field of view.

5. Shall be equipped with tamper resistant cover.

6. All controls shall be accessible from front of unit.

7. Rugged, plastic housing shall be available in white.

8. Ratings: As indicated on construction documents.

D. Self-Contained Infrared Luminaire-Mount

1. Shall mount on the luminaire through a standard ½” knockout or to an electrical

junction box.


unit.

3. Shall feature manual timer settings between 20 seconds and 20 minutes.

4. Infrared lenses shall have two lens included, a 360º field of view and an aisle lens

field of view.

5. 360° field of view lens shall provide coverage of 60’ diameter at 40’ mounting height

and 50’ diameter at 20’ mounting height.

6. Aisle lens shall provide coverage of 20’ wide by 60’ length at 40’ mounting height.


8. All controls shall be accessible on unit.

9. Rugged, plastic housing shall be available in white.

10. Ratings: As indicated on construction documents.


June 25, 2014




2.03 Low-voltage sensors and accessories

A. General to Low Voltage Sensors

1. Shall use microprocessor for motion signal analysis and internal, adaptive self-

adjustment.

2. No manual adjustment shall be required at the time of installation or during

operation.

3. Shall automatically adapt to changing room conditions.

4. Shall identify, record and learn a room’s normal occupancy cycles to automatically

adjust the sensitivity threshold.

5. Shall save learned and adjusted settings in non-volatile memory that retains all

settings during power outages.

6. Shall recognize motion detected within 20 seconds of turning off lighting, as a false

off. In response to a false off, the microprocessor shall increase sensitivity, and

increase the time-off setting.

7. Sensor shall recognize as a false on the failure. The sensor shall decrease the

sensitivity in response to a false on.

8. Sensor shall feature a 6-second time-out install test mode, which will automatically

revert to standard time-out no longer than one hour after test mode is initiated.

Sensor shall have manual controls and override switches to force manual

adjustments.

9. Shall provide a concealed bypass switch to force on lighting.

10. Sensitivity shall be adjustable from 0% to 100%.

11. Control knobs shall set the initial settings for automatic sensitivity adjustments.

12. Shall have a switch for restoring factory settings.

13. Timer shall be manually selectable between 30 sec. and 30 minutes.

14. Photocell shall be available. Photocell shall prevent lighting from coming on when the

ambient light levels are above the set point.


16. All controls shall be accessible from front of unit.

17. Rugged, plastic housing shall be available white

18. Shall accept Class 2 wiring.

B. Low-Voltage Multi-Technology Ceiling-Mount


technologies.


3. Shall be available in 180º and 360º coverage patterns.

4. Infrared lenses shall have a 360º field of view.


6. Shall automatically adapt to changing room conditions—including background PIR

levels and continuous airflow.

7. Sensor shall have two modes of operation:

a. Multi-technology mode: where the sensors send infrared signal to the

microprocessor, which makes the decision to turn on lighting based on the

level of the signal.

b. Single technology mode: where the user chooses technology that will turn on

lighting.


June 25, 2014





unit.

9. Shall have mask inserts for PIR rejection to prevent false tripping.

C. Low-Voltage Ultrasonic Ceiling-Mount

1. Shall utilize Doppler shift ultrasonic detection technology.


3. Shall be available in 180º and 360º coverage patterns.


5. Shall automatically adapt to continuous airflow conditions.


unit.

7. Operating status and setting confirmation shall be available via LED motion

indicators.

D. Low-Voltage Infrared Ceiling-Mount

1. Shall utilize passive infrared motion detection.


3. Shall automatically adapt to changing background PIR levels.


unit.

5. Infrared lenses shall have 360º field of view.

6. Shall have mask inserts for PIR rejection to prevent false tripping.

E. Low-Voltage Infrared Ceiling-Mount


technologies.

2. Shall mount on ceiling or wall via supplied mounting bracket.

a. Mounting bracket shall have a place to conceal the wiring connections.

3. Shall automatically adapt to changing room conditions—including background PIR

levels and continuous airflow.

4. Sensor shall have two modes of operation:

a. Multi-technology mode: where the sensors send infrared and ultrasonic

signals to the microprocessor, which makes the decision to turn on lighting

based on the level of each signal.

b. Single tech mode: where the user chooses technology which will turn on

lighting.


unit.

6. Shall have at least a 110° coverage pattern.

7. Shall utilize 40kHz ultrasonic frequency.

F. Low-Voltage Infrared Wall/Corner Sensors

1. Shall utilize passive infrared motion detection.

2. Shall be available in wide view, long range, and high bay infrared lenses.


June 25, 2014




3. Shall mount on ceiling or wall via supplied mounting bracket.

a. Mounting bracket shall have a place to conceal the wiring connections and

provide knockout for surface wire raceway.

4. Shall automatically adapt to changing background PIR levels.


unit.

6. High bay sensor shall have a linear range of at least 60 feet.

G. Power Pack



2. Ratings: As shown on the construction documents.

3. Relay function shall not require more than 5-ma control current to operate.

4. Power Pack shall allow for separation of Class 1 and Class 2 wiring.

5. Power Pack Mounting Specifications:

a. Shall fit inside the ballast cavity of a fluorescent fixture, and shall be qualified

for installation in a ballast cavity.

b. Shall be sized to fit inside a standard, 4” x 4” junction box.

c. Shall be mountable to a 1/2in. knockout within a ballast cavity on the line

voltage end, such that it may be mounted to the outside of a junction box

with the line voltage wiring internal to the box and the low voltage wiring

external.

d. Shall be mountable to a 1/2in. knockout within a ballast cavity on the low

voltage end, such that it may be mounted to the inside of a ballast cavity with

the box and line voltage wiring internal to the cavity and the low voltage

wiring external.

e. Shall fit inside a 4” x 2.125” deep octagon or a 4” x 2.125” deep square with

mud ring electrical junction box.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Site Verification: Verify that wiring conditions, which have been previously installed under

other sections or at a previous time, are acceptable for product installation in accordance

with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Inspection: Inspect all material included in this contract prior to installation. Manufacturer

shall be notified of unacceptable material prior to installation.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. The Electrical Contractor, as part of the work of this section, shall coordinate, receive, mount,

connect, and place into operation all equipment. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish all

conduit, wire, connectors, hardware, and other incidental items necessary for properly

functioning lighting control and occupancy sensors as described herein and shown on the

plans. The Electrical Contractor shall maintain performance criteria stated by manufacturer

without defects, damage, or failure.


June 25, 2014




1. Compliance: Contractor shall comply with manufacturer’s product data, including

shop drawings, technical bulletins, product catalog installation instructions, and

product carton instructions for installation.

B. Power: The contractor shall test that all branch load circuits are operational before

connecting loads to sensor system load terminals, and then de-energize all circuits before

installation.

C. Related Product Installation: Refer to other sections listed in Related Sections for related

products’ installation.

3.03 TESTING

A. Upon completion of all line, load and interconnection wiring, and after all fixtures are installed

and lamped, a qualified factory representative shall completely check the installation prior to

energizing the system. Each installed occupancy sensor shall be tested in the test mode to

see that lights turn off and on based on occupancy.

B. At the time of checkout and testing, the owner’s representative shall be thoroughly instructed

in the proper operation of the system.

3.04 PROTECTION

A. Contractor shall protect installed product and finished surfaces from damage during all

phases of installation including preparation, testing, and cleanup.

END OF SECTION


June 25, 2014


Florence Crittenton LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM – RELAY PANELS

MEP Engineering Project No. 13464 26 09 23.2 - 1

SECTION 26 09 23.2

LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM – DIGITAL RELAY PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. The work covered in this section is subject to all of the requirements in the General

Conditions of the Specifications. Contractor shall coordinate all of the work in this section

with all of the trades covered in other sections of the specification to provide a complete and

operable system. All Labor, materials, appliances, tools, equipment, facilities, transportation

and services necessary for and incidental to performing all operations in connection with

furnishing, delivery and installation of the work of this Section.


A. Furnish and install a complete system for the control of lighting and other equipment as

indicated on the plans, detailed in the manufacturer submittal and as further defined herein.

Contractor is solely responsible to verify quantity, installation locations and wiring requirements

for this project. Specific manufacturer’s catalog numbers, when listed in this section are for

reference only. It is the responsibility of the contractor to verify with lighting control

manufacturer all catalog information and specific product acceptability.

B. The system shall include but not be limited by the following list: Pre-wired, microprocessor

controlled relay panels with electrically held, electronically latched relays panels controlled via

a complete list of communication based accessories including digital switches, digital

photocells, digital SmartBreaker panelboards, Digital Time Clock (DTC) and interface cards

to dimming systems, building automation systems, thermostats, and other devices. The type

of lighting control equipment and wiring specified in this section is covered by the description:

Microprocessor Controlled Digital Relay Lighting Control system with RS 485 Bus

communications. Requirements are indicated elsewhere in these specifications for work

including, but not limited to, raceways and electrical boxes and fittings required for installation

of control equipment and wiring. They are not the work of this section.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 2601 00 – Shop Drawing Requirements.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit dimensioned drawings of lighting control system and accessories

including, but not necessarily limited to, relay panels, switches, DTC, photocells and other

interfaces. Shop drawings shall indicate exact location of each device or a RFI to confirm

location. Plans are diagrammatical. EC to verify all lighting control material requirements

from approved shop drawings. “Cut Sheet” submittal not acceptable.

C. Product Data: Submit for approval 6 copies of manufacturer’s data on the specific lighting

control system and components. Submittal shall be in both electronic and hard copy formats.

To prevent departures from approved system operation, electronic file submitted shall be

able to be directly downloaded to the specified system at manufacturer facility. Submit a

complete bill of materials with part numbers, description and voltage specifications.

D. One Line Diagram: Submit a one-line diagram of the system configuration indicating the type,


June 25, 2014




size and number of conductors between each component if it differs from that illustrated in

the riser diagram in these specifications. Submittals that show typical riser diagrams are not

acceptable.


A. Products shall be manufactured by Lighting Control & Design, Los Angeles, CA,

800.345.4448 or approved equal. Such firms shall be regularly engaged in manufacture of

lighting control equipment and ancillary equipment, of types and capacities required, whose

products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. Any

product other than those listed in this specification must be pre-approved a minimum of two

weeks before bid time. No exceptions.

B. Control wiring shall be in accordance with the NEC requirements for Class 2 remote control

systems, Article 725 and manufacturer specification.

C. A licensed electrician shall functionally test each system component after installation, verify

proper operation and confirm that all relay panel and switch wiring conform to the wiring

documentation. The Electrical Contractor (EC) is required to phone Manufacturer a

minimum of 7 days before turnover for system checkout. At time of Manufacturer contact, all

components to include phone line to modem must be installed, powered and operational.

D. Comply with NEC and all local and state codes as applicable to electrical wiring work.

E. Lighting control panels shall be UL 916 Listed. LCPs controlling emergency circuits shall be

ETL listed to UL 924. Emergency source circuits controlled in normal operation by a relay

panel shall fully comply with NEC 700-9(b). Electrical contractor is responsible for verifying

compliance.

F. The lighting control system shall be listed, approved and comply as required with all national,

state and local energy codes.

1.05 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. Division 1 - Execution Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.

B. Provide 10% spare relays per LCP, up to the maximum capacity of the LCP.

C. Provide CD version of manufacturers operating software to include graphical interface

software.

D. Provide 2 extra sets of as-built and operating manuals.

1.06 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Substitutions are permitted as voluntary alternates. Base bid must reflect the specified

equipment.

B. A product must go through the following process before being approved as a substitution:

1. A list of substitutions shall be provided to the owner as an attachment to the bid

form. Submit along with bill of material, CD of proposed operating system, and a


June 25, 2014




one line diagram of the system configuration proposed indicating the type, size and

number of conductors between each component if it differs from that illustrated in the

riser diagram in these specifications.

1.07 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. The lighting control system is a networked system that communicates via RS485. The

system must be able to communicate with fully digital centralized relay panels, micro relay

panels, smart breaker panels, digital switches, photocells, various interfaces and shall

include all operational software. The intent of the specification is to integrate all lighting

control into one system, except for areas controlled by a single motion sensor such as rooms

with a single luminaire and emergency fixtures designed to operate 24/7. Distributed lighting

control shall be provided using a networked micro relay panel. A centralized relay panel shall

control corridors and site lighting. Lighting control system shall include all hardware and

software. Software to be resident within the lighting control system. System shall provide

local access to all programming functions at the master LCP and remote access to all

programming functions via dial up modem and through any standard computer workstation

running an industry standard internet browser. Lighting control system shall have server built

into the master LCP that “serves” HTML pages to any authorize workstation. Desktop

computers are not part of this section and will be provided by others. Non-networked, non-

digital, non-server capable systems are not acceptable.

B. System software shall provide real time status of each relay, each zone and each group.

C. Lighting control system shall be able to be monitored by and take commands from a remote

PC. At any time, should the remote PC go off-line all system programming uploaded to the

lighting control system shall continue to operate as intended. Systems requiring an on line

PC or server for normal operation are not acceptable.

D. All devices shall be pre-addressed at the factory. Field addressing is not acceptable.

E. All programs, schedules, time of day, etc, shall be held in non-volatile memory for a minimum

of 10 years at power failure. At restoration of power, lighting control system shall implement

programs required by current time and date.

F. System shall be capable of flashing lights Off/On any relay or any zone prior to the lights

being turned Off. The warning interval time between the flash and the final lights off signal

shall be definable for each zone. Occupant shall be able to override any scheduled Off

sweep using local wall switches within the occupied space. Occupant override time shall be

locally and remotely programmable and not exceed 2-hours.

G. The system shall be capable of implementing On commands, Off commands, Raise

(dimming) commands, Lower (dimming) commands for any relay, group or zone by means of

digital wall switches, specification grade line voltage type wall switches, photocell, web based

software or other devices connected to programmable inputs in a lighting control panel.

H. The lighting control system shall provide the ability to control each relay and each relay group

per this specifications requirement. All programming and scheduling shall be able to be done

locally at the master LCP and remotely via dial up modem and via the Internet. Remote

connection to the lighting control system shall provide real time control and real time

feedback.


June 25, 2014




I. System may consist of centralized relay panels, micro relay panels, smart breaker panels,

digital switches, photocells and various digital interfaces. Verify exact components specified.

Micro relay panels, smart breaker panels, centralized relay panels and digital switches shall

communicate as one network via RS485. Micro relay panels, mounted in each local area,

per plans shall control all lighting fixtures in that space, provide power to occupancy sensors

and take input from daylight sensor and occupancy sensors. Micro relay panels shall be

capable of taking inputs from standard, line voltage type switches and outputting up to 8

independent 0v to 10v dimming signals. All micro relay panels and all devices connected to

micro relay panels (switches, photocells and occupancy sensors, etc) shall be wired per

lighting control manufacturers instructions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIAL AND COMPONENTS

A. Relay Panels:

1. NEMA rated enclosure with screw cover or hinged door. Other NEMA types optional.

2. 16 AWG steel barrier shall separate the high voltage and low voltage compartments

of the panel and separate 120v and 277v.

3. LCP input power shall be capable of accepting 120v or 277v without rewiring.

4. Control electronics in the low voltage section shall be capable of driving 2 to 48, 30a,

18,000 SCCR rated latching relays, control any individual or group of relays, provide

individual relay overrides, provide a master override for each panel, store all

programming in non-volatile memory, after power is restored return system to current

state, provide programmable blink warn timers for each relay and every zone, and be

able to control relays that default to Open, Normally Open Latching (NOL) or relays

that default to Closed, Normally Closed Latching (NCL).

5. Lighting control system shall be digital and consist of a Master LCP, Slave LCPs,

Micro LCPs with up to 8 individual relays, digital switches, digital interface cards and

if required, SmartBreaker panelboards. All system components shall connect and be

controlled via a single Category 5, 4 twisted pair cable with RJ45 connectors,

providing real time two-way communication with each system component. Analog

systems are not acceptable.

6. The lighting control system is a networked system that communicates via RS485 and

includes centralized relay panels, micro relay panels, digital switches, photocells,

various interfaces and operational software. The intent of the specification is to

integrate all lighting control into one system. Lighting control system shall include all

hardware and software. Software to be resident within the lighting control system.

System shall provide local access to all programming functions at the DTC and

remote access to all programming functions via dial up modem and through any

standard computer workstation running an industry standard internet browser.

Lighting control system shall have server built into the master LCP that “serves”

HTML pages to any authorized workstation. Desktop computers are not part of this

section and will be provided by others. Non-networked, non-digital systems are not

acceptable.

B. Micro Relay Panels

1. Micro relay panels shall have up to 8-30a, 18,000 SCCR rated lighting relays and

shall control all lighting in the designated area indicated on the plans and be

networked to centralized relay panels, micro relay panels, smart breaker panels,


June 25, 2014




digital switches, photocells, various interfaces. Each micro relay panel shall provide

minimum 300ma at 12/24vdc for powering occupancy sensors. Micro relay panels

that require a separate occupancy sensor power pack are not acceptable.

2. Micro relay panel shall provide a minimum 4-programmable photocell inputs, a

minimum 4-programmable occupancy sensor inputs and matrixed contact closure

inputs. This requirement is to insure integration of entire lighting system into one

networked, lighting control system.

3. Micro relay panels shall be capable of outputting minimum 4 and up to 8 independent

0v to 10v dimming signals, one independent dimming signal at each of 8 relays. In

order to maximize daylight harvesting and minimize disruption to occupants, each

dimming output shall provide adjustment for baseline, start point, mid point, end

point, trim, fade up rate, fade down rate, time delay and enable/disable masking. All

photocell setting must be remotely accessible. Systems providing On, Off with Time

Delay only and systems that do not provide remote access are not acceptable.

C. Standard Output relays

1. UL Listed 30 Amp, Latching, 18,000 SCCR, 277VAC Ballast and HID and 20 Amp

Tungsten at 120 Vac.

2. Relays shall be individually replaceable. Relay terminal blocks shall be capable of

accepting two (2) #8AWG wires on both the line and the load side. Systems that do

not allow for individual relay replacement or additions are not acceptable.

3. Relays to be rated for 250,000 operations minimum at a full 30a lighting load, default

to closed at normal power loss, Normally Closed Latching (NCL). All incandescent

circuits shall be energized by use of a Normally Closed SoftStart™ (NCSS) relay

rated at 100,000 operations at full 20a load. No exceptions.

4. Optional relay types available shall include: Normally Open Latching (NOL) relay

rated for 250,000 operations, a 600v 2-pole NO and NC and a Single Pole, Double

Throw (SPDT) relay.

D. Low Voltage Switches

1. All switches shall be digital and communicate via RS 485. Contact closure style

switches, except as specified for connection to the micro relay panel matrixed contact

closure inputs, shall not be acceptable. The programming for a digital switch will

reside in the switch itself, via double EPROM memory. Any digital switch button

function shall be able to be changed locally (at the DTC or a PC) or remotely, via

modem, Internet or Ethernet.

2. Digital low voltage switch shall be a device that sits on the lighting control system

bus. Digital switch shall connect to the system bus using the same cable and

connection method required for relay panels. System shall provide capability to

locally and remotely program each individual switch button, monitor and change

function of each button locally and remotely. Each button shall be capable of being

programmed for On only, Off only, On/Off (toggle), Raise (Dim up) and Lower (Dim

down). Switches requiring low voltage control wires to be moved from one input

terminal to another to accomplish these functions are not acceptable.

3. Keyed switches shall be programmable and connect to the lighting controls system

bus.

4. Digital switches for high abuse areas (common areas, gymnasiums, etc.) shall be

vandal resistant, contain no moving parts, and be touch sensitive and available with

up to three buttons in a single gang. Multi gang versions shall also be available.

Touch pads shall be Stainless Steel and capable of handling both high abuse and


June 25, 2014




wash down locations. High abuse switches shall connect to the lighting control

system digital bus. Each high abuse switch touch button shall be able to be control

any relay or any group in any panel or panels that is part of the lighting control

system. Each touch button shall be able to be programmed for On, Off, Toggle or

Maintain operation. All programming shall be done locally or remotely via dial up

modem or web interface as described in other paragraphs of this section. High

abuse switches shall be able to be enabled or disabled digitally. Each touch pad is to

be identified as to function by an engraved label. Switches must be capable of

handling electrostatic discharges of at least 30,000 volts (1cmspark) without any

interruption or failure in operation.

E. DTC - Digital Electronic Time Clock

1. A Digital Time Clock (DTC) shall control and program the entire lighting control

system and supply all time functions and accept interface inputs.

2. DTC shall be capable of up to 32 schedules. Each schedule shall consist of one set

of On and Off times per day for each day of the week and for each of two holiday

lists. The schedules shall apply to any individual relay or group of relays.

3. The DTC shall be capable of controlling up to 126 digital devices on a single bus and

capable of interfacing digitally with other individual busses using manufacturer

supplied interface cards.

4. The DTC shall accept control locally using built in button prompts and use of a 8 line

21-letter display or from a computer or modem via an on-board RS 232 port. All

commands shall be in plain English. Help pages shall display on the DTC screen.

5. The DTC shall be run from non-volatile memory so that all system programming and

real time clock functions are maintained for a minimum of 15 years with loss of

power.

6. Pre-installed Unity™ lighting control software shall provide via local or remote PC a

visual representation of each device on the bus, show real time status and the ability

to change the status of any individual device, relay or zone. System shall be

capable of running optional Unity GX lighting control software, which shall provide for

directly importing vector based graphics. No exceptions.

7. Pre-Installed modem that allows for remote programming from any location using a

PC. Modem to include all necessary software for local or remote control.

8. DTC shall provide system wide timed overrides. Any relay, group or zone that is

overridden On, before or after hours, shall automatically be swept Off by the DTC a

maximum of 2 hours later.

F. PHOTOCELL: Photocells to be mounted in location indicated on the plans. Photocells used

for exterior lights shall provide multiple trips point from one roof mounted unit. All trips points

shall be able to be changed remotely via Internet or dial up modem. Photocells requiring

manual trip point adjustment are not acceptable. Photocell used for interior lighting control

shall have multiple settings such as start-point, mid-point, off-point, fade-up, fade-down, etc.

All settings shall be remotely accessible and adjustable. Systems providing local adjustment

only are not acceptable. Photocells to be certified to comply with the current energy code

covering this project at time of submittal of plans for building permit.

G. Interfaces: For future expansion capability, system to have available all of the following

interfaces. Verify and install only those interfaces indicated on the plans.

1. A dry contact input interface card that provides 14 programmable dry contact closure

inputs. Use shielded cable to connect input devices to interface card.


June 25, 2014




2. Interface card providing digital communication from one system bus to another

system bus, allowing up to 12,000 devices to communicate.

3. A voice prompted telephone override interface module. Interface module shall accept

up to 3 phone lines and allow up to 3 simultaneous phone calls. Voice prompted

menu and up to 999 unique pass codes shall be standard with each interface

module.

4. Direct digital interface to SmartBreaker panelboards. Relay panel and SmartBreaker

panelboard circuits shall appear on the system software as similar, yet distinct, items

and maintain all functions and features of the system software.

5. Direct digital interface to DMX 512 based systems. DMX interface shall provide 14

global commands, each of which can be modified locally or remotely using lighting

controls manufacturer supplied software. DMX interface shall be integral to the

system bus and shall connect and be controlled via a single Category 5, 4 twisted

pair cable, providing real time response from the lighting control system to DMX

commands.

6. Direct digital interface to building automation systems using DDC protocols such as

BACnet, Metasys (N2) and ModBus that accept on/off commands, time schedules

and report status of all relays in all panels in real time. Interface cards shall “self

populate” each individual relay and each group to the BAS. All BAS system

programming required shall be the responsibility of the BAS system provider.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Mount relay control cabinets adjacent to respective lighting panelboard. Cabinet shall be

surface or flush mount, per plans. Wiring between relay control cabinet and panelboards is

to be per local codes and acceptable industry standards. Under no circumstances will any

extra be authorized for payment to the EC or GC due to the EC’s lack of knowledge or

understanding of any and all prevailing codes or specified manufacturer’s installation

requirements. Neatly lace and rack wiring within cabinets. During construction process,

protect all interior components of each relay panel and each digital switch from dust and

debris. Any damage done to electronic components due to non-protection shall be the sole

responsibility of the installing contractor.

B. Switches: Provide outlet boxes, single or multi-gang, as shown on the plans for the low

voltage digital switches. Mount switches as per plans. Supply faceplates per plans and

specifications. EC is specifically responsible to supply and install the required low voltage

cable, Category 5, 4 twisted pair, with RJ45 connectors and snagless boots (commonly

referred to as Cat 5 patch cable) between all switches and panels. Field-test all Cat 5 patch

cable with a recognized cable tester. All low voltage wire to be run in conduit, per local codes.

C. Wiring

1. Do not mix low voltage and high voltage conductors in the same conduit. No

exceptions.

2. Ensure low voltage conduits or control wires do not run parallel to current carrying

conduits.


June 25, 2014




3. Place manufacturer supplied “terminators” at each end of the system bus per

manufacturer’s instructions.

4. Neatly lace and rack wiring within cabinets.

5. Plug in Category 5 patch cable that has been field-tested with a recognized cable

tester, at the indicated RJ45 connector provided at each lighting control device, per

manufacturer’s instructions.

6. Use Category 5 patch cable for all system low voltage connections. Additional

conductors may be required to compensate for voltage drop with specific system

designs. Contact Manufacturer or refer to the manual for further information. Use

shielded cable for dry contact inputs to lighting control system.

7. Do not exceed 4000ft-wire length for the system bus.

8. All items on the bus shall be connected in sequence (daisy chained). Star and spur

topologies are not acceptable.

9. The specified lighting control system shall be installed by the electrical contractor

who shall make all necessary wiring connections to external devices and equipment,

to include photocell. EC to wire per manufacturer’s instructions.

3.02 INSTALLATION AND SET-UP

A. Verify that conduit for line voltage wires enters panel in line voltage areas and conduit for

low-voltage control wires enters panel on low-voltage areas. Refer to manufacturer’s plans

and approved shop drawings for location of line and low-voltage areas. It is the responsibility

of the contractor to verify with lighting control manufacturer all catalog information and specific

product acceptability.

B. For approved line voltage type micro relay panel switches connected to matrixed inputs of the

micro relay panel, furnish #18 AWG solid conductors. For all other digital switches provide

wiring required by system manufacturer.

C. For classroom digital switches provide wiring required by system manufacturer.

D. Contractor to test all low voltage cable for integrity and proper operation prior to turn over.

Verify with system manufacturer all wiring and testing requirements.

E. Before Substantial Completion, arrange and provide a one-day Owner instruction period to

designated Owner personnel. Set-up, commissioning of the lighting control system and

Owner instruction includes:

1. Confirmation of entire system operation and communication to each device.

2. Confirmation of operation of individual relays, switches, occupancy sensors and

daylight sensors.

3. Confirmation of system Programming, photocell settings, override settings, etc.

4. Provide training to cover installation, maintenance, troubleshooting, programming,

and repair and operation of the lighting control system.

F. Panels shall be located so that they are readily accessible and not exposed to physical

damage.

G. Panel locations shall be furnished with sufficient working space around panels to comply with

the National Electric Electrical Code.

H. Panels shall be securely fastened to the mounting surface by at least 4 points.


June 25, 2014




I. Unused openings in the cabinet shall be effectively closed.

J. Cabinets shall be grounded as specified in the National Electrical Code.

K. Lugs shall be suitable and listed for installation with the conductor being connected.

L. Conductor lengths shall be maintained to a minimum within the wiring gutter space.

Conductors shall be long enough to reach the terminal location in a manner that avoids strain

on the connecting lugs.

M. Maintain the required bending radius of conductors inside cabinets.

N. Clean cabinets of foreign material such as cement, plaster and paint.

O. Distribute and arrange conductors neatly in the wiring gutters.

P. Follow the manufacturer’s torque values to tighten lugs.

Q. Before energizing the panelboard, the following steps shall be taken:

1. Retighten connections to the manufacturer’s torque specifications. Verify that

required connections have been furnished.

2. Remove shipping blocks from component devices and the panel interior.

3. Remove debris from panelboard interior.

R. Follow manufacturers’ instructions for installation and all low voltage wiring.

S. Service and Operation Manuals:

1. Submit operation and service manuals. Complete manuals shall be bound in flexible

binders and data shall be typewritten or drafted.

2. Manuals shall include instructions necessary for proper operation and servicing of

system and shall include complete wiring circuit diagrams of system, wiring

destination schedules for circuits and replacement part numbers. Manuals shall

include as-built cable Project site plot plans and floor plans indicating cables, both

underground and in each building with conduit, and as-built coding used on cables.

Programming forms of systems shall be submitted with complete information.

T. Comply with energy code lighting control system “Acceptance Requirements”. Acceptance

tests are used to verify that lighting controls were installed and calibrated correctly. These

tests may require that a responsible party certify that controls are installed and calibrated

properly. This is the installing contractor’s responsibility. Verify requirements with building

authority.

3.03 DOCUMENTATION

A. Each relay shall have an identification label indicating the originating branch circuit number

and panelboard name as indicated on the drawings. Each line side branch circuit conductor

shall have an identification tag indicating the branch circuit number.

B. Provide a point-to-point wiring diagram for the entire lighting control system. Diagram must


June 25, 2014




indicate exact mounting location of each system device. This accurate “as built” shall

indicate the loads controlled by each relay and the identification number for that relay,

placement of switches and location of photocell. Original to be given to owner, copies placed

inside the door of each LCP.

3.04 SERVICE AND SUPPORT

A. Start Up: EC shall contact Manufacturer at least 7 days before turnover of project.

Manufacturer will remotely dial into the lighting control system, run diagnostics and confirm

system programming. EC shall be available at the time of dial in to perform any corrections

required by Manufacturer. EC is responsible for coordinating with GC and the owner the

installation of a dedicated telephone line or a shared phone line with A/B switch. Phone jack

to be mounted within 12” of Master LCP. Label jack with phone number. EC to connect

phone line from jack to Master LCP.

B. Telephone factory support shall be available at no additional cost to the EC or Owner both

during and after the warranty period. Factory to pre-program the lighting control system per

plans and approved submittal, to the extent data is available. The specified manufacturer, at

no added cost, shall provide additional remote programming via modem as required by the

EC or Owner for the operation life of the system. Upon request manufacturer to provide

remote dial up software at no added cost to system owner. No exceptions.

C. Provide a factory technician for on-site training of the owners’ representatives and

maintenance personnel. Coordinate timing with General Contractor. Provide one day of

factory on-site training.

3.05 CLEANING

A. Division 1 - Execution Requirements: Final cleaning.

B. Clean photocell lens as recommended by manufacturer.

C. Clean all switch faceplates.

END OF SECTION


June 25, 2014


Florence Crittenton SWITCHBOARDS


SECTION 26 24 13

SWITCHBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Provide switchboards in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For switchboard and overcurrent protection device types and necessary

accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For each switchboard, include:

1. One-line diagram and schedules indicating individual components and ratings. As a

minimum, include ampere, voltage, phase, and AIC ratings.

2. Plans and elevations indicating dimensions, conduit entrance sizes and locations,

arrangement of overcurrent protection, frame sizes of overcurrent protection, and

installation details including mounting.

3. Scaled plans and elevations for installed space of switchboard indicating clearances

and service space relative to adjacent surfaces.


A. Switchboards and panelboards throughout the project shall be of the same manufacturer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Cutler- Hammer/Eaton Corp

B. General Electric

C. Siemens Energy & Automation

D. Square D

2.02 GENERAL

A. Switchboard AIC ratings as indicated or required are established by the lowest rated component

of the switchboard. Series rating is not permitted unless otherwise noted. Switchboards shall

be certified by the manufacturer as having been tested as a complete unit under fault conditions

to withstand the AIC rating indicated or required. Standard tests per UL standards.

B. Switchboards shall have 100 percent rated tin-plated aluminum buses for each phase and

neutral. Provide 50 percent rated copper ground bus. Switchboards shall be suitable for use as

service equipment where indicated. Through buses shall run horizontally at the rear of each

section with the buses stacked edge-to-edge. Unused spaces shall have busing for future use,

unless otherwise noted.


June 25, 2014


Florence Crittenton SWITCHBOARDS


C. Switchboards shall be free standing, totally enclosed, dead front with only front accessibility

required. The framework is to be code gauge steel, rigidly welded and bolted together to

support all cover plates and component devices during shipment and installation.

D. Nameplate information shall include catalog number or factory order number, date of

manufacturing, UL Listed label, ampere, voltage, phase, and AIC ratings.

E. The switchboard shall be provided with adequate lifting means and shall be capable of being

rolled or moved into installation position.

F. Enclosures shall be NEMA 1 type unless NEMA types 3R, 3S, 5, and 12 are indicated or

required. Enclosures shall have ANSI 49 gray enamel electrodeposited over cleaned

phosphatized steel.

G. A utility metering compartment for instrument transformers as indicated or required in the

service entrance section of a switchboard shall be coordinated with the Utility Company for

requirements and provided accordingly.

H. Switchboard Main Disconnect(s)

1. Circuit Breaker(s): Fixed mounted molded case electronic trip type with ratings as

shown on the Drawings. A means to padlock in the OFF position shall be provided.

Equip with ground fault protection as indicated or required.

I. Distribution Section

1. Circuit Breaker(s): Fixed mounted molded case electronic trip type with ratings as

indicated on the Drawings. A means to padlock in the OFF position shall be provided.

Equip with ground fault protection as indicated or required.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Prior to energizing, retighten all field connections to manufacturer's torque specifications, check

that all grounding connections are proper, exercise all devices to make certain that they operate

properly.

B. Provide facilities for future connection of additional secondary loads. Two 3 inch spare conduits

shall be stubbed out above ceiling or run to an accessible location.

C. Main and branch disconnects shall be clearly identified as to service, frame size, circuit breaker

trip setting or fuse size and type.

END OF SECTION


June 25, 2014


Florence Crittenton PANELBOARDS


SECTION 26 24 16

PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Provide panelboards in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For panelboard and overcurrent protection device types and necessary

accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard, include:

1. Schedules indicating individual components and ratings. As a minimum, include

ampere, voltage, phase, and AIC ratings.

2. Drawings shall contain overall panelboard dimensions, interior mounting dimensions,

and wiring gutter dimensions, conduit entrance sizes and locations, arrangement of

overcurrent protection, and installation details indicating mounting.

3. Scaled plans and elevations for installed space of panelboard indicating clearances

and service space relative to adjacent surfaces.


A. Panelboards and switchboards throughout the project shall be of the same manufacturer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Cutler-Hammer/Eaton Corp

B. General Electric


D. Square D

2.02 INTERIORS

A. Panelboard AIC ratings as indicated or required are established by the lowest rated component

of each panelboard. Series rating is not permitted unless otherwise noted. Each panelboard

shall be certified by the manufacturer as having been tested as a complete unit under fault

conditions to withstand the AIC rating indicated or required. Standard tests per UL standards.

B. Panelboards shall have 100 percent rated aluminum buses for each phase and neutral.

Ground buses shall have rating and number and size of circuit connections per UL

requirements for connection to equipment grounding system. Provide 100 percent rated copper

ground bus for panelboards rated 225 amperes and less. Panelboards shall be suitable for use

as service equipment where indicated.


June 25, 2014




C. Interior trim shall be of dead-front construction.

D. Nameplate information shall include catalog number or factory order number, date of

manufacturing, UL Listed label, ampere, voltage, phase, and AIC ratings.

E. Main overcurrent protection and main lug interiors shall be field convertible for top or bottom

incoming feed. Interior leveling provisions shall be provided for flush mounted applications.

F. Enclosures shall be NEMA 1 type unless NEMA types 3R, 3S, 5, and 12 are indicated or

required. Enclosures shall have ANSI 49 gray enamel electrodeposited over cleaned

phosphatized steel.

G. Doors shall have cylindrical tumbler type locks with catch and spring-loaded stainless steel door

pull. All lock assemblies shall be keyed alike. Provide 2 keys with each lock.

H. A circuit directory frame and card with clear plastic covering shall be mounted on the inside of

door.

2.03 BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS

A. Column-width type panelboards, and panelboards 14 inches (35.56 cm) wide and smaller, are

not permitted unless otherwise indicated. Provide auxiliary wiring gutters adequately sized for

wiring connections.

B. UL Listed panelboards with 200 percent rated solid neutral shall be plated copper for non-linear

load applications. Panelboards shall be marked for non-linear load applications.

C. Isolated ground panelboards shall have separate isolated grounding lug and 50 percent rated

copper isolated ground bus for connection to isolated equipment grounding system.

D. Multiple section panelboards shall have required feed through lugs (or factory busing) for

interconnection.

E. Fronts shall be hinged 1-piece with door. Mounting shall be flush or surface as indicated on

Drawings.

F. Fronts shall be flat with concealed door hinges and trim screws. Front shall not be removable

with the door locked.

G. Each section of a multiple section panelboard shall be the same size. For two section

panelboards, the left side shall be "left hinged" and right side shall be "right hinged" unless

hinging restricts code egress clearances.

2.04 CIRCUIT BREAKER DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS

A. UL Listed panelboards with 200% rated solid neutral shall be plated copper for non-linear load

applications. Panelboards shall be marked for non-linear load applications.

B. Fronts shall be hinged 1-piece with door. Mounting shall be flush or surface as indicated on

Drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


June 25, 2014




3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Mount panelboards with top of trim 6.5 feet above the finish floor, unless otherwise indicated.

B. The fire rated integrity of walls in which flush mounted panelboards are installed shall be

maintained.

C. Field check phase loading and reconnect circuits as necessary for phase balance.

D. Prior to energizing, retighten all field connections to manufacturer's torque specifications, check

that all grounding connections are proper, exercise devices to make certain that they operate

properly.

E. A separate neutral conductor shall be installed with each branch circuit fed from panelboards

having a double or 200% neutral bus, unless otherwise indicated.

F. A separate neutral conductor shall be installed with each branch circuit protected by an arc-fault

circuit interrupter circuit breaker.

G. Provide facilities for future connection of additional loads. Two 1 inch spare conduits shall be

stubbed out above ceiling or run to an accessible location from each flush mounted branch

circuit panelboard. Two 2 inch spare conduits shall be stubbed out above ceiling or run to an

accessible location from each flush mounted distribution panelboard.

H. Directory cards shall be completely filled out with all circuits adequately marked and shall be

typewritten. Room numbers shall be confirmed prior to completion. Spares shall be marked

"SPARE" in pencil. Spaces shall be marked "SPACE" in pencil.

END OF SECTION


June 25, 2014


Florence Crittenton MOTOR STARTERS AND CONTROLS


SECTION 26 24 19.40

MOTOR STARTERS AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Manual motor starter switches, Magnetic motor starters, and Combination starters and

disconnects integral with mechanical equipment shall be provided with mechanical equipment

under Division 22 and 23 unless noted otherwise on the drawings. Electrical connections shall

be made under Division 26.

B. Magnetic motor starters not integral with mechanical equipment shall be provided under

Division 22 and 23 unless noted otherwise on the drawings. Installation and final connections

shall be made by Division 26.

C. Manual motor starter switches and combination starters and disconnects not integral with

mechanical equipment shall be provided under Division 26 unless noted otherwise on the

drawings. Installation and final connection shall be made under Division 26.

D. Motor starters are not always shown symbolically on the plans. Refer to schedules on the

drawings for quantities and types to be provided.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals shall be submitted in accordance with Section 26 01 00 and shall, as a minimum

include the following:

1. Manufacturer's descriptive catalog data.

2. Short circuit ratings.

3. Wiring diagrams and schematic ladder diagrams.

4. Nameplate data and legends.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Manual motor starter switches shall be as manufactured by:

1. Square D

2. General Electric

3. Allen Bradley

4. Cutler-Hammer

B. Magnetic motor starters shall be as manufactured by:

1. Square D – type S with Motor Logic solid state overload relay

2. General Electric – 300 line with CR324X solid state overload relay

3. Allen Bradley– Bulletin 509 with SMTP-2 solid state overload relay

2.02 MANUAL MOTOR STARTER

A. Manual motor starter switches shall be flush-mounting type except where conduits are run


June 25, 2014




exposed or as otherwise noted. Manual motor starter switches shall be complete with properly

sized melting alloy type thermal overload relay protection and a neon pilot light. Manual motor

starter switches shall be equivalent to Square D Class 2510 with stainless steel plates.

2.03 MAGNETIC MOTOR STARTERS

A. Magnetic motor starters shall be NEMA ICS-2, AC, General Purpose Class A, rated in

horsepower for induction motors. Coil operating voltage shall be as required and a maximum of

120 volts. Include solid state overload relay, pushbutton operator in front cover with operation

indicating lights.

B. Provide magnetic motor starters for all motors that are interlocked with external pilot duty

devices, and for all 3 phase motors. Magnetic motor starters shall have overload protection on

all current phases, and shall include low voltage release. Magnetic motor starters and overload

protection shall be size coordinated with the driven equipment.

C. Special attention is drawn to specific motor controller components or ratings as may be

diagrammed or scheduled on the mechanical and electrical drawings. All components or

ratings shall be furnished for motors indicated.

D. Overload relay assemblies shall be solid state type with an adjustable dial or dip switch, settable

to motor manufacturer's suggested overload amperage. Each overload unit shall be factory

calibrated as a unit. Overload devices shall be fully ambient compensated. Class 10 tripping

time shall be provided except where long acceleration time of a high inertia load requires the

use of a Class 20 trip time. Motor overload protection shall include current sensing single

phase protection which trips the starter within three seconds upon detection of a single phase

condition. Overload devices that utilize bi-metal devices or melting alloy devices to sense motor

overload are not acceptable.

E. Contactor, solenoid, and control circuit devices shall be supplied for operation with 120 volt

control power, unless noted otherwise. Provide factory installed control transformers with UL

Class CC primary fuse protection and secondary fuses, in accordance with the latest edition of

the National Electrical Code, within the starter enclosure for all voltage systems that do not

allow for direct access to 120 volts, including 208 volt, 3 phase, 3 wire systems. Control power

shall be so arranged as to de-energize the control circuits whenever the operating power

supplied to the particular equipment is disconnected.

F. Furnish all motor starters with auxiliary contacts as required by the application or as shown on

the drawings. In addition to auxiliary contacts required for operation, furnish one normally open

and one normally closed contact for future use. Provide an alarm contact, electrically separate

from the trip contact, for remote annunciation of thermal overload trip condition.

G. Coordinate with Division 22 and 23 and provide auxiliary contacts as required for application of

fire alarm system interface.

H. Where combination starters and disconnects are required by the application or by drawings,

they shall have the following features:

1. Combination motor starters shall include overcurrent protection by means of circuit

breaker, motor circuit protector, or as indicated on drawings. Combination starters

shall be a package starter and overcurrent protection in same enclosure. Combination

starters shall be equipped with padlockable lock-off feature and front accessible

defeatable door interlock disconnect mechanism.


June 25, 2014




2. Mount pilot devices on the unit. Pilot devices shall not be mounted on the door. Pilot

devices shall be accessible with door closed. Overload relays shall be reset from

outside the enclosure by means of an insulated bar or button.

3. Circuit breakers shall be HACR type, thermal-magnetic, quick-make, quick-break,

trip-free and trip indicating. Multi-pole breakers shall be common trip, use of tie bars or

pins is not acceptable. Minimum interrupting rating shall be 10,000 amperes or 14,000

amperes for 208Y/120 volts or 480Y/277 volts respectively.

4. Motor circuit protectors shall be HACR type, magnetic only, with a single adjustment

which simultaneously sets the magnetic trip level of each individual pole. Motor circuit

protectors shall comply with NEC requirements for providing motor circuit protection

when installed as part of a listed controller having motor overload protection. The

interrupting ratings shall be established when they are used in combination with motor

starters with properly sized overload devices. Motor circuit protectors shall be

quick-make, quick-break, trip-free and trip indicating. Motor circuit protectors shall be

common trip, use of tie bars or pins is not acceptable. Minimum interrupting rating shall

be 10,000 amperes or 14,000 amperes for 208Y/120 volts or 480Y/277 volts

respectively.

I. UL NEMA 1 enclosures shall be used in indoor locations and dry, UL NEMA 3R enclosures

shall be used in exterior or wet locations. UL NEMA 12 or 12X enclosures shall be utilized

where required. Enclosures shall be finish painted except where NEMA standards conflict.

J. Motor starters shall be fully NEMA rated for service for which they are applied. NEMA ratings

shall be used.

K. Contactors shall be capable of withstanding the available short circuit current at their point of

connection. Where available short circuit currents exceed the ratings of contactors, current

limiting fuses or other current limiting means shall be employed to protect contactors.

Coordinate with Division 26 for available short circuit current values at connections.

L. Provide "Hand-Off-Auto" selector switches for automatically controlled motor starters and push

button switches for manually controlled motor starters, per drawings and as required by control

specifications. Selector switches shall be of heavy duty, 600 volt, oil-tight construction, with

appropriate nameplates.

M. Provide pilot lights for magnetic motor starters as indicated on the drawings and control

specifications, and for all motors 10 horsepower and larger. Pilot lights shall be heavy duty,

oil-tight, transformer type, push-to-test, with long life 6 volt lamps. Pilot light lens colors shall be

as follows:

MODE COLOR

Running Red

On Red

Auto Amber

Off Green

High Speed White*

Low Speed White*


June 25, 2014




*Red lenses to be provided if separate "Running" or "On" pilot light is not provided.

N. For motors 7-1/2 horsepower and larger, supplemental devices to protect the motor against

loss of phase (phase rotation and single phasing protection) shall be provided. Devices to meet

this requirement shall be of the current sensing type and shall be provided as a separate

device. Units shall have manual or automatic reset and adjustable limits. Units shall be

TimeMark Corporation 257 series or acceptable substitution.

O. SCR type solid state starters shall be provided as required or as scheduled on the drawings.

Whether indicated on the drawings or not, provide SCR reduced voltage solid state starters for

all 200 volt, three phase motors 30 horsepower and larger. Reduced voltage starters shall be

derated for site conditions. SCR type solid state reduced voltage starters shall have the

following features:

1. Current Limit: The current limit feature shall limit the motor current to a preset level at

all times during start and run conditions. Current limit shall be adjustable between 150

percent and 425 percent of motor full load current (MFLC) via a potentiometer located

behind the cover.

2. Acceleration Ramp Time: Provide a linear voltage ramp during acceleration to provide

a smooth, soft start. Acceleration ramp time shall be adjustable between 0.5 and 30

seconds.

3. Solid State Overload Protection: Solid state overload protection with external manual

reset shall be included as an integral part of the starter. Trip settings shall be made via

DIP switches located behind the cover, eliminating the need for separate thermal unit

selectivity. Approximate trip times shall be 75 seconds at 2 times maximum full load

current and 15 seconds at 4.25 times maximum full load current per NEMA Class 10

trip characteristics.

4. Phase Loss: If one or more phases fail, shutdown shall occur, starting shall be

inhibited, and the phase loss LED shall illuminate. Correcting the phase loss condition

shall automatically reset the starter.

5. Shorted SCR Detection: The shorted SCR circuitry shall be activated when control

power and line power are available and the starter is turned off. If one or more shorted

SCRs are detected, starting shall be inhibited and the shorted SCR LED shall

illuminate. Shorted SCR detection shall be inhibited via a DIP switch setting behind the

cover. In this mode, the starter shall be able to be operated, but the shorted SCR LED

shall continuously flash on and off.

6. Diagnosis: Flush-mounted, red light-emitting diodes (LEDs) shall be provided for

monitoring of motor and starter status. The LEDs shall indicate: control power

(available), starter on, overload trip, phase loss, and shorted SCR.

P. Provide engraved lamacoid nameplates, screwed on the door of each control unit for

identification of equipment controlled. Do not use abbreviations for equipment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. In finished areas, mount manual motor starter switches flush and install suitable coverplate. In


June 25, 2014




unfinished areas, mount manual motor starter switches adjacent to associated driven

equipment. Provide mounting hardware, unistrut rack and accessories as required for the

application.

B. Install magnetic motor starters and combination motor starter and disconnects immediately

adjacent to associated driven equipment and within site of motor and drive equipment. Provide

mounting hardware, unistrut rack, and accessories as required for the application.

C. In utility areas, mount manual motor starter switches, magnetic motor starters, and combination

motor starter and disconnects on adjacent walls maintaining NEC required access. Where

required, due to access requirements, mount manual motor starter switches, magnetic motor

starters, and combination motor starter and disconnects on free standing unistrut stands

adjacent to equipment.

D. On roofs, or other exterior locations, mount manual motor starter switches, magnetic motor

starters, and combination motor starter and disconnects on equipment or provide free standing

unistrut stand adjacent to equipment. Coordinate locations with Architect prior to installation.

E. Motor and starter wiring shall be done in complete accordance with wiring diagrams provided by

the supplier. Interlock wiring shall also be provided as required in each case. Control wiring

shall be minimum of 14 gauge, Class B stranded labeled, or color coded, copper conductor with

SIS, THHN, or XHHW insulation.

F. Furnish and install labels and nameplates in accordance with Section 26 01 00. Provide neatly

typed label inside motor starter enclosure identifying motor served, nameplate horsepower, full

load amperes, code letters, and service factor.

G. Check the rotation of all three phase motors and reconnect same where necessary to provide

the proper direction of rotation as required for the driven unit. Check all starters for proper

overload settings.

H. Provide fuses, including spare fuses, as indicated on the drawings and as indicated in Section

26 28 16 for all fused combination magnetic motor starters.

I. Touch-up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finish.

J. Verify and document that control sequences, time delay, and adjustments are as indicated on

the drawings.

K. Provide shop drawings in accordance with Article 1.02 and Section 26 01 00.

END OF SECTION


June 25, 2014


Florence Crittenton ELECTRICITY METERING


SECTION 26 27 13

ELECTRICITY METERING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Provide ammeters, voltmeters, and watt-hour meters in accordance with the Drawings and

Specifications.

B. Provide necessary accessories, instrument transformers, and wiring.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For metering equipment and necessary accessories, including a list of metered

values.

B. Shop Drawings: Wiring diagrams, including integration with equipment, ratings of components,

sizes and color coding of wiring.

1.03 QUALITY

A. Metering equipment shall be of same manufacturer as power distribution equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Cutler-Hammer/Eaton Corp

B. General Electric


D. Square D

2.02 AMMETERS, VOLTMETERS, AND WATT-HOUR METERS

A. Ammeters and voltmeters shall be direct-reading full-range indicating type with 4.5 inch (115

mm) square recessed case, 90 degree scale, white dial with black figures and pointer, and 2

percent accuracy. Transfer switch shall be rotary multistage snap-action type with 600 V

contacts, engraved escutcheon plate, pistol-grip handle, and four positions including OFF.

B. Watt-hour meters shall be 3 phase induction type with 3 stators, each with current and potential

coil, rated 5 A and 120 V at 60 Hz. Meter shall be suitable for connection to 3 or 4 wire circuits.

Include four-dial clock register with integral demand indicator and contact devices to operate

remote impulse totalizing demand meter. Provide with appropriate multiplier tags. Meter shall

be removable with semi-flush mounting and matching cover, and draw-out test plug.

2.03 ELECTRONIC CIRCUIT MONITORS

A. Electronic circuit monitors shall provide true rms metered values. Information provided by each

circuit monitor shall include frequency, current, demand current, voltage, real power, reactive


June 25, 2014




power, apparent power, demand power, predicted demand power, power factor, accumulated

energy, accumulated reactive energy, total harmonic distortion (THD) of each phase current

and voltage, and K-factor of each current.

B. The current and voltage signals shall be digitally sampled at a rate high enough to provide valid

data for waveform analysis and true-rms metering. Includes the following features:

1. Captures, and store in internal memory, 64 digitally sampled data points for each cycle

of each phase voltage and current.

2. Can transmit waveform samples over the network to a personal computer workstation

for display, archival, and analysis.

3. Each voltage and current of all the phases shall be sampled concurrently so that proper

phase relationships are maintained, so that harmonic analysis can be performed, and

so that the effect of a disturbance can be observed on all phase voltages and currents.

4. Harmonic analysis performed on the captured waveforms shall resolve harmonics

through the 31st.

C. Circuit monitors shall be rated for an operating temperature range of -25 degrees C (-13

degrees F) to 70 degrees C (158 degrees F) and have an overcurrent withstand rating of 500 A

for 1 second.

D. Setup parameters, maximum and minimum values for each of the instantaneous values

reported, as well as the time and date that the minimum or maximum was set, shall be stored in

nonvolatile memory and retained in the event of a control power interruption. Any battery or

other device used to provide non-volatile memory shall be serviceable from the front of the

circuit monitor and servicing shall not require removing the circuit monitor from the equipment in

which it is mounted.

E. The circuit monitors shall accept inputs from industry standard instrument transformers (120 V

secondary potential transformers and 5 A secondary Current transformers).

F. The circuit monitor shall be accurate to 0.15 percent of reading plus 0.05 percent of full scale

for voltage and current metering, and 0.3 percent for all power and energy functions. No

recalibration by users shall be required to maintain these accuracies.

G. Circuit monitors shall surface or flush mount to an enclosure and be provided with an attractive

finish bezel ring. Equip with an integral, continuous duty, long-life display to provide local

access to the metered quantities as well as the minimum and maximum value of each

instantaneous quantity since last reset of min/max. Reset and setup functions shall have a

means for protection against unauthorized or accidental changes. For ease in operator viewing,

the display shall remain on continuously, with no detrimental effect on the useful life of the

circuit monitor.

H. The circuit monitor shall be equipped with a front panel communications port as standard

equipment. The port shall be completely accessible during normal operation and shall not

require exposure of the operator to power distribution equipment voltages. The operator shall

be able to quickly connect a small personal computer to this port without use of tools or splices.

This front panel port shall have all of the communication functionality of the standard hard

wired rear port. When a connection is made to the front port, the circuit monitor shall disregard


June 25, 2014




communication from the rear port until the front port is disconnected.

I. It shall be possible to field upgrade the firmware to enhance functionality. These firmware

upgrades shall be done through either the front or rear communication connection. No

disassembly or changing of integrated circuit chips shall be required. It shall not be necessary

to de-energize the circuit or the equipment to upgrade the firmware.

J. Each circuit monitor shall be capable of receiving a broadcast message over the

communications network that can be used to synchronize demand calculations by several

circuit monitors. This message need not be addressed specifically to any one circuit monitor.

K. Each circuit monitor shall be capable of operating a solid state KYZ output relay to provide

output pulses for a user definable increment of reported energy. Minimum relay life shall be in

excess of one billion operations.

L. Provide circuit monitor with input/output modules and relays as indicated or required for special

control functions described on the Drawings. Control functions shall be initiated by

programmed logic based on metered quantities or through command sent over the

communication link.

M. Data logging may be accomplished either within the circuit monitor or at the personal computer

workstation, or both. Each circuit monitor shall be able to log data, alarms and events, and

multiple waveforms. The monitors shall offer up to 356 kilobytes of on-board non-volatile

memory. This information shall be communicated to the personal computer workstation upon

demand.

N. Alarm events shall be user definable. For each over/under metered value alarm, the user shall

be able to define a pick-up, drop-out, and delay. There shall be three alarm severity levels in

order make it easier for the user to respond to the most important events first. Indication of an

alarm condition shall be given on the front panel.

O. Where indicated on the drawings, the circuit monitors shall be designed to run customized

programs to greatly expand the functionality for the particular installation.

1. These programs shall be written in a circuit monitor programming language similar to a

compiled "BASIC" language.

2. The circuit monitor manufacturer shall offer regularly scheduled classes to instruct

owners on how to develop custom programs. In addition, the manufacturer shall offer

custom programming services.

3. Changing programs shall not require any physical modifications to the circuit monitor,

such as changing computer chips or cards. All changes shall be done via either of the

communications ports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Components and devices included within power distribution equipment shall be factory installed,

wired and tested prior to shipment to the job site.


June 25, 2014




B. All control power, CT, PT, and data communications wire shall be factory wired and harnessed

within the equipment enclosure.

C. Where external circuit connections are required, terminal blocks shall be provided and the

manufacturer's drawings must clearly identify the interconnection requirements including wire

type to be used.

END OF SECTION


June 25, 2014


Florence Crittenton WIRING DEVICES


SECTION 26 27 26

WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Provide wiring devices and accessories in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. 1,2: Single-Pole and Double-Pole, respectively.

B. 3,4: Three-Way and Four-Way, respectively.

C. GFI, GFCI: Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter

D. IG: Isolated Ground.

E. K: Key-Operated.

F. P: Pilot Light - Load On.

G. PO: Pilot Light - Load Off.

H. TR: Tamper Resistant.

I. TVSS: Transient Voltage Surge Suppressor.

J. V: Variable Speed.

K. WR: Weather Resistant

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each product specified.

B. Samples: As requested.


A. Wiring Devices and accessories shall be of the same manufacturer insofar as possible.

B. Device plates and accessories shall match corresponding wiring devices.

C. Devices shall comply with UL 943 (Safety for Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Wiring Devices and Device Plates:

1. Cooper Wiring Devices

2. Hubbell

3. Leviton

B. Weatherproof Enclosure:

1. Hubbell

2. Taymac


June 25, 2014




3. Thomas and Betts

4. Raco

2.02 RECEPTACLES

A. Straight-Blade-Type Receptacles: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, DSCC W-C-

596G, and UL 498. Standard and WR types shall be heavy-duty, specification grade, 20A,

unless otherwise indicated or required. Devices to be Hubbell 5362 series or approved

equivalent.

B. Straight-Blade-Type Receptacles TR type shall be commercial specification grade, 20A, unless

otherwise indicated or required. Devices to be Hubbell CR series or equivalent.

C. Straight-Blade and Locking Receptacles: Heavy-Duty grade. NEMA configuration as shown

on drawings.

D. GFI, GFCI Receptacles: Straight blade, non-feed-through type, Heavy-Duty grade, with

integral NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R duplex receptacle; complying with UL 498 and UL

943. Design units for installation in a 2-3/4-inch- deep outlet box without an adapter.

E. Industrial Heavy-Duty Pin and Sleeve Devices: Comply with IEC 309-1.

2.03 SWITCHES

A. General: 1, 2, 3, 4, K, P (red polycarbonate lighted handle), PO (clear polycarbonate lighted

handle) types shall be Hubbell 1221 series, heavy-duty, specification grade, 20A, unless

otherwise indicated or required.

B. 30A Type: 1, 2, and 3 types shall be Hubbell 3031 series, heavy-duty, specification grade,

unless otherwise indicated or required.

C. Body Color: 15A, blue. 20A, red. 30A, green.

D. Momentary Contact Type: Three position, two circuit, center off type shall be Hubbell 1557

series, heavy-duty, specification grade, 20A, with toggle or key as indicated.

E. Maintained Contact Type: Three position, two circuit, center off type shall be Hubbell 1385

series, heavy-duty, specification grade, 20A, with toggle or key as indicated. Single or double

pole as indicated.

F. V Type: Single pole slide AC type, with white device color. Hubbell or equivalent.

2.04 WIRING DEVICE COLOR

A. Wiring device color to be white unless otherwise indicated or required. Verify color with

Architect prior to submittals.

2.05 DEVICE PLATES

A. Securing Screws: Metal with finish to match device plate.

B. Nylon: White unless otherwise indicated. Verify color with Architect prior to submittals.


June 25, 2014




C. Stainless steel: 0.04-inch-thick (1-mm-thick) type 302 stainless steel.

D. Brass: 0.04-inch-thick (1-mm-thick) brass (70% copper, 10% zinc), smooth satin finish (without

lines) appearance.

E. Aluminum: 0.05-inch-thick (1.3-mm-thick) aluminum, smooth clear anodized satin finish

(without lines) appearance.

F. Brass plated Steel: 0.03-inch-thick (.8-mm-thick) brass plated steel, smooth satin finish

(without lines) appearance, coated to inhibit oxidation.

G. Chrome plated Steel: 0.03-inch-thick (.8-mm-thick) chrome plated steel, smooth satin finish

(without lines) appearance, coated to inhibit oxidation.

2.06 WEATHERPROOF ENCLOSURES

A. NEMA 3R rating while in use when used with manufacturer’s recommended outlet box.

Gaskets are closed-cell foam. Meets OSHA lockout and tagout requirements. Enclosures shall

have latching covers and cord openings. UL listed and CSA certified with clearly marked logos.

Covers include gasket and mounting screws. Lids have gasketless design. Holes for padlocks

are 1/4 inch (0.635 cm).

B. Non-metallic type shall be of impact resistant polycarbonate with transparent cover which

provides visibility to the connection.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Receptacles over-counter shall be mounted horizontally, and vertically mounted elsewhere,

unless otherwise indicated. Mount horizontal receptacles with neutral blade slot up, and mount

vertical receptacles with ground prong hole up.

B. Where receptacles are installed within one stud spacing width from a switch, the convenience

outlet and switch shall align vertically.

C. Switches shall be located as indicated on drawings, arranged singular or in gangs and within 18

inches (45.72 cm) of door jamb on the strike side of the door openings. Group adjacent

switches under single multi-gang wall plate. Verify the door swings with the Architectural

drawings prior to rough-in.

D. Match receptacles and special purpose outlets to Owner-furnished equipment, unless otherwise

indicated.

E. Switch and receptacle combinations shall be as above in a 2-gang box where both are of the

same voltage. Provide separate boxes where different voltages are present.

F. Install device plates as required for all device boxes and blanked outlet boxes.

G. Install devices and device plates plumb and secure.

H. Device plates shall be marked on the inside indicating panelboard and circuit number to which

the device is connected.


June 25, 2014




I. Device plates for two or more switches indicated at the same location shall be marked on the

outside to identify the load and location of load which each switch controls.

J. Device plates for P type toggle switches shall be marked on the outside of each switch to

identify the load and location of load which the switch controls.

K. Device plates for special purpose outlets shall be marked on the outside to identify the load and

NEMA configuration of the receptacle.

L. Devices indicated as weatherproof shall have a weatherproof enclosure unless otherwise

noted. Weatherproof enclosures for receptacles shall be marked on the outside "SUITABLE

FOR WET LOCATION WHILE IN USE."

M. All 15 ampere and 20 ampere, 125 volt and 250 volt, non-locking receptacles installed in damp

or wet locations shall be listed as weather resistant (WR).

N. Labeling of device plates on the inside shall be by way of indelible marker. Labeling of device

plates on the outside shall be by way of adhesive labels.

O. Adhesive labels shall be of clear or white Kroy, Brother, or Brady tape with black 1/4 inch (0.635

cm) minimum height upper-case letters.

P. Factory engraved labels shall be of black 1/4 inch (0.635 cm) minimum height recessed upper-

case letters.

Q. Dimmer switches shall be coordinated with lamps and ballasts shown to be dimmed. Ensure

compatibility between dimmer switch and ballast, lamp type or LED driver within fixture.


A. Protect wiring devices and assemblies during painting. Install device plates when painting is

complete.

B. Internally clean devices, device outlet boxes, and enclosures. Replace stained, damaged, or

defective components.

C. Test receptacles for proper polarity and ground continuity. Operate each receptacle at least six

times and replace receptacles which are damaged or defective.

D. Operate each switch at least six times and replace switches which are damaged or defective.

E. Test GFCI receptacles with both local and remote fault simulations according to manufacturer

recommendations.

END OF SECTION


June 25, 2014


Florence Crittenton LOW VOLTAGE CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE DEVICES


SECTION 26 28 00

LOW VOLTAGE CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Provide fuses of type, size and manufacturer in accordance with the Drawings and

Specifications.

B. Provide circuit breakers of type, size and manufacturer in accordance with the Drawings and

Specifications.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Project Data: Include the following for each product specified:

1. Coordination curves for each fuse type and size.

2. Coordination curves for each circuit breaker type protecting motors and feeders.

3. Coordination study comparing all fuses and circuit breakers protecting motors and

feeders. Include settings for electronic trip circuit breakers.

4. If other than Bussmann fuses are provided, submit let-through values based upon the

available short circuit current values indicated on the one-line diagram.


A. Obtain fuses from one source and by a single manufacturer.

B. Obtain circuit breakers from one source and by a single manufacturer which is the same

manufacturer as panelboard, switchboard, disconnecting device, etc.

C. Provide overcurrent protection which is selectively coordinated to properly localize a fault

condition by restricting outages to the equipment affected.


A. Spare Fuses: Furnish quantity equal to 20 percent of each fuse type and size installed, but not

less than 2 sets of 3 of each type and size.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Circuit Breakers:

1. Cutler-Hammer/Eaton Corp.

2. General Electric

3. Siemens Energy & Automation


June 25, 2014




4. Square D

B. Fuses:

1. Cooper-Bussmann

2. Littlefuse

3. Ferraz-Shawmut

2.02 CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. Circuit breakers shall be molded case, thermal-magnetic, quick-make, quick-break, trip-free

and trip indicating unless otherwise noted. Multi-pole breakers shall be common trip, use of tie

bars or pins is not acceptable. Circuit breakers in distribution panelboards and switchboards

with frame sizes above 100 amperes shall have a single magnetic trip adjustment located on

the front of the circuit breaker.

B. Standard Rated Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: Molded case, microprocessor-based, true rms

sensing type with the following features:

1. Interchangeable rating plugs.

2. Adjustments for:

a. Long Time Pickup.

b. Instantaneous Pickup.

c. Long Time Delay.

d. Short Time Pickup.

e. Short Time Delay (I2t IN and I

2t OUT).

f. Ground Fault Pickup with integral testing.

3. LED long time pickup indication.

4. Thermal magnetic backup protection.

5. Long time and ground fault memory.

C. Circuit breakers in panelboards shall be bolted-in type unless otherwise noted.

D. Minimum interrupting rating shall be 10,000 amperes or as required to maintain the panelboard

integrated short circuit rating in accordance with Drawings and Specification.

E. Application listing shall be appropriate for application, including switching fluorescent lighting

loads or heating, air-conditioning, and refrigerating equipment.

2.03 FUSES

A. Fuse types shall be as indicated on the drawings and equipment schedules.

B. Provide Class "J" time delay for mechanical equipment supplied with IEC rated disconnects,

starters, or combination starter.

2.04 SPARE FUSE CABINET

A. Cabinet: Wall-mounted, 0.05-inch- (1.27-mm-) thick steel unit with full-length, recessed piano-

hinged door with key-coded cam lock and pull.


June 25, 2014




1. Size: Adequate for orderly storage of spare fuses specified with 15 percent spare

capacity minimum.

2. Finish: Gray, baked enamel.

3. Identification: Stencil legend "SPARE FUSES" in 1-1/2-inch (40-mm) letters on door.

4. Fuse Pullers: For each size fuse.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Verify mechanical equipment overcurrent protective device size and type with name plate data

and starter data.

B. Install typewritten labels on inside door of each fused switch to indicate fuse replacement

information.

C. Install spare fuse cabinet near the main service equipment, unless otherwise noted, with neatly

stored boxes of spare fuses within.

D. Provide settings on circuit breakers per manufacturer’s recommendations.

END OF SECTION

100% Construction Documents June 25, 2014

DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS Florence Crittenton SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES MEP Engineering Project No. 13464 26 43 13 - 1

SECTION 26 43 13

SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES (SPDs) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Provide 3-phase, 4-wire surge protection devices (SPDs) as indicated on the panel board schedules and on the one line riser diagram.

B. As a minimum provide SPDs for all service entrance panels and switchboards as well as all

new distribution panels 600 amperes and above. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections apply to this section.

1.03 DESCRIPTION

A. General: Surge Protection Device [Surge Arresters and Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors (TVSS)] is the description and equipment required for the protection of all AC electrical circuits and electronic equipment from the effects of lightning induced voltages, external switching transients and internally generated switching transients.

1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND PUBLICATIONS

A. General: The latest edition of the following standards and publications shall comply to the work of this section:

1. Underwriters Laboratories 1449 - (UL 1449 3

rd edition or current safety standard for

Surge Protection Devices) 2. Underwriters Laboratories 1283 - (UL 1283 listed as an electromagnetic interference

filter that provides noise attenuation)

3. Underwriters Laboratories 67 - (UL 67 internal integration of TVSS in panel board)

4. Canadian Standards Association (CSA, CUL)

5. National Electrical Code 2008 - (NEC Article 285 SPD Installation practice/NEC Article 250 Grounding)

a. Article 100, A Surge Protective Device (SPD) must limit transient voltage by

diverting or limiting surge current; it also should prevent continued flow of follow current while remaining capable of repeating these functions. A surge protective device (SPD) that utilizes fuses must have repetitive surge capability that can survive its surge rating and meet UL 1449.

b. Section 285.6, SPD (Surge Arrester or TVSS) shall be marked with a short

circuit current rating and shall not be installed at a point on the system (ex. service, distribution or branch panels) where the available fault current (AIC rating) is in excess of that rating.

6. IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineering Inc.) C62.41.1 and C62.41.2



– 2002 rev. - (System shall be designed to meet C62.41)

a. C62.41.2-2002 Section 7.2 long duration 10 x 1,000 µSEC test to be compliant if the device exhibits less than 10% deviation from initial readings.

Units must be tested to withstand and pass the 10 x 1,000 µSEC test. b. IEEE C62.45 – 2002 rev. - (System shall be tested to meet the C62.45).

c. Category A & B - (0.5 µs x 100 kHz Ring Wave).

d. Category B3 Biwave - (8 x 20 µs at 3,000 Amperes and 1.2 x 50 µs at 6,000 Volts).

e. Category C3 Biwave - (8 x 20 µs at 10,000 Amperes and 1.2 x 50 µs at 20,000 Volts).

7. The fusing elements must be capable of allowing the suppressor’s rated single

impulse current to pass through the suppressor at least one time without failure. The system shall be tested to 1,000 sequential per C62.45-2002 section B.38 referencing C62.41.1 and C62.41.2 Category C3 combination wave transients. The Category C3 combination wave is defined as a 1.2 x 50 microsecond wave at 20,000 volt open circuit voltage waveform and 8 x 20 microsecond wave at 10,000 ampere short circuit current waveform. In addition, the system components shall be tested repetitively 1,000 times testing based on an IEEE C62.33 (MOV test) and C62.35 (SAD test) without failure or degradation exceeding ±10%.

8. CBEMA (ITIC) and IEC - (Computer Business Equipment Manufacturers Association

or Information Technology Industry Council and International Electrotechnical Commission define clamping voltage tolerance guidelines for sensitive equipment) SVRs must meet voltage tolerance guidelines:

a. SVR clamp levels for wye and single phase (L-N, L-G and N-G): 400-600V

for 120V systems, 800-1200V for 277V systems and 1200-1500V for 347V systems.

b. SVR clamp levels for delta circuits (L-L and L-G): 1000-1200V for 240V systems, 1500-1800V for 480V systems and 1800-2000V for 600V systems.

9. All manufacturers must comply with above listed standards and any additions

current revisions of industry standards. All products that do not comply with current industry standards will not be accepted.

1.05 MANUFACTURER QUALIFICATIONS

A. In order to establish a level of quality for these Construction Documents, Current Technology, Inc. shall be the basis of design.

B. All products submitted shall comply with the specifications of the Current Technology model

type specified herein. Manufacturers requesting product approval must meet or exceed the written specification contained herein.

C. The registered service mark (brand) must be owned by the Manufacturer. No private label

accepted.

D. Manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 certified: Quality Systems – Model for Quality Assurance in Design, development, Production, Installation, and Servicing.

E. The Manufacturer must be regularly engaged in the manufacture of surge suppression

products for the specified categories for no less than ten (10) years.



F. All surge protective devices for service entrance, distribution, and branch circuit protection within a facility shall be provided by a single manufacturer.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. The SPD and supporting components shall be guaranteed by the manufacturer to be free of defects in material and workmanship for a period of five (5) years from the date of substantial completion of service and activation of the system to which the suppressor is attached.

B. Any SPD that shows evidence of failure or incorrect operation during the warranty period

shall be replaced free of charge. Since “Acts of Nature” or similar statements typically include the threat of lightning to which the SPDs shall be exposed, any such clause limiting warranty responsibility in the general conditions of this specification shall not apply to this section.

C. Exclusions and prorating will not be allowed. Warranties extended in excess of the

manufacturer’s standard warranty are not acceptable for the purpose of the specification. 1.07 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit product data and shop drawings with complete description of material components. B. Manufacturer’s certified test data indicating the ability of the product to meet or exceed

requirements of this specification.

C. Drawings, with dimensions, indicating SPD mounting arrangement and lead length configuration, and mounting arrangement of any optional remote diagnostic equipment and assemblies.

D. All submittals for approved equals must be made ten (10) days prior to bid date.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. The SPD shall protect all modes and there shall be seven discrete suppression circuits; 3 modes connected Line to Ground, 3 modes connected Line to Neutral, and 1 mode connected Neutral to Ground for 3-phase, 4-wire, plus ground voltage system. Line to Neutral ground is not an acceptable substitute for Line to Ground. Line to Neutral to Line and Line to Ground to Line (in combination) will be acceptable for Line to Line protection.

B. Each SPD must be in a Powered Steel NEMA Type 4 enclosure (IP66), and be of a no-

power consuming design, except for indicator light.

C. SPD unit must not be affected by humidity, altitude, external EMI or RFI and must not generate EMI or RFI.

D. The SPD shall be equal to Eaton’s Innovative Technology based on Voltage & Amperage,

and Repetitive Surge Withstanding Capabilities as well as let-through voltage; and, 20 year warranty.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION



A. The installing contractor shall install the parallel SPD with short and straight conductors as

practically possible. B. The contractor shall follow the SPD manufacturer’s recommended installation practice as

found in the equipment installation instructions (to be included in package with each unit).

C. The installation shall conform to all applicable codes.

D. All conductors associated with SPD devices shall be installed in conduit. Conductor size as shown on the one line riser diagram. Line and grounding conductors shall not be smaller than a #14 AWG copper.

END OF SECTION


June 25, 2014


Florence Crittenton LIGHTING


SECTION 26 51 00

LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Provide luminaires, lamps, ballasts, and accessories in accordance with the Drawings and

Specifications.

B. Luminaires requiring caps, mounting spaces, hold-down clips or other accessory items shall be

furnished complete with same whether the descriptions, catalog numbers, and notes on the

Drawings include such items or not.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each luminaire and accessory specified including lamps and ballasts.

B. Photometric reports performed by independent testing laboratory.

C. Point-by-point computer generated calculations for area(s) and criteria indicated on Drawings.

D. Samples: As requested.


A. Lamps: 10 lamps for every 100 of each type installed, but not less than 1.

B. Ballasts: 1 for every 100 of each type installed, but not less than 1.

C. Lenses: 1 for every 100 of each type installed, but not less than 1.

D. Guards: 1 for every 20 of each type installed, but not less than 1.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Luminaires shall be of manufacturer and type as indicated or scheduled on the Drawings.

B. Lamps:

1. General Electric

2. Osram/Sylvania

3. Philips

4. Venture (for metal halide products)

C. Fluorescent Ballasts:

1. General Electric

2. Osram/Sylvania

3. Advance


June 25, 2014




4. Universal Lighting Technologies

D. Fluorescent Dimming Ballasts:

1. Osram/Sylvania (Excluded for Compact Fluorescent)

2. Advance

3. Lutron

4. Universal Lighting Technologies (Excluded for Compact Fluorescent)

E. HID Ballasts:

1. Advance

2. Osram/Sylvania

3. Universal Lighting Technologies

F. Battery Pack Assemblies:

1. Bodine

2. Lightolier

3. Lithonia

2.02 GENERAL

A. Luminaires shall have manufacturer’s standard finish unless otherwise noted. Provide "Damp

Location" label where indicated or required.

B. Recessed or semi-recessed luminaires shall be designed to be compatible with ceiling as

installed. Furnish and install frames where required for proper installation. Supply with trim that

is compatible with ceiling system in which it shall be installed.

C. Luminaires shall have integral ballasts unless otherwise noted. Ballasts for recessed luminaires

shall be fully accessible through ceiling opening of luminaire unless otherwise noted.

D. Luminaires shall be of the prewired type with integral junction box.

E. Luminaires shall be labeled with acceptable lamping. Labeling shall be in a location that is

visible during re-lamping.

2.03 FLUORESCENT LUMINAIRES

A. Luminaires may be connected with factory supplied whips of six foot lengths or less.

B. Luminaires shall have metallic surfaces protected with rust-inhibiting white baked enamel.

Reflective surfaces shall have minimum 85 percent reflectance, white enamel, high

temperature baked. Provide all wiring channels, internal barriers, socket wiring covers, end

caps, reflectors, etc.

C. Acrylic diffuser type lenses shall be virgin acrylic, 0.125 inches thick minimum.

D. Doors shall be capable of hinging from either side and gasketed to prevent leakage of light

around door frame edges.

2.04 LAMPS

A. If incandescent lamps are used, they shall be rated at 130 volts, and they shall be of the inside

frost type unless otherwise noted.


June 25, 2014




B. Fluorescent lamps shall utilize rare earth triphosphor technology.

C. Fluorescent T8 and compact fluorescent lamps shall be 4100 K color temperature and Color

Rendering Index of 82 or greater.

D. High intensity discharge lamps shall be designed for mounting positions as required by the

luminaire in which they are installed.

E. Metal halide lamps shall be color corrected if luminaire photometrics are unaffected and

acceptable to manufacturer.

F. Ballast and lamp combination shall be compatible and deliver normal ballast and lamp life.

Rated lamp output shall not vary in response to input voltage within 10% of rated voltage.

2.05 ELECTRONIC FLUORESCENT BALLASTS

A. Unless otherwise noted, linear or U-tube lamp ballasts shall be fully electronic, integrated circuit,

solid-state, programmed rapid-start, full-light-output, energy-efficient type. The ballast shall be

physically interchangeable with a standard core and coil electromagnetic ballast.

1. Ballast shall operate lamps at a frequency of 40 Khz or higher without visible flicker.

2. Audible Noise Rating: Sound rating better than A.

3. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD): Less than 10 percent.

4. Power Factor: 0.98 or higher.

5. Ballast Factor: 0.88 or higher.

6. Crest Factor: 1.6 or less.

7. Certification by Electrical Testing Laboratory (ETL) or internally certified laboratory to

ensure ballast meets ANSI specifications.

8. Conform to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) rules and regulations, Part

18, for non-consumer equipment.

9. Conform to ANSI C82.11 standards regarding harmonic distortion.

10. Conform to ANSI C62.41 Cat. A for transient protection.

11. UL listed Class P.

12. Minimum starting temperature of 0 degrees F.

B. Compact fluorescent lamp ballasts shall be fully electronic, integrated circuit, solid-state,

programmed rapid start, full-light-output, energy-efficient type. The ballast shall be physically

interchangeable with a standard core and coil electromagnetic ballast.




June 25, 2014





4. Power Factor: 0.98 or higher.

5. Ballast Factor: 0.95 or higher.









12. Minimum starting temperature of -5 degrees F.

C. Dimmable ballasts for linear and U-tube lamps shall be fully electronic, integrated circuit, solid-

state, programmed rapid start, full-light-output, energy-efficient type with 100-5% (100-10% for

4-lamp) dimming range. The ballast shall be physically interchangeable with a standard core

and coil electromagnetic ballast.



3. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD): Less than 10 percent at full output and less than 20

percent at lowest light output.

4. Power Factor: 0.98 or higher at full output and 0.95 or higher at lowest light output.

5. Ballast Factor: 0.94 or higher for 1 or 2 lamp and 0.88 or higher for 3 or 4 lamp.










D. Dimmable ballasts for compact fluorescent lamps shall be fully electronic, integrated circuit,

solid-state, programmed rapid start, full-light-output, energy-efficient type with 100-1% dimming


June 25, 2014




range. The ballast shall be physically interchangeable with a standard core and coil

electromagnetic ballast.




4. Power Factor: 0.98 or higher at full output and 0.90 or higher at lowest light output.

5. Ballast Factor: 0.88 or higher at full output and 0.05 or higher at lowest light output.


7. Certification by Electrical Testing Laboratory (ETL).

8. Certified Ballast Manufacturers (CBM) certification and labeling that ballast has been

performance tested by ETL to meet ANSI specifications.







E. Manufacturer shall provide a five year warranty beginning at the time of Substantial Completion.

The manufacturer shall replace any and all failed ballasts within 48 hours of notification.

Manufacturer shall provide labor for warranty replacements, phone number, and fax number to

report outages.

F. Compact fluorescent type shall have circuitry designed to shut down the system reliably and

safely when lamps have reached their end-of-life to protect against overheated bases and

sockets, as well as cracking of the lamp glass wall.

2.06 HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE BALLASTS

A. Ballasts shall be high power factor constant wattage auto-transformer type.

B. Exterior high intensity discharge ballasts shall be capable of starting lamps at minus

20 degrees F.

2.07 ACCESSORIES

A. Battery Pack Assemblies: Fluorescent luminaires indicated to include battery packs shall

contain a battery pack assembly consisting of a battery, charger, inverter, and electronic

circuitry enclosed in one compact red case. Battery packs shall operate two lamps to produce

a minimum of 1100 lumens unless otherwise noted. Luminaire shall have valid UL label with

battery pack installed at luminaire manufacturer's factory.


June 25, 2014




1. Test Switch and LED Indicator Light: Charging indicator light to monitor the charger

and battery with test switch and hardware. Visible and accessible without opening

fixture or entering ceiling space, and integral to luminaire unless otherwise noted.

2. Battery: High-temperature, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type with minimum 10-

year nominal life. Capable of operating lamp for a minimum of 90 minutes.

3. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type.

4. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when supply circuit voltage drops to 80

percent of nominal voltage or below. Relay disconnects lamp and battery and

automatically recharges when normal voltage is restored.

5. Self-testing and Self-diagnostic: Continually monitors charging current and battery

voltage, and automatically performs a minimum 30 second test and diagnostic routine

at least once every 30 days and once a year for 90 minutes. Unit indicates failure by a

status indicator light and audible alarm.

6. Battery packs within egress lighting fixtures shall be connected to the uncontrolled hot

leg of the local lighting circuit.

B. Poles, bracket arms, appurtenances, and anchorage material shall be of matching color. Same

shall be sufficient to support effective projected areas of luminaires and pole supplied without

failure, permanent deflection, or damage to lamp filaments against steady winds of 100 mi/hr

with a gust factor of 1.3.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Confirm compatibility and interface of other materials with luminaire and ceiling system. In the

event of any discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect. Do not proceed with installation in

areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been resolved.

B. Coordinate the installation of luminaires with the schedule of work of other trades to prevent

unnecessary delays in the total work.

C. Where luminaires are shown in conflict with locations of structural members, mechanical or

other equipment, furnish and install all required supports and wiring to clear the encroachment.

D. Luminaires shall be installed as indicated and/or noted and in accordance with the NEC and the

manufacturer's recommendations. Where mounting dimensions are not shown, refer to

Architectural drawings for installation details.

E. Luminaires shall be located in accordance with architectural reflected ceiling plans unless

otherwise indicated. Luminaire locations shall be exactly moduled with ceiling tile where same

occurs.

F. Recessed luminaires shall be complete with all required hardware and accessories in each

case. Where "lay-in" luminaires cannot be used in suspended ceilings, recessed luminaires

shall be installed complete with bar hangers and shall be supported from the ceiling suspension

system.

G. In areas with "lay-in" ceilings, support wires shall be used to connect recessed, surface, or

pendant mounted luminaires to the structure above. Recessed and surface mounted


June 25, 2014




luminaires shall also be positively attached to the suspension system of the "lay-in" ceiling

assembly.

H. Surface-mounted luminaires shall be supported from outlet box fixture studs, mounting brackets

or mounting straps or shall be secured directly to the structural system. Outlet boxes and

mounting brackets (or straps) shall be secured to a joist or similar structural unit or to an

approved metal support which is secured to such a structural unit. The use of toggle bolts for

luminaire support shall not be permitted.

I. Wall-mounted luminaires shall be supported by wall brackets secured to luminaire studs in the

outlet boxes or to outlet box "ears."

J. Pendant mounted luminaires shall hang even regardless of uneven or sloping ceilings.

Maximum pendant spacing shall be 4 feet where luminaires having 4 foot channels are used.

"Twin" stem assemblies shall not be permitted.

K. Installation of luminaires in mechanical rooms shall be coordinated with the ductwork and other

obstructions. Provide special hangers as required.

L. Luminaires shall be provided with new lamps prior to final acceptance of the project. Any lamps

used for more than ninety (90) days as temporary lighting shall be replaced by the contractor.

Fluorescent lamps that are dimmed shall be “burned-in” without any dimming for 100 hours

after installation and prior to Owner occupancy.

M. Poles are to be set on concrete base provided by General Contractor. Concrete 24 inch

extended bases shall be provided only where within confined parking areas. All other pole

bases shall be adjusted to grade level. Contractor shall deliver anchor bolts and templates

furnished with poles to General Contractor for setting in concrete base. Provide conduit sleeves

in bases for conductors and grounds. Verify locations and type of base, extended or flush, with

Architect prior to installation.

N. Ballasts shall be integrally mounted in all luminaires unless otherwise noted.

O. All fluorescent luminaires that utilize double-ended lamps and contain ballast(s) that can be

serviced in place shall have a disconnecting means either internal or external to each

luminaire per 2008 NEC, Article 410.130 G(1).

P. Photocells shall be mounted in a protected area facing north and shall be shielded to prevent

influence from other night lighting sources. Set relay contact closure at approximately 2

footcandles (20 lux).

Q. Battery packs within egress lighting fixtures shall be connected to the uncontrolled hot leg of the

local lighting circuit.

R. Clean all luminaires of construction dirt and paint prior to project close out. Use methods and

materials recommended by manufacturer.

S. Dimmer switches for control of dimmable luminaires shall be coordinated with the type of ballast

or LED diver to ensure compatibility.

END OF SECTION


June 25, 2014


Florence Crittenton PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS


SECTION 270528

PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 STANDARDS AND CODE COMPLIANCE

A. Contract Documents must clearly define and specify responsibilities to Furnish Rough-In /

Install ``/ and Connect:

1. Outlet boxes – by Electrical Contractor

2. Punch down blocks – by Owner Communication Contractor

3. Equipment racks – by Owner Communication Contractor

4. Empty raceway – by Electrical Contractor

5. Voice cable – by Owner Communication Contractor

6. Data cable – by Owner Communication Contractor

7. RJ11 connectors – by Owner Communication Contractor

8. RJ45 connectors – by Owner Communication Contractor

9. F connectors for video connection – by Owner Communication Contractor

B. All materials and installation practices provided must conform to the following standards and

codes:

1. ANSI/TIA/EIA 568A-5, Enhanced Category 5

2. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568A Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard

3. ANSI/EIA/TIA-569 Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways

and Spaces

4. ANSI/EIA/TIA-606 Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure

of Commercial Buildings

5. ANSI/EIA/TIA-607 Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for

Telecommunications

6. Building Industries Consulting Services International (BICSI)

7. Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM)

8. Local and national electrical codes

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INTERIOR DELIVERY

A. Provide cable tray for the full length of all main corridors to Server Room and to each

Telecom Room. Provide cable tray above all server racks in Server Room. J-hooks may be

attached to cable tray unistrut for delivering other cables systems such as security and

sound. Provide cable tray support system based on cable fill and all cable weights. Cable

management extending from the cable tray to utilization equipment shall be provided by

district’s cable installer.

B. Provide two (2) 4” conduits with innerduct between telecom closets at each level.

Communication Contractor shall make terminations to patch panels.


June 25, 2014


Florence Crittenton PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS


C. Final data outlet locations will be determined by the Communication Contractor. At each

location provide 4-square box with 1” empty EMT to accessible ceiling and reducing trim ring.

Where power outlets are indicated for computer terminal usage, provide data outlets as

indicated.

D. Section Includes

1. Equipment and terminal backboards

E. In the absence of other information, standards of the following organizations apply:

1. Qwest Communications Inc.

2. Comcast

F. Materials Summary

1. Telephone Termination Backboard:

a. Non-painted plywood

b. Fire-retardant treated

c. ¾” x 48” x 96”

(1) Provided by the General Contractor

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WORKMANSHIP

A. Installation will be done per industry standards and best practices procedures.

END OF SECTION


June 25, 2014


Florence Crittenton PAGING SYSTEMS


SECTION 27 51 13

PAGING SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Paging system to provide paging and mass notification to all common areas, classrooms and

administration areas of the facility. System to be integrated with a multiple tone generator

capable of multiple schedules. Provide system products per list of specific manufacturers or

approved equal.

1. Bogen

2. Simplex

3. Valcom

B. Work in this section is included in the general construction contract.


A. Section 26 01 00 Basic Electrical Requirements

B. Section 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical

C. Section 27 05 28 Pathways for Communication Systems

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:

1. Required

B. Shop Drawing: Required

1. 66 Block wiring diagrams with paging zone connections.

2. 66 Block wiring diagrams with paging interconnecting wiring diagrams of connections to the

A/V system, phone system, tone generator.

C. System wiring diagrams of all speaker locations and wiring routes used to connect each

speaker.

1. Diagram must include identification of cable and wiring pair used at each speaker location

and end termination.

D. One line diagrams showing typical connections for all equipment in the paging system.

E. Riser diagram for the system showing in technically accurate detail all connections,

interconnections, and all provisions available and made for adaptability of all specified future

functions and test data necessary to determine that all system components deliver the proper

sound levels.

F. Certificate of completion of installation and service training.


June 25, 2014




G. Samples: As required

H. Closeout:

1. Submittals listed above, updated to record status.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 EQUIPMENT AND DEVICES

A. Amplifier

1. PCM-2000 System manufactured by the Bogen Company:

a. Telephone Interface Module – PCMTIM

b. Central Processing Module – PCMCPU

c. 3-Zone Module – PCMZPM

d. System Amplifier - TPU-250

e. Uninterruptible Power System (UPS) - Triplite OmniPro

f. 4-port VoIP Gateway MVP410BG

2. Paging speakers: Mixture of lay-in (ceiling),speaker/clock combinations, flush-mounted

paging horns, surface-mounted paging horns, and wall mounted speakers as required in the

various locations:

a. Lay-in speakers: Bogen S86T725PG8WBRVR

b. Wall-mounted speakers: Bogen WBS8T725

3. Speaker wire: White, 6 pair Category 3, plenum rated, 24 AWG- solid conductor wires

(Comtran 2628 or equal).

4. Microphone : Desktop paging microphone, dual impedence, commercial public address and

paging applications.

a. Desktop Paging Micrphone: Bogen MBS1000A

b. It shall be a dynamic-type, cardioid, dual-impedance desktop microphone. The

frequency response shall be uniform from 45 Hz to 15 kHz. Impedance shall be selected

via a switch on the underside of the microphone base.

c. Impedances shall be 500 ohms (matching 125 ohms to 1,000 ohms) or 50,000 ohms

(matching 50k ohms or greater). Voltage output shall be -72 dB at Lo-Z, and -52 dB at

Hi-Z.

d. The microphone shall provide push-to-talk and lift-to-talk operation. The push-to-talk

bar shall include a locking mechanism. Provision shall be included to defeat lift-to-talk

operation. The microphone and relay switching shall be accomplished with long life

DPDT professional leaf switches. The microphone circuit shall be wired normally open.

e. The microphone shall be in an ABS plastic case with a rubberized black finish and a die-

cast base. It shall be supplied with 7 feet of 4-conductor cable, 2 conductors individually

shielded, and shall be permanently wired into the microphone. Dimensions shall be 4-

3/8" W x 9-3/8" H x 5-7/8" D. Weight shall be 1-1/4 lb.

B. Multiple Tone Generator

1. Model TG4C System manufactured by the Bogen Company:

a. Rated output level of one volt RMS into a 600-ohm load.

b. Minimum 4 types of tones.

(1) Pulse alarm tone.

(2) Slow whoop

(3) Repetitive chime

(4) Steady tone signal


June 25, 2014




c. The pulsed signal shall be a square wave with cycle on/off timing of 1.2 seconds on, 0.4

seconds off, 1.6 secondson, and a frequency range of 650-1300 Hz. The slow whoop

signal shall be a slowly ascending, low to high swept signal with cycle on-off timing of

1.2 seconds on, 0.4 seconds off, 1.6 seconds on, and a frequency range of 500-1200

Hz. The chime tone shall be a signal with exponential decay slope of 6.5 seconds, cycle

on-off timing of 0.3 seconds on, 0.7 seconds off, and a frequency range of 650-1300 Hz.

The steady tone shall be a square wave with adjustable frequency range of 650-1300

Hz. The all-solid-state unit shall offer a choice of continuous signal of any of the four

tone-types or double-burst signal of any tone type except steady tone.

d. The tone generator shall accommodate input from a high-level program source. Built-in

precedence shall allow the tone signal to override program material. When used with a

public address amplifier, the unit shall be capable of pre-announce signaling of a voice

announcement over the program source.

e. Both the output level and pitch control shall be adjustable. The unit shall operate from

12-48V DC, positive or negative ground. Construction shall be steel, finished in silver

gray. The overall dimensions shall be 6-3/4" W x 5-3/4" H x 2" D. The shipping weight

shall be 3 lb.

2. PR4S40C 120V AC, 60 Hz Power Supply.

3. WMT1A Line Matching Transformer

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Each speaker shall be wired in the system by a continuous home-run to the IDF in the vicinity of

the speaker.

B. Install wire labels on both ends of each wire/cable installed.

1. Use Kroy or Brady brand self-adhesive wire markers.

2. Provide written documentation as to the origination and destination of each wire/cable.

C. Terminate wiring from the speakers to the MDF and IDFs on the A-B side of a 66 block

(AT&T 700A-66-B1- 25 Jack or equivalent) where they are first terminated.

1. Extend speaker wires that are first terminated in an IDF to the MDF from the C-D side of the

block in the IDF to the A-B side of the 66 block in the MDF.

2. Then extend the speaker wires in the MDF from the A-B side to the C-D side of the 66 block

using bridging clips (Siemens SA-1 bridging clips).

3. Connect the outputs from the Paging System ZPM modules to C-D side of the 66 block,

grouping the speaker connections to the proper zone.

4. There must be a pair of paging system wires extended from the paging system location to

the sound system equipment location in the gym, auditorium and the cafeteria for future use,

not connected to the paging system but identified at each end.

D. Paging speakers must all be set for 25 volt operation and adjusted or tapped for the following:

1. Hall speakers: 1 watt

2. Room speakers: ½ watt

3. Gym speakers: 15 watt

4. Cafeteria speakers: 2 ½ watt


June 25, 2014




5. Outside speakers: 7 ½ watt

E. System Wiring shall be in a cable support path concealed above ceiling with drops at speaker

locations.

1. Wiring for room speakers shall be stubbed above ceiling lines (at locations required with ¾”

conduit) and install ¾” conduits through fire walls for wire chases.

2. Provide wiring to microphone jack locations per manufacturer’s recommendations.

3. Provide wiring between clock system controller and tone generator per manufacturer’s

recommendations.

F. Install head end equipment in the IDF room. Coordinate with owner.


A. The Contractor shall be an established communications and electronics contractor who has had

and currently maintains a locally run and operated business for at least five consecutive years.

B. The paging system must provide satisfactory sounds levels in all areas of the school, inside and

outside, where installed.

1. It must be capable of processing paging inputs from the school’s telephone system and from

the system’s administrative phone (direct connected) installed in the school’s office area.

2. Systems must be capable of:

a. Paging all speakers at the same time, and,

b. Each of the 9 individual zones of the school (Zone Page), as identified by the

District.

C. Each speaker must have a separate continuous home-run connection (wiring pair) to the MDF

or the IDF associated with the location of the speaker.

D. Identify speaker locations on Construction Documents.

E. All page to override A/V system speakers in classrooms.

3.02 SYSTEM TESTING

A. Provide all required testing apparatus and factory-trained personnel specified to successfully

complete the test.

1. No third party testing is required.

B. Prior to energizing or testing the system, ensure the following:

1. All products are installed in a proper and safe manner per the manufacturer’s instructions.

2. Insulation and shrink-tubing are present where required.

3. Dust, debris, solder splatter, etc., are removed

4. Cable is dressed, routed and labeled, connections are consistent with requirements

5. All labeling has been provided

6. Electronic devices are properly grounded

C. 25V Speaker Test:

1. Play music or other distinctive audio signal through all speakers.

2. Walk all rooms and other speaker locations.


June 25, 2014




3. Verify that each speaker is operating and that there are no significant changes in volume

levels from one speaker to the next.

4. Verify that the extent of coverage is consistent with the areas indicated on the drawings.

3.03 COMMISSIONING

A. Train Owner’s maintenance personnel in the procedures and schedules involved in operating,

troubleshooting, and preventive maintenance of the system.

1. Provide one 2-hour training session by a manufacturers’ qualified representative.

B. Train school staff (administrators, custodians, secretaries) on proper use of the system which

covers operation using the telephone system and the administrative phone.

1. Provide a minimum of two (2) 1 hour sessions.

2. Space the training at least 2 or 3 week intervals.

3. Schedule all training sessions through the District Project Manager, with at least (7) seven

days advanced notice.

3.04 WARRANTY

A. All materials and installation shall be guaranteed to be free from defects in material and

workmanship after final acceptance of installation, for the period defined in the provisions of

Division 01.

1. Make a minimum of 3 on-site visits to make system adjustments when requested during the

first year of completion.

2. On premise maintenance shall be provided at no cost to the purchaser, unless damage or

failure is caused by misuse, abuse, neglect, accidents, or other items beyond installer’s

control.

END OF SECTION


DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS Florence Crittenton CLOCK SYSTEM WIRELESS MEP Engineering Project No. 13464 27 53 13 - 1

SECTION 27 53 13

CLOCK SYSTEM (WIRELESS) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes clocks and the overall wall mounted classroom clock system for use throughout the school.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturer’s literature describing all aspects of the clock system and its components. Product data illustrating choices of colors and finishes.

B. Installation and set up instructions. Show proposed method of attachment and support.

C. Written warranties.

1. Written confirmation of on site testing to prove that the clock system will be

functional in all areas of the school. This is to establish that the radio signals will successfully go to all areas requiring clocks.

2. Minimum 2 year Warranty on system controller, clocks, and any system accessories.

D. Schematic diagram coordinated with the school floor plans describing the total number of master stations and the areas of receiver slave clocks to be supported by each.

E. Coordinate approval of planned locations of master receiver stations with Owner to ensure

overall system function and user convenience. 1.03 MAINTENANCE

A. Extra Materials: Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins. Extra materials match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels clearly describing contents.

1. Clocks: Quantity equal to 20 percent of the number of clocks installed; minimum of 3

clocks. 2. Provide Operations and maintenance manuals for all components of the system.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CLOCKS SYSTEM

A. Acceptable Manufacturers.

1. American Time and Signal Wireless Atomic Clocks. 2.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS:

A. System. The system shall consist of one or more master receiving stations and radio controlled clocks slaved to the master stations. All clocks shall be synchronized exactly and automatically reset correctly after power interruptions. System shall meet the following



requirements. 1. UL Listed. 2. Internal clock accuracy of ± 1 minute per year. 3. Multiple Sync Options

a. GPS b. CDMA (Cell phone tower signal) c. Ethernet

4. 12 and 24 hour time adjustment, Automatic Daylight Saving Time & Leap Year correction.

5. Control of up to 6 signal circuits. 6. 100% FCC compliant. 7. 5 watt internal transmitters. 8. Time Zone clock support for up to 8 unique time zones. 9. Field software updates via USB flash drive. 10. Battery Backup with Surge suppression. 11. System to be tied into Tone Generator in PA system for bells activation. 12. Remote Connect Web Interface

B. Master Station.

1. Input Voltage to power adapter: 100-240vac. 60 Hz. 2. Internally fused: Yes 3. Standby Timekeeping: 10 years 4. Memory/Time backup: CR2032 lithium battery, 240mAh capacity. 5. Timekeeping Accuracy: ± 1 minute/year without correction from GPS or

Ethernet time reference. 6. Program Retention: Unlimited 7. Programmable Events: 9,999 events total 8. Schedules: 99 maximum 9. Signal Duration: Programmable 1-9 seconds or continuous On. 10. Optional Clock circuits (1): Dry contacts rated at 250vac, 8 amps, resistive, 5

amps inductive. 11. Optional signal circuits (6): Dry contacts rated at 250vac, Continuous 7.5 amps

resistive, 5 amps inductive, 50% duty cycle; 10 amps resistive. 12. Temperature Range: 32º-140 ºF(0 º-60ºC) 13. Mounting: Rack mount. Provide rack mount kit hardware. 14. Communications: Ethernet, RS-422 (GPS Plus), RS-232 (Std

GPS), Contact closure Sync (2-wire) 15. Display: 128 x 64 Graphics LCD 16. Keypad: 16 button tactile feedback membrane

switch. 17. RF Frequency Range: 450-470 MHz 18. Internal clock accuracy: ± 1 minute per year. 19. Multiple Sync Options

a. GPS b. CDMA c. Ethernet

20. Automatic Daylight Saving Time & Leap Year correction. 21. Control of up to 6 signal circuits. 22. 100% FCC compliant. 23. 5 watt internal transmitters. 24. Time Zone clock support for up to 8 unique time zones. 25. Field software updates via USB flash drive. 26. Battery Backup with Surge Suppression

a. Battery load capacity: 550VA (330W) b. Receptacles: (4) with with battery backup and surge protection.



c. Output Voltage (battery): 115vac ±8% d. Total Output Current: 12 amps e. UL listed 1778 f. Emi/RFI noise filter: FCC Class B g. Typical recharge time 18-24 hours h. Battery Life: 3 years i. Frequency: 60 Hz j. Backup time:

1. 5 & 10 watt systems: 1 hour 2. 25 watt systems: 45 minutes 3. 45 watt systems: 18 minutes

k. Power cord: 5’ long, 3 prong polarized plug.

C. Receiver Slave Clocks. 1. They shall be slaved to the master station(s). 2. They shall require no hard wiring. 3. Analog display with moving hour, minute and second hands. 4. 12” (13 ¼” outside dimension) Round surface mounted in all classrooms. 5. 15” (16 ¼” outside dimension) Round surface mounted in auditoriums, gymnasiums

& cafeterias. 6. Heavy Duty Steel housing with clear Lexan lenses. 7. Finish color: Black Sand 8. Clock hour & minute hands to be Black color, Second hand to be Red color. 9. Power (4) (1.5V) AA Lithium batteries (included) Extended Battery life 5 years. 10. Rear indicator panel. LED indicating receiver wake-up and time sync. 11. Receiver Sensitivity: 10uV per meter. 12. Time to Synchronize: Average 3-5 minutes (syncs automatically 4 times per day. 13. Time Accuracy: ± 1 second to system controller. 14. Operating Temperature: 41º-131 ºF 15. Storage Temperature: 41º-131 ºF 16. Relative humidity: 0%-95% Non-condensing.

D. GPS Receiver

1. Input Voltage: 4.0-5.5dvc 2. Input Current: 60mA @ 5vdc 3. Baud rate: 4800 4. Color: Black 5. Connector Plug: RJ45 6. Operating Temperature: -22º-176 ºF (-30º-80 ºC) 7. Storage Temperature: -40º-194 ºF (-40º-90 ºC) 8. Cable Extensions: 50ft. Plenum Rated.

E. Wireless Internal/External Transmitter Antenna

1. ¾” style chrome magnetic base with 12’ of RG58A/U 2. Magnetic base rated at 90lbs. pull strength. 3. RF Frequency Range: 450-470 MHz 4. VSWR: <1.5:1 850KHz <1.5:1 10 MHz <2.0:1 1.5MHz <2.0:1

20MHz 5. Maximum power: 150 watts 6. Impedance: 50 ohms 7. Polarization: Vertical 8. Antenna mounting: ¾” screw base 9. Termination: male BNC-type connector 10. For indoor and outdoor use.



F. Wire Guards. Protective wire guards will be provided for clocks in areas where they may be easily damaged. Coordinate with the facility manager. Clocks in gymnasiums to be protected with wire guards.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SIZES AND LOCATIONS

A. Use 12 inch diameter clocks in classrooms and offices. Use 15 inch diameter clocks in auditoriums and gymnasiums.

3.02 NUMBER OF TRANSMITTER STATIONS

A. Provide sufficient transmitter stations to assure complete coverage of all school areas. Provide all required 120v power wiring and outlets.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install clocks in locations shown on drawings.

B. Coordinate mounting heights with architectural plans.

C. Coordinate Master Station mounting location with Owner prior to rough-in. Desk mount or rack mount.

D. Provide all wiring and connections necessary to tie clock system to Tone Generator in PA system for activation of bells.

E. Install battery backup/Surge Suppressor.

F. Install GPS antenna in location where GPS will receive clear signal. Install per manufacturer’s recommendations on mast on the roof with clear view of sky. Location should be unobstructed by trees, branches, power lines, and other buildings or structures etc.

G. Install internal/external wireless transmitter antenna. Field coordinate exact location. Insure clear reception by all clocks in the facility.

H. Provide owner with 2 hours training on system.

3.04 TESTING

A. Test all clocks for proper operation. Insure all clocks are receiving clear signal from master station. Adjust transmitting antenna location as necessary.

B. Test Master Station for proper operation.

C. Test bells signal to tone generator for proper operation. Set bells schedule per Owner’s instruction.

END OF SECTION


June 25, 2014


Florence Crittenton FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM


SECTION 28 31 00

FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM (ADDRESSABLE)

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Provide a new, complete, operative, coordinated, and tested non-coded, intelligent addressable

fire detection and alarm system in accordance with the Specifications and Drawings.

B. Provide modifications of and additions of new compatible equipment to the existing non-

coded, intelligent addressable fire detection and alarm system to achieve a complete,

operative, coordinated, and tested system in accordance with the Specifications and

Drawings.

C. Drawings are diagrammatic in character and do not necessarily indicate every required piece of

equipment and device. Items not specifically mentioned in the specification or noted on the

Drawings, but which are necessary to make a complete working installation in accordance with

code requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction shall be included.

D. Circuit Designation for IDC: Class A (Style D).

E. Circuit Designation for SLC: Class A (Style 6).

F. Circuit Designation for NAC: Class A (Style Z).

G. The system shall electrically supervise the integrity of conductors and equipment.

H. Provide auxiliary devices and modules, relays, power supplies, wiring, and accessories as

required to achieve proper system features and sequence of operation.

1.02 DEFINITION

A. FACP: Fire Alarm Control Panel.

B. FARA: Fire Alarm Remote Annunciator.

C. IDC: Initiating Device Circuit.

D. LCD: Liquid Crystal Display.

E. LED: Light Emitting Diode.

F. NAC: Notification Appliance Circuit.

G. SLC: Signaling Line Circuit.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Manufacturer's descriptive catalog literature.

B. Submit preliminary layout showing only device locations for review by Architect. Furnish


June 25, 2014




additional devices where required by coordination, even though quantity may exceed code

requirements.

C. Submittals: Include the following:

1. FACP: Full scale representation showing components, indicating lights, switches, and

terminations layout.

2. FARA: Full scale representation(s).

3. Graphic Map: Full scale representation.

4. Riser Wiring Diagrams.

5. Wiring and Control Diagrams: For each annunciator and device furnished, and show

interfacing with fans, elevators, doors, dampers, and other controlled systems or

equipment.

6. Floor Plans: Indicate final equipment locations, equipment interconnections,

equipment mounting heights, detection/control points, conduit routing, size of conduits,

size and number of conductors in each conduit, junction boxes, and wiring color code.

Indicate minimum light output rating adjacent each visual alarm device. Indicate sound

output rating adjacent each audio alarm device.

7. Design drawings for emergency responder’s Radio Amplification System.

D. Samples: As requested.

E. Device Address List: Coordinate with final system programming.

F. Sequence of Operation: Provide a matrix indicating all input points versus all functional system

indications and outputs.

G. System Battery Calculations: Substantiating battery calculation for supervisory and alarm

power requirements. Ampere hour values for each system component and panel component,

along with the total for the system. Include the battery recharging period.

H. System voltage drop calculations.

I. Instructions for mounting FACP and its peripheral equipment.

J. Product certificates.

K. Submission to AHJ: Submit materials above simultaneously with the Engineer's review stamp

to the AHJ for review. Include copies of annotated Contract Documents as needed to depict

component locations to facilitate review. As the AHJ requires, submittals are to bear the seal

and signature of the manufacturer's registered Engineer or Architect who is responsible for

production of the submittal. Upon receipt of comments, make clarifications or revisions and

resubmit if required to AHJ. Inform Engineer of changes resulting from AHJ review.

L. Submission to Others: Submit the above materials to the appropriate contractors, suppliers,

etc., for proper coordination when their work is dependent upon signals or controls provided

from the fire detection and alarm system. Submissions to others may include, but are not

limited to, the elevator supplier and contractor, fire protection system (sprinkler) supplier and


June 25, 2014




contractor, security supplier and contractor, door hardware supplier and contractor, and

motorized doors supplier and contractor.

M. Documentation from system testing.

N. Operation and Maintenance Manual: Provide an additional copy in an accessible plastic

envelope permanently affixed to the interior of the FACP.

O. Post Contract Maintenance: As part of the submittal, include a quote for a maintenance

contract to provide maintenance, tests, and repairs described below. Also include a quote of

unscheduled maintenance/repair with hourly rates for technicians trained on this equipment and

response travel costs. The rates and costs submitted are to be valid for the period of five years

after expiration of the warranty.

1. Maintenance and testing to be as required by the local AHJ. A preventive maintenance

schedule provided by the contractor describes the plan for preventive maintenance of

devices and subassemblies requiring regular maintenance. The schedule includes:

a. Systematic examination, adjustment and cleaning of detectors, manual

stations, control panels, power supplies, relays, flow switches and accessories

of the fire detection and alarm system.

b. Testing of each circuit in the fire detection and alarm system semiannually.

c. Testing of each smoke detector in accordance with the requirements of NFPA

72, Chapter 7.

1.04 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION DESCRIPTION

A. Sequence of operation shall comply with the requirements of the AHJ, and as a minimum

address the following as applicable:

1. Actuate alarm, supervisory, or trouble indicator and audible signal at FACP and FARA.

2. Display status information for device that is the source of condition at FACP, FARA,

monitor, and printer.

3. Actuate evacuation audible and visual signals in appropriate area.

4. Actuate exterior audible and visual signals for fire department entrance and connection.

5. Transmit alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal to remote monitoring station.

6. Release magnetically held smoke doors.

7. Recall and shut-down elevator.

8. Actuate control of damper at top of elevator hoistway.

9. Close smoke/fire dampers with control via FACP.

10. Initiate ventilation fan shut-down with control via FACP when area or duct detectors

indicate an alarm condition.

11. Initiate smoke-control sequence.


June 25, 2014




12. Initiate sequence to pressurize stairwells.

13. Unlock doors.

14. Actuate suppression system pre-discharge alarm.

15. Cause other sound systems to be disabled.

16. Initiate suppression system releasing sequence and AHJ required ventilation

sequence.

17. De-energize releasing solenoids.

18. Initiate shut-down sequence for other equipment (computers, instrumentation, etc.)

prior to suppression system discharge.

19. Auto-dial UL-listed remote monitoring station.


A. Installer and Tester Qualifications: Contractors must be qualified to the extent required by

NFPA 72 and the Authority Having Jurisdiction. Contractors have documented a minimum of

five years commercial or industrial fire detection and alarm system installation experience.

Journeyman to have a minimum of two years documented fire detection and alarm system

installation experience. Submit documentation if requested.

B. Manufacturer shall have a registered Engineer perform necessary design and preparation of

submittals. Manufacturer’s Engineer shall be the engineer of record for the fire alarm system.

C. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain fire detection and alarm system components from a

single manufacturer who assumes responsibility for compatibility of system components. Each

individual piece of equipment bears UL listing and labeling.

1.06 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Existing Fire Alarm System Equipment: Maintain fully operational until new equipment has

been tested and accepted. As new equipment is installed, label it "NOT IN SERVICE" until new

equipment is accepted. Remove tags from new equipment when put into service and tag

existing fire detection and alarm system equipment "NOT IN SERVICE" until removed from the

building.

1.07 MAINTENANCE

A. Extra Materials: Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins. Extra

materials match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are

identified with labels clearly describing contents.

1. Break-Tubes for Manual Stations: Quantity equal to 15 percent of the number of

manual stations installed; minimum of 6 tubes.

2. LEDs for Remote Indicating Light Units: Quantity equal to 10 percent of the number of

units installed, but not less than 1.


June 25, 2014




3. Lamps for Strobe Units: Quantity equal to 10 percent of the number of units installed,

but not less than 1.

4. Smoke Detectors, Fire Detectors, and Flame Detectors: Quantity equal to 10 percent of

the number of units of each type installed, but not less than 1 of each type.

5. Detector Bases: Quantity equal to 2 percent of the number of units of each type

installed, but not less than 1 of each type.

6. Custom Label Inserts: Quantity equal to 20 percent of the labels used on FACP and

FARA system(s).

7. Printer Ribbons: 6 spares.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. Cerberus Pyrotronics; Cerberus Technologies, Inc. Div.

2. Edwards Systems Technology; General Signal Unit.

3. Federal Signal Corp.

4. Fire Alarm and Systems Technology, Inc.

5. Fire Control Instruments, Inc.

6. Fire Lite Alarms, Inc.

7. Gamewell Co. (The).

8. Honeywell, Inc.

9. Notifier; Pitway Corp. Div.

10. Simplex Time Recorder Co.

B. The system shall be manufactured by an ISO 9001 certified company and meet the

requirements of BS EN9001: ANSI/ASQC Q9001-1994.

C. The manufacturer's authorized distributor shall substantiate that within a 50 mile radius of the

job site there is an established agency which stocks a full complement of parts and offers full

service during normal working hours on equipment to be furnished, and that the agency

supplies parts without delay and at an acceptable cost. Emergency service shall be available

from this firm 24 hours a day, and response time must be guaranteed within 24 hours of

notification.

D. Complete maintenance and repair service for the fire detection and alarm system shall be

available from a factory trained authorized representative of the manufacturer for a period of

five (5) years after expiration of the warranty.

2.02 FACP

A. General: A modular hardware design with plug-in terminal blocks for addition of miscellaneous

hardware.

B. Features:

1. System capacity shall be capable of serving the number of individual identifiable and

controllable detection/control points and annunciator/control points as required with


June 25, 2014




additional 20 percent of spare capacity.

2. Completely field programmable and configurable, no computer programming skills

required. System continues to provide fire protection while program is being edited.

3. Custom alpha/numeric descriptive labels for each system point and software zone.

4. Event history log stored in nonvolatile memory with display, scroll, and print features.

5. Real time nonvolatile clock for time and date stamp of all events.

6. Upload/download of all program information to a PC compatible computer.

7. Multiple assignable passwords.

8. Alarm verification, with verification tally counter, per intelligent detector.

9. Walk test with counters per point and identification of two detectors set to same

address. Automatic abort timer.

10. Maintenance alarm function automatically warns of contaminated detectors before a

false alarm occurs.

11. Detectors sensitivity adjust-manual or automatic (day/night).

12. Disable/Enable per address device or software zone.

13. Automatic or manual system test activates and verifies every detector in the system.

14. Automatic drift compensation of intelligent smoke detectors.

15. Status report (several types of reports) for all devices in system, including detector

sensitivity and verification tally.

16. Trouble reminder (programmable).

17. Transient protection which exceeds UL requirements.

18. Pre-alarm option (programmable) for advanced warning of false alarm conditions.

C. Display Interface Assembly: Consists of a hinged door, 30 key keypad, LEDs, backlit 80

character liquid crystal display, and an interface for a printer and multiple LCD displays with

control.

1. The keypad has keys for:

a. Acknowledge/step

b. Signal silence

c. System reset

d. System test

e. Lamp test

f. Read status

g. Alter status

h. Program


June 25, 2014




i. Special function

j. Backspace

k. Enter

l. Numeric 0-9.

m. Alpha A-Z.

n. Prior, Next, and Autostep keys speed readout of status information.

2. LED display:

a. "AC POWER" indicates the presence of normal AC power.

b. "SYSTEM ALARM" flashes to indicate alarm, and steady on to indicate

acknowledge alarm.

c. "SYSTEM SUPERVISORY" flashes to indicate supervisory condition, and

steady on to indicate acknowledged supervisor condition.

d. "SYSTEM TROUBLE" flashes to indicate trouble, and steady on to indicate

acknowledged trouble.

e. "SIGNAL SILENCED" indicates that the output circuits have been silenced.

3. LCD display:

a. 80 characters in two lines of 40 characters each.

b. Capable of displaying all status information including type of event (6

characters), type of device (12 characters), custom point label (20 characters),

custom zone label (20 characters), time and date (14 characters, and point

number (3 characters).

D. Enclosures:

1. Enclosures are UL listed steel cabinets suitable for surface or semi-flush mounting, and

sized with an additional 20 percent of internal mounting space for future expansion.

Enclosures are corrosion protected, given a rust-resistant prime coat, and

manufacturer's standard finish.

2. The front access door has the ability to be hinged from either the right or left-hand side

and is removable without use of any tools. The door has a key lock and includes a

transparent opening for viewing indicator LEDs.

3. The back box and front access panel are constructed of .060 steel with provisions for

electrical conduit connections into the sides and top.

4. The enclosure, similar to the internal components, is modular in structure for ease of

installation, maintenance, and future expansion. Provide matching enclosures if more

than a single enclosure is required to form a complete FACP. Accommodate

components and allow ample gutter space for interconnection of enclosure(s) and field

wiring. Arrange enclosure(s) so operations required for testing or for normal care and

maintenance of the system are performed from the front of the enclosure.

2.03 KEYBOARD AND MONITOR


June 25, 2014




A. General: Displaying system events and activity reports displayed on the FACP with a time and

date indication. The keyboard and monitor are two separate parts joined by a telephone-style

coiled cord. The keyboard may be disconnected. The first keyboard and monitor can be

located up to 50 feet (15.24 meters) away from the FACP.

B. Monitor Includes the following features:

1. 14 inch (35.56 centimeter) flat screen.

2. White phosphor.

3. Fully overscanned video.

4. 26 lines, 80 columns, smooth scrolling.

5. Contrast, brightness and power controls.

6. Tilt and swivel adjustment.

7. Auxiliary port for connection of additional monitors.

C. Keyboard includes the following features:

1. Used to program, change the status of controlled outputs, or to acknowledge, silence

and reset the control panel.

2. 107 keys with programmed function keys.

2.04 VOICE ALARM MULTIPLEX AUDIO SYSTEM

A. General: A voice alarm multiplex audio system is created by adding a voice command center to

the FACP using standard system enclosures and microprocessor technology. Includes the

following features:

1. Multiplexed audio wiring.

2. Multiplexed fire fighter's telephone wiring.

3. Distributed audio.

4. Pre-recorded evacuation message using solid-state electronics. May provide different

message or tones based on events.

5. Page by phone from anywhere in building.

6. Remote all call page.

7. Multiple channel capability for up to 8 audio channels.

8. Speaker and telephone on/off manual switches with custom labels.

9. Audio amplifiers with switching-mode power supplies.

10. Standby backup amplifier.

11. All-call switch and indicator.

12. Field configurable and programmable.

13. Field recorded message.


June 25, 2014




B. Alarm and paging communication system: Include the following:

1. User selectable tones on single or dual channel audio tone generator. Slow whoop,

Hi/Lo, or steady tone on the primary channel and for dual channel applications,

provides a chime or 20 pulse per minute tone on the secondary channel.

2. Digital voice message capability and on-site programmable voice messages.

3. Cables, microphone, dress panel, and other miscellaneous components.

C. Two way fire fighters telephone communication system: Stand alone system includes:

1. Telephone station enclosures with handset and hookswitch assemblies:

a. Flush or surface mounted enclosures with red baked enamel finish.

b. Key lockable door.

c. Telephone with coiled cord and call-in LED which latches on when selected at

the master phone station.

d. Cables, dress panel and other miscellaneous components.

2. Fireman's Remote Phone Jack (used for remote all call page):

a. Device is semi-flush mounted in a single gang box.

b. Contains a single phone jack mounted on a single gang steel plate with a red

paint finish.

3. Portable Fireman's telephone handset:

a. Coiled cord with plug that fits fireman's remote phone jack.

b. Quantity as required by the AHJ.

4. Emergency Telephone Storage Cabinet:

a. Flush or surface mounted enclosure.

b. Holds six portable fireman's telephone handsets.

2.05 AUTO-DIALER FOR REMOTE MONITORING STATION TIE-IN

A. Compact in size and mounted in a standard module position of the FACP.

B. Field programmable, and capable of transmitting events in formats which are compatible with

existing and future requirements of the AHJ and remote monitoring station.

C. Provides electrical supervision of the wiring used for communicating digital information between

the FACP and a UL-listed remote monitoring station.

2.06 EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY (BATTERY BACK-UP)


June 25, 2014




A. General: Components include batteries, charger, and an automatic transfer switch with are

integral to FACP. Provide additional battery cabinet space as required for auxiliary batteries

and additional 20 percent spare capacity.

B. Batteries: Gelled electrolyte type with overcharge protection in a compact, sealed, leak-proof,

and maintenance-free high-impact resistant plastic case.

C. Battery Charger: Solid-state, fully automatic, variable-charging-rate type. Provide charger

capacity for installed and additional spare battery capacity to maintain the batteries at full

charge. In the event batteries are fully discharged, the charger recharges them completely

within 4 hours. Charger output is electrically supervised as part of system power supply

supervision.

D. Integral Automatic Transfer Switch: Transfers the load to the battery without loss of signals or

status indications when normal power fails.

2.07 FARA

A. Annunciator Panel: Provides an array of LEDs to indicate point/control status. Includes the

following features:

1. Red LEDs indicate point/control alarm and supervisory conditions and yellow LEDs

indicate trouble conditions. Provide floor LEDs as required. Additional LEDs indicate

normal and emergency power modes for the system. A toggle or push-button switch

tests the LEDs mounted on the annunciator. The test switch does not require key

operation.

2. Local piezo electric sounder for both alarm and trouble conditions with

silence/acknowledge switch (program options).

3. Switches for system reset, signal silence or acknowledge functions.

2.08 FARA

A. Annunciator Panel: Provides a graphic presentation of building with LEDs indicating

point/control status. Includes the following features:

1. Shows the building floor plan(s) with a "You Are Here" designation. Mark point/control

locations on the annunciator floor plan(s). Engrave point/control and floor designations

on the face of the annunciator. Red LEDs for each point/control indicate alarm and

supervisory conditions and yellow LEDs indicate trouble conditions. Provide floor LEDs

as required. Additional LEDs indicate normal and emergency power modes for the

system. A toggle or push-button switch tests the LEDs mounted on the annunciator.

The test switch does not require key operation.



3. Switches provide for system reset, signal silence or acknowledge functions.

4. Indicate locations of electrical distribution equipment on building floor plan(s) including,

but not limited to, switchboard(s), panelboard(s), generator(s), etc. Include locations of

fire pump(s) and fire pump controller(s).


June 25, 2014




5. Faceplate: Silk-screened image on white polycarbonate background with clear acrylic

cover. Floor plan lines are 1/4-inch- (6-millimeter-) wide black, room designation letters

are 1/4-inch- (3-millimeters-) high black, and point/control location letters are 1/4-inch-

(3-millimeters-) high red. Engraved legend letters for the LEDs and switches are 1/4-

inch- (6-millimeter-) high minimum, in red.

2.09 FARA

A. Includes the following features:

1. 80 character backlit LCD display. LCD supports programmable text messages. Each

point message can be up to 40 characters long.



3. Switches provide for system reset, signal silence or acknowledge functions.

2.10 GRAPHIC MAP

A. Silk-screened image on white polycarbonate background with clear acrylic cover. Indicate the

building floor plan with a "You Are Here" designation. Floor plan lines are 1/4 inch (6 millimeter)

wide black, room designation letters are 1/4 inch (3 millimeters) high black, and point/control

location letters are 1/4 inch (3 millimeters) high red.

B. Indicate locations of electrical distribution equipment on building floor plan(s) including, but not

limited to, switchboard(s), panelboard(s), generator(s), etc. Include locations of fire pump(s)

and fire pump controller(s).

2.11 INTELLIGENT ADDRESSABLE INITIATING DEVICES

A. Manual Pull Stations

1. Description: Dual-action type, non-coded, fabricated of metal or plastic, and finished in

red with molded white raised-letter operating instructions. The word FIRE appears on

the front of the station in 1.75 inch (44.45 millimeter) letters.

2. Station Test and Reset: Key operated, double pole, double throw, switch rated for the

voltage and current at which it operates. An operated station latches to prevent

restoration to normal except by use of a key. Stations keyed to match FACP cabinet

lock key.

3. Auxiliary Contacts: As needed to perform indicated or required auxiliary functions.

B. Smoke Detectors

1. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors: Include the following features:

a. Addressable-analog communication.

b. Plug-in Arrangement: The same tamper resistant base is used for both

photoelectric and ionization type smoke detectors.

c. Low profile design of 1.66 inches (4.21 centimeters) deep.


June 25, 2014




d. Dual LEDs provide 360 degrees visibility from below. LEDs pulse each time

the detector is addressed and steady on in alarm.

e. Contains a built-in test switch and remote indicating light output.

f. Auxiliary Contacts: As required to perform indicated or required auxiliary

functions.

2. Duct Smoke Detectors: Photoelectric type with the following features:

a. Continuous analog monitoring of the unit's sensitivity and alarm verification

from FACP.

b. Sampling Tube: Design and dimensions as recommended by the

manufacturer for the specific duct size and installation conditions where

applied.

c. Housing is suitable for mounting directly on the duct or remotely where direct

mounting is not possible.

d. Contains an indication light with test switch on the detector and a remote

indication light with test switch output.

e. Fan Shutdown and Damper Closure: Via FACP control.

C. Thermal Detectors

1. Include the following features:

a. Addressable-analog communication.

b. 135 degrees F (57 degrees C) fixed temperature with rate of rise option.

c. Plug-in Arrangement: The same tamper resistant base is used for smoke and

thermal detectors.

d. Low profile design of 1.66 inches (4.21 centimeters) deep.

e. Dual LEDs provide 360 degrees visibility from below. LEDs pulse each time

the detector is addressed and steady on in alarm.

f. Contains a built-in functional test switch and remote indicating light output.

g. Auxiliary Contacts: As required to perform indicated or required auxiliary

functions.

D. Monitor Module:

1. Provided to connect one supervised IDC zone of conventional alarm initiating devices

(any N.O. dry contact) to one of the fire alarm control panel SLC loops.

2. An LED shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the monitor module is

operational and in regular communication with the control panel.


June 25, 2014




E. Control Module

1. General: Provided to supervise and control the operation of one conventional NACs of

compatible, 24 Vdc powered, polarized audio/visual notification appliances. Also

provided for fan shutdown and other auxiliary control functions, the control module may

be set to operate as a dry contact relay.

2. Audio/visual power shall be provided by a separate supervised power loop from the

main fire alarm control panel or from a supervised, UL listed remote power supply.

F. Isolator Module

1. Provided to automatically isolate wire-to-wire short circuits on an SLC loop. The isolator

module shall limit the number of modules or detectors that may be rendered

inoperative by a short circuit fault on the SLC Loop. At least one isolator module shall

be provided for each floor or protected zone of the building.

2. If a wire-to-wire short occurs, the isolator module shall automatically open-circuit

(disconnect) the SLC loop. When the short circuit condition is corrected, the isolator

module shall automatically reconnect the isolated section.

3. Does not require any address-setting, and its operations shall be totally automatic. It

shall not be necessary to replace or reset an isolator module after its normal operation.

4. An LED shall flash to indicate that the isolator is operational and shall illuminate steadily

to indicate that a short circuit condition has been detected and isolated.

2.12 CONVENTIONAL INITIATING DEVICES

A. Manual Pull Stations

B. Smoke Detectors

1. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors

2. Duct Smoke Detectors

C. Heat (Thermal) Detectors

1. Fixed-Temperature Heat Detectors

2. Combination Fixed-Temperature and Rate-of-Rise Thermal Detectors

3. Rate Compensation Detectors

D. Other Detectors

1. Flow Switches

2. Tamper Switches

2.13 DEVICE COVERS

A. Manual Pull Station Covers:

1. Cover window is made of clear and durable plastic.


June 25, 2014




2. Warning horn powered by 9 VDC battery.

3. Unconditional lifetime warrantee against cover breakage and damage.

4. Instructions on cover indicating how to lift cover and operate manual pull station.

5. In weatherproof applications, provide covers with optional neoprene gasketing to

achieve suitable rating.

B. Smoke and Thermal Detector Covers: Constructed of 0.1875 inch (4.76 millimeter) steel wire

formed in a web-like, octagonal shape.

2.14 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES AND OTHER MISCELLANEOUS INDICATING DEVICES

A. General: Equip alarm-indicating devices for mounting as required. Outdoor devices are rated

for wet location. Provide terminal blocks for system connections.

B. Audible Alarm Devices: Sound levels and characteristics comply with the requirements of the

AHJ and ADA as appropriate.

1. Bells: Electric-vibrating, 24 Vdc, under-dome type, with provision for housing the

operating mechanism behind the bell. Bells are made of steel and finished in red

enamel. Striker is also of steel, and mechanism housing is of cast aluminum. Bells are

weatherproof as required or indicated.

2. Horns: Electric-vibrating-polarized type, operating on 24 Vdc, with provision for housing

the operating mechanism behind a grill. Horns sound tones that are field

programmable, without the use of special tools, to eight tone options, including slow

whoop, continuous, or interrupted tones.

3. Voice/Tone Speakers: Tap settings of 1/4, 1/2, 1, and 2 watts, to matched to the

acoustical environment of the speaker location, is accomplished with field selectable

jumper pins. Optional xenon strobe with "FIRE" lettering. Ceiling and wall mounting as

indicated or required.

4. Chimes, High-Level Output: Vibrating type, 81 dB, minimum-rated output.

C. Visual Alarm Devices: Minimum candela output and visual characteristics comply with the

requirements of the AHJ and ADA as appropriate.

1. Xenon strobe lights with clear or nominal white polycarbonate lens.

2. Lenses mounted on an aluminum faceplate.

3. The word "FIRE" is engraved in minimum 1-inch (25-millimeter) high letters on the lens.

4. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals.

D. Combination Audible and Visual Alarm Devices: Consist of factory-combined, audible and

visual alarm units in a single mounting assembly.

E. Mini-Audible/Visual Alarm Devices:


June 25, 2014




1. Horns are electric-vibrating-polarized type producing 90 dbA output at 10 feet, operate

on 24 VDC, mount in a single gang box, and have attractive residential type styling.

2. Horns sound tone are field programmable, without the use of special tools, to eight

tone options, including slow whoop, continuous, or interrupted tones.

3. Optional integral visual alarm indicating appliances with "FIRE" lettering have a

minimum light output of 1.5 to 15 candela, and flash 40 times per minute.

F. Remote Indicating Lights: LED type, mounted flush in a single gang wall plate.

1. Connected to indicate the alarm operation of a single detector or other device.

2. Legend: "Alarm."

G. Remote Indicating Light and Test/Reset Switch: Red LED and key switch type, mounted flush

in a single gang wall plate.

1. Connected to indicate the alarm operation of a single duct detector or other device.

2. Legend: "Alarm."

2.15 MAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS

A. Description: Units are equipped for wall or floor mounting as required or indicated and are

complete with matching door plate. Electromagnet operates from a 120 Vac source and

produces a minimum of 35-pounds force (155-Newtons) holding force. Magnets are protected

against transients and surges up to 600V. Electromagnets fail-safe such that they release on

loss of 120 Vac power or FACP control power.

B. Material and Finish: Coordinate with Division 8 to match door hardware.

2.16 WIRE

A. Wire: Solid-copper conductors with 600V rated, 75°C, color-coded insulation.

1. Low-Voltage Circuits: No. 16 AWG, minimum.

2. Line-Voltage Circuits: No. 12 AWG, minimum.

B. Wire and cable is listed and/or approved by a recognized testing agency for use with a

protective signaling system.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Coordinate with AHJ to determine designated level of egress, and alternate level of egress for

elevator recall sequence of operation.

B. Coordinate with the fire protection contractor to select elevator hoistway thermal detectors fixed

temperature settings for proper sequence of operation.

C. Coordinate with AHJ for methods and sequence of control for damper at top of elevator

hoistway. Provide controls and sequence of control accordingly.


June 25, 2014




D. All equipment and components are installed in strict compliance with the manufacturer's

recommendations. Consult the manufacturer's installation manuals for wiring diagrams,

schematics, physical equipment sizes, etc. before beginning system installation. Refer to the

riser and connection diagram for specific system installation, termination, and wiring data.

E. The selection and placement of smoke and thermal detectors shall take into consideration both

the performance characteristic of the detectors and the areas into which the detectors are

installed to prevent nuisance alarm or non-operation after installation. Coordinate locations of

smoke detectors with supply air devices. Do not locate smoke detectors within 3 feet of supply

air devices.

F. Provide weatherproof devices as indicated or required.

G. Provide manual pull station covers for weather-proofing as indicated or required, and in areas

where it is necessary to deter unwanted activation, or guard against physical damage or

vandalism.

H. Provide covers for smoke and thermal detectors in areas where it is necessary to guard against

physical damage or vandalism.

I. Provide remote indicating lights for detectors as required or indicated. Provide remote

indicating lights with test switches for duct detectors and other devices as required or indicated.

J. Install detectors after dirt and dust creating construction activities are complete. Detectors are

not to be installed prior to system programming and testing. If construction is ongoing during

this period, measures are to be taken to protect detectors from contamination and physical

damage.

K. FACP, miscellaneous control panels, FARA, and any other cabinets or enclosures are to be

flush, or semi-flush mounted when located in finished areas and may be surface mounted when

located in unfinished areas. All enclosures or devices with locks shall be keyed alike.

L. Flow, Tamper, and Pressure Switches: Provide connection for each device.

M. Instructions for FACP: Printed or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a lexan plastic or

glass cover in a stainless-steel or aluminum frame. Install the frame in a location observable

from the FACP. Install the frame by methods which make it difficult to remove from the wall or

surface to which it is mounted. Include interpretation and appropriate response for displays and

signals, and briefly describe the functional operation of the system under normal, alarm, and

trouble conditions.

N. Coordinate with the AHJ to determine the remote monitoring station to be used for event

transmission. Coordinate transmission format requirements with remote monitoring station and

configure system accordingly.

O. Label initiating devices with address at each device.

P. Provide dedicated phone line in 3/4”C. to FACP from building phone system location for

monitoring.

3.02 WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Wiring Method: Install wiring in metal raceway. Conduit, junction boxes, conduit supports and


June 25, 2014




hangers are concealed in finished areas and may be exposed in unfinished areas. Coordinate

with other trades for the proper wiring and control of systems.

B. Conduit are 3/4 inch (19.1 millimeter) minimum. Conduit fill are not to exceed 40 percent of

interior cross sectional area where three or more cables are contained within a single conduit.

C. Flexible connections are to be used for devices mounted in suspended lay-in ceiling panels.

Conduit, mounting boxes, junction boxes and panels are to be securely hung and fastened.

D. Conduits are not to enter the FACP, or any other remotely mounted equipment or backboxes,

except where conduit entry is specified by the manufacturer.

E. Number and size of conductors are as recommended by the fire detection and alarm system

manufacturer, but not less than No. 16 AWG (1.02 millimeter) for low-voltage circuits, and not

less than No. 12 AWG for line-voltage circuits.

F. Wiring for 24V control, alarm notification, and similar power limited auxiliary functions may be

run in the same conduit as initiating and signaling line circuits. Circuits are provided with

transient suppression devices and the system is designed to permit simultaneous operation of

circuits without interference or loss of signals.

G. Wiring within Enclosures: Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to the sides and

back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train the conductors to terminal points with no excess.

Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure associated

with the fire detection and alarm system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to

the system's wiring diagrams. Make connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs,

pressure-type terminal blocks, or plug connectors.

H. Cable Taps: Use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull or outlet boxes, cabinets, or

equipment enclosures where circuit connections are made.

I. Wiring Color Coding: Color-code fire alarm conductors differently from the normal building

power wiring. Use one color code for alarm circuit wiring and a different color code for

supervisory circuits. Color-code audible alarm-indicating circuits differently from alarm-initiating

circuits. Use different colors for visual alarm-indicating devices. Color codes must be used

throughout. Transposing or changing color coding of wires shall not be permitted. Wire nut

type connections are not acceptable. Conductors in conduit pull boxes or cabinets containing

more than one wire must be labeled on each end.

J. Paint fire detection and alarm system junction boxes and covers red.

K. Wiring to Remote Monitoring Station Transmitter: 1-inch (25-millimeter) conduit between the

FACP and the remote station transmitter connection as required or indicated. Install number of

conductors and achieve electrical supervision for connecting wiring as needed to suit remote

station monitoring function. Final connections to terminals in remote station transmitter are

made under another contract.

3.03 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify wiring, cabling, and terminals.

B. Identify each enclosure with a red engraved nameplate with white letters of not less than 1 inch

(25 millimeter) in height. Identify individual components and modules within the cabinets with

permanent labels.


June 25, 2014




C. Identify each remote indicator light with a red nameplate engraved with white letters indicating

the device location.

D. Custom labels for point identification on FACP and any other related equipment are typed

written.

3.04 GROUNDING

A. Signal Ground Terminal: Locate at main equipment rack or cabinet. Isolate from power system

and equipment grounding.

B. Use appropriate fittings to insure positive grounding throughout the entire system.

C. Ground equipment and conductor and cable shields. For audio circuits, minimize, to the

greatest extent possible, ground loops, common mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and

other impairments. Provide 5-ohm ground at main equipment location. Measure, record, and

report ground resistance.

END OF SECTION

100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS June 25, 2014

DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS Florence Crittenton EARTHWORK OZ Architecture Project No. 113266.00 Section 31 00 00 - 1

SECTION 31 00 00

EARTHWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, and Division One and other related specification sections apply to work of this section.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Clearing, grubbing and site preparation

B. Removal and disposal of debris

C. Handling, storage, transportation, and disposal of excavated material

D. Sheeting, shoring, bracing and protection work

E. Pumping and dewatering as required or necessary

F. Backfilling

G. Pipe embedment

H. Construction of fills and embankments

I. Excavation for buildings & structures

J. Pavement Subgrade preparation

K. Trench Stabilization

L. Final grading

M. Slope Stabilization

N. Erosion Control

O. Appurtenant work


A. Section 32 12 00 – Flexible Paving

B. Section 32 13 00 – Rigid Paving

C. Section 32 91 13 – Soil Preparation



D. Section 32 92 00 – Turf and Grasses

1.4 REFERENCES

A. AASHTO – American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials

B. ASTM – American Society for Testing and Materials 1. C33 – Concrete Aggregates 2. C136 – Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates 3. D698 – Test Methods for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures

Using 5.5 lb Rammer and 12-Inch Drop 4. D1241 – Material for Soil Aggregate Subbase, Base and Surface Courses 5. D4253 – Test Methods for Maximum Index Density of Soils and Unit Weight of Soils Using a

Vibratory Table 6. D4254 – Test Methods for Minimum Index Density and Unit Weight of Soils and Calculations

of Relative Density 7. D6938 – Test Method for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil Aggregate by

Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)

C. ACI – American Concrete Institute 1. 229 – Controlled Low-Strength Materials

D. CABO/ANSI – Council of American Building Officials/American National Standards Institute 1. A117.1 – Accessible and Useable Buildings and Facilities Standards

E. CDOT – Colorado Department of Transportation

F. OSHA – Occupational Safety and Health Administration

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Division One specifications.

B. Product Data: Submit on all products or materials supplied herein

C. Test Reports: Indicate supplier, sieve analysis, optimum moisture content and density in accordance with ASTM D698 if appropriate for crushed rock or gravel, pipe embedment and material for fills and embankment


A. Burning will not be allowed on-site. Comply with all applicable codes, regulations, and laws.

B. Comply with applicable requirements of CABO/ANSI A117.1 for accessibility requirements related to walks, ramps, parking areas, drives, curb ramps, etc.

C. Obtain and comply with all requirements of City and County of Denver and CDPHE Stormwater and/or Groundwater Discharge Permits, as required.

D. For public improvements only, in the event of a conflict between municipal standards and this specification, municipal standards for products and installation will govern.



E. Excavation work shall be performed in compliance with City and County of Denver and current OSHA requirements.

1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Protect adjacent structures and surrounding areas from damage during excavation, filling, and backfilling

B. Protect work from erosion or other similar types of damage until the project has been accepted. Leave protection in place for building contractors use.

C. Do not backfill or construct fills during freezing weather. Backfill or construct fills only when temperature is 35°F and rising

D. Do not use frozen materials, snow, or ice in any backfill or fill area

E. Do not backfill or construct fill on frozen surfaces

F. Protect excavated material from becoming frozen

G. Do not remove trees from outside excavation or fill areas unless authorized by the Owner; protect from permanent damage by construction activities

H. Provide temporary bridges for roadways, walkways, driveways, etc.


A. All imported material to be free of hazardous and organic wastes, “clean” as defined by EPA, and approved for its intended use by the Owner or project geotechnical engineer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General - Soil materials, whether from sources on or off the site must be approved by the soils engineer as suitable for intended use and specifically for required location or purpose.

B. Classification of Excavated Materials: 1. No classification applies. Remove and handle all excavated materials regardless of its type,

character, composition, condition, or depth. This includes the sandstones and claystones encountered onsite which can be ripped from place using a Caterpillar Model 235 trackhoe or equivalent, rippers, chisels, breaker bars, and/or other hand or mechanical methods.

2. Excavation of rock that cannot be excavated as outlined above will be considered rock excavation and may require alternative means that may include drilling, blasting, or expansive compounds.

3. Transport and properly dispose of any rubble and waste materials found in excavation off the Owner’s property a. If transite or asbestos containing materials are found in excavation, notify the Owner

immediately and comply with special handling requirements.

C. Fills and Embankments



1. To the maximum extent practical use excess earth from onsite excavation for fills and embankments.

2. Free from rocks or stones larger than 12 inch in greatest dimension and free from brush, stumps, logs, roots, debris, and organic and other deleterious materials

3. Fill and embankment material must be acceptable to Engineer 4. No rocks or stones larger than 6 inch in upper 18 inches of fill or embankment. Where

allowed, distribute rocks and stones through the fill to not interfere with compaction.

D. Imported Fill for Fills and Embankments: 1. The contractor is responsible for obtaining additional material for fills and embankments as

necessary to meet the requirements shown on the plans. 2. Imported fill conforming to the following:

a. Gradation (percent finer by weight ASTM C136): 3” – 100% passing, No. 4 Sieve – 50-100% passing, and No. 200 Sieve – 35% passing (max)

b. Liquid Limit: 35 (max), Plasticity Index: 15 (max), Group Index: 10 (max)

E. Structural Fill 1. Imported structural fill, such as a ½-inch minus, CDOT Class 7 Aggregate Road Base,

conforming to the following: a. Gradation: 1” – 100% passing (percent finer by weight ASTM C136),

No. 8 Sieve – 20-85% passing, and No. 200 Sieve – 20% (max) b. Liquid Limit: 35 (max), Plasticity Index: 15 (max), R- Value: 50 (min)

2. On-site structural fill meeting compaction and moisture treatment requirements meeting 3.12D

F. Topsoil 1. Topsoil is defined as fertile, friable, natural loam, surface soil, reasonably free of subsoil, clay

lumps, brush, weeds and other litter, and free of rocks, stumps, stones larger than 2" in any dimension, and other extraneous or toxic matter harmful to plant growth for areas to be seeded or planted. Coordinate testing requirements with Owner.

G. Grubbings 1. Grubbings are defined as the first 1 inch of surface vegetation and topsoil consisting of

primarily existing grass groundcover free of roots, brush, and other objectionable material and debris.

H. Pipe Embedment: Graded gravel 1. Comply with City and County of Denver requirements for pipe embedment for public utilities. 2. 3/4” – 1” Crushed rock – AASHTO 57/67

Sieve Size (Inch) Percent Passing by Weight

1 100

3/4” 90-100

1/2” 25-60

3/8” 20-55

NO. 4 0-10

NO. 8 0-5

NO. 200 0-2

3. Squeegee

Sieve Size Percent Passing by Weight

3/8” 100



No. 4 85-100

No. 8 30-70

No. 16 5-40

No. 30 0-15

No. 50 0-10

No. 100 0-5

No. 200 <1

I. Compacted Trench Backfill 1. Job excavated material finely divided, free of debris, organic material, and stones larger than 6

inch in greatest dimension without masses of moist, stiff clay, or topsoil

J. Controlled Low Strength Material (Flow Fill) 1. Comply with City and County of Denver requirements and ACI 229 for the use of flowable fill

within the right-of-way or for public utility trench backfill. 2. Product shall be a lean, sand-cement slurry, “flowable fill” or similar material with a 28-day

unconfined compressive strength between 50 and 200 psi.

K. Non-woven geotextile fabric 1. Needle-punched nonwoven geotextile composed of polypropylene fibers, which are formed

into a stable network such that the fibers retain their relative position. Product must be inert to biological degradation and resists naturally encountered chemicals, alkalis, and acids. Product must meet AASHTO M288-06 Class 3 for elongation > 50%. a. Mirafi 140N or accepted substitution

2.2 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL ACCESSORIES

A. Comply with all applicable municipal or local Municipal Separate Storm Sewer System (MS4) requirements.

B. Silt Fence Fabric: woven polypropylene 1. Mirafi 100X, "Envirofence" 2. Or accepted substitution

C. Temporary Slope Stabilization Mat (extended term): 3.0 pound UV-stable polypropylene top net, 1.5 pound photodegradable polypropylene bottom net, 70% straw/30% coconut fiber matrix with a longevity of 24 months. 1. North American Green SC150 2. Or accepted substitution

D. Biodegradable Slope Stabilization Mat (short term): 9.3 pound leno-woven biodegradable jute top net, 7.7 pound woven biodegradable jute bottom net, 100% straw fiber matrix with a longevity of 12 months. 1. North American Green S150BN 2. Or accepted substitution



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Field verify the location of all underground utilities, pipelines and structures prior to excavation

3.2 PERFORMANCE—GENERAL

A. Contractor to verify quantities of cuts and fills and perform all earthwork required to meet the grades as shown on the plans, including but not limited to, additional import or export required to handle compaction, building and pavement subgrade preparation, and pipe bedding.

B. Perform work in a safe and proper manner with appropriate precautions against hazard

C. Provide adequate working space and clearances for work performed within excavations and for installation and removal of utilities

D. Contain all construction activity on the designated site and within the limits of work. Cost of restoration off site will be the responsibility of the Contractor

3.3 PRESERVATION OF TREES

A. Do not remove trees outside fill or excavated areas, except as authorized by Engineer

B. Protect trees and their roots within the drip line that are to remain from permanent damage by construction operation

C. Trim standing trees in conflict with construction operations as directed by Owner.

3.4 PREPARATION

A. Clear all site areas within the limits of work of grasses, roots, brush, and other objectionable material and debris.

B. Strip subgrade for fills and embankments of surface vegetation, sod, tree stumps and organic topsoil. Strip and stockpile all on-site material meeting the topsoil definition for all areas receiving grading where shown on drawings

C. Remove all waste materials from site and dispose. Stockpile all acceptable grubbings for reuse in revegetation areas.

D. Remove debris including all demolished trees, underbrush, stumps, roots and other combustible materials from site and dispose of off-site; on-site burning is not permitted

3.5 TOPSOIL

A. At the completion of work in each area, place and grade topsoil to maintain gradient as indicated and required.

B. Clean topsoil, free of plants and seed will be spread to 4 inch minimum depth, or as specified by landscaping specifications and plans, whichever is greater, for areas of the site as detailed by the landscape plans.



C. Reuse grubbings and surface topsoil containing plants and seeds in designated revegetation areas only.

3.6 DEWATERING

A. Provide and maintain adequate dewatering equipment (including power supply, if necessary) to remove and dispose of surface and groundwater entering excavations, trenches, and other parts of the work

B. Keep each excavation dry during subgrade preparation and continually thereafter until the structure to be built or the pipe to be installed is completed to the extent that no damage from hydrostatic pressure, flotation, or other cause will result

C. Dewater excavations which extend to or below groundwater by lowering and keeping the groundwater level beneath such excavation at least 12 inches below the bottom of the excavation

D. Divert surface water or otherwise prevent it from entering excavated areas or trenches to the extent practical without damaging adjacent property

E. Maintain all drainage pipes, keep clean and free of sediment during construction and final cleanup

F. Dewatering to surface waterways requires Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment dewatering permit. Contractor must obtain dewatering permit and comply with discharge requirements therein, if necessary

3.7 SHEETING, SHORING AND BRACING

A. Provide proper and substantial sheeting, shoring, and bracing, in accordance with OSHA Standards as required, to prevent caving or sliding, to protect workmen and the Work, and to protect existing structures and facilities

B. Design and build sheeting, shoring, and bracing to withstand all loads that might be caused by earth movement or pressure, and to be rigid, maintaining shape and position under all circumstances

C. Do not pull trench sheeting before backfilling unless pipe strength is sufficient, to carry trench loads based on trench width to the back of sheeting

D. Do not brace sheeting left in place against the pipe, but support it in a manner that precludes concentrated loads or horizontal thrusts on pipe

E. Cross braces installed above the pipe to support sheeting may be removed after pipe embedment is completed

F. Contractor responsible for obtaining all required permits or easements for encroachments into the public right-of-way and for coordinating any encroachments onto adjacent properties.

3.8 TRENCH STABILIZATION

A. Thoroughly compact and consolidate subgrades for concrete structures, precast structures, and utility trench bottoms so they remain firm, dense and intact during required construction activities



B. Remove all mud and muck during excavation

C. Reinforce subgrades with crushed rock or gravel if they become mucky during construction activities

D. Finished elevation of stabilized subgrades are to be at or below subgrade elevations indicated on drawings

E. Allow no more than ½ inch depth of mud or muck to remain on trench bottoms when pipe bedding material is placed thereon

3.9 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES

A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 0.10 foot

B. Remove existing unsuitable/uncompacted fill, old foundations, rubble/debris, soft or otherwise unsuitable material, and replace with suitable material in excavation

C. Per the soils report, for overexcavation and recompaction areas at structures, soils shall be excavated to a depth of 3 feet below the bottom of all floor slabs and footings and replaced with structural fill. The subexcavation shall be configured at a minimum side slope inclination of 1(horizontal):1(vertical) from the toe of the subexcavation slope. The toe of the subexcavation slope shall be no closer than 5 feet outside the outermost edge of all concrete footings or building boundaries laterally, whichever is larger. Slope shall continue to the proposed surface grades.

D. Structure subgrade to be scarified to a depth of 8 inches and moisture treated to within 2 percent of optimum prior to placement of structural fill

E. Provide dewatering and temporary drainage as required to keep excavations dry.

F. Reshape subgrade and wet as required

3.10 PAVEMENT OVEREXCAVATION AND SUBGRADE PREPARATION

A. Excavate subgrade for asphalt pavement areas per the lines, grades, and dimensions indicated on drawings within a tolerance of plus or minus 0.10 foot. Excavate subgrade for concrete pavement areas per the lines, grades, and dimensions indicated on drawings within a tolerance of plus or minus 0.05 foot.

B. Overexcavate and scarify existing soil as required under pavement areas, slabs, curbs and walks to meet the moisture and compaction specifications herein to 12” minimum depth. Extend subgrade preparation a minimum of 1 foot beyond back of proposed pavement, slabs, curbs and walks.

C. Proof roll with a pneumatic tire equipment with a minimum axle load of 18 kips per axle a maximum of 24 hours prior to paving to locate any soft spots that exhibit instability and deflection beyond subgrade tolerances listed above. Areas that are observed to have soft spots in the subgrade, where deflection is not uniform or is excessive as determined by the Geotechnical Engineer, shall be ripped, scarified, dried or wetted as necessary and recompacted to the requirements for density and moisture at the Contractor’s expense. After recompaction, these areas shall be proof rolled again and all failures again corrected at the Contractor’s expense.



D. If the Contractor fails to place the sub base, base course, or initial pavement course within 24 hours or the condition of the subgrade changes due to weather or other conditions, proof rolling and correction shall be performed again at the Contractor’s expense.

3.11 FILLS AND EMBANKMENTS

A. Level and roll subgrade so surface materials will be compact and bond with the first layer of fill or embankment

B. Place in horizontal layers at maximum uncompacted depth per compaction specifications herein.

C. Spread and level material deposited in piles and windrows before compacting

D. Thoroughly compact each layer by rolling or other means acceptable to Geotechnical Engineer to meet the moisture and compaction specifications herein.

E. Alter compaction methods if material fails to meet specified density

F. Where a trench passes through a fill or embankment, place and compact fill or embankment to 12 inch above the top of the pipe before excavating the trench

G. Add water and harrow, disc, blade, or otherwise work each layer to obtain the uniform moisture content and adequate compaction

3.12 COMPACTION

A. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.

B. Place backfill and fill materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations. Place backfill and fill uniformly along the full length of each structure as described herein.

C. Refer to geotechnical report for additional requirements for site development material, subexcavation, compaction, etc.

D. Percentage of Maximum Dry Density Requirements: Moisture treat and compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry density and to within the specified moisture content range of optimum moisture content according to ASTM D 698 as follows:

Improvements Compaction % Moisture Content

Footings 98% 0 to +3

Floor slabs 95% 0 to +3

Paved Areas 95% -2 to +2

Utility Trenches 95% -2 to +2

Lawns or Unpaved Areas 90% -2 to +2

Public Right-of-way Per municipal standards



1. Do not deposit or compact tamped or otherwise mechanically compacted backfill if frozen or if in water.

2. Take particular care to compact backfill which will be beneath slabs, pipes, drives, roads, parking areas, curb, gutters, or other surface construction.

3.13 BORROW OR SPOIL AREA

A. Obtain suitable material required to complete fill and embankments from excavation, on-site areas.

B. The location, size, shape, depth, drainage, and surfacing of borrow or spoil pits shall be acceptable to Owner.

C. Make all areas regular in shape with graded and surfaced side and bottom slopes when completed

D. Cut side slopes not steeper than 1:1 and uniform for the entire length of any one side

E. Final grade disturbed areas of borrow to uniform slope (maximum slope = 4:1, minimum slope = 50:1).

F. Use material free of debris and deleterious material

G. Provide erosion and sediment control measures for borrow or spoil areas as required by municipal or local Municipal Separate Storm Sewer System (MS4) requirements.

3.14 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS EXCAVATED MATERIALS

A. Use excess excavated materials in fills and embankments as indicated on the drawings to the extent needed. Coordinate with Owner and Engineer on locations for excess material placement.

B. The Contractor is responsible for disposing of excess excavated materials from the site to a location approved by the Owner or Engineer and permitted with the local authorities.

C. Remove debris, junk, broken concrete, broken asphalt, rock, stones, stumps, logs, roots, and other unsuitable material from the site and dispose of it

3.15 BLASTING

A. Blasting or other use of explosives is not permitted without City and County of Denver approval

3.16 TRENCH EXCAVATION

A. Establish alignment and grade or elevation from offset stakes provided by the contractor’s surveyor.

B. Excavate trenches so pipes can be laid straight at uniform grade without dips or bumps, between the terminal elevations indicated on the drawings

C. Comply with pipe specification sections regarding vertical and horizontal alignment and max joint deflection



D. Where grades or elevations are not fixed on the drawings, excavate trenches to provide a minimum depth of backfill cover over the top of pipe as follows. Coordinate depth of cover with utility owners. Increase depth as required by utility owner and at crossings. 1. 2.5 feet for gas piping 2. 2.5 feet for electric, telecom, and fiber optic conduit. 3. 2.0 feet for irrigation piping 4. Increase depth as required at vertical curves and for clearance beneath existing pipes,

conduits, drains, drainage structures, or other obstructions encountered at normal pipe grades

E. Measure pipe cover depth vertically from top of pipe to finished ground or surface elevation

F. Do not open more trench in advance of pipe laying than is necessary to expedite the work; not more than 200 feet

G. Except where tunneling or boring is indicated on the drawings, specified, or permitted by Engineer, excavate trenches by open cut from the surface

H. Limiting trench widths 1. Excavate to a width which will provide adequate working space and pipe clearances for proper

pipe installation, jointing, embedment 2. If needed to reduce earth loads to prevent sliding, cut banks back on slopes which extend not

lower than 1 foot above the top of the pipe 3. Stipulated minimum clearances are minimum clear distances, not minimum average distances 4. Maximum trench width from 1 foot above the top of pipe to trench bottom is the pipe outside

diameter plus 24 inches 5. If the width of the lower portion of the trench exceeds the max permitted, provide special pipe

embedment, or concrete encasement as required by loading conditions

I. Mechanical excavation 1. Do not use where its operation would damage buildings, culverts, or other existing property,

structures, or utilities above or below ground; hand excavate only in such areas 2. Use mechanical equipment of a type, design, and construction and operated so that

a. Rough trench bottom elevation can be controlled b. Uniform trench widths and vertical sidewalls are obtained from 1 foot above the top of the

installed pipe to the bottom of the trench c. Trench alignment is such that pipe is accurately laid to specified alignment and is

centered in the trench with adequate clearance between pipe and trench sidewalls 3. Do not undercut trench sidewalls 4. Recompact trench bottom disturbed by bucket teeth prior to placement of embedment material

J. Except as otherwise required, excavate trenches below the underside of pipes as indicated in the drawings to provide for installation of granular embedment pipe foundation material

K. Where in earth, trench bottoms for 6 inches and smaller pipe may be excavated below pipe subgrade and granular embedment provided or the trench may be graded to provide uniform and continuous support (between bell holes or end joints) of the installed pipe, Contractor's option

L. Whenever so directed by Engineer, excavate to such depth below grade as Engineer directs and bring the trench bottom to grade with such material as Engineer may direct

M. For unstable soils, provide concrete or other bedding as directed by Engineer



N. Do not allow any part of bells or couplings to contact the trench bottom, walls, or granular embedment when pipe is joined

O. Cuts in existing surface construction 1. No larger than necessary to provide adequate working space 2. Cut a clean groove not less than 1½ inch deep along each side of trench or around perimeter

of excavation area 3. Remove pavement and base pavement to provide shoulder not less than 6 feet wide between

cut edge and top edge of trench 4. Make pavement cuts to and between straight or accurately marked curved lines parallel to

trench centerline or limits of excavation 5. Remove pavement for connections to existing lines or structures only to the extent required for

the installation 6. Replace the pavements between saw cuts to match original surface construction

3.17 PIPE EMBEDMENT

A. Embed pipes above and below the bottom of pipe as indicated in the drawings and as specified herein

B. Spread and surface grade granular embedment to provide continuous and uniform support beneath pipe at all points between pipe joints

C. After grading, aligning, and placing pipe in final position, and shoring home, deposit and compact sufficient embedment under and around each side of the pipe and to hold the pipe in proper position and alignment during subsequent operations

D. Place and compact embedment material uniformly and simultaneously on both sides of pipe to prevent lateral displacement

E. Granular embedment compact by slicing with shovel or vibrating 1. Maximum uncompacted thickness of layers: 6 inch

F. Compacted embedment: Place in horizontal layers at maximum uncompacted depth per compaction specifications herein. Thoroughly compact each layer to meet the moisture and compaction specifications herein.

3.18 TRENCH BACKFILL

A. Compacted backfill needed for all trench excavations

B. Where the trench for one pipe passes beneath the trench of another pipe, compact the backfill for the lower trench to the bottom of the upper trench

C. Place job excavated materials in 8 inch max uncompacted thickness, uniform layers 1. Increased layer thickness may be permitted for uncohesive material if Contractor

demonstrates to Engineer's satisfaction that specified compacted density will be achieved 2. Thoroughly compact each layer to meet the moisture and compaction specifications herein.

D. Use methods and equipment appropriate to the material to be compacted to prevent transmission of damaging shocks to pipe



E. Graded gravel 1. Deposit in uniform layers of 12 inch max uncompacted thickness 2. Compact with suitable vibrating roller or platform vibrator to not less than 70 percent relative

density per ASTM D4253/D4254

F. Finish the top portion of backfill with at least 4 inches of topsoil or as specified by landscaping specifications, whichever is greater, corresponding to, or better than, that underlying adjoining turf areas.

G. Trench backfill within the public right-of-way shall conform to municipal street and utility standards.

H. Trench backfills through unimproved areas should be restored to previous conditions and left 3” above adjacent grades to allow for settlement. Seed all disturbed areas according to landscape specifications.

3.19 PROTECTION OF TRENCH BACKFILL

A. Where trenches are constructed in ditches or other water courses, protect backfill from erosion

B. Install ditch checks where the ditch grade exceeds 1 percent 1. Minimum depth: 2 feet below the original ditch or water course bottom for the full bottom width 2. Minimum width: 18 inches into the side slopes 3. Minimum thickness: 12 inches

3.20 DRAINAGE MAINTENANCE

A. Do not backfill trenches across roadways, drives, walks or other trafficways adjacent to drainage ditches or water courses prior to backfilling the trench on the upstream side of the trafficway to prevent impounding water after pipe is laid

B. Backfill so that water does not accumulate in unfilled or partially filled trenches

C. Remove materials deposited in roadway ditches or other water courses crossed by the trench line immediately after backfilling is completed and restore ditches and water courses to original section, grade, and contours

D. Do not obstruct surface drainage any longer than necessary

E. Provide and maintain temporary bridges and other structures across unfilled trenches as required to maintain traffic

F. Provide adequate storm flow conveyance through the site at all times during construction to avoid flooding of any buildings or adjacent property. Provide overland drainage routing when storm sewer inlets are not fully functioning due to erosion and sediment control measures.

3.21 FINAL GRADING

A. After completion of all other outside work and after backfilling is completed and settled, bring to grade at the indicated elevations

B. Graders and other power equipment may be used for final grading and slope dressing if the result is uniform and equivalent to hand work



C. Grade all surfaces for effective drainage, provide a 2 percent minimum slope except as otherwise shown on the plans

D. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades

E. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface tolerances

F. Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and prevent ponds from forming where not intended.

G. Finish subgrades at lawns and unpaved areas to required elevations within a tolerance of plus or minus one (1) inch.

H. Coordinate final subgrade depth with finish landscape treatment.

3.22 SLOPE AND CHANNEL STABILIZATION

A. Cover channel banks, slopes, bottom and thalweg (water flowline at lowest point in channel) with erosion control fabric mat where grade is steeper than 3H to 1V and where indicated on the Drawings

B. Lay fabric smoothly on surface, bury top end of each section in 6-inch deep excavated topsoil trench. Provide 6-inch overlap minimum of adjacent rolls. Backfill trench and rake smooth, level with adjacent soil

C. Secure outside edges and overlaps at 48 inch intervals with 4-inch to 6-inch U-shaped type pins or wooden stakes depending on ground condition

D. Lightly dress slopes with topsoil to ensure close contact between fabric and soil

E. At sides of ditches, lay fabric laps in direction of water flow. Lap ends and edges minimum 6 inches

F. Maintain integrity of erosion control fabric

G. Prior to laying fabric, seed disturbed areas under provisions of related seeding and landscaping specification sections.

3.23 SETTLEMENT

A. Warranty for settlement of all fills, embankments, and backfills is stipulated in the General Conditions from final completion of Contract under which Work is performed

B. Repair or replace within 30 days after notice by Engineer or Owner


A. Provide under provisions of General Conditions and Division One Specifications

B. Coordinate testing with Owner. Owner will provide all field testing to determine compliance of in-place and backfill materials and compaction in accordance with the specifications, and to verify design bearing capacities.



C. Fills and Embankment Testing 1. Two moisture-density relationship tests, ASTM D698, on each type of fill material 2. One in-place compaction test for each 5,000 square feet every 1.5 feet of vertical lift of

material placed 3. Additional in-place compaction tests at the discretion of the Owner

D. Pipe Embedment and Backfill Testing 1. Two moisture-density relationship tests, ASTM D698, or two relative density tests, ASTM

D4253/D4254, as appropriate for each type of embedment on backfill material proposed, except granular embedment material

2. One in-place compaction test every 200 lineal feet of trench in the compacted embedment zone and at every 1.5 feet of vertical lift of backfill materials, ASTM D2922/D3017

3. One in-place compaction test near top of trench for trench depth of 2 feet or less, ASTM D2922/D3017

4. Additional in-place compaction tests at the discretion of the Owner

E. Pavement and Structural Subgrade Testing 1. At a minimum, two moisture-density relationship tests, ASTM D698, or two relative density

tests, ASTM D4253/D4254, as appropriate and adequate for each type backfill material proposed.

2. Perform tests for each footing, concrete site feature, and drainage structure subgrade. Perform tests at every 100 linear feet of subgrade of foundation walls, retaining walls, and every 150 feet for curbing, pans, drainage features, walks, etc. (or portions thereof). Perform tests every 2,000 square feet required of building slab area, exterior slabs and pavement/flatwork areas (with no less than 3 tests). Test at subgrade and at every vertical lift of backfill materials placed.

3. Additional in-place compaction tests at the discretion of the Owner

END OF SECTION


SECTION 31 66 15

HELICAL FOUNDATION PILES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Steel helical pile foundation system. B. Related Requirements: 1. Field Testing and Special Inspection Procedures: Section 01 45 00 Field Quality Control. 2. Layout: Section 01 71 23.14 Construction Layout and Control. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Definitions: 1. Helical Pile: Manufactured steel deep foundation element consisting of a central shaft and

one or more helical bearing plates. A helical pile is installed by rotating it into the ground. Each helical bearing plate is formed into a screwthread with a uniform defined pitch.

B. Reference Standards: See Section 01 42 00. Comply with the following: 1. American Welding Society (AWS) Standards: a. AWS D1.1/D1.1M – 2010 Structural Welding Code – Steel. 2. ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. – AC358 - Acceptance Criteria for Helical Foundation Systems

and Devices, July 1, 2007. 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Procedures: Submit for review, acceptance and return in accordance with Section 01 33 00. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's catalog cut and data sheets. 1. Include data on corrosion protection to be provided. C. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings for helical piles and all components. Include the following. 1. Helical pile number, location and pattern by assigned identification number. 2. Design load for each helical pile. 3. Type and size of central steel shaft. 4. Helix Configuration: Number and diameter of helix plates. 5. Minimum effective installation torque. 6. Minimum overall length. 7. Inclination of helical pile. 8. Cut-off elevation. 9. Details of helical pile attachment to structure relative to grade beam, column pad, pile cap,

etc. 1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Procedures: Submit for information and verification in accordance with Section 01 33 00. B. Certificates: 1. Installer Qualifications: Submit Manufacturer's certification of helical pile system installer.

DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS Florence Crittenton HELICAL FOUNDATION PILES OZ Architecture Project No. 113266.00 31 66 15 - 1

100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS July 8, 2014 C. Installation Records: Submit helical pile installation records within 24 hours after each installation

is completed. Formal copies shall be submitted on a weekly basis. These installation records shall include, but are not limited to, the following information.

1. Project name and location. 2. Name of authorized and certified dealer and installer. 3. Name of installer’s foreman or representative witnessing the installation. 4. Date of installation. 5. Location of helical pile by assigned identification number, including deviation, if any, from

indicated locations. 6. Description of lead section including number and diameter of helices and extensions used. 7. Overall depth of installation from a known reference point. 8. Installation torque at termination of pier. 9. Load transfer device. 10. Comments pertaining to interruptions, obstructions, or other relevant information. 11. Rated load capacities. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Installer Qualifications: Installation shall be done by an manufacturer-authorized installation

contractor. 2. Welder Qualifications: Welding shall be performed only by certified welding operators

currently qualified in accordance with the testing procedures of AWS D1.1 for the weld types and positions required for the installations indicated.

B. Preconstruction Testing: Install a minimum of one test pile at location directed by Independent

Testing Agency. Install using methods and keep records as specified for foundation piles. Before beginning foundation pile installation, obtain Independent Testing Agency’s determination of allowable load carrying capacity of proposed helical piles, correlated with torsional resistance, based on results of test pile installation and evaluation criteria of ICC-ES AC358.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General Requirements: Comply with Section 01 60 00. B. Storage and Handling Requirements: 1. Steel: Store members above ground on platforms, skids or other supports and to prevent

twisting and corrosion. 1.07 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Test Holes: A series of test holes have been made for Owner by its separate consultant. See

Document 00 30 00. Log and report are believed to be accurate; however, neither Owner nor Architect guarantees information contained therein nor do they guarantee conditions indicated to exist at locations of test holes will prevail at other locations on site.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS AND PRODUCTS

A. Acceptable Helical Pile Manufacturers and Systems: 1. Alpine Site Services, Inc. – AES Screwpiles. 2. Chance Civil Construction, a Division of Hubbell Power Systems, Inc.; www.abchance.com -

The Chance Helical Pier Foundation System. 3. I.M.R., Inc., Denver, Colorado - HELI-PILE steel helical piles. DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS Florence Crittenton HELICAL FOUNDATION PILES OZ Architecture Project No. 113266.00 31 66 15 - 2

http://www.abchance.com/

100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS July 8, 2014 2.02 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Design and construct helical foundation system in accordance with applicable laws, codes,

ordinances, and regulations. 2.03 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN CRITERIA A. Performance Criteria: Negligible settlement under applied design loads. B. Design Loads: Steel helical piles shall be designed and installed to resist the unfactored design

loads indicated on the Structural Drawings. 1. Piles shall develop ultimate load capacities of at least twice the design working loads in the

designated load-bearing layers. Analysis shall show that no soil layer underlying the designated load-bearing layers causes the load-bearing capacity safety factor to be less than two.

C. Helical piles shall be designed and manufactured in accordance with accepted engineering

practice to resist all stresses induced by installation into the ground and service loads. 2.04 COMPONENTS AND MATERIALS A. Pier Shafts: The central steel shaft shall consist of lead sections and extensions as follows. 1. The solid steel shafts shall conform to the general requirements of ASTM A29. 2. Helices: Carbon steel sheet, strip, or plate formed on matching metal dies to true helical

shape and shall conform to ASTM A656 Grade 80. B. Couplings: Couplings shall be cold-forged welded to the shaft. C. Finish: All material shall be galvanized per ASTM B633. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: See Section 01 71 16. 1. Layout: Verify grades and layout of work before beginning installation. B In the event of a discrepancy, notify the General Contractor with a copy to the Architect. Do not

proceed with helical pile installation in areas of discrepancies until said discrepancies have been resolved.

C. Start of installation means acceptance of existing conditions by helical pile installer. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Existing Utilities: Locate and protect from damage any sewer, water, gas, electric, phone or other

pipe lines or conduits in the area of the work under this Section. Do not drill through active utilities.

B. Protection: Protect adjacent improvements as required to prevent damage during installation. C. Installation Equipment: 1. Mobilize installation equipment with a rotary type motor with equal forward and reverse

torque capabilities. This equipment shall be capable of continual adjustment of the torque



drive unit's revolutions per minute (RPM's) during installation. Percussion drilling equipment will not be allowed.

2. Mobilize equipment capable of applying installation torque equal to the torque required to meet the pier loads.

3. Mobilize equipment capable of applying axial compression (crowd) pressure and torque simultaneously.

D. Provide torque-monitoring device. 1. The torque being applied by the installing units shall be monitored throughout the installation

by the installer. The torque monitoring device shall either be a part of the installing unit or an independent device in-line with the installing unit. Calibration for either unit shall be available for review by the Independent Testing Agency.

3.03 INSTALLATION A. General: Install in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions. Use only Manufacturer-approved

adapters and equipment. The helical pile installation technique shall be such that it is consistent with the geotechnical, logistical, environmental, and load carrying conditions of the Project.

B. Position helical pile as indicated. Establish proper angular alignment at start of installation. 1. The lead section shall be positioned at the location as shown on the working drawings. 2. Battered helical piles may be positioned perpendicular to the ground to assist in initial

advancement into the soil before the required batter angle shall be established. C. Advancing Sections: 1. Engage and advance the helical pile sections in a smooth, continuous manner with the rate

of pier rotation in the range of 5 to 35 RPM. 2. Apply sufficient axial compression (crowd) pressure to uniformly advance the helical sections

to approximately 3-inches (76.2 mm) per revolution. The rate of rotation and magnitude of crowd pressure must be adjusted for different soil conditions and depths in order to maintain the penetration rate.

3. If the helical section ceases to advance, refusal will have been reached and the installation shall be terminated.

D. Termination Criteria: 1. The torque as measured during the installation shall not exceed the torsional strength rating

of the steel helical lead and extension sections. 2. The minimum depth criteria indicated on the Drawings must be satisfied prior to terminating

the steel helical pile. 3. The top helix is to be located not less than five (5) feet (1.5 m) below the grade elevation

unless otherwise approved by the Owner. 4. If the torsional strength rating of the pier and/or installing unit has been reached prior to

satisfying the minimum depth required, the installing contractor shall have the following options:

a. Terminate the installation at the depth obtained with the approval of the Geotechnical Engineer, or,

b. Remove the existing pier and install a pier with smaller and/or fewer helices. This revised pier shall be terminated deeper than the terminating depth of the original pier as directed by the Geotechnical Engineer.

5. In the event the minimum installation torque is not achieved at minimum depth, the Contractor shall install the foundation deeper using additional plain extension sections.

6. The minimum specified installation torque shall have been met when the measured installation torque meets or exceeds the minimum specified installation torque in two successive readings of the measuring device, unless otherwise specified by the Independent Testing Agency.


100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS July 8, 2014 E. Installation Tolerances: 1. Centerline of helical piles shall not be more than 3 inches from indicated plan location. 2. Helical pile plumbness shall be within 2 inches of design alignment. 3. Top elevation of helical pile shall be within plus 1 inch to minus 2 inches of the design

vertical elevation. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Defective Piles: Abandon and replace with new piles as directed by Architect. 3.05 SITE QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspection: See Section 01 45 00. Special inspections shall be performed continuously

during installation of helical pile foundations. The information recorded shall include installation equipment used, pile dimensions, tip elevations, final depth, final installation torque and other pertinent installation data as required by the Geotechnical Engineer.

B. Torque Monitoring: 1. Monitor torque applied by the installing units during the entire installation and record values

achieved on each pile. 2. Make calibration torque monitoring data available to Architect upon request.

END OF SECTION



DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS Florence Crittenton PROTECTION / REPAIR OF EXISTING TREES OZ Architecture Project No. 113266.00 Section 32 01 90.33 - 1

SECTION 32 01 90.33

PROTECTION/REPAIR OF EXISTING TREES

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Protecting existing trees. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS AND DOCUMENTS

A. Section 02 20 00: Earthwork. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Orange safety fence. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. All trees within area available to the Contractor for construction shall be protected with orange safety fence around the trunk and dripline of the tree.

B. When setting up construction limits lines for construction, construction access and material

storage, the Contractor shall fence or similarly protect restricted zones around all trees. These restricted zones shall extend from dripline to dripline. In any areas where the restricted zones must be violated, it shall be done only with the approval by the City Forester. If access is allowed within these areas the use of heavy construction equipment shall be severely restricted in order to mitigate soil compaction and damage to tree roots.

C. If tree roots larger than three (3) inches in diameter are encountered when digging or trenching

they shall be tunneled under for the placement of pipe, or other improvements. Where tree roots smaller than three (3) inches in diameter are in direct conflict with the exact final physical location of any of the proposed improvements, the roots shall be hand pruned with a saw. Do not tear the roots out. The removal of three (3) inches or larger diameter roots encountered during construction will not be allowed.

D. Aeration: If areas inside the restricted zone become compacted, the contractor shall use a grow

gun or equal to fracture the soil. Fracturing penetration shall be 5' on center throughout the compacted areas.

E. Supplemental watering shall be applied with a deep root feeder, with about 100 gallons per tree

per week if loss of ground cover (grass) or heating of the tree roots occur during construction. F. No chemicals shall be applied or used around or near existing trees.

3.02 PROTECTION

A. General: Continue to protect trees throughout the completion of construction.


DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS Florence Crittenton PROTECTION / REPAIR OF EXISTING TREES OZ Architecture Project No. 113266.00 Section 32 01 90.33 - 2

B. When construction is complete, remove orange safety fence from around trees. C. If it appears that the completion of the construction may cause damage to the branches of any

trees, the Contractor shall contact the City Forester. The Forester will make a determination as to whether such damage is eminent. If so, the Forestry Department will prune the trees to facilitate the construction.

D. For each tree erroneously removed or damaged beyond repair, an assessment shall be withheld

for the Contractor’s progress payments. This assessment shall be equal to the value of the tree prior to damage as determined by the City Forester and the Parks and Recreation Representative.

E. In addition to paying the assessment, the contractor shall replace each damaged tree with

nursery grown material of the same or approved species and approved size.

END OF SECTION


DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS Florence Crittenton FLEXIBLE PAVING OZ Architecture Project No. 113266.00 Section 32 12 00 - 1

SECTION 32 12 00

FLEXIBLE PAVING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Full depth asphaltic concrete paving over prepared subgrade


A. Section 31 00 00 – Earthwork

B. Section 32 13 00 – Rigid Paving

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ASTM C29: Unit Weight and Voids in Aggregate

B. ASTM C88: Soundness of Aggregates by Use of Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate

C. ASTM C117: Materials Finer than No. 200 Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing

D. ASTM C128: Specific Gravity Test and Absorption of Fine Aggregate

E. ASTM C131: Resistance to Degradation of Small Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine

F. ASTM C136: Sieve or Screen Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates

G. ASTM D4: Bitumen Content

H. ASTM D5: Penetration of Bituminous Materials

I. ASTM D70: Specific Gravity of Semi-Solid Bituminous Materials

J. ASTM D93: Flash Point by Pensky-Martens Closed Tester

K. ASTM D113: Ductility of Bituminous Materials

L. ASTM D1188: Bulk Specific Gravity of Compacted Bituminous Mixtures

M. ASTM D1559: Resistance to Plastic Flow of Bituminous Mixtures Using Marshall Apparatus

N. ASTM D2041: Theoretical Maximum Specific Gravity of Bituminous Paving Mixtures

O. ASTM D2170: Kinematic Viscosity of Asphalts (Bitumens)

P. ASTM D2172: Quantities Extraction of Bitumens from Bituminous Paving Mixtures



Q. ASTM D2419: Sand Equivalent Value of Soils and Fine Aggregate

R. ASTM D290: Bituminous Mixing Plant Inspection

S. ASTM D946: Asphalt Cement for Use in Pavement Construction

T. ASTM D692: Course Aggregate for Bituminous Paving

U. ASTM D1073: Fine Aggregate for Bituminous Paving Mixtures

V. ASTM 1241: Materials for Soil-Aggregate Subbase, Base and Surface Courses

W. ASTM D2026: Cutback Asphalt (Slow-Curing Type)

X. ASTM D2027: Cutback Asphalt (Medium-Curing Type)

Y. ASTM D2028: Cutback Asphalt (Rapid-Curing Type)

Z. MS-2: Mix Design Method for Asphalt Concrete and Other Hot Mix Types -The Asphaltic Institute (AI)

AA. CABO/ANSI A117.1 for accessibility requirements related to walks, ramps, parking areas, drives, curb ramps, etc.

BB. Colorado Department of Transportation

CC. Colorado Asphalt Pavement Association

DD. City and County of Denver construction specifications, standards and details.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Division One Specifications

B. Samples: Provide samples of materials for laboratory testing and job-mix design for asphaltic concrete paving section.

C. Record of Work: Maintain record of time and date of placement, temperature, and weather conditions, retain until completion and furnish copy to engineer.

D. Test Reports: Submit laboratory reports for following materials tests 1. Coarse and fine aggregate from each material source and each required grading

a. Sieve analysis: ASTM C136 (AASHTO T19) b. Unit weight of slag: ASTM C29 (AASHTO T19) c. Soundness: ASTM C88 (AASHTO T104) for surface course aggregates only d. Sand equivalent: ASTM D2419 (AASHTO T176) e. Abrasion of coarse aggregate: ASTM C131 (AASHTO T96), for surface course

aggregates only 2. Asphalt cement for each penetration grade

a. Penetration: ASTM D5 (AASHTO T49) b. Viscosity (Kinematic): ASTM D2170 (AASHTO T201) c. Flash Point: ASTM D93 (AASHTO T48) d. Ductility: ASTM D113 (AASHTO T51) e. Solubility: ASTM D4 (AASHTO T44)



f. Specific gravity: ASTM D70 (AASHTO T43) 3. Job-mix design mixtures for each material or grade

a. Bulk specific gravity for fine aggregate: ASTM C128 (AASHTO T84) 4. Uncompacted asphalt concrete mix: Maximum specific gravity ASTM D2041 (AASHTO

T209) 5. Compacted asphalt concrete mix

a. Bulk density: ASTM D1188 (AASHTO T166) b. Marshall stability and flow: ASTM D1559

6. Density and void analysis a. Provide each series of asphalt concrete mixture test specimens, in accordance with MS-2 b. Use Marshall method of mix design unless otherwise directed or acceptable to Engineer

7. Sampling and testing of asphalt concrete mixtures for quality control during paving operations a. Uncompacted asphalt concrete mix

i) Asphalt cement content: ASTM D2172 (AASHTO T164) ii) Penetration of recovered asphalt cement: ASTM D5 (AASHTO T49) iii) Ductibility of recovered asphalt cement: ASTM D113 (AASHTO T51)

b. Compacted asphalt concrete mix i) Bulk density: ASTM D1188 (AASHTO T166) ii) Marshall stability and flow: ASTM D1559

c. Perform at least one test for each day's paving but not less than one test per each 4000 sf of each lift.


A. Materials and installation shall conform to applicable portions of Colorado Department of Transportation and City and County of Denver construction specifications, standards and details.


A. For work on public streets or rights-of-way conform to the requirements of City and County of Denver construction specifications, standards and details for the Construction of Curbs, Gutters, Sidewalks, Driveways, Street Paving, and Other Public Right-of-Way Improvements.



A. Deliver, store, protect and handle materials under provisions of Division One Specifications

B. Transport mixture from mix plant in trucks with tight, clean, non-sticking compartments. Coat hauling compartments with lime-water mixture to prevent sticking. Elevate and drain compartment of excess solution before loading mix.

C. Cover to protect from weather and prevent loss of heat when temperature is below 50 degrees F

D. Provide insulated truck beds during temperature below 50 degrees F on long distance deliveries


A. Do not apply when underlying surface is muddy, frozen or wet

B. Do not place by spreading and finishing machine tack coat or asphaltic cement when temperature is below 45 degrees F and falling. Place when above 40 degrees F and rising



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Tack Coat: Emulsified asphalt: SS-1 or CSS-1h, ASTM D977

B. Asphaltic Cement: ASTM D946, AASHTO M226, AC10 or AC20 grade determined by design mix, homogeneous, free from water, no tendency to foam when heated to 347 degrees F, and per CDOT Standard Section 702.

C. Aggregate for Asphaltic Concrete, General 1. Sound, angular crushed stone, crushed gravel, or crushed slag: ASTM D692 2. Sand, stone, or slag screening: ASTM D1073 3. Percent wear: ASTM C131, less than 45 for aggregates retained in #10 sieve

D. Base Course Aggregates for Asphaltic Concrete 1. Uncrushed gravel may be used in mixture if it meets design criteria specified 2. Provide uniform quality combined aggregates with a minimum sand equivalent value of 40 3. Provide aggregate in gradations for courses to comply with Class S and SG, Colorado

Department of Transportation, ASTM C136

E. Surface Course Aggregates for Asphaltic Concrete 1. Provide natural sand, unless sand prepared from stone, slag, or gravel or combinations are

required to suit local conditions 2. Provide uniform quality combined aggregate with a minimum sand equivalent value of 50 3. Provide aggregate in gradations for courses to comply with Class SX, Colorado Department

of Transportation, ASTM C136.

F. Weed Control: First application, “Roundup.” Second application, Casoron “W-50" or “G-10” with colored marker dye, manufactured by Pacific Coast Borax Company or an accepted substitute of non-flammable type.

2.02 ACCESSORIES

A. Traffic Control Devices 1. Signs.

a. Comply with City and County of Denver standards and specifications for signs within the public right-of-way.

b. Sign faces, posts and bases shall be in conformance with the following materials specifications. All nonstandard sign faces, posts and bases must be approved by City and County of Denver. Private property or nonstandard signs will be maintained by the owner. Submit shop drawings for approval prior to fabrication. All signs shall conform to current M.U.T.C.D. Standards and Colorado Supplements. All signs shall be 3M-engineer grade reflective sheeting or accepted substitute.

c. Traffic/Parking Signs: Sign blanks shall be 6061 or 5052-H38 aluminum alloy .080 inches thick. Facing shall be specified reflective sheeting with standard sign colors based on standard graphics and as shown on the plans.

2. Sign Posts. a. For large signs greater than 12”W x 18”H and for multiple signs of any size mounted on

the same post: sign posts shall be two (2) inch by two (2) inch galvanized telespar tube. b. For regular single signs 12”W x 18”H or smaller: sign posts shall be one and one-half (1-

1/2) inch by one and one-half (1-1/2) inch galvanized telespar tube.



c. Galvanized telespar tube shall have 0.120-inch wall thickness, and three-eighths (3/8) inch holes drilled on one (1) inch centers, all sides over full length, ten (10) feet in length (min).

3. Sign Post Anchor Bases (Stubs). All sign post anchor bases shall be twist resistant square galvanized telespar tube post with thickness and hole pattern the same as sign posts. Use 2-1/4” by 2-1/4” anchor for large posts and 1-3/4” by 1-3/4” anchor for regular posts. Bases shall be embedded a minimum of 36” below finished grade and shall extend 3” above finished grade.

4. Signs Post Anchor Bases with concrete footing: Sign, post, base and compacted soil shall be rigid and able to withstand wind loads. Where predominantly clay soils are present which will not properly compact at sign base, install a 6” diameter by 36” deep concrete footing around signs post anchor base for all signs in landscaped areas.

5. All signs and posts shall be mounted and secured with municipal-approved vandal-proof type TL-3896 drive rivets with washers, or accepted substitute.

B. Pavement Marking. Specified pavement marking materials shall be used at locations as identified below. 1. Comply with City and County of Denver standards and specifications for pavement marking

within the public right-of-way. 2. FS TT-P-115, Type I Alkyd, white, blue, yellow and red color paint meeting requirements of

CDOT Standard Specification 708. Verify colors and extent of painting prior to painting. Unless noted on plans, evident at existing striping or instructed, provide white in color for traffic striping, parking stalls, and other control markings on internal pavement, yellow in color for traffic control markings or restricted parking or where indicated, blue in color for accessible parking stalls, and red in color for curbs where no parking is indicated. Reflectorized paint required for traffic stripes and control markings on internal drive, road or street pavements.

3. Furnish paint with a no-pick-up maximum drying time of 20 minutes, when tested according to ASTM D711 using a wet film thickness of 0.015-inch when tested and applied at 77 degrees F.

4. 3M Stamark 5730 preformed plastic marking material or an accepted substitute shall be used for crosswalks, stop bars, symbols (i.e. turn arrows) and striping for separation of turn and through lanes in right-of-way. Use of thermoplastic pavement marking is not permitted.

2.03 MIXES/SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Determine full depth design mix based upon aggregates furnished 1. Test mix by independent laboratory at Contractor's expense 2. Grade dependent on temperature during placement 3. Submit mix designs under provisions of Section Division One specifications for review and

acceptance by Engineer

B. Submit mix design giving unit weight and to meet following requirements prior to placement of asphalt:

Property – 50 Blow S Mix SX Mix

Marshall Stability lbs 1600 (min.) 500 (min.) Flow, 0.01’ 8-18 8-20 Air Voids in Mix, % 3-5 3-5 VMA, % min. 14 15 Initial Gyrations 7-8 7-8 Design Gyrations 75-100 75-100 Hveem Stability 30 min 30 min Voids Filled w/ Asphalt 65-75 65-75



Establish a single percentage passing each sieve size, a single percent of asphalt and a mix temperature. Maintain job mixes within following percentages of design mix: Aggregates:

#8 and larger ± 8% #16 to #100 ± 6% #200 ± 2% Asphalt Content Tolerance ± 0.5% Discharge Mix temp ± 20˚ F

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Establish and maintain required lines and elevations. Provide grade and location stakes under this section as required for asphaltic concrete paving work.

B. Operate heavy, rubber-tired front loader over subgrade of paved areas. Where soft spots occur, remove loose materials and replace with Class 6 road base aggregate complying with CDOH standards compacted to level of subgrade.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Prepare subgrade under provisions of Section 31 00 00

B. Loose and Foreign Material 1. Remove loose and foreign material from compacted subgrade surface immediately before

application of paving. Clean surface with mechanical sweeper, blowers, or hand brooms, until surfaces are free from dust

C. Weed Control 1. If weeds or vegetation exist at or on the subgrade, apply “Round-up” at rates following

manufacturer’s instructions. Apply “Round-up” three days prior to removal of vegetation, subgrade preparation and application of Casoron as described below to allow “Round-up” to kill all vegetation. Remove all living and dead weeds, root balls, tree/shrub roots, vegetation, and/or any organic matter from on or in the subgrade per applicable earthwork specifications prior to subgrade preparation and paving at all areas to be paved.

2. After all fine grading, checking, shaping, and compacting of the subgrade has been completed, and just prior to placing asphalt or aggregate base course, all subgrade soil in the area to receive asphalt pavement shall be thoroughly treated with Casoron soil sterilant (in addition to “Round-up” and regardless of presence of existing weeds or vegetation). Casoron shall be thoroughly sprinkled to distribute the chemical through the first two or three inches of the subgrade. For all areas to be paved, apply Casoron weed control at a minimum rate per 100 square yards of 2.4 pounds for G-10 or 4.0 pounds for 50w at rates and methods recommended by manufacturer within one day of paving.

3. The Contractor shall provide all necessary protection to prevent injury to animal, fish, or plant life and property occasioned by the application of the soil sterilant. Apply on a calm, wind-free day. The Contractor will be held responsible for all application of soil sterilant or the storage of same. Protect existing and new trees and shrubs beyond the limit of paving from damage due to weed killer or soil sterilant overspray or root contact. Extra caution is required to prevent over-application of products in areas to be paved under tree canopies. Trees and



shrubs damaged or killed by weed killer or sterilant application shall be replaced by the contractor at contractor’s expense.

4. Do not apply within 20 feet of trees or shrubs

D. Tack Coat 1. Apply in similar manner as prime coat, except as modified 2. Dilute material with equal parts of water and apply to contact surfaces of previously

constructed asphaltic concrete or portland cement concrete and surfaces 3. Apply at rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gallons per square yard of surface 4. Apply tack coat by brush to contact surfaces of curbs, gutters, catch basins, and other

structures projecting into or abutting asphaltic concrete pavement 5. Allow surfaces to dry until material is at condition of tackiness to receive pavement 6. Where asphaltic concrete will adhere to surface, tack coat may be eliminated by Engineer

3.03 RING/FRAME ADJUSTMENTS

A. Set ring/frames of subsurface structures to final grade as a part of this work.

B. Placing Ring/Frames 1. Surround ring/frames set to elevation with a ring of compacted asphalt concrete base prior to

paving 2. Place asphalt concrete mixture up to 1-inch below top of ring/frame, slope to grade, and

compact by hand tamping

C. Adjust frames to proper position to meet paving

D. If permanent covers are not in place, provide temporary covers over openings until completion of rolling operations

E. Set ring/frames to grade, flush with surface of adjacent pavement

3.04 PREPARING THE MIXTURE

A. Comply with ASTM D995 for material storage, control, and mixing and for plant equipment and operation

B. Stockpile 1. Keep each component of the various sized combined aggregates in separate stockpiles 2. Maintain stockpiles so that separate aggregate sizes will not be intermixed and to prevent

segregation

C. Heating 1. Heat the asphalt cement at the mixing plant to viscosity at which it can be uniformly

distributed throughout mixture 2. Use lowest possible temperature to suite temperature viscosity characteristics of asphalt 3. Do not exceed 350 degrees F

D. Aggregate 1. Heat-dry aggregates to acceptable moisture content 2. Deliver to mixer at recommended temperature to suite penetration grade and viscosity

characteristics of asphalt cement, ambient temperature, and workability of mixture 3. Accurately weigh or measure dry aggregates and weigh or meter asphalt cement to comply

with job-mix formula requirements



E. Mix aggregate and asphalt cement to achieve 90-95 percent coated particles for base mixtures and 85-90 percent coated particles for surface mixture, per ASTM D2489

3.05 EQUIPMENT

A. Bituminous Pavers: Self-propelled, spreads without tearing surfaces, and controls pavement edges to true lines without use of stationary forms

B. Rolling Equipment 1. Steel-wheel roller: Self-propelled, contact pressure of 250 to 350 psi per inch of width of

roller wheel, equipped with adjustable scrapers and means for keeping wheel wet to prevent mix from sticking

2. Pneumatic-tired rollers: Self-propelled, contact pressure under each tire of 85 to 110 psi, wheels spaced so that one pass will accomplish one complete coverage equal to rolling width of machine, oscillating wheels. Remove and replace immediately tires picking up fines

C. Hand Tools: Provide rakes, lutes, shovels, tampers, smoothing irons, pavement cutters, portable heaters, and other miscellaneous small tools

3.06 PLACING THE MIX

A. Place asphalt concrete mixture on prepared surface, spread and strike-off using paving machine

B. Complete placement over full width of section on each day's run

C. Spread mixture at minimum temperature of 280 degrees F and maximum 350 degrees. With ambient temperatures below 50 degrees F, maintain minimum temperature of 300 degrees in the truck prior to lay down

D. Inaccessible and small areas may be placed by hand

E. Conform to the grade, cross section, finish thickness, and density indicated.

F. Lift Thickness 1. Place in multiple lifts. Place asphalt in lifts such that each compacted lift thickness is no less

than 2.0” thick and no greater than 3.0” thick. Top lift to be 2” thick. 2. Typical Lift Thickness Sequencing:

Final Asphalt Section Required (inches) No. of Lifts

Thickness of each Lift (inches)

2” 1 2

3” 1 3

4” 2 2-2

5” 2 3-2

6” 3 2-2-2

7” 3 3-2-2

8” 3 3-3-2

9” 4 3-2-2-2

10” 4 3-3-2-2

>10 Review with Engineer

G. Paver Placing



1. Unless otherwise directed, being placing along centerline of areas in crowned section and at high side on one-way slope and in direction of traffic flow

2. After first strip has been placed and rolled, place succeeding strips and extend rolling to overlap previous strips

3. Complete base courses before placing surface courses 4. Place mixture in continuous operation as practicable

H. Hand Placing 1. Spread, tamp, and finish mixing using hand tools in areas where machine spreading is not

possible as acceptable to Engineer 2. Place mixture at a rate that will insure handling and compaction before mixture becomes

cooler than acceptable working temperature

I. Joints 1. Construct transverse joint at right angles to centerline when operations are suspended long

enough for mixture to chill 2. Construct joints to have same texture, density, and smoothness as adjacent sections of

asphalt concrete course 3. Clean contact surfaces free of sand, dirt, or other objectionable material and apply tack coat 4. Offset transverse joints in succeeding courses not less than 24 inches 5. Cut back edge of existing pavement or previously placed course to expose an even, vertical

surface for full course thickness 6. Offset longitudinal joints in succeeding courses not less than 6 inches 7. When the edges of longitudinal joints are irregular, honeycombed or inadequately

compacted, cut back unsatisfactory sections to expose an even, vertical surface for full course thickness

8. Wearing course constructed in even number of strips; place 1 longitudinal joint on centerline of road

9. Wearing course constructed in odd number of strips; place the centerline of 1 strip on centerline of road

J. Gutter: Finish surface high adjacent to concrete gutter so when compacted surface is slightly higher than edge of curb and flashing

3.07 COMPACTING THE MIX

A. Provide pneumatic and steel-wheel type rollers to obtain the required pavement density, surface texture and rideability

B. Begin rolling operations when the mixture will bear weight of roller without excessive displacement

C. Do not permit heavy equipment, including rollers to stand on finished surface before it has thoroughly cooled or set

D. Compact mixture with hot hand tampers or vibrating plate compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers

E. Start rolling longitudinally at extreme lower side of sections and proceed toward center of pavement. Roll to slightly different lengths on alternate roller runs

F. Do not roll centers of sections first under any circumstances

G. Breakdown Rolling



1. Accomplish breakdown or initial rolling immediately following rolling of transverse and longitudinal joints and outside edge

2. Operate rollers as close as possible to paver without causing pavement displacement 3. Check crown, grade, and smoothness after breakdown rolling 4. Repair displaced areas by loosening at once with lutes or rakes and filling, if required, with

hot loose material before continuing rolling

H. Second Rolling 1. Follow breakdown rolling as soon as possible, while mixture is hot and in condition for

compaction 2. Continue second rolling until mixture has been thoroughly compacted

I. Finish Rolling 1. Perform finish rolling while mixture is still warm enough for removal of roller marks by

combination of steel and pneumatic rollers 2. Continue rolling until roller marks are eliminated and course has attained specified density,

and required surface texture and surface tolerances 3. After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled and hardened.

Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled and attained its maximum degree of hardness

J. Patching 1. Remove and replace defective areas 2. Cut-out and fill with fresh, hot asphaltic concrete 3. Remove deficient areas for full depth of course 4. Cut sides perpendicular and parallel to direction of traffic with edges vertical 5. Apply tack coat to exposed surfaces before placing new asphaltic concrete mixture 6. Compact by rolling to specified surface density and smoothness

3.08 JOINING TO EXISTING WORK

A. Cut sides vertically and apply tack coat to exposed asphalt surfaces before placing new pavement. Meet existing thickness of surface and base courses, but not less than specified for new work.


A. The owner will engage a testing agency to perform field testing to determine compliance of in-place asphaltic concrete paving materials and compaction in accordance with Section 01400

B. Testing Agency will test in-place pavement for density and thickness.

C. Asphalt density test shall be taken every one-hundred fifty (150) lineal feet per driving lane. Densities shall be between ninety two percent (92%) and ninety six percent (96%) of the Rice unit weight or between ninety five percent (95%) and one-hundred percent (100%) of the Marshall unit weight.

D. Contractor to verify final surfaces are of uniform texture, conforming to required grades and cross sections

E. Testing agency will take not less than 4-inch diameter pavement specimens for each completed course from locations as directed by Engineer

F. Repair holes from test specimens as specified for patching defective work



G. Minimum acceptable density of in-place course materials is 95 percent of the recorded laboratory specimen density. Immediately re-compact asphaltic concrete not conforming to acceptable density. Remove and replace all sections not in conformance density requirements

H. Thickness: Variations from drawings 1. Base course: 1/4-inch + 2. Remove and replace paving less than minimum thickness

I. Surface Smoothness 1. Test using a 10 foot straight edge applied parallel to direction of drainage 2. Advance straight edge five feet, maximum 1/4-inch per foot from nearest point of contact 3. Do not permit pockets or depressions where water may pool 4. Remove and replace areas, deficient in smoothness. Overlay corrections may be permitted

only if acceptable to Engineer

J. Inspection: The work of this section is subject to the inspection and approval of the engineer and/or owner. The following inspections are required: 1. Protection of adjacent property 2. Staking and establishment of elevations 3. Establishment and compaction of subgrade 4. Placement and compaction of bituminous base course and wearing surface 5. Final inspection 6. Obtain approval of each element of work listed above in sequence of its completion before

proceeding with the next item

3.010 CLEANING

A. After completion of paving operations, clean surfaces of excess or spilled asphalt materials to the satisfaction of Engineer

3.011 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on asphalt concrete pavement until it has cooled and hardened and in no case sooner than 6 hours

B. Provide barricades and warning devices as required to protect pavement and the general public

3.012 WARRANTY

A. Provide installer’s 2-year written warranty endorsed by the contractor warranting the pavement from creeping, shoring, cracking, softening, settling, ponding and other defects due to improper placing or defective materials. Replace defective materials upon notification by the owner in accordance with the requirements of the original work.

3.013 SCHEDULE OF MIX PLACEMENT:

A. Refer to Drawings for asphalt thickness and lift requirements.

END OF SECTION


DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS Florence Crittenton RIGID PAVING OZ Architecture Project No. 113266.00 Section 32 13 00 - 1

SECTION 32 13 00

RIGID PAVING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Forming, jointing, placing and curing of concrete pavements, curbs, gutters, cross pans, islands and sidewalks.


A. Section 31 00 00 – Earthwork

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ACI 214 - Recommended Practice for Evaluating Compression Test Results of Field Concrete

B. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for buildings

C. ACI 304 - Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete

D. ACI 305/305R - Hot Weather Concreting

E. ACI 306/306R - Cold Weather Concreting

F. ACI 308 - Standard Practice for Curing Concrete

G. ASTM A82 - Cold Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement

H. ASTM A185 - Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement

I. ASTM A497 - Welded Deformed Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement

J. ASTM A615 - Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel for Concrete Reinforcement

K. ASTM C31 - Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field

L. ASTM C33 - Concrete Aggregates

M. ASTM C39 - Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens

N. ASTM C94 - Ready Mix Concrete

O. ASTM C143 - Test Method of Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete

P. ASTM C150 - Portland Cement

Q. ASTM C260 - Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete



R. ASTM C309 - Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete

S. ASTM C494 - Chemical Admixtures for Concrete

T. ASTM C618 - Fly Ash and Raw or Calcinated Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete

U. ASTM D994 - Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminous Type)

V. ASTM D1190 - Concrete Joint Sealer, Hot-Poured Elastic Type

W. ASTM D1751 - Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for concrete Paving and Structural Construction

X. ASTM D1752 - Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction

Y. CABO/ANSI A117.1 for accessibility requirements related to walks, ramps, parking areas, drives, curb ramps, etc.

Z. City and County of Denver construction specifications, standards and details.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Provide under provisions of Division One Specifications

B. Product Data: Provide sufficient information on mix design and products specified to verify compliance with specifications. Provide data on joint filler admixtures and curing compounds 1. Existing data on proposed design mixes, certified and complete 2. Submit reports of field quality control testing


A. Perform work in accordance with ACI 301, Conform materials and installation to applicable portions of Colorado Department of Transportation, Colorado Department of Highways, and the City and County of Denver construction specifications, standards and details.


A. For work on public streets or rights-of-way conform to the requirements of City and County of Denver construction specifications, standards and details for the Construction of Curbs, Gutters, Sidewalks, Driveways, Street Paving, and other public right-of-way Improvements.


C. Obtain cementitious materials and aggregate from same source for all work

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, protect and handle materials under provisions of Division One Specifications

B. Reinforcing steel: Store on supports which will keep materials from contact with the ground and cover



C. Rubber and plastic materials: Store in a cool place, do not expose to direct sunlight

D. Prepare a delivery ticket for each load of ready-mixed concrete

E. Contractor shall submit tickets for all concrete delivered to site: 1. Quantity delivered 2. Actual quantity of each material in batch 3. Outdoor temp in the shade 4. Time at which cement was added 5. Numerical sequence of the delivery 6. Quantity of water that can be added in the field based on mix design 7. Free moisture in fine and coarse aggregate in percent by weight 8. Temperature of batch


A. Do not place concrete when base surface temperature is less than 40 degrees F, or surface is wet or frozen

B. Protect concrete from rapid loss of moisture during hot water placement

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Form Materials 1. Form Materials: Plywood: PS 1, waterproof resin-bonded, exterior type Douglas Fir; face

adjacent to concrete Grade B or better 2. Fiberboard: FS LL-B-810, Type IX, tempered, waterproof, screen back, concrete form

hardboard 3. Capable of supporting loads imposed by construction equipment, straight and free from warp.

Clean and strong enough to resist pressure of concrete when placed and retain horizontal and vertical alignment. Coat forms with a non-staining form release agent that will not discolor or deface the surface of the concrete

4. Joint filler: ASTM D1751 or D1752 type; 3/4-inch thick unless indicated otherwise

B. REINFORCEMENT 1. Where reinforcement is specified herein or indicated on the plans:

a. Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60 b. Reinforcing Welded Wire Fabric (WWF): ASTM A185, steel, 16 gage minimum

i. Furnish in flat sheets c. Dowels: ASTM A615; 40 ksi yield, Grade 60, plain steel, unfinished finish d. Fibrous reinforcement: Collated, fibrillated, polypropelyne fibers, tensile strength 70,000

psi i. Use 1.5 lbs. Per cubic yard minimum ii. Fibermesh or accepted substitution

2.02 ACCESSORIES

A. Curing Compound: ASTM C309, AASHTO M-148, white pigmented liquid membrane

B. Joint Sealers: Polyurethane base, elastomeric, self leveling, chemical cure, handling 50% joint movement; Sikaflex-2C-SL or accepted substitutions



C. Sheet Materials: AASHTO M171, 4 mil

D. Expansion Joint Material: 0.5-inch thick, ASTM D1751, asphalt impregnated fiber board, glass fiber or sponge, or closed cell polyethelene foam; Texmastic “vinylex 3600,” Sonneborn “Sonoflex F,” or accepted substitutions

2.03 CONCRETE MIX

A. Comply with ASTM C94

B. Maximum Coarse Aggregate Size: 1-inch

C. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type II; 555 pounds minimum per cubic yard of concrete

D. Water/Cementitious Material (Cement and Fly Ash) Ratio: Less than or equal to 0.44

E. Slump: 4-inch maximum 1. May be increased to 4.5 inches for hand work, acceptable to Engineer 2. As low as possible consistent with proper handling and thorough compaction

F. Volumetric Air Content: 5%-1% after placement for 1-inch aggregate 1. Maximum 6%-1% after placement 2. Vary air content with maximum size aggregate, ASTM C94, Table 3.

G. Strength: Compressive strength as determined by ASTM C39, 4000 psi minimum at 28 days

H. Consistency: Uniform slump, suitable for the placement conditions with aggregate floating uniformly throughout the concrete mass, flowing sluggishly when vibrated or spaded

I. Adjust mix as required to meet specifications

J. Approved fly ash may be substituted for ASTM C150 cement up to a maximum of 20 percent Class C or 30 percent Class F by weight of the cementitious material content. Fly ash for concrete shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C618 with the following exceptions: 1. The loss on ignition shall not exceed 3.0 percent 2. The CaO in Class F fly ash shall not exceed 18 percent

K. Admixtures: Content, batching method, and time of introduction in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations for compliance with this specification 1. Include a water reducing admixture 2. Calcium chloride content shall not exceed 0.05% of the cement content by weight

L. COLORING 1. ASTM C979 pure mineral pigments, specially formulated for concrete coloring as

manufactured by Davis Colors, L.M. Scofield Co., Tamm’s or acceptable substitution. 2. Colors: As Selected by the Architect. Provide submittals, samples and 5’x5’ test area for each

color for approval prior to construction. Assume not less than 4 pounds of color admixture per cubic foot of Type II cement.

2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTS

A. Provide under provisions of Division One Specifications

B. Submit proposed mix design to Engineer for review prior to commencement of work



C. Tests on cement and aggregates will be performed to ensure conformance with specified requirements

D. Test samples in accordance with ACI 301.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify compacted subgrade is acceptable and ready to support paving and imposed loads

B. Verify gradients and elevations of base are correct

C. Check completed formwork for grade and alignment to the following tolerances: 1. Top of forms not more than 1/8-inch in 10 feet 2. Vertical face on longitudinal axis, not more than 1/4-inch in 10 feet

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Subgrade 1. Prepare subgrade in accordance with Section 31 00 00 2. Moisten subgrade to depth of 6 inches at optimal moisture not more than 12 hours prior to

placement to minimize absorption of water from fresh concrete 3. Check for soft spots by proof-rolling or other means prior to setting forms. Remove soft

yielding material and replace. Compact to specifications under provisions of Section 31 00 00 4. Check crown and/or elevation of subgrade to assure specified thickness. Compact to

specification additional material used to bring to correct elevation. Remove excess material where subgrade is too high

5. Clean subgrade of all loose materials before placement of concrete. Do not disturb area inside forms after fine grading is complete

B. Frame Adjustment 1. Coat surfaces of manhole and catch basin frames with oil to prevent bond with concrete

pavement for concrete collars 2. Set frames of structures in full grout bed to provide bearing. Set to final grade 3. Form construction joints and blockouts as indicated on drawings

3.03 PERFORMANCE AND INSTALLATION

A. Transporting mixed concrete 1. Transporting of mixed concrete shall conform to ACI 305R 2. Do not exceed manufacturer’s guaranteed capacity of truck agitators. Maintain the mixed

concrete in a thoroughly mixed and uniform mass during handling 3. Do not incorporate additional mixing water into the concrete during hauling or after arrival at

the delivery point, unless ordered by the Engineer. If additional water is to be incorporated into the concrete, revolve the drum not less than 30 revolutions at mixing speed after the water is added and before placing concrete.

4. Furnish a water measuring device in good working condition, mounted on each transit mix truck, for measuring the water added to the mix on the site by the Engineer

5. Provide delivery ticket and comply with delivery requirements of this section

B. Forming 1. Place and secure forms to correct location, dimension, profile, and gradient



2. Install sufficient quantity of forms to allow continuous progress of work so that forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement

3. Join neatly and mechanically tamp to assure firm placement. Assemble formwork to permit easy stripping and dismantling without damaging concrete

4. Oil forms prior to concrete placement 5. Place join filler vertical in position, in straight lines. Secure to formwork during concrete

placement 6. Set dowels, expansion joints, preformed construction joints and header boards as specified or

indicated on the drawings 7. Low roll or mountable curbs may be formed without the use of face form by using a straight

edge and template to form curb face 8. Backfill behind forms as required to prevent water from entering subgrade

C. Reinforcement 1. Add fiber reinforcement to mix at plant prior to delivery to jobsite 2. Place bar or WWF reinforcement at mid-height of slabs-on-grade or as shown on the drawings

a. Install in as long lengths as possible. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh and lace with wire

b. Support with metal chairs, brick or stone is unacceptable 3. Hold all tie and marginal dowels in proper position by sufficient supports or pins 4. Mechanically install dowels or place on supports if center longitudinal joint is sawed in lieu of

placing plastic strip 5. Interrupt reinforcement at expansion joints 6. Place dowels to achieve pavement and curb alignment as detailed. 7. Provide doweled joints inch at interruptions of concrete with one end of dowel set in capped

sleeve to allow longitudinal movement 8. Grease dowels on one side of joints with caps on greased end

D. Placing concrete 1. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 301 2. Lightly moisten subgrade or base course immediately before placing concrete. 3. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, and formed joints are not disturbed 4. during concrete placement 5. Deposit concrete near final position. Minimize segregation and damage to subgrade 6. Place concrete continuously over the full width of the panel and between predetermined

construction joints. Spread mechanically to prevent segregation and separation of materials 7. Consolidate concrete with vibrators and spade next to forms to remove air spaces or

honeycombs 8. Do not place concrete in forms that has begun to set 9. Do not place more concrete in one day than can be finished before dark the same day 10. Curbs and Gutters: Automatic machine may be used for curb and gutter placement at

Contractor’s option. If machine placement is to be used, submit revised mix design and laboratory test results which meet or exceed minimums specified. Machine placement must produce curbs and gutters to required cross-section, lines, grades, finish, and jointing as specified for formed concrete. If results are not acceptable, remove and replace with formed concrete as specified

11. Walks: Construct sidewalks with a thickness as shown on plans (with a minimum thickness of 4-inch). Tool edges to rounded profile and finish as specified or as shown on the drawings. Pitch walks at 1.9% for cross drainage unless otherwise indicated

E. Cold weather concreting 1. Conform to ACI 306/306R, except as modified herein 2. Minimum concrete temp at the time of mixing 3.



4. Outdoor Temp at Placement (in shade)

5. Concrete Temp at Mixing

6. Below 30°F 7. 70°F

8. Between 30°F

& 45°F 9. 60°F

10. Above 45°F 11. 45°F

12. 13. Do not place heated concrete which is warmer than 80 degrees F 14. If freezing temp are expected during curing, maintain the concrete temp at or above 50 deg F

for 5 days or 70 deg F for 3 days with forms in place 15. Do not allow concrete to cool suddenly

F. Hot weather concreting 1. Conform to ACI 305/305R, except as modified herein 2. At air temp of 90 degrees F and above keep concrete as cool as possible during placement

and curing. Fog sprayers or special wetting agents may be required for protection 3. Do not allow concrete temperature to exceed 70 deg F at placement 4. Prevent plastic shrinkage cracking due to rapid evaporation of moisture 5. Do not place concrete when the actual or anticipated evaporation rate equals or exceeds 0.2

lbs per sq ft per hr as determined from ACI 305, Fig 2.1.4

G. Joints 1. Provide concrete joints per CDOT Standard Details 2. Sidewalk and pavement

a. Contraction joints: At intervals not to exceed 10 feet and 1 1/2 inches deep, tooled or sawcut

b. Expansion joints: 1/2-inch premolded joints where sidewalks end at curb returns, against fixed objects, at points of sharp radius, and between sidewalk and driveway slabs. Place expansion joint at minimum of every 100 feet.

c. Construction joints: At all separate pours, and around all appurtenances such as manholes, utility poles, and other penetrations extending into and through sidewalks. Place backer rod and polyurethane sealant for entire joint length

3. Curb and Gutter a. Contraction joints: At intervals not to exceed 10 feet made by insertion of 1/8-inch

template at right angles to curb and 1 1/2-inch deep. b. Expansion joints: At curb returns, against fixed objects, at points of sharp radius, between

adjacent sidewalk and curb at all curb returns, between sidewalk and all driveway slabs, and along straight lengths every 200 linear feet. Install expansion joint filler between concrete sidewalks and any fixed structure. Extend expansion joint material for full depth of concrete, except stop 1/2-inch below finish surface.

c. Construction joints: At all separate pours, place backer rod and polyurethane sealant for entire joint length.

4. Place expansion joint filler between paving components and buildings or other appurtenances at temperatures above 50 deg F. Clean all dust, debris and water from joint. Recess top of filler 1/2-inch for sealant placement.

5. Provide keyed joints as indicated in details.

H. Finishing 1. Run straight-edge over forms with sawing motion to fill all holes and depressions. 2. After striking-off and consolidating concrete, smooth surface by screeding and floating. Use

hand methods only where mechanical floating is not possible. Adjust floating to compact surface and produce uniform texture.



3. After floating, test surface for trueness with a 10' straightedge. Distribute concrete as required to remove surface irregularities, and re-float repaired areas to provide a continuous smooth finish

4. Finish surfaces with a wooden or magnesium float. Plastering of surfaces is not permitted 5. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen the concrete surface by brooming in the

direction perpendicular to the main traffic route. Use fine hair fiber-bristle broom unless otherwise directed. Coordinate the required final finish with the Engineer before application.

6. On inclined slab surfaces and steps, provide a coarse, non-slip finish by scoring surface with a stiff-bristled broom, perpendicular to line of traffic

7. Edge all outside edges of the slab and all joints with a 0.25-inch radius edging tool. 8. Work edges of gutters, back top edge of curb, and formed joints with an edging tool, and

round to 0.5-inch radius, unless otherwise indicated. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surface 9. Brush with soft bristle brush to remove trowel marks and leave a uniform appearance just

before concrete takes initial set. 10. Direction of Texturing:

a. Curb and Gutter: At right angles to the curb line b. Sidewalk: At right angles to centerline of sidewalk.

11. Place curing compound on exposed concrete surfaces immediately after finishing. Apply under pressure at the rate of one gallon to not more than 135 square feet by mechanical sprayers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions acceptable to Engineer.

I. Joint sealing 1. Seal joints and clean concrete prior to opening to traffic. 2. Seal all expansion joints. 3. Separate concrete from other structures with 3/4-inch thick joint filler. 4. Place joint filler in concrete pattern placement sequence. Set top to required elevations.

Secure to resist movement by wet concrete. 5. Extend joint filler from bottom of pavement to within 1/4-inch of finished surface.

J. Curing and protection 1. Immediately after placement, protect pavement from premature drying, excessive hot or cold

temperatures, and mechanical injury 2. Have plastic sheeting, straw, burlap and/or canvas materials available at all times to protect

fresh uncured surfaces from adverse weather conditions 3. Do not permit pedestrian traffic over sidewalks for 7 days minimum after finishing. Do not

permit vehicular traffic over pavement for 14 days minimum after finishing or until 75 percent design strength of concrete has been achieved


A. Tolerances 1. Division One Specifications - Quality Assurance: Tolerances 2. Maximum Variation of Surface Grade: 1/4- inch in 10 ft 3. Maximum Variation from True Alignment: 3/8-inch in 10 ft

B. Division One Specifications - Quality Assurance: Field inspections and testing

C. Take cylinders and perform slump and air entrainment tests as required by Division One Specifications in accordance with ACI 301. Unit weight and mix temperature will also be taken

D. The first three loads will be tested for slump and air content. If any one test fails to meet requirements, that load will be rejected and tests will continue on each load until three consecutive loads meet requirements. Thereafter, five concrete test cylinders will be taken for every 75 cu yds or less cu yds of concrete placed each day



E. One additional test cylinder will be taken during cold weather and cured on site under same conditions as concrete it represents

F. One slump and air entrainment test will be taken for each set of test cylinders taken

G. Cylinders will be tested as follows: 2 at 7 days, 2 at 28 days and 1 at a later date, if necessary, as directed by the Engineer

H. Maintain records of placed concrete items. Record date, location of pour, quantity, air temperature, and test samples taken

I. Thickness of fresh concrete may be checked by Owner at random. Coring will be conducted in accordance with City and County of Denver requirements. Where average thickness of concrete is deficient in thickness by more than 0.20-inch, but not more than 1.0-inch, payment to Contractor will be adjusted based on amount indicated in schedule of values for portland cement concrete paving as specified in the following table.

J.

1. CONCRETE PAVEMENT DEFICIENCY

2. Deficiency in Thickness

(Determined by Cores) INCHES

3. Proportional Part of Contract Price

Allowed

4. 0.00 to 0.20 5. 100%

6. 0.21 to 0.30 7. 80%

8. 0.31 to 0.40 9. 72%

10. 0.41 to 0.50 11. 68%

12. 0.51 to 0.75 13. 57%

14. 0.76 to 1.00 15. 50%

16. Over 1.00 17. NONE

Note: When thickness of pavement is deficient by more than one inch, and judgment of the Engineer is that area of such deficiency should not be removed and replaced, there will be no payment for the area retained.

K. Failure of Test Cylinders or Coring Results: Engineer may order removal and replacement of concrete as required upon failure of 28-day tests or if thickness of pavement is less than 95% of specified thickness

3.05 SCHEDULE OF CONCRETE

A. See plans for concrete thicknesses and subgrade preparation.

3.06 SCHEDULE OF CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT

A. Fiber reinforcement required for all concrete flatwork, including curb and gutter, sidewalk and pavement

B. Reinforce all cross pans in conformance with City and County of Denver standards and specifications.



C. Material storage pads 8-inch thick concrete with #4 rebar, 12-inches on center, each way, three inches clear on all sides.

END OF SECTION


DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS Florence Crittenton CRUSHER FINES OZ Architecture Project No. 113266.00 Section 32 15 40 - 1

SECTION 32 15 40

CRUSHER FINES


A. Furnish and install: 1. Crusher fines material. 2. Stabilized crusher fines material.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS AND DOCUMENTS

A. Section 31 00 00: Earthwork. B. Section 32 91 13: Fine Grading and Soil Preparation.


A. Source Quality Control: 1. Gravel Materials: Subject to inspection and acceptance. Provide source location and

sample prior to delivery to site. 2. Inspection will be made periodically during path installation, and at project completion

and end of warranty period. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Stockpile delivered gravel near installation location. B. Material will be inspected upon delivery to site. C. Immediately remove unacceptable material from site.


A. Visit site to determine existing conditions.


A. Gravel Materials: see plans for location and color, to the following properties:

1. Sieve % Passing 3/8" 100% #4 85% #8 63% #16 50% #30 40% #50 31% #100 21% #200 12.4%



B. Provide 4” total depth crusher fines, with top 2” stabilized crusher fines where indicated on

the plans. Provide 4” total depth crusher fines without stabilizer where indicated on the plans. Crushed Stone Surface by Stabilizer Solutions Inc. Contact G&S Stabilizer Solution, Inc. at 303-961-0092. Color as indicated on the plans.

C. Filter fabric: lightweight, nonwoven geotextile suitable for soil separation and weed barrier,

US 100NW by US Fabrics or approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION

A. Visit site to determine existing conditions. B. Centerline of track to follow existing graded alignment per plans. Obtain Landscape

Architect approval for any deviations. C. Grades: Verify grades of crusher fines area to not exceed 5%.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Existing Utilities: Protect from damage any existing utilities in or near the project area. B. General: Do not perform work when existing site conditions will not provide satisfactory

results. C. Clearing and Grubbing: Per Section 31 10 00. D. Excavate 4" deep bed. Remove soils from excavation on sides of track area. E. Grade subgrade level and compact with sheepsfoot roller to 95% optimum density, in

accordance with AASHTO T-99. Contractor is not required to scarify and re-compact the next 6" below this sub-grade level. 1. Inspect exposed surface for unsuitable soil, areas of loose or soft soil, disturbed or

moist soils.

F. Excavated sections and adjacent areas shall be reasonably smooth, compacted, and free from irregular surface changes. No geotextile fabric shall be applied until subgrade is approved by Owner’s Representative.

G. Install metal edger per details and manufacturer’s specifications. Locate per plans.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Compacted Crusher Fines: 1. Spread thoroughly mixed portions of stabilized and/or unstabilized crusher fines as

indicated on the plans. 2. Rake crusher fines to uniform 5"-6" depth with 2% cross slope or as indicated on

plans. 3. Immediately roll crusher fines material and excavated area with a roller of sufficient

weight to compact crusher fines into smooth firm surface. Rolling shall continue until all material is firmly locked and keyed together. The appearance and surface shall be uniform with all ridges removed. Surface shall not vary more than 1/2" when



measured with a ten foot straight edge applied parallel to the centerline. Correct any variation by loosening, reshaping and re-rolling. When finished, compacted area shall be a minimum of 4" deep in all locations. Do not use a vibratory roller. a. In any areas where there are underground pipes, use extreme caution when

compacting to protect pipe. Discuss alternative compaction methods with Owner’s Representative prior to execution for approval if pipe hazard is anticipated.

4. At completion of surfacing, remove excess spoils from along edges. 5. Ensure positive drainage away from area and into new drainage structures or swales.

3.04 CLEANING

A. General: Contractor shall be responsible for daily removal of mud and debris from road surfaces on a daily basis. 1. Remove debris and excess materials from site.

3.05 PROTECTION

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for making a reasonable effort to protect the work from vandalism. If barricading or signage is necessary, the Contractor shall request such from the Owner. Owner shall provide any necessary barricading or signage. Any vandalism shall be brought to the attention of the Owner.

END OF SECTION


DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS Florence Crittenton CHAIN LINK FENCES OZ Architecture Project No. 113266.00 Section 32 31 13 - 1

SECTION 32 31 13

CHAIN LINK FENCES


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental

Conditions and Division 1-Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS AND DOCUMENTS

A. Chain link fencing as shown on the drawings.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit manufacturer's technical data, and installation instructions for metal fencing. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Provide chain link fences as complete units produced by a single manufacturer including necessary erection accessories, fittings, fastenings and gates.

B. Except where higher standards are indicated, conform to "Product Manual" published by

CLFMI for materials and ASTM F567 for installation. B. Display of the fence manufacturer or installer’s name on completed chain link fencing is

prohibited.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 STEEL FENCING

A. Vinyl-clad (aluminum prohibited), see drawings for locations. B. Vinyl coating to be thermally bonded PVC, meeting ASTM F668 Class 2 B requirements for

adhesion bonding, aging and color, see plans for location. C. Fabric: No. 9 ga. (0.148") steel wires, 2" mesh, with both selvages knuckled galvanized.

Backstop fabric shall be 6 ga. 1. Furnish one-piece fabric widths for fencing up to 12' high. 2. Fabric finish, galvanized, ASTM A392, Class I, with not less than 1.2 oz. zinc per sq.

ft.

D. Framework: Galvanized steel, ASTM A120, with not less than 1.8 oz. zinc per sq. ft. for galvanized fence.

E. Hardware and Accessories: Galvanized with black vinyl coating, ASTM A153, with zinc

weights per Table I for galvanized fence.

2.02 FRAMING AND ACCESSORIES

A. Space as shown on plans and sections.



B. Posts

1. End, corner and pull posts a. Schedule 40, 2.875” O.D. minimum for up to 8’-0” height b. Schedule 40, 3.5” O.D. minimum for posts to 10’ height

2. Line posts: Schedule 40, 2.375” O.D. minimum 3. Gate Posts

a. Single gates: Schedule 40, 2.875” O.D. minimum b. Double gates: Schedule 40, 3.5” O.D. minimum

4. Post caps a. Line posts: Weather tight closure caps with opening for top rails b. Terminal posts: Weather tight closure caps

5. Provide escutcheon or slope grout to provide positive drainage away from pipe.

C. Rails 1. Minimum 1.66” O.D., Schedule 40. 2. Expansion sleeves are prohibited unless approved by DPS Project Manager. 3. Provide bottom rails at backstop and on backstop wings. 4. Intermediate rails are required for fences over 4’-0” in height.

D. Gates

1. Perimeter frame: 1.90” O.D. minimum, Schedule 40 2. Weld corners of frames and touch-up weld spots with black coating. 3. Hardware

a. Commercial grade b. Hinges (Tack weld all latches)

1) Non-lift off 2) 180 degree swing 3) One pair (minimum) up to and including 6’-0” height 4) One and one-half pair (minimum) on gates over six feet 6’-0” height 5) Weld in place. Bolt or screw attachment of hinges is prohibited.

c. Latches (Tack weld all latches) 1) Padlock eye 2) Operation either side 3) Single gate: Fork type 4) Double gate: Cane bolt/drop pin assembly mounted to gate, vertical

frame, designed to engage strike/ground sleeve that is embedded 18” minimum in concrete (inactive leaf)

5) Weld in place. Bolt or screw attachment of latches is prohibited. 6) ECE gate closer for 4’ wide gate: Locinox Gate Closer, VCSL by Hoover

Fence Company, 800-355-2335. d. Cantilever gates

1) Solid track wheels, cast iron 2) 2 3/8” Minimum O.D. Rail / Frame, Schedule 40 3) 4” minimum support posts 4) If gate is in play area, provide a protective shield over the rollers.

E. Backstops shall be fabricated with welded joints. F. Accessories

1. Truss rods: 3/8” diameter with turnbuckle and post anchors 2. Tension bar: Full height, ¼” x ¾” (minimum) 3. Tension clamps: 14 gauge x 1” (minimum) 4. Tension wire: 9 gauge (minimum) 5. Tie wires: 9 gauge (minimum)



G. Concrete 1. Portland cement, ASTM C150; aggregates, ASTM C33; and clean water 2. Mix materials to obtain concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of

3000 psi. 3. Mix shall use at least five (5) sacks of cement per cubic yard and 1” maximum size

aggregate. 4. Mix shall have a maximum slump of three inches (3”) and between 2% and 4%

entrained air.

H. Post Brace Assembly: Manufacturer's standard adjustable brace at both sides of corner and pull posts, with horizontal brace located at mid-height of fabric.

I. Use. 1.66" OD pipe for horizontal brace. J. Stretcher Bars and Bands: One piece stretcher bars in lengths equal to full height of fabric,

with minimum cross-section of 0.188" x 0.75". Provide one stretcher bar for each gate and end post, and 2 for each corner and pull post, except where fabric is integrally woven into post.

K. Space stretcher bar bands not over 12" o.c., to secure stretcher bars to end, corner, pull,

and gate posts. All backstop tension bands to be 1/8" x 1" heavy duty. L. Refinishing: Following any damage to post coating, immediately refinish with two coats of

plasticoating or rustolium to match original finish. M. Gate Accessories: Industrial malleable ball and socket hinge. Malleable gate fork latch for

man gates. Industrial latch pressed steel latch assembly for double gates including plunger rod. Industrial gate ells.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Do not begin installation and erection before final grading is completed, unless otherwise permitted.

B. For fencing attached to concrete, do not begin work before these materials have been

completed, cured and have attained their design strengths. C. Excavation: Drill holes for post foundations of diameters and spacing shown, in firm,

undistributed or compacted soil. D. Post Spacing:

1. General: 10’ on center (maximum). All rolling gates: 5” on center (maximum). 2. Include composite lumber on field side of backstop fence (Trex type).

E. Post foundations:

1. Concrete shall be used for post foundations. The depths listed below are minimum embedment depth of the fence post in concrete for fences without wind screens. The foundation depth shall provide an additional 6” of concrete below the embedment depth. a. 4’ & 6’ Fence Heights: Minimum 12” diameter by 42” deep.



b. 12’ Fence Heights: Minimum 18” diameter by 42” deep. c. 16’ Fence Heights: Minimum 24” diameter by 4’ deep. d. 24’ Fence Heights: Minimum 24” diameter by 6’ deep.

F. Gates and other access locations

1. Clear opening <5’-0”, single gate, unless otherwise noted. 2. Clear opening , 10’-0” and > 5’-0”, double gate. 3. Clear opening 2/3-1/3 gate – vehicle/pedestrian combo gate. 4. The type of gate or vehicle barrier structure for any access opening in excess of 10’

shall be coordinated with the DPS Project Manager. Avoid larger openings wherever possible. Preliminary gate types are as follows: a. Clear opening < 20’-0” and > 10’-0”, rolling gate b. Clear opening > 10’-0”, cantilever gate

G Framework: Setting Posts: Center and align posts in holes 3" above bottom of excavation. H. Place concrete around posts and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Check each post for

vertical and top alignment, and hold in position during placement and finishing operations. Bring top elevation of concrete to 5" below pavement grade except where otherwise shown and trowel smooth with wash away from post.

I. Pour curb or mow strip to grade indicated. Trowel smooth. Clean posts. Cut one

perpendicular control joint to the center of each post. J. Top Rails: Run rail continuously through post caps. Use of couplings is acceptable. K. Center Rails: Provide center rails only where shown. Install in one piece between posts

and flush with post on fabric side, using special offset fittings where necessary. L. Brace Assemblies: Install braces so posts are plumb when diagonal rod is under proper

tension. M. Fabric: Pull fabric taut and tie to posts, rails, and tension wires. Install fabric on security

side of fence, or on the active side for playfields, and anchor to framework so that fabric remains in tension after pulling force is released.

N. Stretcher Bars: Thread through or clamp to fabric 4" o.c., and secure to posts with metal

bands spaced 12" o.c. O. Tension Bar Clamps: 15” o.c. (maximum). P. Truss Rods: Provide at all terminations and changes in directions, from top of nearest line

post to bottom of terminal or corner post. Q. Tie Wires: Use U-shaped wire, conforming to diameter of pipe to which attached, clasping

pipe and fabric firmly with ends twisted at least 2 full turns. Bend and put wire to minimize hazard to persons or clothing. Leave no ends exposed past fabric thickness. Line Posts: 12” o.c. (maximum). Rails: 24” o.c. (maximum).

R. Fasteners: Install nuts for tension bands and hardware bolts on side of fence opposite

fabric side. Peen ends of bolts or score threads to prevent removal of nuts; file smooth. S. Backstop Attachments: Miter all post to rail connections. Do not crimp pipe. Continuously

weld all attachments.



T. Tension Wire: 1. Tension wire shall be secured with hog rings at 24 o.c. minimum in all applications. 2. All fencing fabric: Continuous length (no splices permitted), secured with hogs rings to

fabric at 2nd diamond, 4” from bottom. 3. Fencing over 4’0” in height; additional tension wire, continuous length, secured with

hog rings to fabric at 2’-0” above bottom of fabric. Hog rings should be closed with hog ring pliers to ensure there is no overlap with exposed, sharp edges.

4. Backstops: Continuous length, secured with hog rings to fabric at bottom, 18” and 36” above bottom.

5. Continuous welded pipe may be used in liew of tension wire.

U. Remove sharp edges and protrusions.

V. Warranty: 1. During the period of twenty-four (24) months after the final payment of work, make all

necessary repairs or replacements, due to defective workmanship or materials. Any corrections required to meet this specification shall be at the Contractor’s expense.

W. Display of the fence manufacturer or installer’s name on completed chain link fencing is

prohibited.

END OF SECTION


DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS Florence Crittenton UNIT MASONRY RETAINING WALLS OZ Architecture Project No. 113266.00 Section 32 32 19 - 1

SECTION 32 32 19

UNIT MASONRY RETAINING WALLS


A. Furnishing and installing modular concrete block retaining wall system. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS AND DOCUMENTS

A. Section 32 13 13: Concrete.

B. Section 32 91 13: Fine Grading and Soil Preparation. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Inspect masonry units upon delivery and handle carefully to avoid chipping and breakage. Store on pallets or concrete slab until ready for use.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PRECAST BLOCK UNITS

A. AB Wall Stones by Allan Block or Keystone Country Manor units as specified on the drawings. 2.02 ACCESSORIES

A. Pile and post concrete, concrete grout, steel reinforcement, construction adhesive, and shimming material per manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. Wall Rock: material must be well graded compactable aggregate, 0.25 in. to 1.5 in., with no more than 10% passing the #200 sieve.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION

A. Before beginning work, inspect wall location for proper grades and elevations. Report unsatisfactory conditions immediately to General Contractor.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Prepare the base for the wall units according to manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install wall at locations and to dimensions shown on plans, following manufacturer's instructions.

B. Do not exceed a height of 3' on any portion of the wall.

C. Top of wall to be level at elevation called for on plans.


DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS Florence Crittenton UNIT MASONRY RETAINING WALLS OZ Architecture Project No. 113266.00 Section 32 32 19 - 2

D. All joints shall be plumb or level.

E. Allowable tolerances:

1. Maximum variation from level or grades: a. 1/4" per foot b. 1/2" in 10 feet c. 1" for the total length

END OF SECTION


DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS Florence Crittenton UNDERGROUND SPRINKLER SYSTEM OZ Architecture Project No. 113266.00 Section 32 84 00 - 1

SECTION 32 84 00

UNDERGROUND SPRINKLER SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Underground Sprinkler System, installation and testing. B. Furnish all work and materials, appliances, tools, equipment, facilities, transportation and services

necessary for and incidental to perform all operations in connection with the installation of “Landscape Irrigation”, complete, as shown on Drawings and/or specified herein.

C. The work in this section shall be coordinated with all underground utilities and trades responsible

for their installation. D. The Contractor shall contact the Owner and inform him seventy-two hours in advance of any

water interruption that is required. E. Related Sections and Documents

1. Section 01 23 00: Alternates, Unit Prices and Allowances 2. Section 01 78 23: Operating and Maintenance Data 3. Section 31 23 33: Trench Excavation and Backfill

1.02 ALTERNATES/ALTERNATIVES

A. Project alternates are to be used only with the approval of DPS. Work identified as “Alternates” shall be subject to the review and evaluation of the DPS Project Manager and may be selected for addition to or deletion from the Contract for Construction. Comply with requirements of Section 01 03 00-Alternates, Unit Prices and Allowances.


A. No requests for substitutions will be considered after the Bid Opening. B. Contractors and/or suppliers may submit requests for approval of equal products or materials.

Written requests shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer (A/E) for review within the specified time BEFORE THE BID.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product data. Provide submittals in the following format:

ITEM NUMBER DESCRIPTION MANUFACTURER MODEL NUMBER

1. pressure supply line Pipe, Inc Schedule 40 2. Lawn head XYZ Co. B-44 3. Etc. Etc. Etc.

B. Quality assurance data

1. Submit manufacturer's certification that plastic pipe and fittings comply with specification requirements.

2. Submit data confirming that electrical wiring, control motors and electrical devices are U.L. listed.

3. Prior to beginning work, Contractor shall certify that the existing water pressure matches the design pressure. Provide pressure gage calibration records. Provide written documentation



of existing pressure and pressure gauge calibration records to Owner prior to beginning work.

C. Project record documents

1. Record dimensioned locations and depths for each of the following on a record drawing set of prints. Maintain for this purpose only. a. Point of Connection b. Sprinkler Pressure Line. Provide dimensions for each 100 l.f. (maximum) along each

routing, and for each change in direction. c. Resilient Seat Gate Valves d. Sprinkler Control Valves e. Quick Coupling Valves f. Control Wire Routing g. Sleeves h. Other related items as may be directed by the A/E or DPS Project Manager.

2. Locate dimensions from two permanent reference points (building, monuments, sidewalks, curbs or pavements). a. Dimension accurately at the same scale used on the original drawings, or larger. b. Notes and dimension lettering must be legible.

3. Record changes from the contract drawings, including changes in pressure, and non-pressure lines.

4. Maintain information daily. Keep drawings at the site at all times and available for review of the A/E and the DPS Project Manager.

5. Irrigation legend shall be changed to accurately reflect the irrigation equipment installed, if not the same as originally specified on the contract documents. This includes flow rates, effective spray diameter/radius and operating pressure of sprinkler heads.

6. Provide record drawings in AutoCAD format per industry CAD standards.

D. Operation and maintenance data 1. Provide bound manuals detailing operation and maintenance requirements for irrigation

systems per Division 1 requirements. a. Provide descriptions of installed materials and systems in sufficient detail to permit

maintenance personnel to understand, operate and maintain equipment. 2. Provide the following in each manual

a. Index sheet, stating irrigation contractor's name, address, telephone number and name of person to contact

b. Duration of warranty period c. Equipment list providing the following for each item

1) Manufacturer's name 2) Make and model number 3) Name and address of local manufacturer's distributor 4) Spare parts list 5) Detailed operating and maintenance instructions for equipment

d. Completed and approved controller chart 1.05 CONTROLLER CHARTS

A. Do not prepare charts until record drawings have been approved by the DPS Project Manager. B. Provide one controller chart for each automatic controller installed. C. Following approval of controller charts by the DPS Project Manager, they shall be laminated,

including schedule of each head, etc.



1. Sample of Controller Charts:

1. S. Field Rotors Colfax side

2. S. Field Rotors Center

3. S. Field Rotors N end

4. S. Field Rotors E side

5. Sprays S.E. Sidewalk

6. Colfax tree RWS

D. Install charts inside a pocket inside the controller cabinet door. E. Charts must be completed and approved prior to final acceptance of irrigation system.


A. Qualifications/Certifications 1. Pipe installer qualifications: Each installer shall be trained by the manufacturer's

representative in correct joint techniques prior to performing work. 2. Superintendent: A superintendent satisfactory to the A/E shall be present on the site at all

times during progress of work and possess certification as a Certified Irrigation Technician (CIT). a. The superintendent shall not be changed, except with the consent of the A/E. b. The superintendent shall have a minimum of five (5) years of experience installing

irrigation systems of comparable size and complexity. B. Explanation of drawings: Due to the scale of drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets,

fittings, sleeves, etc., which may be required. Drawings are diagrammatic. Carefully investigate the conditions affecting the work and plan accordingly, furnishing fittings, etc., as may be required to meet conditions. Install the work in a manner to avoid conflicts between irrigation systems, planting and architectural features.

C. Manufacturer's directions: Manufacturer’s directions and detailed installation drawings shall

be followed. Where manufacturer’s instructions are in conflict with the contract documents, the Contractor shall bring these conflicts to the attention of the A/E and DPS Project Manager prior to construction.

D. The Contractor shall not willfully install the irrigation system when it is obvious in the field that

obstructions, grade differences or discrepancies in dimensions exist that might not have been considered during the design. Such obstructions or differences shall be brought to the attention of the A/E prior to starting work.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Warranty the irrigation system to for a period of twenty four (24) months. Also see General

Conditions of the contract and Division 1 requirements. B. Correct problems which develop in the system due to faulty materials or workmanship

during the warranty period. C. Provide written report to DPS Project Manager of warranty work performed. D. Make repairs and replacement within 2 calendar days when notified. E. DPS reserves the right to make temporary repairs during warranty and landscape



maintenance periods as necessary to keep systems in operating condition without voiding the Contractor’s warranty, nor relieving the Contractor of his responsibility.

F. Contractor shall provide “winterization” and “spring startup” for the system during the warranty

and landscape maintenance periods. Notify the DPS Project Manager before performing winterization or spring startup.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL PIPING

A. Pressure supply lines downstream of the point-of-connection: CL-200 PVC

1. Pressure supply lines 3” and larger: Ring tight for mainline 2. Mainlines: Ring tight fittings

B. Non-Pressure lines: CL-160 PVC or CL-200 PVC. See plans. C. Water supply lines 3” and below (including pipe through backflow preventer): Type K copper,

rigid; silver brazed underground fittings, solder above ground fittings, ASTM B-88 D. Sleeving pipe

1. PVC, Class CL-200 2. Sleeves shall be at least two (2) pipe sizes larger than line carried. 3. Sleeve wiring separately in 1-½”minimum pipe

2.02 PLASTIC PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Identification Markings: Identify pipe with the following indelible markings.

1. Manufacturer's Name 2. Nominal Pipe Size 3. Schedule or Class 4. Pressure Ratings in p.s.i. 5. NFS (National Sanitation Foundation) Seal of Approval 6. Date of Extrusion

B. Pipe (Solvent Weld type)

1. Manufactured from virgin polyvinyl chloride compound in accordance with ASTM D 2241 and ASTM D 1784, cell classification 12454-B, Type I, Grade I

2. Fittings: Standard weight, Schedule 40, injection molded PVC Comply with ASTM D 1784 and D 2466, cell classification 12454-B

3. Threads, where required: Injection molded type 4. Tees and Ells: Side gated 5. Threaded Nipples: ASTM D 2464, Schedule 80 with molded threads 6. Joint Cement: Depending on time of year when installation is performed, use type as

recommended by manufacturer of pipe and fittings to match temperature conditions. 7. Weld-on Cement

a. 710 up to 2" (excluding Sch 80) b. 705 up to 6" (excluding Sch 80) c. 711 up to 12" (including Sch 80) d. 725 up to 6" (hot and cold, under 40° F)

8. Joint Primer: Type recommended by manufacturer of pipe and fittings. 9. Weld-on Primers

a. P-68 purple b. P-70 purple



c. P-75 Aqua blue

2.03 ELECTRICAL WIRING AND SERVICE

A. Line voltage 1. Contractor shall provide line voltage electrical supply and connections to irrigation

equipment. 2. Color code wires from building to controller as follows

a. Hot: Black b. Common: White c. Switch: Red d. Ground: Green

B. Low voltage

1. Connection between controller and remote control valves: Direct burial #14 AWG UF with PE jacket

2. Splices, where permitted a. Waterproof, using 3M DBY splice kit for connection (min. 300’) b. Contain in an accessible valve box. 10” round or standard branded valve box with

“WS” branded on cover c. Direct bury splices are must be in boxes.

3. Wire sizing shall be according to manufacturer’s recommendations, in no case less than #14 AWG.

C. Conduit

1. Underground between controller and mainline trench: Schedule 80 PVC 2. Exterior above ground: PVC coated rigid metal conduit

D. Color code wires from controller to valves as follows:

1. Spares: Black 2. Controller: Red 3. Spare Common: Yellow 4. Regular Common: White

2.04 MANUAL DRAIN VALVES

A. Buckner 22000 series, or approved equivalent. Drain valves to be installed only in pits before the

backflow preventer. 2.05 ISOLATION VALVES

A. 2” and smaller, unless otherwise indicated: Ball valve, schedule 40, threaded B. 2½” and larger, unless otherwise indicated: Nibco 200 psi Push On-IPS resilient seated gate

valve with 2” square operator nut 2.06 QUICK COUPLING VALVES

A. Buckner Valve or Rainbird quick coupler mounted in valve box per DPS standard detail.

2.07 SWING JOINTS

A. Quick Couplers: Reference DPS Standard Detail. B. All other locations: Lasco or Blu-Lock pre-manufactured swing joints.



2.08 REMOTE CONTROL VALVES A. Hunter ICV B. Spring-loaded, packless diaphragm activated, normally closed type C. Valve Solenoid: 24 volt AC, 4.5 watt maximum, 500 milliamp maximum surge, corrosion

proof, stainless steel construction, epoxy encapsulated to form a single integral unit D. Provide bleeder valve to permit operation in the field without power at the controller. E. Provide isolation valve on supply side of each electric control valve. Reference DPS standard

detail. 2.09 POP-UP SPRINKLER HEADS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Rainbird 1800 SAM-PRS series 2. Hunter Institutional series

B. Plastic body pop-up C. Removable plastic spray nozzle Rainbird “U” series nozzles D. Provide full, half, third or quarter circle pattern nozzles. E. Minimum pop-up height 4" F. Connection: Lasco pre-manufactured swing joint or RainBird SP Series pre-manufactured swing

joint/swing pipe assembly. Swing pipe: ½” poly pipe may be used for swing joints on spray heads only. Swing pipe must be poly pipe, no funny pipe allowed.

2.10 ROTARY SPRINKLER HEADS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Hunter, series I-40, I-25 and I-20. B. Type: Internal drive, with spring loaded sprinkler heads.

1. Body and nozzles: stainless steel.

C. Connection: Lasco or Blu-Lock pre-manufactured swing joint D. Part Circle Heads: Variable arc setting capability

2.11 VALVE BOXES

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Carson Brooks Jumbo B. Locking bolt-down type, furnished with lid and 3” gravel sump C. Contractor shall provide gravel. Reference DPS standard detail. D. Jumbo size valves boxes for all valves. Provide extensions as needed. E. Ten inch round boxes or larger if needed to prevent crowding at wire splices, isolation valves

and quick couplers. Reference standard DPS detail.



F. Tamper-proof bolts. Bolts shall be stainless steel button head socket security type. 2.12 ROOT WATERING SYSTEM

A. Acceptable manufacturer: Rainbird, RWS series. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Before irrigation work commences, a pre-installation conference shall be held with the DPS Project Manager, Irrigation Representative, the Contractor, the A/E, the plumbing subcontractor’s on-site representative, the irrigation subcontractor’s on-site representative, the DPS Plumbing Department irrigation specialist and DPS Grounds. 1. The A/E shall provide a meeting report.

B. Notifications by Contractor

1. Notify the A/E and the DPS Project Manager of the following with 72 hours minimum notice. a. System layout b. Trench excavations for depth of trench prior to backfill c. Pressure supply line installation and testing d. Coverage tests: Prior to landscape planting

C. Provide up-to-date as-built irrigation drawings at each meeting, review, test, and inspection.

3.02 WATER PRESSURE

A. Prior to beginning irrigation installation, the Contractor shall verify that the water pressure is as designed, intended and anticipated at the point of connection. 1. Existing pressure shall be checked utilizing a calibrated pressure gage. 2. Written submittal shall be provided prior to start of work. 3. Provide pressure gage calibration records with the submittal. 4. Written confirmation from the DPS Project Manager shall be obtained prior to the start of

work. 3.03 WATER SERVICE CONNECTION

A. Make connections to water sources at locations indicated and make minor changes in location as may be necessary due to actual conditions.

B. Notify the DPS Project Manager 72 hours in advance of water service interruption.

3.04 LAYOUT

A. Piping and equipment layout is indicated diagrammatically on the plans. B. Piping and equipment shall be installed inside planting areas whenever possible. C. Minimize the number of lines below asphalt and concrete. D. Lay out sprinkler heads and other items, and make minor adjustments required due to

differences between actual site conditions and the contract documents. Minor adjustments shall maintain the original design intent.



E. Mark line layout with paint. F. Flag heads and valves. G. System layout shall be approved by the A/E and DPS Project Manager. H. Maintain and protect layout through the completion of trenching.

3.05 GENERAL INSTALLATION

A. Contractor shall examine the site for conditions that will adversely affect execution, permanence and quality of work and shall immediately notify the A/E and the DPS Project Manager, in writing, of items that will adversely affect the work. 1. Verify that final grading has been completed and accepted by the A/E and the DPS Project

Manager, before proceeding with remaining work. 2. Exercise extreme care in excavating and working near existing utilities. Contractor is

responsible for damage to utilities caused by his operations or neglect. Contractor shall obtain locates from utilities for the locations of utilities prior to the start of work. Also refer to other DPS standards regarding utilities.

B. Soil Conditions: Investigate soil type and conditions in which lines are to be installed and allow

for the same in installation. No extras will be allowed due to difficulty in trenching. A soils report is available from the DPS Project Manager for review prior to bid and during construction activities.

C. Commencement of work shall indicate that the Contractor accepts site conditions and water

pressures without recourse. D. Mainlines shall have concrete thrust blocks installed at changes of direction such as tees, ells,

cross tees, etc. 1. Each thrust block shall include a minimum of four cubic feet of 3,000 psi concrete with a

minimum of two square feet poured against undisturbed earth. 2. Wrap pipe, tees, ells, cross tees, etc., with four mil poly or other fabric to prevent bonding of

concrete to the irrigation component. 3. Refer to DPS standard thrust block details.

E. Brass pipe and threaded fittings: Assemble using Teflon tape applied to male threads

only. F. Plastic pipe and threaded fittings: Assemble using Teflon tape applied to male threads

only. G. Tape open ends of pipe during installation to prevent entry of foreign matter into the

system. H. All sprinkler heads shall be installed with Lasco or Blu-Lock pre-manufactured swing

joints. No “funny pipe” is allowed. I. Valve boxes shall be installed with lids level with finished turf elevation, and shall have a

minimum 2” clearance above any piping passing into or through the boxes. J. Irrigation heads

1. Locate approximately as indicated on drawings. Do not exceed the maximum or minimum spacing indicated by manufacturer.

2. Flush lateral lines with full head of water and install heads after hydrostatic test is completed.



3. Install lawn heads to be level with turf or mulch. 4. Keep heads 1-½” below level of adjacent sidewalks and other hardscapes. 5. Locate part-circle heads minimum 6” from walks and 12” from walls, fences, and other

boundaries, unless otherwise indicated or approved by the DPS Project Manager. 6. Allow no backwash or overspray onto walls or fences.

K. Low flow equipment

1. Install low flow valve assembly in separate valve box. 2. Use of drip tubing is prohibited 3. Use specialized tools for installation methods per manufacturer’s recommendations.

L. Locate isolation valves in easily acessible locations. Do not locate above ceilings or in crawl

spaces unless there is easy and direct access.

M. Rain sensor mounting: Refer to standard DPS detail for mounting requirements. 3.06 TRENCHING

A. Also refer to other DPS standards for trenching. B. Following approval of layout, excavate trenches to required depths at pipe invert. C. Maintain bottom of trenches flat to permit piping to be supported on an even grade continuously

for full run. D. Pipes below asphalt and concrete shall be installed in PVC sleeves. Sleeves shall drain to one

end. E. Depth of bury to top of pipe in landscape areas

1. Main lines: 18” to 24” (minimum) 2. Lateral lines: 12” to 16” (minimum)

F. Depth of bury to top of pipe in athletic/sports fields

1. Main lines: 18” to 24 “ (minimum) 2. Lateral lines 16” to 20” (minimum)

G. All trenches in existing grass to remain shall be repaired with full width sod rolls after

proper compaction. No seeding is allowed for these trenches. 3.07 LINE CLEARANCES

A. Provide not less than 6" clearance between each irrigation line and not less than 12" clearance between lines of other trades.

B. Do not install parallel lines directly over any other line.

3.08 BACKFILLING

A. Also refer to other DPS standards for backfilling. B. Do not backfill more than is necessary over any line for stability until it has been inspected and

tested.

The A/E and the DPS Project Manager will then approve the satisfactorily tested and satisfactorily inspected portion of the system for backfill.



C. Place accepted backfill material in 6” loose lifts, and compact each lift. D. Compact trench backfill to a dry density equal to adjacent undisturbed soil. Restore to adjacent

grade, free of dips, depressions, humps or other irregularities. E. Compaction by truck or other vehicles is not permitted. F. Puddle each trench thoroughly and assure that no settlement occurs.

1. Exception: Do not puddle in expansive soil areas indicated by the Soils Report. 3.09 EXISTING TREES

A. Where necessary to excavate adjacent to existing trees, use all possible care to avoid injury to trees and tree roots.

B. Trench no closer than 6’ from trunk of existing trees. C. Cut no roots over 2” diameter; hand trench around roots. D. Hand dig all trenches within drip lines of existing trees.

3.10 EXISTING PAVEMENTS

A. Piping sleeves under pavements may be installed by jacking, boring or by hydraulic driving except as otherwise specified or directed by DPS Project Manager.

B. Obtain permission from DPS Project Manager prior to cutting or breaking existing pavements. C. At locations where cutting is approved, make clean cuts using power saws. Make cuts at

approved locations only. New pipe shall then be installed in sleeves. D. Sidewalk cuts shall remove full sidewalk panels only. No narrow cuts will be allowed. E. Restore affected site and landscape elements to original condition, including grades and

landscaping. Restoration work shall match the original condition, including type, strength, texture and finish.

3.11 SYSTEM FLUSHING

A. After sprinkler pipe lines and risers are in place and connected, and prior to installation of sprinkler heads, thoroughly flush lines with a full head of water.

B. Do not install sprinkler heads until lines have been flushed to the satisfaction of the A/E and the

DPS Project Manager. 3.12 VALVE BOX IDENTIFICATION

A. Brand the box identification number with characters from the “Brand New Industries Inc.” value box branding kit. This will include numbers and letters.

B. Permanently mark each valve inside of ox with same identification as valve box cover. Use

“Christies Valve ID Tags” or equal to identify valves. Attach the tag to the valve via wire or cable tie and mark clearly with permanent marker. Use yellow ID tags for potable water irrigation systems and use purple ID tags for non-potable water irrigation systems.



3.13 ELECTRICAL WIRING

A. The A/E shall specify electrical wiring installation requirements. B. Low voltage wiring

1. Place wiring in the same trench and routing as pressure supply lines unless otherwise approved.

2. Install wiring to the side of mainlines whenever possible and not below or above. 3. When more than one wire is placed in a trench, tape wires together at 15 ft. o.c., maximum. 4. Provide a 24" expansion loop at each connection and directional change. 5. Wire shall be run in PVC conduit underground between controller and mainline trench.

a. Sleeve conduits through foundation walls, asphalt, concrete, etc., and under asphalt and concrete walks, driveways, parking areas, etc.

b. PVC conduit is prohibited above ground or in building interiors 6. Rigid metal conduit shall be used on exteriors above ground.

a. Transition from PVC conduit to rigid metal conduit five (5) feet from building wall and/or controller location.

7. Use continuous wire between controller and remote control valves. 8. Splicing

a. Except as otherwise approved, do not splice wire at any point. b. At locations where splicing is allowed, make splices within an approved box. c. Wire splicing shall not occur in a valve box, quick connect box or any box used for a

purpose other than wire splicing. d. Each controller shall have its own separate ground wire.

9. Spare wires a. Provide two spare common wires for each controller, installed to end of each

mainline. b. Provide one spare control wire for every 10 zones, two minimum for each controller.

3.14 BOOSTER PUMPS

A. Specify installation and testing of booster pumps with the approval of the DPS Plumbing

Department, if applicable. 3.15 PRESSURE TESTS

A. Contractor shall provide equipment necessary to test systems, including air compressor. B. Schedule testing 72 hours in advance so the A/E and the DPS Project Manager may

observe pressure testing. C. Pressure supply lines shall be filled with water for at least 24 hours prior to testing and shall be

tested under minimum 150 p.s.i. hydrostatic pressure for a period of two (2) hours unless otherwise approved.

D. Contractor shall provide a written report to the A/E and the DPS Project Manager stating the

starting pressure and ending pressure and listing the equipment used. 3.16 COVERAGE TESTS

A. Perform coverage tests after sprinkler system is completed and pressure testing is completed. B. Prior to planting, provide coverage testing in the presence of the A/E and DPS Project Manager. C. Assure all lawn and planting areas are watered completely and uniformly.



D. Make necessary adjustments, including realignment of heads, to provide required coverage as

directed by the A/E and the DPS Project Manager. The Contractor shall provide a written and signed report of the coverage testing to the A/E and the DPS Project Manager.

3.17 SYSTEM PROGRAMMING AND ADJUSTMENT

A. Valves: Adjust controls and pressure reducing valves to attain the required pressure (as

shown on sprinkler head legend) at the sprinkler head. B. Heads: Adjust for alignment and coverage. C. Contractor shall make alterations to the system to provide specified coverage. D. Make final adjustments prior to planting. E. Controller settings

1. Prior to the Owner’s acceptance of the irrigation system, program the irrigation controller on a regular basis to ensure adequate but not excessive watering for the seasonal period and establishment of the landscape.

2. Conform to municipality requirements imposed on the Owner, such as watering periods, water application rates, and drought restrictions.

3. For information on responsibility of clock adjustments refer to maintenance section 329100. 3.18 WINTERIZATION

A. Installer is responsible for winterization of the entire site irrigation system (including the

existing system) during the warranty and landscape maintenance periods. B. Winterize by draining the entire site at the conclusion of the sprinkler season within five (5)

days of notification by the DPS Project Manager. C. Unless modified by extremely mild weather conditions, the system shall be shut down and

winterized by November 25. D. In the week immediately prior to winterizing of the system, landscape areas shall receive a

minimum of 1-½” of water (either through natural conditions or operation of the system). E. Winterize the system by closing the main pressure valve, opening valves, removing water from

the lines, including backflow preventer and line to meter, de-energizing the controller, and other required actions. Remove water from drip lines. Lines shall be purged by use of compressed air. Evacuate back flow prevention device and protect.

F. Submit written certification of time and date of completed winterization to the DPS Project

Manager with two (2) days of completion. 3.19 ACTIVATION/SPRING STARTUP

A. Installer is responsible for startup of the irrigation system during the warranty and landscape

maintenance periods. B. Activate irrigation system no later than April 30

th. If weather conditions warrant activating the

system prior to April 1st or after April 30

th, obtain agreement from DPS Project Manager.

C. Notify DPS Project Manager a minimum of one week before activating the irrigation system.



D. The system shall not be activated and operated without the Owner present to verify vandalism

damage, etc., beyond the responsibility of the Contractor. If Owner is not present during startup, damage discovered subsequent to the startup will be assumed to be covered under the warranty.

E. To activate the system, pressurize and run each zone a minimum of 15 minutes. Observe for

leaks, pressure defects, adequate coverage, and other conditions that may impact the effective operation of the system. Immediately correct leaks or defects.

F. Submit written certification of time and date of completed startup to the DPS Project Manager

within two (2) days of completion. 3.20 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train the Facility Manager(s) in proper operation of equipment. B. Coordinate and schedule training sessions with the DPS Project Manager. C. Submit written evidence that training has been successfully completed.

3.21 SPARE PARTS AND TOOLS A. Deliver the following items to the DPS Plumbing shop

1. Two (2) keys for each automatic controller 2. Two (2) sockets for opening valve boxes 3. Two (2) keys for hotboxes or backflow protection

3.22 CLEAN-UP

A. Upon completion of work, restore ground surface and landscape to required elevation and remove excess materials, debris and equipment from the site to satisfaction of Owner’s Representative.

END OF SECTION


DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS Florence Crittenton LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE OZ Architecture Project No. 113266.00 Section 32 91 00 - 1

SECTION 32 91 00

LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE


A. Section includes maintaining the following items through final acceptance: 1. Irrigation System. 2. Sod areas. 3. Seed areas. 4. Trees, shrubs and ground covers.


A. Section 32 84 00: Underground Sprinkler System. B. Section 32 92 19: Seeding. C. Section 32 92 23: Sodding. D. Section 32 93 00: Trees, Shrubs and Ground Covers.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Contractor to submit written reports to the Owner of landscape maintenance work. 1. Provide a written report to Owner for each maintenance activity. 2. Provide at least one report per month regardless of extent of problems or activity, through

landscape maintenance period. 3. Report form should include inspection for each type of plant, license number, etc.

B. Contractor to submit to the Owner the name and composition of herbicides, fertilizers, fungicides,

growth retardants and other chemicals and mixtures used in landscape maintenance operations. C. Contractor to notify the Owner minimum one (1) week prior to the following

1. Request for irrigation system adjustment (Contractor requests adjustment; Owner performs controller adjustment)

2. Irrigation system spring start-up and fall winterization 3. Fertilization or the broad application of any chemicals or insecticides of any kind

D. Contractor shall responsible to review the maintenance activity of the Owner throughout the

landscape maintenance period and notify the Owner, in writing, of deficiencies in desired operations. Failure to notify Owner of deficiencies will prohibit Contractor from relief of responsibility for dead or damaged work. 1. Contractor shall make no repair or take corrective action for discrepancies unless authorized

to do so by Owner in writing. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Applicable Codes and Standards 1. Abide by the codes, specifications, and standards of all governmental and industry

regulations including but not limited City, County, State of Colorado, and the standards of the American Association of Nurserymen (ANN), American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), National Plumbing Code (NPC), Colorado Technical Plumbing Code, Uniform Building Code (UBC), Sprinkler Irrigation Association (SIA), National Electric Code (NEC),



American Sod Producers Association (ASPA), United States Department of Agriculture (USDA), and the Association of American Seed Control Officials (AASCO).

2. All labor shall be United States citizens or have current, valid work permits for work within the United States.

3. At all times when work is being performed, Contractor shall have an individual who has successfully completed the Standard First Aid and Personal Safety Course (intermediate level) offered by the American Red Cross or other training as accepted by the Owner.

4. No chemicals or fertilizers shall be utilized on the work without a state licensed operator in attendance.

B. Equipment:

1. All equipment shall be well maintained and equipped with current safety features including audible reverse warning, trimming guards, etc.

C. Contractor shall replace, at no cost to Owner, plant material that dies. This guarantee included

plant materials that are damaged due to Contractor’s operations. D. Warranty for replacement plants shall be extended for an additional year beyond replacement

planting date. 1.05 MAINTENANCE PERIOD

A. Required maintenance for all items shall extend until date of final acceptance of the entire project. This period will last through a minimum of two lawn cuttings for sodded areas.

B. After acceptance of the entire project, the Contractor will assume responsibility for maintenance for

24 months. A 24 month warranty will begin at date of acceptance of all landscape construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 NOTIFICATION TO OWNER

A. Contractor is responsible to review the regular maintenance activity of the Owner throughout the warranty period and notify the Owner, in writing, of any deficiencies in desired operations. Failure to notify the Owner of deficiencies will prohibit Contractor from relief of responsibility for dead or damaged work.

B. Contractor shall make no repair or take corrective action for discrepancies unless authorized to do

so by Owner in writing. C. Notify Owner of any proposed applications of herbicides, insecticides, fertilizers or other

chemicals. Do not apply without written approval of DPS Project Manager. 3.02 IRRIGATION SYSTEM

A. Refer to Section 328400 – Underground Sprinkler System for winterization, spring start-up and other requirements for the irrigation system.

3.03 SODDED AREAS

A. Fertilization:



1. Fertilize sodded areas four (4) weeks after installation, but no later than October 15. On established irrigated turf, apply two (2) times per year, once between March 15 and April 15 and once between September 1 and September 15 and as necessary outside of that timeframe to ensure the health of the sod.

2. Fertilize sodded areas four (4) weeks after installation, but no later than October 15. On established irrigated turf, apply two (2) times per year, once between March 15 and April 15 and once between September 1 and September 15 and as necessary outside of that timeframe to ensure the health of the sod.

3. Fertilizer shall be a Urea based only mixture with the following chemical composition: 20-10-5. All applications shall be at a rate of 1 lbs. nitrogen per 1000 square feet.

4. These feedings are specifically in addition to those required by the installation specification. 5. All fertilizer applications shall occur using a commercial spreader on a calm, dry morning.

The sod should be moist. Never fill the spreader over the lawn areas or when "on". Sweep all concrete and asphalt areas that may have been pelleted with fertilizer.

6. In addition to the lawn fertilization, one (1) application of elemental iron shall be made at a rate of 0.5 lbs. per 1000 square feet.

B. Weeding and Insect Control: Contractor is responsible for weed and insect control until

acceptance of the entire project. No application of weed killer, insecticides, or antifungal chemicals are specified. Apply these elements as necessary to maintain healthy, weed free sod throughout the year. Apply as per manufacturer's recommendations whenever necessary to protect the sod condition. 1. In no case shall application occur on a school day; in the event of the application of these

chemicals applies; a notice of the time of application shall be posted at each building entrance.

2. Take all precautions when applying weed killers, insecticides or antifungal remedies, including gloves, masks, goggles, etc., and shall not apply on windy or rainy days.

3. This section includes insects, molds, fungus, broadleaf, and viney weeds and specifically includes grasshoppers.

C. Mowings: Cut sod with a sharp and well-maintained mower, such as a reel or rotary type mower.

Keep grass an average of 2.5 inches in height and cut whenever the clippings will measure approximately 0.5 inch of 25 percent of the grass plant. Never cut off more than 33 percent of the plant height. Between May 1 and September 15, cut grass a minimum of once every week and as needed outside of that timeframe to preserve the health of the grass. 1. If mowing creates visible accumulations of clippings, clippings must be removed. Remove all

clippings immediately. Cross slope all mowing vary cutting direction periodically. All areas around walks, buildings, curbs, walls, rocks, plants, lights, or other structures must be trimmed by hand or mechanical trimmer each time the grass is cut. All cuttings must be done diagonal to the way the sod was laid. Clean cuttings from walks, plazas, drives, etc.

D. Aeration: Contractor shall be responsible for aerating the grass a minimum of two times per year

and as necessary after that to maintain the health of the grass. 3.04 SEEDED AREAS

A. General: Maintenance shall begin immediately after each area is seeded and continue through the

landscape maintenance period. During this time, be responsible for watering, mowing, spraying, weeding and related work as necessary to ensure that seeded areas are established and continue in a vigorous, weed-free growing condition. Control weeds by use of spot herbicides or mechanical trimmer. Include bind weed, thistle control and control of designated State of Colorado noxious weeds.

B. Watering: Water irrigation areas until stand of grass is established. After grass is established,

water irrigated grass at regular schedule as approved by Owner. Native and dryland grasses are not required to be watered unless otherwise specified.



C. Weed Control: As required for native seed/dryland grasses only after turf establishment using

selective herbicides or mechanical string trimmers or mowers. D. Insect and Disease Control: As required, apply insecticide and fungicide. E. Remove debris in seeded areas at each time of maintenance service.

3.05 TREE AND SHRUB CARE

A. Contractor shall inspect plant material on a bi-weekly basis. Immediately remove dead plants, dead parts of plants and tree suckers and leafing on main stems.

B. Each spring, no later than June 1, trim winter dieback and undesirable shoots, and correct

branching problems. C. Each deciduous tree trunk shall be wrapped between October 15 and November 31 of each year. D. Remove tree wrap prior to completion of the maintenance period.

3.06 WINTER WATERING

A. Contractor's maintenance crew to water all sod, irrigated seed and plant material areas once each month during December, January, February, and March and as needed to adequately sustain plant material through the winter.

B. This watering shall occur from sillcocks of the building or quick couplers and must include the cost

of supplying all necessary hoses and fittings. If sillcocks are frozen or cannot be activated Contractor shall utilize a water truck.

3.07 VANDALISM

A. Contractor shall notify the Project Manager immediately of apparent vandalism, including graffiti, in

areas of landscape maintenance responsibility.

END OF SECTION


DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS Florence Crittenton FINE GRADING AND SOIL PREPARATION OZ Architecture Project No. 113266.00 Section 32 91 13 - 1

SECTION 32 91 13

FINE GRADING AND SOIL PREPARATION


A. Ripping. B. Fertilizer. C. Soil amendments. D. Topsoil. E. Fine grading.


A. Section 328400: Underground Sprinkler System.

B. Section 329100: Landscape Maintenance.

C. Section 329219: Seeding.

D. Section 329223: Sodding.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Certificates: State, federal and other inspection certificates shall accompany invoice for all

materials showing source or origin. Submit to Owner's Representative prior to acceptance of materials.

2. Soil Amendment Test Report: Submit soil conditioner test analysis to Owner's Representative 3 weeks prior to delivery to site in accordance with Section 00 13 00.


A. The work of this section shall be performed by an experienced landscape Installer having not less than 5 years successful experience in landscape projects of similar size and scope as this project. Include work of Sections 32 92 19, 32 92 23, and 32 93 00 for undivided responsibility.


A. Fertilizer: Deliver inorganic or chemical fertilizer to site in original unopened containers bearing manufacturer's guaranteed chemical analysis, name, trade name, trademark and conformance to state law, bearing name and warranty of producer.

B. Notify Owner's Representative of delivery schedule in advance so material can be inspected upon

arrival at project site. Immediately remove unacceptable material from project site. 1.06 PROJECT/SITE CONDITION

A. General: Do not perform work when climate and existing site conditions will not provide satisfactory results.



B. Vehicular accessibility on site shall be as directed by owner's representative. Repair damage to

prepared ground and surfaces caused by vehicular movement during work under this section to original condition at no additional cost to Owner.

C. Perform soil preparation just prior to planting operations and in accordance with final planting

schedule. Coordinate with irrigation system installation to avoid damage to work of one by the other.

D. Utilities: Determine location of underground utilities and perform work in a manner which will avoid

damage. Hand excavate, as required.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SOIL AMENDMENTS

A. Composted Amendment: Biocomp Compost by A-1 Organics (class I compost). Weed free 28% minimum organic matter.

Apply at a rate of 4 cubic yards per 1000 s.f., till to a minimum depth of 9” for all planting areas including sod.

B. Compost Certification Specifications:

1. Composted soil amendments must be produced at a facility permitted and regulated under the State of Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment and/or the county in which the facility operates for the production of compost and soil amendments.

2. The product must be certified to have been produced in a manner that meets the US EPA 40CFR 503.13 minimum standards for pathogen destruction under a controlled, monitored, and documented process.

3. The supplier must certify that no supplemental nitrogen or other chemicals have been added to the compost to alter or enhance the results of the laboratory analysis, unless specifically requested by the design architect.

4. The contractor must supply a letter of certification from the manufacturer which confirms that the product being supplied has met the referenced requirements and that supporting documentation exists and is available for inspection (if requested).

C. Planter’s Mix: Amended Topsoil blend by A-1 Organics (70% screened topsoil / 30% compost) to

full depth of planter as shown on the plans.

2.02 PLANTING MIXES

A. Turf: Minimum requirements for acceptable topsoil or amended soil used for topsoil 1. Organic matter content: Above 3% 2. PH: 6.5 – 7.6 3. Conductivity: Less than 2 mmhos/cm. 4. Nutrients: N, above 15 ppm; P above 10 ppm; K above 80 ppm 5. Soil texture: Sandy/clay, clay, silty clay loams; loam; or silty, sandy loams.

B. Tree and shrub planning backfill

1. Seventy percent (70%) topsoil by volume; soil may be taken form the plant pit or imported soil of a quality acceptable by the DPS Project Manager meeting or exceeding the quality of specified topsoil.

2. 15% soil amendment humus by volume and 15% clean concrete sand. 3. The specified backfill materials shall be evenly pre-mixed using appropriate equipment, then

turned to produce a uniform, evenly blended consistency, free of all pockets of unblended



material and any colds or stones greater than 2” in diameter. Backfill mix shall be inspected an approved prior to use.

C. Bedding mix (ground covers, perennials): Topsoil or amended soil with two percent (2 %) more

organic matter than indicated by topsoil test (5% minimum). D. Groundcover and perennial areas

1. Prepare as above for turf areas at the following rates for amendments: a. Fertilizer: One (1) pound per 100 sq. ft. of diammonium phosphate fertilizer (18-46-0). b. Soil amendment humus: One (1) cubic yard per 100 sq. ft.

2.03 TOPSOIL

A. Topsoil for planting backfill or other use shall be from stripped on site stock pile. Strip from “A” horizon in source area.

B. Contractor shall mix, scarify and pulverize soil to break up or remove clods, rocks, debris, and non

decomposed organic matter. No clods, rocks, or organic matter larger than 2” in the greatest dimension will be allowed for use in planting operations.

C. 6” Minimum topsoil is required under sodded areas. 4” Minimum under seeded areas. D. Topsoil Test:

1. DPS Environmental specialist will test soils for aras to be planted before design. 2. Topsoil test by A/E is required for projects where soil may be stripped for later use. Test

shall determine soil amendments and preparation required to avoid using import top soil. 3. Minimum requirements for acceptable topsoil or amended soil used for topsoil include:

a. Organic matter content: Above 3% b. PH: 6.5 – 7.6 c. Conductivity: Less than 2 mmhos/cm d. Nutrients: N, above 15 ppm; P, above 10 ppm; K above 80 ppm e. Soil texture: Sandy/clay, clay, silty clay loams; loam; or silty, sandy loams.

2.04 FERTILIZER

A. Commercial Fertilizer: 1. Seeded Areas: Commercial fertilizer having an analysis of 18% available nitrogen (sulfur-

coated Urea only) and 46% available phosphorus (18-46-0). Provide in sufficient quantity to apply at the rate of 5 lbs nitrogen per acre.

2. Sodded Lawns: a. Commercial fertilizer having an analysis of 46% available nitrogen (Urea and sulphur-

coated Urea only) (46-0-0) in sufficient quantity to apply at a rate of 50 lbs. nitrogen per acre.

b. Treble phosphate (0-46-0) in sufficient quantity to apply at a rate of 650 lbs. per acre. 2.05 HERBICIDE

A. Roundup by Monsanto: Apply according to manufacturer's instructions using certified applicators.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. General: Verify that existing site conditions are as specified and indicated before beginning work under this section.



1. Grades: Inspect to verify rough grading is within + 0.1 foot of grades indicated and specified.

2. Damaged Earth: Inspect to verify that earth rendered unfit to receive planting due to concrete water, mortar, limewater or any other contaminant dumped on it has been removed and replaced with clean earth from a source approved by the Owner's Representative.

B. Unsatisfactory Conditions: Report in writing to General Contractor with copy to Owner's

Representative. C. Acceptance: Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions by installer.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Protection: 1. Locate sewer, water, irrigation, gas, electric, phone and other pipelines or conduits and

equipment prior to commencing work. 2. Be responsible for proper repair to landscape, utilities, walls, pavements and other site

improvements damaged by operations under this section. 3. Pay for repairs made by contractor(s) designated by Owner.

B. Weed Control: Remove perennial weeds by applying herbicide 1 week before final grading and as

needed. Remove annual weeds by tilling. Water prepared soil for two weeks if possible and apply herbicide to exposed weeds.

C. Surface Grade: Remove weeds, debris and rocks larger than 1/2". Dispose of accumulated

debris at direction of Owner's Representative. D. Runoff: Take measures and furnish equipment and labor necessary to control the flow, drainage,

and accumulation of water to run off the grounds as is intended by the grades. E. Erosion Control: Take measures and furnish equipment and labor necessary to control and

prevent soil erosion, blowing soil and accumulation of wind-deposited material on the site throughout duration of work.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Soil Amendment 1. Limit preparation to areas which will be planted promptly after preparation. 2. Before tilling, clean topsoil of stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous materials harmful or

toxic to plant growth. Leave seeds and plants for native seed areas. Use soil devoid of seeds and plants in sodded and seeded lawn areas.

3. Sodded Lawns: Spread soil amendments and phosphate at the rate specified after topsoil (if specified) is spread. Till in thoroughly to a minimum depth of 6"-9", and grade to meet lines, grades and elevations shown, allowing for natural settlement.

4. Seeded Areas: Spread soil amendments and fertilizer at the rate specified after topsoil is spread. Till in thoroughly to a minimum depth of 6”, and grade to meet lines, grades and elevations shown, allowing for natural settlement.

B. Fine Grading in all Landscape Areas:

1. Do fine grading for areas immediately prior to planting. 2. For ground surface areas surrounding buildings to be landscaped, maintain required positive

drainage away from buildings. 3. Establish finish grades to within 0.05 foot of grades indicated. The intent of this spec is to

prevent 'bird baths' or ponding. 4. Finish grade to be below edge of pavement prior to sodding, seeding or planting.

a. Sodded Areas: Allow 1.5" for sod.



b. Shrub Beds: Allow 7” for mulch. c. Seeded Areas: Allow 1” for seed.

5. Noxious weeds or parts thereof shall not be present in the surface grade prior to landscaping.

6. Compaction of Surface Grade Prior to Landscape Installation: Firm, but not hard (80% standard Proctor density within 2% optimum moisture).

7. Prior to acceptance of grades, rake to smooth, even surface free of debris, clods, rocks, and vegetable matter greater than 1". Native seed areas should not be raked smooth but left in a uniform condition after tilling. Rough raking may occur parallel to the contour only.

8. Sodded Lawns: Apply nitrogen fertilizer, at the rate specified, after fine grading and prior to sodding.

9 Restore planting areas to specified condition if eroded or otherwise disturbed after fine grading and prior to planting.

3.04 NOTIFICATION AND INSPECTION

A. Inspection: Provide notice to Owner's Representative requesting inspection at least 7 days prior to anticipated date of completion.

B. Deficiencies: Owner's Representative will specify deficiencies to Contractor who shall make

satisfactory adjustments and shall again notify Owner's Representative for final inspection. 3.05 CLEANING

A. General: Remove debris and excess materials from site. Clean out drainage inlet structures. Clean paved and finished surfaces soiled as a result of work under this section, in accordance with direction given by Owner's Representative.

3.06 PROTECTION

A. General: Provide and install barriers as required and as directed by Owner's Representative to protect completed areas against damage from pedestrian and vehicular traffic until acceptance by Owner. Contractor is not responsible for malicious destruction caused by others.

3.07 WARRANTY

A. Contractor to warrant for a period of 24 months that puddling, sinking or caving directly due to earthwork operations does not occur.

END OF SECTION


DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS Florence Crittendon SODDING OZ Architecture Project No. 113266.00 Section 32 92 23 - 1

SECTION 32 92 23

SODDING


A. Placing Sod 1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Section 32 84 00: Underground Sprinkler System.

B. Section 32 91 00: Landscape Maintenance.

C. Section 32 91 13: Fine Grading and Soil Preparation.

D. Section 32 92 19: Seeding

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ASPA (American Sod Producers Association) - Guideline Specifications to Sodding. 1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Certificates: State, federal and other inspection certificates shall accompany the invoice for

materials showing source of origin. Submit to Owner's Representative prior to acceptance of material.

2. Submit mix specification showing variety and percentage in the mix for approval two weeks prior to installation.

B. Contract Closeout Submittals:

1. Operating and Maintenance Data: At completion of work, submit 3 copies of data. Include directions for irrigation, fertilizing, aeration, mowing, and spraying as required for continuance and proper maintenance through a full growing season and dormant period.


A. Coordination: Plant trees and shrubs after final grades are established and prior to planting of

lawns, unless otherwise acceptable to Owner’s Representative. If planting of trees and shrubs occurs after lawn work, protect lawn areas and promptly repair damage to lawns resulting from planting operations.


A. Sod: Time delivery so that sod will be placed within 24 hours after stripping. Protect sod against drying and breaking of rolled strips.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



2.01 MATERIALS

A. Sod: Provide strongly rooted sod, not less than two years old, free of weeds and undesirable native grasses and machine cut to pad thickness of 3/4" (+ 1/4"), excluding top growth and thatch. Provide only sod capable of vigorous growth and development when planted (viable, not dormant). After April 15 and prior to October 31 provide sod capable of vigorous growth and development. After October 31, installed sod may be dormant. 1. Provide sod of uniform pad sizes with maximum 5% deviation in either length or width.

Broken pads or pads with uneven ends will not be acceptable. Sod pads incapable of supporting their own weight when suspended vertically with a firm grasp on upper 10% of pad will be rejected. Jumbo roll sod will be acceptable upon approval by Owner’s Representative. Jumbo roll sod shall not include structural netting.

2. Provide Colorado grown GTF Blend suitable for vigorous athletic field and general play use. Blend shall contain a minimum of three improved varieties. Contact Graff’s Turf Farm at 800-280-8873.

B. Water: Clean, fresh and free of substance or matter which would inhibit vigorous growth of grass.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION OF FINAL GRADE

A. Restore lawn areas to condition specified in Section 32 91 13 if eroded or otherwise disturbed after fine grading and prior to planting.

3.02 FERTILIZING

A. Apply commercial nitrogen fertilizer as specified in Section 32 91 13. Apply after fine grading and prior to compaction.

B. Lightly water to aid the breakdown of fertilizer. C. Apply fertilizer within 48 hours before laying sod. D. Apply second fertilization at one half rate three weeks after sodding is completed.

3.03 LAYING SOD

A. Lay sod within 24 hours from time of stripping. Do not plant dormant sod or if ground is frozen. B. Lay sod to form a solid mass with tightly fitted joints. Butt ends and sides of sod strips; do not

overlap. Stagger strips to offset joints in adjacent courses. Tamp or roll lightly to insure contact with subgrade. Work sifted soil into minor cracks between pieces of sod; remove excess to avoid smothering of adjacent grass.

C. Water sod thoroughly with a fine spray immediately after planting. Do not lay sod which will not

receive water within one (1) hour. D. Rolling: When soil and sod are moist, roll sod lightly as soon as possible after it is laid. Delay

rolling until just before the second watering. E. Topsoil: Add along exposed edges to match adjacent grade. Feather topsoil out approximately 1

ft. from edge of sod.



F. Abutting Existing Sod: Provide a clean cut edge along existing sod where new sod will adjoin. Lay new sod to avoid any gaps, overlap, or unevenness.

G. Drainage: Assure finished areas of sod are such that positive drainage of storm and irrigation

water will occur and ponding of water will be minimized. 3.04 REPAIR OF EXISTING SOD AREAS DISTURBED BY RENOVATION

A. Repair existing sod areas disturbed by renovation work (utilities, paving, etc.) as indicated, in accordance with specifications of this section.

3.05 ACCEPTANCE

A. Sod will be inspected at time of final walk through. Sod must be mowed within three days prior to this inspection.

B. Sod will be inspected for health, vigor, and quality of installation: C. All seams between sod pieces to be tight. D. Surface grade is to be smooth, without pits, humps, or pock marks. E. Sod must be free of weeds and undesirable grasses. F. Sod will not be accepted until after a minimum of two mowings at new sod have been completed.

Contractor shall be responsible for maintenance and mow sod on a regular basis until project achieves Final Acceptance.

3.06 WARRANTY

A. Sod: Warrant sod for a period of 24 months from date of Final Acceptance to be in a healthy, vigorous growing condition. 1. During the original warranty period, replace at once sod areas that die due to natural

causes, etc. or which in Owner's Representative's opinion are unhealthy. 2. Replacement will not be required in any season definitely unfavorable for sodding. 3. Install replacements as originally specified and warrant for one additional year.

END OF SECTION



Florence Crittenton TREES, SHRUBS, AND GROUNDCOVERS

OZ Architecture Project No. 113266.00 Section 32 93 00 - 1

SECTION 32 93 00

TREES, SHRUBS, AND GROUND COVERS


A. Trees, shrubs, perennials and grasses. B. Temporary support. C. Mulch.


A. Subcontract landscape work to a single firm specializing in landscape work. B. Perform work with personnel experienced in the work required of this Section under direction of a

skilled foreman. C. Staking: All final lines and grades to conform to grade stakes set and approved prior to work. D. Source Quality Control:

1. General: Ship landscape materials with certificates of inspection required by governing authorities. Comply with regulations applicable to landscape materials.

2. Do not make substitutions. If specified landscape material is not obtainable, submit proof of non-availability to Owner's Representative, together with proposal for use of equivalent material.

3. Procurement: The entering of a proposal and execution of a contract will be construed as evidence that the Contractor has made successful procurement arrangements for all plant materials as specified.

4. Analysis and Standards: Package standard products with manufacturers certified analysis. For other materials, provide analysis by recognized laboratory made in accordance with methods established by the Association of Official Agriculture Chemists, wherever applicable.

5. Trees, Shrubs, and Plants: Provide trees, shrubs and plants of quantity, size, genus, species and variety shown and scheduled for landscape work and complying with recommendations and requirements of ANSI Z60.1 "American Standard of Nursery Stock." Provide healthy, vigorous stock, grown in a recognized nursery in accordance with good horticultural practice and free of disease, insects, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sun-scald, injuries, abrasions, or disfigurement.

6. Hardiness: Plants grown in hardiness zones 1, 2, 3, and 4 only will be accepted. Hardiness zones are defined in U.S. Dept. of Agriculture publications. Grower's certificates may be required when doubt exists as to the origin of plant material.

7. Plant Source: All plants shall be nursery grown or gathered native plants approved by Owner's Representative. Imported plants shall have been growing in a nursery for a minimum of one growing season. Trees and shrubs shall have been root-pruned during their growing period in the nursery in accordance with standard nursery practice.

8. Label each tree and shrub with securely attached waterproof tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name. a. Where formal arrangements or consecutive order of trees or shrubs are shown, select

stock for uniform height and spread, and label with number to assist symmetry in planting.





9. Inspection: The Owner's Representative may inspect trees and shrubs either at place of growth or at site before planting, for compliance with requirements for genus, species, variety, size, and quality. Owner's Representative retains right to further inspect trees and shrubs for size and condition of balls and root systems, insects, injuries, and latent defects, and to reject unsatisfactory or defective material at any time during progress of work. Remove rejected trees or shrubs immediately from project site.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Certification: Submit certificates of inspection as required by governmental authorities. Submit manufacturers or vendors certified analysis for soil amendments and fertilizer materials. Submit other data substantiating that materials comply with specified requirements.

B. Planting Schedule: Verbally submit proposed planting schedule, indicating dates for each type of

landscape work during normal seasons for such work in area of site. Once accepted, revise dates only as approved in writing, after documentation of reasons for delays.


A. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight, analysis, and name of manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery, and while stored at site.

B. Move plant materials with solid balls wrapped in burlap, or in approved containers. C. Deliver plant materials immediately prior to placement. Keep plant materials moist. D. Reject plants when ball of earth surrounding roots has been cracked or broken prior to or during

process of planting. E. Reject plants when burlap, stakes, and ropes required in connection with transplanting have been

displaced prior to acceptance.

1.05 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Proceed with and complete landscape work as rapidly as portions of site become available, working within seasonal limitations for each kind of landscape work required.

B. Utilities: Determine location of underground utilities and perform work in a manner which will avoid

possible damage. Hand excavate, as required. Maintain grade stakes set by others until removal is mutually agreed upon by parties concerned.

C. Excavation: When conditions detrimental to plant growth are encountered, such as rubble fill,

adverse drainage conditions, or obstructions, notify Owner's representative before planting. D. Planting Time: Plant or install materials during normal planting seasons for each type of

landscape work required. Correlate planting with specified maintenance periods to provide maintenance from date of substantial completion.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. Provide 24 month warranty from date of Final Acceptance. B. Replace plant materials found dead, or not in a healthy growing condition. Vandalism or negligent

acts by maintainer after acceptance will not be grounds for replacement at Contractor’s expense.





C. Replacements: Plant materials of same size and species, with a new warranty commencing on

date of replacement. D. Remove and replace trees, shrubs, or other plants found to be dead or in unhealthy condition

during warranty period. Make replacements during growth season following end of warranty period. Replace trees and shrubs which are in doubtful condition at end of warranty period, unless, in the opinion of the Owner's Representative, it is advisable to extend the warranty period for a full growing season. 1. Another inspection will be conducted at the end of extended warranty period, if any, to

determine acceptance or rejection. Only one replacement (per tree, shrub, or plant) will be required at end of warranty period, except for losses or replacements due to failure to comply with specified requirements.

2. Warranty replacements shall be warranted for one additional year.


A. Plants: Species and size identified in plant schedule, grown in climatic zones 1, 2, 3, or 4.

B. Planting Pit Backfill: Soil backfill for planting pits shall consist of the following mixture: 1. Four parts native soil from pit excavation. 2. One part soil amendment per Section 32 91 13. 3. Materials to be thoroughly blended.

C. Mulching: All single trees and planting beds shall be mulched with 6" depth clean natural cedar,

shredded mulch of medium texture. Mulch shall form a circle, 2'-6" diameter, around single trees.

2.02 PLANT MATERIALS

A. Quality: Provide trees, shrubs, and other plants of size, genus, species, and variety shown and scheduled for landscape work and complying with recommendations and requirements of ANSI Z60.1 "American Standard of Nursery Stock."

B. Deciduous Trees: Provide trees of height and caliper scheduled or shown and with branching

configuration recommended by ANSI Z60.1 for type and species required. Provide single-stem trees, except where special forms are shown or listed. 1. Provide balled and burlapped (B&B) deciduous trees. 2. Container grown deciduous trees will be acceptable in lieu of balled and burlapped

deciduous trees subject to specified limitations of ANSI Z60.1 for container stock. 3. Field dug deciduous trees will be accepted based on prior approval by Owner's

representative.

C. Deciduous Shrubs: Provide shrubs of the container size shown or listed and with not less than minimum number of canes required by ANSI Z60.1 for type and height of shrub required. All shrubs will be container grown in the sizes indicated on the plans.

D. Coniferous and Broadleafed Evergreens: Provide evergreens of sizes shown or listed.

Dimensions indicate minimum height for upright trees, such as globe, dwarf, cone, pyramidical, broad upright, and columnar. Provide normal quality evergreens with well-balanced form complying with requirements for other size relationships to the primary dimension shown. 1. Provide balled and burlapped (B&B) evergreens.





2. Container grown evergreens will be acceptable subject to specified limitations for container grown stock.

3. Field dug evergreen trees will be accepted based on prior approval by Owner's representative.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Wrapping: Tree wrap tape not less than 4" wide, designed to prevent borer damage and winter freezing.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION

A. Layout individual tree and shrub locations and areas for multiple plantings. Stake locations and outline areas and secure Owner's Representative's acceptance before start of planting work. Make minor adjustments that may be requested.

B. Preparation of Soil Backfill for Planting Pits:

1. Before mixing, clean pit excavations of roots, plants, sod, stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous materials harmful or toxic to plant growth.

2. Mix specified soil amendments with soil at rates specified. C. Sequencing and Scheduling:

1. Planting Time: Proceed with, and complete landscape work as rapidly as portions of site become available, working within seasonal limitations. Plant or install materials during normal planting seasons for each type of plant material required.

2. Correlate planting with specified maintenance periods to provide maintenance from date of substantial completion.

D. Excavation for Trees and Shrubs:

1. Excavate pits, beds and trenches with vertical sides and with bottom of excavation slightly raised at center to provide proper drainage.

Loosen hard subsoil in bottom of excavation. For bare root trees and shrubs, make excavations at least 12" wider than root spread and deep enough to allow for setting of roots on a layer of compacted backfill and with collar set at same grade level as in nursery, but 2" above finished grade at site. Allow for 9" setting layer of planting soil mixture. a. For balled and burlapped (B&B) trees and shrubs, or container grown stock, make

excavations at least 12" wider than the ball diameter and 2" shallower than ball depth. b. For container grown stock, excavate as specified for balled and burlapped stock, and

excavate pits to a width at least twice as wide as the containers and at least as deep as the containers.

c. Dispose of unacceptable subsoil removed from landscaped excavations. Do not mix with planting soil or use as backfill.

d. Use prepared plant backfill mix for setting and filling all plants. e. Where rubble fill is encountered, notify Landscape Architect and prepare planting pits

properly by removal of rubble or other acceptable methods. When conditions encountered are severe and extensive (as determined by Architect) proceed with additional work at the direction of the Architect.

f. Drainage: If subsoil conditions indicate the retention of water in planting areas, as shown by seepage or other evidence indicating presence of underground water, notify the Landscape Architect before backfilling.





E. Fill excavations for trees and shrubs with water and allow to percolate out before planting.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Planting Trees and Shrubs: 1. Set balled and burlapped (B&B) stock on layer of compacted planting soil mixture, plumb,

and in center of pit or trench with top of ball at same elevation as adjacent finished landscape grades or as noted. Remove burlap from sides of balls; retain on bottoms. When set, place additional backfill around base and sides of ball, and work each layer to settle backfill and eliminate voids and air pockets. When backfilling is complete water well with root-feeder probe.

2. For container grown stock, remove plant from container, split root ball 50% up from bottom, spread roots over mounded backfill under roots as required to eliminate voids and prevent settling. Complete backfilling on top of pit.

3. Mound top of backfill in irrigated areas. Provide bowl for water retention in dryland areas. 4. Anti-desiccant: If deciduous trees or shrubs are moved in full-leaf, spray with anti-desiccant

at nursery before moving. 5. Remove and replace excessively pruned or misformed stock resulting from improper

pruning. 6. Wrap tree trunks of 1" caliper and larger. Start at ground and cover trunk to height of first

branches and securely attach with flexible tie. Do not use duct tape. Inspect tree trunks for injury, improper pruning, and insect infestation and take corrective measures before wrapping. Double wrap all maples.

B. Mechanical Spade Planting: Larger evergreen trees may be planted by means of mechanical

spade equipment with prior approval. Larger plantings being moved from permanent locations to new locations must be transplanted by this method. Use equipment that will dig, carry, and replant with the same unit. Equipment size must be adequate for size of plant and not less than 8" of spade diameter at 15" depth per caliper inch of trunk diameter.

C. Mulch: Provide not less than 6" thickness of mulch in all mulch pit and planting beds, unless rock

or other mulch is indicated on the drawings. Work into top of backfill in pits and finish level with adjacent finish grades.

D. Water: Contractor is responsible for ensuring that plant materials are watered.

3.03 CLEAN-UP AND PROTECTION

A. During landscape work, keep pavements clean and work area in an orderly condition. Any damage to other work done by landscape crew is to be reported and repaired immediately.

B. Protect landscape work and materials from damage due to landscape operations, operations by

other Contractors and trades and trespassers. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or replace damaged landscape work as directed.

3.04 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE

A. When landscape work is completed, Owner's Representative will, upon request, make an inspection to determine acceptability. 1. Landscape work may be inspected for acceptance in parts agreeable to Owner's

Representative, provided work offered for inspection is complete.





B. When inspected landscape work does not comply with requirements, replace rejected work and continue specified maintenance until re-inspected by the Owner's Representative and found to be acceptable. Remove rejected plants and materials promptly from project site.

END OF SECTION


DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS Florence Crittenton WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM OZ Architecture Project No. 113266.00 Section 33 11 00 - 1

SECTION 33 11 00

WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Pipe and fittings for site water distribution and transmission lines and stub connections for building service lines

B. Valves and appurtenances


A. 31 00 00 – Earthwork

1.3 REFERENCES

A. AWWA C104 - Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water.

B. AWWA C105 - Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile Iron Piping for Water and Other liquids.

C. AWWA C110 - Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings, 3-Inch through 48-Inch, for Water and Other Liquids

D. AWWA C111- Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron and Grey-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings.

E. AWWA C150 - Thickness Design of Ductile-Iron Pipe

F. AWWA C151 - Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast in Metal Molds or Sand-Lined Molds, for Water or Other Liquids.

G. AWWA C153 - Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings, 3-Inch through 12-Inch, for Water and Other Liquids

H. AWWA C500 - Gate Valves, 3 through 48 in NPS, for Water and Sewage Systems.

I. AWWA C509 - Resilient Seated Gate Valves 3 in through 12 in NPS, for Water and Sewage Systems.

J. AWWA C550 - Protective Epoxy Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants

K. AWWA C600 - Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Appurtenances.

L. AWWA C601 - Disinfecting Water Mains

M. NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects

N. AWWA C900 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, 4 inch through 12 inch, for water

O. ASTM D3139 - Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes using Flexible Elastomeric Seals.



P. Provide piping complete with all fittings, jointing materials, supports, anchors joint restraint system and necessary appurtenances for watertight, fully operational water lines.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, joint restraint system, valves and accessories. Provide manufacturer's catalog information with dimensions, material and assembled weight. Indicate pressure ratings for pipe, valves and hydrants.

C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that pipe products meet or exceed specified requirements.

D. Test Reports: Submit reports of field pressure tests and disinfection under provisions of Division One Specifications



B. Accurately record actual locations of piping mains, valves, connections, and top of pipe elevations.

C. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions or discovery of uncharted utilities.


A. Perform Work in accordance with City and County of Denver, Denver Water, and CDPHE Stormwater and/or Groundwater Discharge Permit.

B. Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on piping, valves and hydrants


A. Conform to all municipal codes and ordinances, laws and regulations of the City and County of Denver, Denver Water, and CDPHE Stormwater and/or Groundwater Discharge Permit.

B. In case of apparent conflict, Denver Water requirements govern over these specifications.

C. In absence of State and local regulations, Uniform Plumbing Code applies.

D. NFPA Compliance: Install fire water systems in accordance with NFPA 24 “Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances.”

E. UL Compliance: Provide fire hydrants that comply with UL 246 “Hydrants for Fire-Protection Service,” and are listed by UL.


A. Preparation for Transport: Prepare valves, including fire hydrants, for shipping as follows: Ensure that valves are dry and internally protected against rust and corrosion. Protect vales against



damage to threaded ends, flange faces, and weld ends. Set valves in best position for handling. Set valves closed to prevent rattling.

B. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Division One Specifications

C. Deliver and store valves and accessories in shipping containers with labeling in place in accordance with AWWA C500

D. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation.

E. Seal valve ends to prevent entry of foreign materials into valve body

F. During loading, transporting and unloading, exercise care to prevent damage to material 1. Use nylon slings only 2. Do not drop pipe or fittings 3. Do not roll or skid against pipe already on ground 4. Repair any damage done to coating or lining 5. Handle per manufacturer's recommendations 6. Store rubber gaskets in cool dark location 7. Store all material on wood pallets or timbers

G. Adequately tag or otherwise mark all piping and fittings as to size

H. Storage: Use the following precautions for valves, including fire hydrants, during storage: 1. Do not remove end protectors unless necessary for inspection; then reinstall for storage. 2. Protect valves from weather by storing indoors or support valves off ground or pavement in

watertight enclosures when outdoor storage is necessary

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 WATER PIPES, FITTINGS, AND ACCESSORIES

a. Comply with Denver Water Construction Standards and Specifications b. Fire Hydrant must comply with NFPA requirements for minimum distance to a building

2.2 CORROSION CONTROL

a. Comply with Denver Water Construction Standards and Specifications

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify existing conditions under provisions of Division One Specifications.

B. Verify locations and inverts or tops of pipe are as indicated.

C. Carefully examine pipe and fittings for cracks, damage to linings, and other defects prior to installation.

D. Remove all defective pipe from site and replace.



E. Examine areas for weak or structural defects or deviations beyond allowable tolerances for piping clearances that adversely affect excavation and quality of Work.

F. Start installation only when conditions are satisfactory.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Ream pipe and tube ends and remove burrs.

B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.

C. Prepare pipe connections to equipment with flanges or unions.

D. Cut ends of metallic pipe, recoat with coating approved for potable water service and compatible with manufacturer's coatings.

3.3 BEDDING

A. Comply with Denver Water Construction Standards and Specifications

B. Excavate pipe trench in accordance with Section 31 00 00 for work of this Section. Do not disturb trench bottom during excavation. Hand trim excavation for accurate placement of pipe to elevations indicated.

C. Place bedding material at trench bottom, level fill materials in one continuous layer not exceeding 6 inches compacted depth, compact to 95 percent.

D. Backfill in accordance with Section 31 00 00

3.4 INSTALLATION - PIPE


B. Install as specified or in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and Denver Water standards.

C. Cutting Pipe 1. Cut pipe to measurement taken at the site, not from the drawings 2. Cut pipe neatly without damage to pipe or cement lining 3. Cut smooth, straight, and at right angles to pipe axis 4. Dress and bevel end of cut pipe to remove roughness and sharp corners 5. Cut pipe with saw or abrasive wheel

D. Provide an isolation or shutoff valve and union at the water connections to each fixture and unit of equipment, whether shown on the drawings or not

E. Maintain separation of water main from storm or sewer lines in accordance with the Colorado Department of Health; minimum 10 feet horizontal, 18 inch vertical.

F. Group piping with other site piping work whenever practical.



G. Install pipe to indicated elevations. Maintain minimum 4.5 feet depth of bury and maintain minimum grade for drainage and also allow for all air to be released at high points. Add additional soil in areas of future fill to provide minimal cover at all times.

H. Install ductile iron fittings to AWWA C600.

I. Route pipe as indicated on plan and profile drawings.

J. Install pipe to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe or joints.

K. Install access fittings to permit disinfection of water system, subject to approval by Engineer.

L. Slope water pipe and position drain at low points.

M. Protect from lateral displacement by placing embedment evenly on both sides of pipe

N. Do not lay pipe in water. Maintain groundwater level a minimum of 12 inches below pipe to be installed. Do not lay pipe under unsuitable weather or trench conditions.

O. Lay pipe with bell ends facing the direction of laying except when Engineer authorizes reverse laying.

P. Form and place concrete for thrust blocks at each elbow or change of direction of pipe main.

Q. Establish elevations of buried piping to ensure minimum cover is achieved. Report any variations from plan to Owner and Engineer .

R. Backfill trench in accordance with Section 31 00 00.

S. Install tracer wire continuous over top of pipe per Denver Water requirements.

T. Install tracer wire test stations at all fire hydrants and every 400 LF of water line per Denver Water requirements.

U. Install identification /warning marker tape in fill area of trench above all water lines.

V. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system.

3.5 INSTALLATION - VALVES AND HYDRANTS


B. Install valves, hydrants, and accessories in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and in accordance with referenced standards and specifications.

C. Set valves on solid bearing.

D. Center and plumb valve box over valve. Set box cover flush with finished grade. Evenly fill around box and thoroughly compact on all sides.

E. Extend stem to within 6 inches of final grade. Provide spacers to center stem in valve box.



3.6 JOINTS


B. Make pipe joints carefully and neatly

C. Connect piping in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations

D. Push-on joints 1. Lubricate joint surfaces immediately before completing the joint 2. Bevel spigot ends of field cut piping 3. Groove spigot ends of field cut restrained joint piping if required by joint system

E. Mechanical Joints 1. Thoroughly lubricate gaskets and install in accordance with manufacturers instructions. 2. If an effective seal is not obtained, disassemble joint, clean thoroughly, and reassemble 3. Do not over tighten bolts to compensate for poor installation 4. Carefully align holes in mechanical joints with restraint device to permit installation of the

harness bolts 5. Install flange and mechanical joint pieces so the mechanical jointholes, as well as the flange

holes, straddle the top centerline for horizontal piping, or the side centerline for vertical piping

3.7 CONCRETE ENCASEMENT

A. Provide where indicated on the Drawings

B. Comply with Denver Water Construction Standards and Specifications

C. Suitably support and block pipe and anchor against flotation

3.8 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM

A. Flush and disinfect system in accordance with AWWA C601 and the and referenced standards.

3.9 VALVE INSTALLATION:


B. Carefully inspect valve before installation. Clean interior. Operate valve to determine parts in proper working order, with valves seating and drain valve operating properly. Set plumb and center stem in valve box and securely brace into place. Comply with AWWA C600 and referenced standards.

3.10 FIRE HYDRANTS:


B. Comply with AWWA M17 for installation. Install with gate valve and provisions for drainage.

3.11 WATER LINE AND SANITARY OR STORM SEWER CROSSINGS:




B. Whenever possible, lay water mains over sanitary and storm sewers to provide vertical separation of at least 18-inch between invert of water main and crown of sewer.

C. If above separation cannot be met, provide: One continuous length of watertight sewer pipe 20' long centered on water main with joints between different pipes encased in 6-inch minimum of concrete and extending 6-inch either side of joint or encase sewer pipe in 6-inch of concrete completely around pipe, for not less than 10' either side of water main.

D. Water Mains Passing Under Sewers: If vertical separation is less than 18-inch, provide structural support for sewer.

3.12 PROTECTIVE COATING

A. Provide polyethylene tube encasement on all buried DIP pipe, fittings, valves and fire hydrant extensions 1. Comply with AWWA C105 and referenced standards

B. Metal Surfaces not Protected by Tape Wrap 1. Coat all steel clamp rods, bolts, and other metal accessories used in tapping saddles,

anchorages, cut ends of pipe, follower rings and bolts or joint harnesses subject to submergence or contract with the earth and not concrete encased, but including pipe fittings and bolts in polyethylene tube protection

2. Apply 2 coats of coal tar paint to clean, dry metal surfaces, allow first coat to dry before applying second coat

C. Metal Harness Rods 1. Provide field applied primer and Polyken tape wrap.

3.13 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Establish invert elevations and slopes as shown on the drawings.

B. Respect pipe manufacturer’s tolerances of horizontal and vertical deflection.


A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions set forth by the referenced standards. 1. In accordance with AWWA C651, flush water lines prior to disinfection, except when tablet

method is used. Acceptable chlorine disinfectants are calcium hypochlorite granules, sodium hypochlorite solutions, and calcium hypochlorite solutions, and calcium hypochlorite tablets.

2. For fire lines, flush piping complying with NFPA 24. 3. If water in pipe does not meet the governing agency requirements, repeat disinfection

procedure until acceptable. Furnish copies of acceptance forms from governing agency to Owner and Engineer.

B. Test each line at the Contractor's expense in the presence and to the satisfaction of Denver Water inspectors.

C. Provide all necessary pumping equipment, piping connections, pressure gauges with maximum of 5 psi increments, and other required equipment, facilities, and materials



D. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and retest at no cost to Owner.

E. Hydrostatic Test Conditions: At lowest point in the line or section under test

Service Test Pressure Test Medium Pipe System

All Mains 150 psi Water Water transmission

F. Procedure 1. Follow procedure in and referenced standards and specifications.

3.15 CLEANING AND DRAINING


B. The inside of all pipe, valves, and fittings shall be smooth, clean, and free from blisters, loose mill scale, sand, and dirt when connected

C. Wire brush, if necessary, wipe clean and keep joint contact surfaces clean until connection is complete

END OF SECTION


DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS Florence Crittenton SANITARY SEWERAGE UTILITIES OZ Architecture Project No. 113266.00 Section 33 30 00 - 1

SECTION 33 30 00

SANITARY SEWERS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) non-pressure pipe for sanitary sewer with all jointing materials, fittings, and other appurtenances required for a complete installation


A. Section 03 00 00 – Concrete

B. Section 31 00 00 – Earthwork

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM D1784 - Rigid Polyvinyl Chloride Compounds

B. ASTM D3034 - PVC Gravity Sewer Pipe, Type PSM

C. ASTM D2321 - Practice for Underground Installation of Flexible Thermoplastic Sewer Pipe

D. ASTM D3212 - Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals

E. ASTM F477 - Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe

F. ASTM C150 - Portland Cement

G. ASTM C478 – Precast Concrete Structures

H. ASTM C497 - Testing Concrete Pipe, Manhole Sections, or Tile

I. ASTM A48 - Gray Iron Castings

J. ASTM A185 - Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement

K. ASTM A615 - Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement

L. ASTM C33 - Concrete Aggregates

M. ASTM C478 - Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Provide piping layout and assembly drawings with fitting dimensions. Provide sufficient information to verify compliance with specifications



C. Product Data: Provide data on pipe and gasket materials, pipe fittings, and accessories. Provide manufacturer's catalog information with recommended installation requirements

D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements and applicable standards

E. Test Reports: Submit reports of field exfiltration/infiltration, mandrel and lamp tests under provisions of Division One Specifications


A. Perform Work in accordance with City and County of Denver and CDPHE Stormwater and/or Groundwater Discharge Permit, notes on the drawings and as specified herein.


A. Conform to all municipal codes and ordinances, laws and regulations of the State of Colorado, City and County of Denver and CDPHE Stormwater and/or Groundwater Discharge Permit.



B. Accurately record actual locations of pipe, pipe fittings, and invert elevations

C. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions or discovery of uncharted utilities


A. Delivery 1. Deliver, store, protect and handle under provisions of Division One Specifications 2. Ship rubber gaskets in cartons and store in a clean area away from grease, oil, ozone

producing electric motors, heat and the direct rays of the sun

B. Storage 1. Store pipe, fittings and gaskets in clean locations protected from environmental conditions

such as: (direct sunlight, heat, mud.. etc) 2. Do not use pipe and fittings stored in direct sunlight for periods in excess of 18 months 3. Store pipe on a flat surface which provides even support for the barrel with bell ends

overhanging

C. Handling 1. Handle so as to insure installation in sound, undamaged condition. Do not damage the pipe

by impact, bending, compression or abrasion during handling or storage 2. Use equipment, tool, and methods for unloading, reloading, hauling, and laying that do not

damage pipe a. Use hooks/hands with broad, well-padded contact surfaces for insertion into pipe ends or

nylon protected slings to handle pipe



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE MATERIALS

A. Refer to City and County of Denver Construction Standards

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Plugs and Caps: Use pipe plugs or caps provided by the pipe manufacturer and approved by the Engineer for pipe stubouts.

B. Cleanouts: Provide as indicated, pipe extension to grade with ferrule and countersink cleanout plug. Provide round cast-iron access frame over cleanout, with heavy duty secured scoriated cover with lifting device cast with the word “SANITARY”.

C. Reinforcement 1. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615 Grade 60 2. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A185

D. Concrete: Refer to Division Three Specifications if applicable 1. Minimum compressive strength: 4000 psi at 28 days 2. Cement: ASTM C150, Portland Cement, Type II 3. Aggregates: ASTM C33, free of deleterious substances

E. Gaskets: ASTM C923 1. Mastic: FS SS-S-210A, "RAM-NEK" or approved substitution 2. Rubber: Neoprene, 40+ 5 hardness when measured by ASTM D2240, Type A durometer

F. Frames and Castings: ASTM A48 with asphalt varnish coating hot dip applied at foundry, 6 mils thick Class 30b

G. Manhole Rings and Covers 1. Refer to City and County of Denver Construction Standards

H. Manhole Height Adjustment: Use precast concrete grade rings

I. Rock Subbase: 1-1/2 inch minus, well-graded gravel over compacted subgrade

J. Water: Clean and free of deleterious substances

K. Grout: Provide under provisions of Division Three specifications

2.3 MANHOLES


2.4 FABRICATION


2.5 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Follow requirements specified in Division Three sections.



2.6 SOIL MATERIALS

A. Furnish pipe bedding and cover as specified in Section 2300, Earthwork.

2.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Underground Type Plastic Line Marker: Manufacturer’s standard permanent, continuous-printed plastic tape with metallic core, intended for direct-burial service; not less than 6-inch wide x 4 mils thick. Provide green tape with black printing reading “CAUTION SANITARY SEWAGE LINE BURIED BELOW.” Provide identification markers of one of the following: 1. Allen Systems, Inc. 2. Emed Co., Inc. 3. Seton Name Plate Corp.

2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Identification Marks: Clearly and permanently marked at not greater than 5 foot intervals with pipe diameter, PVC cell classification, manufacturer, plant, shift, ASTM, date designations and service designation

B. Testing per ASTM D3034 1. Test products not manufactured in the U.S. at an acceptable laboratory in the U.S.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine pipe and fittings and do not use individual sections containing cracks, dents, abrasions, and other defects

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install pipe in accordance with ASTM D2321 as modified herein or on the drawings

B. Perform all laying and jointing in the presence of City and County of Denver and other consultants as specified by quality control specifications.

C. Cutting 1. Cut and bevel ends in accordance with manufacturer's standard recommendations 2. Machine cut ends smooth and square to proper dimensions 3. Do not cut with a cold chisel, iron pipe cutter, flame or any other method that may fracture the

pipe or leave ragged, uneven edges 4. Remove burrs and wipe off all dust and dirt from jointing surfaces

D. Pipe Laying 1. Inspect pipe and accessories for cracks and other defects before lowering into trench 2. Repair or replace any defective, damaged or unsound pipe 3. Remove all dirt and foreign material from the inside of pipe before laying 4. Check bedding for firmness and uniformity of surface immediately before laying each section

of pipe 5. Carefully lower pipe, fittings, valves, and accessories into the trench with derricks, ropes, and

other suitable equipment to prevent damage 6. Do not dump or drop pipe or accessories into trench 7. Lay to lines and grades indicated on drawings or as specified



a. Lay piping beginning at a low point of system, true to line and grade with unbroken continuity of invert.

b. Closely joint to form a smooth flow line c. Place bell end or groove ends of piping facing upstream d. Maximum length of pipe that can be used without exceeding the allowable deflection at a

coupling shall be determined e. Maximum deflection at flexible couplings as recommended by the manufacturer f. Maximum deflection at a joint: As recommended by the manufacturer, but not more than

3-1/2 inches 8. Utilize implements, tools, and facilities as recommended by the manufacturer 9. Keep pipe clean during and after laying 10. Close all open ends with watertight expandable type sewer plugs or test plugs 11. Remove and relay any pipe which has floated 12. Do not lay pipe when

a. There is water in the trench b. Trench conditions are unsuitable c. Weather conditions are unsuitable

13. Use acceptable adaptors at manhole and structure connections to provide a watertight seal and flexibility; provide a short length of pipe outside each connection

14. Protect from lateral displacement by placing and compacting bedding material under provisions of Section 31 00 00

E. Jointing 1. Assemble in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions 2. Wipe clean pipe ends, gasket and gasket groove before inserting gasket 3. Apply lubricant furnished by the pipe manufacturer to the gasket and the outside of the spigot

end 4. Utilize an assembly tool as recommended by the manufacturer to center the sleeve over the

spigot end 5. Insert the spigot end to the reference mark 6. Check gasket location after assembly with a suitable gage

a. Gasket locations to be the distance from the sleeve and recommended by the coupling manufacturer for their full circumference

b. If not within the required limits, disassemble and reassemble the joint 7. Completely encase all transition joints between VCP and PVC sanitary lines with minimum 6-

inch thick concrete extending one foot either side of joints

F. Fittings 1. Install utilizing standard methods 2. Lower into trench with rope or other means to prevent damage 3. Attach rope around the exterior 4. Do not attach rope through the interior 5. Carefully connect to pipe or other facility 6. Check joint to insure a sound and proper joint

G. Sanitary Sewer Service Lines 1. Place true to line and grade in accordance with the drawings, from mainline stub out to

building service, in shortest direct route 2. Locate 10 feet from all water lines. 3. Terminate 5 feet from building line or as shown on the drawings

H. Backfill 1. Pipe Cover:

a. Use specified bedding material for pipe cover material. Use cover material that is clean, free from organic materials, chucks of soil, frozen material or other unsuitable materials.



b. Place and compact cover material starting at top of pipe bedding extending upwards. Place in lifts which achieve density of 95%, ASTM D698 at a point 6-inch above top of pipe.

2. Conform to requirements of Section 31 00 00

I. Compaction 1. Compact backfill following requirements of Section 31 00 00

J. Water Line and Sanitary Sewer Crossings 1. Whenever possible lay water mains over sanitary sewers to provide vertical separation of at

least 18-inches between invert of water main and crown of sewer. 2. If above separation cannot be met, provide one continuous length of watertight sewer pipe 20

feet long centered on water main with joints between different pipes encased in 6-inch minimum of concrete and extending 6-inches either side of joint or encase sewer pipe in 6-inches of concrete completely around pipe, for not less than 10 feet either side of water main.

3. Water Mains Passing Under Sewers: If vertical separation less than 18-inches provide structural support for sewer

3.3 PRECAST STRUCTURE PREPARATION

A. Verify items provided by other section of Work are properly sized and located

B. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, ready for roughing into Work

C. Verify excavation for manholes is correct

D. Excavation and Backfill: Refer to Section 31 00 00 for requirements

E. Rock Subbase: Remove water, excavate, and place 1 1/2 inch rock 6 inch minimum depth, vibrate for compaction

3.4 PLACING MANHOLE

A. Place base pad, trowel top surface level to accept manhole section with uniform bearing all around

B. Place sufficient non-shrink grout on base to ensure watertight fit between first manhole section and base or place first manhole section directly in wet concrete

C. Place manhole sections plumb and level, trim to correct elevations

D. Clean ends of sections and place double mastic gasket

E. Fill inside and outside of joint completely with non-shrink grout and trowel smooth

F. Cure non-shrink grout using approved methods outlined in Division Three specifications.

G. Set cover rings and covers level without tipping, to correct elevations or set cover rings and covers with slight tip to match cross slope of finished surface where directed by Engineer

H. Completed manholes shall be rigid and watertight

I. Coordinate with other sections of work to provide correct size, shape, and location



3.5 PREFORMED GASKETS

A. Remove and replace manhole sections which have chipped or cracked joints

B. Thoroughly clean section joints

C. Install gasket in conformance with manufacturer's recommendations

D. Only use primer furnished by gasket manufacturer

3.6 MANHOLE INVERT

A. Place concrete in bottom of manhole and form smooth transition. Trowel smooth and brush for non-skid finish. Slope bench 1 inch per foot for drainage to invert.

B. Invert shape to conform to radius of pipe it connects

C. Remove all rough sections or sharp edges which tend to obstruct flow or cause material to snag. Remove all grout droplets from invert

D. Construct in conformance with standard drawings

3.7 MANHOLE RINGS AND COVERS

A. Place rings in bed of non-shrink grout on top of manholes

B. Ensure no infiltration will enter manhole at this location

C. Carry non-shrink grout over flange of ring

D. Set top of ring flush with all surfaces subject to foot and vehicular traffic or as required by City and County of Denver

E. Set top of ring 6 inches above surfaces in open, unraveled, non-pedestrian areas

F. Use precast grade rings for height adjustment

3.8 CONNECTION TO EXISTING MANHOLES

A. Maintain flow at all times

B. Prior approval of proposed method for maintaining flow must be obtained from Engineer

C. Cover area around new pipe with non-shrink grout and or waterstop gasket to ensure a watertight structure

D. Make connection during low flow periods


A. Exfiltration/Infiltration Test 1. Perform an exfiltration test on each reach of sanitary service and sewer pipe between

manholes or discharge a. Test the first reach prior to backfilling and before installing any of the remaining pipe



b. Provide all necessary piping between the reach to be tested and the water supply, together with all required materials and equipment

c. Methods used, scheduling, and duration of tests shall be acceptable to Engineer d. Air testing may be allowed: Submit complete information to Engineer for review

describing the proposed test method including the method of testing manholes before beginning testing

2. Procedure a. Block off all manhole openings except those connecting with the reach under test b. Fill the line

i) Average depth: 10 feet above invert except as required by manhole depth ii) Maximum depth at lower end: 25 feet above crown iii) Minimum depth at upper end: 5 feet above crown

c. Add and measure water as required to maintain a constant level i) Maximum exfiltration/infiltration: 0.039 gallons per inch of nominal diameter per hour

per 100 feet of pipe. ii) Manholes considered section of 48-inch pipe iii) Maintain test for at least 2 hours or as long as necessary, in the inspector’s opinion,

to locate all leaks 3. Repair and retest any reach which exceeds the allowable exfiltration/infiltration

B. Infiltration 1. At any time prior to expiration of the correction period, infiltration exceeds 0.039 gallons per

inch of nominal diameter per 100 feet per hour, locate the leaks and make repairs

C. Pipe Deflection Test 1. No sooner than 30 days after placement and compaction of backfill, but prior to placement of

permanent surface materials, clean and mandrel each line to detect obstructions (deflections, joint offsets, lateral pipe intrusions, etc.)

2. Use a rigid mandrel with diameter of at least 95 percent of the pipes specified average inside diameter and a length of the mandrel circular portion at least equal to the nominal pipe diameter

3. Maximum allowable deflection is 5 percent of the base internal diameter. Mandrel outside diameters in inches are as follows:

Pipe Size Base I.D. Mandrel O.D.

6 5.792 5.50 8 7.764 7.38 10 9.711 9.23 12 11.558 10.98

4. Pull the mandrel through the pipe by hand 5. Relay or replace all pipe exceeding the 5 percent deflection at no additional cost to the

Owner 6. Retest repaired sections 7. Maximum allowable deflection at end of one year correction period, 7-1/2 percent of the base

internal diameter tested in the same manner. Uncover and repair sections exceeding the allowable deflection

D. TV Inspection will be provided as requested by City and County of Denver and approved by the Engineer at the expense of the Contractor.



3.10 CLEANUP AND RESTORATION

A. Restore pavements, curbs and gutters, utilities, and other improvements to condition equal to or better than before work began and to satisfaction of Engineer.

B. Deposit waste material in designated waste areas and disposal site graded and shaped.

END OF SECTION


DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS Florence Crittenton STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES OZ Architecture Project No. 113266.00 Section 33 40 00 - 1

SECTION 33 40 00

STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Piping and concrete structures for storm sewer system, roof drainage, and culverts

B. Riprap for channel lining, outlet protection and rock check dams


A. Section 03 42 00 – Precast Concrete Structures

B. Section 31 00 00 – Earthwork

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ACPA - American Concrete Pipe Association

B. ASTM C76 - Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe

C. ASTM C150 - Portland Cement

D. ASTM C443 - Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe, Using Rubber Gaskets

E. ASTM C478 – Precast Concrete Structures

F. ASTM C497 - Testing Concrete Pipe, Manhole Sections, or Tile

G. ASTM A48 - Gray Iron Castings

H. ASTM A185 - Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement

I. ASTM A615 - Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement

J. ASTM C33 - Concrete Aggregates

K. ASTM C478 - Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections

L. Urban Storm Drainage Criteria Manual, Urban Drainage and Flood Control District (UDFCD)

M. Colorado Department of Transportation (CDOT) Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction

1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with applicable requirements of ASTM C76



B. Comply with City and County of Denver, Urban Storm Drainage Criteria Manual, Urban Drainage and Flood Control District (UDFCD), and CDPHE Stormwater and/or Groundwater Discharge Permit and related storm design criteria. If standards conflict, the more stringent criteria shall govern.

1.05 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Provide drawings with pipe and structure details, design standards, reinforcement, dimensions, etc. Provide additional detailed information (including elevations, fittings, specialty materials or fabrications, etc.) for special or custom features, structures, junctions and/or pipes. Provide pipe-laying schedule.

C. Product Data: Provide sufficient data on features, pipe, joints, gasket material, lubricant and accessories to verify compliance with specifications.

D. Manufacturers Certificate: Certify that pipe, meets or exceeds specified requirements. Confirm all materials comply with applicable standards.

E. Test Reports: Submit all shop and field test reports in accordance with Division One Specifications Product Data:

F. Provide sufficient data to verify compliance with these specifications.


A. Delivery 1. Ship rubber gaskets in cartons and store in a clean area away from grease, oil, ozone

producing electric motors, heat and the direct rays of the sun

B. Storage 1. Store pipe, fittings and gaskets in clean locations protected from environmental conditions

such as: (direct sunlight, mud.. etc) 2. Do not use pipe and fittings stored in direct sunlight for periods in excess of 18 months 3. Store pipe on a flat surface which provides even support for the barrel with bell ends

overhanging a. Do not stack pipe higher than 5 feet

C. Handling 1. Handle so as to insure installation in sound undamaged condition. 2. Use equipment, tools and methods for unloading, reloading, hauling and laying that do not

damage pipe or cause an impact. Damaged pipe will be cause for rejection 3. Use hooks or straps with broad, well padded contact surfaces for lifting sections of pipe


A. Weather limitations: Do not install piping over frozen surfaces or in standing water.



PART 2 - GENERAL PRODUCTS

2.01 PIPE MATERIALS

A. Comply with City and County of Denver standards and specifications for public storm sewer products.

B. General: Provide pipes of one of the following materials, of weight/class indicated. Provide pipe fittings and accessories of same material and weight/class as pipes, with joining method as indicated

C. Fittings: Furnish bends, ells, tees, wyes, couplings and other fittings of the same type and class of material having equal or superior physical and chemical properties as acceptable to the Engineer

D. Reinforced Concrete Pipe: ASTM C76, 1. 18-inch thru 24-inch RCP Class III (Class IV or V when specified on plans), with modified

tongue-and-groove compression gasket joints complying with ASTM C443. 2. 24-inch thru 36-inch RCP Class II (Class III, IV or V when specified on plans), with modified

tongue-and-groove compression gasket joints complying with ASTM C443.

E. PVC Sewer Pipe: ASTM D3034, Type PSM, SDR 35 with PVC, elastomeric joints complying with ASTM D3212 using elastomeric seals complying with ASTM F477. 1. N-12 drainage pipe as manufactured by Advanced Drainage Systems, Inc. (ADS) or approved

alternate

2.02 MATERIALS


B. Plugs and Caps: Use pipe plugs or caps provided by the pipe manufacturer and approved by the Engineer for pipe stubouts.

C. Cleanouts: Provide as indicated, pipe extension to grade with ferrule and countersink cleanout plug. Provide round cast-iron access frame over cleanout, with heavy duty secured scoriated cover with lifting device cast with the word “STORM”.

D. Reinforcement 1. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615 Grade 60 2. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A185

E. Concrete: Refer to Division Three Specifications 1. Minimum compressive strength: 4000 psi at 28 days 2. Cement: ASTM C150, Portland Cement, Type II 3. Aggregates: ASTM C33, free of deleterious substances

F. Gaskets: ASTM C923 1. Mastic: FS SS-S-210A, "RAM-NEK" or accepted substitution 2. Rubber: Neoprene, 40+ 5 hardness when measured by ASTM D2240, Type A durometer

G. Inlet Gratings and Manhole Rings and Covers 1. Cast iron, heavy duty traffic type, ASTM A48, Class 35B. Grind bearing surfaces to ensure flat,

true surfaces 2. Provide bike/pedestrian-safe grates where such traffic is anticipated



3. Set grate on frame such that openings maximize inlet intake 4. Covers to seat at all points on ring 5. Covers to be cast with "STORM" in 2" tall flush letters 6. Manhole covers to receive asphalt varnish coating hot dip applied at foundry, 6 mils thick

H. Manhole Height Adjustment: Use precast concrete grade rings

I. Rock Subbase: 1-1/2 inch minus, well-graded gravel over compacted subgrade

J. Water: Clean and free of deleterious substances

K. Grout: 1. Non-Shrink, Non-Metallic Grout: Factory premixed compound consisting of non-metallic

aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents, capable of developing minimum compressive strength of 4000 psi in one day and 8000 psi in 7 days

2. Epoxy Grout: Three Component Epoxy Resin System i. Two liquid epoxy components ii. One inert aggregate filtered component iii. Each component furnished in separate package for mixing at job site

2.03 CONCRETE CATCH BASINS AND MANHOLES


B. Precast Concrete Units: 1. Manufacturers: Carder Concrete Products, Amcor Precast, or accepted equal 2. Specification: ASTM C478 and C789, wall “B 3. Minimum wall thickness: greater of 6 inch 1/12 of internal diameter 4. Reinforced 5. Grade rings as required 6. Cast steps into units.

C. Precast Units or Cast-in-place as shown. Use concrete that will attain a 28-day compressive strength of not less than 4,000 psi with a cement content of not less than 6 sacks per cu. yd. Openings to be precast per plan or sawcut in field.

D. Cast-in-place Concrete Units: As shown on the drawings complying with the City and County of Denver and Colorado Department of Transportation drainage and design standards.

2.04 PVC PLASTIC INLINE DRAINS AND DRAIN BASINS

A. Manufacturer: Nyloplast America Inc. or accepted substitution.

B. Inline drains and drain basins shall be manufactured from PVC pipe stock, utilizing a thermo molding process to reform the pipe stock to the furnished configuration. The drainage pipe connection stubs shall be manufactured from PVC pipe stock and formed to provide a watertight connection with the specified pipe system. The joint tightness shall conform to ASTM D3212.

C. Surface drainage products shall meet the mechanical property requirements for fabricated fittings as described in ASTM F794, F949 and F1336.

D. Inline drain and drain basin adapters and accessories 1. Adaptable to SDR-35 PVC piping. 2. Watertight adaptors.



E. Cast iron or ductile iron frames and grates: 1. Light –traffic rated 2. Pedestrian rated 3. Hinged and locking 4. Made specifically for use with the specified inline drains and drain basins 5. Painted black 6. ASTM A-48-83 Class 30B or A536 grade 70-50-05 grade iron 7. Size indicated on the drawings

2.05 CONCRETE FABRICATION


B. Vault/Manhole Sections 1. Precast concrete dimensions as shown on plans 2. Minimum manhole inside diameter: 48 inch 3. Precast lid and Cones: Same or greater reinforcement and wall thickness as vault or manhole

section with capability for H20 loading 4. Vault Joints: Shiplap or tongue and groove with double mastic gaskets, each joint to set equally

and tightly 5. Manhole Joints: Keylock type with double mastic gaskets, each joint to set equally and tightly 6. Access opening: Minimum 24 clear or as indicated 7. Pipe connection: As indicated on Drawings 8. Pipe knockout: As indicated on Drawings 9. Precast concrete, monolithic base or cast-in-place base 10. Manhole steps: 12 inch on center, vertical alignment above largest bench or open area

C. Grating and Metal Frame: As specified on drawings

2.06 SOIL MATERIALS


B. Furnish pipe bedding and cover as specified in Section 2300 – Earthwork.

C. Riprap Materials: 1. Hard, dense, durable stone, angular in shape and resistant to weathering 2. Minimum specific gravity of 2.5 3. Material may be approved by Engineer, if by visual inspection, the rock is determined to be

sound and durable 4. Engineer may require Contractor to furnish laboratory test results if the material appears to be

marginal or unacceptable 5. Tested material shall meet the following requirements for abrasion resistance or compressive

strength:

Test Test Method Requirement

Abrasion Resistance by Los Angeles Machine

ASTM C 535 50% loss, max

Unconfined Compressive Strength of Drilled Core Specimen

AASHTO T 24 2500, min



6. Contractor shall provide a five ton sample of riprap indicating the compliance to required material soundness and gradation specifications if requested by the Engineer.

7. Gradation:

Riprap Designation

% Smaller Than Given Size By Weight

Intermediate Rock Dimension (Inches)

Mean Particle Size,d50 (Inches)

Type L 70-100 50-70 35-50 2-10

15 12 9 3

9

Type M 70-100 50-70 35-50 2-10

21 18 12 4

12

Type H 70-100 50-70 35-50 2-10

30 24 18 18 6

18

8. Granular Riprap Bedding:

a. 3/4” – 1” Crushed rock – AASHTO 57/67

Sieve Size (Inch) Percent Passing by Weight

1 100

3/4” 90-100

1/2” 25-60

3/8” 20-55

NO. 4 0-10

NO. 8 0-5

NO. 200 0-2

D. Pipe Bedding: 1. Refer to Section 31 00 00 – Earthwork 2. Minimum 6 inch deep, unless specified otherwise

E. Drainage Fabric: Nonwoven geotextile, specifically manufactured as a drainage geotextile; made from polyolefins, polyesters, or polyamides; and with the following minimum properties determined according to ASTM D 4759 and referenced standard test methods: 1. Grab Tensile Strength: 110 lbf (490 N); ASTM D 4632. 2. Tear Strength: 40 lbf (178 N); ASTM D 4533. 3. Puncture Resistance: 50 lbf (222 N); ASTM D 4833. 4. Water Flow Rate: 150 gpm per sq. ft. (100 L/s per sq. m); ASTM D 4491. 5. Apparent Opening Size: No. 50 (0.3 mm); ASTM D 4751.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Comply with City and County of Denver standards and specifications for public storm sewer installation.



3.02 PIPE PREPARATION

A. Shape trench and place bedding as specified in Section 31 00 00 and as shown on the drawings. 1. Dig bell or coupling holes 2. Do not support pipe on blocks or mounds of earth. 3. Provide uniform and continuous bearing and support for full length of pipe between bell holes 4. Minor disturbance over a maximum length of 18 inches near the middle of each length of pipe

will be permissible by the withdrawal of pipe slings or other lifting tackle

B. Alignment and Grade 1. Except as indicated on the Drawings, lay all pipe straight and at a uniform grade. 2. Use batter boards to determine and check pipe subgrades. 3. Other methods of maintaining alignment and grade may be acceptable if approved by the

Engineer.

3.03 PIPE INSTALLATION

A. Inspect pipe and accessories for defects before lowering into trench.

B. Replace any defective, damaged or unsound pipe.

C. Carefully lower pipe, fittings, and accessories into the trench with derricks, ropes, and other suitable equipment to prevent damage. Do not dump or drop pipe or accessories into trench.

D. Pipe embedment shall be as specified in Section 31 00 00 for pipe.

E. Protect from lateral displacement by placing the specified pipe embedment material.

F. Do not lay pipe in water, under unsuitable weather conditions or under unsuitable trench conditions

G. Joint to form true and smooth line.

H. Remove any pipe not making a good fit.

I. Begin pipe laying at the lowest point unless reverse laying is accepted by Engineer.

J. Utilize implements, tools and facilities as recommended by the manufacturer and/or catch basins if required to remove debris.

K. Keep pipe clean during and after laying.

L. During construction, close all open ends with watertight expandable type plugs. 1. At the end of each day's operations. 2. Whenever pipe ends are left unattended. 3. Deposit adequate backfill on pipe to prevent flotation. 4. Do not use wood, burlap or other similar temporary plugs.

M. Remove and re-lay any pipe which has floated.

3.04 PRECAST STRUCTURE PREPARATION

A. Verify items provided by other section of Work are properly sized and located



B. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, ready for roughing into Work

C. Verify excavation for manholes is correct

D. Excavation and Backfill: Refer to Section 31 00 00 - Earthwork for requirements

E. Coordinate placement of inlet and outlet pipe or duct sleeves required by other sections

F. Rock Subbase: Remove water, excavate, and place 1 1/2 inch rock 6 inch minimum depth, vibrate for compaction

3.05 CATCH BASINS

A. Construct catch basins to the sizes and shapes indicated, and to conform to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. For precast units, set in place to accurate elevations on firm, solid bed, plumb and level. 2. Pipe openings, elevations and alignment per plans 3. Seal and grout all pipe penetrations 4. Set cast iron frames and gratings to the elevations indicated.

3.06 PLACING MANHOLE SECTION OR CAST-IN PLACE BASE

A. Place base pad, trowel top surface level to accept manhole section with uniform bearing all around

B. Place sufficient non-shrink grout on base to ensure watertight fit between first manhole section and base or place first manhole section directly in wet concrete

C. Place manhole sections plumb and level, trim to correct elevations

D. Clean ends of sections and place double mastic gasket

E. Fill inside and outside of joint completely with non-shrink grout and trowel smooth

F. Cure non-shrink grout using approved methods

G. Set cover rings and covers level without tipping, to correct elevations or set cover rings and covers with slight tip to match cross slope of finished surface where directed by Engineer

H. Completed manholes shall be rigid and watertight

I. Coordinate with other sections of work to provide correct size, shape, and location

3.07 PREFORMED GASKETS

A. Remove and replace manhole sections which have chipped or cracked joints

B. Thoroughly clean section joints

C. Install gasket in conformance with manufacturer's recommendations

D. Only use primer furnished by gasket manufacturer



3.08 MANHOLE INVERT

A. Place concrete in bottom of manhole and form smooth transition. Trowel smooth and brush for non-skid finish. Slope bench 1 inch per foot for drainage to invert.

B. Invert shape to conform to radius of pipe it connects

C. Remove all rough sections or sharp edges which tend to obstruct flow or cause material to snag. Remove all grout droplets from invert

D. Construct in conformance with standard drawings

3.09 MANHOLE RINGS AND COVERS

A. Place rings in bed of non-shrink grout on top of manholes

B. Ensure no infiltration will enter manhole at this location

C. Carry non-shrink grout over flange of ring

D. Set top of ring flush with all surfaces subject to foot and vehicular traffic

E. Set top of ring 6 inches above surfaces in open, unraveled, non-pedestrian areas

F. Use precast grade rings for height adjustment

3.10 CONNECTION TO EXISTING MANHOLES

A. Maintain flow at all times

B. Prior approval of proposed method for maintaining flow must be obtained from Engineer

C. Cover area around new pipe with non-shrink grout and or waterstop gasket to ensure a watertight structure

D. Make connection during low flow periods

3.11 GROUT

A. PREPARATION 1. Non-Shrink, Non-Metallic Grout, General Use

a. Clean concrete surface to receive grout b. Saturate concrete with water for 24 hrs prior to grouting and remove excess water just

prior to placing grout c. Cold weather conditions

i. Warm concrete, substrate and base plate to 40 deg F, or above; store grout in warm area ii. Follow manufacturer's recommendations for cold weather application

d. Hot weather conditions i. Use cold mixing water and cool base plate if possible; store grout in cool area ii. Follow manufacturer's recommendations for hot weather application

e. Apply to clean, sound surface f. Apply latex bonding agent to hardened concrete, mix-in-grout, or as directed by Engineer

2. Epoxy Grout: Apply only to clean, dry, sound surface



a. Patching cavities in concrete including, but not limited to, tie holes, and structural and equipment support

B. APPLICATION 1. Non-Shrink, Non-Metallic Grout

a. Mix in a mechanical mixer b. Use no more water than necessary to produce flowable grout c. Provide air vents where necessary to eliminate air pockets d. Place in accordance with manufacturer's instructions e. Where exposed to view finish grout edges smooth f. Protect against rapid moisture loss by immediately covering with wet rags and

polyethylene sheets or curing compound g. Wet cure grout for 7 days, minimum h. Maintain the temperature at a minimum of 40 deg F until grout reaches 3000 psi i. After placement of grout, eliminate excessive external vibration

2. Epoxy Grout a. Mix and place in accordance with manufacturer's instructions b. Completely fill all cavities and spaces around dowels and anchors without voids c. Obtain manufacturer's technical assistance as required to insure proper placement

3.12 RIPRAP

A. Do not place riprap over frozen or spongy subgrade surfaces.

B. Place riprap at pipe outlets and in channels as indicated on plans. Top of riprap to match invert of outlet pie and channels.

C. Excavate and prepare subgrade.

D. Place geotextile fabric per plans under all bedding. Place bedding and place riprap on bedding per plans.

E. Material may be machine placed and then arranged as necessary by use of a Gradall with multi-prong grapple device or by hand to minimize voids. Dumping alone is not sufficient to achieve properly placed riprap.


A. Field inspection and testing including a lamp test will be performed for every section of pipe after backfill has occurred 1. Contractor shall furnish suitable assistance to the Engineer 2. A minimum of 75% of a true circle will be required to indicate a properly constructed line 3. Contractor will repair any section not passing the lamp test.

B. Request inspection immediately after placing cover over pipe.

C. Backfilling and testing as required per Section 31 00 00 - Earthwork.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 33 46 00

SUBDRAINAGE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Foundation drainage piping and fittings at new foundations. 2. Geocomposite foundation drainage. 3. Gravel backfill at drains. 4. Geotextile soil filtration fabric. 5. Drainage pipe to drainage structures as indicated on Site Plan. B. Related Requirements: 1. Concrete Work: Division 03 Concrete. 2. Pipe Installation: Division 22 Plumbing. 3. Trenching and Earth Backfilling: Section 31 00 00 Earthwork. 4. Storm Drainage System: Section 33 40 00 Storm Drainage Utilities. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: See Section 01 42 00. 1. ASTM International Standard Specifications: a. D2729-03 - Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings. b. D3034-08 - Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings. c. F1732-96(2005) - Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer and Drain Pipe Containing

Recycled PVC Material. 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Procedures: Submit for review, acceptance and return in accordance with Section 01 33 00. B. Product Data: Submit the following for acceptance. 1. Geotextile soil filtration fabric. 2. Prefabricated geocomposite panels. C. Samples: Submit the following for acceptance. 1. Geotextile soil filtration fabric. 2. Prefabricated geocomposite panels. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General Requirements: Deliver and store materials in accordance with Section 01 60 00. B. Storage and Handling Requirements: Stockpile and store materials so not to bury or damage. 1. Prefabricated Geocomposite Panels: When storage is required outdoors for periods

exceeding one week, cover and protect from sunlight.

DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS Florence Crittenton SUBDRAINAGE OZ Architecture Project No. 113266.00 33 46 00 - 1

100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS July 8, 2014 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PVC DRAINAGE PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Drainage Pipe: ASTM D2729, D3034 or F1732. 1. Unperforated Pipe: Rigid polyvinyl chloride sewer pipe and solvent welded fittings. 2. Perforated Pipe: Perforated rigid polyvinyl chloride leaching system piping and solvent

welded fitting. Provide solid end caps at terminations. 3. Provide perforated next to foundation walls, retaining walls, and under interior slabs;

unperforated elsewhere. 4. Sizes: 4-inch diameter unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 5. Bell and spigot ends, for loose joints. B. Fittings: ASTM D2729, D3034 or F1732. Provide all standard fittings required as well as

transitions from different pipe diameters. 2.02 CLEANOUTS A. Cleanout Pipe and Fittings for Vehicular Traffic Areas: Cast iron soil pipe. Provide each

cleanout with a brass ferrule and cast brass screw jointed plug with socket for wrench. Provide floor cleanouts or wall cleanouts as indicated.

B. Cleanout Pipe and Fittings for Non-Vehicular Traffic Areas: ASTM D3034. PVC pipe with

cleanout threaded plug and threaded pipe hub. 2.03 DRAINAGE FILL A. Free-Draining Backfill Material: 3/4 inch crushed washed rock accepted by Geotechnical

Engineer. 2.04 GEOTEXTILES A. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products for Geotextile Filtration Fabric: 1. TenCate Geosynthetics North America; www.mirafi.com – Mirafi 140N. B. Substitution Requests: In accordance with Section 01 25 00. 2.05 PREFABRICATED GEOCOMPOSITE DRAINAGE PANELS A. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: 1. American Wick Drain Corporation; www.americanwick.com – Amerdrain sheet drain. 2. Carlisle Coatings and Waterproofing, Inc.; www.carlisle-ccw.com – CCW MiraDRAIN

6000/6200. a. Use MiraDRAIN 6200 over membrane waterproofing. 3. Cosella-Dörken Products, Inc.; www.deltadrain.com – Delta-Drain 6000 or 6200. 4. Colbond, Inc.; www.colbond-usa.com – Enkadrain 3611R. 5. Eljen Corporation; www.eljen.com – Eljen No-Aggregate Drainage System. 6. JDR Enterprises, Inc.; www.j-drain.com – J-DRain. 7. Accepted substitute. B. Description: Composite consisting of three-dimensional free-draining plastic core laminated to

a nonwoven filter fabric.


http://www.mirafi.com/

http://www.deltadrain.com/

100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS July 8, 2014 PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 DRAINAGE PIPING INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Keep trenches dry during installation of drainage systems. B. Use fittings at intersections and right angle intersections. C. Make changes in direction of drain lines with 90 degree ell fittings. D. Bedding: Place graded bedding prior to laying of drain pipe. 1. Thickness: As indicated. E. Pipe Laying: 1. Lay drain lines to uniform grades and alignment, with continuous fall in direction of flow

with minimum slope of 1/8 inch per foot. 2. Clean interior of pipe thoroughly before being laid. 3. Rest each section firmly upon the bedding, through entire length. 4. Lay perforated pipe with perforations facing down between 4 o'clock and 8 o'clock. 5. Face bells of pipe sections upgrade. 6. Remove and relay any length that has had its grade or joints disturbed. 7. Wrap all fittings with knitted sock after fittings are completed. 3.02 FOUNDATION DRAINAGE PIPING INSTALLATION A. Install perforated drainage pipe embedded in free-draining gravel at the foundation elevation

and parallel with perimeter foundation walls and retaining walls as indicated. 1. Lay on minimum bedding depth of 3 inches. B. Drainage Gravel Thickness: Cover pipe on all sides as indicated with minimum 6 inches free

draining gravel. 3.03 GEOCOMPOSITE FOUNDATION DRAIN INSTALLATION A. Preparation: 1. Verify the substrate is sound and suitable for geocomposite panel installation. 2. Remove obstacles and protrusions. B. Install using a suitable anchoring system compatible with the substrate. C. Application to Foundation Walls: Install with filter fabric side facing away from the foundation

wall. D. Repair tears or holes in fabric by placing new cloth over damaged areas. E. Install with base of panels open to drain to through drainage gravel to drainage piping.

Provide lateral extensions over footings as required to ensure free drainage path. 3.04 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION A. Cleanout Locations: Provide cleanouts at 75 feet on center and at all major direction changes. B. Unpaved Areas: Set in 12-inch by 12-inch concrete blocks. Comply with Division 3.


100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS July 8, 2014 3.05 OUTLETS

A. Tie into existing drain or storm drainage system as indicated. 3.06 BACKFILLING A. Earthwork and Backfilling, General: Comply with Section 31 00 00. B. After pipe installation has been accepted, place drainage gravel on each side and top of pipe

to dimensions indicated. C. When placing gravel backfill, prevent displacement of or injury to pipe. D. Drainage Gravel: Extend minimum 2 feet laterally from face of foundation wall. Top of

drainage gravel shall be minimum 1-foot below finish grade. E. Filtration Fabric: Wrap foundation drain gravel with filter fabric at bottom, sides and top to

protect gravel from infiltration by finer grained soils. Place geotextile filtration fabric full width of trench and over drainage backfill before other backfill is placed under Section 31 00 00.

3.07 SITE QUALITY CONTROL A. Notify Geotechnical Engineer and allow for inspection of each subdrainage system prior to

backfilling the system. B. Testing: Perform flow test of each subdrainage system under observation of Geotechnical

Engineer prior to backfilling the system.

END OF SECTION
